HANDBOUND

AT THE

UNIVERSITY OF

TORONTO PRESS

T
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR
FOR BEGINNERS,

IN

DEVANAGARl AND ROMAN LETTERS THROUGHOUT,

BY

F.

MAX

MtiLLER,
ETC.

M.A.,

FOREIGN MEMBER OF THE FRENCH

INSTITTTTB,

SECOND EDITION, REVISED AND ACCENTUATED.

LONDON:
LONGMANS, GREEN, AND
1870.

CO.

T.

COMBE,

M.A., E. B.

GARDNER,- AND
TH.E

E.

PICKARD HALL,

PRINTERS TO

UNIVERSITY.

PREFACE
TO THE FIRST EDITION.
present grammar, which is chiefly intended for beginners, is believed to contain all the information that a student of Sanskrit
J.

HE

two or three years of his reading. Rules referring to the language of the Vedas have been entirely
is

likely to

want during the

it is

first

excluded, for

not desirable that the difficulties of that ancient

dialect should be approached by any one who has not fully mastered the grammar of the ordinary Sanskrit such as it was fixed by Panini

and

All allusions to cognate forms in Greek, Latin, or Gothic, have likewise been suppressed, because, however interhis successors.

esting and useful to the advanced student, they are apt to deprive the beginner of that clear and firm grasp of the grammatical system peculiar to the language of ancient India, which alone can form a
solid foundation for the

study both of Sanskrit and of Comparative

Philology.

have kept in view while composing this grammar, have been clearness and correctness. With regard to clearness, my chief model has been the grammar of Bopp
principal objects
I
;

The two

which

with regard to correctness, the grammar of Colebrooke. If I may hope, without presumption, to have simplified a few of the intricacies
of Sanskrit

grammar which were but

partially cleared

up by Bopp,
have

Benfey, Flecchia, and

others, I can hardly flatter myself to

reached, with regard to correctness, the high standard of Colebrooke's great, though unfinished work. I can only say in self-defence, that it
is far

be correct on every minute point, if one endeavours to re-arrange, as I have done, the materials collected by Panini, and to adapt them to the grammatical system current in Europe,

more

difficult to

than

one follows so closely as Colebrooke, the system of native grammarians, and adopts nearly the whole of their technical termiif

nology.
is,

in

The grammatical system elaborated by native grammarians itself, most perfect; and those who have tested PninTs work,
admit that there
is

will readily

no grammar in any language that

a 2

iv

PEEFACE TO THE
eight

could vie with the wonderful mechanism of his

books of

grammatical rules. But unrivalled as that system is, it is not suited to the wants of English students, least of all to the wants

While availing myself therefore of the materials of beginners. collected in the grammar of P&nini and in later works, such as the

Prakriy-Kaumudi, the Siddhnta-Kaumudi, the Sarasvati Prakriya, and the Madhaviya-dhatu-vritti, I have abstained, as much as possible, from introducing any more of the peculiar system and of
the terminology of Indian grammarians* than has already found admittance into our Sanskrit grammars nay, I have frequently rejected the grammatical observations supplied ready to hand
;

in their works, in order not to

overwhelm the memory of the student with too many rules and too many exceptions. Whether I have always been successful in drawing a line between what
in Sanskrit

is essential

to the

judgment of engaged in the practical teaching of a language the students of which may be counted no longer by tens, but by hundreds f. I only wish it to be understood that where I have left out rules
*

grammar and what is not, I must leave those who enjoy the good fortune of being

The few

alterations that I have

facilitating the

made

in the usual terminology learner.

have been made

of

solely with a

view of

work of the

Thus instead

numbering

the ten classes of verbs, I have called each by its first verb. This relieves the memory of much unnecessary trouble, as the very name indicates the character of each class ;

and though the names may

at first sound somewhat uncouth, they are after all the only names recognized by native grammarians. Knowing from my experience as an examiner, how difficult it is to remember the merely numerical distinction between the first, second,

or third preterites, or the

first

and second futures, I have kept as much as possible to the

terminology with which

corresponding to the Greek Imperfect, Imperfect; that corresponding to the Perfect, Reduplicated Perfect; that corresponding to the Aorist, Aorist; and the mood corresponding to the Optative, The names of Periphrastic Perfect and Periphrastic Future tell their own Optative.
story; and
if

classical scholars are familiar, calling the tense

Second Aorists,
classical scholar

I have retained the merely numerical distinction between the First and it was because this distinction seemed to be more intelligible to a

than the six or seven forms of the so-called multiform Preterite.

If

it

were possible to make a change in the established grammatical nomenclature, I should much prefer to call the First the Second, and the Second the First Aorist; the former
being a secondary and compound, the latter a primary and simple tense. But First and Second Aorists have become almost proper names, and will not easily yield their
place to mere argument. t In the University of Leipzig alone, as many as fifty pupils attend every year the classes of Professor Brockhaus in order to acquire a knowledge of the elements of Sanskrit, previous to the study of Comparative Philology under Professor Curtius.

FIRST EDITION.
or

exceptions, contained in other grammars, whether native or European, I have done so after mature consideration, deliberately preferring the less complete to the more complete, but, at the same

time, more bewildering statement of the anomalies of the Sanskrit Thus, to mention one or two cases, when giving the language.
rules on the
left

employment of the

suffixes vat

and mat

187), I

have

out the rule that bases ending in m, though the

be preceded

by other vowels than a, always take vat instead of mat. I did so partly because there are very few bases ending in m, partly because, if a word like kim-vdn should occur, it would be easy to discover
here too v was preferred to m, viz. in order to avoid the clashing of two m's. Again, when giving the rules on the formation of denominatives ( 495), I passed over, for very much

the reason

why

the same reason, the prohibition given in Pan. m. i, 8, 3, viz. that bases ending in are not allowed to form denominatives. It is

true,

no doubt, that the omission of such rules or exceptions may be said to involve an actual misrepresentation, and that a pupil

might be misled to form such words as kim-mdn and kim-yati. But this cannot be avoided in an elementary grammar and
;

the student

who

is

likely to

come

in contact with such recon-

dite forms, will

no doubt be

sufficiently

advanced to be able to

consult for himself the rules of Panini and the explanations of his

commentators.

My own

fear is that, in writing an elementary

grammar,

have

erred rather in giving too much than in giving too little. I have therefore in the table of contents marked with an asterisk all

such rules as

may be
I

safely left out in a first course of Sanskrit

grammar*, and

have in different places informed the reader whether certain portions might be passed over quickly, or should
be carefully committed to memory. Here and there, as for instance in 103, a few extracts are introduced from Panini, simply in
order to give the student a foretaste of what he may expect in the elaborate works of native grammarians, while lists of verbs
like those contained

in

332 or

462 are given, as everybody

will see, for the sake of reference only.

The somewhat
#,

elaborate

treatment of the nominal bases in

and

from

220 to

226,

* In the second edition all these paragraphs are printed in smaller type.

vi

PEEFACE TO THE

became necessary, partly because in no grammar had the different paradigms of this class been correctly given, partly because it

was impossible to bring out clearly the principle on which the peculiarities and apparent irregularities of these nouns are based
without entering fully into the systematic arrangement of native grammarians. Of portions like this I will not say indeed,
TIS n$,\\ov $ fiiftrjo-eTai,

but I feel that I

that those

sfts^ ^ta:

and

know

may say, *t% ^ra who will take the

I

trouble to

examine the same mass of evidence which

have weighed and

examined, will be the most lenient in their judgment, if hereafter they should succeed better than I have done, in unravelling the
argumentations of native scholars *. But while acknowledging my obligations to the great grammarians of India, it would be ungrateful were I not to
intricate

acknowledge as fully the assistance which I have derived from the works of European scholars. My first acquaintance with the
elements of Sanskrit was gained from Bopp's grammar. Those only who know the works of his predecessors, of Colebrooke,
Carey, Wilkins, and Forster, can appreciate the advance made by Bopp in explaining the difficulties, and in lighting up, if I

may

the dark lanes and alleys of the Sanskrit language. I doubt whether Sanskrit scholarship would have flourished as

say

so,

students had been obliged to learn their Forster or Colebrooke, and I believe that to Bopp's
it has, if
is

grammar from little grammar

due a great portion of that success which has attended the study

of Sanskrit literature in

Germany

Colebrooke, Carey, Wilkins,

and Forster worked independently of each other. Each derived his information from native teachers and from native grammars.

Among
to

these four scholars, Wilkins seems to have been the

first first

compose a Sanskrit grammar, for he informs us that the

printed sheet of his

work

w^as

destroyed by

fire

in

1795.

The

To

those

who have

tations of Sanskrit commentators,

the same faith in the accurate and never swerving argumenit may be a saving of time to be informed that in

the

new and very useful

edition of the

Siddhanta-Kaumudi by

S'ri

Taranatha-tarkava-

chaspati there are two misprints which hopelessly disturb the order of the rules on the proper declension of nouns in i and tt. On page 136, 1. 7, read ^JNr^ instead of ^sffcl^ this is corrected in the Corrigenda, and the right reading is found in the old edition.

On

the

same page,

1.

13, insert

f after fa^IT, or join

fanitrfl^tasnrK

FIRST EDITION.

vii

whole grammar, however, was not published till 1808. In the mean time Forster had finished his grammar, and had actually delivered his MS. to the Council of the College of Fort William
in 1804.

was not published Colebrooke's grammar was published

it

But

part of in 1805, and therefore stands

till

1810.

The

first

Unfortunately it was not because the grammars of Forster and Carey were then finished, in course of publication, and would, as Colebrooke imagined, supply the deficient part of his own. Carey's grammar was published in
first

in point of time of publication.

1806.

Among

making the
scholars,

these four publications, which as first attempts at ancient language of India accessible to European

deserve

the
It
is

facile princeps.

highest credit, Colebrooke's grammar is derived at first hand from the best native

grammars, and evinces a familiarity with the most intricate problems of Hindu grammarians such as few scholars have acquired
after him.

No

one can understand and appreciate the merits of this

previously acquired a knowledge of the grammatical system of Pnmi, and it is a great loss to Sanskrit scholarship that so valuable a work should have remained unfinished.
I

grammar who has not

owe most,

indeed, to Colebrooke and Bopp, but I have derived

grammars also. There are some portions of Wilson's grammar which show that he consulted native grammarians, and the fact that he possessed the remaining portion

many

useful hints from other

of Colebrooke's * MS., gives to his list of verbs, with the exception of the Baft class, which was published by Colebrooke, a peculiar interest. Professor Benfey in his large grammar performed a most
useful task in

working up independently the materials supplied by Panini and Bhattojidlkshita ; and his smaller grammars too, published both in German and in English, have rendered good service
of Boiler in

to the cause of

sound scholarship. There are besides, the grammars German, of Oppert in French, of Westergaard in Danish,

of Flecchia in Italian, each supplying something that could not be found elsewhere, and containing suggestions, many of which have

proved useful to the writer of the present grammar. But while thus rendering full justice to the honest labours of my predecessors, I am bound to say, at the same time, that with
* See Wilson's Sanscrit

and English Dictionary,

first

edition, preface, p. xlv.

viii

PEEFACE TO THE

regard to doubtful or difficult forms, of which there are many in the grammar of the Sanskrit language, not one of them can be appealed to as an ultimate authority. Every grammar contains,
as
is

well known, a

number of forms which occur but

It is necessary,

rarely, if ever,

in the literary language.

however, for the sake of

;

systematic completeness, to give these forms

and

if

they are to be

given at all, they must be given on competent authority. Now it might be supposed that a mere reference to any of the numerous

grammars already published would be sufficient for this purpose, and that the lists of irregular or unusual forms might safely be But this is by no means the case. Even copied from their pages. with regard to regular forms, whoever should trust implicitly in the
correctness of any of the grammars, hitherto published, would never be certain of having the right form. I do not say this lightly, or without being able to produce proofs. When I began to revise my

manuscript grammar which I had composed for my own use many years ago, and when on points on which I felt doubtful, I consulted other grammars, I soon discovered either that, with a strange kind of sequacity, they all repeated the same mistake, or that they

varied widely from each other, without assigning any reason or I need not say that the grammars which we possess authority. differ very much in the degree of their trustworthiness ; but with
the exception of the first volume of Colebrooke and of Professor Benfey's larger Sanskrit grammar, it would be impossible to appeal

any of my predecessors as an authority on doubtful points. Forster and Carey, who evidently depend almost entirely on materials supplied to them by native assistants, give frequently
to

forms with perfect accuracy, while they go wildly wrong immediately after, without, it would seem, any power of The frequent inaccuracies in the controlling their authorities.
the most
difficult

grammars of Wilkins and Wilson have been pointed out by and however useful these works may have been for others
;

practical purposes, they

were never intended as authorities on

contested points of Sanskrit grammar. Nothing remained in fact, in order to arrive at any satisfactory result, but to collate the whole of my grammar, with regard not

the regular forms, with Pftnini only to the irregular but likewise to and other native grammarians, and to supply for each doubtful case,

FIRST EDITION.
and
for rules that

U
my

might seem to

differ

from those of any of

predecessors, a reference to Pnirii or to other native authorities. This I have done, and in so doing I had to re -write nearly the whole of my grammar but though the time and trouble expended
;

on this work have been considerable, I believe that they have not been bestowed in vain. I only regret that I did not give these
authoritative references throughout the whole of my work*, because, even where there cannot be any difference of opinion, some of my

readers

might thus have been saved the time and trouble of looking through Panini to find the Sutras that bear on every form of the Sanskrit language.
have adopted, I believe that on many points a more settled and authoritative character has been imparted to the grammar of Sanskrit than it possessed before but I do by

By

this process

which

no means pretend to have arrived on all points at a clear and definite view of the meaning of Panini and his successors. The
grammatical system of Hindu grammarians is so peculiar, that rules which we should group together, are scattered about in different
parts of their manuals.

We may
first

and the exceptions in the

have the general rule in the last, book, and even then we are by no

means

certain that exceptions to these exceptions

else.

may
There

not occur
is

somewhere

I shall give

but one instance.

a root

*wijdgri, which forms its Aorist by adding ^q isham, f: Here the simplest rule would be that final ^ ri before
rule

th, fi^ it.

isham

becomes ^ r (Pan. vi. i, which requires that

(Pan. vii.
3, 84).

77).
final

This, however,

is

prevented by another
^t isham

ri should take

Guna before

now

This would give us 'smmfts ajdgar-isham. But comes another general rule (Pan. vii. 2, i) which prescribes
final

Vriddhi of

vowels before

isham,

i.e.

vuii(XM ajdgdrisham.

Against this change,

however, a

new

rule is cited (Pan. vn. 3, 85),

and this secures

a special exception from Vriddhi, and As soon as the base has been leaves its base again as Wf^jdgar. under a new rule (Pan. vn. 2, 3), and changed to IJPTJ jdgar, it falls
for

"*W[jdgri

is

forced to take Vriddhi, until this rule

2, 4,

again nullified by Pan. vn. which does not allow Vriddhi in an Aorist that takes intermeis

diate 5 i, like ^MinfiH ajdgarisham.

*

There

is

an exception, however,

They have been given

in the second edition.

x
to,

PEEFACE TO THE
this rule also, for bases

beginning and ending with a consonant, may optionally take Vriddhi (Pan. vn. 2, 7). This option is afterwards restricted, and roots with short ^r a, beginning

with short

^r a,

with a consonant and ending in ^r, like vtm^jagar, have no option However, left, but are restricted afresh to Vriddhi (Pan. vn. 2, 2). even this is not yet the final result. Our base vtin^jdgar is after
all

not to take Vriddhi, and hence a

new

special rule (P&n.

vn.

2, 5)

settles the point by granting to *rnr jdgri a special exception from No wonder that these Vriddhi, and thereby establishing its Guna.

manifold changes and chances in the formation of the First Aorist of in 7! jdgri should have inspired a grammarian, who celebrates them
in the following couplet
:

rr
"

Guna, Vriddhi, Guna, Vriddhi, prohibition, option, again Vriddhi and then exception, these, with the change of ri into a semivowel
Another
difficulty consists in the

in the first instance, are the nine results."

want of

critical

accuracy in

the editions which

we

the Laghu-Kaumudi, me to wish to detract from the merits of native editors, like

possess of Panini, the Siddhanta-Kaumudi, Far be it from the Sarasvati, and Vopadeva.

Dharanldhara, Kasinatha,
Professor Boehtlingk,

Taranatha,

still

less

from

those

of

published of us were able to read a single line of thirty years ago, Panini. But during those thirty years considerable progress has been made in unravelling the mysteries of the grammatical literature

who

his text

and notes nearly

when few

of Sayana to the Rig-veda has shown us how practically to apply the rules of Panini ; and the translation of the Laghu-Kaumudi by the late Dr. Ballantyne has enabled even of India.

The commentary

beginners to find their way through the labyrinth of native grammar. The time has come, I believe, for new and critical editions of Panini

and

his

commentators.

few instances may

suffice to

show the

insecurity of our ordinary editions. The commentary to Pan. vn. 2,42, as well as the Sarasvati n. 25, i, gives the Benedictive Atmanepada ^Mte varishishta and ^rtfrrte starisMshta ; yet a reference to Pan. vil.

39 and 40, shows that these forms are impossible. Again, if Panini (vm.3,92) is right and how could the Infallible be wrong?
2,

FIKST EDITION.
in using ^ii'iifrfa
it

xi in the last syllable,

agragdmini with a dental n

is

clear that

he extends the prohibition given in

vm.

4,

34,

with regard to Upasargas, to other compounds. It is useless to inquire whether in doing so he was right or wrong, for it is an article of faith with every Hindu grammarian that whatever word is used

by Panini

in his Sutras, is eo ipso correct.

Otherwise, the rules

affecting compounds with Upasargas are by no means identical with those that affect ordinary compounds and though it may be right to
;

argue a fortiori from HJiifaPn pragdmini to tujinrnfn agragdmini, it would not be right to argue from mij^M agraydna to inrR praydna, this being necessarily TRTCT praydna. But assuming ^UMifHfH agra-

gdmini

to be correct, it

is

quite clear that the compounds

gfXchmiflu

^A

svargakdminau, ymtfmtft vrishagdminau, harikdmdni, and ^(XH*)<ii harikdmena, given in the commentary to vm. 4, 13, are all wrong, though most of them occur not only in the printed editions

Siddhnta-Kaumudi, but may be traced back to the MSS. of the Prakriy4-Kaumudi, the source, though by no means the model, of the Siddhanta-Kaumudi. I was glad to learn from

of Panini and the

my

friend Professor Goldstticker,

KMk4 -Vritti,

and

whom

preparing an edition of the I consulted on these forms, that the MSS.

is

who

of Vamana which he possesses, carefully avoid these faulty examples to Pan. vm. 4, 13.

After these explanations I need hardly add that I am not so sanguine as to suppose that I could have escaped scot free where so many

men of superior knowledge and talent have

failed to

do

so.

All I can

say is, that I shall be truly thankful to any scholar who will take the trouble to point out any mistakes into which I may have fallen ;

and I hope that I

shall

never so far forget the regard due to truth

as to attempt to represent simple corrections, touching the declension of nouns or the conjugation of verbs, as matters of opinion, or so far

lower the character of true scholarship as to appeal, on such matters, from the verdict of the few to the opinion of the many.

Hearing from my friend Professor Btihler that he had finished a Sanskrit Syntax, based on the works of Patnini and other native grammarians, which will soon be published, I gladly omitted that
portion of

means of

grammar. The rules on the derivation of nouns, by Krit, Unadi, and Taddhita suffixes, do not properly belong

my

to the sphere of an elementary

grammar.

If time and health permit,

b2

xii

PEEFACE TO THE FIEST EDITION.

hereafter, as a separate treatise, the chapter of

hope to publish

the Prakriya-Kaumudi bearing on this subject. In the list of verbs which I have given as an Appendix, pp. 244-285, I have chiefly followed the Prakriya-Kaumudi and

the Sarasvati.

These grammars do not conjugate every verb that occurs in the Dhatupatha, but those only that serve to illustrate
certain grammatical rules.

Kaumudi,

adopt, like the Siddhantathe order of the verbs as given in Panini's Dhatupatha,

Nor do they

but they group the verbs of each

class according to their voices, those that take the terminations of the Parasmaitreating together pada, those that take the terminations of the Atmanepada, and,
lastly,

those that admit of both voices.

In each of these subdi-

visions, again, the single verbs are so

certain

grammatical

rules.

In

arranged as best to illustrate making a new selection among

the verbs selected by Eamachandra and Anubhutisvarupacharya, I have given a preference to those which occur more frequently in Sanskrit literature, and to those which illustrate some points
of peculiar interest to the student. In this manner I it will not hope that the Appendix will serve two purposes only help the student, when doubtful as to the exact forms
of

grammar

of certain verbs, but

exercise
to

it

will likewise serve as a useful

practical

taking each verb in turn, will try to account for the exact forms of its persons, moods, and tenses by a
those who,
reference to the rules of this grammar. In some cases references have been added to guide the student, in others he has to find by

himself the proper warranty for each particular form. My kind friends Professor Cowell and Professor Kielhorn have
revised some of the proof-sheets of

my

grammar,

for

which

beg

to

express to

them my

sincere thanks.

F.

MAX MULLEE.

PARIS,
5th April, 1866.

|:

PREFACE

TO THE SECOND EDITION.

JL

HE principal alterations in the new edition of my Sanskrit grammar

number of
additional references to Panini, in
all

consist in a

cases

where an appeal to
to

his authority

the introduction of the marks

likely to be useful, and in of the accent. I have also been able

seemed

remove a number of mistakes and misprints which, in spite of all the care I had taken, had been overlooked in the first edition. Most
of these I had corrected in the

German

translation of

my

grammar,
corrected.

published at Leipzig in 1868; some I feel most grateful to several of

more have now been

all

my

reviewers for having pointed

to Pandit Rajaramasastri, out these oversights, whose list of notes and queries to my grammar has been of the It seems almost hopeless for a European greatest value to me.

and most of

scholar to acquire

that familiarity with the intricate system of

still

Panini which the Pandits of the old school in India

possess

and although some of their refinements in the interpretation of Panini's rules may seem too subtle, yet there can be no doubt that
these living guides are invaluable to us in exploring the gigantic labyrinth of ancient Sanskrit grammar.

however, one difficulty which we have to contend with, and which does not exist for them. They keep true throughout to one system, the system of Panini we have to transfer the facts of

There

is,

that system into our own system of grammar. What accidents are likely to happen during this process I shall try to illustrate by one instance. E^j^r4mas4strl objects to the form Tpxpunsu as the
locative plural of

gm^ pumdn. From his point of view, he is perfectly

right in his objection, for according to P&nini the locative plural has Anusvara, TJ*J pumsu. But in our own Sanskrit grammars we first

have a general rule that

changed to ^ sh after any vowel 100); except *r and ^r #, in spite of intervening Anusvara (see and it has even been maintained that there is some kind of

^s

is

physiological reason for such a change.

If then, after having laid

xiv

PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.

this rule,

down

we

matical blunder ;
Colebrooke's, in

yet write ^g pumsu, we simply commit a gramand I believe there is no Sanskrit grammar, except

which that blunder has not been committed.

I wrote
it

In

order to avoid
dental

it,

punsu, thus, by the retention of the

the

^5
;

grammatically and physically possible for It may be objected that on the same to remain unchanged.
n,

making

ground I ought to have written &c. but in these cases the ^s is

liable to
3, 59).

Instr. iprr

radical,

punsd, Gen. ipr: punsah, and would therefore not be

be changed into * sh after a vowel and Anusvara (Pan. vin. Professor Weber had evidently overlooked these simple

rules, or

he would have been

less

forward in blaming Dr. Keller

for

punsu, instead of having followed my example in writing 33 pumsu. In Panini's grammar (as may be seen from my note appended to TOO) the rule on the change of ^s into ^ sh is so carefully

pumsu, although the su of the loc. plur. is preceded by an Anusvara. I have now, by *j making in my second edition the same reservation in the general rule, been able to conform to P&nini's authority, and have written
it

worded that

just excludes the case of

g*j

TJ*J

pumsu, instead of ip punsu, though even thus the fact remains that if the dot is really meant for Anusv&ra, and if the g su is the
termination of the locative plural, the ^ s would be sounded as ^ sh, according to the general tendency of the ancient Sanskrit
pronunciation. I have mentioned this one instance in order to
difficulties

show the peculiar

which the writer of a Sanskrit grammar has to contend

with in trying to combine the technical rules of P&nini with the

more
I

rational principles of

convince

my

readers,

and I hope it may and perhaps even Professor Weber, that where
European grammar
;

have deviated from the ordinary rules of our European grammars,

or where I seem to have placed myself at variance with some of the native authorities, I have not done so without having carefully

weighed the advantages of the one against those of the other

system.
F.

MAX MULLER.

PARKS END, OXFORD,

August, 1870.

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PAGE

CHAPTER
i.
2.

I.

THE ALPHABET.
.

The Devanagari letters The Devandgari alphabet

Direction of Sanskrit alphabet 3. How to write the letters

.

4.

Sounds represented by the Devandgari alphabet

.

5.
6. 7.
8.

Number
The

of letters
.

letter It

Jihvamuliya and Upadhma"niya Signs of nasals and their substitute

9.

The three

nasal semivowels

10. Consonants without correspond-

ing nasals
1 1.

....
/,

Auusvara before
of letters

sh, s,
.

h
.

% 1 2. Names
1

3.

Vowel

signs, initial, medial,

final

14. 15.
1 6.

Consonants followed by vowels

Virama

..... .....

and

Combination of consonants

17.
1 8.

19^

20.

The sign for r The Virama used as a stop-gap The signs for a pause The Avagraha. List of compound consonants
.

Numerical figures 22. Rules of pronunciation

21.

CHAPTER

II.

RULES OF SANDHI.
.

23. Object and use of Sandhi 24. Distinction between External and Internal Sandhi
25.

Classification

of vowels,
.

long,
.

short, protracted

XVI

TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAGE
50. Particles unaffected

* %

by Sandhi

51. Protracted vowels unaffected

by

Sandhi
52. Table

showing the combination

.

of final with initial vowels

53. Combination
of final

and

initial

consonants
54.

55.

The eleven final consonants No word ends in two consonants

.

56

Classification of consonants, ac-

cording to their place

5 7. Classification of consonants, ac-

cording to their quality,

i.

e.
.

contact, approach, opening

Surd and sonant consonants con59. Aspirated and unaspirated

58.
.

sonants
60.

Changes of

place,

61

of quality Changes of place affect Dentals,

....
t

and changes

Anusvara, and Visarga

62. Final
t

before Palatals ch, chh,

.

s j, jh, n,

63. Final 64. Final

n
t

before j jh, n, s . before t, th, d, dh,

(not sh)
65. Final

before

d,

dh,

(not sh)
.

66. Changes of quality 67. Final k, t, t, p before nasals

%
r

68. Final k,

t,

t,

j>

before

maya
t, t,

or

mdtra
69. Initial
70. Final 71. Final 72. Final 73. Final
t

after final k,
I

before
before

n, n,

n after a short vowel

before the firsts and

seconds
74. Final n

....
s,

and n before

sh, s

75. Final

n
t

76. Final
77. 78.

before s or s (not sh) before s

final

Anusvara and
nants

Mm pausd, and before conso.

79. Final

m before hn, hm, hy, hi, hv

before kri, samskri
.

50.
51.
8.2.

Sam Sam

before rdj, samrdj Visarga and final s or r

TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAGE

xvu
PAOB

*H2.

Final

e, ai,

ot

au changed
.

to

38.

Anusvara before

/,

ay, dy, av, dv; roots ending in diphthongs

.

139.
1

N after ch or j changed into

CJJi changed to chchh
.

sh,

s,

ft
.

60 60

.53
53
t

40.

US- Final consonants, only eleven 114. Two consonants at the end of
a word impossible 115- Sonant and surd initials require sonant and surd finals
. .

141.

Chh before n or m changed to

60 60

142. Final

y and v dropt

before

.54
54

consonants, except y . 143. Final iv, ir, ur lengthened followed by consonants

144.

.60
if
.

60

116. Final aspirates lose their aspiration

.
. .

.55
55

Final ir and ur lengthened ending a word

. .

if

.60
.

117. Final gh, dh, dh, bh, followed

145. Radical is or us at the end of

by t, th, lose their aspiration and change t, th into dh

.

nominal bases lengthened

146. 147. Doubling of consonants 148. Explanation of some
tical

60
61

118. Final gh, dh, dh, bh, followed

by

gramma.

dhv, bh, and

s,

or

final, lose

terms used by native

.

their aspiration

and throw it
.

grammarians
55

.61
64

back on

initial g, d, d, b

* * * *
*

119- Final ch,j,jh changed to k or g 120. Final sh changed to t

.

56
56

CHAPTEK
149.
1

III.

DECLENSION.
.

121, Final sh before s changed to k 122. Final sh before t, th, changes

56

Gender, number, and case Bases ending in consonants ; 50. II. bases ending in vowels
I.

64

them

to

t,

th

.56
.56
.

151.

I.

123. Final sh changed to

before
.

Bases ending in consonants ; no bases in n, n, y .

. .

other consonants

152. Terminations
153.
I. i.

.64 .64
.65
65 66

124. Final j in certain roots treated

likesA

57
154.

Unchangeable and Changeable bases

. .

I.

2.

.* 125. Final
'

s,

chh, ksh,
.
.

s'ch

treated
.

1. 1. Unchangeable bases; sugan

like sh

* * * *

126. Final / changed to k . 127. Final h before s treated like gh

128. Final h treated like

.57 .57
57 57

155. Sarvasak 156.

Chitralikh

....
. . .

.66
.67 .67

157. Harit, agmmath,suhrid,budh,

ghordh.
.

129. Final h optionally treated like gh or dh

.

158.

gup, kakubh Jalamuch

.

*
.

.58
58

159.

* *
*

I30- Final h of nah treated like dh I3 1 Final s changed into t in cer-

Special bases in ch; brunch, prdnch, vrtich

. .

60.

Prdchh

tain nominal bases

.58

132- Final s before s changed into t in verbal bases ; s dropt before dhi; optionally changed

161. Ruj, 'Arj 162. Bases in

.68 .68 .68

j,

changeable to d;
68

samrdj, vibhrdj, devej,visvasrij,parivrdj, visvardj, bhrijj

into

.58
.

163. Irregular nouns inj; khanj,

*
* * *

133- Final

or

m before

sibilants

avaydj
59 59 59

.69

changed to Anusvara 134. ^unchanged before semi vowels

135-

164. Bases in r ; gir, vdr,pur, dvdr, . far .

. .

136'37-

M unchanged before M changed n

to
.

.70
71

y, r, I
.

165. Bases ins; A. bases formed by

as, is, us; sumanas, Jaras andjard 167. Nirjaras and nirjara C
1

.59
59

sujyotis
.

The

five

nasals

abbreviated

66.

.72
.

into the Anusvara dot

73

XV111

TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAGE

*i68.

Anehas, purudamsas

169.

Usanas
Bases in

....
.

s ; B. bases

ending in

radical s ; pindagras, supis,

sutus

f
. .

Pipathis

* * %

172- Asis, sajus ; list of bases in s 173174DJivas, sras

.

Bases ending in
1. 2.

s,

sh, chh, ksh, h

Dis, dris, spris

Nas
Vis

3.

4.

Dhrish

5.
6.

Dvish

Prdchh
Taksh

7.

8. X/ihf guli
g.

10.
11.

Duh, ushnih Druh, muh, snih, snuh

.

Nah

* *

175-

Turdsdh

I7 6

*I77- Ukthasds * 178. Prasdm

179I. 2.

Nouns with changeable

;

bases

A. nouns with two

bases, adat
1

80.

Prdch

181. B.

Nouns with
.

three
.
.

bases,

pratyach

182. Bases in at and ant; adat

The nasal

in the

nom. and

ace.

dual of neuters, and in the

feminine base

184-

The

nasal in participles of re.

-

duplicated verbs

185. Brihat, prishat

186.

Mahat

187. Bases in mat and vat

% * *

188. Bhavat,

Your Honour
. . .

189- Arvat and arvan

190. Kiyat 191. Bases in an,
.

man, van; rdjan,

. .

ndman
192.

Brahman, divan
an, van,

193- Feminines of bases of nouns in

man

TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAGE

xix

#227. Compounds
and
228. Strt

ending in poly

syllabic feminine bases in i

d, bahuJreyast
. .

*
*

229. Atistrl 230. Bases in i and M, masc. fern. neut. 109

. . .

231. Kati 232. Sakhi

233.

Pad

..... .....
.

234. Akshi, asthi, dadhi, sakthi

235. Bases in

ri,

masc.
.

fern, neut.,
.
.

naptri, pitri

^ *

236. Kroshfu
237.

Nri
2.

.....
.
.

238. II.

Bases ending in a and

.

d,
.

kdntah, td, tarn 239. Bases in d, masc. and

fern.,
.
.

visvapd

240. Ifdhd

.....
. .

CHAPTER

IV.

ADJECTIVES.
.

241. Declension of adjectives

242. Formation of feminine base 243. Priyah,

fern,

priyd
t

244. Pdchakah, pdchikd

245. Feminines formed by
.247. Irregular feminines

246. Exceptional feminines in

.

248. Formation of feminine substantives

. . .

249. Degrees of comparison

250.

Tara and tama, how added

251. lyas and ishtha,

how added
. .

252. Exceptional comparatives and

superlatives
.

CHAPTER

V.

NUMERALS.

253. Cardinals and declension of

cardinals, eka

254.

Dvi

.....
. . .

255. Tri,

tisri

256. Chatur, chatasri

257. Panchan, shash, ashtan 258. Construction of cardinals

259. Ordinals 260. Numerical adverbs and other

derivatives
.

....

XX

TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAGE
296.
I.

PAGE
327. Strong
tions

First division;

Bhu, Tud,
.

and

weak termina.
.

Div, Chur classes

297.
II.

.141
328.

Second

division,
.
.

and sub.

Weakening
thongs,

of base

160 160

divisions

.142
.

329. Bases ending in d and diph-

298. II a. Su, Tan, Kri classes 299. 116. Ad, Hu, Rudh classes

143 143

how changed
i, i, ri,
.

.161
.161
i.

330. Bases ending in

u, d, ri,
.

CHAPTEK
300. 301.

IX.

AUGMENT, REDUPLICAreduplication
. .
.

how changed

TION,

AND TERMINATIONS.
145 145

CHAPTER
331.

XI.
it

INTERMEDIATE

Augment and Augment a

.

When
when when

must be omitted,

it
it

may

be omitted,
.

302. Keduplication in the perfect, .145 and in the Hu verbs

.

must be inserted must be omitted

162 163

#332.

List of verbs in which the inter-

303. General rules of reduplication

304. Aspirated 305. Guttural initials

306. Double
tenuis
initials

initials

^46 .146 .146 .146

.146

mediate

^333. Verbs in which the intermediate i must be omitted in

certain tenses
.

.165

307. Initial sibilant followed

. . .

by a

334- Special rules for the redupli-

308.

The vowel

of the reduplicative
.

^335.

syllable is short

.146
.

.167 cated perfect Special rules for the 2nd pers. 167 sing. Par. of the red. perf.
. . .

309. Medial e and ai are redupli146 cated by i, o and au by u Final e, ai, o are reduplicated 310.

#336. Table showing when

diate
i

interme.

must be omitted
i
.

168

by a
311.

146
reduplication
.

#337. Optional insertion of #338. Necessary insertion of

to

.168
.

170
171 171

Irregular

by
.

339. The intermediate i never liable

.147 Samprasarana 147 Short initial a 312. 313. Initial a followed by two con.
. .

Guna

....
. . .
.

340. Insertion of long t 3t 341. Optional insertion of long i 342. Periphrastic perfect

.171 .172

sonants
314. Initial ri

315. Short initial

and u

.148 .148 .148

.

#343.

Periphrastic perfect of inten172 sives and desideratives

* % %

316. Special rules of reduplication 317. Nij, vij, vish

.
.

148

Paradigms of the reduplicated

perfect
.

318. 319.

Mdjhd
Han,

....
. . .

.148
148
148

.172

hi,ji, chi

CHAPTER
344.

XII.

320. Terminations 321. Terminations of

.149
se-

STRENGTHENING AND WEAKENING.

of terminations,

first
.

and
.

Two

classes

cond divisions

322. Regular conjugation

.149 .150
#345-

strengthening or weakening .175 a verbal base

.
.

CHAPTER

X.

GENERAL TENSES.
.

Special forms of strengthening and weakening certain bases 177

323. General or unmodified tenses

159

324. Reduplicated perfect

.159

CHAPTER
347.

XIII.

AORIST.
. .

325. Verbs which

may form

the re.

duplicated perfect

.159
.

346. First and second aorist Four forms of the first aorist
first

179 179

326.

The

periphrastic perfect

159

348. Rules for the

form

.180

TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAGE

xxi

*349-

Rules for desideratives, intensives,

<fec.

350- Rules for the second form Terminations beginning with

at

or ath
.

352. Roots in d and diphthongs

* * *

353- Mi, mi,

354355-

di, li

*35<5.
357-

Han Gam Yam

..... .....
li
.
.

Rules for the third form

mi,

*358. Mi,

359-

Yam, ram, nam

360. Rules for the fourth form

* *

361. Stish

362. Duh, dih,

lih,

Paradigms 363- Second aorist 364- Roots ending in

....
guh
d,
e, i,

ri; dris 187

.

365- Roots with penultimate nasal

187

366. Irregular forms *3<>7- Verbs which take the second

aorist

....
.

Verbs which take the second

aorist in the Par. only

369- The Tan verbs 370. Reduplicated second aorist

37i- Sri, dru, sru, kam; 6vi, 372. Shortening of bases ending in
.

dhe

ay

....

373- Bases that cannot be shortened 374- Compensation between base

and reduplicative

syllable

375- Vowels of reduplicative syllable 190

376. Verbs beginning and ending with double consonants

ri,

*377- Verbs with penultimate

ri

378. Verbs beginning with vowels

*379380.

Irregular reduplicated aorist

Paradigm

....
.
.

When

the different forms of

the aorists are used

CHAPTER

XIV. FUTURE, CONDITIONAL, PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE, AND BENEDICTIVE.

381. Future
382. Changes of the base

XX11

TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAGE
PAGE

416. Participle of reduplicated perfect

Parasmaipada
with
i

.204
.

^447. Gerund of causatives #448. Ghu verbs, md, sthd,

hd,
so,

211
gd, pd,

#417.

Participle of reduplicated perfect

. . .

take final d
.

211
*

205

418. Participle of reduplicated per-

419. 420.

421.

422.

.205 Atmanepada Participle present Atmanepada 205 Participle future Atmanepada 206 Participle present and future 206 passive Past participle passive and
fect
.

% 449. % 450. * 451. % 452.

Verbs ending in nasals Verbs ending in ri

Ve,jyd,vye
.

211 211 211

211

.
'

"

Mi, mi,

di, li

.'

gerund

.... ....
.
.

CHAPTER

XVII.

VERBAL ADJECTIVES.
.

453- Verbal adjectives, Kritya

211

206

#424.
^425.

.206 423. Gerund in tvd I. The terminations tah and

tvd,

454. Adjectives in ta vya 455. Adjectives in cmiya,

.

,
.

212

.212
.

with intermediate

.207

^457.

212 456. Adjectives in ya verbal adjectives . Exceptional

.

Penultimate u with optional

. . .

Guna #426. Tvd with Guna ^427. Tvd with

without

.207
i

in ya and tya . 458. Verbs changing final ch

.

214

andj

into k

intermediate
. . .

and

and g

.207
i

459. Infinitive in turn 460. Verbal adverbs in

am

.214 .214 .214

intermediate

and

Guna

.207
207

^428.

Nasal lost before

lunch

....
th,

CHAPTER
%

XVIII.

CAUSATIVE VERBS.

ph; vanch,

^429. ^430.
^431.

II.

The terminations tah and

without intermediate i. 207

461. Causal bases, how formed , 462. Guna or Vriddhi

.

.215
.

215 217

tvd,

463. Exceptional causative bases,

I.
.

Final nasal dropt before tah

*II.
207

and tvd

Final n dropt and vowel lengthened ; final chh, v, rchh, and rv 208
. .

464. Conjugation of causative verbs 219 219 465. Passive of causative verbs
.

466. General tenses of the passive

219

208 ^432. Roots changing v to u 208 #433. Final ai changed to d or i ^434. Do, so, md, sthd, dhd, hd change their final into i .208 208 * 435- /So and chho take i or d 208 #436. Exceptional forms
.

CHAPTER

XIX.

DESIDERATIVE VERBS.

467. Desiderative bases, how formed 220 468. Desiderative bases, how con. . jugated Desiderative bases, with 469. without intermediate i
. .

220

or

:fc

437. Verbs which take Samprasa-

rana

.....
....
.

.220
.

208

470. Strengthening of base

220

#438. Verbs which

nasal

lose penultimate

^471.
209 209
209

Exceptional strengthening or

weakening.

220

439. Causal verbs 440. Desiderative verbs

441. Intensive verbs 442. Participles in nah
jfc

#472.

Desiderative bases, treated as

Bhu

verbs.

.221

209 209 210 210 210 210

473. Reduplication of desiderative bases 222

^t

....
.
. . .

443. Adjectival participles

474. Bases in av and dv 475-

444. Vat added to participles

445. Gerund in ya
446. Gerund
in tya

$ru

>

s ru >

d, pru, plu, chyu

222 222

476. Internal reduplication

#477.

Exceptional forms

.222 .222

TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAGE

x\in

CHAPTER

XX.

INTENSIVE VERBS.

XXIV

TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAGE

PAGE

529. IV. Adverbial compounds

242

Tan

#531.

243 530. Exceptional compounds Modifications of the final letters

.

VIII Class) 272 Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs 272

Class (Tanvadi,
.

of adverbial

compounds

243

Kri Class (Kryadi,

I.

IX
.

Class)

.273

Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs .273 ^

.
.

APPENDIX
LIST OF VERBS

I.

...
. .

PAGE

Parasmaipada Verbs III. Atmanepada Verbs

II.

.274 .274
.

Bhft Class (Bhvadi, I Class)

I.

II.

Parasmaipada Verbs Atmanepada Verbs

244-285 245 245 260

. .
.

Ad

Class (Adadi, II Class)

I.

275

II.

Parasmaipada Verbs Atmanepada Verbs

.275 .279 .280

.

III.

Parasmaipada and Atmanepada

III.

Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs .263

.

Verbs

Hu

Class (Juhotyadi, III Class)

I.

281

Tud

Class (Tudadi,

VI
.

Class)

265

I.

Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs .265

. . .

II.

Parasmaipada Verbs Atmanepada Verbs

.281 .282
.

III.

Parasmaipada Verbs III. Itmanepada Verbs

II.

266

Parasmaipada and Atmanepada 283 . Verbs

.
.

.267
.

Rudh
I.

Class (Rudhadi,

VII

Class)

284

Div Class
I.

(Divadi,

IV

Class)

267

II.

Parasmaipada Verbs Atmanepada Verbs

.267 .269

Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs , .284

.
.

II.

III.

Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs 269

Class (Churadi,

....
X
Class)
.

III.

Parasmaipada Verbs Atmanepada Verbs

.284 .285

Chur

270

Parasmaipada Verbs only

.270
.

APPENDIX
ON THE ACCENT
IN SANSKRIT
.

II.
PAGE
.

Su

Class (Svadi,
I.

Class)

270

Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs 270

.

....
.

286-292

Parasmaipada Verbs III. Itmanepada Verbs

"II.

.271 .271

INDEX OF NOUNS
INDEX OF VERBS

293-297

297-300

SANSKRIT GRAMMAR

THE DEVANiGARI LETTEKS.

VOWELS.
Initial.

CONSONANTS.
Equivalent.

Medial

nitial.

Medial.

W
T

kh

ph
b
bh

f
n
ch
(or k)

chh(orM)
j

(or 9)

jh
ri

(or ri)

n(orri)

t (or t)

(or s)

th (or

th)

sh
s

(or d)

dh
7
e

(or dh)

(or n}

TT
ai

t
vfil

th

m m
h

(or
(or

m)
m)

(or h)

dh
au

(Jihvamuliya),

x
<

(Upadhmamya),

Sometimes represented
Sometimes represented

in the
in the

Veda by

or } (

0(

Veda by

h l

CHAPTER
THE ALPHABET.
i.

I.

properly written with the Devanagari alphabet; but the Bengali, Grantha, Telugu, and other modern Indian alphabets are commonly
is

SANSKRIT

employed
Note

for writing Sanskrit in their respective provinces.

or, possibly,

Devandgarf means the Ndgart of the gods,

all

of the Brahmans.
is

A more
the lan-

current style of writing, used by Hindus in

common

transactions where Hindi

guage employed,
is

is

called simply Ndgarf.

Why the alphabet should

have been called Ndgarl,

unknown.

If derived

from nagara,

in cities.

(Pan. iv.

2, 128.)

No

might mean the art of writing as first practised authority has yet been adduced from any ancient author for
city, it

the employment of the word Devandgari.

In the Lalita-vistara (a
list

life

of Buddha, translated
is

from Sanskrit into Chinese 76 A.

not mentioned, unless
it

D.),

where a

of alphabets

is

given, the Devandgart

be intended by the Deva alphabet.

(See History of Ancient

Sanskrit Literature, p. 518.)

as current in Malva.

Albiruni, in the nth century, speaks of the Nagara alphabet (Reinaud, Memoire sur 1'Inde, p. 298.)

Beghram (bhagdrdma, abode

important
cities

of the gods)

is

the native

name

of one or more of the most

founded by the Greeks, such as Alexandria ad Caucasum or Nicaea.

in

(See

Mason's Memoirs

Prinsep's Antiquities, ed.

Thomas,

vol.

I.

pp. 34^-350.)

Could

Devanagari have been meant as an equivalent of Beghrami? No inscriptions have been met with in India anterior* to the
earliest authentic

rise

of Buddhism.

The

specimens of writing are the inscriptions of king Priyadarsi or Asoka, about

different alphabets. in the

250 B.C.

These are written in two

The alphabet which

is

found in the

inscription of Kapurdigiri,
is

and which

main

is

the same as that of the Arianian coins,

written from right to

left.

It is clearly of

Semitic origin, and most closely connected with

the Aramaic branch of the old Semitic or Phenician alphabet.

ever,

The Aramaic

letters,

how-

which we know from Egyptian and Palmyrenian inscriptions, have experienced further changes since they served as the model for the alphabet of Kapurdigiri, and we must have

recourse to the

more

primitive types of the ancient

Hebrew

coins

and of the Phenician

inscriptions in order to explain

some of the

letters of the

Kapurdigiri alphabet.

But while the

proved with

transition of the Semitic types into this ancient Indian alphabet can be

scientific precision, the

inscription of Girnar,

and which

is

the real source of

second Indian alphabet, that which is found in the all other Indian alphabets, as well as of

those of Tibet and Burmah, has not as yet been traced back in a satisfactory Semitic prototype.
(Prinsep's Indian Antiquities

manner

to any

by Thomas,

vol.

n. p. 42.)

To

admit,

however, the independent invention of a native Indian alphabet is impossible. Alphabets_were never invented, in the usual sense of that word. They were formed gradually, and purely
phonetic alphabetlfalways point back to
earlier, syllabic or
soil
;

such traces of the growth of an alphabet on Indian

discoveries

are no ideographic, stages. There and it is to be hoped that new-

may
it

still

and through
alphabets.

the

of Girnar, bring to light the intermediate links by which the alphabet modern Devanagari, may be connected with one of the leading Semitic

B 2

THE ALPHABET.
$ 3.

Sanskrit

is

written from

left to right.
is

Note

Samskrita

(u**jjd)

means what
still less,

rendered

fit

or perfect.

But Sanskrit is not

called

so because the Brahmans, or

because the
all

first

Europeans who became

Samskrita meant what

acquainted
is

with
fit

it,

considered

it

the most perfect of

languages.

rendered

A vessel that is purified, a sacrificial victim ; hence purified, sacred. that is properly dressed, a man who has passed through all the initiatory rites or samskdras; all these are called samskrita. Hence the language which alone was fit for sacred acts, the
for sacred purposes

ancient idiom of the Vedas, was called Samskrita, or the sacred language.
dialects received the general

The

local

spoken

name

of prdkrita.

This did not mean originally vulgar, but

type,' this source or type

derived, secondary, second-rate, literally

what has a source or

(prakriti) being the Samskrita or sacred language.

(See Vararuchi's Prakrita-Prakasa, ed.

Cowell, p. xvii.)

The former
If prdkrita

explanation of prdkrita in the sense of 'the natural, original continuations of

is

the old language (bhdshd),'

untenable, because
'

it

interpolates the idea of continuation.

natural,' a

had

to be taken in the sense of

original

and

language so called would

mean, as has been well shown by D'Alwis (An Introduction to Kachchayana's Grammar, p. Ixxxix), the original language, and samskrita would then have to be taken in the sense of
*

This view, however, of the meaning of these two names, is opposed to the view of those who framed the names, and is rendered impossible by the
refined for literary purposes.'

character of the Vedic lang* 1

..
;

3. In writing the Devanagari alphabet, the distinctive portion of each letter is written first, then the perpendicular, and lastly the horizontal line.

Ex.

k;

?,
it

i\g; *, n,

&c.
till

Beginners will find

useful to trace the letters on transparent paper,

fluently

they know them well, and can write them j 4. The following are the sounds which
alphabet
:

and

correctly.

are represented in the Devanagari

Hard and
Hard,
(tenues.)

Soft
Soft, (mediae.)

and
Nasals.
Liquids.
Sibilants.

aspirated,

aspirated,

Vowels.
Short, Long.

(tenues
aspiratae.)

(media?
aspiratae.)

Diphthongs.

1. 2.

Gutturals,
Palatals,

3.Linguals,
4.

Dentals,

Jft

-Hth

Mdh
H
bh
*

H/

US

5. Labials,

Unmodified Nasal or Anusvara, Unmodified Sibilant or Visarga,

1

m
h.

or

m.

In the Veda

"5

d and

<? dh,

if

between two vowels, are in certain schools written

35

and 335
"%

lh.

2
3

is
is

not properly a liquid, but a soft breathing.

^v
The

sometimes called Dento-labial.

signs for the guttural

:

and

labial sibilants

have become obsolete, and are replaced

by the two dots

h.

8.

THE ALPHABET.

Students should be cautioned against using the

the Devanagari

Roman

letters instead

of

when beginning

to learn Sanskrit.

The paradigms should

be impressed on the

memory

first impressions will has been made in mastering the

and native form, otherwise their become unsettled and indistinct. After some progress
in their real

grammar and
in

in reading Sanskrit, the

Roman

alphabet
f 5.

may

be used safely and with advantage.

fifty

There are

letters

the Devanagari alphabet, thirty- seven

consonants and thirteen vowels, representing every sound of the Sanskrit

language.
$
6.

One

letter,

the long 7

li,

is

merely a grammatical invention

sibilants, are

it

never occurs in the spoken language. Two sounds, the guttural and labial f 7.
distinctive

now without
are
called

representatives

in

the Devanagari alphabet.

They

Jihvdmdliya, the tongue-root sibilant, formed near the base of the tongue ; and Upadhmdniya, i. e. afflandus, the labial sibilant. They are said to have

been represented by the signs

(called Vajrdkriti,

having the shape of the

thunderbolt) and m (called Gajakumbhdkriti, having the shape of an elephant's two frontal bones). [See Vopadeva's Sanskrit Grammar, i. 185 Sometimes the sign X, of Ancient Sanskrit Literature, p. 508.] History
called Ardha-visarga,

half -Visarga,

is

used for both.

But

in

common
:,

writing these two signs are

(dvi,

now

replaced by the two dots, the Dvivindu,

The two, vindu, dot,) properly the sign of the unmodified Visarga. old sign of the Visarga is described in the Katantra as like the figure S 4 ;
in the
vol.
i.

Tantrabhidhana as
p. 75.)

like

two 3

th's.

(See Prinsep, Indian Antiquities,

j
*T

8.

There are

five distinct letters for

the five nasals,

^ n,

*r n,

iff

n,

j n,

as there were originally five distinct signs for the five sibilants. When, x m, in the middle of words, these nasals are followed by consonants of their own
class, (n

by

k, kh, ff,
t

gh

n by

ch, chh, j,

jh

n by

/,

th, d,

dh ; n by

t,

th,

they are often, for the sake of more expeditious the dot, which is properly the sign of the unmodified writing, replaced by Thus we find nasal or Anusvara.
d,
;

dh

by p, ph

b, bh,)

instead of ^f^dl ankitd.

instead of

^ fWrt
^

anchitd.

* N

<<& V

"H

f<j

ri i

instead of ^fertl kunditd. instead of H^dl nanditd.

\

4fljrfT

instead of

cfffujril

kampitd.

The pronunciation remains

unaffected

by

this

style of writing.

^f<*HI

must be pronounced as if it were written ^HfffrU ankitd, &c. The same applies to final IT m at the end of a sentence.

This too,

THE ALPHABET.

9-

though frequently written and printed with the dot above the line, is to be pronounced as H m. 'snr, I, is to be pronounced ^r*w aham. (See Preface
to Hitopades'a, in

M. M/s Handbooks
Kaumaras
final *T

for the

Study of Sanskrit, p.
as

viii.)

Note
cf.

According to the

m in pausd may be pronounced

and
I

Anusvara j

Sarasvati-Prakriya, ed.
T
I

Bombay,

1829*, pp. 12

13.
I

^IWI% TOTWig^ntfr
Kumara, the

*RflT 33.

^*
is

II

The Kaumaras
S'arvavarman

are the

followers

of

reputed author of the Katantra or Kalapa grammar.

is

(See

Colebrooke, Sanskrit Grammar, Preface; and page 315, note.)

quoted by

mistake as the author of this grammar, and a distinction

sometimes made between the

Kaumaras and the

$ 9.

followers of the Kalapa

grammar.

Besides the

five

nasal letters, expressing the nasal sound as modified

by

guttural, palatal, lingual, dental,

IT,

and
or

labial pronunciation, there are still

three nasalized letters, the

r|,

^,

^, 77, "4, y,
initial

I,

v,

which are used to

/,

represent a final

*T

w,

if

followed by an

T{y, 7^

^v, and modified

4, 59-)

by

the pronunciation of these three semivowels.

(Pan.

vm.

Thus

instead of instead of instead of

"if

*rrfTT

tarn ydti

w
if

cjvnr tarn

we may write Tf^rifTf toy ydti; labhate we may write TlWHff tal labhate ;
we may
write Tflhrfa tav vahati.

^ffir tarn vahati

Or

in composition,

samydnam or ^CTR sayydnam; ^c53f \amlabdham or ^l%3tf sallabdham;

^TJlrf

^N^frT samvahati or

^^f?

savvahati.
cfiruj:

But never
nor
if

if

the

^m

stands in the body of a word, such as

e.

kdmyah

the semivowel represents an original vowel,

g.

Rig-veda

x. 132, 3.

*W T ^TRT sam u dran, changed to ^Tt'T sam varan. 10. The only consonants which have no corresponding
Sl^ ^,

nasals are T r,
letters at

sh,

^ s, ^

h.

final

3^

m,

therefore, before

any of these

the beginning of words, can only be represented

fied nasal, the
IT

by

the neutral or unmodi-

Anusvara.

t^"fir tarn rakshati.

Or

in composition, ^UjPrf samrakshati.

if SHlfrflT

tarn srinoti.

^nrftflT
^J/l^rrf

samsrinoti.

W ^RTT
if

tarn

shaMram.

samshthivati.

^tfrr tarn sarati.

TOT^fir samsarati.

3 ^flT
J
1 1
.

tarn harati.

M$*Sfi samharati.

In the body of a word the only letters which can be preceded by

ascribed either to Vani

* This edition, which has lately been reprinted, contains the text
i.e.

herself, Sarasvati, the goddess of speech (MS. Bodl. 386), or to Anubhuti-svarupa-acharya, whoever that may be and a commentary. The commentary printed in the Bombay editions is

called

J^hrrt

or in
is

MS.

Bodl. 382. tl^nft,

i.e.

IT^Rft. In MS.

Bodl. 382. Mahidhara or

Mahidasabhatta

said to have written the Sarasvata in order that his children

might read

it,

and to please

Is'a,

the Lord.

The

date given

is

1634, the place Benares, (S'ivarajadhani.)

-$

l6.

THE ALPHABET.

Anusvara are 9^,^*A, ^s, ^A. Thus^r. amfah, vffi dhanumshi, ijjriftr yatdmti,
ftff : simhafy.

Before the semivowels

^ y,

r,

^ ^ v, the
/,

* m,
,

in the

body

of a word,

is

*ry: amlah.

never changed into Anusvara. Thus ifJirb gamy ate ro namrah, In $nft: bamyoh (Rv. i. 43, 4, &c.) the m stands 'padante/ but
(See f 9.)

not in ^iHjfd &dmyati.

J
J 2.

With
<

the exception of JihvdmiiUya X

x (tongue-root
*

letter),

Upadh-

mdniya X

Anusvara m (after-sound), Visarga : (to be breathed upon), see Taitt.-Brahm. in. p. 23 a), and Repha r (burring), all letters (emission, Thus are named in Sanskrit by adding kdra (making) to their sounds.

is called ^raRTC:

akdrah

"9R

ka, <**K: kakdrah, &c.

13.

The

vowels,

if initial,

are written,

a,

d,

e,

r,

H, H,

/i,

(/Q,

w,

tf,

e,

az,

o,

aw;

if they follow a consonant, they are written with the following signs
>

T '

f ^ 'i
'

e>

t>

>

M
is

Vcj/^

v*

cv

'

>

> 1
'

'

There

is

a, a, t, ^, H, rt /, (^0> M If the vowel one exception.

ai
ri

>

OM

follows the consonant

it.

^ r,

it

retains its initial form,

and the r

written over

Ex. PH^fHl

nirritify.

In certain words which tolerate an hiatus in the body of the word, the Ex. Tft^jj goagra, adj. preceded second vowel is written in its initial form.
3 by cows, instead of ifts?I go gra or 'NliJ gavdgra ; horses in7! prauga, yoke fdri^J ^7w, sieve.
; ;

ift^rt

goa&vam, cows and

J 14.

Every consonant,

if

written

by

itself, is

a short a.

Thus

OR is

not pronounced

k,

but

Ara

supposed to be followed by ^ not y, but ya. But | k ;

a, is

or any other consonant, if followed

by any vowel except

(w

pronounced

without the inherent

^FT

a.

Thus
/5rn,
c

kd

far ki,
^ro,

ctf ki,

^t

^ kau.
it

kri,

-9j

kli,

Ar/z),

ku,

ATM,

ke,

Arai,

The only
earliest

peculiarity

is

that short ft
is

sonant after which

sounded.

is apparently written before the conThis arose from the fact that in the

forms of the Indian alphabet the long and short

i

t's

were both
the long
t

written over the consonant, the short

inclining to the right.
distinctness,

inclining to the

left,

Afterwards these top-marks were, for the sake of

top-line, so as to

drawn across the

become

fti

and

sift,

instead

of

%
J

and ^. (See Prinsep's Indian Antiquities, ed. Thomas, vol. n. p. 40.) vowel after it, the 15. If a consonant is to be pronounced without any
is

consonant

said to

be followed by Virdma,

i.

e.

stoppage, which
ik,

is

marked

by
J

v
1 6.

Thus ak must be

written ^TC^ ; kar, w^ ; If a consonant is followed immediately

five or

^.
group

by another consonant, the

are written in one

two or three or four or

more consonants

8
(samyoga).
written
practice.
tion.
<*|
f

THE ALPHABET.
Thus atka
is

17is

written

^Trfi

alpa

written ^T3T

kdrtsnya

is

^.
It is

These groups or compound consonants must be learnt by easy, however, to discover some general laws in their formahorizontal lines are generally dropt in
;

Thus the perpendicular and

-Q

+ ^ = r* tva ^ + ^ ^r + ^R = ^M0; ft + ^ = ?%nda = -&skha; ^ + = ^chya; ^+-n = Kpta; o^ + U = *R kta; + Tr + ^ = + Wx + = ^j ktva ktya.
one of the letters:
!f
;
c(T

c(r

T\

$17. The

T:

r following a consonant
as

is

written

by a short transverse

stroke at the foot of the letter;

r^+^=^or tra; The ^r preceding

= 'g ^ + ^ = ~$dra; T{+^ +

T.

^ + ^=35

or

^kra; J^+T = 3T$r#/

at the top of the

shtra.

a consonant
it is

is

written

consonant before which

to be sounded.
is

by placed Thus

placed to the right of any other ^r marks at the top of the same letter. Ex. ^nij arkam ; ^fer arkena ; ^FJ

= ^+?T ^

^+

-31;

^rifi

arka

^+

varshma.

This sign for

arkendu.
c^

k followed by

*t

sh

is
is

written Sf or written ^jna.

ksha.

*^j

followed by *T
is

sometimes written v^jh. T^jh r followed by T u and g ti is written

^ ru, ^ rd.
^ du
y

^ d followed by

7 u and

gi

it

is

written

<*

dd.
*r.

^^,
1 8.

particularly in combination with other letters, is frequently written

Ex.
J

^JM;

i^tol; Vl6ra.
if

The

sign of

Virdma N (stoppage), which

its

placed at the foot of a

is

consonant, shows that

is difficult

inherent short a

is

stopped,

sometimes,

when

it

to write (or to print)

:

two or three consonants

Tp^fi

in

one group, placed

after

one of the consonants

thus

instead of

ipjf

yunkte.

or

is at $ 19. The proper use of the Virama, however, which ends portion of a sentence, the last word of

the end of a sentence,

in a consonant.
I

At the end of a sentence, or of a

end of a
$ 20.

half-verse, the sign

n.

is

used

at the

verse, or of a longer sentence, the sign

The

sign

(Avagraha or Arddhakdra)

is

used in most editions to

mark

the elision of an initial

i.

a, after a final wfr o or

;

e.

Ex.

sftsfxr so 'pi

for Ft ^Tft so api,

e.

TO ^rfo sas api

List of

%sftr te 'pi for

K ^fq

te api.

Compound Consonants.

^ k-ka,
k-t-va }
k-la,
r
f

cRj k-kha,
R

SRI k-cha, "^ k-ta,

^FT

^
^

\
k-t-ra, ^gf-k-t-r-ya,

k-t-ya,

^
H
<jJf

k-na,

^f k-n-ya }
;

k-ma,

"SR

k-ya, JR or

^ k-ra,

^f

or

^=pj

k-r-ya,
;

J& k-va,

"%% k-v-ya,

"Sf

k-sha, ^{ k-sh-ma, ^r k-sh-ya,

TJ

^ k-sh-va
&
9

kh-ya,

^
"oy

kh-ra

HT g-ya,
TJ

g-ra,
n-ka,

v% g-r-ya
n-k-ta,

gh-na,

gh-n-ya,

gh-ma,

gh-ya,

gh-ra

n-k-t-ya

^J

n-k-ya t

-^

21.

THE ALPHABET.

n-k-sha,

^ n-k-sh-va,
^
Tr* j-ja,

j n-kha,

h-kh-ya, jf n-ga t $5J n-g-ya,

n-gha

iff n-gh-ya,

h-gh-ra, |? h-ha,

^f n-ma, 357 n-ya.

^T ch-cha, *5 ch-chha,
;

*Q ch-chh-ra,

^ ch-iia

"U?

ch-ma y ^f ch-ya ;
t

w chh-ya,
W j-ra,

*J-jha, * j-na, fq j-n-ya

t

** j-ma,
n-chha,

j-ya,

^r

n-cha, ^R n-ch-ma

^aj

n-ch-ya,

fj

J^f 4-ff-ya,
4-gh-ra,
/-</,

f
TT5

^f

(/-ma,
1

*Q

d-ya;

y-tt-ya*

n-d-ra t

4h-ya,

rfA-ra;

IP w-/a,
15

n-d-r-ya,

n-dha,

n-na t

*p

*
/-va,
c?-^a,

t-ta y

^ t-t-ya, ^
w
^
cf-c?a,

t-t-ra,

fBT

t-t-va,

w ^-Ma,
?T

<=T

^-^-ra,

/-ma, |W t-m-ya,
r^r t-s-n-ya,

^-ya,
;

or

/-ra,
;

w
f

^-5a,

1^ t-s-na,

wt t-s-ya

^T ^A-ya

f
?j
;

d-gha,
d-bha,

d-gh-ra,

^ d-d-ya,
n
T

d-ba,
T

jf d-bh-ya, TT rf-ma,
]fl

d-w-ya
;

K ^

rf^-wa,

dh-n-ya,
t^c

^ d-dha, 9 d-dh-ya, if d-na, d-ya, ^ c?-ra, ^f d-r-ya, f d-va, dh-ma, K| c?A-ya, V rfA-ra, 91 dh-r-ya,
fl(

*3 dh-va

TR n-ta,

TR n-t-ya y

n-t-ra,
"**

n-da,
*(

"^ n-d-ra,

^
"^r

n-dha,
n-sa.
3T

^ n-dh-ra,
H
i$
**&

n-na y

^ n-pa,
TT

?B n-p-ra,
"aj jt?-/?a,

n-ma,

n-ya,

n-ra,

p-ta t PI p-t-ya,
"^
*T

jo-wa,
;

"^

p-ma, *m p-ya,

^?-ra,

/?-/, b-na,

^ j9-v,
b-ba,

j^-csa,

x^r

p-s-va

3T b-gha, *5T ^-^'a,

5-c?a,
;

3* b-dha,

"jf

b-bha,

"ssq
;

b-bh-ya, "m b-ya,

b-ra, *$ b-va
^pgr

bh-na,

bh-ya,

bh-ra,

v^
1*1

M-va
m-ya,

wr m-ma,
i

^ m-w, T m-pa, ^ m-ra, ^ w-/a, 13 m-va.

^R
/-A:,

m-p-ra,

m-da,

*H m-bha,

y-ya, z^ y-va

^i

/-joa,

^R

7-ma,

l-ya,

l-la,

^ l-va
%

jf v-na, tq v-ya 9

w
/

v-ra, "$ v-va.

6-cha,

^
^T

s-ch-ya,

-rca,

^-ya,

^r ^-ra,
jr

Wf ^-r-y,
^r

^r ^-/a, ^r 6-va,

^
f

s-v-ya,

^a

^ *^-/,

w sh-t-ya,
5-^o>
5-joa, 9fi

sh-t-ra,

sh-t-r-ya,

sh-t-va 9

tq sh-ya, w sh-na, tnn sh-n-ya, tq sh-pa, w sh-p-ra, ^ T& *W s-t-ya, ^ s-ka ^ 5-Ha, H ^ s-tha, ^ s-na, ^q s-n-ya, ^q s-pha, w s-ma, ^q s-m-ya FJ *-ya, ^ s-va, w

sh-tha,

sh-ma9

sh-va

T^f

s-t-ra,

s-t-va,

^r 5-ra,

*-*a.

"^

A-wa,

h-na,

it h-rtia, ^f

h-ya,

h-ra, |f A-/a,

h-va.

Numerical Figures.
21.

The numerical

q^^dMtr^b^o 1234567890
figures.

figures in Sanskrit are

These figures were originally abbreviations of the initial letters of the Sanskrit numerals. The Arabs, who adopted them from the Hindus, called them Indian figures ; in Europe,

where they were introduced by the Arabs, they were called Arabic

10
Thus ^ stands

THE ALPHABET.
for TJ e of f&Rl
cfo

22-

eM,
cfocm,

one.

^ 3

stands for If

of

"T
^TJ

two.

stands for

^
^p

of

trayah, three.

8 stands for ^T ch of ^r^THS chatvdrah, four.

M stands for

of Tfar pancha,

five.

The

similarity becomes more evident by comparing the letters and numerals as used in ancient inscriptions. See Woepcke, Memoire sur la Propagation des Chiffres Indiens,*
'

in Journal Asiatique, vi serie,

p.

tome

Prinsep's Indian Antiquities by

vol.

Thomas,

vol.

n.

705 Chips from a German Workshop,

n.

p. 289.

Pronunciation.
$
2,2,.

The Sanskrit
given

letters
4.

should be pronounced in accordance with the

transcription

page

The

following

rules,

however, are

to

be

observed
i.

The vowels should be pronounced like the vowels in

The

Italian.
'

The

short

^ a,

2,.

however, has rather the sound of the English a in America/ Thus aspiration of the consonants should be heard distinctly.

H kh

is said,

by English scholars who have learnt Sanskrit in India, to sound almost like kh in e inkhorn / ^ th like th in e pothouse / ifi ph like ph
'

in
'

topheavy /

TI

gh

like

gh
*

in

'

loghouse f

V dh

like

dh in

madhouse f H bh like bh in Hobhouse/ This, no doubt, is a somewhat exaggerated description, but it is well in learning Sanskrit
to distinguish

from the

first

the aspirated from the unaspirated letters

*

3.
4.

by pronouncing the former with an unmistakable emphasis. The guttural ^ n has the sound of ng in king/ The palatal letters ^ ch and *fj have the sound of ch in 'church' and
of j in 'join/

5.

The

lingual letters are said to be pronounced

surface of the tongue against the roof of the palate.

fact the

by bringing the lower As a matter of

is

ordinary pronunciation of

t,

d,

n in English

what Hindus

would

call lingual,

and

it is

essential to distinguish the Sanskrit dentals

by bringing the
front-teeth.

tongue against the very edge of the upper In transcribing English words the natives naturally
tip of the

6.

English dentals by their linguals, not by their own * dentals e. g. fiX*^ Direktar, Jimi*U!d Gavarnment, &c. The Visarga, Jihvdmuliya and Upadhmdniya are not now articulated
represent the
;

audibly.
7.

The

dental

^r s

sounds

like s in
'

'

sin/ the lingual

"^

sh like sh in

'

shun/

the palatal
*
Biihler,

^f

like ss in

session/
'

Madras Literary Journal, February, 1864.

Rajendralal Mitra,

On the Origin

of the Hindvi Language,' Journal of the Asiatic Society, Bengal, 1864, p. 509.

-$

24.

RULES OP SANDHI.
Anusvara
is

11

The

real

If the dot

sounded as a very slight nasal, like n in French ' bon.* used as a graphic sign in place of the other five nasals it
is
it

must, of course, be pronounced like the nasal which

represents *.

CHAPTER
$ 23.

IT.

RULES OF SANDHI OR THE COMBINATION OP LETTERS.

In Sanskrit every sentence Except where there
of the following word.
is

considered

as one

unbroken chain

of syllables.

is

a stop, which

we should mark by
to coalesce with the
final

interpunction, the final letters of each

initial letters

word

are

made

This coalescence of

and

initial

letters,

(of vowels

with vowels, of consonants with

is

consonants, and

of

consonants with vowels,)

called Sandhi.

incompatible with each other, i. e. cannot be pronounced one immediately after the other, they have to be modified or assimilated in order to facilitate their pronunciation. The rules,
certain
letters

As

in Sanskrit

are

according to which either one or both letters are thus modified, are called
the rules of Sandhi.

As according
stops which

to a general rule the

words
is

in a sentence

together, the mere absence of Sandhi

in other languages

in

many

cases sufficient to

must thus be glued mark the

have to be marked by stops. Ex.

nevertheless Indra

<<TMi

H^Ht

astvagnimdhdtmyam, indrastu devdndm mahattamah, Let

is

there bte'the greatness of Agni;

the greatest of the

gods.
Distinction between External

and Internal Sandhi.

between

24. It is essential, in order to avoid confusion, to distinguish

the rules of Sandhi which determine the changes of final and

initial letters

of words (pada), and between those other rules of Sandhi which apply to the final letters of verbal roots (dhdtu) and nominal bases (prdtipadikd) when
followed

by

certain terminations or suffixes.

Though both

are based

on the

different.

same phonetic principles and are sometimes identical, their application is For shortness 3 sake it will be best to apply the name of External
*

According to Sanskrit grammarians the real Anusvara

is

the five nasals by their respective organs and the nose.

pronounced in the nose only, Siddh.-Kaum. to Pan. i. i, 9.

The
i.e.

real

Anusvara

is

therefore ndsikya, nasal;

the five nasals are anunasika, nasalized,

pronounced by their own organ of speech, and uttered through the nose.

C 2

12

RULES OP EXTERNAL SANDHI.

25-

Sandhi or Pada Sandhi to the changes which take place at the meeting of final and initial letters of words, and that of Internal Sandhi to the changes

produced by the meeting of radical and formative elements. The rules which apply to final and initial letters of words (pada) apply, with few exceptions, to the final and initial letters of the component parts of compounds, and likewise to the final letters of nominal bases (prdtipadika) when followed by the so-called Pacto-terminations (ri bhydm, fa: bhih, wr: bhyah, ?J su), or by secondary (taddhita) suffixes beginning with any consonants except ^ y.

The changes produced by the of a word should properly be

contact of incompatible letters in the body

treated

under the

heads

of declension,

In many cases it is far easier to remember conjugation, and derivation. from the dictionary, or the grammatical paradigms the words ready-made from the grammar, than to acquire the complicated rules with their

numerous exceptions which are generally detailed in Sanskrit grammars It is easier to learn that the participle passive under the head of Sandhi.
of

fe^

lih,

to lick, is cTte: lidhah, than to

remember the

rules according to

which ^ + J^h + 1 are changed into ^ + TT dh -f t, 3 + ^ d + dh, and T + "%d + dh; ^ d is dropt and the vowel lengthened while in j(V^ + IT: parivrih + tafy,
:

the vowel, under the same circumstances, remains short

parivrih

+ tah =

parivridh

+ tah,

parivrid +

dhah =parivrid

dhah

= parivridhah.

In Greek
If they

and Latin no

rules are given with regard to changes of this kind.

are to be given at all in Sanskrit grammars, they should, to avoid confusion,

be kept perfectly distinct from the rules affecting the final and of words as brought together in one and the same sentence.

initial letters

Classification

of Vowels.

Vowels are divided into short (hrasva), long (dirgha), and protracted Short vowels have one measure (mdtrd), long vowels two, (pluta) vowels.
25.

protracted vowels three.

(Pan.

i.

2, 27.)

A
li.

consonant

is

said to last half

the time of a short vowel.

1.

Short vowels

a,

iy

T u,
"& d,

ri,

2.

Long vowels

^rr d,

$t,

ri,

e,

ai, ^ft 0,

au.

3. Protracted vowels are indicated

^3

3)

^3
;

3, e

by the figure 3 3 ; ^r$ a 3, ^T 3 d 3, ^ 3 i 3, ou 3. Sometimes we find ^r $ ^, a 3 i, instead of 3 or ^n 3 ^, d 3 u, instead of 3, au 3.

e 3> ^TC

26.
1.

Vowels are likewise divided into

:

Monophthongs (samdndkshara)
Diphthongs (sandhyakshara)
:

<* a, ^?T d,
e,

2.

ai,

\it

^^u^H^

ri,

^ri,

li.

o, *$h au.

27. All vowels are liable to be nasalized, or to

become anundsika

^fa,^f d.

-$

33J 28.

BULBS OP EXTERNAL SANDHI.

Vowels are again divided into
is

13
(guru).

light (laghu)

and heavy

This

division
1.

important

for metrical

purposes only.

2.

Light vowels are V a, ^ i, Tw,^ ri, 75 li, if not followed by a double consonant. r*, * *, * at, wt o, w> at/, and Heavy vowels are *? a, $ i, T A,

any

short vowel,
J 29.

if

followed

by more than one consonant.

according to accent, into acute (udatta), The acute vowels are pronounced

Vowels

are, lastly, divided

grave (anudatta), and circumflexed (svarita).

with a raised tone, the grave vowels with a low, the circumflexed with an even
tone.

(Pan.

i.

2,

29-32.)

Accents are marked inVedic literature only.

Guna and
J 30.

Vriddhi.
i,

Guna

is

the strengthening of ^
raises

z,

3" M, g; u,

ri,

ri,

<$

It,

by

means of a preceding ^w a, which ri to ri and ar, "& li to

^ i and ^
(Pan.
i.

to
i,

^ e, ? u and
2.)

n u to wt o,

al.

a repetition of the same process the Vriddhi (increase) vowels are formed, viz. ^ ai instead of F e t ^n au instead of ^ft o, ^TTT dr instead of ^T ar,

By

and ^n?^ dl instead of ^Tc5 al. (Pan. i. Vowels are thus divided again into
1.

i, i.)

Simple vowels

2.

Guna vowels:
Vriddhi vowels
:

3.

wd

*di (a-f a+i),

^aw (a+a+w),

J 31, ^T a and ^n a do not take Guna, or, as other grammarians say, remain unchanged after taking Guna. Thus in the first person sing, of the
reduplicated perfect, which requires

Guna

or Vriddhi, ^i? han forms with

Guna ^T^jaffhana,

or with Vriddhi

niTT jaghdna, I have killed.

Combination of Vowels at the end and beginning of words.

J 32.

As

a general rule,
If a

Sanskrit allows of no hiatus

in a vowel,

(vivritti)

in

and the next word begins with a vowel, certain modifications take place in order to remove this hiatus. $ 33. For the purpose of explaining the combination of vowels, they
sentence.

word ends

may be
1.

divided into two classes

liable to

Those which are

be changed into semivowels, ^

i,

^
2.

ri>

^&

>

also the diphthongs,

e,

at,

i,

"su, gi w,

o, ^rr

au.

Those which are

not, ^r a,

^T

d.

Calling the former liquid *, the latter hard vowels,

*
ed.

we may say

If the

The

Pratis'akhya calls
p. xxiii.

them ndmin,

for a different reason

see Rig-veda-pratis'akhja,

M. M.,

14
same vowel (long or

RULES OF EXTERNAL SANDHI.

short) occurs at the

34-

end and beginning of words, the

result is the long vowel.

^sr

(Pan. vi.

i,

101.)

Thus
CL

or

^rr

+^
3[

or wr

= ^n a +
?
-{-

d.

or

^+

or

^= ^

z.

Ex. "3W ^Ttpraflf = ^IM-M^rd uktvd

having spoken he goes away. ft nadi + idrisi

+ apagachchhati = uktvdpagachchhati,
such a
river.

= nadidrisi,

= oJuNr
Or in compounds,
$ 34.

kartri

+ riju

kartriju,

kintu
*T^t 4-

+ udeti = kintudeti,

doing (neuter) right. but he rises.

mahisah, lord of the earth.

^t = *T^$ri mahi + Uah

If hard vowels (long or short) occur at the

end of a word, and the

is

next begins with a liquid vowel (except diphthongs), the result Thus the liquid vowel. (Pan. vi. I, 87.)
.

Guna

of

/ w *\

^T or ^TT

^T or

^3TT

+ T or gjm^ft a + u = o (du). d + ri = ar. (Pan. + ^ or ^=

i. i,

5!

Ex.

Or

+ indrafy = tavendrah, thine is Indra. ^TT ^W ^ ^ftw sd + uktvd = soktvdy she having spoken. t *TT ^fe: = ^f%t sd + riddhih sarddhih, this wealth. rf^ oSoRT^: = ri^^Kt ^v + likdrah = tavalkdrah, thy letter in compounds, <*1WJ + ^%J = <*l*-Mfy: kdmya-[-ishtih = kdmyeshtih,
cf^ ^5: = KT5;:
1

tava

/z.

an

offering for a certain boon.

f^lT

^M^i:

= f^7ftaRf5K

A^a + upadesah

= hitopadesah,

good advice.

^ 35.

If hard vowels (long or short) occur at the

is

end of a word, and the

i, 88.)

next begins with a diphthong, the result

^T or ^rr H^T or

Vriddhi. (Pan. vi.

Thus

^=^ a

+ e = di.

^TT + 5j = $

d-{- di

= di.

Ex.

if^

H3 = i^( tava + eva = tavaiva,

of thee only.

m + aikshishta = saikshishta,
*

she saw.

The

letter ~3l
I

U is

left out,

because

it is

of no practical utility.
<5

It is treated like
li

ri,

only

substituting c^

for

r in

cTfJ^K lanubandhah, i. e. t Some grammarians consider the Sandhi

shortening of the long
d.

Guna and Vriddhi. Thus "^-J- W*J Ni having U as indicatory letter.

-\-anubandhah becomes

of a with ri optional, but they require the Ex. WSTT-f^jfa brahmd-\- rishik==?mfa Irahmarshih or W5f
Rishi.

brahma

rishih,

Brahma, a

-37r:

RULES OP EXTERNAL 8ANDHI.

15

Or

= mrro: tava + oshthah = tavaushthah, thy lip. *TT TOT7W4Hfl = *flrW*Hcf1 sd -f autsuky avail = sautfukyavatt, she desirous. in compounds, TJ*T -f ^R = tl^R rdma + aisvaryam = ramaibvaryam,
the lordship of
*rfafT

Rama.
similarity with

+ WHJ = *X\A\m*l8itd + aupamyam = sitaupamyam,

Sita, the wife of

Rama.
end of a
is

If a simple liquid vowel (long or short) occurs at the J 36.

word, and the next begins with any vowel or diphthong, the result change of the liquid vowel into a semivowel. (Pan. vi. i, 77.) Thus
& or

^n = *T or

TTT

f or
r
r

SM

!T

= ^ or ^ = ^ or ^ or or TOT = 'H or ^ or TOT = t or TJ

or
"31

^= ^

or

*j

e,

ai

o,

au

= ye, = yo

yai.
9

yau.

or ^="ftc or
or
-31

ift

i=ri.'
ri \

= ^ or ^ = ^ or 5
or ^T

t=
e9 ai

= re,

rat.

fft

or TO^

L o,

au = ro, ran.

J
;

or
or

TOT~^ ^ = f%

= va. = vn. = ve, vai. e, ai L o, au = vo, van.

ri

or

% or
[

or

^=^

or ^ ^= ^ or ^
or

sn

Ex.

TH =

= ^ or ^ dadhi + atra = dadhyatra, milk here. kartri + uta = kartruta, doing moreover. madhu + iva = madhviva, like honey.
or TOT

In

= fU*4j nadi + aidasya nadyaidasya, the river compounds, t^ + ^f = tTirS nadi + artham = nadyartham
9

of

A Ida.

for the sake

of a river.
Note

Some

native grammarians allow, except in compounds, the omission

of this

Sandhi, but they require in that case that a long final vowel be shortened. chakrf atra may be ^-sfcJW chakryatra or ^if^i ^T^ chakri atra.

Ex.

^ft "&&

37.

If a

Guna- vowel occurs

at the

with any vowel or diphthong (except a), is If a follows, a changed into a semivowel.
place in the diphthong; see $ 41. (Pan. vi.

end of a word, and the next begins the last element of the Guna-vowel
is elided,

and no change takes

i, 78.)

Thus

= ^r^(ay). (e) + any vowel (except a) = ^T^ (av). (o) + any vowel (except a)

16
Ex.
*rif -^MNsd.

KULES OF EXTERNAL SANDHI.

38come
!

= *U?miJ|<ad. sakhe dgachchha = sakhay dgachchha, Friend, sakhe iha = sakhayiha, Friend, here = TW%f^ prabho ehi =prabhavehi, Lord, come near
!
!

llVRfav

prabho

aushadham=prabhavaushadham,
go

Lord,

medicine.

In

compounds,

ift

+ -|$i: = TT^H
ift

+ Uah = gavisafy.
is

There are
(

various

exceptions in
J 38.

compounds where

go

treated as *re gava.

41.)

If a Vriddhi-vowel

occurs at the end of a word, and the next

is

begins with any vowel or diphthong, the last element semivowel. (Pan. vi. i, 78.) Thus

changed into a

= ^TH^ (ay), ^T (au) + any vowel = w^ (dv). Ex. fafl ^r: = rwwS: sriyai arthah = sriydy arthah. friyai rite = sriydy rite. H ravau astamite = ravdvastamite, tau iti ~ tdviti. m ^frf = In composition, + ^T^ = "TR^ nau + artham = ndvartham,
%
(ai)

+ any

vowel

after sunset.

'rfTrMfrf

tfr

for the sake of

ships.
39. These two rules, however, are liable to certain modifications The final i^y and ^v of^tnay, ^r^av, which stand according to rule for ?? e, ^ft o, may be dropt before all vowels (except a, $ 41) ; not, however, in composition. Thus most MSS. and printed editions change
:

1.

^
TOf

'-HNI^ sakhe dgachchha, not into

*K<WI-ed sakhay dgachchha, but into

dgachchha. sakhe iha, not into *R^fM^ sakhayiha, but into ^?T ^5 sakha iha. IWt nfe prabho ehi, not into TW%fi| prabhavehi, but into iw itf^prabha ehi.
H*ft

TO WT35 sakha

^ ^W prabho aushadham, not TW WW prabha aushadham.

final

into TpT^rNv

prabhavaushadham, but into

2.

The
^T:

^y

of

*%r*{dy,

which stands
it

for

di,

may be

dropt before

all

vowels, and
fo**l

it is

usual to drop
is

in our editions.

Thus
arthah instead

sriyai arthah,

more

usually written foRT

.

^: 6riyd
all

of ftsnrnr^t Sriydyarthah
3.

The

for au, may be dropt before ^rr^ dv, more usually retained in our editions. Thus
final

v of

vowels, but

is

^fir

tau

iti is

more usually written

rilfcPri tdviti,

and not HT ^TT

id

iti.

Note
It is

Guna

Before the particle u the dropping of the final \y and \v is obligatory. without any reason that the final of Guna and Vriddhi and the final ^u of are generally dropt, while the final It would be of Vriddhi is generally retained.

^y

^v

more consistent

either always to retain the final semivowels or always to drop

them.
19.

See

Rig-veda-pratis'akhya, ed.

M. M.,

Sutras 129, 132, 135

Pan. vi.

i,

78;

vm. 3,

-J

42.

BULBS OP EXTERNAL SANDHI.

In
all

17

$ 40.

these cases the hiatus, occasioned

by the dropping of

^ y and
initial

^
^T

v,

remains, and the rules of Sandhi are not to be applied again.

*T

f 41.

and

^
1

0,

before short
I,

^st

a,

remain unchanged, and the

is elided.

(Pan. vi.

109.) in S'iva there.

Ex. f$re ^ra =

ipft

f^ 5 ?f &ve atra = 6ive 'tra, = JWts *JJ]HU prabho WVJJj^liy

elision is optional.

anugrihdna =prabho 'nugrihdna,

Lord, please.

In composition this
Ex.
ift

(Pan. vi.

i,

122.)

+ ^nar: = Jfts^rr:
and horses.

or jftwHli: go

+ a$vdh=go '6vdfy
may
lit.

or go crfvdh, cows

In some compounds

iR gava must
;

or

be substituted for
a bull's eye
;

ift

go, if a

vowel follows

JNTHft gavdkshah, a window,

J^jg: gavendrah,

lord of kine, (a

name

of Krishna)

Jl^lf^'f or jftsftnf gavajinam or

go 'jinam,

a bull's hide.

Unchangeable Vowels (Pragrihya).

J 42.
liable to

There are certain terminations the

final

vowels of which are not

i. i,

any Sandhi

rules.

These vowels are called pragrihya (Pan.

n)

by
1.

Sanskrit grammarians.

They

are,
i, "gs

The

terminations of the dual in ^

^,

and ^

ey

whether of nouns or

verbs.

Ex.

oF^ft
fhrrfr

kavi imau, these two poets,

these two
hills.

^TTT giri etau,

sddhd imau, these two merchants. bandhu dnaya, bring the two friends.
late ete, these

two creepers. vidye ime, these two sciences. baydte arbhakau, the two children
t

lie

down,

baydvahe dvdm, we two

lie

down.

ydchete artham, they two ask for money.

Note
dampatfoa,
2.

Exceptions occur, as HJi.^ mantva,

i.e.

i.e. JTTlft

^rtl

^ mani wa,
wife.

like

two jewels

<;Hfll<

dampattiva,

like

husband and
^n^ffwtf,

The terminations of ^^ ami and

the nom. plur. masc. and the

nom. dual of the pronoun ados. Ex. ^nft ^TOT: ami a$vdh, these horses,
t

^^

(Pan.

1. 1,

12.)

ami ishavah y these arrows.

amd arbhakau, these two

children.

(This follows from rule

i.)

18

EULES OF EXTEENAL SANDHI.

Irregular Sandhi.
43.

43-

The

following are a few cases of irregular Sandhi which require to

When a preposition ending in ^r or ^TT a is followed by a verb with Tj e or o, the result of the coalescence of the vowels is beginning ^ e or ^ft 0, not $ ai or ^r au. (Pan. vi. I, 94.)
be
stated.

Ex.

= JHT^ pra + ejate =prejate. ^TT + ^Wff = T^Nw upa + eshate = upeshate. U + ^^rfrr = iNlfif pra + eshayati pr eshayati *. TO + TOfir = para + ekhati =parekhati. = ^iftafTT upa + oshati = uposhati. ^T + ^"WrT
jf
-f-

1T3TTT

TJTJsrflT

TO + ^f^frT = ^T^flT para + ohati =parohati.

This
to
is

not the case before the two verbs

i,

TT^ec?A,

to grow,

and

3[

to go,

if

raised

by Guna

^ e.

(Pan. vi.

89.)

Ex. "3T

+ TJViT = "^Vff upa-\-edhate = upaidhate.

TT

In verbs derived from nouns, and beginning with

^T or ^TT a of the preposition
is

or

^ffr

e or o, the elision of the final

optional.

44. If a root beginning with ^j ri

in ^? a or ^rr a, the
vi. i, 91.)

is preceded by a preposition ending two vowels coalesce into WHC ur instead of ar. (Pan.

Ex.

+ ^<ed.frf = ^TTRtflf apa richchhati = apdrchchhati. avdrndti. ^ft + ^Ullfff = vS^|iSlfri ava + rindti = in^rw pra + rijate prdrjate. IT + ^prff tm + ^qfff = TO^fa j9m + rishati =pardrshati.
"SHr
-f-

In verbs derived from nouns and beginning with

the preposition
is

ri,

this lengthening of the

^FT

a of

optional.

(Pan. vi.

i,

92.)
^TlTt ritah, affected, take

In certain compounds ^TOT rinam, debt, and

Vriddhi instead of
;

Guna

if

^CJ = ^fUMW rina+rinam = rindrnam, debt contracted to ^Wt = ^n^l'^t soka-{-ritah-=sGkdrta.h, affected by sorrow.
for

preceded by

^aj H + ^$18 = TR^ pra+rinam=prdrnam,

principal debt
;

^JW
^ftW

liquidate another debt

+ +

Likewise

"3!^ uh,

the substitute

^Tf

vdh, carrying, forms Vriddhi with a preceding

^ a in a compound.
fmyi^: visvauhah.

Thus f%^T-f
(Pan. vi.
i,

"^t visva+uhah,
vart.)

the ace. plur. of fqiyqT^ visvavdh,

is

89,

45. If the initial ^ft o in

^Ft

oshthah, lip,

and Wtg*

otuh, cat, is preceded in a

o.

comi,

pound by
vart.)
}Ex.

or ^TTa, the two vowels

may

coalesce into ^5n au or ^ft

(Pan. vi.

94,

^WC + ^fVffl = '^IMClSt

the lower
^y<*)
lip.

or

viMOst adhara+ oshthah =.adharaushtJiah

or adharoshthah,

+ ^rVfft = W^T?n

or

t^^lrft sthula-\-otuh
the rule
is
is

= sthulautuh or sthulotuh, a
^[&A.

big cat.

* In

nouns derived from

U^ ^res^,

optional.

Ex. ifa? or 9*51 preshya or

praisJiya, a messenger.

IR presha,

a gleaner,

derived from ITp-a and

51.
If

RULES OP EXTERNAL 8ANDHI.

oshtha and

19

*iW

WlJ

o/a are preceded

by

or ^JT a in the middle of a sentence,

they follow the general rule.

Ex.

*T*T

+ ^ffat = THTOJ
As
irregular

mama + oshthaJi = mumau8ht hah, my

lip.

46.

compounds

the following are mentioned by native grammarians

Jflfi^roairtfi, self-willed,

"Sat svairam, wilfulness,

and

from ^f

+ ^ ma+ira.

2ffliy<UT akshauhini, a complete army, from

:

^ftlf 4- ^tfigil aksha -\-uhini.

praudhah, from

IT 4-

TO? pra+ddhah,
IT

full-grown.

j^

HT?[:

prauhati, investigation, from

certain prayer,

+ "31^: pr a -\-uhah.
IT -f '&?.

ifa praishah, a

from

pra + eshah. (See

43.)

uW. praishyah,
47.

a messenger.
of indeclinable words
is

The final ^ft o

not liable to the rules of Sandhi. (Pan.

!

1.

1,15.)

Ex.

"SHft

^nrf^ aho apehi, Halloo, go away

48. Indeclinables consisting of a single vowel, with the exception of

Vf d

49), arc

not liable to the rules of Sandhi.

(Pan.

i.

i,

14.)

Ex.

indra,

Oh

Indra
it

<3H^| u umesa,
?

Oh

lord of

Uma

^TT ^^"a evam, Is

49. If ^TT<2 (which

so indeed

is

written by Indian grammarians

W^ dh)

is

before verbs, or before nouns in the sense of

little,' it is

so far as' (inclusively or exclusively) or

used as a preposition a

liable to the rules of

Sandhi.
until the reading begins.

Ex.

^\ ^U|lMli^= ^mmHTf^a adhyayandt=ddhyayandt,

ekadesdt
ri

= aikadesdt, to a certain place. ^||f^a n = ^ d\ Pl d dlochitam = dlochitam, regarded a d ushnam = oshnam, a warm. = come here. ^TT ^l^ = d
I

little.

little

*f

ihi

ehi,

If ^TT

is

used as an interjection,

it is

not liable to Sandhi, according to

48.

Ex. ^TT

^
A

f^R7

(TiT d,

evam

kila tat,

Ah,

now

I recollect,

it is

just so.

50. Certain particles remain unaffected

by Sandhi.

Ex.

^^
51.

he indra.

Oh

Indra.

protracted vowel remains unaffected

to stand at the

end of a sentence.
I

(Pan. vi. i, 125

ehi,

by Sandhi, because ; viu. 2, 82.)

!

it

is

always supposed

Ex. ^ei^rU $

^f^

devadattd 3

Devadatta, come here

20

EXTERNAL SANDHI.
s

tfr

48

UTS-

1 e 5*1*

S
tr*
fcr"

& &
c
'C-

9 f
"C
,l"

"*
T!S

T.

tr
5s;

S1C"

s;

a
-

C. 'C.

rfip* p

I I

$1 ri

**'

t**

IW'

ur

tvf

p
P

ft

*
r

-$54-

EXTERNAL SANDHI.
Combination of Final and Initial Consonants.

21

Here, as in the case of vowels, the rules which apply to the final consonants of words following each other in a sentence are equally applicable
$ 53. to the final consonants of
final

words following each other

in a

compound.

The

consonants of nominal bases too, before the so-called Pa</a-terminations

fa bhih, wi: bhyah, g su) and before secondary (taddhita) suffixes with any consonant but are treated according to the same beginning i^ y, But the derivatives formed by means of these and other suffixes rules.
(wit bhydrn,

are

best

learnt

from the

dictionary

in

their

ready-made

state

while
before
are

the changes of nominal and verbal bases ending in

the

consonants,

terminations

of declension

and conjugation and other

in learning

suffixes,

regulated

by

different laws,

and are best acquired

by heart the

principal paradigms of nouns and verbs.

In order to simplify the rules concerning the changes of final consonants, it is important to state at the outset that eleven only out of the
J 54.
thirty-five consonants

can ever stand in Sanskrit at the end of a word ;

is^n, j^t,

viz.

^ k,
1.

^ n,

^t,

"^n, ^/?, i{m, <^

/,

h,

m. each
;

There are

five

classes of consonants, consisting of five letters

thus giving twenty-five.

if final, are

In every one of these

chh, however, not

five classes

the aspirates,

replaced
IT

by

their corresponding unaspirated letters:

^M

by

k/

-^ gh by

g;

by

Ex. f^ y PC*

^ chitralikh,

painter; voc. fad fc5 ^

but by 7 /, &c. This reduces cldtralik.

^ ch,

the twenty-five letters to fifteen.

2.

In every class the sonant (J 58) letters, if final, are replaced by their corEx. hnd, responding surd letters; i\^g by c^Ar; ^d by TT, &c. heart nom. ^ir hrit. This reduces the fifteen to ten *.

3.

No

palatal

^ch
is

the

^cA,

can ever be final; hence the only remaining palatal, k f. Ex. '^T^vdch, replaced by the corresponding guttural

Final speech; voc. "^T^vdk. *{n does not occur. This reduces the ten to eight. In a few roots the final *^/ is replaced by a lingual instead of a guttural.
4.

Of

the semivowels,

(TI

y,

r, <^

/,

\v )^l
3

is

the only one that

letters.

is

found at

the end of words.

5. "^

This raises the eight to nine

h cannot be

final,

but

is

changed into ^t / sometimes into

^k

or

K^t.

Some grammarians
change them

allow the soft or sonant letters as final, but the

MSS. and

editions

generally

into the corresponding hard letters.

t The only exceptions are technical terms such as

ending
in a vowel, instead of

"3^

acfc,

a vowel

-*in; ajantah,

^^t?n agantah.

22
6.

EXTERNAL SANDHI.

55end of words
1.

Of the

sibilants, the

only one that

is

found
is

at the

is

Visarga.

For, radical v^sh cannot be final,

becomes
Radical

fgz^dvit.

replaced by In a few words final "S sh is changed into

but

Thus fg^dvish
cir

k.

^s

cannot be

fe<T vit.

Thus f^^vis becomes t. final, but is replaced by In some words final ^rs is changed into cF k. ( 174.)
is

Final radical

^s

treated as Visarga.
;

and the Anusvara, to eleven letters, the only ones that can ever stand at the end of real words. Hence the rules of Sandhi affecting final consonants are really reduced to
Visarga, therefore, raises the nine to ten
eleven heads.
$ 55. It is

The

important to observe that no word in Sanskrit ever ends in

more than one consonant, the only exception being when an T r precedes a
final radical tenuis
If
cjf

&, 7tf, i^t, T^p.

Thus

= ^fsfH^ abibhar + t = abibhar, 3. p. sing. impf. of H bhri, to carry. ^rfe*n: abibhar + s = abibhar, 2. p. sing. impf. of H bhri, to carry. = ^p<^ suvalg + s = suval, nom. sing, well jumping.
nom.
sing, of

But

"3fi(r

urk, strength,

^f^ urj.

avarivart, 3. p. sing. impf. intens. of ^ff vrit'OT

^^vridh.

amdrt, from ?n^ mrij.

(Pan. vin.

2, 24.)

The nom.

sing, of fqpjft*(chikfrsh is

f%sh

chikih,

because here the r

is

not followed by a tenuis.

Classification

of Consonants.

56. Before

we can examine

the changes of final and initial consonants,

according to the rules of external Sandhi,

we have

to explain

what

is

meant

by
i.

the place and the quality of consonants,

The

throat, the palate, the roof of the palate, the teeth, the lips,
letters.

and the

nose are called the places or organs of the

a.

(See $ 4.)

By contact between the tongue and the four places, throat, palate, roof, the guttural, palatal, lingual, and dental consonants are formed. teeth,

Labial consonants are formed by contact between the lips. 3. In forming the nasals of the five classes the veil which separates the

nose from the pharynx

is

withdrawn

*.

Hence these

letters are called

Anundsika,
4.

i.

e.

co-nasal or nasalized.
is

The

real

Anusvara

formed in the nose only, and

is called

Ndsikya,

i.

e.

nasal.
5.

The Visarga

is

said to be

pronounced in the chest (urasya)

the three or

five sibilants in their respective places.

* Lectures on the Science of Language, Second Series, p. 145.

$ 59-

EXTERNAL SANDHI.
too, are referred to these five places,

23
and three of them,
(3, <$,

6.

The semivowels,
ly>
<*
l>

^, or 4, <*,^, y,

iv* can be nasalized, and are then called Anundsika. *r cannot be nasalized in Sanskrit. v.)
/*,

to their quality (prayatna*, effort) letters are divided $ 57. According Letters formed by complete contact (sjmshta) of the organs: "*k, 1.
Tiff,

into,

wM,
*r

Vffh, Trc;
^f /A,

*ch, -^chh
;

*lj, T$j/i,

*tn;

*/,

7#,

T<

*dh,

K /,

^d,

vdh^n

TJ/?, iR/?A,

* b, * bh,

urn.

These are called

nasals,

Spar&a

in Sanskrit, and, if they did not

comprehend the
^y, *r,
<*

would

correspond to the classical mutes.

2.

Letters formed

by slight contact

(ishat sprishta):

/,

^v

(not

^ h).

These are called A ntahsthd

Cshmans,
o
(f> }

intermediate between Sparsas and which has been freely translated by semivowel or liquid.
(fern.), i.e.

formed 3. Letters

by

slight

opening (ishad

vivrita)

^^ ^ 8^ * *>
which may be

^ h.

These are called Cshman

(flatus) in Sanskrit,

4.

rendered by sibilant or flatus. Vowels are said to be formed by complete opening (vivrita)^.
58.

second division, according to quality,

:

is,

1.

Surd

letters

^R &,

^T ^,

W sh

Its,

^ch, -^chh zt, *th, *, Vth, vp, TXph; X X> an(i Visarga : h. In their formation the glottis is X $*
y

^ kh,

open.
2.

They
letters
T
:

are called Aghosha, non-sonant.

JT#, Vffh, ^/, T(jh,
;

Sonant
3JT n 9

^d^dh, ^ d, vdh,
*

ny, T^r, In their formation the glottis

"f n,

m ^ h,

T5/, "3V, the Anusvara

is closed.

ib, *bh, *n,*n 9 m, and all vowels.

They

are called Ghoshavat.

consonants are divided, according to quality, into, J 59. Lastly,

1.

Aspirated (mahdprdna)
T*ph,

kh,

Tf ffh, s,

"^chh, "%jh 9 7

th,

"%

dh, "nth,
:

v dh

bh;
*

X X,

^ &,
:

V shy *
all

g 0;

^ h;

the Visarga

h and

Anusvara
2.

m.
the rest.

Unaspirated (alpaprdna)
It will

be seen, therefore, that the change of

^ch

into

^k

is
;

a change of

place,

and that the change of ^ch into

^J is

a change of quality

while in the

* Sanskrit grammarians call this ^i*sn<; M4<7t. dbhyantarah prayatnah,

lation preparatory to the utterance of the sound,

mode

of articu-

prayatnah,

mode

of articulation at the close

from M*I; HM<^; rdhyah of the utterance of the sound, which produces

and distinguish

it

the qualities of surd, sonant, aspirated, and unaspirated, as explained in

58, 59.

t Some grammarians
the organs.

differ in their description

of the degrees of closing or opening of

Some

ascribe to the semivowels duhsprishta, imperfect contact, or ishadasprishta,

slight non-contact, or fshadvivrita, slight

i.e.

opening

to the sibilants nemasprishta, half-contact,

;

greater opening than

is

required for the semivowels, or vivrita, complete opening

while

they require for the vowels either vivrita, complete opening, or asprishta, non-contact. Siddh.Kaum. vol. I. p. 10. Rig-veda-pratis'. xin. 3. In the Atharva-veda-pratisakhya i. 33. we

ought to read ^fiS^JI? eke 'sprishtam instead of

^5 FJT? eke sprishtam.

24
transition of

EXTEENAL SANDHI.

60a change both

^ ch

into

TT

g, or of TT^ into IT n,

we should have

of place and of quality.

60.
letters

The changes which take

initial

place

by the combination of the eleven

final

with

vowels or consonants

may

be divided therefore into two

classes.

Final letters are changed,

with regard to their places or organs,

2.

with

regard to their quality.

i.

Changes of Place.

61.

The only

final

consonants which are liable to change of place are

Dentals, being incompatible with Palatals and Linguals, become palatal and lingual before these letters. Anusvara and Visarga adapt themselves as much as possible to the place of

the Dentals, the Anusvara, and Visarga.

The

the letter

by which they

are followed.
;

All other changes of final consonants

are merely changes of quality

these in the case of Dentals, Anusvara, and

Visarga, being superadded to the changes of place.

$ 62.

Final

before palatals

(^ ch,

"^ chh,

*(j,TJh,

*T n, SI 3) is N

changed

into a palatal.

(Pan.

vm.

4, 40.)

Ex.

fTW
TFrT

TTfT
rTcT

+ ^ = 1TW tat + cha = tachcha, and this. + f^Rf% = (W'H (Vf tat + chhinatti = tachchhinatti, he cuts this. + SJJUlfri = W^sniflPd' tat + srinoti = tachsrinoti, he hears this *. + ^rnT^ = d-nJUH tat + jay ate = tajjdyate, this is born. The
ri
1

final

7^

t is

changed into
Tr?T

^ ch and then into ^ j according to

initial
(

$ 66.

In

composition, the world.

+ WlfT= WTWifT

jagat +jetd =jagajjetd, conqueror of

T(jh; and before an

initial >r n, i^t

The same change would take place before an might become either *{j or *{n.
63. Final
T

68.)
is

n before

*{j,

and T^jh, *{n,

Ex.

Trif^

nrfir

= rtiy^frf tan +jayati =

f

changed to palatal >^n. tdnjayati, he conquers them. (Pan.

3^

vin.
Note

4, 40.)
before

Rules on the changes of final hereafter. See 73, 74.

j 64. Final i^t before 7#,
is

^cA,

TS^chh,

and

"S^s

will

be given

th,

d,

dh,

wn

(not \sh, Pan.

vm.
is

4,

43)

changed
TTif

into a lingual.
tat

(Pan.

vm.

4, 41.)

Ex.

+ T*Tff = TT!"qTT
T
t
ffff

+dayate = taddayate.
to
<J

The
66.

final

T{t

changed

into

and then into ^ d according

t

In composition,

+ ^^1 = 1^^1 tat + tikd = tattikd, a gloss on this. etat + thakkurah = etatthakkurah, the idol of him.
92,
is

ST

4,

according to

generally changed to "$ chh

ri^lififri

tachchhrinoti.

-J

66.

EXTERNAL SANDHI.
place before an initial

25
*4h; and
before an

The same change would take

initial us n, l^t

might become either "^d or

n.

(J 68.)

65. Final
to

^n

before

<L,

<fh,

u^n

(not

\sh, Pan. vin.

4, 43) IB

changed ^w. Ex. *JN^ 4- *!*H:

uproar.

= fl^llKItu:

mahdn + ddmarah

= mahdrufdmarah,

a great

(not ^*A) will be given hereafter Anusvara (m) and Visarga (A) will be explained together with the changes of quality to which these letters are liable.
(

Note

Rules on the changes of Jn before

^( and fyh

74).

The changes of

place with regard to final

2.

Changes of Quality.

J 66.

Sonant

initials

require sonant finals.

Surd

initials require

surd

finals.

As

all

final letters (except

nasals

and

I)

are surd, they remain surd

letters

before surds. before sonants.

They

are

changed into their corresponding sonant

As

the nasals have no corresponding surd letters, they remain unchanged

in quality,

though followed by surd

letters,

unless

the contact can

be

avoided by inserting sibilants.

Examples
i.

oFA;

before sonants, changed into i^ff:

samyak + uktam = samyaguktam, Well

dhik

said

+ dhanagarvitam = dhigdhanagarvitam, Fie

dik

on the purse-proud man

In
composition,

= f^cfi + 7rf
:

fyj|*{:

+ gajafc

diggajah,

an elephant

supporting the globe at one of the eight points of the compass.

Before Pada- terminations: f^fi

Before secondary suffixes

+ f*Tt = f^fmidik + bhih = e%At#,instrum.plur. beginning with consonants, except ^ y TT^ +

:

fin^=
3.

cnfj*^ vdk

-f

min = vagmin, eloquent *.

Zt

before sonants, changed into

^d:
9

+ ^R = tfwi&qparivrdt + ay am =parivrddayam he is a mendicant. + ^^flf = M fild ^fi Pd parivrdt + hasati =parivrdd hasati, the mendiI

cant laughs; (also qftjU^

T^aflf

parivrdd dhasati. J 70.)

parivrdt

In composition, Mf^dl'^ + f*fij[ tram, a beggar's friend.

Before Pada -terminations
vrddbhify.
:

= wf^dir^Jci

+ mitram =: parivrd4miparivrdt

qfXdl?

+ ^Tt = irfX'ailj:

+ bhih =pari-

* Panini

is

driven to admit a suffix gmin instead of win, in order to prevent the nasaliza-

tion of the final consonant of vdch; cf. Pan.

vin.

4, 45, v&rt.

26'

EXTERNAL SANDHI.
before sonants, changed into

67-

kakup
base
'3ftt^kakubh.)

+ atra = kakubatra,

a region there, (inflectional

= ^T3TJ: ajo + ghatah = abghatah, a water-jar. ^HT + nK = ^M*K ap -\-jayah = abjayah, obtaining water. may ah = ammayah, watery. 69.) + bhih = kakubbhih, instrum. plur.
(

before sonants, changed into

linguals>

<*

d,

except before sonant palatals and

it is

when

(according to $ 62)

changed into *(J and T$:

the river there.

+ ^3 = *rft^W sarit + atra = saridatra,

R1T + ^r:

*lJ|<fl3i;
:

+ Uah =jagadisah, lord of the world. + dhanuh = mahaddhanuh, a large bow. mahat + 6A^ = mahadbhih, instrum. plur.
jagat

mahat

ff

before sonant palatals, changed into

*rfci^-f 'STF?

"S^/:

see

$62:
water of the
river.

= *cftWc3

sarit +jalam = sarijjalam,

II t

before sonant linguals, changed into

d:

see $

62

etat + ddmarah, = etadddmarah, the uproar ^W?T + TRT: = ^rf|THT:t

of them.

Note

There are exceptions to this

in dictionaries.
is

rule,

but they are confined to Taddhita derivatives

Tt^t

which are found

Thus

final

before the possessive suffixes Tt^maf,

^i(vat, fVTtfw, 3c5 vala

vidyutvat,

not changed.
Final

Ex. fq^rt^

+ ^^= fa^i*i \vidyut + ca^ =

possessed of lightning.

^s
I.

too,

which represents Visarga, remains

unchanged before the same Taddhitas.

instead of H
instead of
ft f4

Thus TTf^ + f^TT= IMftjl t^<c/as+rtn= tejasvin,

WlTn*^ +
4, ip
?

H^

t ej

ovin j see

84. 3.

HW = 'aifi Pri 1^ 1(fyotis-}-mat=jyotishmat,

)

**4\fa*i!{jyotirmat;

84.

(Pan.

J 67. Additional changes take place if the final surds

^ k, 7
T
d,

t,

T{t,

^p

are

followed

by

initial

nasals, chiefly
o^ k,

^n
t,

and H m.

The
into
JT

nasals being sonant,

g,

they require the change of

Ji^t,

and

"q jo

d,

and

^>;

but these

final

sonants

may be
or

further infected

by the nasal character of the

*{m.
(Pan. viu. 4, 45.)
or

initial nasals,

and may be written

n9

^ n, ^ n,
dik

Ex. f^oF

TPT:

= f^nn:

f^ni:
or

+ ndgah

dignagafy

dihndgah,

a world-elephant.

'Tvf^

+ 7Tff7T = nvfej|fif
:

H^f^rt^

madhulit

+ nardati = madhuor jagan-

lidnardati or madhulinnardati, the bee

hums.

or ^NTVJ: jagat
-

+ ndthah ^jagadndthah,

ndthah, lord of the world.

or
-f-

*%&$ ap + nadi
or

= abnadi

or amnadi, water-river.

H^: = TTT^^:

m^TO: prdk + mukhah =prdgmukhah

or prdnmu-

khah, facing the east.

or

^^

bhavat+matam = bhavadmatam

or

vanmatam, your opinion.

72.

EXTERNAL 8ANDHI.
If

27
(^
,

Note
then a

a word should begin with a guttural, palatal, or lingual n

*^ff,

or
It

final

T^/

would change
/i,

its

place or organ at the

same time that

it

became a

nasal.

would become

"^

*^fl,

or

^n.

There

are,

however, no words in

common

use beginning

withTri, *f3, or

Tffn.

68. Before the suffix

optional, but obligatory.

(Pan.

TO maya and before HTO mdtra vm. 4, 45, vart.)

the change into the nasal

is

not

Ex. ^T^T

+ *HI = ^T^pT rdk-\-mayam=. vdhmayam, consisting of speech. = wfrt<iiid madhulit+mdtram = mntlhulinmdtram, merely a bee. *Ojf<$^ + *n^ = CT*HI^ tat-}- mdtram = tanmdtram, element. HI TTpT
-f-

Note
69.
1(f (1

Ninety-six

is

always muqfif shannavati, never Mflliqfrt shadnavati.

The

initial

h, if

brought into immediate contact with a

final

Jt

(*ty),

^(

(\<f) t

^)f

^P

(^^)>

^ commonly,

not necessarily, changed into the sonant aspirate of the

"Zdh, VrfA,

class of the final letter, viz. into

Igh,

H6A. (Pan.

vm.

4, 62.)

Ex.

fVcf + ^(Vsrit = ftl'^tW'iJ

tinah, Fie
"Q

or fvrirfttnfl dhik-\-hastinah=dhighastinah or dhiggha$!

on the elephants

HC3T7

-f

^1H

= ^fCsfT^Tft
TTSTiT

or ^iVctrsFn! parivrdt -j- hut ah ^parivrddhaiah or jjariis killed.

vrdddhatah, the mendicant

= W^.Sff or inr + = ^i 3u ^T^-f- ^<<i(

"?iT

tat-\-hutam= tadhutam or taddhutam, this

is sacrificed.

or

viHu

ap+haranam = abharanam

or abbharanam, water-

fetching.

J 70.

if

before c^

is

not changed into

<*

d,

but into

<^/.

(Pan.

vm.
large

4, 6O.)

Ex. Wf^4- 75W

head.

= TTWW ^^ + labdham = tallabdham, this is taken. ^T^+ c3c3T? = ^d'cftl? brihat + laldtam = brihallaldtam, a

fore-

/ is Final before J 71. <^ T^TI

through the nose, and

is

changed into <^/; but this c^/ is pronounced It is usual written with the Anusvara dot over it.
as a half-moon, called Ardha-chandra.

in this case to write the

Anusvara

Ex.

= H^l^+ HTH: = Hgl|fl*T: mahdn + Idbhah mahdl

Final

Idbhah, large gain.

J 72.

n, ur n,

and

tT

n,

preceded by a short vowel and followed

by

any vowel, are doubled.

(Pan.

vm.

3, 32.)

Ex. vre^-f ^ng: = >n^*Sf: dhdvan + asvah =. dhdvannaSvah, a running horse. U7TT + ^rr^" = HW^I^d pratyah + dste pratyahhdste, he sits turned

toward the west.

*J*TW 4-

^mir

= gnWT^
^n

sugan

+ dste = suganndste,

he

sits

counting well *.

If

n,

T^ n,

and

are preceded

by a long vowel and followed by any

call

vowel, no change takes place.

Ex. ^SThT + ^idgma kavin

+ dhvayasva,
list

the poets.

* Technical terms like ^tUlty unddi, a

of suffixes beginning with un, or filTW tihanta,

words ending in

tin, are

exempt from

this rule.

See also Wilkins, Sanskrita Grammar,

30.

E 2

28
Final J 73.

EXTERNAL SANDHI.

73-

and IT p, Tph, remains unchanged. "^n before initial cp k, ^kh, Final tT w before ^(ch, "^ chh, requires the intercession of 5^s. Final f^n before T t ^ th, requires the intercession of "^sh.
y

Final

n before 7^
3, 7.)

I(t 9 i(th 9 requires the

intercession of

^s.

(Pan.

vin.

Before these inserted sibilants the original ^w hasan + chakdra Ex.

^n^+^flRTC^^^aRTR
laughing.

changed to Anusvara. = hasam$chakdra, he did

is

it

*Tre^+ '$Tn:
tq^TT

= vrf^gNH

dhdvan

+ chhdgah = dhdvamschhdgah,
+
tittibhah

run-

ning goat.

frfjvr:

= ^cfffefpr:

chalan

chalamshtittibhah,

moving
idol.

tittibha-bird.

HgR + Tips = H^ia<: mahdn + thakkurah = mahdmshthakkurafi, a great

"^1^+ IT^t = HAW^:patan +
Note
taruh,

=patamstaruh } a

falling tree.

final TT^nw prasdm, quiet, forms the nom. U$| ['^prasdn ; ^n, being the representation of an original *^w, is not allowed before "^ch, ^chh, 7f, ^th, T^t, ^th to take a sibilant. Ex. *K^H*t fWiTfif H^lTi%*ltrfT prasdn -\-chinoti =prasdnchinoti; not

but this

firrr

prasdmschinoti.

(Pan. vin. 3, 7.)

J 74. Final

^n

and

^n
it

may be
is

followed

by

initial
OF

"5{s,

^shy^s

without

causing any change ; ^ # after the HT n. Thus T$F nsa becomes

but

optional to

add a

k after the
ljr

n and a
92)
;

W5^a becomes

^r

nksa (or
^r

nkchha,
?M

nksha;

^T

w^a becomes

nksa;

TT$T

becomes

ntsa (or TP"5 ntchha);

/5fl.

TR ws^a becomes

K?TR ntsha;

^T ws# becomes

(Pan. vin. 3, 28.)

Ex.

TTTT

+ ^W^Trr^^W

or

Wl^iJM

(or

Mli^ri)

prdn

+ sete=prdnsete

or

prdnksete (or prdnkchhete). or *pni#*rcfr

sugan

+ sarati = sugansarati
.

or

$ 75.

The same

w before s^ ^ rule applies to final 7^

it

and

^ s,

but not

before

\sh, where

remains unchanged.

into palatal

s5

nchchh

63) ; and (J 72, 92), or 's^nchh.

(^

^ n*

^ ns

may

Before 3^ s it is first changed again be changed to 355^ nchs,

Before ^s, f^n

those

may remain unchanged,

or -^(ns

may be changed

into

Ex.

rTHT -f "^7

= ifT^M? /a/z + shat = tdnshat,

or

'^nts.

(Pan. vin. 3, 30.)

six.
rti>aLic*>i

rfincci*

or

or ni>tirti^f

tan

+ sdrddldn = tdn&drduldn

or tdnchsdrduldn or tdnchchhdrduldn

or tdnchhwrddldn, those tigers.

*

(Pan. vni.3, 31.)

^w to remain unchanged before ^s was a mere misprint in Benfey's large and has long been corrected by that scholar. grammar,
allow

To

-$

77-

EXTERNAL 8ANDHI.
or HlfH^rt tan

29
or tdnttahate,

+ sahate = tdnsahate
+
*M

he bears them.

f^ (fi[^) + = f^g
*J

or H$rr

Ain (hints)

= /a//*w
*J

or hintsu,

among

(The base f^9[ hims, before the See J 53, 55. treated as a Pada.)
enemies.
J 76.
f

su of the

loc. plur., is

Ex.

A final ^ before ^a must remain unchanged, and t may be inserted. TO + *finr. = MZfCff: or M^rHiXd: shat + saritafy = shatsaritah or shatjsaif

ritah t six rivers.

(Pan.

vm. 4, 42

3, 29.)

$77. i^m
initial

at

Anusvdra and Final i^m. the end of words remains unchanged

if

followed by any

vowel.
-f

Ex. f^T

^ra kim
it

+ atra = faHd

kimatra,

What

is

there
to

Before consonants

may, without exception, be changed

Anusvara. (Pan.

vm. 3,
This
4> 59)>

23.)
is

the general rule.

-

The

exceptions are simply optional (Pan.

vm.

v12

Before

-^kh, i{</ 9 \gh>

into

^n

>

t^ e

fi

n&l

*^

or Anusvara

may be

changed

n.

to Before ^ch, -&chh, *{j, ^n. T^jh, *{n, Before 7/, ^th, to Tffw. ^dh y iffw,

^d,

^th ^d, ^dh, ^w, to ^n. ^p9 T^ph, ^b, ^bh ^m, to urn. Before T{y See J 56. 6. to ^y, 7^1, ^v, ^T, 1(v. Hence it follows that final J^m may be changed into Anusvara
tt^t,
9

Before

Before

before

all

consonants, and must be so changed only before si s, \sh, ^s, ^h, and ^r, i. e. the five consonants which have no corresponding nasal class-letter.
It

would be most desirable

final

if

scholars

would never

avail themselves of the optional

then be spared a number ^n, *TN ?n. We should of compound letters which are troublesome both in writing and printing ; and we should

change of

Anusvara into

^, ^ n, H^n,

avoid the ambiguity as to the original nature of these class-nasals

when

followed by

initial
'

sonant palatals, linguals, and dentals.

written riiy^fri tan jayati,
it

Thus

if

1R *H4fH

may be

taken for
into

which, according to

63,

must be changed
either

WT^ m^qPn

he conquers her, is ^^fri fan jayati, he conquers them,

tarn jayati,

tan jayati.

In the same manner

tan damayati
tarn

may be

damayati, he tames her.

^*iMfn tan damayati, he tames them, or TITT is All this uncertainty is at once removed if final

UTT

\m

always changed into Anusvara, whatever be the

initial

consonant of the following word.

Ex. fcwv + oM>fa = f% ohOfM (or fa^OfM) kim kin karoshi), What doest thou ?

+ karoshi = kirk

karoshi (or

^T

4-

^=

satrum +jahi 5RJ ^ff? (or ^Tf^%)

= satrumjahi (or satrun

jahi), kill the

enemy.

30
:

EXTERNAL SANDHI.
T^f IRflf (or r^^Tfncfif)

78-f

nadim

tarati

= nadiih

tarati (or

tarati),
N
frl

he crosses the
T*rfifr

river.

+ H H = g%

(or *T^wrfir)

gurum -\-namati-gurum namati

(or gurun namati), he salutes the teacher.

far*

+ Tfic5 = fa W5
What
is

(or

PcM-Mie^)
?

kirn

+ phalam = kiih

phalam

(or

kirn

phalam),

the use
1

31HdH + *ftafaff = STT^ *rfafaffi (or ^n^Ffhrni'ff) sdstram + mimdmsate = bdstram mimdmsate (or sdstram mimdmsate), he studies the book.
Before i^y, e^/, ^v. TR?rt ^H^CH + TTTfrf
1

TTfcf (or ^RT^iiffr)

satvaram +ydti

= satvaram
= vidydm

ydti

he walks quickly. (or satvaray ydti),

+ c5HW = frot cW^ ^

TO + $^

(or

fwrS"^) vidydm +

labhate

la-

(or vidydl labhate),

=7

he acquires wisdom. tarn veda (or tav veda), (or 1T^^) tarn + veda

know him.
Before ^r, ^s, \sh, T^S,

= flR^T]r^+ Or^fd
piteously.

^h:
Xtf^fw

R^T!J

karunam

+ roditi = karunam roditi, he

sete,

cries

3luimraN +3r?
the couch.
*fft^r 4-

= $|aimf

$ff

sayydydm-\-sete=-sayydydm
5eve/a

he

lies

on

^%1T

= iftet = Tgt

ir^H

moksham +

= moksham

seveta, let a

man
he

cultivate spiritual freedom.

TVT^+^rfw

'^ufif

madhuram + hasati = madhuram

hasati,

is

laughs sweetly. end of a word pausd, i. e. at the end of a sentence, $ 78. Jf^m at the It may be written, however, for the pronounced as m, not as Anusvara.

sake of brevity, with the simple dot ($ 8, note), and it is so written throughout in this grammar. Ex. *r=r evam, thus, (or T&ft^evam.)
$ 79.

Final
^[

^m
may

before

h,

if^h be
if it

\y>

<^

^>

v>

be treated as

immediately followed by ^n 9 *^w, were immediately followed by these

hnute or

letters (Pan.

vin.

3, 26; 27).

See, however, J 77.

Ex. foiw + Fff= f$

^W
?

or fofi^ff kim

+ A/iw^e = A:z/^

Am

hnute,

What What

does he hide

f^ + ^r: =
f^TH

f^; -3:

or
\

foh^:

^m + hyah

kim hyah or kiy hyah,

about yesterday

+ ^Tc^rfif = f% ^TH^firT or fch'i^rM^fir kim + hmalayati = kim hmalayati

What
does he

or kimhmalayati,
If J 80.

move

Ari is

preceded by the preposition

(Pan. VT. i,

^T sam, an
3,

^[

s is inserted,

and

Hm

changed

to Anusvara.

137; vin.

25.)

Ex. TO

+ cpn: = Tlff: 5am + kritah = samskritah,

hallowed.

-J

83.

EXTERNAL 8ANDHI.

31
i^

81. In

WTr^ samrdj, nom. fmi^

samrdt, king,

is

never changed.

(Pan. vin.

3, 25.)

Visarga and Final

^s and

^r.

82. The phonetic changes of final sibilants, which are considered the $ It should most difficult, may be reduced to a few very simple rules. only in mind be borne
:

1.

That there are

really five sibilants,

and not three

that the signs for the

guttural and labial sibilants became obsolete, and were replaced by the two dots (:) which properly belong to the Visarga only, i. e. to the

unmodified
2.

sibilant.

That

all sibilants

and Visarga are surd, and that

r.

their proper corresponding

sonant
83.

is

the ^

The only
is

sibilant

which can be
it is

final

in

pausd

is

the Visarga.

If

Visarga
class to

It

changed which the following surd letter belongs, provided there is a sibilant. should be observed, however, that the guttural and labial sibilants are

followed

by a surd letter,

into the sibilant of that

now

written

by

h,

and that the same sign may

also be

used instead of any

sibilant, if

followed

by a sibilant.
^FTC (originally
cHT

Ex. mr.

+ ^TC = Hif:
(originally

X ^w:)

tatafy

+ kamab = tatah kdmah

chandrah, the
full

= MJ^: ^jS: + ^:
moon.

tata% kdmah), hence love. purnah + chandrah

= purnaS
taros

W=
the tree.
T.

riOw*n

taroh

+ chhdyd =
+
talati

chhdyd, the

shade

of

-f 375f7f
is

= WlriEMfri = HH^:

bhitah

= bhitashtalati,

the

frightened

man

disturbed.

T^t: broken idol.

r:

bhagnah

+ thakkurah = bhagnashthakkurah,

the

-f fftt

nrreftt nadydfy

+ tiram = nadydsttram,

the border of the

river.

tnt=TOT:
param
H

mt

(originally

TOTX^ni) nadydh+pdram = nadydk

river.

(originally

nadyd <f>pdram), the opposite shore of a

Visarga before sibilants (Pan. vin. 3, 36):

or grr: f^rsj: suptah bisuh, the child sleeps.
4t

f^: = *prf35TST:

suptah

+ &isuh = supta&

tiiuh

or

or

shoda&ah or

bhdgaJj, shodasah,
:

a sixteenth part.

or inw: *ni: prathamafy

first section.

sargah or prathamah sargah, the

32
Note i If Visarga but remains Visarga, as
Ex. ^HK
is

EXTERNAL SANDHI.
followed by an
initial ?f( ts, it is

84not changed into dental ^s,

if

followed by ^s.

(Pan.

vm. 3, 35.)
is
?

+ rovPff = $T3t W^Pff sathah+tsarati = sathah tsarati, a wicked man cheats. the handle of the sword FJ + W^J = K W^J kah-\-tsaruh = kah tsaruh, Which
2
is If,

Note
Visarga

on the contrary, Visarga

is

followed by a sibilant with a surd letter, the

3, 36, vart.)

frequently dropt in

MSS.

(Pan.

vm.

Ex. t^TC

+ ^ej = ^Tt ^r

or

^^T <W devdh-\-stha=.devdh

stka or devd stha,

you

are gods;

(also <^IH?i| devds stha.)

^ftt 4-^fCfw ^fct ^firflT or 1[fT *jj<Jn harih+ sphurati =harih sphurati or hari sphurati, Hari appears ; (also ?Tpr^Wjn haris sphurati.)
like ^f%t havih or or Note 3 If nouns ending in VJJ dhanuh, are followed <T^ws, with off &, ^(kh, ^p, tf(ph, and are governed by these words, by words beginning "^sh may be substituted for final Visarga. *Ujf H^Tir or ^TPtft fsiFn sarpishpibati or sarpih pibati,
i

^s

he drinks ghee ; but flH?jJ ^It ftrr j^H^^T tishthatu sarpih, piba tvam udakam, stand, drink thou water. (Pan. vui. 3, 44.)
84.

let

the ghee

If final Visarga
is

is

followed by a sonant letter, consonant or vowel,

$ 86.)

the general rule

that

it

be changed into ^r. (See, however,

:

This rule

admits, however, of the following exceptions

1.

If the Visarga

is

preceded by

^rr a,

and followed by a sonant

letter

(vowel or consonant), the Visarga

2.

is dro'pt.

If the Visarga

is

preceded by
dropt.

^r a,

and followed by any vowel except

^ a,

the Visarga
3. If

is
is

the Visarga

preceded by
dropt,

^r a,
^T

and followed by a sonant consonant,

^r a,

the Visarga
4. If the Visarga

is

is

a changed to ^ft o. preceded by ^r a, and followed by

and the

the Visarga

is

dropt,
^1

^ a changed into ^ft o, after which, according to 41, the initial a must be elided. The sign of the elision is s, called Avagraha.
rule
:

Examples of the general

1

= ohfaiji kavih + ay am = kavirayam, this poet. + ^Pri = ift'^fri ravih + udeti = ravir udeti, the sun rises. n^33fif gauh + gachchhati = gaur gachchhati, the ox + ^nrffT = fVuu^NPrf vishnuh +jayati = vishnur jayati, Vishnu
:

walks.
is

victo-

rious.

= ti^lv:
cattle.

pafofi

+ bandhah, =pasorbandhah,

the binding of the

91*

^TRJ

= oltl* muhuh + muhuh = muhurmuhuh, gradually. = ^T^frrff vdyuh, + vdti = vayur vdti, the wind blows. %f^fTT isuh + hasati = sisur hasati, the child laughs. = fVfrf: ni h + dhanah = nirdhanah, without wealth. duh + nitih = durnttih, of bad manners. THfr: = 5: + JiuTPri: = vffffiffiljyotifr + bhih =jyotirbhify, instrum. plur. aiftflT: +
"*"

SI*

4-

^Tfw

ftr:

-$

85.

EXTERNAL 8ANDHI.
first

33

Examples of the
:

exception

4- ^nft
i:

= ^TOT ^nft

asvdh
^jNii:

4-

amf= a6vd
4-

ami, these horses.

4-

^pni: = vu'lfll

dgatdh

rishayah

= dyatd

rishayah, the poets

have arrived.
4- T3TT:
tt

= inn *nn: 4- "qnrrt = 3*ldl

hatdfy

+ gajah = hatd
unnatdh
4-

gajdfy, the

elephants are killed.

nagdfy,

*nn:

nagdh

= unnatd

the

high

mountains.
rrar Trfir chhdtrdfr 4strive.
iff:

yatante

= chhdtrd

yatante, the

pupiU

+ fn: = *rrfa

?/^A

+ ^AiA = mdbhify,
:

instrum. plur. of in^ma^, moon.

Examples of the second exception

:

+ ^fq*. =

cfi

+ dgatah = X:w^a dgatab, Whence ^ + eshah = ka eshah, Who is he ? ^f^: A:a^ + rishih ka rishih, Who is the poet ?
Xrz/^aA

come

manah +ddi = mana

Examples of the
.

ddi,

beginning with mind.

third exception

+ TO = ^ft>rft TO

6obhanah+gand/iab = $obhano gandhah, a sweet

scent.
:

+ ^7: = HHH!
4- ?5!rarrT:

TI7: nUtanalj,
^riiraiTC:

+ ghatah = ndtano
4-

ghatah, a

new

jar.

r:

= IjNt
ftfrcft

mdrdhanyah
4-

nakardh,

= mtirdhanyo
dipah, the

nakdrah,

the lingual n.

^hn nirvdnah

^aA = nirvdno

lamp

is

blown

out.

TO: atitah 4- mdsah = atito mdsah, the past month. = ^ift T^ kritah + yatnah = krito yatnah, effort is made. K 4- 1(Sr: inr: 4- T?T: = iRfaR: manah + rcmaA = manoramaJi, (a compound), pleasing
1

to the mind, delightful.

7ft

4- fa:

=
i

fVfa:

wa#

4-

bhih

= nobhih, instrum. plur. with the

:

noses.

Examples of the fourth exception

TTts*T narah, 4-

ay am

= naro 'yam,

this

man.

^s\rhn
read.

vedah, 4- adhitah

vedo 'dhitab, the Veda has been

^Wl

4-

^jf = ^nfts^- ayah 4- astram = ayo 'sir am, an

There are a few words in which the
r,

iron- weapon.

$ 85.

final letter is etymologically

This ^
* It

as

final,

is

changed into Visarga, according to

J 82,
r.

^r*. and it

is

called XSTTrft fe*l*h rqjdto visargah, the Visarga

produced from

It occurs,

^5 *ra^, ; preceded by *3T a, in JtTt punah, again j UTHi prdtah, early ; WrH of nouns in ^p, ex. fain pitaJi, father, heaven ; ^T^t ahaJi, day ( 196); in the voc. sing, from &c. ; and in verhal forms such as ^*iii^. ajdgar, 2. 3. sing. impf. o f^pitri,
on/a/*, within

34
follows
2, 3,
all
i.

EXTERNAL SANDHI.

8684.

the rules affecting the Visarga except the exceptional rules

e. if

4;

preceded by
is

w a,

and followed by any sonant

letter,

vowel

or consonant, the "tr

retained.

Ex.

jrf:

+ ^rfa = gRftr punah + api =punarapi, even again, n -f ^T= TnOtSprdtah + eva =prdtareva, very early. = TfT^ bhrdtah + dehi = bhrdtar dehi, Brother,

give

can ever be followed by another ^ r (Pan. vin. 3, 14). Hence final Visarga, whether etymologicaUy ^ s or ^ r, if followed by initial ^ r, and therefore by 84 changed to ^r, is dropt, and its preceding vowel
$

86.

No

Tcr

lengthened.

(Pan. vi. 3,

111

.)

Ex.

"fag:

+ UlTH = f^<Wri vidhuh + rdjate = vidhd raj ate, the moon shines. bhrdtd raksha, Brother, protect Tlf: + T^f = *m TT^ bhrdtah + raksha + tfaft = *pTT ft^punah + rogi=pund rogi, ih again. 5T:
1

These are the general rules on the Sandhi of final Visarga, The following rules refer to a few exceptional cases.
$ 87.
^TET

^s

and ^ r.
sa and

The two pronouns

(Pan. vi.

*c: safy

and

^m

eshah, this,

become

*f

esha before consonants and vowels, except before short ^r a and at the
i,

end of a sentence.
Ex.

132.)

*: + ^ifff = *C ^Tflf safy + daddti = sa daddti, he gives. The ^5: = ^[ ^5: sah indraft = sa indrah, this Indra.
^r:

two vowels

are not liable to Sandhi.

But

TO

JW^fT

= ^sn^rr

safy
is

+ abhavat
dead.

50 'bhavat, he was.

JJIT:

TO mritah sah } he

Sometimes Sandhi takes place, particularly for the sake of the metre Thus *c sa esha becomes occasionally ffa saisha, he, this person.

sa indrah appears as ^hj: sendrafy.

(Pan. vi.

i,

134.)

The pronoun

^q: syah, he, follows the

same

rule optionally in poetry.

(Pan

$ 88. Ht: bhoh,

before

all

an irregular vocative of vc%i(bhavat, thou, drops vowels and all sonant consonants. (Pan. vui. 3, 22.)

its

Visarga

Ex.

H^: 4*Tfc

^TR = Ht f$nT
applies to the

bhoh

+ Udna = bho

Udna,

+ ^Ti: = Ht ^i:

bhoh

+ devdfr = bho

devdh,

Oh lord! Oh gods
!

The same

interjections H*ft: bhagoh

and

^nft: aghoh, really

irregular vocatives of v(TFR(bhagavat, God, and ^SWRJ^aghavat, sinner.

$ 89.

Numerous

exceptions, which are best learnt from the dictionary

occur in compound and derivative words. may here be mentioned.

few of the more importanl

-jj 89.

EXTERNAL SANDHI.
I.

35
Compound.

Nouns

in

^Bft^as,

^is,

^^ us, forming
before

the first part of a

1.

Before derivatives of tf
to desire
(e. g. "aRTTT

kri, to

do (e.g. IRkara, ITT kdra), before derivatives

ofW(kam,
jar,

kdnta,

WTT kdma),

WH

karhsa, goblet,

^>? kumbha,

TfT&pdtra, vessel, gi^iiJttt^, counter, board, muFfkarnt, ear, the final Visarga of bases
in

"W^a5

is

changed to ^s. (Pan. VIH.

3, 46.)

Ex.

^Rt 4- oRI = ^M*O 6reyah+karah = sreyaskarah, making happy. ^T^fJ 4- WS = ^n^T^iC ahah-\-karah = ahaskarah sun. ^Hi: ^W = *tM*<jiH: ayah+kumbhah = aya8kumbhah, iron-pot.
t

-\-

There are several words of the same kind

which are best learnt from the dictionary

(Pan. vm. 3, 47.)
foot.

_ in

which the Visarga

Ex.

is

changed

into dental sibilant.

^nn
J

4~

^J =

vnitMtj

adhah+padam
divah+patih

adhaspadam, below the

= divaspatih, lord of heaven. H- ^rt = qi'qt^nJ vdchah+patih = vdchaspatih, lord of speech. = *TCRT. bhdh+karah = bhdskarah, sun, &c. Hi: +
"an::

2.

Nouns

in

^s and "^(us, such

as

^f^l havih, V^t dhanuh, &c., before words beginning

with ^Ar, ?^ kh,

^p, and t$ph, always take ^sh. (Pan.

vm. 3, 45.)
life.

Ex. ?fr4t

+ TTT ^ ^TiM'mT sarpih-\-pdnam=^sarpishpdnam, ghee-drinking. = ^TTJKRTlTt dyuh+kdmah = dyushkdmah fond of WJJ! + cRTHt
1

Note ^TTJ^JWi bhrdtushputrah, nephew, son of the brother.

II.
1.

is

used instead of WTjJJ

J^I bhrdtuh putrah, the

Words
namah,

in

^SH^as,

^is, T^us,
if

treated as Prepositions.

The words

rHTt

"JTJ

purah, ftRttirak,
(Pan.

compounded

prepositionally with ifkri,

change Visarga into

Ex. "?Wt

^Ts.

vm. 3, 40.)

KRt

= ni<5hiO = frR*?hlO

namah-\-kdrah

= namaskdrah,

adoration;

(but

^HT

namah

kritvd,

having performed adoration.)

purah+kritya=puraskritya, having preferred.

tirah-\-kdri= tiraskdri, despising.

In f?TTJ tirah the change

is

considered optional.

(Pan. vm. 3, 42.)

2.

The words

if compounded f^f \ nih, Jt duh, "^f^t vahih, ^iPMJ az^, Tttglprddufi, ^TJt chatuh, with words beginning with cF Ar, "T p or TRpA, take ^sh instead of final Visarga. fcA,

(Pan.

vm. 3, 41.)

Ex.

f^TJ

+
t

f%t

+ "^Rc^I =

= ftT^fiTTt nih+kdmah = nishkdmah, loveless. P^Ufcc^: nih+phalah = nishphalah, fruitless. + ^IIT ^ifi*fljiii dvih+kritam = dvishkritam, made manifest. = J^fff duh+kritam = dushkritam, badly done, criminal.
oFRt

chatuh+konam-=chatushkonam, square.
III.
r.

Nouns

in

^PR[as,

^is, T^us,
'Zitvat,

before certain Taddhita Suffixes.

Before the Taddhita suffixes

as

^mat,

f^Ttnn, and ^Jra/a, the

final

^s

appears

^5

or
4:

^sh
4-

icx>).

Ex. W*T:

f^ = H
TrT=
W(9

f Pf*f
a*ft Pel

^ tejah+vin

= tejasvin, with splendour.

with light.

4-

= <=>H<M rajafr+vala = rajasrala, a buffalo.

F 2

mat =jyotishmat, AJyotih +

36
2.

EXTEBNAL SANDHI.
Before Taddhita suffixes beginning with \t, the into t becomes 7 t . \sh, after which the
7^

90

^s, preceded by ^i

or

^w,

is

changed

Ex. vtpqt

^Wt
3.

+ ?t= viPqg arcMh-\-tvam = archishtvam, brightness. + TnT = ^IJBfl chatuh-\-tayam=chatushtayam, the aggregate of four.
tTT^f

Before the Taddhita suffixes

pdsa,

K^T kalpa,

cfi

ka,

and
s,

in composition with the

verb <^i**(^nkdmyati, nouns in

^T^

as retain their final

while nouns in

^^is and

~^^us change
Ex. TT*n

it

into

\sh
i

100).

(Pan. vm. 3,

39.)

+ ^Tni? = TfMW ^r payah+pdam =payaspdsam, bad milk. k alp am = pay ask alp am a milk. JTOi + cR^I= H*|t*h<34 p ay ah = yasaskah, glorious. K+ K= yasah+kah n + cni^Pn = 1^T*5hi*<|f7f yasah+kdmyati=:yasaskdmyati, he is ambitious. n + ^n^T= (M ^r sarpih +pdsam = sarpishpdsam, bad ghee. + ^R^T = tiPM^snttH sarpik+kalpam = sarpishkalpam, a ghee.
-\j

little

M^lt^ti*.

tf

little

VJ* VJ*

+ +

RJ

<*!*<<

= ^^x=n; dhanuh+kah = dhanushkah, belonging to the bow. fn = VJ m*'H fn dhanuh+kdmyati=dhanushkdmyati, he desires a bow.
l *a

Nouns ending in radical *.r ( 85) retain the ^r before the g su of $ 90. the loc. plur., and in composition before nouns even though beginning with
surds.

Ex. 3T^ + *J = ^T
fh^:

+ ilftf:

vdr + su = vdrshu, in the waters. = llMfff: gir -\-patih =girpatih, lord of speech.
like inQfii: girpatih, the optional use of Visarga is sanc-

In compounds, however,
tioned (Pan.

vm. 3,

70, vart.),

and we meet with

Jftrprfjn

gihpatih,

vttjfTT:

dhuh-

patih, and ^fir: dhurpatifr; ^fqfin svahpatih and ^Rfin svarpatih, lord of heaven ; ^:"qfir: ahahpatify and ^qfrf: aharpatih, lord of the day.

v^<. ahar, the Pada base of

treated

"

^I^^ ahan,

day,

is

further irregular, because

its final

r is

likens

with ^>: hence ^Iff J

ahahsu; ^?^t
68, vart.)

+ f*Tt = vt^lfat ahah-\- bhih ahobhih ; ^T^J + ^ = ^n?^J ahah+su = + -CTsft = 4l^ilc|t ahah+rdtrah = ahordtrah, day and night. (Pan. vm. 2,
at the beginning of a word, after a final short vowel,

before the Pada-terminations, and in composition before words beginning

$ 91.

^chh

and

after the particles ^TT

d and

ITT

md,

is

changed

to

^55

chchh.

Ex.

1T^

+ "5THT = TPf ^3TRT tava + chhdyd = tava chchhdyd, thy shade. md chchhidat, let him not cut. *H + f^lTN = *n fsa^H ma + chhidat ^T + gT^TflT = m Wl^ Tn a + chhddayati = dchchhddayati, he covers.
is

After any other long vowels, this change

optional.

or cj^O'Q&mi badarichhdyd or badarichchhdyd, shade of Badaris,

both

In the body of a word, the change of after long and short vowels.
S^arfir
i,

t$

chh into ^5 chchh

is

necessary

Ex.

ichchhati, he wishes,

fra: mlechchhafy, a barbarian.

(Pan. vi.

73-7^.)

_$

93.
Initial f 92.

EXTERNAL 8ANDHI.
$T 6,

37

into *5 chh, if the final letter of the preceding

(for ^rc).

not followed by a hard consonant, may be changed word is a hard consonant or

4, 63.)

(Pan.

vm.

Ex. ^T^ + 5ITT = TTOfnr or hundred speeches.

i|(Xfll^

TO[W
fft

vdk

+ Mam

vdktatam or vdkchhatam, a

or

nfldl<(^ parivrdf
lies

+ &ete = parivrd(

tete

or parivrdf chhete, the beggar

down.

H^^r^3

or

H^^^<s mahat

+ 6aka(am = mahach
by that

fakatam

or mahach chhakafam, a great car.

rf-^t^H ^a/

+ blokena

tachchhlokena,

verse.
sasafy

VT3R+ ^nn = VN^f^K

^HJ

or VN^ft^lt dhdvan

+ sasafy = dhdvan

or

dhdvan chhasah, a running hare.

+ $1^! = ^ u^|<<:

or

^^^;

ap

+ babdah = ap

babdah or apchhabdah,

the sound of water.

^ /i, i{gh, ^dh, \^dh, or v^bh stand at the end of a syllable which and lose their aspiration as final or or with IT^, ^</, begins ^ d, are changed into otherwise, the initial consonants T^, ^c?, ^ c?, or ^
If $ 93.

^,

Ex.

C?M^,

a milker, becomes
visvagudh,
,

>p|r

dhuk.

all attracting,

becomes

wise,

becomes

EXTERNAL SANDHI.

I 94-

33

.'1

33

*
Sfe;

3 O

I**

S
'

ll

<i ,0

-6
U|

1
**
^S

3'

3*3.

33
33
3'

Eh.s>

1R

*l
41
*

94-

EXTERNAL 8ANDHI.
"

>

II

~
.2
<2

I?

(fT

S3
If

.f

r
r

tr

I
.'*'

IF

S
?

nr

fr

.2

II -2 00
&T

ir*
K
11?

I*

I*

41
17

vo

jj
3.

p"

P^P
S
I 5

CO

If

K*
If

15

&
lu-

is
3

11
^

S}

i
2

-2

z ^

"
03

40

EXTERNAL SANDHI.

94tov

|u/

ir

**

tr

/w

a*

fl^
IB-

&

&

:a ra

ra ra

|rr

fir

IT

&IS

e
17

MS

1C

1C

,"*
[1

PS
tr
lr
Jr

ar

5
r

IB-

Ur

I
5

IS

t-

r "C3

^3

-J

96.

CHANGE OP

^n

INTO

^n.
Lingual T^n and

41

NATI,

or Change of Dental t^n and

^s

into

In addition to the rules which require the modification of certain f 95. letters at the beginning and end of words, there are some other rules to be

remembered which regulate the transition of dental ^n and ^* into lingual Beginners should try to impress on T^n and ^sh in the body of words.
their

memory
and

these rules as far as they concern the change of the dental

sibilant into the lingual nasal

and

sibilant in simple

words

with

gard to

compound nouns and

verbs, the rules are very complicated

practice.

and

t.sal pricious,

and can only be learnt by long

Change of

^n

into

^n.

is,

followed by a vowel, or by *jn, ^w, ^y, and ^r, J 96. jn, if it is preceded by in the middle of a word, changed into the lingual

The

dental

^n

the linguals
following
f^

^n,
n
is

^ri, ^

r,

or

sh.

The

influence of these letters on a

not stopt by any vowel, by any guttural (^1 k, Wf kh t * 'T #, "*f gh, ^ w, ^ h, m), or by any labial (q p, "Ri ph, if b, H bh, qm, ^ v), or by \y, intervening between the linguals and the ^(n. (Pan. vm. 4, i ; 2.)

Ex.

+
:

rt

= *TOT

nri -f

ndm = nrindm,

gen. plur. of

ij nri,

man.

karnah, ear.
dushananij abuse.

^tf vrithhanam,
arkena,

nourishing, (? h
(c^

is

guttural and preceded by Anusvara.)

by the sun,

is
is is

guttural.)
guttural.)
labial.)

grihndti, he takes, (^
:

kshipnuh, throwing,
}

(^p

ifain

premnd by
:

(i^m is labial.) brahmanyafy, kind to Brahmans, (^ h

love,

is

guttural,

^m

is labial,

and
:

^n

followed

by \y.)
("^

nishannah,

rested,

is

followed

by

J n,

which

is

itsetf

afterwards changed to HSn.)

VSJ

<H i^ akshanvat, having eyes, (TSTW

is

followed by \v.)

Tn^ET prdyena, generally, (^y does not prevent the change.)

But ^Hhr archana, worship, (^ch is palatal.) arnavena, by the ocean, (^n is lingual.)
darsanam, a system of philosophy, (?{6
ardhena, by
half, (V C?A is dental.) N
is is

palatal.)

kurvanti, they do, (t^w rdmdn, the Ramas,

followed

by

i^/.)

is final.) (I^TI
i, 16),

Note

^7H;
is

rugnah, like <jMli: vriknah (Pan. vi.

should be written with

^.

The i{g
(Pan.

no protection for the ^n. Thus ^P*f a^nt has to be especially mentioned as an exception for not changing its f n into ZJT n in compounds, such as $Kif*n*

Gana kshubhnddi.)

CHANGE OF
f 97.

INTO

$97conjugation, and the

The r^w of JWM,

the sign of the

Su

^n

of

iftnd, the sign of the

Kri conjugation, are not changed into H{n in the two

verbs

and lf{tnp
TTTTfrfTT

Hence kshubh (Pan. vin. 4, 39). Tg*^ he shakes. tripnoti, he pleases*. TJtfrfiT kshubhndti,
he hears.
Tf^trnfrf pushndti,

But

JNuflfk brinoti,

he nourishes.

kshubhdna, imper. shake.

Table showing the Changes

of^n

into

wn.

**,

-$

98

CHANGE OF

^n

INTO l^n.

43

three-eyed,
^f'Anj:

name of Siva; ig {{!: raghunandanah, name of Rama; c. svarbhdnuh, name of Rahu,

be remembered
first,
:

Words

to
\l

agranih,

principal,

from HTJ agra,

?JTR

front,

and

?ft n/,

to lead.
fft

\l

grdmanih, head borough, from

grama, multitude, and

n1 t

to lead.

H vritraghnah, Indra, killer of Vritra

-itrahan.

but

^nptf vritrahanam,

ace. of

(Pan.

vm. 4,

12

22.)

or
jr

Pj|Puu<{l

girinadi or girinadi, mountain-stream.

;

pardhnam, afternoon, from TTTT para, over, and ^RfT ahan, day but ahan, ^%T^o: sarvdhnafy, the whole day, from *r% sarva, all, and and the same whenever the first word ends in *R a. (Pan.vm. 4, 7.) day

W^

There

are

minute

distinctions,

according to which, for instance,

/Unii

means the drinking of milk, or a vessel for drinking kshirapdnam milk, ojw: K/knn: kamsah kshirapdnah, may be pronounced with dental
if it

n or T^rc) or lingual n (^
it

but

if it is

the

name of a tribe who

live

on milk,

4,

must be pronounced HfkMUli: kshirapdnah, milk-drinking. (Pan. vm. In the same manner <*vNl^iU darbhavdhanam, a hay9 and 10.)
with lingual ^n; while in ordinary compounds, such as a vehicle belonging to Indra, the dental indravdhanam, t^n
(Pan. viu. 4,
8.)

cart, is spelt

$m^i
2.

remains unchanged.
In a

compound

consisting of
affected
.

more than two words the

the

word can only be

by

mtHTUtll mdsha-vdpena '/ sowing: bv

T n of any one Hence word immediately preceding. beans but ^r^'W^ri^mdsha-kumbha^

:

vdpena, by sowing from a bean-jar.

3.

(Pan. viu. 4, 38.)

TFT

In a

compound
in

the change of
IT

^n

into

n does not take place

if

the

first

word ends
Ex. ^cjr

g.

+ W*r4 = ^'I4H rik + ayanam = rigayanam.

restrict this to
is

Some grammarians
Or
if it

ends in \sh, and the next

proper names. (Pan. formed by a primary

vm. 4, 3,

5.)

suffix \vith

^n.

Ex. fa:

+ inT = H T^t + MNH T^ TRT

4, 35-)

PH^MH nih -\-pdnarn

= nishpdnam.
= yajushpdvanam.
(Pan.

yojuh -\-pdvanam

vm.

4.

In compounds the ^w of nouns ending in tf w, and the *T n of case-terminations, if followed by a vowel, are always liable to change.
pflP^Trfi*T vrihivdpin, rice-sowing, ' * \

may form V

the genitive dlP^lPmn: IT/-

hivdpinah; but also WlP^mPm: vrihivdpinah.

or '^f^ninf'T vrihivopdni or vrihivapdni,

nom.

plur. neut.

or

"at^iiR

trihivdpena or vrihivdpena, instrum. sing,

o 2

44

CHANGE OF

^n

INTO

TO

98.

Likewise feminines such as

(Kas'.-Vritti

'atf^mPmifl' or cflngmPijffl vrihivdpini or vrihivdpim.

vin.

4,

n.)
suffixes,

Note

The

n of secondary

attached to the end of compounds,

is,

under the

general conditions, always changed

to TO w. x

Thus

<3<.Mt

kharapah

(i.e.

donkey-keeper)

becomes sfi^it*iut khdrapdyanah, the descendant of Kharapa.

fit

TTrWT'fi'TOrt mdtribhoginah,

to be possessed

by a mother, from

TTtT mdtri, mother,

is

and

vffrTC

bhogah, enjoyment, with

98. 6.)

the adjectival suffix

^tna (samdsdnta),

always spelt with

TfT^n.

(See also
its

Again,

while 'I'taf'i'fl gargabhagini, the sister of Garga, always retains

dental IT n, being an
*JTw, if it

ordinary compound,

TWff^ gargabhagint would

Words which

have the lingual

was derived

from

T^HTt gargabhagah,

the share of Garga, with the adjectival suffix ^r^ in, fern.
after they

^ft ini,

enjoying the share of Garga.

suffix are treated in fact like

have been compounded take a new words (samdnapada), and therefore follow the general single
Kas'.-Vritti

rule of

96.

(Pan. vin.

4, 3.

vm.

4,

u,

vart.)

5. If the

second part of the compound is monosyllabic, then the change of a final ^ n followed by a terminational vowel, or of a terminational ^ n,
obligatory.

is

(Pan. vin. 4, 12.)

;

Ex.

"^1^
:

vritrahan, Vritra-killer

gen. 4d^<u: vritrahanah

but ^Nhjjft

dirghdhni.

(Pan. vin. 4,

7.)
;

surdpah, drinking sura

:

nom.

plur. neut. ^<imf\!r surdpdni.

^li.ij'Jii

ksMrapah, drinking milk ; instrum. sing.

kshirapena.
is

6.

If the second part of a

compound

contains a guttural, the change

obliga4,
1

tory, even though the second part be not monosyllabic. (Pan. vin.

3.)

Ex.

^fccRTH:

harikdmah, loving Hari

^njirrfafrr

instrum. sing. ^fxcfiT^ harikdmena;

but

agragdmini. (Pan. vin. 3, 92.) sushkagomayena, instrum. sing, of 3rE5Rjfta*r sushkagomaya ;

,

dry, TffcR gomaya, dung.)

7.

Likewise after prepositions which contain an T r, the T n of primary affixes, such as ^R ana, ^rfTf ani, ^nft^r aniya, ^T in, Tf na (if preceded

by
Ex.

a vowel),

and mftmdna,

is

changed to

TT^W,

but under certain

restric-

tions.
iHM<!J

(Pan. vin. 4, 29.)

pravapanam

HH|Tii

pramdnam ; urmHW prdpyamdnam.

is

While

pronounced obligatory, it is said to be optional after causative verbs (Pan. vin. 4, 30), and after verbs beginning and ending in consonants with any vowel but ^T a (Pan. vin.
in these cases the

change

4, 31);

hence

M^IIMHf

and

O
tf

praydpanam and praydpanam ;

after verbs

THfitTO or

7f

prakopanam Again, (not ^T a) and strengthening their bases by

is

or prakopanam.

beginning in a vowel
the

nasalization,

change

necessary

it is

forbidden in other verbs, not beginning with vowels,

:

though they require nasalization hence U prenganam ; but H + ^iiR = Uif*r?T pra

-f

^r^ = TPTW pra H- inganam = + kampanam = prakampanam.

CHANGE OF

INTO'w.
all
:

45

Lastly, there are several roots which defy

these rules, viz.

^pd, Wfton, T^c/am, *n\pytiy

never
8.
1THTCT prabhdnam
;

T<T vep

hence

m&( prabhdnam

&c.,

1T%*R pravepanam, never lOTTO pravepanam.

After prepositions containing an ^r, such as wwraw/ar, f^wtr, qft joflri, and IT /?ra, and after */Mr, the change of ^ n into

qn/wa,
w^n takes

jt

place
i.

In most roots beginning with t^n. (Pan. vin. 4, 14.) IT -f- HHfri = HUJHfrt />ra + namati =pranamati t he bows.
-qtr

jj

= M^KM^fri jard + nudati = pardnudati, he pushes away. w: -f l^flT = <iri^Mfrt antah -f nayati = antarnayati^ he leads in. + rnrcK = HIIIIM^: ^?ra + ndyakah =prandyaka/i, a leader.
+
j^fri

The

roots

which are

liable to this
list

change of their

initial

*^

n are entered

in

the Dhatupatha, the

with

Jtt^n.

Thus we

of roots of native grammarians, as beginning should find the root "^nam entered as

qp^nam,

simply in order thus to indicate its liability to change.

a.

In a few roots this change

viz.

is

optional if they are followed

by Krit

affixes,

(Pan. vm.
;

4, 33.)
nfiuftiffttj
;

QllfH nis, to kiss

or ufj fa

ri

*4

pranimsitavyam or pranimsitavyam.

frSTW niksh, to kiss

UUllttJlli

or yfHH|^i pranikshanam or pranikshanam. or TTPH^H pranindanam or pranindanam.

resists all

ftjf^ nid, to
3.

blame

nftii^H

In a few roots the

in the

initial

^n

change, and these roots are entered

tT

Dhatupatha as beginning with

nrit, to

ny

viz.

(Pan. vi.

I,

65, vart.)

dance.

?TTT ndt, to

faU down, (Chur *.)

nand, to rejoice.
nardy to howl.

ndth, to ask.

nddh, to beg.
f|

nakk, to destroy.

nri, to lead.

Ex. iircHHH parinartanam

4.

Mfci<H parinandanani.
*T

The

root

ffSl^naS,

to destroy, changes
IT -f

n into

?ffw

only

when

its 31
;

is

not changed to t^sh.

IT

Tr^nr

= Tmpttpra + na&yate =pranasyate

T/i is

but

+ TO = TFW.pra -f nashtah =pranashtah,destroyed.

(Pan. vm. 4, 36.)

is

5.

In the root ^rfcm, to breathe, the

changed to i^n if the Tr Thus IT 4separated from the tj n by more than one letter. = prdniti, he breathes ; but xrft 4- ^fnfH mftllfrf pra + aniti

not

part
M
I

+ aniti = paryaniti
^prdninat
;

(Patanjali).

The

reduplicated
is

aorist

forms

Hllill

the desiderative with f^jpard

4, 19, 21.)

wftrftr^fif pardni-

nishati.

(Pan. vm.

* It

is

not

T^na,

to dance, but
vol.

17

nert

of the

Chur

class,

and hence written with a

long

a.

Siddh.-Kaum.

n.

p. 41, note.

4:6

CHANGE OF
In the root

ft

INTO

TST^.

99-

6.

^han, to kill, the ^n is changed except where "^h has to Thus IT + ?rsrff TnrTRTH pra + be changed to vin. 4, 22.) T^gh. (Pan. hanyate = prahanyate, he is struck down ; -eici^JLHd antarhanyate = SHlftf pra + ghnanti =praghnanti, they (Pan. vin. 4, 24) ; but TT -f "jHlT
1

kill.

Also H^Otf prahananam,

is

killing.
is

The change
vin.

optional again where f^n

4, 23.)

Thus

followed by *rw or ^v. (Pan. Tnrfar or TJ^ftw prahanmi or prahanmi ; M^*4! or

7.

U^Fi prahanvah or prahativah. The tT w of fj WM of the Su and of tfT raa

to i^n in the verbs f^ hi, to send,

of the Kri conjugation

?ft

is

changed

and

m, to

destroy.

(Pan. vm. 4, 15.)

Ex. TT^rq^fw prahinvanti

8.

IFfiwfTT

praminanti.
is

The The
is

T^ra

of the termination ^fif^dni in the imperative

1

changeable. (Pan.

vin.
9.
*T

4,

6.)

Thus

IT

+ *^Tftf = TW^lftr pra + bhavdni

rci,

prabhavdni.
&c.,

n of the preposition fa
to to shout, tfKjpat,

if

preceded by u pra, ifopari,

changed into T^n before the verbs (Pan.

?,

vm.

4, 17)

i\^gad

to speak,

fall,

Tf^pad,

to go, the verbs called

ma, to measure, *T^ me, to change,

ya, to go, ^T vd, to blow,
"^T

so, to

destroy,

kill, ITT

drd, to flee or to sleep,

^ wr

^ghu, Aw, to
psd, to

eat,

"^vap, to sow or to weave, ^vah, to bear, yp^sam, to anoint. (c?w), fa cAi, to collect, fij^ dih,
change takes place vin. 4, 17, vart.) (Pan.

to be tranquil

The

same

even when

the

augment

intervenes.

ilimJI^TT

pranyagadat

wm<\<(i{pranyanadat.

99. In all other verbs except those

which follow n^ gad the change of

9

fT ni after

if

pra, iffcpari, &c.,

is

optional.

TTf^q^ffrf or Mriiimfri

pranipachati or pranipachati.
cR

Except again
(Pan. vin.
4,
1

in verbs beginning with

8), in

ka or

which the
;

*T

n of fa

ni

^ kha, or ending in remains unchanged.

;

^ sh

dflT pranikaroti

irf'f^T^'fif

pranikhddati

'wfH fi(H P

pranipinashti.

Where

it

seemed

likely to

diacritical letters (anubandhas),

but only in their Devanagari form.

See.,

be useful, the Sanskrit roots have been given with their Panini in enumerating
into
ftff ni,

the roots which change f^ni after TKpra, "Oftpari,

mentions HTw?a, but

this,

according to the commentaries, includes two roots, the root

mimtte, he measures,
in this

m&md(n}, which forms

Ti*i1n

grammar the

and the root ^^me(n), which forms HTfifmayate, he changes. Where transcribed form of a root differs from its Devanagari original, the
always be looked upon as diacritical marks employed by native class to which certain verbs belong has been indicated by

additional letters

may

grammarians.

Sometimes the

adding the

first

verb of that class in brackets.

Thus sam

(div)

means sdmyati,

or

sam

conjugated like

div,

and not sdmayate.

-$

100.

CHANGE OP ^8 INTO ^th.

Change O/T^S
into

47

100.

dental

^*

(chiefly of suffixes
^Tf a,
it

and terminations*),
A:,

if

preceded

by any vowel except v,

or

into the lingual i^sh, provided or likewise ; 9 }

always changed be followed by a vowel, or by th, i^/,

/,

by

r,

is

^n

^tn

i^y,

^v

by certain Taddhita

suffixes, T|Ara,

^ VW kalpa,

in^T pd6a, &c.

Anusvaraf or the Visarga or ^sh intervenes between the vowel and the ^s, the change into "^sh takes place nevertheless.
Ex.
inflectional *rfxN^ sarpis,

If an inserted

base;

?rfch
;

sarpih,

nom.

sing. neut. clarified

butter

instrum. *ff^T sarpishd

;

the

Anusvara intervenes)

loc.

plur. Kqffq sarpimshi (here plur. *rf:i{ sarpihshu (here the

nom.

Visarga intervenes), or vdkshu, loc. plur. of

Puj

sarpishshu (here the

\sh

intervenes).

+^=
F)

"ZF^vdch, speech. sarvafak + su sarvasakshu, omnipotent. *cf$T*J

+ ^ = fa^rfo'BJ chitralikh

(k)

+ su = chitralikshu,

painter.

loc. plur. of jfig girshu, frf^ gir, speech. kamal + su kamalshu, + *J F*T^

naming the goddess Lakshmi.

;

dhrokshyati, fut. of
cfi

druh, to hate

(here

^h

is

changed to

k,

and the aspiration thrown on the

fut.

initial

^ d.)
(here ^s/i
is

pokshyati,
into
:

of

"^push,
-f

to nourish;

changed

^ k.)
sarpih

+ K = '^f^Mi:

kah

= sarpishkah

adj.

formed by
(here the

ka,

having
q;

clarified butter.

+ TO = *rfqro
tarah
is

sarpih

+ tarafy = sarpishtarah

^/

of

1T^:

2.) changed vowel be long, no change takes place; irtaTO gistard.

into 3^, as in $ 89, III.

If the penultimate
(Pan. vin.

3. I01 -)

H- Trl

= frffar^sarpih + mat = sarpishmat,

not be a radical

having

clarified butter.

The

^5 must

^s;

hence *jftn

supisau, because the

^* belongs

to

Yet VHlfyM: dsishah, from root JIT^Afc. the root f*PR(pis. (Pan.vin. 3, 59.) do not apply to final hence -flfHWd agnis tatra. (Pan. vin. 3, 55.)

l"he rules

^s;

t The Anusvara must be what Sanskrit grammarians

a radical nasal; hence, even
base
if

call nuro, it

we

write 'Qftpumsu, loc. plur. of

ig^jwm,

it

does not become

^pumshu.

(Pan. vin. 3, 58.)

must not represent Pada ip^tim*, man, to Bopp and According

other European grammarians,

who do not

limit the
or, if
is

Anusvara to the inserted Anusvara,

to preserve the

we should have

to write either

^pumshu,

we wish

^s,

TJ^T jmnjii.

According to Panini, however, TfjJ purhsu

the right form.

The

Sarasvati

prescribes

48

CHANGE OF

^s

INTO

^ sh.

IOI-

Table showing the Changes of

^s

into

^ sh.

Any Vowels

except

^r, ^rr

103.

CHANGE OF ^* INTO ^ ah.

:

49

I.

Now Vsh for 1^8 in these verbs is enjoined a second time When a preposition, or whatever else precedes it, requires such
general rules,

fa

+ ^RTTfrf = (qgifn vi -f stauti = vishtauti.

the reduplicative syllable contains

permutation, according to

W(tev forms ftw^ sithera

in the reduplicated perfect.

2.

In desideratives, f fM rw fit

when

^or 7*

or

u.

fin^ticM, Des.

sishitsati.

But

if

the

^*

of the desiderative element

must

itself

be changed to ^*A, the

(Pan.
is

initial

remains unchanged.

faVsiVM, fi

P<m Pff

sisedhishati.

vm.

3, 61.)

Except in

^sf,

and

in derivative verbs in

^Haya, where

changed to

Des. gi^Pn tushtushati. fwv^sidh, Cans,

yishati; but

W^ftf sedhayati,
3, 62),

Des. PuMMP*JMPrt sishedh a-

^J^Prt

sitsushati.

(viu.3, 61.)
in

Except again, in certain causatives,

^HTaya (vm.

where

^sh.

f^^

svid,

ftKsqrMHPrf sisvedayishati.

^^

svad,

^* is not changed into ^i&M^nntn siscdduyishati.

^T? sah, \****\^\*(H\n sisdhayishati.

3.

In certain verbs, after prepositions which require such a change, even when they are
separated from the verb by the augment, viz. JJsM (su),

1su (tud),1Rso

(div),

^$*tu (ad),

^^stubh

(Ihu);

or even

if

separated by

reduplication, in the verbs JUTT sthd y

)
1

<H4
^*>,

senaya, fl!R(sidh,ff(^^sich, '^[^sanj )

(the last only after tjfr/>an,

W^svanj '^sad HK^stambh, ^"^sran,

3, 65.)

fT n, f^vi: vm.
abhishunoti.

After prepositions

^TTH^<!.il

Iff

^rftf^fir abhishuvati.

^rfH^fri abhishyati.

M PVKI fn parishtauti. M r<.g^*nf parishtobhate. ^rf^Bl^rd abhishthdsyati. ^ft^inrfw

abhishenayati. M (V< v Per parishedhati. ^rfkfM
1

*! PIT

abhishinchati.

M fl.M H frt parishajati.

s P<

*=!

n parishvajate

(vm.

3, 65).

Pi^fif
*t

nishidati, but HPntfl^rn pratistdati

(viu.3,66).

^rf>TFtfTfWa&A^fa6Awah'(viii.3,67andii4).

Also

W^?*T avashtabhya
3, 69, in

(vm.

3, 68, in certain senses),

fa and

<!*(*

and avashvanati (vm.

the sense of eating).

After prepositions and

MflJ^Ti parishevate.
:

augment

^T^l

abhyashyat.
^f^i mu *<
f^

M ^ KI

i^paryashtaut.

guH ^abhyashunot. M^^^ paryashuvat. ^TT?^TiT abhyashtobhata.

abhyashenayat. ^^f?(paryashedhat.

^wft
WTFVT?^
abhya-

paryashajat.
shtabhndt.

WT^Tir
s
*
i

abhyashvajata.

SN^Ml^i^ abhyashidat.

iu

fl

vyashvanat and VH^ I'M^Ud avdshvanat.

MMM^n

paryashevata.

After prepositions and reduplication

abhishishenayishati.
shikshati.

(vm. 3, 64)

xi(*ici8l abhitashthau.

^T^T'^vfT^fTT

abhishishedhayishati.

xiHmsiil
(vm.
3, 118).

abhishi-

^rftrfa^TfiT

abhishishankshati

and

^TWTfam^

abhyashishankshat.

parishishvankshate.

f^faHRSfft nishishatsati

abhitashtambha.
after tjftpari,
4.

vjcm>q|<u avashashvdna.

M^ml

parishisheva,

(the

last

only

fTnt, fat?.)

Only

after the prepositions "^ft^art, ftfni, fari, the following

words (vm.
Arri

3, 70): the
initial

part, "fain sitaA, the subst.

?HK

say ah, ftf^sip,

^sA; ^

(if

with

^*,

^5 The words mentioned

intervenes,

sA:n)

and

similar verbs
in 4.

^J and

ste.

^5^ wan; may

optionally retain

^s,

if

the

augment

(vm.

3, 71.)

50
5.

CHANGE OF
After the prepositions

^S
(vm.

INTO \sh.

104-

^HJ anu, fa vi,

*jft pari, ^srfa abhi, fTm', "f&^syand

3, 72.)

may tak

except

when

applied to living beings,

6. After the prep,

Tf ta

fa vi, ta^^. skand may take ^sA, though not

in the past participle in

(vm. 3, (vm. 3, 74). ^fV^-sct (vm.

73), but after the prep, "qfic pari, throughout, even in the past participle

or s (Xs&q t parishkannah or pariskannah.

fefvi, the verbs

7.

After the prep. f*f^wz>,

3, 76.)

fTw,

^!^sphur and

t*yco sphul

may take ^sh.

8.

After the prep, f^vi,

^^skambh must
dropping
its

always take ^sh.

(vm.

3, 77.)

9.

The verb

^[

as, after

initial

vowel, takes "^sh after prepositions which

10.

if the ^sh is followed by \y or a vowel (vm. 3, 87). ^XfazfTi^abhishydt. W^?E(l^prdduhshydt. injt^fir prdduhshanti. The verb CT{st?op, when changed to ^^*p, takes \sh, after *J SM, f% m", fT^mY, <j^c?w

cause such a change, and after TK^prddur,

(vm.

3, 88).

*[$*: sushuptah.

JfJW*. duhshuptah.

Exceptional cases, where

11.

^s

is

used, and not

\sh:
affix

The verb
cJiyate.

fa*{sich, followed by the intensive

(vm.

3, 112).

^afn ^ f ^"rf abhisesi-

12.
13. 14.

The verb ftlV sidh,

signifying to go

(vm.
sodh

3, 113). 3,
1

^lV*i vfn parisedhati.

15).

The verb

sah,

if

changed to

^iffc?

(vm.

yP<4ft'^ parisodhum.

The verbs W^stambh,

The verb
tive

f^T^siv,

sah,

in the

reduplicated aorist

(vm.

3,

116).

15.

"Qsu,

followed by the affixes of the ist future, the conditional, or the desidera^fHtftucPri abhisoshyati.
KfH^JfJt
abhisusuh.

16.

(vm. The verbs

3, 117).

sad, "^T^svanj, in the reduplicated

perfect

(vm.

3, 118).

^(WmiT^
Ht

abhishasdda.
17.

'STPmifl'T abhishasvaje.
optionally, if preceded

The verb TR^sad,

by the augment (vm.

3, 119).

O^ or

or nyasidat. tmaftt^nyashidat
104.

There are many compounds in which the

the
first

initial

^s

of the second word

is

changed

to TB(sh,

if

word ends

in a

vowel (except

a).

Ex. gfa ^^yudhishthira, from jfv yudhi,

in battle,

and f^f^sthira, firm;

difficult,

f<1Ht vishamah,

shomau, Agni and

sister;
TTVfft

Soma ;

^ sushthu, well ; g^dushthu, ill; ^^"TT sushamd, beautiful, from ^RTt samah, even ; fag*T trishtubh, a metre ; vcfiTHiiT agni*iinmi mdtrishvasri, mother's sister ; ft n ^pitrishvasri, father's
i

goshthah, cow-stable

^TP'i8l*iJ agnishtomah, a sacrifice

is

3<4lfnW

jyoti-

shtomah, a sacrifice, (here the final ?^s of Tt^^'^jyotis

dropt.)

In

name

of Indra, and similar compounds,

ace.

^s

is

changed to

^sh whenever ^
3, 56.)

g<itn^ h becomes T

turdsdh, a t;

nom. '^\m^turdshdt j

^l^IT^ turdsdham. (Pan.

vm.

Change of Dental
105.

V dh into Lingual
Atm.
is

<?

dh.

The ^dh

of the second pers. plur.

"^ftsST sMdhvam

changed to

^ dh

in the reduplicated

perfect, the aorist, and in

of the benedictive, provided the

V dh,

or the

^ft

shi

of ^ftt4 shidhvam, follows immediately an inflective root ending in any vowel but

V,

^TT a.

(Pan.

vm.

3, 78.)

Ex.

kri; Perf.
;

^f|"

chakridhve.

^ cAyw

Aor. vc*J^6 achyodhvam.

^ft Ml

Bened.

p loshidhvam

-$

107-

BULBS OP INTERNAL 8ANDHI.

51

But flSp^foAtp; Aor.

Bened.
If the

V
II

f\Sf

**4 akshibdhvam.

Tf*{yqj; same terminations are preceded by the intermediate \i, and the
/,

Ujll^ yakshidhvam.

\% be preceded by

^ y, ^r, ^
Ex.
<J/tt;

^0,
Perf.

^ h,

the change

is

optional.

<5<5^^ luluvidhve

or

(Jcjfaj luluvidhve.

Aor. ^fc5fa*4 alavidhvam or <5 /M;

^fq^

alavidhvam.

J
But

JM;

"6<M
1

Bened. f^fqMl*4 lavishidhvam or rtf^Ml j lavishtdhvam. ; Aor. ^HTtftW abodhidhvam.

Rules of Internal Sandhi.

J

06.

The phonetic

rules contained in the preceding paragraphs

($3294)

apply, as has been stated, to the final and initial letters of words (padas), when brought into immediate contact with each other in a sentence, to the
final

and

initial

letters

of words formed into compounds, and to the final

letters

of nominal bases before the Pada-terminations, and before certain

secondary or Taddhita suffixes, beginning with any consonant except ^y. There is another class of phonetic rules applicable to the final letters of

nominal (prdtipadikd) and verbal bases (dhdtu) before the other terminations of declension and conjugation, before primary or Krit suffixes, and before
secondary or Taddhita
suffixes,

beginning with a vowel or ^y.

Some

of

these rules are general, and deserve to be remembered.

But

in

many

cases

they either agree with the rules of External Sandhi, or are themselves liable to such numerous exceptions that it is far easier to learn the words or

grammatical forms themselves, as we do in Greek and Latin, than to try to master the rules according to which they are formed or supposed to be formed.

The

following are a few of the phonetic rules of what

may be

called

Internal Sandhi.

The student

will find

it

useful to glance at them, without

his

endeavouring, however, to impress

learnt that
hatest,
ifffc

them on
irfor

memory.

After he has

%s

dvish, to hate,

forms

dveshmi, I hate, ^ftf dvekshi, thou

!

dveshti, he hates,

^Z advet, he hated, %fj dviddhi, Hate

3
/,

f|T7 dvif,

%^: dvishah, of a hater, fg^4} dvi(su, among haters, he will refer back with advantage to the rules, more or less general, which regulate the
a hater,

change of

final

^ sh

into ^F k,

^ d, &c.
if,

but he

will

never learn his

first

declensions an

conjugations properly,

instead

of acquiring

the

paradigms as they are, he endeavours to construct

according to the phonetic rules laid
i.

each form by

itself,

down

in the following paragraphs.

Final Vowels.
of Sanskrit words.

107,

No

hiatus

is

tolerated in the middle

Words such
hiatus in

as

n<J<i praiiga, fore-yoke,

fd'Hd

titaii, sieve,

are isolated exceptions.

The

com-

pounds, such as if&jnpura-etd, going in front, HH^fth: nama-ukiih, saying of praise, which

H 2

52
is

RULES OF INTERNAL SANDHI.

elision of a final
(

108-

produced by the

^s

before certain vowels, has been treated of under the

head of External
108.

Sandhi'.

84. 2.)
^TT a coalesce with following vowels according to the general

Final

^a
"if^

and

rules of Sandhi.

TJ<<

+ ^Tm tuda-\-ami= it^iUi tuddmi, I beat. + ^ tuda+i=ltfi tude, I beat, Atm. dana+* = <P^ ddne, in the gift. <JTT + + ^ c?awa-f= <H% ddne, the two gifts. t[TT
3[

If

we admit

^T a,

it

the same set of terminations after bases ending in consonants and in short becomes necessary to lay down some rules requiring final ^T a to be dropt before

certain vowels. in '3F3vdch-am,

Thus
it is

if

*8R^am

is

put down as the general termination of the ace.

sing., as

necessary to enjoin the omission of final

^Ta of

f$R &va

before the
if

^ am of the
put down
pres.

ace. sing., in order to arrive at f$rt sivam.

In the same manner,

^ am

is

as the termination of the i.p. sing. impf. Par.,

and

Ue

as that of the

i.

p. sing.

Atm., we can form regularly ^s^ advesh-am and TIT^ dvishe; but we have to lay down a new rule, according to which the final ^T a of ij^ tuda is dropt, in order to arrive at

the correct forms ^Tg^ atud(a)-am and TJ^ tud(a)e.

By following

the system adopted in this

arrive at the

grammar

of giving

two

sets of terminations,

and thus enabling the student to

actual forms of declension

and conjugation by a merely mechanical combination of base

and termination,
be

it is

possible to dispense with a

number of these phonetic

rules.

Again, in the declension of bases ending in radical ^TT a, certain phonetic rules
laid

had to

down, according to which the

final ^TT

d had to be elided before certain terminations

beginning with vowels.

Thus the

dative ty<sr*Hl 4- JJ sankhadhmd-\-e

a,

was

said to
^l<s!**i

form
san-

^IT^TJT sankhadhme, (to the shell-blower,) by dropping the final ^TT

and not

khadhmai.

Here, too, the same result

is

obtained by admitting two bases for this as for

base, in which the

many

other nouns, and assigning the

weak

W[ d

is

dropt, to
4, 140).

all

the

so-called

Bha

cases, the cases which

its

Bopp

calls

the weakest cases (Pan. vi.

Each

advantages and defects, and the most practical plan is, no doubt, to learn the paradigms by heart without asking any questions as to the manner in which the base and the terminations were originally combined or glued together.
of these systems has
109.

With regard
will

to verbal bases ending in long ^TT a,

is

many

special rules

have to be
or to
J? e.

observed, according to which final ^TT a

either

elided,

or changed to

^z

These rules

be given in the chapter on Conjugation.

Thus

anti ipfT -h '^ fk puna -\-

^j r(

in punanti, they cleanse.

IpTT

-j- IT:

pund+mah= yvfli! punimah, we

dehi,

cleanse.

ST

-t-

f^ dd-\-hi=^
,

Give
if

no. Final ^i,

changed to
Ex.

"3u,

"31

u,

^$ri,

followed by vowels or diphthongs, are generally

Ty,

v, ^.r.
JT

Hw + U =
^

mati+ai=matyai, to the mind.

(Vf J

J*

/^-H$ ==/fey*&

they have conquered.

+ ^fc = *TT^t bhdnu+oh = bhdnvoh, of the two splendours. + WT = "fi^T pitri+d=pitrd, by the father.
UbM+ati
bibhyati, they fear.

-$

13.

RULES OP INTERNAL 8ANDHI.

f are

53
T(t<p;

In some cases ^t and

to

changed to

^iy; 7 u

and

"Hi* to

^ri

to ftri;

t>

and, after labials, to "9^ ur.

Ex.

fyOftl

tf

+ Wy = (VPsH^t fiJri+athuJi = siJriyathuJt + ^= fafr bhi+i = bhiyi, in fear.

Wlf =
^ffif yu-\-anti=iyuvanti they join.
t

you (two) have gone.

53 H- T: = *nT|: yuyu+uh = yuyuvuh they have joined. ^ = 5?^ sushu+e=sushuve, I have brought forth. *[*[ +
t

-f-

+ ^ = gfa bhtf+i=zbhuvi, on earth. + ^HTT = ftnin mri+ate=imriyate he dies. ^ + wflf = f^KPn gri+ati=girati, he swallows. *|
>T
t 1

T^+ 3[ =

M ^fV papri+ i =papuri,

liberal.

When
from

either the one or the other takes place

must be

learnt from paradigms

and from

special rules given

*ft bhf,

under the heads of Declension and Conjugation. hrt. but fnf<< fnjihriyati from

See

fwrfk bibhyati

m.
labials

Final ^Qrt,

if

followed by terminational consonants,

is

changed to ^Tfr; and

after

*T grt, to

shout; Passive
fill;

1^5 n gir-yate;

Part.

^iWt girnah.

"^prt, to

Passive

^npur-yate;

Part

"^Ipurnah.

Before the
final

^J

ri

of the Passive, Intensive, and Beneclictive, final ^i and "3 u are lengthened, ri to changed to ftrt, final f^ ir or "^.ur. (See f 390.)

^y

112.

^e,

^ ai,

^uo, ^TTM, before vowels and diphthongs,

are generally

changed into

+ ^Trf = ^frf de+ate = dayate,

he protects.

X + ^ = ITT rai+e-=.rdye,
'M

to wealth.

+ JJ = T3T ^70 + e=gave, to the cow. H + ^Tt = TTre: nau-\-ah=.ndvah, the ships.
^vye
in redupl. perf., Pan. vi. 1,46)
i,
it

Roots terminated by a radical diphthong (except

change

into ^TT d before any affix except those of the so-called special tenses. (Pan. vi.

45.)

^ + 7TT = ^TrTT de+td=ddtd, he will protect. ^ + *faT=^ltO*J de+siya = ddsiya, May I protect + WT = STrTT mlai+td= mldtd, he will wither.
^ft

+ HT= ^TTTTT so+td=sdtd, he will pare. But in the Present + ^rfif = 'c6I^Pd glai+ati=gldyati,

he

is

weary.

2.

Final Consonants.

113.

The
must

rules according to

which the consonants which can occur

at
/,

the end of a
*

word

are restricted to

^ k, ^ n,
it

#,

77i,

likewise be observed
final,
i.

^ /, where the
is

^ w,
last

j^tt ^[ w, ^/?,
letter

m,

of a nominal or

verbal base

becomes

e.

where

not followed by any derivative

in the vocative singular

letter or syllable.

Thus the nominal base

ifijjudh, battle,

would

be

54

INTERNAL SANDHL
Here, however, the
is

114}

y^ yudh.
aspirate

>^

tolerated as a final ($

dh must be changed into ^ d because no and ^ d is changed into f{t, because 54. i)
;

no word can end

sing,

in a soft consonant ($ 54. 2).

its

would change

ch into

cF k,

in the voc. ^tr^vdch, speech, because palatals can never be final

(#54-3). In ^nftcfi adhok, instead of ^rft| adoh, the aspiration of the

final is

thrown

back on the
aspiration,

initial

^d
*T

118).
is

The

final

^h

or
"<?

TT

gh

after losing its

becomes

g,

which

further changed to

k.

114.

Nominal

or verbal bases ending in consonants

and followed by

terminations consisting of a single consonant, drop the termination altogether, The final two consonants not being tolerated at the end of a word 55).
(J

consonants of the base are then treated like other

rai

final

consonants.

+ s = vdk, speech nom. sing. =inT prdnch + s=prdn, eastern; nom.

vdch
;

sing. masc.

Here

UTcfr

prank, which remains after the dropping of ^s, is, according to the same rule, reduced again to TfT^prdn, the final nasal remaining guttural,

because

it

would have been guttural

if the final ^K

k had remained.

+ ^= *J^ suvalg + s = suval, well jumping. of ^ s, there would remain ^RF suvalk but
;

Here, after the dropping as no word can end in

Before the Pada*jc(c^

two

consonants, this

is

reduced to
its

4}4c4

suval.

terminations

*}T^ suvalg assumes

Pada form

suval

53)

hence instrum. plur. *jqf*H: suvalbhih. + ^T5*T ahan + s = ahan, thou killedst ;

^=

2. p. sing.

impf. Par.

= ^7
will

advesh

'srvVoF

adoh

+ 1 = advet, he hated 3. p. sing. impf. Par. + t = adhok, he milked 3. p. sing. impf. Par.
;

Exceptions
$ 115.

be seen under the heads of Declension and Conjugation.

regard to the changes of the final consonants of nominal
rule
is,

With

and verbal bases, before terminations, the general

1.

Terminations beginning with sonant end of the nominal or verbal base.

Terminations beginning with surd of the nominal or verbal base.

letters, require a

sonant

letter at the

2.

letters, require

a surd letter at the end

3.

In

this general rule the terminations

i.

or nasals are excluded,

e.

beginning with vowels, semivowels, they produce no change in the final con-

sonant of the base.

1.

T^-f fv = "^fHr vach +

*[^4- ur

2.

^ ^

dhi = vagdhi. Speak 2. p. sing. imp. Par. = IJTJ^ prich + dhve =prigdhve, you mix 2. p. plur. pres. Atm, + fa = ^rffcr ad + si = atsi, 2. p. sing. pres. thou eatest. + = ^rf% ad + ti = atti, 3. p. sing. pres. he eats.
!

fir

Il8.

INTERNAL SANDHI.
marut

55
the wind.

+ i = maruti,

loc. sing, in

^far vach + mi = vachmi, I speak. = ?TW7T grath + ya/e =grathyate, it is arranged. Exceptions such as fa^ -f n = fain /^ + wo h = bhinnah, divided, *TT: Ao/ -f nah = bhagnah^ broken, must be learnt by practice rather

than

by

rule.

by terminations beginning with any letter (except vowels and semivowels and nasals), lose their aspiration. (J 54. i.)
$
1 1

6.

Aspirates,

if

followed

Ex.

*TRnqr

+ fcT = irRfw mdmath + ti = mdmatti,

ufr

3. p. sing. pres. Par.

of the

intensive

%V +
C5H4

wri^mdmath, he shakes much. %^ rundh + dhve runddhve, 2. p. plur. pres. Atm. of

^^rudh you
t

impede.

^=<5T^

labh+sye = lapsye,
i

I shall

take.

But

= "5fy yudh + = yudhi, loc. sing, in battle. TJV + ^ = HtT: lobh -H yah lobhyah, to be desired. 3?^-|-i: + nfw = ^tflfif kshubh + ndti = kshubhndti, he agitates. "Sp^
two aspirates can never meet
in ordinary Sanskrit.
117. If final

It is a general rule that

\gh,

\ dh, \dh, H bh are foUowed by T^^ or ^ th, they are changed to the
\d, 3d, 'Qb, but the
See also
128.
1(t

corresponding soft

letters, *T^,

and

^M are likewise softened, and

the <c? receives the aspiration.

Ex.

^TJT^

+ fff = ^ <u fa runadh+ti = runaddhi, he obstructs. = labdhah, taken. cJ>T + W: = e73H: labh +
talt

rundh -\-thah-=. runddhah (also spelt ^VJ rundhah], you two obstruct.

+ Wt = ^r?TJ rundh +tah = runddhah,

TT

they two obstruct.

2. p.

vi<ri-s

abdndh+tam = abdnddham,
i

dual aor.
2.

i.

Par.
aor.

you two bound.

i.

= *i R
boundest.

abandh+thah

= abanddhdh,

p.

sing.

Atm. thou

In ^TOT^ abdnddham,

2. p.

dual aor.
it is

i.

Par., the aspiration of final

^dh

is nojt

thrown back

upon the

initial

^6, because

supposed to be absorbed by the

IT tarn

of the termination,

changed into V dham. The same applies to ^fiit abanddhdh, though here the termination *TH thdh was aspirated in itself.
1 1

8.

If

^gh,

^ dh, V dh,

^(bh,

^ A,

at the

end of a

syllable, lose their aspiration either

as final or as being followed

by VS^dhv (not by fv c?Ai),

H bh, ^s, they throw their aspiration

^
d,

back upon the

See
93.

initial letters,

provided these letters be no other than *T^,

^d, W6.

Ex. Inflective base '^^budh, to know; nom. sing, y^bhut, knowing. Instrum. plur. ^JHfft bhudbhih.
Loc. plur. iJPJ bhutsu.

Second Second

pers. plur. aor.

Atm. ^Hp| abhuddhvam.

T\fl^

pers. sing. pres. Intens.

+ ftf = ^jWlfro

bobodh+si=bobhotsi,

56
Desiderative of
<^>T

INTERNAL SANDHI.
dabh,
iHsfi dhipsati, he wishes to hurt.

119-

First pers. sing. fut. of

"^-f **nf*T = >irtll(l

bandh+sydmi=zbhantsydmi,

shall

bind.

<? dah,

to burn

^T^dhak, nom. sing, a burner.

^JTSEf adhugdhvam,
2. p. plur.

g^
Note

duh, to milk

impf.

Atm.

but

2. p. sing.

imp. Par.

jf*V dugdhi.

^V dadh,

the reduplicated base of VT dhd, ^VTfiT dadhdmi,

I place,

throws the lost

aspiration of the final Vc?A back on the initial ^d, not only before S^dhv, before TT t and ^(th, where we might have expected the application of 1 17.

^s, but likewise

1H <^^ 4-

VWt

dadh + tah
dhatse ;

= dhattah
+ ^*f

^"^

= <^ + *n TOT: dacta + thah = dhatthah ; \fS dadh + dhvam = dhaddhvam.

;

+ % = VW cfotta + 5e =
letter,

1 19. If ^T c^, f ./, l^y^ are final, or followed by a termination beginning with any except vowels, semivowels, or nasals, they are changed to off k or *T#.

^T + fv = ?^^ yunj-\-dhi=yungdhi, 2. p. But loc. sing. ^T^T + ^= ^jf^ vdch+i=vdchi.

Ex. Nominal base "^T^vdch; voc. ^Tct?a&, speech. Verbal base "3^vach; 3. p. sing. pres. "^^ + flf

<

= '%favach+ti=vakti.
!

sing. imp. Join

= =

+ ft = ^Tt
1

vdch+ya vdchya, to be spoken. vach+mah vachmah, we speak. ^x^J t?acA-|-t?aA= vachvah, we two speak. (See
1

cfT

*!

also

124.)
final of a

20. "^s^ at the

end of nominal and verbal bases,

if it

becomes the

word,

is

changed

into

<T t.

Ex. Nominal base fg\dvish; nom. sing, fs^dvit, a hater. Verbal base fg\dvish; 3. p. sing. impf. Par. -ws^ advet, he hated.
121. Before verbal terminations beginning with

^s,

it is

treated like

"3F

k.

Ex. ^"5

ftf =.

\ fg|
or

dvesh+si = dvekshi, thou

hatest; aor. ^f^l

^ i^advikshat,

he hated.

*}\V#rApokshyati (posh+syati), he will nourish.

122. Before
IT t

"^M

it

remains unchanged

itself,

but changes J(t and

^th

into

3f

and

"$th.

Ex.

'%'^+ KJ
^ffrN

= "%FJ dvish+tah = dvishtah, they (two) hate.

T^f,
"Zj,

+ 7R = *lfQ8W sarpish-\-tamam=sarpishtamam, the best clarified butter.

^th, ^ d, l{dh,
^th, Tc?,

This rule admits of a more general application, namely, that every dental Tw, and ^s, is changed into the corresponding lingual, if preceded by
^(n, and ^sh.

^dh,

(Pan. vin. 4, 41.)

Ex.

ft^ + fV

+ 1"?
^5

rrffr

-f- "ff

= fkf^ dvid+dhi= dviddhi, hate thou. = mrid+ndti=.mridndti. = ^ &?+ #e = he praises. = "^TT shat+ndm = shanndm, of six. shat+navatih = shannavatih,
*j'^illflf
ftf e,
rri

ninety-six.

(Pan. vin. 4, 42,

vart.)

123. Before other consonantal terminations

<

^sh

is

treated like

Z^t.

Ex. fe

^+

l4

= fk^|' dvish+dhvam-=dviddhvam,
c?MA+-= dvitsu, loc.
plur.

2. p. plur.

imp. Atm. Hate ye

among

haters.

128.

INTERNAL 8ANDHI.
will

57
be seen

Exceptions to this rule, such as TJ*{dhrish, nom. V^rfArt'A, and to other rules under the heads of Declension and Conjugation.
124. In the roots

shine, fjftsrij, to let forth,

WT^bhrdj, to shine, lp(mrij,to wipe, 11^ yaj, to sacrifice, TXi(rdj, to and m^bhrajj, to roast (VKi^bhrasj, Pan. vm. 2, 36), the final
is

f[j

is

replaced by *{sh, which, in the cases enumerated above,

liable to

the same changes

as an original

^A. Thus
.

+ T = 1J1T mrij+tka = mrish(ha, you wipe. = TT^| rdj + su = rdfsu ^H<^ + l4 = ^Hf^f ay qj + dhvam = ayaddhvam TT*^ + *}
>p^
125.

^j,

Most verbal and nominal bases ending in S^, "^ chh, l^ksh, 124) are treated exactly like those ending in simple ^*A.

^tch (some

in

Ex. Nominal base

Put.

= qjii(*i ves+sydmi=zvekshydmi, shall enter. q*3^-f Fut. periphr. + = ^7T ves+td=.veshtd, he will enter. + m = fi^ vis+dhvam=.viddhvam, enter you. rt9^ = fq^tj rw+*M = r*Y*M, among men. Loc. plur. f%5^+ ?J
t*uf*i
I

foetus; nom. f*T^vf> a man of the

third caste.

ifT

Nominal base ili^prdchh ; nom. TRZprdt, an asker. Verbal base V^prachh; IF^. + twPM Utt^lfr prachh+sydmi=prakshydmi,

shall

ask.

= WT prachh + td=prashtd, he will ask. = Ml<^tJ prdchh+su =prdtsu, among askers. Nominal base Jf^ltaksh; THST + ^ = JC&^taksh-\-su = tatsu, among carpenters. Nominal base TQraksh; *\\*J5{ + ^ = '!W^<J goraksh+su-=goratsu, among
herds.

cow-

Verbal base ^TGfchaksh;

"^TST

^fW +

*f

li

^=
,

^ nom.

= ^^ chaksh+se=chakshe, thou seest.

you
see.

^^" chaksh-}-dhve=zchaddhve,
sing. '^vrit.
tt*n(*i

to cut;

vrasch+sydmi

= vrakshydmi,
see,

I shall cut.

vrasch-\-td-=.vrashtd, he will cut.

126.

The

3^s'

of

f%S{dis,

to show,
is

^^ c?rV, to
A;.

Up^spris, to touch,

if final,

or

followed by Pada-terminations,

changed into ^

Ex. Nominal base

plur.

T7^ dis; nom. f$& dikshu.

sing, t^c^ dik ;

instrum. plur. f^f'Tt diybhih

loc.

"^3^ dris;

nom.

sing. 7f3^ drik ; instrum. plur.

^t^
is

drigbhih.

A: or of 31 s into TSJnas, the change ^ further particulars see Declension and Conjugation.

In the root

^t

optional (Pan.

vm.

2, 63).

For

127.
is

h at the end of verbal bases,

if

followed by a termination beginning with ^s,

treated like

^gh,

i.e. like

a guttural with an inherent aspiration, which aspiration

may

be thrown forward on the

initial letter.

Ex.

75^

+ ti(i = co\asi(#i leh-\-sydmi= lekshydmi, I shall lick. <^ + Wrf*T = ^Hy^nfH doh+sydmi = dhokshydmi, I shall milk.
whether at the end of a word or followed by terminations, ^A and in ^gh in most words beginning with ^d (Pan. vm. 2,32), like < dh in all other words.
I

128. In all other cases,

is

treated either (i) like

!

ushnih

or (2)

58
Ex.
(i)

INTERNAL SANDHI.
V^duli; nom. Vffidhuk ; instrum.
part. pass. <|7Vi dugdhah.
plur.

$
loc. plur.

129-

vfrn: dhugbhih ;

WZdhukshu;

"^ + TH =*^<oJ
Ex.
(2)

drih+tah
*'

= dridhak, fast,

is

an exception.
loc. plur.

fc5^

lih j

nom. fc57 Kf

lidbhih ; instrum. plur. f&f^jt

vdh, ^TT^J vdtsu).

= ^: ruh+tah =
In c*te:
74tf&a$
"^

and ^"t rudhah,

d-fT? dh
(

^+!{dh+t
first

are

changed to
is

?T

+^

dh+dh,

or,

more

correctly, to

117); then the

dropt and the vowel lengthened.

Tf

The only vowel which is not lengthened is "^J ri ; e. g. vaA is changed The vowel of *T^ sah and

^
2,

^ + ^\= ^
into

vrih-{-ta

= vridha.

o (Pan. vi. 3, 112), unless

Samprasarana
129.

is

required, as in the part. tKiSt udhah.

(Pan. vi.

i, 15.) is

The

final

WA

of certain roots ('ttdruh,

Jjfi

muh,

^^ snuh, f^^ snih)

in

treated

either as "3 gh or
IJali

<^c?A.

From

^^

druh, to hate,

we have

compounds the nom. sing.

dhruk and "^T

130.

c?Arwf (Pan.

vin.

33)

past participle '5n^ drugdhah or

is

"^t drudhah.

The

final "^

A of Tt naA, to bind,

treated as
i

dh.

Ex.

"grrnr^ updnah, slipper; nadbhih.

nom.

sing.

<m

*i

j^

updnat ; instrum. plur. ^mif|ft upd-

Past part. pass. T^

fft

T^; nah+tah=naddhah, bound.

As

to

^R"TF

anaduh, ox, &c., see Declension.

131.

The

^5

or followed

by Pada-terminations, and the

Pada-terminations only,

of the nominal bases tm^dhvas, falling, and ?5T^sra5, tearing, if final s of vas, the termination of the part.

"^

perf. Par., before

is

changed to T^

(Pan. vin.

2, 72).

See,

how-

ever,

173,204.

Ex.

nom. plur. SERK dhvasah, instrum. plur. to fall; nom. sing. $5R^ dhvas, V3R(^dhvat, VSffjgl dhvadbhih.
-

132. Verbal bases ending in

tenses beginning with

^s, change ^s. (Pan. vn. 4, 49.)

fut.

it

to

T{t,

before terminations of the general

Ex. ^f^vas, to dwell;

^5[

+ tHifi = wn(i

vas+sydmi

= vatsydmi.

Before other terminations beginning with ^s, final

^s

remains unchanged.

^^ + TT = ^fW vas+se =. vasse, thou dwellest. = 'flfUf sas+si = sassi, thou sleepest. ^T^ + + % = fHw nims+se=nimsse, thou kissest. fT^ HH^ + ftf = Tj^fsq pepes+si=pepeshshi, thou hurtest.
"ftf

100.)

In certain verbs final

H s is

dropt before

TV

dhi of the imperative.

= sddhi. (Pan. vi. 4, 35.) chakds+dhi = chakddhi.

In the same verbs
^(s,

may

final ^s, if immediately followed- by the termination of the second person, be changed to or remain 1{t ^s.

^$TT^ +

^ = ^T^T T^ or ^n: asds+s = asdt or asdh.

it

Before the J(t of the third person,

always becomes

Tf t.

= asdt.

(Pan.

vm.

2, 73, 74.)

-$

137.
Tf t,

INTERNAL 8ANDHI.
%d,Vldh before the

59
may be
regularly repre-

Final

of the 2nd pers. sing. Imperf. Par.

sented by l(t

orby^*;
n an d

*&l(avet or *ftl aveh,thou knewest;

U ^1(arvnat or W^Hn arvnah,

sibilants (but

thou preventedst. (Pan.

*33'
*{

vm. 2, 75.)
at the

*^wi

end of a nominal or verbal base, before

not

before the *Jsu of the loc. plur.), are changed to Anusvara.

Ex. HH HI U PH jighdmsati, he wishes to

kill,

from ^5T han.

from 1P{kram. But *jf?T^5 suhinsuy among good strikers, from j(V^ suhin, Pada base of *ffi^ suhims. If 5^ n were changed to Anusvara, we should have to write "jjf*J suhimshu.
kramsyate, he
will step,

^^Tn

134.

^n

remains unchanged before semivowels.

is killed,

Ex. "^Tn" hanyate, he

from

'%*^han.

ni^ tanvan, extending, from

^y, ^ r, "^
/.

iP^

ten.

M-ql prenvanam*,
I

propelling,

from

^5^nt?.

35-

m remains *^
Mm-yah,

unchanged

before the semivowels

Ex.

cfiTWj:

to be loved,

from ^IW

A;am.

TTPff

tdmram, copper, from Tf^ /aw and suflix ^ra. ^^J amlak, sour, from ^W am and sunix <5 la.

136.

^w at the end
vm. 2, 65.)

of a nominal or verbal base,

if

no

suffix follows, or if followed

*T

a Pada-termination, or
5^w.

by personal terminations beginning with

or

^u,

is

by changed into

(Pan.

Ex. H$!Ri{prasdn, nom. sing., and H^nf^Tt prasdnbhih, instrum. plur., U3li**j prasdnsu,
loc. plur.,

from H^Il'T^rasam, quieting. (Pan.

vm. 2, 64.)

VI*IN aganma, we went, and ^i*i<r aganva,

71*^

we two went, from

T^ + T gam+ma,

+ ^ gam-\-va.
M^imt prasdmah.

But nom.

plur.

regard to nasals, the general rule is that in the body of a word the firsts, the seconds, the thirds, and the fourths of each class can
J 137.

With

only be preceded by their own used as a general substitute. ($

fifths,

though

in writing the dot

may be

8.)

Ex. ^n^TUTT or
or

^i^jcfcri

dsankate or dsamkate, he fears.

dlingati or dlimgati, he embraces.

or

^ifc^Jlfri'

^^mfa vanchayati or vamchayati, he

cheats.

or

^r*^

utkanthate or utkamthate, he longs.

to go.

or

ifj

gantum or gamtum,

or

giTr?r

kampate or kampate, he trembles.

In compounds, such as
final

*R-J-^H sam + kalpah,

it

is

optional to change

^ m, standing at the end of a Pada, into the fifth or into real Anusvara ; hence ^cR^q: or TTf^r: samkalpah or sankalpah. (See J 77.)
* If the

^ n before
(

^v

were treated as Anusvara, the second

Pan.

^ n would have to be

changed

into a lingual

96).

vm. 4,

2, vart.
I

60
J 138.

INTERNAL SANDHI.
In the body of a word, Anusvara
s^
s9
is

138-

the only nasal that can stand

before the sibilants

^ sh, ^ s,

and f

h.

Ex.

^R damsanam, biting,
*r^n

^nrft yajdmsM, the prayers.

hamsahj goose,

t*lT ramhate,
after

he goes.
*^j
is

139.

Tw following immediately

^ch

or

changed to *T

n.

Ex. TT^T ydchnd, prayer.

} 140.

TTsjftra/m, queen.

^fsir

jajne,

he was born.

^chh

in the middle
to ^.chchh.
;

of a word between vowels or diphthongs

(See
91.)

must be changed

Ex. ^f^ richh, to go

'^^fir richchhati, he goes.

Jra: mlechchhah, a barbarian.

141.

"Schh before a

suffix

beginning with Tn or

Hm

is

.changed to

Tf? s.

Ex.

IT^

+ T= 1TW prachh+na=prasnak, question. = HmlVi pdprachh+mi=pdprasmi, I HlH^ + 1*T

^
v this change
is

ask frequently.

Before

optional.

142. Roots ending in T^y

and

^v

throw

off their final letters before

terminations

beginning with consonants, except

^ y.

Ex.

^+ = tjjn puy-\-tah=putak, decaying. = THU; turv+nah=. turnah, killed. + llH = fffiC^l^didiv -\-vdn = didivdn, having played.
7K
143. Roots ending in Wt?

and ^>,

if

preceded by

3(i

or

TM, lengthen
(Pan.

their

^i and
2, 77.)

"3"

w,

if

^v or^r
1

is

followed immediately by a terminational consonant.

vm.

See

No.

92, rT^ tvar.

cflsHPff dtvyati,

Ex. f^ div, to play, ^

>-,

he plays.

Bened. ^leqm dw-ydsam.

to exert, JjrSt gurnah.

e.

'i.

vn^jir}, to grow old, *f\^\njiryati.

"^.gir,

voice; instrum. plur. iftf^t girbhih, loc. plur. Tftftgirshu.

There are exceptions. (Pan.

vm. 2,

79.)

"^^Mr,

to sound.

Bened. ^fUra kurydsam.

is

On

a similar principle ^T u

lengthened in jj^-f^rnn

= ij^i^*

turv+dvah

= turvdvak.

(Pan.

vm.
144.

2, 78.)

Nominal and verbal bases ending

final after the loss of

in

^CV
nom.

and T^wr lengthen ^i and Tw, when

(Pan.

^r becomes
Ex. TT^-f

another final consonant.

vm.

2, 76.)

^= *f^

or

*f\tgir+s=gir or gfk,

sing, voice.

145. Nominal bases ending in S^z's or ^^ws (the 3^ is or I^MS being radical) lengthen ^ and ^fu when final, and before terminations beginning with *T bh or ^s.

Loc. plur.

^^^ + ^ = ^rt! J supis+su=supfyshuj

1

nom.

sing. masc.

and neut.

*|tfh supth.

Nom.

sing. masc. ^HjpT

+^T = ^n sajus+s-=sajuh; nom.

sing. neut. *HT* sajuh.

-$

148.

INTERNAL 8ANDHI.
Doubling of Consonants.

61

146. According to

some grammarians any consonant except ^r and

A,

followed by

another consonant and preceded by a vowel, may be doubled ; likewise any consonant or * A, these letters being themselves preceded by a vowel. As no practical preceded by
^lr
object
is

obtained by this practice,

it is

best, with Sftkalya, to discontinue

it

throughout.

In our editions doubling takes place most frequently where any consonant, except the
sibilants

and ?

h, is

preceded by
is

^r

or

A,

these being again preceded by a vowel.

Thus

^T% arka,

sun,

frequently written

^1%

arkka.

m(i\brahman may be written

If

%*i^6ra Amman.
first loses its aspiration.

an aspirated consonant has to be doubled, the

increase.

Thus

TOT or

^Ifa vardhana or varddhana,

147.

sibilant after

^> must
<;^Mn

not be doubled, unless

;

it

is

followed by a consonant.

Tims

it is

always,

T^K

varshdh, rainy season

U<$:

ddarsah (Prat. 387), mirror.

it is

But we

may

write either <^Mff or

darsyate or darsfyate,

shown.

Explanation of some Grammatical Terms used by Native Grammarian*.

Some of the technical terms used by native grammarians have proved $ 148. so useful that they have found ready admittance into our own grammatical
terminology.

Guna and Vriddhi

any

are terms adopted

rians in the absence of

classical

words

to

by comparative grammamark the exact changes of

Most vowels comprehended under these words by Panini and others. Sanskrit grammars have besides sanctioned the use of such terms as
Parasmaipada, Atmanepada, Tatpurusha, Bahuvrthi, Karmadhdraya, Krit, Nothing can be more perfect than the Taddhita, Unddi, and many more.
grammatical terminology of Panini
peculiar system of grammar,
;

but as

it

was contrived
it

for his

own

it is difficult

to adopt part of

without at the

same time adopting the whole of

his system.

few remarks, however, on

some of Panini' s grammatical terms may be

few
are

useful.

All words without exception, or according to

some grammarians with

or

These roots dhdtus. very exceptions, have been collected in what are called Dhdtupdthas, root-recitals, the most
derived

from

roots

important of which is ascribed by tradition to Panini*. From these dhdtus or roots are derived by means of pratyayas or
not only
all

suffixes,

kinds of verbs, but

all

substantives and adjectives, and according

to some, even all

pronouns and

particles.

Thus from the

root

m^ man,

to

think,

we have not only

but likewise ?rgw man-u-te, he thinks,

R^ man-as,

mind,

HMU

mdnas-a, mental, &c.

Words thus

formed, but without as yet

any case-terminations attached to them, are called Prdtipadika, nominal bases. Thus from the root Sf^Ym, to beget, we have the prdtipadika or
*

Siddhanta-Kaumudi,

ed. Taranatha, vol. H. p.

I.

62
nominal base

GRAMMATICAL TERMS.

148.

nom.

sing,

^jan-a, man, and this by the addition of the sign of the becomes *F\\jan-a-h, a man.
nouns are of two kinds
:

Suffixes for the formation of

1.

2.

Those by which nouns are derived direct from roots Primary Suffixes, Those by which nouns are derived from other nouns Secondary Suffixes.
; ;

The former

are called Krit, the latter Taddhita.

*{r{jan

Thus ^jana, man,

is

derived from the root

by the Krit

suffix

a;

but

inffarf janina,

appropriate for

man,

is

derived from *ttjana

by

the Taddhita suffix

fT

fact.

The name prdtipadika would apply both to *&{jana and *&f\<ijanma, as nominal bases, ready to receive the terminations of declension. The Krit
1.

suffixes are subdivided into three classes

Krit, properly so called, i.e. suffixes

formed from roots with certain more or

by which nouns can be regularly less definite meanings. Thus

by means of the

Sanskrit grammarians form from ^^vep 9 to tremble, ^TTJ vepathu, trembling, sgrrsr svayathu, swelling, from fig km, to swell.
suffix

WJ athu,

kshavathu, sneezing, from TO kshu 9 to sneeze.

davathu, vexation, from g du, to vex, to burn.

2.

Kritya, certain suffixes, such as

rf^T

tavya, ^ffta aniya,

if

ya, JffoOT elima,

which may be treated as declinable verbal terminations. Thus from to do, is formed <#S<*i kartavya, Wtjtffa karaniya, CRT kdrya, cR^ kar,

what
3.

is

to be done, faciendum.

Unddi, suffixes used in the formation of nouns which to native

rians

gramma-

Thus form or meaning. from i&(vas 9 to dwell, both ^r vastu, a thing, and wi^vastu, a house.
seemed more or
less irregular, either in

The Taddhita

suffixes are

no further subdivided, but the feminine

suffixes

(stripratyayd) are sometimes treated as a separate class.

(pratyaya) 9 whether Krit or Taddhita, is raised to the dignity of a base (prdtipadika), and finally becomes a real word (pada) when it is finished by receiving a case-termination (vibhakti).
root, followed

by a

suffix

Every

base, with regard to the suffix

which

is

attached to

it,

is

called

Anga, body.

For technical purposes, however, new distinctions have been

introduced by Sanskrit grammarians, according to which, in certain declensions, a base is only called Anga before the terminations of the nom. and
ace. sing.,

nom. and
nom. and

ace. dual,

and nom.

plur. of masc.

and

fern,

nouns

besides the

ace. plur. of neuters.

The

vocative generally follows

the nominative.

These Anga cases together are called the Sarvandmasthdna.

Cases.

Bopp

calls

them the Strong

Before terminations beginning with consonants (likewise before Taddhitas

148.

GRAMMATICAL TERMS.

63

beginning with any consonant except ^ y) the base is called Pada, the same term which, as we saw before, was used to signify a noun, with a caseThe rules of Sandhi before these terminations termination attached to it.
are in the

main the same

as at the

end of words.
begin with vowels (likewise

Before the remaining terminations which

before Taddhitas beginning with vowels and

^ y)

the base

is

called

Bha.
it

Bopp
is

calls

the Pada and

Bha

cases together the

Weak

Cases ; and

when

necessary to distinguish, he calls the

Pada the Middle and the Bha the

Weakest Cases.

three

Nouns, whether substantives, adjectives, or pronouns, are declined through numbers with seven or, if we include the vocative, eight cases. A caseis

termination

called

1{sup

or fwf^i vibhakti,

lit.

division.

Verbs are conjugated through the active and passive voices, and some through a middle voice also, in ten moods and tenses, with three persons and
three numbers.

personal termination

is

called

fir^

tin or

Owta vibhakti.

A
called

declined

noun

as well as a conjugated verb, ending in a vibhakti, is

Pada.
comprehended under the name of Nipdta, literally what what takes its place before or after other words.
falls

Particles are

into a sentence,

All particles are indeclinable (avyaya).

Particles are,
1.

Those beginning with

cha, and,

i.

e.

list

of words consisting of
native grammarians.
collected

conjunctions, adverbs, interjections, collected

2.
t

by

Those beginning with u pra before, i. e. a list of prepositions in the same manner by native grammarians.

When
called

the prepositions beginning with

are called Karmapravachaniya.

Upasarga or Gati. adverbs which enter into close combination with verbs.
^Oeffl urikritya,
khdt,
i.

substantive, they they are joined to a root, they are The name of Gati is also given to a class of
if

pra govern a

When

Ex.

"astf

uri in

assenting

^TI^

khdt in

ttlrjirfl

khdtkritya, having

made

e.

the sound produced

by

clearing the throat.

64

DECLENSION.

149-

CHAPTER
DECLENSION.
$ 149.

III.

Sanskrit nouns have three

three

genders, Masculine, Feminine, and

;

Neuter

numbers, Singular, Dual, and Plural

and eight

cases,

Nominative, Accusative, Instrumental, Dative, Ablative, Genitive, Locative,

and Vocative.
Note
There are a few nouns which are indeclinable in Sanskrit: *5^ svar, heaven;
fire; W33(^samvat, year, (of

^*m^ayds,

Vikramaditya's era);

^tj svayam,
badi, the

self; *l|f*f saw*,

half; *j$.bhur, atmosphere; '^fesudi, the light fortnight,

and ^f^

dark fortnight,

the usual abbreviations for

5J^M^t

suklapakshah and ^snqsj: krishnapakshah, or

^c^UHft
is

bahulapakshah, (Warren, Kalasankalita, p. 361.)

in the

According to Radhakanta,

*jf?f

sudi

used

West

only. are pluralia tantum, used in the plural only

;

Some nouns
.

<f!TTJ

ddrdh, plur. masc. wife

i.

dpah, plur. fern, water

sikatdh, plur. fern,

^rtTS varshdh, plur. fern, the rainy season,

;

e.

the rains

sand

q^coit bahuldh, the Pleiades.

150. Sanskrit
i.
2,.

nouns may be divided into two

classes

Those that have bases ending in consonants. Those that have bases ending in vowels.
i.

Bases ending in Consonants.

in all consonants except *&n } 5Tn, Tty.

Iji.

Nominal bases may end

The

final letters of the inflective

bases of nouns, being either final or brought

in contact with the initial letters of the terminations, are subject to

some

of the phonetic rules explained above.

152. Bases ending in consonants receive the following terminations
:

Terminations for Masculines and Feminines.

SINGULAR.

DUAL.
is

PLURAL.

Norn.
Ace.
Instr.

^5

(which

always dropt)

^ am
^rra
ire

l^au
J
"

fa: bhih
1

Dat.
...

Abl.

^: ah
^r:

\vi\bhyah
J
]

Gen.
Loc.

ah

^TT

dm
ah

v
like

}^
Nom., except bases
in ^\n

:o *

Voc.

and "^s

^ au

ISM
^r:

Neuters have no termination in the Nom., Ace., and Voc. singular (Pada
cases).

They take \i in the Nom., Ace., and Voc. dual (Bha cases). They take ^ i in the Nom., Ace., and Voc. plural, and insert a
before the final consonant of the inflective base

nasal
is

(Anga

cases).

This nasal

.DECLENSION.
determined by the consonant which follows

65
hence

it;

^n before

gutturals, ^tf

before linguals, ^n before dentals, before palatals, i^m before labials, AnuT^n Neuters ending in a nasal or a semivowel do h. svara before sibilants and

not insert the nasal in the plural. (See Sarasv. i. 8, 5; Colebrooke, p. 83.) 153. Bases ending in consonants are divided again into two classes
:

1.

Unchangeable
of the

bases.

Changeable bases. first class have the same base before Nouns
2.

all

terminations, this base

being liable to such changes only as are required by the rules of Sandhi. Nouns of the second class have two or three bases, according as they are
followed

by certain terminations. Thus from TTW^ pratyach, Nom. Dual

tyanch.

Jfitf^

pratyanch-au

base

UW^ pra-

(Anga.)
;

Instrum. Plur. umfhr: pratyag-bhih

base

M^f^pratyach.
(Bha.)

(Pada.)

Gen. Dual

Tfift^h:

pratich-oh

base

Itfffa^pratich.

i.

UNCHANGEABLE BASES.

Paradigm of a regular Noun with unchangeable Base.

Bases ending in / are not liable to and any phonetic changes $ 154. <^ before the terminations, except that in the Nom. Sing, the ^s of the termi-

^w

nation

is

dropt (see $ 114; 55)

TQ^n.

and that

in the Loc. Plur. a

may be
and

inserted after the final

Base ^T^t^suffdn, a ready reckoner, masc.

root IRT ^*M, to count.)

fern. neut.

(from

*J

su, well,

(Accent, Pan. vi.

i,

169.)

SINGULAR,
MASC. FEM.

DUAL.
MASC. FEM.

PLURAL.
MASC. FEM.
\

N.

A.
I.

sugdn-au

^n^H

sugdn-ah

sugdn-am
*J

WT sugdn-d
sugdn-e

HlUl?t sugdn-bhih
sugdn-bhydm
\

D.

Ab

sugdn-bhyah

G '}
L.

sugdn-ah

sugdn-dm
I

sugdn-oh sugan-au
sugan-ah

sugn-i
an

V.

NEUTER.
SINGULAR.

DUAL.
sugdn-i

PLURAL.

N. A.V.
*

*p*l sugdn f
74.
is

sugn-

Or

l7^! sugdnt-su,
all,

t As the accent in the vocative

once for
that wherever the
its

always on the
ace.

first syllable, it

should be remembered,
is

nom.

and

voc. are given together, the vocative

under-

stood to have

proper accent on the

first syllable.

The

vocative of the neuter sugan

would therefore be, not sugan, but sugan.

DECLENSION.
in gutturals, 155. Bases ending

^ k,

^kh,

ir

#, ^ffh.

These bases require no

special rules.
fern. neut.

Base TRtsPB sarvaSdk, omnipotent, masc. and root 3 &%> to be able.)

SINGULAR.
MASC. FEM.

(from

*f

sarva,

all,

DUAL.
MASC. FEM.

PLURAL.
MASC. FEM.

N.V.
A.
I.

*t
^%5nfc sarvasdkam

sarvasdkah

**imm,aOkd
sarvasdgbhyah
r

D.
Ab.l
sarvasdkah
,

'

Q
L.

sarvasakoh
sarvasdksTiu *

, ,.

sarvasdkdm

sarvasdki

NEUTER.
SINGULAR.

DUAL.

PLURAL.
sarvasdnki

N. A.V. '^5^1 All regular

sarvasdk

^^"h

sarvasdki

nouns ending in

A:,

A;

may be
of
^rfsr^
156.
picture,

declined after the model

sarvasdk.

Base ending

in^M.

faRffa(chitratikkf painter, (from f%^ chitra,

and

to paint.) root f&^likh,

SINGULAR.
MASC. FEM.

DUAL.
MASC. FEM.

PLURAL.
MASC. FEM.
i-+ * chitralikhah
/,

N.V.
A.
I.

cUtralik^
f

chitrahkhau

chitralikham J
chitralikhd
"1

cUtraligbUh

D.
I
t

h
chitralikhah .
\

f<^r<4^u

p.

.r^i^i.

chitrahkhoh
chitralikshu*

L-*

7-77.

chitralikham
T,

L.

f^^fc^r/?r chitralikhi

NEUTER.
SINGULAR.
DUAL.
chitralikU

PLURAL.

N. A.V.

5fe

chitralihkhi

Note In the paradigms of regular nouns with unchangeable consonantal bases it will be sufficient to remember the Nom. Sing., Nom. Plur., Instr. Plur., Loc. Plur., and Norn.

On

the change of su after "3U, see *J

100.
I.

R& instead of

T^kh,

see

113; 54.

158.

DECLENSION.
The Ace.
Instr. Dat. Abl.

67

Plur. Neut.

Gen. Loc. Sing., Nom. Ace. Voc. Gen. Loc. Dual,

Ace. Gen. Plur., follow the

the Instr. Plur.

Nom.
is

Plur.

The

Instr. Dat. Abl.

Dual, Dat. Abl. Plur., follow

The Vocative

the same as the Nominative.

like

157. Regular

nouns to be declined
NOM. 8.

BASE.
fftl(harit, green

NOM.PL.M.F.

INSTR. PL.

LOC. PL.

NOM. PL. NEUT.

f fVj^
harit
vif*r|ti|i

^(Vn.
haritah

^Wilt
haridbhih
%tf' 1*1(5!

f fU4l
haritsu

^(Xfn
harinti
l

m.

f.

n.

^ifr

wifagnimath, fire-kindling
n.

VffjrWYj:

>P"i*iw

wi*iiPiq

m.

f.

agnimat* agnimathah agnimadbhih\ agnimatsu% agnimanthi

^Q^suhrid, friendly
m.f. n.

g^
si i hr it

*J^t
suhridah

^<jf:
suhridbhih
^jfe*

*J37*J

^^
suhrindi

suhritsu

^{budh, knowing m. f. n.

ijl^

^VJ
\\

^P5
bhutsu

7^
bundhi
1

bhut
^J*^

budhah
JPi;

bhudbhfh

*{gup, guardian
m.
f.

5^*^
gubbhih
<*<^f*Tt

79
gupsu
cf|c|H{

Sf^

n.

gup

gupah

gumpi
4^f*T -kakumbhi

JT5pT kakubh, region

f.

4^;^
kakup

F^Tt
kakubhah

kakubbhih

kakupsu

Bases ending in palatals, ^ch, ^ c^ Bases ending in ^ ch change ch into R k, or

I 158.

IT ^r,

except

when

followed

by a termination beginning with a vowel.

Base ^^^Jalamuch, masc. cloud (water-dropping).
SINGULAR.
MASC. FEM.

DUAL.
MASC. FEM.
"]

PLURAL.
MASC. FEM.
1

N.V.
A.
I.

vK&ttjalamuk
io*i"*i

>

^c^H^T jalamuchau

>

ico^^ii jalamuchah

jalamucham

]
~]

^TOT^n jalamuchd

nc5^ f*

jalamugbhih
jalamugb1iyaH

D.
Ah. Ab.
1 1

^^jalamuche
t

TOWin jalamugb hydm

[

^^
*i &*{'*

jalamuchah
1
m.

G.
L.

^ .^

jalamuchoh

^j,

W&$*1jalamuchdm

i*jni jalamuchi

NEUTER.
SINGULAR.
DUAL.
*T c^fl^ jo lamu cM

PLURAL.
jalamufichi

N. A.V.

5Tc51 <%jalamuk

Decline like
skin
;

fTc3$^ jalamuch,
fern, light
;

^n^

vdch, fern, speech

W9

tvach, fern,

^^ ruch,
*

^^ sruch,
1(t.

fern, ladle.

^th

final

changed into

See

113; 54.
54.
i.

i.

Final

^5
||

dropt,

55.

t See

66.

J See

See

118.

68
159. Special bases in
BASE.
^5*1 krunch*,

DECLENSION.
^ch.
NOM.S. INSTR.PL. LOC.PL.

159-

NOM.PL.

moving crookedly,

"^
krun

"J^fa
krunbhih
Ul^'fa:

^Q
krunkshu

"f^* (Accent, Pan. vi.

krunchah
JtHlJ (Accent, Pan. vi.

i,

182)

a curlew
if it

means worship- TTT^

pran

Tlh|

1,

182)

ping

pranbhih prdnkshu

prdnchah (Ace. the same)

^^ vrisch f, cutting
1

^7
mit%

^*
vridbhih

f^l
vritsu

^f*

(Accent, Pan. vi.

i,

168)

vnschuh

Bases ending in *&.chh change "^ chh into 3^s, which becomes before consonants. (See 125; 174.6: Pan. vi. 4, 19.)
60.

7 t, when

final,

and

NOM. SING.
TffRZprdchh, an asker

NOM.PL.

INSTR.PL.

LOC.PL.

NOM. PL. NEUT.

Tfif$[prdmsi

Tfl^prdt W$f\prdsah UTSfftt prddbhih

m^prdtsu

161. Bases ending in if regular, follow the *^j,

example of nouns in "^ch, except that

they preserve *{j

BASK.
ruj, disease

before vowels.

NOM. SING.
^TofT

NOM.PL.
^ITt rujah

INSTR.PL.

LOC.PL.
^jTST

NOM.PL. NEUT.
f runji

ruk
tirk
\\

^^Tt

rugbhih

rukshu

^T urj, strength

"31^

*3&(\ urjah

^Rfr^J tirgbhih

"3R3

drkshu

1!^ urji

Other regular nouns in *^j,

^i
frcf

^f^T^vanij, m. merchant; fiTO^ bhishaj, m. physician;

f.

^ ritvij,

m.

priest; &5tsraj,

garland;

41

^^om,/,

n. blood.

(On

the optional forms

of

vj^^amj,

see

214.)

if^majj,

Nom.

Sing.

T^ mak,

diving.

162. Bases ending in to *{j changeable

^ d.
71
or

Some

bases ending in *tj change 1TJ into

^ d when final, and

before terminations

beginning with consonants.

* Derived from the root

^^krunch.
114.

The Nom.

Sing, would have been ^pfi

+ 1{krunk
According

+s; ^s and

FA;

are dropt, see

f Derived from the root 'ZF^vrasch,

(in the

Dhatupatha, ^fld*^), to cut.

S^^'is dropt,

to Sanskrit grammarians, the penultimate

^s

or

and ^(ch before consonants

or

if final

changed into Vt.

(See

114.)
is

The form

^ftvrit (not 'ffZvrat}

confirmed by Siddhanta-Kaumudi (1863), vol.

i.

p. 182.
||

On

the two final consonants, see

55.

The Nom.

Plur. Neut.

would be

"^rf^ urji

or 3OTn

ttmr/t*.

At the end
is

of

compounds

the optional forms are ^if^ urji or 01(3* urnji.

i.
I

The

latter

form

confirmed by Colebrooke, the Siddhanta-Kaumudi, vol.

p. 194,

and the Prakriya-Kaumudi.

i

The Prakriya-Kaumudi
i

(p.

44

a) says
i

"3^
i

^ft

^gfrf
i,

^rf^i ^|f^ ^rfrr^: ^|f^ ^T^T

72, vart.)

^WTT^ ^ft^w%

*rffst

(Pan.vn.

i<53-

DECLENSION.
samrdj, masc. sovereign.

69

Base

SINGULAR.
MASC. FEM.

DUAL.
MASC. FEM.

PLURAL.
MASC. FKM.

N.V.
A.
I.

4
samr* rdjam

\
\

samr dj an

samrdjah
:

samrdjd
samrdje
1

samrddbhih

D.
Ab.
G.
L.

samrddbhydm
\

Hyi^*K samrddbhyah
*fliii samrdjdm

samrdjah

j
,

samrdjoh

The words which

from the roots OT5T

follow this declension are mostly nouns derived, without any suffix,

6Artf/

(j^THJ,

not

^fT3j),

to shine;

1T mn;, to

clean

T^yo;

(except

^J Prf ^ ritvij), to sacrifice;

tT^rtf;,

to

shine, to rule;

to dismiss, to create, ^p^*n;',

and WJJ^asn;', blood, are not derived from (^n^sro/, wreath, a mendicant. roast (T5T). Also Tfft$K*{parivrdj
',

^5^n;)j HM^bkrajj,

to

BASE.

NOM. SING.

NOM. PLUR.

IN8TR. PLUR.

LOC. PLCB.

f^TTS^ vibhrdj, resplen

dent
i% y worshipper of the gods
visvasrij, creator

mbhrdtf
<^"3
devet

vibhrdj ah

vibhrdtlbhih

vibhrdtsu

devejah

devedbhih

devetsu

tqvjtii
visvasrit

of the universe

visvasrijah

visvasridbhih

visvasritsu

^parivrdj,

a men-

MPi^l^
parivrdt

dicant

parivrdjah
f^^i.i'ii

parivrddbhih

parivrdtsu

fq^Ki^UTJ
visvdrddbhih

rq*aKT^
visvdrdtsu

universal

monarch

visvdrdt

visvardjah

JJ5^ bhrijj, roasting

bhrtjjah
bhridbhtTt

bhritsu

163. Irregular bases in ^Tj.

BASE.
'll",

NOM. SING.

NOM. PLUR.
khdnjah

INSTR. PLUR.
J

LOC. PLUR.

lame

khanbhih

* Cf.

76.

t From another

root,

vibhrdk,

famfh?. vibhrdgbhih &c. may be formed. (Siddh.-

Kaum. vol.
J
||

i.

p. 165.)
efefla,

From
The

god, and ^H^ yq;, to sacrifice, contracted into ^"5^ y. lengthening of the ^T a in f^I rt?a takes place whenever *^^'
3, 128.)
i.

is

changed into

a lingual. (Pan. vi.

IT

See Siddh.-Kaum. ed. Taranatha, vol.

p. 165.

70
2.

DECLENSION.

164-

name of a Vedic priest, has two bases. The Norn. Sing, is vt^MiJ avaydh, *RiRv{avaydj, and all the cases beginning with consonants (Pada cases) are formed from the same The Voc. Sing., too, is irregular, being, against the rule of base, ^ra^ avayas.
these bases, identical with the Norn. Sing.
if

Some grammarians, however,

allow

^rezi: he avayah.

Base

^RTRH avayas and vtq*u^ avaydj.

SINGULAR.
MASC.FEM.

DUAL.
MASC.FEM.
I

PLURAL.
MASC. FEM.
L

N.
A.
I.

TJ

avaydh

viq*(mi avaydjau

avaydjah
avayobhifr

v<q*iin avaydjam
avaydj d
avaydje
1 >
J 2
.

D.
Ab. b.

avayobhydm

avayobhyah

avaydjah

avaydjdm

L.

}*iinnlS
like

avaydjoh

avayahsu
like

V.

avaydh or viq*(i avayah

Nom.

Nom.

164. Bases ending in

r.
i

r, are preceding the In the if the lengthened, ^r is final or followed by a consonant (f 144). Loc. Plur. the final r remains unchanged though followed by "S sh. ( 90.)

Bases ending in ^ r are regular, only ^

and

7 u,

"

Base frrr^r,

fern, voice.

SINGULAR.
MASC. FEM.

DUAL.
MASC. FEM.
r

PLURAL.
MASC. FEM.
>

N.V.
fJTU girau
fiRt girah
TftfH: girbht'h
f

A.
I.

D.

Tft^T girbhydm

Tft^l girbhydh

Ab k

G '}
L.
J-

"PTTT

giram

fH^t

gir6h

Base

neut. water.

NEUTER.
DUAL.
vdri

SINGULAR.

N.A.V.
I.

^WT vdrbhydm
NOM. SING.

vdrbhih, &c.
LOC. PLUR.

BASE.
,

NOM. PLUR.

INSTR. PLUR.

f.

town
door
f.

Jf&purah
Ct
:

purbhih
j

c?t?ar, f.
Arir,

dvdrah

dvdrbhzh

?TT

dvdrshu

m.

n. scattering

k/h

According to Pan. vi.

i,

i,

168, aari

would have the accent on the

it

first,

while

according to Pan.vi.

171,

would have

on the second

syllable, because the

Nom. and

Ace. Dual in the neuter are not Tritiyadi, but are Asarvanamasthana.

t Siddh.-Kaum.

vol.

i.

p. 125.

-$

[65.

DECLENSION.

71

Bases in ^s. (A.) Bases formed by the suffixes VT^as, ^w, f^us. Bases ending in ^$ change the ^s according to the general euphonic
J 165.

rules explained above.

as, if final,

Thus
(

becomes w: ah.

83.)

as followed by terminations beginning with vowels remains unchanged.

and

is

changed

to

and us followed by terminations beginning with vowels are ^and f^ish and ush. (See J 100.)

as before

^ bh

becomes

^ft o

($ 84. 3)

become ^.ir and T^ur. ($82.) before ^su becomes W(as or

*r:

ah;

^ and 7^ ^ & and 7^

is

us before

^ bh
*J

us before

*w

become ^ish or

^: i#,

wA. T^MS/J or T:

Besides these general rules, the following special rules should be observed : 1. Nouns formed a in the Nom. Sing. lengthen their by the suffix

^^as

masc. and

fern.,

but not in the Vocative.

(eifyzej/ifc)
;

Thus Nom.

Sing.

m.

f.

*ptTK sumandh, well-minded

2.

Nouns formed by the vowel in the Nom.

^TtflPff: sujyotify,

suffixes

or

g^

is

Voc. tJ*Hi sumanah. or us do not lengthen their

Sing. masc. and fern.

Hence Nom.

Sing.

m.

f.

n. light
^TB|:

*J^Er:

and rtftPH: jyotih, having good light, *J su, good, suchakshufy, having good eyes, from *J su, good, and
from
(Pan. v. 4, 133, com.)
y

chakshuh, n. eye.

3.

Neuter nouns in ^r^as, ^(is

it

"&3(us,

lengthen their vowel and nasalize

in the

Nom.

Ace. Voc. Plur.

From

JR: manah, *HJfa mandmsi ; from

^TSffa

**ftftt jyotih,

Tfl tijfajyotimshi ;

from ^T^t chakshuh,

fern.

chakshumshi.

Base

*p?F^ sumdnas, well-minded, masc.

neut. mind.)

neut. (from

su

and

m^mdnas,

SINGULAR.
MASC. FEM.

DUAL.
MASC. FEM.

PLURAL.
MASC. FEM.

A.
I.

tpntt sumdnasam

sumdnasau

HH^: sumdnasah

D.

1
'

n
L.

-^

sumdnasah
I

^
il"'l;

r
<}ini

sumanasi

f J

sumdnasoh

^HH^I sumanasam

?*^" sumanahsu
^HH^I
sumanasau

V.

'5*^* sumanah

^intil sumanasah

NEUTER.
SINGULAR.

DUAL.
4J*Htfl sumanasi
fern.

PLURAL.

N. A.V.

5*Rt sumanah
rest like the

^iiirt sumdndmsi

The

masc. and

72
Base
?JTif)Prf^ sujyotis,
is,

DECLENSION.
well-lighted,

i66fern. neut.

masc.

(from

*j

su

and

neut. light.)

SINGULAR.
MASC. FEM.

DUAL.
MASC. FEM.

PLURAL.
MASC. FEM.

N.V.
A.
I.

sujy6tih

sujy6tishau

sujydtishah

sujyotisham
f

sujyotishd

sujydtirbhih

D.
Ab.

sujy6tishe

sujyrftirbhydm

sujy6tirbhyah

sujy6tisJiah

sujydtishdm
sujy6tishoh

L.

sujy6tishi

sujytitihshu

NEUTER.
SINGULAR.

DUAL.
sujy6tisM

PLURAL.
sujydtimslii

N.A.V.

The

rest like the masc.

and

fern.

Decline after the model of *JTT^ sumanas bases : following

and

sujyotis

the

%V^
^"^Tr:

vedhas,

Nom.

sing. ^VT* vedhdh,

m. wise.

^"S^
s.

^ chandramas,

N.

s.

chandramdh, m. moon.
prop, of a lawgiver,

"SFn^prachetas, N.

UHrilt prachetdh, m.,

Nom.

a deity.

f^R^v^%5,
f.

N. s. f^^ofi^ divaukas, N. s. fag inn vihdydh, m. bird.

HjTi*^ mahaujas,
s.
TIT?:

f^cfir: divaukdh,

m.
s.

TSC^K^apsaras, N.
s.

^3n*ro apsardh,

nymph.

N.

H^n:

mahaujdh,

m.
N.

f.

n.

very mighty.

TT^ pay as, N.

payah, n. milk.

s.

^R:

y^,

n. iron.

^^ yasa^, N.
%wA,
n. life,

s.

T^r: yasafy, n. praise.

s.

N.

s.

ffa: ^flviA^ n. oblation.

s.

^rNN^ archis, N.
age.

^rf$: archih, n. splendour.

^rrg^ dyus, N.
n.

^15:

^g^

vapus,

N.

s.

^j: vapuh,

body*.
166. 'STTJJara, old age,

may be

declined throughout regularly as a feminine. (See

238.)

There
that
it

is, however, another base *K$(jaras, equally feminine t, and equally regular, except is defective in all cases the terminations of which begin with consonants.

Any

of these neuter nouns

compound ;

may assume masc. and fern, terminations at the end qg^(V nashtahavih, Nom. sing. masc. one whose oblation is destroyed.
it is

of a

t Boehtlingk (Declination im
the dictionary, though oxytone,

in Sanskrit, p. 125) gave *&$(jaras, rightly as feminine;

by mistake put down

as neuter.

DECLEN8IOX.
Base Base

73

SINGULAR.
N.
A,
I.

SINGULAR.
deest; term.

^(^ jar dm

D.
Ab.
G.
L.
i

dya

mul jards-ah
"5TC^* jards-ah

jardyd

"*[TTQ jards-i

V.

deest

DUAL.
N.A.V.
l.D.Ab.
G. L.
f

DUAL.
"5TCHT jards-au

jardbhydm

deest

term.

IT

bhydm

jardyoh

l^tTit jards-oh

PLURAL.
N.V.
A.
I.

PLURAL.
K jards-ah
jards-ah
deest
;

-TO^WA
"SfTTJ

j'W/4

qfilf^jar^At'//

term. f
term.
**

D. Ab.
G.
L.

mT* jardbhyah

deest

IVtif jards-dm

deest

term.

167. In compositions, besides the regular forms

from

jara, viz.

nirjarah,

nirjard, fi^i. nirjaram, (ageless,) grammarians allow the base in

to be used

before

all

terminations beginning with vowels f.

SINGULAR.
MASC.

SINGULAR.
MASC.
deest
i

I:M

N.
A.
I.

fil<

nirjaram or
or

""

nirjarasam
nirjarasd
nirjarose
Tt

Trj3ti,<u nirj arena

l i.1

nirjarasina, masc.)

D. fn
Ab.
G.
L.

M nirjardya or
or

Pil<Lii^ nirjardt

nirjarasah
nirjarasah
nirjarasi

nirjarasdt, masc.)

T*f5T^T nirjarasya or
fVi^f^ nirjare or

nirjarasasya, masc.

V. fV|5FC nir/ara

deest

* The declension of ^^[jard, as a regular fern, in ^TTa, for the sake of comparison with the defective H^./aras.

is

given here by anticipation

t By a pedantic adherence to the Sutras of Panini some monstrous forms (included in brackets) have been deduced by certain native grammarians, but deservedly reprobated by
others.

(Siddh.-Kaum.
of

vol. I. pp. 103, 141.)

The declension

ftnfc

nirjarah, as a regular masc. in

i

^ST cr, is

given by anticipation

for the sake of

comparison with the defective fi

L,

<.^ nirjaras*

74:

DECLENSION.
DUAL.
N. A.V. Ufi<J nirjarau or
I.

68-

DUAL.
r*f*f<^T nirjarasau
deest

D. Ab.

fti<3 <jvqf

nirjardbhydm

G. L. fi>K*iu nirjarayoh or

fT^T^n*

nirjarasoh

PLURAL.
N.V.
A.
I.

PLURAL.
fa^HSt
nirjarasah

Pri^lt nirjardh or

f^TT^
fT^T*
f*l

nirjardn or

Pri^K.^ nirjarasah
deest deest

nirjaraih

(f^R%J

nirjarasaik, masc.)

D.Ab.
G.
L.

*n,*n nirjarebhyah

fT5fcU!!ff nirjardndm or

fl*l<JRT nirjarasdm
deest

PiTtO nirjareshu
like oRTTTT

Fern.

fMfTT nirjard,

X:a^.

Neut. Sing, deest (fr|*f<^ nirjarasam)

nirjarasi; Plur.
i

Dual

Neut. fH*rtmV/aram, like ^ifw kdntam.

<

nirjardmsi.

168.

^nnn^ anehas, m.

time, 'g^I^pMrwrfffm/as,

m. name of Indra, form the Norn.

Sing. vin^T anehd,

like

^^

?\

purudamsd, without
I?

final Visarga.

The

other cases are regular,

"QTfif^sumanas, m.
169.

Voc.

^^"^t he anehah.
the

^T^^usanas, m. proper name, forms

or o^ii usanah or

Nom.

Sing, o ^i ni usand and the Voc.

Sing.

^T^^usanan
170.

T^Rusana.

(Sar. I. 9, 73.)

(B.) Bases ending in radical f^s.

1.

From ffepinda,

a lump, and %fH(gras, to swallow, a

compound
is

is

formed, fferf1{pinda-

gras, a lump-eater.

From ni^
walking.

^n's,

to walk, and

***>

well,

a compound

formed, ^Jnl^ supis, well-

From Tj^

#ws,

to

sound, and ^J

SM,

well,

compound

is

formed, *jjj^ SM/MS, well-

sounding.
2.

In forming the

Nom.

Sing. m.

f.

(and neuter), the rules laid down before with regard

to nouns in which to a suffix, are simply inverted. ^Sl^as, ^^is, "31!(us, belong in leave it short. and us lengthen the vowel, nouns in

Nouns

j^'s

"3^

^K^as

Ex. Nom. Sing. m.

3.

f.

n. "ftf^U! pindagrah,

^fh supih,

^JJ

sutuh.

In the

Nom.

Ace. Voc. Plur. of neuters, nouns in "ZR^as, ^(is, '^(us, nasalize their

vowels, but do not lengthen them.

Ex. Nom. Ace. Voc. Plur. neut. fq^fffS pindagramsi, Jjf4(Vi supimsi,
4.

"fffffa

sutumsi.

Nouns

in 3j^is and "3^ws lengthen their vowels before consonants.

all

terminations beginning with

Ex. Instr. Plur. 'gtrtfH: supirbhih, *pjf*l suturbhih,

5.

*pj3 sutuhshu.
is

The

radical

^s of nouns

ending in

?^w

and T^MS, though followed by vowels,

not

liable to

be changed into ^sh.

(See

100, note.)

DECLENSION.
Base

75

h*n\pindagra8, eating a mouthful, maac. SINGULAR. DUAL.

MASC. FEM.
FEM.
pindagrafy

fern. neut.

PLURAL.
MASC. FEM.
I ftji

N.V.
A.
I.

indagrasau

pindagraaam
pindagrasd
pindugrobhih

pindagrase

pindagrobhydm
>

Ab.

TTTnjrn pindagrobhyah
pindagratdm

L.

pindagrahsu

NEUTER.
SINGULAR.

DUAL.
pindagrasi
fern. neut.

PLURAL.

N. A.V.

pindagrah
well-sounding, masc.

pindagramsi

SINGULAR.
MASC. FEM.

DUAL.
MASC. FEM.
sutusau

PLURAL.
MASC. FEM.
sutusah
suturbhih

N.V.
A.
I.

sutusam

D.
Ab.
G.

suturbhydm
suturbhyah

sutusdm
sut us ok

L.

NEUTER.
SINGULAR.

DUAL.

PLURAL.
sutumsi

N.A.V.
171.

Nouns

derived from desiderative verbs change

tcr

H s into

when

necessary.

Base fs M Hjt^ pipathis, wishing

read, masc. fern. neut.

SINGULAR.
MASC. FEM.

DUAL.
MASC. FEM.

PLURAL.
MASC. FEM.
pipathishah

N.
A.

pipathih
rMHf<j*f pipathisham

pipathirbhih

D.
pipathirbhyah
ft'^fT^J pipathishah

G.
L.

pipathisham

fM M

f<J

PM pipathishi

pipathishoh

:^ pipathihshu

NEUTER.
SINGULAR.

DUAL.

PLURAL.
pipathishi (see

N. A.V.

pipathih

fn M (V H^ pipathishi
* Siddh.-Kaum. vol.

172)

i.

p. 187.

83.

76
172.

DECLENSION.
The nouns
fern, blessing, 'STT'f^I^ dsis,

172-

declined like

fTTf^ pipathis, except in the

Nom.

and ^*J^ sajush, masc. a companion, are Ace. and Voc. Plur., if they should be

used as neuters at the end of compounds*.

List of different Bases in

^s.
INSTR. PL.

BASE.

NOM. PL. NOM. SING. MASC.FEM. NEUT. MASC.FEM.

sumandh 1 -nah sumanasah
^^ftflTt
sujyotih
ftfe?J!
id. id.

Loc. PL.

NEUT.

kind, m.f.n.

sumandmsi sumanobhih
^JWtfTfrfa
3{

sumanassu or -nahsu

Sjsftfrf^ sujyotis, well-lighted, m.f.n.

f^'^T^'^fpindagras,

*J jSftfiret

Wt

fin

T*T

'p'frfff^ or fr*J
sujyotishshuoi-tihshu

svjyotishah sujyotimshi sujyotirbhih

"nT^T^tt

TOf^jnT

f'JSiji'm*

nh?JW or
*<*!

?I^J

lump-eating,m.f.n.
^T3!fflchakds, splendid, m.f.n.

pindagrah
^cfiTt
id.

pindagrasah pindagramsi pindagrobhih pindagrassuor-grahsu

^"^iT^Tt
^fofiTtH
*|oftTf>Tt

w or ^<*Ti3J

chakdh

chakdsah

chakdmsi

chakdbhih

chakdssu or chakdhsu

(Accent, P. vi. 1,171.) doh

doshah
id. 3

domshi
^Tfani

dorbhih

d6shshu or dohshu
^tflt-^

^^T^ supis,
IffiHsutus,

well-

^^
l

?jftnTJ

^"^rnH*
supirbhih

or

^^5
^?:3
or

going, m.f.n.
well-

supih
^["ff*

supisah
id.

supimsi

supishshu or supihshu

"fffiK

51^"
sutumsi

?^lf^*
suturbhih
fo^^ftf*!:
5

?5^5

or

sounding, m.f.n.

sutuh
id. 3

sutusah

sutushshu or sutuhshu
ftf^<ft^5

f^^<S^pipathis,^esiY- fiwftl ous of reading, m.f.n. pipathih

f^Rf^^*

ftr^frf^

-^JJ

pipathishah pipathishi

pipathirbhih

pipathishshuor-thihsh

ous of acting, m.f.n. chikih

^ftf^FHdsis, blessing,
f.

chikirshah
id.

chikirshi^

chikirbhih
^JTT^I^f*!*

chikirshu
3r ^TT^ft^or W$ft*5

^T^*dsih
(Voc.
id.)

^Tlf^I'RJ

^TT^n"P^
dsimshi

dsishah
id.

dsirbhih

dsishshu or dsi dsihshu

"^^,
nion,

saJ us >

compa-

H^J

saju/i

fMt

^*|f^
sajumshi

^^fHJ
sajurbhih

^T5

m.

(Voc. id.)
id.

sajushah

sajushshu or sajuhshu

^f^^SM/tim5,onewho ^n^r^ strikes well, m. f. n. suhin

*

^T^H*
suhimsah

^nffa
suhimsi

^f^frHt
suhinbhih

^'^^
suhinsu 6

Some grammarians do not

sajumshi.
(jTTTTfir
II

allow the lengthening of the vowels in

^STT^flfft

dsimshi and
1

^^

X(T

^. d

iO.
i

H ^ -^^^1 ^ ^iJ^J
1

JTlfiT M f^ <*

N H4 W1TO*ftJPOT

^TTnTrj

^T^^t

"3T cfi^R

n tf 'fl * i^THTWTi

1)

This

may be

right according

to the strict interpretation of Panini, but the Pratisakhya (xui. 7) gives the rule in a more

general form, stating that every neuter ending in an si or shi. Anusvara, the Anusvara being followed

Ushman

has a long vowel before the

by

The Vocative

is

*}*Ri sumanah.

In the other paradigms

it

is

the same as the

Nominative.
2

<fft^c?os

may be

declined regularly throughout as a masculine.

But

it

is

likewise

declined as a neuter.
8
5

On
i.
i.

its

irregular or optional forms, see

4
6

214.
see
100, note.

Siddh.-Kaum.

vol.

p. 197.

^ s not changed into ^sh;

See
75.

Siddh.-Kaum. vol.

p. 194.

} 174.

DECLENSION.
and ^R^sras (from
into
T^J,

77
$3N^*rarfw, to fall),

to fall) 173. VSR^dhvas (from V&^dhvarhs, their used at the end of compounds, change

when
and

^a

in the

Nom. and Voc.

Sing.,

before terminations beginning with consonants.

N.V.

^JBfaefif

parnadhvat

N. A.V. Tn&wfT parnadhvasau

N. A. s<!)ttI parnadhvasah
I.

A.lfftVafQparnadhvasam I.D.Ab.'WRVSnfflparnadhvadbhydm
I.

^^isfyl parnadhvadbhih

T&SERTT parnadhvasd
174. Bases ending in

G. L. *riUnffc parnadhvasoh

L. TTO

WJ parnadhvatsu

^s,

f^sh, TS^clth, "^ksh, "^h.

Bases ending in these consonants retain them unchanged before all terminations beginning with vowels. Before all other terminations and when final, their final consonants are
treated either like
1.

^t

or like

k.

Bases derived from f^ST

into

efts',

to see, to show, UFS^sprtf, to touch, change 3^* ^S^dris,

k.

126.)

BASE.

NOM. SING.
f.

NOM. PLUR. NOM.PLUR. NEUT.

f^^It disah

INSTR. PLUR.

LOG. PLUR.

f^S^
2.

dis,

country

f^T

dtk

f^f^f

dim&

f^fnu
t

digbhih
AT.

$%% dikshu

into 7 Bases derived from to destroy, change "S^s TfS^nas, INSTR. BASE. NOM. SING. N. PL. N.PL.NEUT.
.

or

c^

PL.
Trfi
r

LOG. PL.

'oil

3 H $(jfvana6, m.f.n

^TMH^or

7T5T:

i%
<? t.

T^5T:or

H:

T^JorrEJ

life-destroying
3. All

jtvanat or -naA: -nasah -namsi -nadbhih or -nagbhih -natsu or -nakshu

other bases in ST / change their final into

BASE.
is,

NOM. SING. NOM. PL. NOM. PL. NEUT.

m.f. n. one

INSTR. PL.

LOG. PL.

who

enters

f^vft f^llvtsah f^ffyvfmsi fa^falvidbhih f^

to dare, change *r sh into k. "^

4.

Bases derived from

BASE.

V^ dhrish,

NOM. SING.

NOM.

PL.

NOM. PL. NEUT.

INSTR. PL.

LOC. PL.

dadhrik
5. All

dadhrishah

dadhrimshi

dadhrigbhih
into 7f.

dadhrikshu

other bases derived from verbs with final

^sh change ^s&

BASE.

NOM. SING.

NOM.

PL.

NOM. PL. NEUT.

INSTR. PL.

LOC. PL.
fgr<J

ish,m.f.n. hating fjfZ dmt ffT^t dvtshah fsfadvimshi

6.

f^fWt dvidbhih

IJ

dvitsu

BASE.

chh change Bases ending in "^ NOM. SING.

^ chh into 7
NOM. PL.

t.

NOM. PL. NEUT.

INSTR. PL.

LOC. PL.

TfT3iprdchh,m.f.n. asking

W^prdt W^'prdsah
T3^

TTtf^T prdmsl riT^j*Tt

prddbhth

7.

Bases ending in

T5T

ksh change

ksh into
PL.

7 t.
NOM.
if ffef

BASE.
.f.n.

NOM. SING,
paring

NOM.
rHSfJ

PL.

NEUT.

INSTR. PL.

LOC. PL.

17 tat*

tdkshah

tdmkshi

tadbhih If^fHJ

* If differently derived fn^ta&sA

herd, which regularly forms
its

may form

its

Nom.

Sing. 7T3F tak.

iffTE^goraksh,

cow-

Nom. Sing. *nT7<7ora, may, according to a different

Nom. Dual f<

derivation,

form

Ui^ gorak.

(See Colebrooke, p.9O,note; Siddh.-Kaum.vol.i.p. 187.)

desirous of maturing; fJ <4 *vivak,

Sofav^pipat,
f

Nom. Dual famsfipipakshau,

desirous of saying
;

T r/rar;tsAa,

f^VF didhak,

Nom. Dual

f^lHSJT didhakshau, desirous of burning.

78
8.

DECLENSION.
Most bases ending
in

175-

^h

change

^h

into

^ t.
NOM. PL. NEUT.
fc^fir limhi

BASE.
lih,
,

NOM. SING.
m.f.n. licking
m.f.n. covering

NOM.PL.

INSTR. PL.

LOC,PL.

f^T lit

fc5^ lihah

fc5^fat

lidbhih

fcV&Q

litsu

"^ <jrMf

^1 ^rw^aA
"*T

^T^ gumhi
93.

"5^fa ghudbhih

"JT^ ghutsu

On
9.

the change of

initial

$r

into

<^, see

Bases derived from

Likewise

roots ending in
ushnih, a metre.

h,

and beginning with

NOM. PL. NEUT.

^ d,

change

^h

into ^T k.

^fWi^

BASE.
m.f.n. milking ij^duh,
10.

NOM. SING.

NOM.PL.

INSTR. PL.
T*fr*\ dhugbhih

LOG. PL.

Vftdhuk

g%l

duhah

|f^

dumhi

V^dhukshu

Bases derived from the roots

druh, to hate,

^muh
T

to confound,
or
'OR

f^ snih, to love,
LOC. PL.

^f snuh, to
BASE.

spue,

may change
NOM.PL.

the final

h into

k.

NOM. SING.

N.PL.NEUT.

INSTR. PL.

hating
ii.

dhrutordhruk druhah druihhi dhrudbhih or dhruglhih dhrutsu or dhrukshu

Bases derived from

BASE.

^
f. f.

nah, to bind, change

^h

into

J{t.

NOM. SING.
f. t

NOM.PL.

INSTR. PL.

LOC. PL.

^^^updnah
Decline
f.

a shoe ^m^J(updnat
vipds,

3H\3& updnahah vvwtklupdnadbh

ft^cwA,
f.

fnm^l

the Beyah river in the Punjab.

ordure.

anger.

f%13viprush,

drop of water.

to enter. TufalS^viviksh, wishing

bee.

"P^ snih, loving.

m.
f.

cow-milker. *rk^ goduh,

tPffictf^madhuHh,

fi^

tvish,

f.

splendour. 'Q^fiS'^bahutvish,

m.

f.

n. very splendid.
kidris,

T^J ^

ratnamush, a stealer of gems. *\n^*fS(marmaspri^f giving pain.

""^1

idris,

n. such.

fi'^J'3T
J

m.

f.

n.

Which?

75-

into

l^T^Tf d or T t
.

turdsdh,

m. name of Indra, changes

^s into ^sh whenever ^ h

Instr. Plur.

is

changed

Norn. Sing.

iJl!lHl<r

turdsMt.

Norn. Dual

ur^ turdsdhau.

TJTraT^fa:

turdsMdbUh.
176.

g^nTpwrorfa/, m. an
and
all

offering, or a priest, is irregular.

The Norn.

Sing,

is

*f^teTt puroddh,

the cases beginning with consonants (Pada cases) are formed from a
Singular, too,
is

base ^f\^^purodas.
(

The Voc.

irregular,

being identical with the

Nom.

Sing.

152),

though some grammarians allow

^ ^tt'J*

he purodah.

SINGULAR.
N.
A.
I.
1

DUAL.
g ^ 3 1 ^|T puroddsau
^X^"5T^TT puroddsau

PLURAL.
^CteTSTt puroddsah

JCtTn puroddh
j^Cl sT^T puroddsam

^ Cl s

^l!

puroddsah

ifCtTT^n puroddsd

gT^ThTT purodobhydm
"yftftxti

"$ftftf*K purodobhih

D.
Ab.
G.
L.

^Tt5T% puroddse
"grtTT^Tt puroddsah

purodobhydm

tpCtTteH purodobhyah

^ft^n purodobhydm
^Styftl purodds'oh

g^TtTt purodobhyah

^Ct?T$n puroddsah
IJ^Trf^I ^Mroc?<i&"

^^T^f puroddsam

^^fT^ft: puroddsoh
-c?aA

3^*J purodahsu
^^T^TJ puroddsah

V.

"g^TT: or

?t puroddh or

gOil^fi puroddsau

179.

DECLENSION.
Another word, 5<*^^||^
ukthatids,

79
is

177.

a reciter of hymns,

declined like

puroddt.

Nom.

J<+^^H'. ukthasdh.

Ace. Sing. ?r*i 311*1 uktha$dsam.

Instr. Plur.

ukthasobhih.

Voc. Sing. 9r^^iit or ^cr'q^iJ ukthasdh or uklhasah.

178. Bases in *Tm.

Bases ending in
all

^m retain *Tm before

when
final,

all

terminations beginning with vowels.

is

Before

other terminations and

the

^m

changed

into ^n.

Base

Jf$Ki{pra$dm,

mild.

SINGULAR.
MASC.
i

DUAL.
MASC.
KI;M.

PLURAL.
1CA8C. FKM.

I:M.

Nom. Voc. IRRTr^praJdn

Ace.
Instr.
TTSfTPT

nywl

prasdmau

TT^IW! prasdmah
14311*0
i

prasdmam

H^HI! prasdmau

prasdmah

U^TTTT prasdmd

H^n^Tf pratidnbhydm
w^n*fU prasdmoh

H^I f*Ht pras&nbhih

Loc.

H^nr*ipra5^m

2.

NOUNS WITH CHANGEABLE BASES.

A. Nouns with two Bases.

J 179.

Many nouns

in Sanskrit

have more than one base, or rather they

modify their base according to rule before certain terminations.

Nouns with two

bases, have one base for the

*-

Nom. Voc. and Ace. Sing. 1 Nom. Voc. and Ace. Dual > of masc. nouns * Nom. Voc (not Ace.) Plural J Nom. Voc. and Ace. Plural of neuter nouns ;

and a second base

for all other cases.

will

The former base

base,

be called the Anga base.

Bopp

calls it the

strong

and the terminations the weak terminations.

calls it

the

The second base will be called the Pada and Bha base. Bopp weak base, and the terminations the strong terminations.

The general rule is that the Bha cases, is strengthened in

base

simple base, which appears in the Pada and Thus the Pada and Bha the Anga cases.

*m^prdch becomes

in the

Anga

cases

ufa prdnch.

The Pada base of

adant in the

the present participle

^^

adat y eating, becomes

^T^

Anga
such

Most nouns with changeable bases form

their feminines in fy.

A few, however,

as^TO^rfaman, are said to be feminine without taking the \i, and some of them occur as feminine at the end of compounds.

80
cases.

DECLENSION.

80-

This gives us the following system of terminations for words with

:

two bases

SINGULAR.

DUAL.
MASC.

PLURAL.

Nom.Voc.
Ace.
.

IE

-J

181.

DECLENSION.
NEUTER.
SINGULAR.

81

DUAL.

PLURAL.
TTTfrf prdfichi

N.A.V.
I.

pr dchi same
is

as masc.

The feminine of tr^prdch

in^ prdchi

declined like fern, in

^ i.

Decline im*(dvdch, downward, south.

Strong base

B. Nouns with three Bases.

J 181.

Nouns with
Pada

three bases have their

Anga

or strong base in the same

cases as the nouns with

base, the

two bases.

In the other

cases, however, they

have one
;

base, before all terminations beginning with consonants

and

another base, the

terminations beginning with vowels. In these nouns with three cases, Bopp calls Anga base the strong base
base, before
all

Bha

the Pada base the middle base the

Bha

base the weakest base.

This gives us the following system of terminations for words with three
bases
:

SINGULAR.
MASC.

DUAL.
MASC.

PLURAL.
MASC.

Nom.Voc. ^s

(always dropt)

w au

^K ah

82

DECLENSION.

182-

-J

184.

DECLENSION.
NEUTER.
SINGULAR.
DUAL.

83
PLURAL.

N.A.
FEM.
SINGULAR.

^K^In addnti

N.

^^n\adat{
is

&c., like
difficult rule

183. There
in the

a very

Nom. and

Ace. Dual of neuters, and before the

according to which certain participles keep the ^n \t of the feminine. This rule can

only be fully understood by those

It is this,
I.

who

are acquainted with the ten classes of conjugations.

Participles of verbs following the

Bhu, Div, and Chur

classes must preserve the ^n.

II. Participles of

verbs following the

all participles

Tud

class

may

or

may

not preserve the

^n.

The

same

applies to

of the future in

and to the ^H^syat,

participles of

verbs of the

Ad

class in

^T d

III. Participles of all other verbs

I.

must

reject the

Jn.

VRl(bhdvat.

Nom. and

Ace. Dual Neut. *flhft bhdvantl

dtvyanti.

chordyanti.
II.

^J^tuddt.

tuddnti or iJ^Tft tudati.

(fut.).

^f^T^
*ffi^ ydt.

bhavishydnti or

Hfanft

bhavithyati.

ydnti or

*ffift ydtt.

III.

Nom. and

Ace. Dual Neut. wrftadatf.

*d$J\ juhvatt.
sunvatf.

rundhatt.

Mndt.

^^Jdl
is

Jcrinati.

The feminine base

throughout

identical in

form with the Nom. Dual Neut.

Hence

HTift bhdvantt, being, fern.; ij<; n\ tuddntt or ^n\tudant striking, fern. The feminine base is declined regularly as a base in \t.
184.

fern.; ^a<pftae?af/, eatin'g,

Another

rule,

which ought not to be mixed up with the preceding

rule, prohibits

the strengthening of the

Anga base throughout in the participles present of reduplicated verbs, except in the Nom. Ace. Voc. Plur. Neut., where the insertion of *^n is optional. With this exception, these participles are therefore really declined like nouns in J(t with
unchangeable bases.

Base

rjftf^dddat, giving,

from ^T ddt to
MASC.
r

give, <J^Tfa ddddmi, I give.

SINGULAR.
MASC.

DUAL.
MASC.
^^ift dddati
f

PLURAL.
NEUT.

N.V. <^TT dddat

A.
I.

^ff dddat am
^fndddatd
dddate
t

<^m dddatau

f-

<<;ni dddatah

^^Pn dddati

dddadbhih

D.
Ab.

j^lOf dddadbhydm

dddadbkyah
dddatah

G.
J

dddatdm
dddati

L.

dddat oh

^7^ dddatsu

*0r

dddanti.

84:

DECLENSION.
rule
applies to the participles

The same

vCB^jakshat, eating;

*W4i(jdgrat, waking;

*\*\l(jdgat,

<jfr%J{daridrat, being poor; ^m^sdsat, commanding; ^iTOT^ chaMsat, shining. neut. the worlcL forms Nom. Plur. *\*\fa jdganti, only.
185.

But

^ftjmkdt,

great,

^f^pr^shat,
class.

m. a

deer, n. a drop of water, are declined like

participles of verbs of the

Ad

SINGULAR.
MASC.

DUAL.
MASC.
brihdntau

PLURAL.
MASC.
brihdntah

N.V.
A.
brihdntam

brihdntau

bnhatdh

NEUTER.
SINGULAR.
DUAL.
PLURAL.

N.A.
FEM.
SINGULAR.

N.
$
1

'pift

brihati

86.
its

if^mahat,

of the great, likewise originally a participle

Ad

class,

forms

Anga

or strong base in

SINGULAR.
MASC.

DUAL.
MASC.

PLURAL.
MASC.

N.
A.
I. f if

mahantau

mahdntah
*

mahdntam
mahatd

mahdntau

mahatdh
t

*T?nrT
Hij.n
1

maJiddbhih

D.
Ab.
G.
L.

mahat

mahddbhydm
t

mahddbhyah

rT?1T mahatdh
j
*}ltfiT

JT^WT mahatdm

mahati

mahatdh
mahdtsu

V.

T^^ mdhan
NEUTER.
SINGULAR.
DUAL.
l^fll

PLURAL.

N.A.V.

mahati

The

rest like the masculine.

FEM.
SINGULAR.

N.

*i^rfl

mahati

forming their Anga Bases and itc^mant The possessive suffixes v# form their Anga or ma/ and 187. ifi^ vaw#. strong base in i^ mant and They lengthen their vowel in the
,

Bases ending in the Suffixes

in

Nom.

Sing. Masc.

These

suffixes are of very frequent occurrence.

188.

DECLENSION.
having
fire.

85

SINGULAR.
MA8C.

DUAL.
MA8C.

PLURAL.
MA8C.

N.
A.

agnimdn

agnimantau
<i>/

agnimantah

agnimantam
^ec ft

ni, nu nt nu

agnimatah

V.

1*1*^

ayniman

NEUTER.
SINGULAR. DUAL.

N. V.

^ f* riiii agnimat
FEM.
SINGULAR.

agnimatt

agnimanti

N.

^M P* i*i ifl

agnimatt
after bases in ^i

^
2.

va/

is

used

a and

^J

Ex. '^Fffl^jndnavat, having knowledge.

ledge.

vidydvat, having

know-

But wfi<\H\affnimat, having

or

fire,

^rn^hanumat, having jaws.

if

After bases ending in nasals, semivowels, or sibilants,

preceded by

va

^n

d.

(Pan. viu.

2, 10.)

^R^tf udanvat, having water. But T*ft Pd *H AJyotishmat, having Light. I^IT girvat, having a voice.
3. After

Ex. TF^rflpayasvat, having milk.

bases ending in any other consonants, by whatever vowel they be preceded.

may

Ex. f^j^vidyutvaty having lightning. There are exceptions to these rules. (Pan. vni.

2,

9-16.)

1 88. Your Honour, which is frequently used in place of the pronoun of Vffl^bhavat, the second person, followed by the third person of the verb, is declined like a noun derived

by

"%1(^vat.

distinct

Native grammarians derive it from HT bhd, with the suffix from *f33{bhavat, being, the participle present of *^bhu, to be.
f,

"^1(vat,

and keep

it

Your Honour.

SINGULAR.
MASC.

DUAL.
MASC.

PLURAL.
MASC.

N. ^^l^bhavdn
A. HTcf bhavantam

bhavantau
bhavantau

bhavantah
bhavatah

V. H^*^ bhavan or
SINGULAR.

bhok

NEUTER.
DUAL.
bhavatf

PLURAL.

N.A.V.

HTfw bhavanti

FEM.
SINGULAR.

N.

bhavatt

86
H^Tif bhavat, being, part, present.

DECLENSION.

189-

SINGULAR.
MASC.

DUAL.
MASC.

PLURAL.
MASC.

N. H^f^ bhavan
A. *r4lT bhavantam

H4lu bhavantaw
HTiu bhavantau

WffJ bhavantah

VTO bhavatah

V.

NEUTER.
SINGULAR.
DUAL.

PLURAL.

N.A.V.

>T&toa*
FEM.
SINGULAR.

H^rft bhavanti

Wffit bhavanti

N.
& *
1

^T^ift bhavanti

80. *r

^RH\ ar^af,
it

masc. horse,

is

Norn. Sing., where

totally different

has

^Tf

declined regularly like nouns in ^lf vat, except in the

_.__

arra.

word, and declined

^Rf^araew in ^R^awarvaw, without a foe, is a like a noun in W^aw; Nom. Sing, ^ftl anarvd;

Nom. Dual
anarvand j
190.

^nftTtlM anarvdnauj Ace. Sing.

Instr. Plur.

WiT^fHt anarvabhih.
?

^RtTOT anarvdnam; The feminine of

so

Instr. Sing.
is

^R^TT

^^c^orva^

^Jcfdl arvati.

How much f^Rl^%a?,

SINGULAR.
MASC.

^Ti^tyaf,

much,

are declined like bases in

Their feminines are

DUAL.
MASC.
fon*iffT

PLURAL.
MASC.

N.
A.
I.

fhm^ My an
f<*4ri

Myaniau

ftF^J

kiyantah
kiyatah

Myantam

fonMiu kfyantau
f^rcirf TciyadbJiydm

f%Tin

fawn ttya*4
fen

fmfel MyadbUh

V.

M^ My an
NEUTER.
SINGULAR.
DUAL.

PLURAL.
fcfi^fn kiyanti

N. A.V.

"fSFTi

**y fl *

Pqi^nl

Hya^

Bases in ^ir^an (^5(an, ii^man,

191.
;

Words in ^^an have three bases their Anga or strong base is their Bha or weakest base *{n ; and their Pada or middle base ^r a.
:

Mark
1.

besides,
d,

That the Nom. Sing. masc. has WT

not

TO^ <&&($).

2. 3.

That the Nom. Sing. neut. has ^r a, not ^r^ an. That the Voc. Sing. neut. may be either identical with the Nominative,
or take *{n.

4.

That words ending

their

Bha

bases,

i&^man and ^^van keep iceman and ^^van as without dropping the ^r a, when there is a consonant
in

This is to avoid the vft. man and immediately before the concurrence of three consonants, such as from ifi^parvn

-$
or

DECLENSION.

87

This rule applies only to words from WTTR^ dtman. vaw, not to words ending in simple ending in i^ maw and Thus TTfl^ takshan forms UWT takshnd ; *JV^ murd/tan, an. A^

*m* dtmn

frjr

mdrdhnd, &c.
in all other in the

5.

That
and

words the

loss of the

Va

is

optional in the Loc. Sing.,

Nom.
;

Ace. Voc. Dual of neuters.

TTlft rdjnt.

The

feminine, however,

drops the ^r a

thus

m. king.
SINGULAR.

Anga, T&K*{rdjdn; Pada, TTHrdja; Bha,

88

DECLENSION.

93~

SINGULAR.

-J
take

196.
^TT vd.

DECLENSION.
bahvdhtvaH or

89
Norn. Dual
^IJMl
bahudhtce,

^J^<|

f^qi bahudhivd,
vol.
I.

having

many

fishermen.

(Siddh.-Kaum.

p. 209.)

195. iffaHpathin,

m. path, has

for its

for its
for its

Anga base ^[^pdnthdn Bha base

Pada base
and Voc.
Sing.,

(like

It is irregular in the Norn,

where

it is ifar:

pdnthdh.

SINGULAR.
N.V. ^f\\ pdnthdh
A.
I.

DUAL.

PLURAL.
N. ^faTO pdnthdnah
A.
I.

VFK$ pdnthdnau
s'qinl pdnthdnau

*nnf pdnthdnam
Wlpathcl

^HH pathdh

^fWT pathibhydm

qWW: ^atAt&AiA
lost

The

terminations after

T^aM

have the Udatta, because they replace a

Udatta.

(Pan. vi. 1,199.)

<

^^fl

(r

l ribhukshtn, m. a

declined in the same manner.

name of Indra, and ifo^mathtn, m. a The three bases are,

1

churoing-stick, are

^tJ^f't, ribhukshdn

matht

The Nom. and Voc.

*4\**<\pathin,

Sing, are '^tJHJi: rtbhukshdh

and

^fai: mdnthdh.

^^J T|T^ ribhukshin, and

fa*{mathin form their feminines ^ft patht,

ribhuksM,

word of very frequent occurrence is ^r^[ dhan, takes ^rfaAas as its Pada base. Otherwise it is declined like
f 196.

n. day,

which

SINGULAR.
P.
N. A.V.
I.

DUAL.

PLURAL.

^: dhah
TS&dhnd

Bh. N. A.V.
P.

^t dhnt*
^?^
dhnoh

An. N. A.V. ^fTf^T dhdni

P.
I.

Bh.

l.D.Ab.*f$W\<ihobhydm

Bh.

D.

^dhne

Bh. G.L.

P.

D.Ab.
G.
L.

Bh. Ab.G. ^.dhnah Bh. L. ^fdhni-t

Bh.
P.

The Visarga in the Nominative Singular is treated like an original ^r ($ 85). Hence *i^: ahar-ahah, day by day. In composition, too, the same rule ^ro: aharganah, a month (Pan. vm. a, 69) though not always, applies
;
:

ahordtrafr,

day and night.

(See

90.)

Or

^ft dhant.

f Or ^ff^T dhani.

Or ^H^:g

dhahsu.

90
197.

DECLENSION.
At the end of a compound,
is

197is

too,

^i^ahan

irregular.

Thus

having long days,

declined

SINGULAR.
N. ^Krr^T: dirgMhdh *
V. ^iSl^t dfrghdhah A.
<fl Q ^!<U dirglidhdnam
I

DUAL.
N.A.V. <{t5l HIM dirghdhdnau

PLURAL.
N.V. <0lH!i: dirghdhdnah
A.
I.

<0*njg; dirgMhnah

^5

^l fa: dirghdhobhih, &c.

Feminine,

<0l^

dirghdhni (Pan.

vm. 4, 7).

is

and with fa vi and ^TR saya, ^j 198. In derivative compounds with numerals, substituted for ^K^aAaw; but in the Loc. Sing, both forms are admitted; e.g.

dvyahnah, produced in two days; Loc. Sing, 'gfedvyahne or'Sjfgdvyahni or

(Pan. vi. 3,
1 10.)

sA^^dvya

199.
as their

^
Bha

$van,

bases.

m. dog, 5^; yuvan, m. young, take sp( un, For the rest, they are declined regularly, like
DUAL.
N.A.V. W$svc[nau
N.
A.
I.

brahman, m.

(Accent, Pan. vi. i, 182.)

SINGULAR.
N. '^rrW
A.

PLURAL.

mii odnam

V.

^^^

The feminine of
according to
200.

&van

is

Tgpft

^ww^;

of

g^

ywvaw,

^f?K yuvatty;
as its

some grammarians, igftydni.

Bha

W(3i{maghavan t the Mighty, a name of Indra, takes W^t^maghon

SINGULAR.
N.
A.

DUAL.
N. A. V.

PLURAL.
N.
A.
I.

mn maghdvd
HM^M
maghdvdnam

i^^iiT maghdvdnau

iM^iit maghdvdnak
#i*T\ni maghtinah

V. T^^^wM^Aavaw

*iMl(?J maghdvabhih^

The same word may

SINGULAR.

likewise be declined like a masculine with the suffix ^U(vat or lff(mat;

(see ^H P* *\*<{agnimat.)

DUAL.
N.A.V.
*i^iJnT maghdvantau

PLURAL.
N. *mqnt maghdvantah
A. HM^rit maghdvatah
I.

N. nim\v{maghdvdn
A. H^4rt maghdvantam

V.

*i

M H\ mdghavan
is

*iMi(st maghdvadbhik

The feminine
201.

accordingly either H*flfl maghtini or

HV4il) maghavatt.

'5^jJwsA^ and ^SnNr^ aryamdn, two names of Vedic deities, do not lengthen vowel except in the Norn. Sing, and the Nom. Ace. Voc. Plur. neut. ; (in this they follow the bases in ^(inj For the rest, they are declined like nouns in ^T^ an ; 203.)
their
(see

* Pan.

vm.

2, 69, vart. i;

Siddh.-Kaum.

vol.

i.

p.

194; but Colebrooke, p. 83, has

dtrghdhd as

Nom.

Sing.
p. Si.

t Colebrooke, Sanskrit Grammar,

303.
NOM. SING.

DECLENSION.
NOM.
PL.

91
INSTR. PL.

ACC. PL.

NOM. PL. NEUT.

pdshan, ptisha, pfahn

pUshd

pdshdnah

pdshndh

pUshdbhih

ptisUni

aryaman, aryama, aryamn

aryamd

aryamdnah

aryamndh

aryamdbhih

aryamani
1.

Loc. Sing. ^(jfaf pUshnf or g((Vr pdshdni; or, according to some, ^f^pUfhi. (S&r.

9, 31.)

"^han, when the vowel between ^ h and

BASE.

202.

The

root

to

kill, if

used as a noun, follows the same rule; only that

dropt,

^n

is

^h

becomes ^gh.
ACC. PL.
INSTR. PL.
:

NOM. SING.

NOM. PL.
t

NOM.PL.NEUT.
hdni

^ ha,

J^ghn

^T hd
brahmaha

hanah

ghnah

hub hi h

brahmahan, ha, ghn

Loc. Sing.

brahmahdnah

brahmayhndh

brahmahdbhih brahmahani

wwPH brahmaghnt or

flw^fcj brahmahdni.

Bases in
J 203.
1.

in.
it is

Words
the

in iftin are almost regular;

to be observed that

They drop
^
i ;

^n

at the

end of the Pada base.

the

2.

They form the

and the
SINGULAR.

Nom. Sing. masc. in $i; Nom. Ace. Plur. neut. in

MASCULINE.
DUAL.

Nom.

Ace. Sing. neut. in

ffif ini.

N. Vft dhan(
A.
I.

dhantndu dhanfnau

dhan(nah dhantnah
:

VnfT %rin

dhaninam

vf^HI dhantnd
dhanine

VfTri dhanibhydm
dhantbhydm

dhantthih

D.

dhan(bhyah
dhantthyah

Ab. vPii; dhanfaah,

G.
L.
.

dhanfohydm
dhantnoh

Vflli dhaninah
^fVrfT dhanini
VfV|

Vf^RT dhanindm
dhantshu

VfTfh

dhantnok dhdninau

V.

ctoonw

dhdninah

NEUTER.
SINGULAR.

DUAL.

PLURAL.

N.A.
V.

VftfH dhanfni
FEM.
SINGULAR.

N.

Vni

dhanint
yaisasvin, glorious
;

Decline

^Vtf^ medhdvin, wise ; ^rfy^

loquacious; oirrft^AranX domg. Note These nouns in ^tn, (etymologically a shortened form of ^*Jcn,) follow the analogy of nouns in ^I^an (like TTH^r^jan, TW^<man) in the Nom. Sing. masc. and neut., and in the Voc. Sing, and in the Nom. Ace. Plur. neut. They might be
ranged, in
fact,

with the nouns having unchangeable bases

Ace. Plur. neut.
is

vowel

in the
is

Nom. and

which

inserted in these cases in all

for the lengthening of the ; but a compensation for the absence of the nasal bases except those ending in nasals and semivowels.

92

DECLENSION.

204-

Participles in
$04.

vas.

Participles of the reduplicated perfect in

vdms
the

as the

Anga,
is

ush as the Bha,

^ and ^

vas have three bases

vas as the Pada base.

According to Sanskrit grammarians, they change the

^s

of

^(vas

into T(t9 if

^
vas.

is final,

or if it

followed
fact

(see J 173, 131.)

But the

by terminations beginning with v^bh and T^S; is, that the Pada base is really '^vat, not

Anga,

rurudvdms ; Pada, '^^(rurudvas

Bha,

$ 207.

DECLENSION.
:

93

Decline the following participles

I'ADA MASK.

NOM. SING.

NOM. PLUR.

ACC. PLUK.

IN8TR. FLUE.

jufruvas

Jusruvdihsah

iusruvushah

sujruvadbhih

pechivas

pechivdn

pechivdmsah

pechushah

pechivadbhih

jagmivas

jagmivdn

jagmivdnisah

jagmushah

jagmivadbhih

jaganvas

jaganvdn

jaganvdmsah

jagmushah

jaganvadbhih

jaghnivas

jaghnivdn

jaghnivdmsah

jaghnushah

jaghnivadbhih

jaghanvdn

jaghanvdmsah

jaghnushah

jaghanvadbhih

Bases in
^ 206.

^^ ivas.
heavier ;

Bases in

(termination of the comparative) form their

Anga

base in

^1^ iyd
?,

Pada and Bha base

SINGULAR.

Anga base

MASCULINE.

N.

*I

*4

1\ gdriydn
gdriydmsam

gdrfydmsau
gdriydrhsau

gdriydmsah

A. *iO<*i

gdriyasah

V.
I.

gdriyasd

gdriyobhydm

gdriyobhlhy &c.

NEUTER.
SINGULAR.

N. TJSNT: gdriyah

gdriyasi

gdriydthsi

FEM.
SINGULAR.

N.

gdriyasi

Miscellaneous Nouns with changeable Consonantal Bases.

it

to

Words ending in "m^tfc?, tj^ad as Bha base.

207.

foot, retain

^T^^^c?

as

Anga and Pada

base, but shorten

SINGULAR.
N.V.
A.
tjHi^ supddam

DUAL.
supddau
supddau
I.

PLURAL.
t

supddah

(Anga)
(Bha)
(Pada)

gtf^: supadah

^pllfk: supddbhih
to

^m changed into

^n according

136.

94:

DECLENSION.
is

The feminine
of two feet
is

either

tjm'^swpad or

*JM<{1

supadi (Pan. iv.

i,

8)j

but a metre consisting

called PrfM^I dvipadd.

shorten

208. "Words ending in retain ^TT^ vdh, carrying, ^T^ vdh as uh as Bha base. The fern, is uU. it to
"3fi|

Anga and Pada

base, but

^t
<f f.

Final

^ h is
w of

interchangeable with

^dh,

?$,

(See

128

174, 8.)

The "^ uh forms Vriddhi with a preceding a or visvavdh, upholder of the universe. (Accent, Pan. vi. 1, 171.)
"35

^5TT

46).

Thus

(4 HI '41

SINGULAR.
N.V. n*a<u
A.
visvavdt

DUAL.

PLURAL.

ftrflBRT^ visvavdham
I.

mfoauhdh

209. *ytih# foetavdh

is

further irregular, forming

its

Pada base

in

^(ras, and
I

retain-

ing

it

in the

Nom. and Voc.

Sing.; e.g.

Nom.Voc.

i^n<*\*svetavclh; Ace. HI rH

svetavdham

Instr. *%i\ls\ foetauhd; Instr. Plur.

y n <f\ fa 3vetavobhfy,&;c.; Loc. Plur.^JCm^svetavahsu.

tivetavdh, instead of *yiiiF fvetauh, in all

Some
(Sar.

grammarians allow

5mu^>

the

Bha

cases

i. 9, 14),

and likewise aii^t 6vtiavah

in Voc. Sing.
is

210.

A
It

drawer.)

more important compound with ^T^r^A has three bases i. The Anga base
:

'Wisi^ anadvdh;

w\s^anaduh, an ox, (i.e. a cart2. The Pada base iHHJ^.

anadudj

3.

The Bha base

"wnj^.

anaduh.
Sing.

It is irregular besides in the

Nom. and Voc.

SINGULAR.
N. '^5HJI^ anadvdn V. w\s*{anadvan
A. 'sins ^ anadvdham
i

DUAL.
N. A.V. ^SMil^T anadvdhau
I.

PLURAL.
N. xinsi^t anadvdhah
A. vins^t anaduhah
I.

D. Ab.
G. L.

*fisi

anadudbhydm

vcnj^lt anaduhoh

^isf:

anadudbhih

I.

"*in^lT anaduhd

L.

viH^rg anadutsu

If used as a neuter, at the

end of a compound,

it

forms

SINGULAR.
N. A.V. ^InJ^ anadud

DUAL.

PLURAL.

wn

^1

anaduM

wi$\^
i,

anadvdmhi

The

rest like the masculine.

is

The feminine
2ii.

^ini^ anaduM or ^nji^l

}

anadvdhi (Pan. vn.

98, vart.)-

is invariably plural, and makes its ^r a long in the ^r^ap water, Anga base, and substitutes j(t for T^p before an affix beginning with *T bh. Plural : Nom. ^TTTJ: dpah, Ace. ^R: apdfy, Instr. ^Hfe: adbhih,, Loc. ^n apsu.

(Accent, Pan. vi.

i,

171.)
is said
;

In composition ^r^ap
fern.,

to form

WF^svdp, Nom. Sing. masc. and

Instr.

having good water

;

Ace.

^TR svdpam ;
svapah,
;

^m svapd,

&c.

Nom.
The

Plur. ^rro svdpafy

Ace.

^^

Instr.

^fe:

svadbhili, &c.

neuter forms the

Nom.

Sing, ^f^svap;

Nom.

Plur. ^fftt svampi or ^fft

svdmpi, according to different interpretations of Panini.

note.)

(Colebrooke, p. 101,

The

Sarasvati (i. 9, 62) gives

^ift

ri^HHf*!

svdmpi taddgdni, tanks

with good water.

214.
212.

DECLENSION.
"p^pwhs, man, has three bases:
2.

95
The Pada

i. The Anga base ^^pumdrhs ; The Bha base ty^pums. (Accent, Pan. vi. i, 171.) base Jjftpum; 3. DUAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL.

N ^mpumdn
V. tjfr^ puman
A..
I.

N.A.V.
I.

;jnitn

pumdmsau

N. y\\*\ pumdmsah
A.
I.

D. Ab. y*lf pumbhyim

G. L.
tpffcjjumsrfA

ipn pumsdh

*jptt pumdmsam

nuwsa
Plur.
is

L.

The Loc.
gives

written

"pumsu,

not

jg^uwwAw

or

"f^punsu

100, note).

The Sarasvatt
Anusvara
in

^Qpunkshu

(1.9,70).

Panini (vin. 3, 58) says that

"^num

only, not

general, does not prevent the change of

^s into ^*A,-

and therefore that change does not

;

In the first, ^n is radical, not inserted take place in j(V<^j svhinsu and ^^puihsu. second, the Anusvara represents an original *^m. Cf. Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 186 :

in the

Mil(iri
In composition
it is

declined in the same

manner

if

used in the masc. or

fern,

gender.
4J^Hif<H

As a

neuter

it

is,

Nona. Sing. SjyT supum,

Nom. Dual

4JJJ40 supumsi,

Nom.

Plur.

supumdmsi.
213.

f^div

or IJtfyu,

f.

sky,

is

declined as follows, (Accent, Pan. vi.

i,

171; 183):

Base flj^rfw, l[ dyu. (See

219.)

SINGULAR.
N. J&ldyauh
A.
I.

DUAL.
N.A.V. &"$
I.

PLURAL.
N.
A.
I.

dtiau

%t divah
f^T. divdh

ftfdfoam

D. Ab.

^rf dydbhydm
fffrldivfy

f&Jdivd

G.L.

D. f^rftW
Ab. G.
L.

D.Ab.
G.
L.

f^:

divdh

i^f divdm

f^ft dM

^5

dyushu

V. ifttrfyaSA
Another base
of *ft#o,
Sift

c?yo is

declined as a base ending in a vowel,

vol. i. p.. 138.)

and follows the paradigm

and
fern, like

219. (See Siddh.-Kaum.

Compounds like gft^sttefaj, having a good sky, Hence ^flrt sudyauh, *jfq4 sudivam, &c.
sudivt; Plur. ^f^r<c sudivi.

are declined in the masc.

In the neuter they form Nom. Ace. Voc. Sing. ^IJ sudyu, having a good sky ; Dual

214.

A
i.

number of words
e.

Metaplasia,

being deficient Voc. Plur., and

in Sanskrit are what Greek grammarians would call under two forms, each following a different declension, but one in the Sarvanamasthana cases, i.e. Nom. Voc. Ace. Sing, and Dual, Nom.

they exist

Nom. Voc.

Ace. Plur. of neuters.

:

(Pan. vi.

i,

63.)

Thus
:

DEFECTIVE BASE

BASE DECLINED THROUGHOUT

;

*i. ^sran^asan, n. blood

^np^osn;,

n.

*2.
*34.

SHW^ dsan,

n. face

^TT^T dsya y n.

f^ udan,

n.

water

datf m. tooth; Ace. PI. ^TH datdh; *

"3^1 udaka, n. ^rf danta, m.

171.)

No

accent on Vibhakti. (Pan. vi.

i,

96
*56.

DECLENSION.

315dos,

<*^ doshan,
*&(nas,
f. f.

(m.) n.
;

arm ;

m.

n.
f.

nose

Ace.
;

PL

"TOt nasdhj
fT$tt nisdh;

TTftl!fT ndsikd,

7. fff^T m's, 8.

night

Ace.

PL

Pi^|| msa,

f.

m. foot; Ace. PL T^t paddh; Tl^ac?,

f.

Ttff$pdda, m.

9. *p^.pr**

army f; Loc. PL ipBpritsu;

n.

pritand,

f.

10.

TT^m^ms,

meat^
||

mdmsa,

n.

TT^mas, m. month ; TPHt *I2. TOl yafam, n liverlf;

11.
-

m.

*I

<

"^g&iyushan, m. pea-soup;

*I4.
15. 16.

^TF^ sakan,

n. ordure;
;

^ SWM, n. ridge

n.

An'c?, n. (m.);

Gen. Sing,

hriddh;

hridaya, n.

Hence
No.
I.

in
asrik only;
asriji

N.V. A. Sing. is N.V. A. Dual

is

^TCpJ?

asrinji or

asdni.

~mil

only ;
;

amj a

or

N.V.
No.
4.

Plur.

is

vttjfi asrinji only

Du.^tpttlT asrigbhydm or^W^asabhydm.

A. Plur. drlld dantdn or
<5H

N. A.V. Sing. ia^jn^^dantah, am, a, only;

N.V. A. Dual N.V.

Plur.

is tflfr

dantau only ;

but

I.
I.

Sing. tpfT dantena or tpTT rfa^.

is <fffTi

dantdh only;
^Tj

Dual ^inri dantdbhydm or ^WT dadbhydm.

No. 1 1. N. A.V. Sing. isiran,

^masaA,<

only;

A. Plur. TT^rr^ mdsdn or TTOJ mdsah.

N.V. A. Dual

is

TPHT mdsau only ;

wia5<fA

but

I.
I.

Sing.

^TOT mdsena

or Hlfll wwfoa.

N .V. Plur. is
No.
13.

only ;
,

Dual *nT**rf mdsdbhydm or *rn*lima&%am.

N. A.V. Sing, is

only;

fA. Plur. <^m*\ yushdn or ^{W* yushnah. but

I.

N. A.V. Dual

is

yushau only ;

Sing.

^W yushena or

^Ul|| yushnd.

N.V. Plur.

is T

yusMh only;

[I. Du. ^HI M I yushdbhydm or ^*ri -shabhydm.

L. Sing.

T^yws^e or ^U!J-s^am or

ft5t

Grammarians
doshant,

differ

Nom. Dual

Neut., would seem to

used.

on the exact meaning of Panini's rule ; and forms such as show that in the Nom. Ace. Voc. Dual the base
(See Siddh.-Kaum. vol.
i.

^[***{doshan
rule
is

may be

pp. 107, 131, 141, 144.)

By some

the

restricted to the

Veda.

2.

Bases ending in Vowels.

315. Bases ending in vowels

1.

may be

subdivided into two classes

^TT d.

2.

Bases ending in any vowels, except derivative ^r a and Bases ending in derivative w a and ^TT d.

No

accent on Vibhakti.
i.

(Pan. vi.

i,

171.)

t Siddh.-Kaum.
Sarasvati gives
all

vol.

I.

p. 131.
(i. 6,

J Siddh.-Kaum. vol.
IF

p. 141.

|)

The

cases of

HT^mas

35).

Pan. vi. 1,63.

-J

218.

DECLENSION.
Bases ending in any Vowels, except derivative
^J

97
a and
*Tf a.

I.
1

Instead of attempting to learn, either according to the system J 2 6. followed by native grammarians, or according to the more correct views

of comparative philologists, how the terminations appended to consonantal bases are changed when appended to bases ending in vowels, it will be far
easier to learn
at all into

by heart the paradigms such as they are, without entering the question whether there was originally but one set of termiall

nouns, or whether, from the beginning, different terminations were used after bases ending in consonants and after bases ending in
nations for vowels.

Bases in ^
J 217.

ai

and

^ au.
;

These bases

in consonants.

The
y

ai

becomes
ai

^rr

both $

and

d while ^ au remains unchanged w au become dy and

^TTT
^crpf dv.

with few exceptions, declined like bases ending principal rules to be observed are that before consonants
are,

and that before vowels

f.

BsL$e\rai, TT^rdy 9 m. wealth; (Accent, Pan. vi. ship; (Accent, Pan. vi. i, 168.)

i,

171.)

SINGULAR.
N.V. TK rd-h
A.
I.

DUAL.
nau-h

PLURAL.
"dy-ah

ftt

ndv-ah

dy-au

TT^T ndv-c

fTQrdy-am
TJTTray-^

nq

nav-am

tjm rdy-dh
nau:

ndv-ah
.

Tjfa: rd-bh(h

nau-bhih

D.
Ab.
>

rd-bhydh

G.
L.

TTO rdy -ah fRt ndv-dh

L

tnftt ray-

Hl^t

dy-dm
ndv-6h

do-d

Dech'ne

k alauhy m. the moon.

Bases in
8. J 2i

^ft o.
is iTtgo,

The only noun

of importance

a bull or cow.

It is slightly

irregular in

Nom.

Ace. Abl. and Gen. Sing, and in the Ace. Plur.

(Accent,

Pan. vi.

i,

182.)

98
If bases in J? ai, *K\ o,

DECLENSION.

219-

au are to be declined as neuters at the end of compounds, they

shorten

1* ai to

^ *,

and ^n o and

au to

T u, and

are then declined like neuters in

(if

and
all

^ u.

The masculine forms, however,

are equally allowed

the base

is

masculine) in

cases except the

Nom.

Ace. Voc. Sing. Dual and Plural.

Hence

Instr. Sing. neut. 4j(XlJJI

surind or

^CHTT surdyd; but only tj*jiuwmma.

is

219. rndyo, fern, heaven,

declined like *ft#o.

it

It coincides in the
(

Nom. and Voc.

Sing, with f^^div, sky, but differs from

in all other cases.

213.)

SINGULAR.
N.
A.
I.

DUAL.
vau

PLURAL.
dydvah

N dyauh
f

dydm

dydvd
dydve
1

dy6bhih
yrfbhydm

D.

dy6bhyah

Ab b.

G
L.

flffc

dydshu
:

V.

dyauh
in the

Forms of dyu which occur

Sing. N. dyausj

Rig-veda
I.

A.d{vam,dydm;
vi. 51, 5).

dydm; V. dyaus (Rv.

Being used

Plur.

divd(dtvd, by day); D.dive*; G.divdh,dy6"h; N. dydvahz A. dyun ; I. dyubhih. Dual N. dydvd.

its

at the

end of a compound Inrfyo forms

celestial,

neuter base as

Igdyu; e.g.

WQpradyu, eminently
vol. i. pp. 144,

Dual H*l1 pradyuni,

Plur.

WS^i pradyuni (Siddh.-Kaum.

we
saw, ^?T sudyu,

145); while from "R^cfo'p the neuter adjective was, as

having a good sky, Dual

Plur. tJ^Tq sudivi (Colebr. pp. 67, 73). ^jP^cfl sudivi,

IRSpradyu,

as a neuter, cannot take the optional masculine cases

(Siddh.-Kaum.

vol. i. p. 145).

Note

There are no

real

nouns ending

in

U e, though
;

grammarians imagine such words

Plur.

as JJi eh, the sun, <TBR^ udyadeh, the rising

sun

Nom. Dual o^<4l udyadayau, Nom.

9'CI^Mt udyadayah.

Bases in
i.

$t and

-31 ti.

Monosyllabic Bases
themselves.

in^i and

liu, being both Masculine and Feminine.

(A.)

By

220. Monosyllabic bases, derived from verbs without any suffix, like vftdM, thinking,
"aft krt,

buying, f5lu, cutting, take the same terminations as consonantal bases.

Th<

remain unchanged before terminations beginning with consonants, but change final fy am "31^ into and before vowels. (Pan. vi. 4, 82, 83.) Their Vocative is the same ^*{iy

T^MU,

as their Nominative.

(B.)

At the end of compounds.

compounds.

221. These monosyllabic bases rarely occur except at the end of

He

vi. i, 93.

they

221.
change \t and

DECLENSION.
either
"31

99

may
it

into Iftiy

and

T^W,

or into

^y

and

^[r.

They

change
1.

Into
a. If

^(iy and T^wr.the first member

second maintains

of the
its

nominal character.

compound forms the predicate of the second, and the Thus M4,*Hl: paramanth, the best leader,
Here "ifanih
is

Ace. Sing. M*I Tn 4 paramaniyam.

to have lost
its

treated as a noun, and seems

verbal character.

thought, Ace. Sing, ^pgfftri Ace. Sing. Tffvni kudhiyam. (Sar.)

b.

a ^T^ftt fuddhadhth, pure thinker, a man of pure kudhth, a man of bad thought, tuddhadhiyam; "$&:

If

ty and

"&tt are

preceded by two radical

i

initial

consonants.

^<M(\ljalakrth, a buyer

of water, makes Ace. Sing.

tj^scq sutriyam.

ofwjalakriyam.
vol. i. p.
1

Itpftt susrth, well faring, Ace. Sing.

(Siddh.-Kaum.

19.)

This

is

a merely phonetic change,

intended to
2.

facilitate

pronunciation.
all

(Pan. vi. 4, 82.)

i.e.

Into

^y

and ^v, under

other circumstances,

wherever the monosyllabic bases

retain their verbal character.

i|WUfi: grdmanih, leader of a village, Ace. Sing. iJIHJUJ

is

grdmanyam; here n\*\grdma

which retains so
Sing.
its

not the predicate of TTt nth, but

is

governed by

nth,

far its verbal character.

IT pro, is

U>fh pradhth, thinking

in a

high degree, Ace.

T&Qpradhyam; here

a preposition belonging to

>ft dht,

which retains

verbal nature.

"&3ftl unnth, leading out,

Ace. Sing. "ttQunnyam; here

is

ud

is

a preposition belonging to
only belongs to the root.

ft nt.

Though ^t
suddhadhth

preceded by two consonants, one

a Tatpurusha compound), thinking

^P^*

(if

pure things, would form the Ace. Sing. ygSUts'uddhadhyam, and thus be distinguished from suddhadhih (as a Karmadharaya compound), a pure thinker, or as a ^JSVfc Bahuvrihi compound, a man possessed of pure thoughts (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 119),

which both have

^j-sfrra

suddhadhiyam for their accusative.

The

general idea which

"31

suggested the distinction between bases changing their final

* t and

u either into

^{iy and T^WP,

y and \v, seems to have been that the former were treated as real monosyllabic nouns that might be used by themselves (*fh dht/i, a thinker), or in such compounds as a noun admits of sudhih*, a good thinker; SI3*J*h
or into
^T

(^ft

Juddhadhih, a pure thinker or pure thoughted); while the latter always retained somewhat of their verbal character, and could therefore not be used by themselves,

but only

at the

providens) or by a noun which was governed by them.

"3S

end of compounds, preceded either by a preposition (HVfc pradhth, The nouns in which ^t and
rule,

u stand after two radical consonants form an exception to this general

(

which

exception admits, however, of a phonetic explanation

330), so that the only real

exception would be in the case of certain compounds ending in

^bhu.

Thus ^bhu
4, 85.) 6, 61.

becomes *$^bhuv before vowels, whether

Ex.

it

be verbal or nominal.

(Pan. vi.
(Sar.

^*OJ

svayambhuh, self-existing, Ace. Sing,

vol.
i.

^^^t svayambhuvam.

i.

Siddh.-Kaum.

^TV^
bolt.

Not, however, in ^tpjt rarshdbhuh, frog, Ace. Sing. varshdbhvam (Pan. vi. 4, 84), and in some other compounds, such as R*Jt
p. 119.)
nail, ^pT*Jt

karabhuh or ^TT^Jt Mrabhuh,

(Pan. vi. 4, 84, vart.)

punarbhuh, re-born,

'^J!

drinbhuJt,

thunder-

sudhth

is

as *jf>f*f sudhiyam, &c.,

never to be treated as a verbal compound, but always forms Ace. Sing. if it were a Karmadharaya compound. (Pan. vi. 4, 85.)

O 2

100

DECLENSION.

222.

2. Polysyllabic

Bases in
"3!

and

^1 u.

222. Polysyllabic bases in

^ and

u being both masculine and feminine, such as

and are declined like JTg nrituh, dancer, the verbal compounds JT^fh pradhfh and ^3T<$* vrikshaluh, except that
TJtfh papih, protector, the sun, tpftj yayih, road,
1.

they form the Ace. Sing, in

\tm and

^
^ f, not
i

2.

they form the Ace. Plur. in %*{in an

those in

Remember

also, that

\i form

the LOG. Sing, in

declined like

in
;

vdtapramih, antelope,
i/),

may be

papth

but
I.

if

derived by
1

it

may

entirely follow the verbal

Wftlpradhih (Siddh.-Kaum. vol.

;

p.

16).

The same

applies to nouns like

for a son 'Jiftt sutih, wishing

^^*

su khih, wishing for pleasure.

They
in
"3*:

follow the verbal H*Tfc pradhih throughout, but they have their Gen. and Abl. Sing.

uhj ^IJt sutyuh (Siddh.-Kaum. vol.

it

i.p. 120).

If the final long

\i

is

preceded by

two consonants,
sushkiyau, &c.

is

changed before vowels into

^'y.

Ex.

^^tt

sushkih,

$-222.

DECLENSION.

101

*$ =
fe>

s I 5 ^ $ ,2 a

ll

m
.

*4&i

rS*

58

"

<

Ht'Mll^

ftlf Iffll 8

|.|>ii

S i
5-.
=
-

s,

CH

<s

ll
S
.

02

H
if

102

DECLENSION".

222-

1-

-J

224.
223. All these

DECLENSION.
compounds may be used without any change, whether they
If the
still

103
refer to

nouns

in the

masculine or in the feminine gender.

head-borough or the sweeper

should be of the female sex, the Dat. Sing, would

'4<4c4i4

be t(i*i<w f$9R yrdmanye striyai,

if

0^1) khalapve striyai (Kasika

is

i.

4, 3).

Sometimes, however,

the meaning of a

man, e. g. may by compound mftl pradhih, thinking, some grammarians allow such compounds to be declined in the am feminine, like A^f\l lakshmih, except in the Ace. Sing, and Plur., where they take
it

such that

itself

be applied to a

woman

as well as to a

and VJ ah;
vol.
i.

TW pradhyam,
A
similar
It

TtW pradhyah, not

argument
is

IPffpradhtm ortpftlpradhth (Siddh.-Kaum.

p. 136).

applied to
its

^Tjt

punarbhuh,

if it

means a woman

married a second time.

vol.
I.

may then form

Vocative

^ ^f^
(

he punarbhu (Siddh.-Kaum.

p. 138),

and take the Jive fuller feminine terminations

224).

MASC. AND FEM.

SINGULAR.

FEM. ONLY.
SINGULAR.
radhih
TTWT pradhyam

N.
A.
I.

m: pradhih
1W pradhyam
TRflT pradhyd
Uttfr

TFtR pradhyd
or Tn*I pradhyai

D.

pradhye

Ab. 1TUK pradhyah

G.
L.

or

1HTK pradhydh

TWt pradhyah
yfapradhyi
TVfcpradhih
DUAL.

or IHflTt pradhydh or

TTW pradhydm

V.

or Tjfapradhi

DUAL.

N. A.V.

Jiwft

pradhyau

UW pradhyau
inftri pradhibhydm
H**fo pradhyoh

I.D.Ab. IwNff pradhibhydm

G. L.

Jn4h pradhyoh

N.
A.
I.

IT^IJ

pradhyah

pradhyah

IT^n pradhyah
TnfHWt^rarfAt^AtA

pradhyah
JUfffir. pradhibhih

D.Ab. lrft*K pradhibhyah

G.
L.

IWh'K pradhibhyah
or

HWT pradhydm

MM)TI pradhindm
lT>fh|

pradhishu

i.

Monosyllabic Bases in \\ and ^su,

det?z^

Feminine only.
^t Ar?,

224.
>rt 5A^,

Bases like

>ft

c?^z,

intellect,

^ft srz,

happiness,

shame,

fear, and ^6Ar^, brow, may be declined throughout exactly like the monosyllabic bases in ^ and "35 ^, such as Their only a cutter. <jf &2,

peculiarity consists in their admitting a

number of

Abl. Gen. and Loc. Sing, and Gen. Plur. fuller feminine terminations in ^ ai, ^r: dh, ^rn ah, ^f am, and

Dat

optional forms in the These may be called the five

?ff

ndm.

104
Monosyllabic,
fern. only.

DECLENSION.

225-

Optional fuller
forms.

Monosyllabic,
fern. only.

Optional fuller forms.

thought.

earth.

SINGULAR.

SINGULAR.

N.
A.
I.

tf : dhih
fVrf

dhiyam
dhiya
fVni dhiyai

bhuvam
bhuvai

fwr

Ab. to: dhiydh G. to:

L.

tot: dhiydh
:

bhuvdh

bhuvdh

dhiydh

bhuvdh
bhuvi

dhiydm
DUAL.

V. vT

bhuh
DUAL.

bhuvau
I.D. Ab. tfri dhibhydm

bhtibhydm
bhuvofy
PLURAL.
t

G.L. tot:
PLURAL.

N. to
A.

bhilvah
bhuvah,

to: dhiyah
>rfatt

D.Ab.
L.

dhibhydh

bhubhydh

G. tot dhiyam
-qfar

bhuvam
bhushu

$tff

bhundm

dhishu

2.

Polysyllabic Bases in

wc?

"31

u, being

Feminine only.

f 225. (2)

These bases always take the full feminine terminations. They change their final ^ i and ^1 u into T^y and "^v before terminations beginning with vowels.
(i)

(3) (4)
(5)

They take n^m and ^ s as the terminations of the Ace. Sing, and Plural. They shorten their final ^ i and "35 u in the Vocative Singular. Remember that most nouns in ^i have no ^5 in the Nom. Sing., while
those in
Note
"31

u have
in

it.

Some nouns

\f

take

^s

in the

Nom.

Sing.
;

^T^h

avih, not desiring (applied

to

women) ;

o5TS*rh lakshmih,
:

goddess of prosperity

fTtt: tarfh,

boat

"rf^t: tantrth, lute.

Versus memorialis

^^c*y1rf'OH*<^Vl'

(Sar. p. 18 a.)

Base T^nadi and ^g^nady.

SINGULAR.

Base '^vadhil and

SINGULAR.
FEM.

N.
A.
I.

FEM.

nadi

N. Tf: vadhd-h
A. 'zr^vadhu-m I. efsen vadhv-d

Tcft'

nadi-m
nady-d

"^ITT

226.

DECLENSION.

105
D.

D.

?T& nady-ai

^d vadhv-ai
WT:
^Ulf

Ab. TOT: nady-dh G. TOT: nady-dh

L. V.
tjlrf

Ab. TOTR vadhv-dh

G.
L.

vadhv-dh

nady-dm

vadhv-dm

-nddi
DUAL.

V.

vddhu
DUAL.

N. A.V.
I.D. Ab.

tfift

nady-au

N. A.V. ^t^ vadhv-au

I.

^fffarf

nadi-bhydm

G. L.

TOfc nady-6h

D. Ab. ^njTf vadhd-bhydm G. L. TOffc vadhv-ty

PLURAL.

PLURAL.

N.V.
A.
I.

TO: nady-ah
ircfh wae?/Tflftf*:

N.V. TO: vadhv-ah A. ^f vadM-h

I.

nadi-bhih

^(pr: vadhd-bhih

^^wr: nadi-bhyah Ab. I^WT: nadi-bhyah G. f<l^l nadi-ndm

L.
-

D.

D.
Ab.
G.
L.

^vn
^njj*n

vadM-bhyah
vadhu-bhyah

^n vadhd-ndm
vadhd-shu
Bases in

H1

nadi-shu

Compounds ending
226.
"3S

in Monosyllabic Feminine

^i

anc?

"35 to.

Compounds

the last

member

of which

is

a monosyllabic feminine base in

^f

or

w, are

declined alike in the masculine and feminine.

is

Thus

masc. -tpfi* sudhth,

and

fern.

if it

means a good mind, or having a good mind,

good brow,
is

declined exactly like

vh dhth.

*J*|t

subhruh, masc. and fern, having a

declined exactly like WJ bhruhlr, without

The

following rule

is

taken from the Siddh.-Kaum. vol.

p. 136.

If *nt dhfy, intellect,

stands at the end of the Karmadharaya

is

compound

like

trfapradhth, eminent intellect, or if it

used as a Bahuvrihi compound in the feminine, such as IFiftt pradkfy, possessed of eminent It would thus become identical intellect, it is in both cases declined like c5VJ*fl: lakshmih.
with TFf\lpradhth, thinking eminently, when it takes exceptionally the feminine terminations am and ^1 ah. The difference, therefore, ( 223). The Ace. Sing, and Plur., however, take

^
,

would be the substitution of T^y for ^^iy before vowels, the obligation of using the fuller fern, terminations and the Vocative in ^ these being the only points of difference only,
between the declension of
f*H*{1: lakshmih

and vfc

dhfh, fern.

The Siddhanta-Kaumudf,

while giving these rules for UVt: pradMh, agrees with the rules given above with regard
to

*J>fh sudhih, &c.

exclaims,

t The Voc. Sing. "^Jsw^rM is used by Bhatti, in a passage where Rama ^T f^T: gjrftr % *JW hd pitah kvdsi he subhru, Oh father, where
(wife)
;
!

in great grief
art thou,
;

Oh
it

thou fine-browed
.

Some grammarians admit

commit
it

this Vocative as correct

it

others call

a mistake of Bhatti
Bhatti

others, again, while admitting that

is

a mistake, consider that

(Siddh.-

made Rama
vol.
i.

intentionally

as a token of his distracted mind.

Kaum.

p. 137.)

106
excluding the fuller terminations
simple terminations
the
(*? e,

DECLENSION.
(*Z ai,

326

^\\dh, ^TT dm, Iff worn)* for the masculine, or the

VK

ah,

^STt

ah,

\ i,

^TT

dm] for the feminine.

The same
or
"31

applies to

with this difference, however, that in *g[ mridu, the Inst. Dat. Abl. Gen. Loc. Sing. Dual and Plural they may optionally take the masculine forms.
^tft! vdri

compound ^pfh sudhih, same compounds base, and are declined like
If the

when used

as a substantive,

good

intellect.

are used as neuters, they shorten the final

\i

u of their

and

Masc. and Pern.

Optional fuller forms.

Optional forms for neuters, except Nom. Ace. Voc.

good-tho ughted.

SINGULAR.

SINGULAR.

SINGULAR.

N.
A.
I.

sudhih gift:

gf^R sudhiyam
gfaxrr sudhiyd
*jfv*r

sudhi

sudhind
sudhiyai
;

D.

sudhiye

sudhine
:

Ab. gftro sudhiyah G. gftrc: sudhiyah

L.
gfvftr sudhiyi

sudhiyah

sudhinah sudhinah
sudhini
or

gfw: sudhiyah
"ffipti sudhiydm

V.
DUAL.

gv

DUAL.

DUAL.

N. A.V.
I.

sudhiyau

sudhini
or gfvlf sudhibhydm or 4jf\ffU sudhinofy
PLURAL.
PLURAL.

D. Ab.
G. L.

sudhibhydm
PLUBAL.

N.V.
A.
I.
:

sudhiyafy
sudhiyah,
:

sudhini sudhini
sudhibhify

sudUbhih,

D.

sudhibhyah

sudhibhyah

Ab.^fti: sudhibhyafy G. tjfimi sudhiydm

L.
>T^

sudhibhyah

sudhindm

sudhindm
sudhishu

sudhishu

* I can find no authority by which these fuller terminations are excluded.

bahusreyasf, the feminine

In

"^WJ sreyasi retains

1

its
is

feminine character (naditva} throughout

distinctly maintained for the

(Siddh.-Kaum.

vol.

i.

p. 116);

and the same

compound

TWffc pradhih, possessed of distinguished intellect, if used as a masculine

vol.
i.

(Siddh.-Kaum.

p. 119),

DECLENSION.

107
Optional forma for neut/ra, except Norn. Ace. Voc.

Maso. and Fern.

Optional fuller forma.

with beautiful brows.

SINGULAR.

SINGULAR.

SINGULAR.

N.
A.
I.

subhrtih

subhruvam
subhruvd
subhruve
subhruvai
or or or or

g^ ^subhru
TT^JTTT

subhru

g^WT subhrund
subhrune

D.
Ab.

subhruvah
subhruvaJjt

G.
L.

^^T! subhruvdh g^r: subhruvdh

g^!K subhrunah
g^Trn subhrunah
fiu

subhruvi
subhrufy

g^f subhruvdm
DUAL.

or

subhruni

V.

DUAL.

DUAL.

N. A. V.
I.

subhruvau
T

subhruni

D. Ab.

subhrubhydm
subhruvoh

subhrubhydm
subhrunok
PLURAL.

G.L.
N.V.
A.
I.

PLURAL.

PLURAL.

subhruvafy

subhrum
subhruni
:

subhruvah
subhrubhih

subhrubhih

D.

subhrubhyah

subhrubhyah

Ab. G.
L.

subhrubhyah subhruvam
subhrushu

subhrubhyah subhrundm

subhrushu

Compounds ending
227. Feminine

in Polysyllabic Feminine Bases in

T3(twac?f

\ i and "3! ti.

nouns

like

pounds which are used

has

in the masculine gender.

and ^^c^flmw may form the last portion of comThus ^^qttt bahusreyasi, a man who
I.

many
is
:

auspicious qualities (Siddh.-Kaum. vol.

pp. 116, 117), and xi Pn -s^ atichamv, one

who

hetter than an

army (Siddh.-Kaum.

vol.

i.

p. 123), are declined in

the masculine and

feminine

SINGULAR.
N.
A.
I.

DUAL.
*

PLURAL.
i^^<4**<t bahufreyasyah
~TS
1

^T?

H^^^til bahusreyasi ^nTOT bahusreyasim

bahus'reyasyd

bahusreyasyau bahusreyasyau

smtO^ bahusreyasin
Vin bahusreyasibhyah

bahusreyastbhydm ^HSHnftfat bahusreyastbhih

D.
Ab.
G.
L.

bahusreyasyai
t

bahusreyasydh
bahusreyasydh

bahusreyastbhydm
bahusreyasyoh bahusreyasyoh bahusreyasyau

1 bahu^reyas(bhyah T

bahuSreyastndm

^M^l

bahusreyasydm
bahusreyasi

^^'Mil^lM bahufreyastshu
1<s

V.

J^^^^yt bahu&reyasyah

From f6*ili

lakshmfy, the

Nom.

Sing, would be

atilakshmty.

P 2

108
SINGULAR.
N.
^fflT^nTt atichamuh

DECLENSION.
DUAL.
atichamvau
atichamvau

PLURAL.
atichamvah

A. ^fftT^f^atichamum
I.

atichamun
:

^rfif^*^T atichamvd

atichamubhydm atichamubhydm

atichamubhih

D. *iiPfi"^*^ atichamvai

atichamubhyah

Ab.^rfn^^iJ atichamvah
G. vtPfl-s*u: atichamvah
L.

atichamubhydm
atichamvofy

atichamubhyah

atichamundm
atichamushu
'*

wPrr*f*lT atichamvdm
'SfPtf'i'J

atichamvoh

V.

atichamu
Jcumdrt, a

atichamvau

atichamvah*

Nouns

like

man who
vol.
I.

behaves like a
Plur.,

girl,

are declined like

cjj*u*q

bahusreyasi, except in the Ace. Sing,

and

where they form

kumdryam and

kumdryah.

(Siddh.-Kaum.
,

pp. 118, 119.)

only that the accumulation of four consonants is avoided by the regular insertion of an ^ i, e. g. f^fT striyd, and not *?m 5/rya. Remember also two optional forms in the

woman,

is

declined like

T^ wc?^,

Ace. Sing, and Plur.

Base npftstrt and

SINGULAR.
N.
Tfiift

ffa*{striy.

(Accent, Pan.vi.

i,

168.)

DUAL.
N.A.V. P^j 4i
I.

PLURAL.
N.
A.
I.

stri

striyau

(tfl*<
^jjjfh

striyah

A. ^pff sfrzm or ffepT striyam

I.

D. Ab. ^t^Tf stribhydm

s^rzA or

Q^i

striyah

ffam

striyd

G.L.

f^|4fl: striydh

^ftfW: stribhih

D.

"^^ striyai
f^RT

D. Ab. ^fti: stribhydh

G.
L.
i. 4,

Ab. G. f^TTt striydh

L.

^lillis^/m (P

4, 5)

V.

%^

striydm
(Pan.
4)

^1n strishu

229.

When ^jfl's^ forms

the last portion of a compound, and has to be treated as a

:

masculine, feminine, and neuter, the following forms occur

SINGULAR.
N.
A.
atistriyam
I.
t

atistrih

\\

atistrih

atistri

atistrim or

atistrim or
atistri

atistriyam
^rPrfi^flJn atistriyd
atistriyai or
ffrf

atistrind

atistrind
atistrine or

D.

atistraye

atistraye

atistraye
\l

Ab.G.

atistriydh or
J

atistrinah or

atistreh
t

atistrefy

L
\

^Pfi^t* atistreh
'SiPi if^jjffijT

L.

atistrau
JH Pri

atistriyam or

atistrini or

T atistrau

1 r L ^Itf

atistrau
atistre

V.
*

atistre

atistre

The neuter

is

said to be

N.A.V.

Sing, o^^ilitfl bahusreyasi,

N.A.V. Dual

rj^l*lt(lil

bahusreyasini,

N. A.V.

Plur.

^?^4tflPr
-sfoe,

bahusreyasini, Dat. Sing.

bahusreyasyai (-sye ?) or

&c.

-J

230.

DECLENSION.
DUAL.
MASC.

109

FEM.
atistriyau

NEC*.
atistriyau
In
i

N.A.V.
I.D.Ab.

atistrini

atistribhydm
atistriyoh
t

atistribhydm
atistriyoh
t

atistribhydm
atistrinoh

G.L.

PLURAL.
MASC.
FEM.
i

NEUT.
tu atistrtni

N.V.
A.

atistrayah
atistrin or

atistrayah
atistrih or

atistrini

atistriyah
I.
'.

atistriyah
atistribhih
J

atistribhih
atistribhyah,

atistribhih

D.Ab.
G.
L.
F

atistribhyah

atistribhyah
f

atistrindm

atistrindm
atistrishu

atistrindm

atistrishu
final

atistrishu

In the masculine
except in the

Nom. Acc.Voc. and Gen.

(Siddh.-Kaum.

^fis shortened to ^t, and the compound declined like <=(%. kavih, Loc. Dual. In the Ace. Sing, and Plur. optional
vol.
I.

forms are admitted.

p. 134.)

The feminine may be the same

but
it

as the masculine, except in the Instr. Sing,

and Ace.

Plur.,

may

likewise be declined like

^ft

stri in the

Dat. Abl. Gen. Loc. Sing.

The neuter has the usual

optional forms.

Bases in ^ i and

"3

u, Masculine, Feminine, Neuter.

230. There are masculine, feminine, and neuter bases in ^ i and ^ u. They are of frequent occurrence, and should be carefully committed to

memory.
Adjectives in

\i

are declined like substantives, only that the masculine

may optionally be substituted for the neuter in all cases except the Nom. and Ace. Sing. ; Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dual and Plur. Ex. wfa: suchify, masc.
bright
;

fern. ^fVi: suchih,

The same

neut. ^jfa suchi, applies to adjectives in ^ u, except that they

;

may form

their

feminine either without any change, or

by adding ^

t.

Thus

P$IK laghuh,
cflMl

light, is in the fern, either ?5T[: laghuh, to

be declined as a feminine, or

laghvi, to

be declined

like

T^t nadi.
fern,

If the final

Tu

is

preceded by more than one consonant, the

ifl'gpdndu, pale
;

does

not take ^z.

Thus

fern.

HTJJ pdnduh.

Some
declined

adjectives in ~su lengthen their vowel in the fern.,

like

and are then

tpj: pangufy.

^v: vadhufy.
kurufy,

Thus
;

T}IJ:

pahguh, lame;
kurufy
:

fern,

Likewise ^^:

Kuru

fern.

gi^: uruh, thigh,

5

such
..

a& qwljc:

some compounds ending in ^^: with handsome thighs, fern. vdmoruh,

vdmorufy.

110
Bases in

DECLENSION.
Bases in
SINGULAR.
MASC.
FEM.
NEUT.

3-

MASC.
**3x

NEUT.
**W 15
*^J 15

Base

<

\_kavi,

poet

matt, thought vdri, water

*rfitt

mridu, soft

mridu, soft

mridu, soft

N.

J
[

cFf%:

kav{-h
cfff^

mati-h
Jffif

mridu-h

mridu-h

mridu

A. J
I

kavi-m

mati-m

mridu-m

mridu-m

mridu

I.

\kavi-nd

maty-a

vdri-nd

mridu-nd
*t^
cf

mridv-d

mridu-nd

D. J
[
i

ofi'JM

miTJmatdy-eoT nftffl

^W

kavdy-e

TW maty -at
Tlf J mate-h or
.

vdri-ne

mriddv-e

mriddv-e or *J^T mridu-ne or mridv-ai *f$3 mriddv-e

Ab.G.

f ^i^J
[ kave'-h

mridd-h or

^JjpT*

mridu-nah or
mridd-h

TrPTFt

maty-dh vari-nah

mrid6-h

mridv-dh

ipjfc
I

mridau or
L.
\_kavau

J?'*T mridu-ni or

mf( maty -dm

mate

vari-ni

mridau

mridv-am

f^T mridau
or

V.

^ftv/re*

mr/c?o

DUAL.
*nft

N.A.V.
\kavi
I.D.Ab.
L

wia/^

vdri-nt

mridu

mridu

Ifgft mridu-nf

kavi-bhydm matt-bhydm
T?ftt

vdri-bhydm
<4ir<UUU

mridu-bhydm mridu-bhydm
Jpftt >pftt

mridu-bhydm
JJgrfttmn'c?M-woAor
JJ^tt mridv-dh

f^ffr*

G.L.
[A:at?y-^A

maty-6h
TiHT*

vdri-noh

mridv-6h

mridv-dh

N.V.

ofT^TIJ

PLURAL. ^TXVf% *pf^*

vari-ni

'J^*
mriddv-ah

[Aravay-fl/i

matdy-ah
fffti

mriddv-ah

mr

A.

J "^T*^
[A:fli?-w

^tx^ftr
vdri-ni

jg^
mridu-n

mati-h

^51 mridu-h

I.

matt-bhih

vdri-bhih

mridu-bhih

mridu-bhih

mridu-bhih

D.Ab.
[

IS**
kav{-bhyah mati-bhyah
vdri-bhyah

mridu-bhyah mridu-bhyah

mridu-bhyah

G.
[

kavi-nam f mati-ndm

vdri-ndm
'4i

mridu-ndm
*gj$ mridu-shu

mridu-ndm
>j^5 mridu-shu
is

mridu-nam

L.

r^rf^r^ [kawi-shu

^^
mati-shu

f<y

If !!
mridu-shu

vdri-shu

The Guna
as

in the Voc. Sing, of neuters in

^ i, TM,

^[rt,
:

approved by Madhyandini
i;

Vyaghrapad,

may

be seen from the following verse

iWT
r:

'iJ5r

T^'^^TT

^TTIT

7HIT

t Nouns ending in short ^i, I'M, ^Jn, and ^Ta, and having the accent on these vowels, may throw the accent on "*tindm in the Gen. Plur. (Pan. vi. i, 177). Hence matf'ndm, or, more usually, matindm.
%

The

lines of separation placed in the transcribed

paradigms are not intended to divide

233.
231. ^ifif kati,

DECLENSION.

Ill

in the Plural only,

how many, lf?f yati, as many (relat.), and Tffw tati, so many, are used and take no terminations in the Nom. and Ace. Plural. For the rest,
*lifa kavi,

they are declined like

and without

distinction of gender.

Nom.Voc.
Ace.
Instr.

Wfirfcto'
Tffft kdti

flufnfa; kdtibhih
"arfirWT:

Dat.
Abl.

kdtibhyah

^flfwr: kdtibhyah
*fftni kdtindm
^ifriij

Gen.
Loc.

kdtishu
:

J 232. ^rftrsaMe, friend, has two bases

for the

for the
It is irregular in

Anga, i. e. the strong base. Pada and Bha base.

DUAL.
sdkhdyau

some of

its cases.

SINGULAR.
N. TOfT sdkhd
A.
I.

PLURAL.
t

sdkhdyah

tt<?H<4

sdkhdyam

sdkhdyau

sdkhibhydm
sdkhye

sdkhibhih

D.
Ab.
G.
L.

'*{fa*R sdkhibhydm

sdkhibhyah

sdkhyuh
sdkhyuh

^rf%n

sdkhibhydm

sdkhibhyah

*fWfc sdkhyoh
W&\\\ sdkhyoh
like

sdkhfadm
sdkhishu
like

sdkhyau
5aA:Ae

V.

Nom.

Nom.

The feminine

*^ft saMz

is

regular, like
find ^f

At the end of compounds, we

masc. declined as follows

Base tjtifW susakhi, a good friend, masc.

SINGULAR.
N.
A.
I.

DUAL.
4J4HslHu susakhdyau ^[fl^lMl susakhdyau
IJ*ifW*li susakhibhydm

PLURAL.
:

susakhd

susakhdyah*
susakhln
ri

susakhdyam
susakhind

susakhibhih

D.
Ab.
G.
L.

susakhaye
susakheh susakheh

^ ftln

susakhibhydm

i:

susakhibhyah susakhibhyah

*jufw[i susakhibhydm

i:

^^t\l

susakhyoh

*jti<5i1it

susakhindm

susakhau
susakhe

'QM&\\1 susakhyoh
^^Isll^U susakhdyau
i

susakhishu

V.

susakhdyah
declined like
(

At the end of a neuter compound

is

230).

the real terminations from the real base, but only to facilitate the learning by heart of these nom. nouns. Masculine nouns in short TM are 6A4nu, sun, ^T$ rrfyu, wind, fq^ ci^nu,

HTg

prop.

"q^pWu, as

masc.,

is

the
are

name

of a tree; as neuter, the

name of its fruit

(Sar.

i.

8, 17).

Feminine nouns in short

* Siddh.-Kaum. vol.

Tw
i.

V*j: dhenuh, cow,

T^p rqjjuh,

rope, W^* fa*^> body.

p. 112.

112
2 33T rfT

DECLENSION.
pati, lord, is irregular

233-

SINGULAR.
N. Ttfnipdtih
A. Tffftpdtim
I.

DUAL.
N. A.V. ifftpdti N.
A.
I.

PLURAL.

I.D.Ab. *rfwri pdtibhydm

G. L.
tfTftt

TfTRpdtyd

pdtyoh

*rffffa:

D. TTW^afye
Ab. G. T7Jt pdtyuh
L.
ifiQipdtyau

D. Ab. Trfk^K pdtibhyah

G.
"tjrfrfri

pdtindm

L. trfinj^aft'sfa*

V. tni pdte
trfTT

V. Tfimi pdtayah
e.

^a/i at the end of compounds,

is

g. ^rfir bhtipati, lord of the earth,

cirfa

HHI MPri prajdpati, lord of creatures,

regular, like

#aw.

The feminine

of Tfopati is tf^t patni, wife, i. e. legitimate wife, she sacrifices of her husband. (Pan. iv. i, 33.)
234.

who

takes part in the

The neuter bases

1

'SrfTSf

akshi, eye, vj (Vi asthi, bone,

^f^dadhi, curds,

^^^ sakthi

thigh, are declined regularly like ^%[f%.vdri; but in the

Bha

cases they substitute the bases

'%l(dadhn, fSW*f sakthn. In these cases they are declined, in fact, like neuters in *%*[an, such as *\\*M\ndman. (See note to 203.)

mM^ aksJin, ^T^ asthn,

Anga and Pada

SINGULAR.
N.A. itfqdkshi
I.

base -f fsj akshi,

Bha

base

wv^akshn. DUAL.
'

PLURAL.
N.A.V.
I.

N.A.V. *fi%nft

dkshint

*ratftfor dkshtni

^H^ill aksJind

I.D.Ab.^Tf^rf dkshibhydm
G.L.
^T^llft:

^r%ftT: dkshibhih
dkshibhyah

D. ^r^f oJtsA^
Ab. G.
L.
*2f<{li aksJindh
4fPi9!l

akshn6h

D.Ab.^rf^^*
G.
L.

vi^ii akshndm

akshm and vuqfVj akshdni

^rf^J

dkshishu

V. ^T^ a^s^e (or

Bases in

ri,

Masculine, Feminine, Neuter.

:

235. These bases are declined after two models

SINGULAR.
I.

MASC.
Tff ridptri,

FEM.

NEUT.
VfiJ dhdtn, providence

Base

grandson

^T svdsri, sister
^WT svdsd
^^TR svdsdr-am
^THT
svdsr-d
svdsr-e

N.
A.
I.

TRTwapfa
THTt ndptdr-am
'5TJJT

V^dMtr{
VT^ dMtri

ndptr-d

VT^TT dhdtn-nd

or

VTWT dhdtrd*

D.
Ab. G.
L.

*nfr

ndptr-e

^H
^^t

dhdtn-ne or VTJJfr

VTW dhdtrd
dAaMA
dhdtdri

"^rgt

wajp^A

syaswA

VT^H
>l
I

dhdtrt-nah or VTg:
dhdtr{-ni or
>ll
ri

THft ndptar-i

*3**r<.svdsar-i

fill

fll

V. ftfi:ndptah(r)
* If

^[W. svdsah(r)

VTJ cta^n or
is

VTiT: dhdtah(r)

"^n

has Udatta and becomes

^r

and

preceded by a consonant, the feminine

and the Ajadi Asarvanamasthana cases have the Udatta.

-$

236.

DECLENSION.
PLURAL.

113

N.
A.
I.

HHKt

ndptdr-ah

^STFTCt svdsdr-ah

Vlilftu dhdiri-ni

nffi ndptri-n

*^TO svdsrt-h

VTirft& dhdtri-ni

H|fWj ndptri-bhih

<3f?J

svdsri-bhih

VTjfa: dhdtri-bhih

D.

ryi* ndptri-bhyah

T^W*tt svdsri-bhyah

Viyn

dhdtri-bhyah

Ab. "TW^* ndptri-bhyah

G.
L.
TTO!ri

^HT! svdsri-bhyah
**m!ji svdsrf-ndm (Ved.*rartfm)

VTiJi: dhdtri-bhyah
VTTpuf dhdtri-ndm
VirtM dlidtri-shu

ndptri-ndm

*|M^ ndptri-shu

s^ svdsri-shu
DUAL.
ttii<J svdsdr-au

N.A.V. tfTTOnajp^r-au
I.

VT^TJTt

dhdtrt-nt

D. Ab.

Tyn ndptri-bhydm

^^Tf svdsri-bhydm
3taU svdsr-oh

VTJWlf dhdtri-bhydm
XliJIlD*

G. L. "5?^! ndptr-oh
2.

dhatri-noh

The second model

Dual, and Nom.

differs

from the

first in

the Ace. Sing.,

^r

Nom. Ace. Voc.

Plur., by not lengthening the

a before the T r.

Base
MASC.

fifflpitft, JTTff

mdtri.

SINGULAR.
FEM.
TTfTT

DUAL.
MASC.
1
i

PLURAL.
l.M.

IfASC.

KM.

N.

"fain />#</

m^</

fMnCt
P^dr-au

iin*J

fMdil pitdr-ah

HIHU

mdtdr-ah

A. ftcITp^ar-am TTiTtwa^aV-am
I.

mdtdr-au

fm^pitri-n

TTiTt mdtri-h

D.
/N
.

Ab. IMH* pituh

G. ftrjt^M^
L.
MTTTrt pitdr-i
^piifa^ (r)

^ *1 lfl

Tfiatuh

pitrt-bhydm

matrt-bhydm
J

pitri-bhyah

mdtn-bhyah
HIH^Jjl

TTgJ

m^MA

IftTWtt

TTcft!

PMrUUl^^rt-n/m
^Vfl^ pitri-shu
PS n <I pitarah

mdtrt-ndm

^\\t\\^mdtdr-i \pitr-6h
TTiTJ mdtah(r)

mdtr-6h

nn^

mdtrt-shu

V. THH t

l^ftijpftarau 'UMitjmdtarau

*iinO mdtarah

After the

first

model are declined most nomina

:

actoris derived from verbs

doer ; T| ^TJ </a/rz, giver ; ^| A:ar/ri, W| tvdshtri, carpenter ; Ao7n, sacrificer ; H^ bhartri, husband. ^Vj After the second model are declined masculines, such as TJ bhrdtri, brother ; son-in-law ; c?evn, husband's brother ; jdmdtri,
^fiHIj

by the suffix

savyeshthri, a charioteer

*T*fY ^| and feminines, such as jftrj duhitri, daughter ; ndnandri or husband's sister ; ^15 ydtri, husband's ftf^ *TRi; ndnandri,
:

brother's wife.

Most terms of

relationship in

^ n (except

and

ifR ndptri, grandson)

If

do not lengthen their

svd&ri, sister,

ar.

used as adjectives, the masculine forms may be used for the neuter also, except in the Nom. and Ace. Sing, and Nom. Ace. Voc. Dual and Plural. The feminine is formed by \tj fern. WgffJcartri, like T^frna(#.

Note

words

in

^J

ri are

^kartri,

236.

-sft|

Jcroshtu, a jackal,

is

irregular

but most of

its irregularities

may

be explained by admitting two bases,

kroshtri (like 7p| naptri).

-aftf

kroshfu (like

g mridu)

and

114:

DECLENSION.
SINGULAR.

DUAL.
N. A.V.
kroshtdrau

PLURAL.
N. "a^TO kroshtdrah
A.
"^tj*^ kroshtun
"Siftfa: kroshtubhih

N.
A.
*ntg|<.

kroshtdram
kroshtund

I.

J
kroshtrd
kroshtave
kroshtre

I.D.Ab.

kroshtubhydm

I.

D.Ab. sRtji: kroshtubhyah

kroshtvoh

''

G.
kroshtuh

^ITrff kroshtundm

kroshtroh

kroshtau

kroshtushu

V.

Jcroshto

The base JKf^kroshtri is the only one admissible as Anga, i.e. in the strong cases, excepting the Vocative. (^ "SRtl'I he kroshtah is, I believe, wrongly admitted by Wilson.) The base ^t^kroshtu is the only one admissible as Pada, i. e. before terminations beginning with consonants.

The other

cases

may be formed from both bases, but the Ace. Plur. is T$f%*(kroshtun only.
'A^Jkroshtrln
as Ace. Plur. likewise admit

(Pan. vn. i, 95-97.) Those who admit

sjfr|

kroshtum as Ace. Sing.

(Sar.i.6,7o.)

The feminine
2 37*f

is

Vhlgl kroshtrt, declined like TSft nadt.

W H> man, a word of frequent occurrence, though, for convenience sake, often
is

replaced

by TT nara,

declined regularly like

frj pitri, except

in the Gen. Plural,

where

it

may

be either "TOT nrindm or

^pOT

nrindm.

(Pan. vi. 4, 6.)

SINGULAR.
N.
A.
I.

DUAL.
ndrau

PLURAL.
TT* ndrah

ff(nd

tR ndram

ff^ wnw

^tW
^nr^(Ved.
cjt

nnbhydm

D.
Ab.
G.
L.

^lf

nnbhydm

nnbhydh

nt^

nnbhydh
nrindm or p!n nrindm (Ved. naram)
nr6h
nrishu
fC*

g: nuh (Ved.
rfft ndri

V.

ndrau
is

ndrah

The feminine

2.

Bases ending in

^?

J 238. This class is the

like

most numerous and most important in Sanskrit, the corresponding classes of nouns and adjectives in us, a, urn in Latin,
The accent may be on the
or on the second syllables in the

first

Pada

cases beginning

with

*>\bh

and

*.

(Pan. vi.

i,

184.)

DECLENSION.

115
it is

and

oy,

77,

oi>

in Greek.

The

case-terminations are peculiar, and

best to

learn ^ihn kdntah, *hrr kdntd, SRTW kdntam

by heart

in the

same manner as
to the origin

we

learn bomis, bona, bonum, without asking

any questions as

of the case-terminations, or their relation to the terminations appended to bases ending in consonants.
SINGULAR.
MASC.

PEM.

NKUT.

Base ifakdntd

N.
A.
I.

kdntdfr

kdntam
kdnttna

cMdi kdntdm
<*id*ll
cfrfrtiM

Kfaf

kdntdm

kdntdyd
kdntdyai
r:

D.
Ab.
G.
L.
hlri44|
cRfij"

kdntdya

<*idHI kdntdya

kdntdydh

kdntdsya

ft

kdntdydh

kdntdsya

Mntt

if

kdntdydm

V.

IKUkdnta

W^kdnte*
DUAL.

N.A.V.
I.D.Ab.
G. L.

Wt Jtoaw
3inrT*qi kdntdbhydm
ehldjfl!

fcfetf

kdntabhydm
kdntdyoh
ohld'jfh

kdntdyoh

kdntdyoh

PLURAL.
N.V.
A.
I.

fafeofiri

kdntdn

Jtantfni

K kdntdbhih
:

D.Ab.
G.
L.

kdntebhyah

\\

kdntdbhyah

kdntebhyah
niniii kdntdndm
kdnteshu

chlriMI kdntdndm

<iniii kdntdndm
efiirtl*}

kdnt&hu
Certain adjectives in
\

kdntdsu

Note

ah, TOT ^, TO am,

which follow the ancient pronominal

(

declension, will be explained in the chapter

on Pronouns

278).

Bases in TOT

a,

Masculine and Feminine.

239. These bases are derived immediately

from verbs ending

in TOT a,

such as
In

WTT dhmd.

They

are declined in the

is

the neuter the final TOT d

same way in the masculine and feminine gender. shortened, and the word declined like ifa kdntam.

Anga and Pada

fern.)

base fcmmvisvapd,
declined like
RTTT

Bha base fa"W{visvap,

(

all-preserving, (masc.

and

The neuter

is

kdntam

238).

* Bases in TOT

d,

meaning mother, form

their Vocative in TO a; e. g. ^TS&akka,

TO^ alia ! But TOWtST ambddd, TO?! c5T ambdld, and TO^PiT ambikd form the
bdde, ^H<llc* ambdlet

regular Vocatives

^^Kambike.

2,

116

DECLENSION.
MASCULINE AND FEMININE.
SINGULAR.

340-

N.V.
A.

visvapd-h

visvapau visvapau

visvapd-m

I.

visvap-d
visvap-e

visvapd-bhydm
visvapd-bhydm
l

visvapd-bhih

D.
Ab.
G.
L,

visvapd-bhyah

visvap-ah

visvapd-bhydm

visvapd-bhyah
visvap-dm
visvapd-su

visvap-ah
visvap-i

visvap-oh
visvap-oh

NEUTER.
N.

fw^tf visvapam
Decline *fi^Hlt somapdh,

visvape

visvapdni, &c.
*

Soma

drinker;

sankhadhmdh, shell-blower;

dhanaddh, wealth giver.

240. Masculines in ^TT d, not being derived
as follows
:

by a Krit

suffix

from verbal roots, are declined

Base

SINGULAR.
N.V.
A.
I.

DUAL.

PLURAL.

hdhdm
hdhdbhydm
:

hdhdbhih

D.
Ab.
G.
L.

hdhdbhydm
hdhdbhydm
hdhauh
AaAe

hdhdbhyah
hdhdbhyah

hdhdm
hdhdsu

hdhauh

CHAPTER
$ 241.

IV.

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES.

As every noun
adjectives

in Sanskrit
all

may,

at the

end of a compound, form the

final portion of

an adjective,

the essential rules for the declension of such

compound

had

to

be given in the preceding chapter.

Thus

in the

declension of neuter nouns in ^n-^ as, like Trf^ mdnas, mind, the declension of ^^(sumdnas, as an adjective masc. fern, and neut., was exhibited at the same

time ($ 165). In the declension of nouns ending in consonants, and admitting of no distinction between masculine and feminine terminations, (this applies to
*

The

Sar.

i. 6,

38, gives the optional

form ^T^TJ hdhdh

in the masculine.

At the end of

a feminine

compound

the same form

is

sanctioned in the Rupavali, p. 9 b.

-$
all

247*

DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES.

117

nouns with unchangeable bases,) the special forms of the neuter in Nom. Acc.Voc. Sing. Dual and Plur. had to be exhibited. See 158, Jrft9ftjalamuk
t

*M*J*0 jalamucht, iraijfa jalamunchi.

In the declension of nouns with

changeable bases, the more important feminine and neuter forms were separately mentioned ; and in the declension of nouns ending in vowels, all
necessary rules with regard to the same subject were fully stated.
J 242.

The
is

chief difficulty which remains with regard to the declension

of adjectives

the exact formation of the feminine base, and the rules on

this subject are often so complicated that they

rather than by rule.

have to be learnt by practice The feminine bases, however, once given, there can be no

doubt as to their declension, as they follow exactly the declension of the corresponding feminine nouns. A few observations on this point must suffice.
J 243. Adjectives* in ^r

a form their feminines in *n

d.

Ex.

ftnf

priya,

dear, masc. fire: priyah, fern, ftnn priyd,

like ^Fru

neut. ftrf priyam, to be declined

kdnta

($ 238).

244. Certain adjectives derived by ^HR aka form their feminines in

^9R ikd.

Ex.

m^<*

pdchaka, cooking, masc.

HM<*;

pdchakafi,

fern.

*nflRT pdchikd,

neut.

TTPW

pdchakam.
<*! fX<*l

Likewise masc.
kdrikdj

*HI

sarvakaTi, fern. ttRcfcl sarvikd, every;

4K*t
But

kdrakah, doing,

^iscR
;

ihatyakah, present here, $^fi*|<*l ihatyikd.

-q<;=fti

PHflJfcl kshipakd, fern,

one

who
star.

sends

<*Mtii kanyakd, fern. maiden;

chatakd, fern,

sparrow; ni<ji tdrakd, fern.

ajikd,

Sometimes both forms occur ;

vmcm ajakd and

vificu

a she-goat.
:

$ 245. Bases in ^jrz

and

in

^n

take

as the sign of the feminine

w*

kartri, doer, ofi^f ( 235) ; ^fe^ dandin, a mendicant, ffitfl dandint (J 203). Likewise most bases ending in consonants, if they admit of a separate

kartri

feminine base

"VN^prdch, w^ftprdchi ($ 181) ; ig^foan, dog, ^n^suni (J 199)

xm^bhavat,

HTift bhavati (J 188).

Some
fat,

adjectives in

van form their

feminine base in
246.
i|*U*i<4*

3^vari: ifa^pivan,
^Ta form

q^'^ pivari
\i
(

193).
225), instead of WTa.-

Many

adjectives in

their feminine base in

trinamayah,

made

of grass,

ij<u*i<fl

trinamayf ;

^t devah

god, dh-ine, ^^t devl;

If^UJI tarunah or cT<5*Tt talunah, a youth, ntj*ul taruni; ^*n,I kumdraJi, a boy, ^*fi-u kumdri;
jffat gopah, cowherd, ^rftn^^qp^ his wife,
actor,

but '*\\mgopd, a female shepherd

;

l^=t nartakaA,

in<*l nartaki;

^Tt mrigah, a deer, ipft win^, a doe

HRTJ

sukaraJt, boar, <g^nrf

sukarithat

^^<*iO kumbhakdrah, a potter, ^H'niO kumbhakdri. It will be observed, however, many of these words are substantives rather than adjectives. Thus TOH matsyah, fish,
*irwl matsi ("Qya

forms

being expunged before ^i)

TTt

t*jHl manushyaJi, man,

*iju manushi.
T&n etd
white,

247. Certain adjectives in

7TT ft?

^a^, expressive of colour, form their feminine either in

or in
enf;

ftnf: "^TifJ syetah, white,

^WT/ye/a, ^pFftsyenf;
roAtVa or

'ZiT.etaJi,

variegated,

or

^ft

^f^Wt

rohitah, red,
;

^%iTT

f^^ll rohint, but

^Hi

?e/aA,

svetd; ^(VieiTflstVa, white

M Pc4 ri I palitd, grey -haired.

v. 3, 58.

gunavachana, the name for adjective, occurs in Pan.

118
248.
J

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES.
The formation
of feminine substantives
i

248from the dictionary.

must be

learnt

Thus

^HSK asvah, horse, forms ajah, goat, forms v< i ajd. : bdlah, forms WTc5T bald. boy,
sudrah, a S'udra, forms
t

W *a

asvd.

f
1

SLUT **

swc?ra,
,

woman

of the S'udra caste.

^rjl sudri, the wife of a Sudra.

*i \

mdtulaJi,

maternal uncle, forms Hl'j'cA mdtuli or

ijc4

*fl

mdtuldm, an uncle's wife.

dchdryah, teacher, forms

dchdryd, a female teacher.
|)a/i$, lord,

^Ti-qwfl dchdrydnt* ,
&c.

wife of the teacher; but

forms

^f^ patni, wife,

Degrees of Comparison.

The Comparative is formed by TTC; tara, or ^q^ fyas (J 206) the J 249. Superlative by HT tama, or ^ir ishtha t. These terminations in: ^cr and TW /ama
;

are not restricted in Sanskrit to adjectives.

Substantives such as
tj

nri,

man,

form

a thorough man; ^ft 5^rz, woman, {pflrUf stritard\, j?m: nritamah, more of a woman. Even after case-terminations or personal terminations,
in:

tara and

H*T

fawa may be used.

Thus from ^tr% purvdhne,

in

in the

forenoon (Pan. vi. 3, 17). forenoon, ^tT%Jfft pdrvdhnetare, From tH frl pachati, he cooks, T^fjr?fxf pachatitardm, he cooks better (Pan. v.
earlier

the

3, 57), M^fririHl

250.

"cRl

Pada
(

base.

pachatitamdm, he cooks best (Pan. v. 3, 56). fara and im ^m, if added to changeable bases, require the Thus from Tfi^prdch ( 180), m&Kprdktara; from
\f^j[^dhanavat ( iftj), \Ftt fzrsw* vidvattama ; from TTF^ pratyach 204),
;

203), >|ftTTt dhanitara

($

from

from f%^^^6?va5
VKTiK^pratyaktara.

181),

however, a few exceptions, such as <^gii*U from <^J^ dasyuhan, demon-killer ; ^i|fv(riT: supathintarah, dasyuhantamah, from *Jtrfa^ supathin, with good roads.
are,

There

f 251. %*R(iyas

and ^ishtha are never added

"3&vala f&^vin,
9

to the secondary suffixes

^H,
and

Tt^fwaf,

^v^,

JSftin.

If adjectives ending in these

suffixes require ^Tt iyah

3[S

ishtha added to
'<4

and ^5 ishtha, the suffixes are dropt, and the i^r: iyah the last consonant of the original base. ^r<*H i^ bala^rvdogdhri, milking,
<)^1 1|^

vdn, strong,
doh-iyas,

<^1

n^ iZ- tyas, wfe? bal-ishtha.

^f^r doh-ishtha.

fcifi^ sragvin, garlanded,

^^^sraj-iyas, more
*rfire

profusely garlanded.
*

*f?RT^wa^waft, wise, ^^mat-iyas,

see

mat-ishtha.

On

the dental

*^,

Gana Kshubhnadi

in the Kas'.-Vritti.

f Before

?R ^ara and TfT ^ma adjectives retain their accent; before %*&(iyas

and

^T? ishtha

they throw it on their first syllable (Pan. in. i, 4; vi. i, 197). There are a few exceptions. % Feminines in \i, derived from masculines, must shorten the \i before JR. tara and rW tama; ^i^HJjft brdhmani forms WT^rftjUrm brdhmanitard. Other feminines in ^i or "^iw

may

or

may

not shorten their vowels

^f\

stri

forms ^pprRT stritard or (^|ri<l

stritard.

Also ^JnrcrfafTT sreyasitard or ''SRftfilll sreyasitard;

vidushitard (Pan. vi. 3, 43-45).

fi^*ln<l mdushitard or

-f

252.

DECLENSION. OF ADJECTIVES.

119

J 252.

Other

adjectives, too, lose their derivative elements before

and

^ff ishtha,

or are otherwise irregular

by

substituting
;

new bases

for the
;

Comparative and Superlative.

MlfMtf

TJTO pdpah, bad

pap-iyaSy worse

pdp-ish(ha, worst.
SECOND BASE.
COMPARAT1VK.
nedtyas
as

BCPERLATIVE.
iK-ilislithfl

i.

^ffnn

antika, near

2.

alp a, small

kanishtha
alpishtha

or
3.
4.

alpiyas

T^j uru, wide

"^nr
riju, straight

variyas
rijtyas

varishtha
^fTttf rijishtha

Vedic
5. *f $T krifa,

rajiyas

rajishtha

lean

krastyas

krasishtha
"Sjftnf kshepishtha

6. VttjH kshipra,
7.

quick

ksheptyas

TJ$

kshudra,

mean

kshod

kshodiyas

ttfif^B kshodishtha
*II<I.H

8.

T^^wrw, heavy

g arty as
as

garishtha
trapishtha

9. ^TT tripra, satisfied

^fs

10.
11
.

^W dirgha, long
gT
cJwra, far

drdghiyas

'^lfl|8 drdghishtha

davtyas

davishtha

12. TT3" dridha, firm 13. H(V<J<S parivridha, exalted

"5^ dradh

dradhtyas
as s f<

dradhishtha
PC s parivradhishtha

M (Xd ^ parivradh
TT^^ra^A
fro.

14.
15.

^^^n^M,

broad

pratMyas

nPM8

prathishtha

H ^l mprajasy a,praiseworthy TR
or

IR! sreshtha

6.

ftftpriya, dear

Upra
*J5I^ bhuyas

TfH preshtha bhuyishtha

17. "^J bahu,

1 8.

many

*^c5

bahula, frequent

bamhiyas

bamhishtha t
Hf^Tff bhrasishtha

19.

^F Mn/a, excessive
lg
mridu, soft

bhra&yas
mradiyas
yaviyas
or

20.

mradishtha
yavishtha

21. fl^*^ywt?aw,

young

kantyas
sddhtyas

kanishtha^

22. '^TSvddha, firm 23. ^5T vriddha, old

Kshthat
varshishtha

varsh
or

<**t[m{ varshiyas

24.
25.

K.CH vrinddraka, beautiful

^
^1

unndf
stha

vrindfyas

vrindishtha

f^RsMtra, firm

stheyas
sthavfyas

stheshtha

26. 27.

^c5
f^TO

stMla, strong
sphira, thick

sthavishtha

t*tM^ spheyas
hrasfyas

spheshtha
hrasishtha

28.

j[^

hrasva, short

* Pan. vi. 4, 162.

f See

Phitsiitra, ed. Kielhorn,

i.

23 (20).

P&n v 3 63-

120

NUMERALS.

253-

CHAPTER
NUMERALS.
253.
Cardinals.
ekah, ekd, ekam, one.

V.

(Base
^r

^ 1^,

if, if,
,

efoe,

two.

(Base

dva; in comp.

3 WQl, fro:,

trdyalj,, tisrdh,

trmi, three.

(Base
chatvdri,
four.

TOTft,
^ chatur.)

chatvarah,

chdtasrah,

(Base

5
6

M
f

'fapdncha, m.

f.

n. five.

(Base

^T 5^a^,

m.

f.

n. six.
f.

(Base

shash.)

3 TOf saptdj m.
b

n. seven.
f.

(Base
(Base
ashtan.)

^T^
T3T

ashtau, m.

n. eight.

9 10
1 1

m.
a,

f.

n. nine. n. ten.

(Base
(Base (Base as in

m.
/

f.

ekddasa, eleven.

mn.)

dvddasa.
trdyodasa.

35

36

^ ^zf^ri ^
do

shattrimsat.

14
15

chdturda&a.

37 3^

ifa^T pdnchada&a.
shodasa.

38 ^b

ashtdtrimsat.

39

navatrimsat.
chatvdrimsdt,
fern.

17
1

^
l<*.

saptddasa.
ashtadasa.

40

8 st

41 di

ekachatvdrimsat.

ndvadasa or
^^rfTTJ

42 ^^

dvdchatvdrimsat or
dvichatvdrimsat
.

unavimfatih.
fern.

20 ^o
21
2,2,

vimsdtih,

43 83
$8

R\\J(trayaschatvdrimsat or
l

rfir:

ekavimsatify.

trichatvdrimsat.

23

^ ^

fitt

dvdvimsatih.
trayovimsatih.

44

chatuschatvdrimsat.

ffr:

45 8M

24 ^d
25 ^M 26

n chaturvimsatih. n panchavimsatify.
shadvimfatih.
ifrf:

46 ^i
47 48
d^

shatchatvdrimsat.

^
^

8b

r^.\\^ashtdchatvdrimsat or

27 ^S

saptavimSatih.

ashtachatvdrimsat.

28 ^b

^rrtJ ashtdvimsatih.

49

d<i.

navachatvdrimsat.
fern.

29

navavimsatih.
fern.

50 MO

30 30
31

51 Ml ^cF^T^Ti^ ekapanchdsat.

ekatrimsat.

52 M? ^IM^I^If^ dvdpanchdsat or

32

dvdtrimsat.

flTM^I^ dvipanchdsat.
53 M^

33 33

^n^Nm^ trayahpanchdsat or
r^M^r^lr^ tripanchdsat.

34 3^

chatustrimsat.

253.

NUMERALS.
chatuhpanchdM.
77 $9
saptasaptatih.

121

54 MS
55 56
57 MS 58
Mb

MM

78 sb ^tMUHfril ashtdsaptatify or
shatpanchdsat.
athtasaptatih.

saptapanchdsat.

ashtdpanchdsat or
>HKM*II$1^

79 <* 80 bo
81 ti

navasaptatih.

ashlapanchdM.

ekdsttify.

59 MQ. HMM^I^Ir^ navapanchdsat. 60 ^o trffc: shashlih, fern.

61

82 b*
83 t*

ekashashtih.

84 b*
85 fcM 86 ti 87 t9 88
bb

frt:

chaturatttih.

62

dvdshashlih or
:

ri:

panchdsitih.

dvishashtih.

shada&itib.
:

63 ^^
:

trayahshashtih or
trishashtify.

saptdsitih.

64

fc-S

chatushshashlih.

89 b*

65 ^M 66 $fa
67
^>9
^fc

panchashashtify.
shatshashtih.

90
91

<io

navatih.
ekanavatifr.

^
0.3
:

saptashashiih.

92

dvdnavatify or

68

ashtdshashtih or
ashtashashtil}.

dvinavatih.

93 q ?

trayonavatih or
trinavatih (not
Tff

69

^<j.

navashashtih.

n).

70 so
71 S^

saptatih, fern.
:

94^
95 *M 96
97
Q.^
:

chaturnavatih.

ekasaptatih.

panchanavatih.

73 s^

dvdsaptatih or
dvisaptalih.

shannavatih.
:

<ts

saptanavatib.

73 S^

trayahsaptatih or
trisaptatih.

98 ^b

ashtdnavatih or
ashtanavatih.

74 Sd
75 SM

chatuhsaptatih,.

99

<S.Q

navanavatih or

panchasaptatih.
shatsaptatify.

unasatam.

100
101

)oo

w
<^o^
i<>3

satdm, neut. and masc.

B ^Tit

ekddhikam

(Siddh.-Kaum. vol. u. p. 635.) atam, hundred exceeded by one; or as a com-

pound,
102 103
f

44ilfVj<*3M

ekddhika-satam, or *^rrf* ekafatam, as before.

dvyadhikam

IT

%^nr dvifatam. (Pan. vi. tryadhikam batam or f^nt trtiatam.

chaturadhikam katam or
:^T?f

Mam or

3, 49.)

104

iod

'^nf

chatuh&atam.

105 IOM 1 06 ^o^

107 ios 1 08 sot

^TW
^Tff

panchddhikam shadadhikam

atam or "4^17? pancha&atam.

or

Mam

hatfatam.

^TTf

saptddhikam katam or

3Tf ashtddhikam
rff

109

soo.

Mam or navddhikam Mam or

saptafatam. ashtafatam. (Pan. vi. 3, 49.)

navaMam.

122

JTUMEEALS.

253.

no in

^nftnir sn? dasddhikam satam or ^FSlrf dasasatam.

i^RT^nftraf snr ekddasddhikam satam or

TOT^TW

ekddasasatam &c.

or u^fiT^f STW ekddasam satam,

excess).

i.

e.

a hundred having eleven (in

Pan. v.

2, 45.

H2
113
1

<\<\^

14

^3 ^8
^M
<|C|^

dvddasam satam. IT^nfaoff ^nr dvddasddhikam satam or ^T^T ^fafsnfirir $nr trayodasddhikam satam or^[^^trayodasam satam.
^t^IlfVoF ^IW chatur dasddhikam satam or '^njtST ^li chaturdasam satam. ''T^^TTfv^ ^panchadasddhikam satam or iHr^T ^panchadasam satam.
^^rrfVrlr ^rw shodasddhikam satam or
*fhr$f ^Tif

115 116
117

W
CI^Q

shodasam satam.

1 1 8 <ttb

saptadasddhikam satam or TOT^I ^Tcf saptadasam satam. ^m^^nftnfi ^Ifl^irftrar ^Tff ashtddasddhikam satam or -5ilfT^^ "5^ ashtddasam satam.
rr^^Tf^Gir

119 1 20
121

jc|<>

"^ navadasddhikam satam

or

^^T

^TfT

navadasam satam.

^
<^^o

f^^rwAl"<* $Trf

TT5|if^rwfV%

vimsatyadhikam satam or f^r 3Tff vimsam satam *. ekavimsam ekavimsatyadhikam satam or Tjcfif^i

satam*, &c.
1

30

f^^fv%

$TiT

trimsadadhikam satam or

f^ SHT trimsam satam *.

^fi3lfc$r ^nf

140

i$o

^^Tfr^fVNr ^TiT chatvdrimsadadhikam satam or rimsam satam*.

or Fr3Trf sdrdhasatam,, 100 +-J- (hundred).

chatvd^

150 <wo
160

i^^i\i%^/>a/icMsa^a^/:flms/morTj^T^^pfl^

nwfV^r ^rf shashtyadhikam satam or ^fF$nf shashtisatam. 170 ^so ^nrmiVGR ^iif saptatyadhikam satam or tiHfri$('ri saptatisatam. 1 80 ^bo ^ifarfVrojr ^nr asityadhikam satam or xM^flfrtDM asitisatam.

^o

190 SQ.O H5rwf\f% ^nr navatyadhikam satam or TT^ffT^nr navatisatam. cfoe sa/e or Pd^M dvisatam or ffT^nft dvisati. 200 ^oo ir

300 ^oo

^% ^nnf5T
'q'q
'SfTlTT'PfT

ifrmi satdni or f^Tff trisatam.

400

^oo ^r^rftl Tfnnf^T chatvdri satdni or ^g:^i^ chatuhsatam.

500 MOO 600 ^oo

pancha satdni or

"q^ITt panchasatam.

"^7 ^Idlfrf

5^a/ satdni or Ml^frl shatsatam.

WHSlrl

700 500 TOT ^Mif*i 5jo/a satdni or 800 fcoo ^n? ^lirrf'T ashta satdni or
900 Q.OO IT^ 1000 ^ooo
^nrrf*T

saptasatam.
ashtasatam.

^31

ri

wva

satdni or

Tr^ilf

navasatam.
fern.,

^TWrf?T <&zsa satdni

or ^Sfl^nrt dasasati,

or ?H[H sahdsrani,

neut. and masc.t

2000 ^ooo

i"

^H

cfoe
I

sahasre.
Pill

3000 ^ooo

^^Hril

*T?W

/rmi sahasrdni.
neut. and masc.f
rules apply to

10,000 ^0,000
* Pan. v.

^w ayutam,
The same

2, 46.

^IfH sahasram,
vol.

1000, so that

ion might be

rendered by ^'cmq^} 1Xig& ekddasam sahasram, 1041 by i<*^r=nf^^I ^^5T ekachatvdrimsam

sahasram, &c.

t Siddh.-Kaum.

n. p. 635.

J 253.

NUMERALS.
fern.*,

123

100,000 100,000 7TBJ laksham, neut. or

or fagw niyutam, ncut. and masc.t

One
Ten

million, fljw prayutam, neut. or

masc.* and neut.

TITI

millions,

Tsfrfz

koti,

fem.J

A A

hundred

millions, ^TJ^ arbuda, masc.

thousand millions, *TI J<J mahdrbuda, masc. and neut., or

i.

padma,

neut.,

e. lotus.

Ten thousand

millions,

kharva, neut.,

i.

e.

minute.

A A

hundred thousand
billion, H^IM-W

millions, fn^c5 nikharva, neut.

mahdpadtna, neut.
i.

Ten

billions,

$vj sahku, masc.,

billions,
e. sea.

e.

an

ant-hill.
i.

A
A

hundred

^fa sahkha, masc. neut.,

e.

a conch-shell, or *nj^

samudra, masc., i. thousand billions, ^T^fa mahd&ahkha, or ^w antya, ultimate. Ten thousand billions, ^T^T hdhd, masc., or Hm madhya, middle.

A hundred thousand billions, n&^imahdhdhd, or iQ&pardrdha,

One
Ten
million billions, neut. ^tf dhuna, million billions, *?^TVrf mahddhuna.
e.

i.

e.

other half.

A A

hundred million biUions, ^fff^ilfl akshauhini, fern., i. thousand million billions, q^iH^f^ft mahdkshauhini.
In the same manner as

a host.

^rfVcR adhika, exceeding, 'Sftuna, diminished,

i}*ftf
^Tff

may

be used to form numerical compounds.

M -ft H 51 tipanchonasatam, 100
5,
i.

panchonam fatam or

e.

95.

If one

is

to be deducted, "gR una,

without

c|f

eka t suffices.
19.

sjiHf^flT: unavimsatih or K^Tlfffci^ifiT: ekonavimSatih,

Another way of expressing nineteen and similar numbers is by Jd 4 14(^31 ft: ekdnnavimsatih, prefixing ^FTW ekdnna, i. e. by one not vi. 3, 76.) by one not twenty, i. e. 19. (Pan.
20
i, i.e.
;

SINGULAR.
MASC.
FEM.
l^RT tkd ^cRT ekdm

Declension of Cardinals. eka > one -

"

PLURAL.
FEM.

N. *5K tkah
A. VFR tkam
I.

^ ^

NEUT.

MASC.

NEUT.

tkam tkam

T&K eke

^BH

ekdh

U<*1^

e'A:a

^^iK ^roA
V^iT*?: ekdbhih

l*cJH eTcena

TWm ekayd
^afc^ ekasyai

^<*H ^tena

^%t

eifcatA

D. '&R& tkasmai
Ab.
^cROTTi^efcasmaZ

5<*^
h ^M

ekasmai

l&Wle'kebhyah'&
<;cni^f ekdsdm

^4^1: ekasydh Q<*W\^ekasmdt ^Ti: tkebhyah ^ri: tkdbhyah ^W^l

^ <+^H ekasydh ^
1

G. ^<=M-M tkasya
L.

ekasya

<J<*Mf ekeshdm

^*im\ e'keshdm
^"^T^ f A-esAu

^(WT^efcasmm

^oh^MieArasyam'^flftTWr^e^aswit/i

^cF^e^e^M
*^T ^te

{cni^

el-5a

V.

^8 ^3ta

^R

eyte

^R ^Jba

^BT: elaA

^BTfiT rtaiu

* Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 635.

f Amara-Kosha in.

6, 3, 24.

A different string of names is given in theVajasan.-Sanhita xvn. 2. B

2

See also Woepcke, Memoire

sur la propagation des chiffres indiens (1863), p. 70; Lalita-vistara, ed. Calcutt. p. 168.

124:

NUMERALS.
254* ft dvi, two, base

$254(

^ ^,

like

cfffir

Ararat

238).

DUAL.
MASC.

FEM.

dvdbhydm

l"Tn

dvd'bhydm

G.L.
$ 355. f<f

dvdyoh

dvdyoh

H, three,

fern.
fwrcfc (Pan. vi. i, 166)

N.V.
A.

<?R:

*rya#

tisrdh *

D. Ab. fif*n tribhydh

G.
L.
d*U4lli traydndm (Ved. trindm)
"JW'3

frfWH

tisribhyah

tribhydh

ftHprf tisrindm
Irt^Mf tisrishu

traydndm
trishu

trishu

356.

^g^ chatur,

four, fern.

^H^ chatasri.
^rTHt chdtasrah
chdtasrah*
>Tt

N.V.
A.
I.

^n^tc/mWra#(Pan.vii.i,98)

chatvdri

^if* chaturah

(Pan. vi.

i,

167)

^ r3

U. chatvdri
:

^jjf^ chaturbhih
^TJ**?*
^i
r

chatasribhih

chaturbhih

D. Ab.
G.
L.

chaturbhyah

chatasribhyah

n chaturbhyah
chaturndm
chaturshu

5<U chaturndm

in<ui chatasrindm f
^irt-HM

chatasnshu

^57

^,

five,
r

"^r shash, six.

4igc^ ashtan, eight.

N.A.V. iH^a'Ma
I.

5^4
shadbhih

ashtau or ^T? ashtd

:

iHf^^ancAa^AiAt

ashtdbhih
t

\\

D.Ab. "*fatt panchdbhyah

G.
L.

shadbhydh

ashtdbhydh

ashtdbhyah

"4^

panchdndm If

shanndm ^
shatsu

ashtdndm
ashtdsu or

If

""fajj panchdsu

ashtdsu

Cardinals with bases ending in

w,,

such as

TOlr^ saptan,

T^ navan,
panchan.

dasan, <ichi^^ ekddasan, &c., follow the declension of

\\vimsatih is declined like a feminine in ^i; those in
in
"j^tf;
TT

"q^
f

like feminines

^HT satam like a neut. or masc. in

^r.
i

258.
is

The

construction of the cardinals from

in the singular only, except

to 19 requires a few remarks.

it

*Jfi

eka

naturally used

when

means some

^fi"

^frf

eke vadanti,

Not

rf^n f&r?#,

nor

-i n^ft

chatasrth.

(Accent, Pan. vi.

I,

i67,vart.;

vn. 2,99, vart.)

in

f Not fw^nf tisrindm, nor the Veda and Epic poetry.

t Accent, Pan. vi.
i,

-iriii]ri

chatasrindm (Pan. vi. 4, 4), though these forms occur

180; 181.

||

Pan. vi.

i,

172.

If

Pan. VH.

i,

55.

259.
say.
fif dvi is

NUMERALS.
always used as a dual,
all

125
the rest from 3 to 19 as plurals.

some people
Ex. fafa:

TjpT*fc

tribhih purushaih, with three

men

;<*i<^l

^w^ekddata pvrushdn,
niOi

eleven

men,

ace.

The

cardinals after four do not distinguish the gender; <<*!<; 31

ace.
i

ekadasa

ndrih, eleven

women,

While the numerals from

tives in gender,
if

to 19 are treated as adjectives, agreeing with their substanin

possible,

and

number and

case, fq^ifni vimsatih

and the

rest

may

be

treated both as adjectives and as substantives.

Hence fi^|fdt ^ic^di vimtatih fatrundm,

VftH fiji^q: shashtih sis'av'ih, sixty twenty enemies, or f=J5lfff! ^lei^'. vimsatih fatravah ; satam phaldni, a hundred fruits j fc^l n ^fil tririrfatd vriddhaih, by thirty boys ; ^Tff MirilfH
i

elders
fi^ri'Ct

^uflnl 6atam ddsindm or ^Trf sahasram pitarah, a thousand ancestors.

TfHT

$\mi satam

ddsyati,

a hundred slaves

*HH

Exceptionally these cardinals

liayaih, with
fifty horses.

may

take the plural

number

M^i^ns^Mt

pailchdsadbhir

J 259.
H,

Ordinals.

prathamdh,
5

d,

am,
"|

agrimdfy, d,

am,
am,

> the first.

H,

ddimdh,

d,

^, dvitiyab, d,
:,

am, the second.

third.

tTT,

^, tritiyah, d,

am, the
z, ^77?^,
"j

chaturthdh,
turtyafy,
0<
9

d am,

the fourth.

r,

T,
:,

turyah, d, am,

ft,

?t,

pafichamdh,
z,

i,

am, the

fifth.

shashthdh,
T,

w, the sixth.
i,
i,

:,

ift,
ft,

saptamdh,
ashtamdh,

am, the seventh. am, the eighth.

:,

4,
,

navamdh,
dasamdh,
f,

i,

am, the ninth. am, the tenth.

i,

t,

Jft,

JT,

i,

ekddasdfy,

am, the eleventh.

,

am,
i,

t,

unavimbdh,

am,
i,

the nineteenth.

*, dnavimsatitamdh,
I,

am,
1
}

m^,
i,

am
r,

(Pan. v. 2,56),
i

^ vim&atitamdh

am
l

^
1

twentieth

#,

*
ft,

MmM*,
^T,
ft,

,
i,

the thirtieth>

^NH:,

4, trimsattamdh,

am,
i,

$ft,
:,

chatvdrimsdb,
H,

am,
i,

fortieth

chatvdrimsattamdh,
i,

am,

MHi^rt,

$ft 5

3T,

patichdsdh,

am,
i,

'M^'I^MHJ,

<ft,

4,

panchdsaitamdh,

am,

126
:

NUMERALS.
shashtitamdh, the sixtieth *.
t

260-

ekashashtitamdh h,

ekashashtah,
;

\ ]

the sixty-first.

.,

saptatitamdh, the seventieth.

riH:
:

ekasaptatitamdh,]
>

the seventy-first.

ekasaptatah,
:

asititamdh, the eightieth.

:

ekdsititamdfy,

1 \ \

*/*, 'i

the eighty-first.
i,
,,

,,

d&tdfr,
*ft,

jf,

navatitamdhj
>

am, the ninetieth.

.

ekanavatitamdh t \
:

the ninety-first.

ekanavatdhj
*rt,
:

J
i,

:,

if,

Satatamdh,

am, the hundredth.

first.

(Pan. v.

2, 57.)

ekasatatamdfy, the

hundred and

sahasratamdb, the thousandth.

260.

Numerical Adverbs and other Derivatives,

once.

^f\ sakrit,

^cRVT ekadhd, in one way.

ffTVT

j, twice.

dvidhd or ^VT dvedhd, in "two ways.

J, thrice.
:

f^>n tridha or ^>n tredhd, in three ways.

chatuh, four times.

:

^T chaturdhd, in four ways.

Tfowpanchadhd, in
five

panchakritvahj five times.

shatkritvah, six times, &c.

ways.

-qto shodhd, in six ways, &c. (or

ekasahy one- fold.

isah 9 two-fold.

f^r:
"STf

tri&afr,

three-fold, &c.

(Pan.

v. 4, 43.)

dvayam or

ffinf dvitayam, a pair.

(Pan. v.

2,

42.)

fi[

tray am or fdd4 tritayam or

tetrad.

gifi' ^rayz,

a triad.

^^44 chatushtayam, a
These are

^(^nr^panchatayam, a pentad, &c.

used as adjectives, in the sense of five-fold &c., and may then form their plural as "^n^fllpanchataydJ}, or tNTnr panchataye (J 283).
also

a pentad, a decad (Pan. v. i, 60), are generally ^r?^ dasat, VFR^panchat, used as feminine; but both words occur likewise as masculine in the

commentary
*

to Pan. v.

I,

59,

and

in the Kasika-Vritti.

The

ordinals

from sixty admit of one form only, that

2, 58).

is

TfT:

tamahj but

if

preceded

by another numeral, both forms are allowed (Pan. v.

t

!Jfif

satam forms

its

ordinal as

satatamah only (Pan. v.

2, 57).

261.

PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

127

CHAPTER

VI.

PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

261.

Personal Pronouns.
composition)
IT?

Base

(in

mad and

Base

(in

composition)

R^

tvad and

asmad.
SINGULAR.

yT^ yushmad.

N. *n ahdm,
A.
I.
*rf

W /ram,
ftf

thou

Wm, m wd,

*RT

me wayd, by me
to

tvdm,

tvd,

thee

OTT

tvdyd,

by thee

D.

TO

mdhyam, ^ me,

me

Tjwi

Ab. *n^wa/, from me G. TO mama, ^ we, of

L.
*cfa

tubhyam, ^ te, to thee from thee

tfava,

me

te,

of thee

mdyi, in

me
DUAL.
/

in thee

N. ^rni dvam, we two

A.
^rref

*pf yuvdm, you two

g^f yuvdm, ^f vawi, you two

^v^m,

^ waw, us two

I. W3Tli dvdbhydm, by us two *pnli yuvdbhydm, by you two D. VHNI*qf dvabhydm, ft waw, to us two 5^Trf yuvdbhydm, ^f vaw, to you two from you two Ab. WTTri dvdbhydm, from us two g^T^rf yuvdbhydm,

G. SUN Ml: dvdyoh,

L.
VHN*ft:

^ft ?zaw,

of us two

g^ft: yuvdyoh, ^f vaw, of you two

dvdyoh, in us two

^4 <TlJ yuvdyoh, in you two

PLURAL.

N.
A.
I.

vaydm, we
asmdn, ^: wa^, us
:

yfydm, you
yushman, ^: vaA, you
:

asmdbhih, by us
^: waA, to us
i

yushmdbhih, by you
to

D.
Ab. ^ro\
L.

asmdbhyam, ama/, from us

IT:

*pn^
of us

yushmdbhyam, ^: vaA, yushmdt, from you

yushmdkam,
^: vah, of
su, in
i

you

G. >HWli asmdkam,

wA,

you

srsm asmdsu,

in us

you

The
7T te,

substitutes in the even cases, *n

md,

we,

7?aw, ^

^f v^m, ^: vaA, have

no accent and are never used

at the beginning of

a sentence, nor can they be followed by such particles as

or,

^ cha,

and,

"^T

vd,

eva, indeed,

^ ha,

^r^ aha.

128

PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

262. Base (in composition) u^ tad, he, she, SINGULAR.
MASC.
it.

262

(Accent, Pan.vi.

i,

182.)

PLURAL.
FEM.
WTt tdh

FEM.

NEUT.

MASC.
ff te

NEUT.
ITTf^ tdni

N. *H sdh
A.
I.

i(tdm

HX

tctm

HT^tdt
cHT

TTF^

td'n

irn tdh

WrfT

tdni

^T
tdsmai

IHIT ^aya

Una
tdsmai

%:

taik
i:

infa:

%: tain

D.
Ab.
G.
L.

tebhyah

tdbhyah

ffH

tdsydh
ta'sya

K tdbhyah
tdsya
"rfTOT frf'sam

Wi
W^f

ntlit tdsydh

tdsydm
MASC.

tdsmin

Wg
NEUT.

teshu

DUAL.
FEM.

N. A. WT tau
I.

D. Ab. TTWf tdbhydm

G. L.
inftt ta'yoA

rTTn tdbhydm

tdbhydm

263. Base (in composition)

SINGULAR.
N.
A.

PLURAL.
MASC.
FEM.
NEUT.

W
"FT

MASC.
sydh

FEM.

^TT syd

mr:
tydh

^/^i

WT #y^m
wt

'I

tydbhih

mi

tyaih

D. TIw tydsmai

7TO

tydsyai

T?w

tydsmai

Ab. mWTi(tydsmdt m^TTI tydsydh j\W\^tydsmdt

G.
L.

Wm tytbhyah 7TW* tydbhyah Wl tyebhyah

W^f tyeshdm
mjlty&hu
mi^lf tydsdm
TH'^f

mW tydsya

?T^TTt tydsydh

7TO

tydsya

tytshdm

'mfeff*[tydsmin 10X31 tydsy dm

mftR^ tydsmin
DUAL.
FEM.

mTQtydsu
NEUT.

TT^tyeshu

MASC.

N. A.
I.

7TT

D. Ab.
G. L.

mTlf
T*nft*

tydbhijdm

mi^TT tydbhydm
W*ftl tydyoh

tybhydm

tydyoh

Possessive Pronouns.

the bases of the three personal pronouns, possessive adjectives 264. are formed by means of ^T 2ya.
JT^fan,
:,

From

^rr,

V,

madtyah, yd, yam, mine.

*n,
)

^, tvadiyah, yd,
T^y

yam, thine.
its.

tadiyah, yd, yam, his, her,

^T,
:,

^
*r,

asmadiyah, yd, yam, our.

/

irr,

yushmadiyah, yd, yarn, your.

4, tadiyah, yd,

yam,

their.
*n*?R*

Other derivative possessive pronouns are

mdmdkah, mine

riN<=K

Idvdkah, thine; ^n^RTR: dsmdkah, our; ^^RTcfi: yaushmdkah, your.

* Pan. iv. 3, 1-3; iv. 1,30;

Likewise

vn.

3, 44.

-f

269.

PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

mdmakinak, mine
;

129
:

rfN<*lHt tdvakinah, thine

dsmdkinafy,

our

i^mi^lnj: yaushmdkinah your.

Reflexive Pronouns.

265.
it

WQsvaydm,

self, is

indeclinable.

vritavdn, I chose

myself, thou chosest it thyself, he chose it himself; ^ni <Jd*Ml svayam vritavati, she chose it herself; ^4 ^fHff: svayam vritavantah, we, you, they chose
it

by

our, your, themselves.

2,66.

WtH*{dtmdn,

self, is

declined like

WB^brahman (J 1 92).
by
thyself, gnosce
te

E
ipsum;

^T dtmdnam dtmdndpatya,
<fht

see thyself

It is used in the "^TRidtmano dosham jndtvd, having known his own fault. even when referring to two or three persons uirHHl <$IHNIMJ ipn: singular
:

dtmano desam dgamya mritdh, having returned to

their country, they died. ^:, ^r, ^, svdh, sva, svdm, is a reflexive adjective, corresponding f 267. to Latin suus, sua, suum. ^yr svam putram drish\vd t having seen his

^^

own

son.

On

the declension of

^ sva,

see

f 278.

Demonstrative Pronouns.
J 268. Base (in composition) ^?nT etadt this (very near).

SINGULAR.
MASC.
FEM.

PLURAL.
MASC.
FEM.
N'EUT.

N. Tgm eshdh
A. *nf etdm
*s

sW
^fff efc^
^TTT*

^nifn
:

e/ani

I.

<lfn etena

*nnrr

eto'y<2

*nTT

etena

TFitl

etaih

etdbhih

^: efat'A

D.
Ab.

KHW etdsmai

^n<3

etdsyai

jnw

etdsmai

^JW.etebhyah
^jn^letdbhyah, "ZJW.etebhyah
eteshdm

<jnt<(it etdsydh <{.n*\i[etdsmdt

G.
L.
<fl<*ll

etdsdm

<nm

eteshdm

etdsydm

^T^R^etdsmin DUAL.
FEM.

ASC.

N. A.
I.

D. Ab. *1TTri etdbhydm

G. L.
':

etdbhydm
etdyoh

^l!T*Tr etdbhydm
*.n<4\.

etdyoh

J 269.

Base

(in

composition)

idam, this (indefinitely).

(Accent, Pan.

vi. i, 171.)

SINGULAR.
MASC.

PLURAL.
NEUT.

FEM.

MASC.

FEM.
r:
r:

N.
A.
I.

^^ aydm
^R imam viin an^na
"WW
asmai
iwii1 asmdt

^4

iydm

"^\ imdm

^ ^ iddm

c?aw

W&
tWA
r.

imdni

dbhih

D.
Ab.
G.
L.

asmat

ebhydh.

^BTO a5ya -ejfWT asmtn

asydh

^f esA^'m
asmin
S as*

eshcfm

asydm

130

PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

DUAL.
MASC.
FEM.

370-

N.A.V.
I.D.Ab.
f

imt dbhydm
;

im6

^TP*rf

dbhydm
^HT^ftj andyoh

G.L.

andyoh
'Zftiddm,

vrn<4\J andyoh

270. l&^etdd and etad and preceding

when

repeated in a second sentence with reference to a

^rf^

idam, vary in the following cases, by substituting

^f ena, which

has no accent.

SINGULAR.
MASC.
FEM.
ewa/w

PLURAL.
NEUT.

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

A.
I.

IJ

A. 4itl\ ewaw
enena

^TH

ewaA

<niTn endni

<nT

<1*(i enayd

DUAL.
FEM.

A.

enau
I

G.L. JMJfl: enayoh

Ex.

enayofy

^TMU

enayoh

^ri<<u*iMln
y

vydkaranam adhitam, enam chhando 'dhydthis person, teach

paya the grammar has been studied by

the family of these two persons

him prosody.

anayoh pavitram kidam, enayoh prabhutam svam,

is

decent,

and

their wealth vast.

271

Base
MASC.

(in

composition)

^Qadas,
FEM.
asaii

that (mediate).

SINGULAR.
NEUT.

N.
A.
I.

^TT amum
vijr|i amtind
.

I.

29, 5)

amund
amushmai

D.
Ab.
G.
L.

amushmai amushmdt
amushya
amushmin

amushyai
l

amushydh amushydh

amushmdt
amushya

amushydm

amushmin

PLURAL.
MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.
J
.

N.
A.
I.

ni

amuni
^FftfH: amibhih
J :

ambhih
amibhyah

D.Ab. ^Wt*i: am&hyah

G.
L.
VH*^ 1*!

amubhyah

amishdm

amushdm
amushu

DUAL.
MASC. FEM. NEUT.
I

N.A.V.

I.D.Ab.

amubhydm

G.L.

amuyoh

-J

274.

PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

131

Relative Pronoun.
$ 272. Base (in composition) Tf^ydd,

who

or which.

SINGULAR.
MASC.
i
i

PLURAL.
NKUT.
*T^y<fc

MASC.

FEM.

NXUT.

N. IHy<a
A.
I.

*Hy</

$y
*H^y</n
*h ya/A

TOy<&
TJT! ydfe

ifa yjni
ufn yon
*h
ya<3i

*}y<m

*liyam

*n^yrf

MT y^ha

D. *Tw ydsmai
Ah.
G.
L.

Tm ya'y^ ^*T y^na T^ ydsyai T^ ydsmai

T^^lydsydh T&Q
<<t*ii

TTfWt ydbhih

^T: ytbhyah TWt ydbhyah TW. ytbhyah

T&RXI^ydsmdt T^JT: ydsydJi 'H\&\1(ydsmdt

TTt ytbhyah TJW. ydbhyah

^TWyasya

ydsya

WT y&hdm

<fw^ya5nm

ydsydm

DUAL.
MASC.
FEM.

N.A.V. T^
I.D.Ab.
G. L.

^nt

yayo^

Tt yrfyo^
Interrogative Pronouns.

'n:

ydyoh

f 273. Base (in composition)

f% ^m,

Who
MASC.

or which

SINGULAR.
MASC.
FEM.
TXlkcl
-atikctm

PLURAL.
NEUT.

FEM.

NKUT.

N. TXlkdk
A.
I.

f*Mm

%*6f
"S^kcln

W.kcth
^FTt

3ikdm

^k^na
I35R

D.

kdsmai

WRkdyd Pw kdsyai
<=HMK kdsydh
Jtasyrfwi

f^ktm
ktha

kdh

%:kafy

"SK^l kd'bhih
oRfl*n kd'bhyah

%t

kath

cR^ kdsmai

^IJ k&hyah
:

IfW. ktbhyah

Ab. TQ&^kdsmdt iK&CMsydh ^^^(kdsmdt

G.
L.

&H\ktbhyah IKW.Ubhyah W*r.k#>hyah

B^I

Aroisya

K^T

Araisya

^if k&hdm
^fTSktshu

4IUI

Ara's^m

WTT kfshdm

^ftR^Ara.mm F^f

liftR^ kdsmin

cRHJ Ar/tt

DUAL.
MASC.
FEM. NEUT.
^i*<f
-361*6 kd'bhydm

N.A.
I.D.Ab.
G. L.

'a&fam'

^1*^

5KTn^y(fm

^BTn kdbhydm

274. Pronouns admit the interposition of ^!Jf ak before their last vowel or syllable, to

denote contempt or dubious relation (Pan. v.

3, 71).

r^HRT tvayakd, By thee! instead of

!

WJT tvayd. ^^^\l yuvakayoh, Of you two

,

^Wotilf*?: asmakdbhih,Wiib us
706.)

^^4 ayakam.

&c. (See Siddh.-Kaum. vol.

i. p.

S 2

132

PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

Compound Pronouns.
375.

By

adding

bases, the following

tddri$ 9

^fdrisa, or "^driksha, to certain pronominal compound pronouns have been formed

igs^dris,
:

irnjsr tddrisa,
T

etddrisa,

wr^f tddriksha, such like. ScTT^ etddriksha, this

what
idriksha, this like.

like.

yddris, Mld^f yddrisa, HldKJ yddriksha,

idrisa,

like.

^^

kidrisa,

^ft^ Mdriksha, What

like?

These are declined in three genders, forming the feminine in ^ i. ril^cf, tddrisi, f. ; or HT^r:, 5ft, ^T, tddrisah, i, am. tddrik, m. n. Similarly TTT^ft formed are HT^^I mddrisa, F^T^T tvddrisa, like me, like thee, &c.
;

J 276.

By

adding

va# and

to certain pronominal bases, the *n^ ya^

following

compound pronouns, implying

,

quantity, have been formed

so
,

much,

"1

so

as

much, ^declined much, J

1

like

nouns in '^vat

(J

187).

3Tfil

iyat, so

much,

feni %/, On the declension Note

many,
see

How much ?
of

^^ iyan

>

fiflT Arrfri,

How many?
or

TfflT tdti,

so many,

and Tfa

ya7i, as

231.

277.

By
f^ir

adding

fq-f^ chit,

^R c^aw,

^ft

p^,

to the

interrogative

pronoun

kirn, it is

changed into an indefinite pronoun.

also
'affai^kachchit,

kaschit,

WiT^kdchit, fsK^f^kimchitj some one;

anything. kaSchana, oFT^T kdchana, ffr^T kimchana, some one.

^*,
ofrrfTT

Aropi, fohHfq

kimapi,

some one.
formed
:

In the same manner

ddchit9

indefinite adverbs are

oin*T

&ac?a,

When ?
kvdpi,

ch^m kaddchana,
relative

once

n A:v, Where ?

W&* na

not anywhere.

Sometimes the
it

pronoun

is

prefixed to the interrogative, to render

;

indefinite
IT:

TK

^B:

yah kah, whosoever

iRS

fi^T
IT:

yasya kasya, whosesoever.

Likewise

irf^y^^

kaschit, whosoever, or

ojrg

yah kascha, or

in <*<$H

yA

kaschana.
relative
:

The

pronoun,
zn ^T,

if

doubled, assumes an indefinite or rather distributive

/o

meaning

iff iy:,

the relative

yad yad, whosoever. Occasionally and demonstrative pronouns are combined for the same purpose
*T?T^,

yS, y

y<^,

yattad, whatsoever.

-f

278.

PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

Pronominal Adjectives.

133

Under the name of Sarvandman, which has been freely translated by Pronoun, but which really means a class of words beginning with sarva,
} 278.

native grammarians have

included, besides the real

pronouns mentioned

before, the following words which share in

common

with the real pronouns

these peculiarities of

certain peculiarities of declension.

They may be called Pronominal Adjectives,

are affected

and

it is

to be

remembered that they

if

by

declension only
I.

they are used in certain senses.

2. fira vtiva,

Tit sarva, all;

5. ^rsr

all;

3.

ubha, two;

4. TOTJ

ubhaya,

any a, other; 6. ^araraT anyatara, either; 7. jifcitara, other; 8. w tva, other (some add w?^ tvat, other) ; 9. words formed by the suffixes Tfft tar a and TTH tama, such as 9. qftX katara, Which of two? 10. "3S?TR katama,
both;

Which
13.
1 6.

of

many?

10. *nr

sama,

all

1 1.

fan sima, whole

12.

"sfa

nema, half;

1 8.

^R eka, one; 14. pdrva, east or prior; 15. v&para, subsequent; W9R avara, west or posterior; 17. ^frspff dakshina, south or right; TJR uttara, north or subsequent 19. ^TTC apara, other or inferior
; ;
;

20. ^nrc adhara, west or inferior

21. ^T *va,

own;

22. ^TfT antara, outer,

(except ^rHl ^: antard puh, suburb,) or lower (scil. garment). If OT 5flma means equal or even, it is not a pronominal adjective
dakshina, if it

nor ^f0f*!T
;

means

clever

nor

^ sva,

if it

means kinsman or wealth

nor

^Kt antara

interval, &c.; nor any of the seven from , purva to Hence <fttJ*U! <nvj<*K ^rvn adhara, unless they imply a relation in time or space dakshind gdthakdfy, clever minstrels ; TWn: "$^J uttardfy kuravah, the northern
if it
.

means

Kurus, (a proper name)

THJirn

^T* prabhdtdfi svdh, great treasures ( Kas'. i

1,

35) ;

grdmayor antare vasati, he lives between the two villages.

134:

PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

I.

279-

^f^TT sdrvayd

^T^WT sdrvdbhydm
^<=rt*ri

^rflfat sdrvdbhih

D. *rf

^ sdrvasyai

sdrvdbhydm

^T%n
tf<=n*ii

sdrvdbhyah

Ab. *t5tHit sdrvasydh

G.
L.
iitii! sdrvasydh

^TtPTT sdrvdbhydm
^T^ftt sdrvayoh
^rt^ftt sdrvayoh

^HtTWK sdrvdbhyah
sdrvdsdm

5<*f sdrvasydm

^^TCJ sdrvdsu
PLURAL.
^qiP<y sdrvdni

NEUTER.
SINGULAR.
DUAL.

N. A.V. ^1% sdrvam

1$ sdrve
^rsfiTT

The

rest like the masculine.

279. W*J awya,

any at ar a,

^rfT itara,

cRTR katara,
:

cRnr katama,

take

f^/

in the

Nom. Acc.Yoc.
is

Sing, of the neuter

fern.
;

Nom.

; ^rarrawya, ^ran^emya^ neut. used in the Dual only 280. Masc. N. A. V. -&ftubhau, I. D. Ab. ubhdbhydm, G. L. gwft: ubhayoh;

Sing. ^n*n any ah, masc.

w5^

Tmn

w^^e, N. A. V.

fern,

and neut.

J 281. T>nr: ubhayah, "$t-yi, 4 -ym, is never used in the Dual, but only in the Sing, and Plur. Haradatta admits the Dual.

MASCULINE.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.

N. "WI* ubhayah
A. <JWT ubhayam
I.

^.

7VR ubhaye
^WTT*^ ubhaydn

"SH^tT ubhayena

^TOJ

ubhayaih

D. "3WTCR ubhayasmai, &c.

282.

^3^^Wt ubhayebhyah, &c.

to ^Hfcantara (14 to 22), though used in their
Plur. ^z" or ^f!

The nine words from

pronominal senses,
or

may

take in the

^ Nom.
jjzt/ra

ahj in the Abl. Sing. WV?(smdt

^n^a/;

in the Loc. Sing.

ftR^smiw

or

SINGULAR.
N.
A.
I.

DUAL.
^[%T purvau
tj^T purvau

PLURAL.

"^Ipurvah

^^ purvam
T$l$ purvena

^tln purvdbhydm
"^^HWf purvdbhydm
or

^l purvaih
^fJt purvebhya h
Xj^fa: purvebhyah

D.
Ab.
G.
L.

^w purvasmai
Tjfwn^w/rasma*
***** purvasya

^tn^pMnja^

"^tr^rf purvdbhydm

^[%^I purvayoh
or

^fw^^Mrvaswm
283.

purve

"^^ftt purvayoh
^ft

The
33.)

following words may likewise take

A or

^i

in the

Nom.

Plur. masc.

(Pan.

1. 1,
J

prathamah,

first,

THWi prathamau, iniT prathame

or n>4*iit prathamdhj

fern.

nn prathamd.
t

charamah,

last,

^T?U charamau, ^T& charame

fern, fgrnfl dvitayt,

or ^TflTt charamdh.

PsnM* dmtayahy two-^l,

three-fold
;

and

similar

words in IHT #aya y fWrPTt

tritayah,

f^TTW

tritayp or f^H^TTt tritayah.

-J

285.

PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

dvayah, two-fold, fern, T^ft dvayt, and similar words in
I

135
trayah.

Hya ; ?HH

alpah, few, fT^Y alpe or *K-HI; alpdh.

ardhah, half, *tff ardhe or

:

V^Tt

ardArfA.

katipayah, some, <*fdM^ katipaye or

half,
T*T

^PnMMi; katipaydh.

tt

nemah,

neme or TTH nemdh.

In

all

other cases these words are regular, like ^fa: kdntah.

284. ftrufaj dvittyah

and other words

in tfhltfya are declined like ^ifa kdnta,

but in

the Dat. Abl. and Loc. Sing, they

may

follow *ft sarva.

MASCULINE.
SINGULAR.
DUAL.

PLURAL.
fgrtl^Ti dvitiydh

N. fedlM: dvitiyah
A.
I.

fsnW

doittyau

f^ldl4 dvittyam

Psrt1iT dvittyau

fgnlMl^ dvitiydn

HSdl^H
.

dvitiyena

PS nl M I *4 i dvltiydbhydm TS nl M i dvittyaih

fSdl^lfl dvittydya or fsnl<4*f doitiyasmai

I

T^mTWT dvitiydbhydm
frf

ism*!*'!! dvitiyebhyah

Ab. Pi dl ^
G.
L.

f(dvitiydt or fjj

ifl

<\dvitiyasmdt

id

**4 1

dvittydbhydm PS r/1 M^I dvitiyebhyah

dvittyayoh

ferri JJ44J dvitfyasya

fkri*ft<fofrfye or

fsnlM^J

fsn1<iii dvitiydndm

rrfHl^rm^rfmViyo^mm

feff^^nftt dvittyayoh

fsnl^M

dvitiyeshu

At the end of Bahuvrihi compounds the Sarvanamans

Dat. Sing. "ftn^H^nT^nyo&Aayaya, to him to
at the

are treated like ordinary

1. 1,
;

words

whom

both are dear (Pan.

29).

The same

end of compounds such

1. 1,

as

irti^J mdsapurvah, a month

1

earlier

Dat. *liti^i<4

mdsapurvdya (Pan.
later persons (Pan.

30). 31),

Likewise in Dvandvas; j5 M<UUi purvdpardndm, of former and

1. 1,

though in the Norn. Plur. these Dvandvas may take ^i; <j5m<

purvdpare or ^=imUt purvdpardh.

Only in compounds expressive of points of the compass,

last

such as

^<R^<I uttara-purva, north-east, the

I. i,

element

may throughout

take the pro-

nominal terminations (Pan.

28).

Adverbial Declension.
285. In addition to the regular case-terminations by which the declension of nouns effected, the Sanskrit language possesses other suffixes which differ from the ordinary

is

terminations chiefly by being restricted in their use to certain words, and particularly to bases. The ordinary case-terminations, too, are frequently used in an adverbial

pronominal
sense.

Thus
Ace.
Instr.

fat; chiram, a long time.

P^u chirena, in a long time.

PRH4
TTC^T
chirdya, for a long time.

Dat.
Abl.

Gen.
Loc.

fa^u^chirdt, long ago. chirasya, a long time.

chire, long.
are,
local.

f^T

Other adverbial terminations

1.
rTC

tah,

with an ablative meaning, becoming generally

2.

^ tra, with a locative meaning.

^T dd, with a temporal meaning ; also raised to with a locative meaning.

3.

4. UTi^ tdt,

136
5. 6.
7.

PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

1R
thd,

285-

with a meaning of modality; likewise

^ tham

of effect. "UTR^sdt, expressive ^TT a and ^rrf^ dhi, local.

8. "f| rhi,

temporal and causal.

9. 1P

tar, local.

10. "5 ha, local.

See also the terminations for forming numeral adverbs

Kt
tah, with an ablative meaning.

260).

IHf I tatah, thence.

,

Tin yatah, whence,

^rfJ itah, hence

(cf.

^flf

iti,

thus, j[^ iva, as.)

hence.

opH

frwtaA,

Whence ?

VSHJcU amutah, thence.

*^J mattah, from me.

asmattah, from us.

W<K

bhavattah, from your Honour.

^^

purvatah,

before (in a general local or temporal sense).

before, like ^T?T fl^e.
^3r5?!f: abhitah,

VfHJ sarvatah, always,

village.

^(Jrt* agratah,
sides.

around, near.

WTitt ubhayatah, on both

TTftw: paritah, all round.

5rRWt grdmatah, from the

^sJM'H. ajndnatak,

from ignorance.
2. cl ^ra, locative
j

originally c^T trdt as in

gotdi purushatrd, amongst men.

Where ?
^Tcf a^ra, here.

TfW

tatra, there.

'^ ya^ra, where.

with (see

"<fW Aw^ra,

^T|W amutra,

there, in the next world.

and
3.

Tf^f satram,

V&ffi ekatra, at one place, together.

saAa).

^T^T sa^ra, with,

^T

rfa,

temporal.

IT^T tadd, then,

and

ri^THlT taddnim.

*Tr?T yarfa,

when.
all

cIT^T

&afcf,When?
^oft^T ekadd,

^H^l
at

any add,

another time.

^HfT

sarvadd, always, at

times.

one time.

^T sac?a, always. ^T idd,

4.

in the Veda, later

^m*)

iddntm, now.

ITTi^^,

local.

W^fJT^prdktdt,

in front.

Frequently after a base in

^s

before,
t,

vi M <.tn

f^

adharastdt, below,

msaif^parastdt,

afterwards.

below.

TMf<8 vt^uparishtdt,

above.

thd,

modal.
T^TT y/Aa, as.

tathd, thus.

^ft^n sarvathd, in every way.

^R^T ubhayathd,
Or

in

both ways.
ways.

^SRT*IT anyathd, in another way.

!< nvm
#Aa, in

anyatarathd, in one of two

^rK^I itarathd, in the other way. R^ katham, How? ^r*T ittham, thus. Or
efPective.

^TT
"*T

vrithd, vainly (?).

tham, in

^HI aMa, thus.

6.

^TTi^saf,

<M^H^ra/asa^,

(TT$ft$\ftlf rdjno 'dhinam,

dependent on the king.)

fire.

H w^Il i^ bhasmasdt,

reduced to ashes.
7. ^TT

^b*\*\\t(^agnisdt,

reduced to

d and ^iHfc dhi,

local.

^f^Wf^ dakshindhi,
or

in the South, or ^Hsjiiu dakshind.

^TiTTT antard (or

^'rKlH^ uttardhi, in the North,

T^T uttard.

t -ram^

or

purd, in the East, in front, formerly, (or

JJIS

T! -re, or T^ -rena), between. ^TT purah and ^*jf\\^purastdt, before.)

1&Rpachd,

behind, (or **vt\<^paschdt.)

falsely, are

Adverbs such as ^pn mudhd, in vain, JplT mrishd, obsolete nouns ending in consonants.

instrumental cases of

-$
8.

287.

CONJUGATION.
temporal and causal.

137

f^

rhi,

etarhi, at this time, (Wilson.)

f$%

karhi,

At what time?

ifl? yarAf, wherefoie.

tarhit therefore, at that time, (Wilson.) 9. HI! tar, local.

JTTHT/>nfrar, early, in the

10.

morning.

jn.

sanutar, in concealment.

An, locative.
,

Where ?

^5

*^ fl > here.

*R saha, with.

CHAPTER
J 286.

VIL

CONJUGATION.
Sanskrit verbs are conjugated in the Active and the Passive.
bddhati, he
is

Ex.

knows; yMni budhydte, he f 287. The Active has two forms

TjtafiT
:

known.

1.

The Parasmai-pada, i.e. transitive, (from TJT^R parasmai, Dat. Sing. of IR para another, i. e. a verb the action of which refers to another.)
y

Ex.
2.

<^i(rt

daddti, he gives.
y

The Atmane-pada
Ex.
Note
>sn<^c

i.

e. intransitive,

(from mirM^ dtmane, Dat. Smg. of

^HlcH^ dtman, self,

i.

e.

a verb the action of which refers to the agent.)

ddatte, he takes. between the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada

is

The
by

distinction
rule.

fixed

by usage

rather than
in the

Certain verbs in Sanskrit are used in the Parasmaipada only, others

in both voices. Those which are used in the Parasmaipada which was originally conceived as transitive ; e. g. *jf% ivfn bhumim manthati, he shakes the earth; HNf ^iqfff mdmsam khddati, he eats meat; tiiitnTn

Atmanepada only; others

only, are verbs the action of

grdmam
grows;

atati,

he goes to or approaches the

village.

Those which are used

in the

Atmanepada

only, were originally verbs expressive of states rather than of actions; e.g. FMfl edhate, he

*f^n modate, he rejoices; $^ 4etet he lies down. Dhatupatha as n-it or anuddtta-it (Pan. i. 3, 12). In the language of the best authors, however, many verbs which we should consider intransitive, are conjugated in the Parasmaipada, while others which govern an accusative,
t*<;n spandate, he trembles;

Such

roots are

marked

in the

Atmanepada. ^rfk hasati, he laughs, is always Parasmaipadin, whether used as transitive or neuter (Colebr. p. 297) it is so even when reciprocity of action
are always conjugated in the
:

is

indicated, in

which case verbs in Sanskrit mostly take the Atmanepada ;

vyatihasanti, they laugh at each other (Pan. 1.3, 15, vart. 1,2).
is

But
like

W^ smayate, he

e. g.

H
smiles,

tfUJd trdyate, he protects, are Atmanepadin (i. e. used in the Atmanepada), though they govern an accusative ; e. g. c*i<3 TT trdyasva mdm, Protect me These correspond to the Latin deponents.
restricted

by grammarians to the Atmanepada

and verbs

'

Verbs which are used both in the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada, take the one or the other form according as the action of the verb is conceived to be either transitive or reflective;

;138
e.g.

CONJUGATION.

288-

info pachati, he

cooks; SMCI pachate, he cooks for himself; Mifif yajati, he sacrifices;

^fff yajate, he sacrifices for himself. The same applies to Causals (Pan. i. 3, 74). These distinctions, however, rest in many cases, in Sanskrit as well as in Greek, on
peculiar conceptions which
it is difficult

to analyse or to realize;
is

and in Sanskrit as well as

in Greek, the right use of the active

"rf\ nt,

and middle voices

best learnt

by

practice.

Thus

to lead,

he

carries off

used as Parasmaipada in such expressions as *TJ TM f*( fit gandam vinayati*, a swelling ; but as Atmanepada, in fVn*^ krodham vinayate, he turns
is

^H

away
but

or dismisses wrath; a subtle distinction which

it is

possible to appreciate

when

stated,

difficult to

bring under any general rules.

active or middle in others;

Again, in Sanskrit as well as in Greek, some verbs are middle in certain tenses only, but e. g. Atm. ^ffi vardhate, he grows, never '3favardhati; but Aor.
Par., or ^Rffo avardhishta, Atm. he grew. (Pan. I. 3, 91.) Others take the Parasmaipada or Atmanepada according as they are compounded with
;

^^f^avridhat,

certain prepositions

e. g.

fV^lfw

visati,

he enters ; but fiTq^n

ni-visate,

he enters

in.

(Pan.

i.

3, 17.)

288. Causal verbs are conjugated both in the Parasmaipada

and Atmane-

pada.

Desideratives generally follow the Pada of the simple root (Pan. 1.3, 62).

intensives have

The Denominatives ending in ^srTO ay a have both forms (Pan. i. 3, 90). two forms one in it ya, which is always Atmanepada ; the
:

other without
289.
if

if

ya,

which

is

always Parasmaipada.

The

passive takes the terminations of the Atmanepada, and prefixes

yd to them in the four special or modified tenses.

are,

In the other tenses the

forms of the passive

with a few exceptions, the same as those of the

different forms, corresponding to the

Atmanepada. 290. There are in Sanskrit thirteen

tenses and moods of Greek and Latin.

I.

Formed from

the Special or Modified Base.

PARASMAIPADA.
I.
2,.

ATMANEPADA.
vfebhdve

The

Present (Lat)

H^lfH bhdvdmi

3.

The Imperfect (Lan) The Optative (Lin) The Imperative

(Lot)

^sw4 dbhavam
H^TI bhdveyam
H^rftr bhdvdni

^W%

dbhave

4.

*^H bhdveya H% bhdvai

II.

Formed from

the General or Unmodified Base.

PARASMAIPADA.
5.

ATMANEPADA.

The Reduplicated Perfect (Lit) ^33 babhdva W$5 babhuve 6. The Periphrastic Perfect (Lit) ^fksf ^$5 choraydm babhuva vft<n[ choraydm cha

7. 8.
9.

The

First Aorist (Lun)

^nffftri

dbodhisham

^wfafa dbhavishi
^rftr% dsiche

The Second Aorist (Lun) The Future (Lrit)

^*$ dbhdvam
Hfmmfir bhavishydmi

Hfa*T bhavishye
Colebrooke, Grammar, p. 337.

* Cf. Siddhanta-Kaumudi, ed. Taranatha, vol. n. p. 250.

291.
10.
1 1.

CONJUGATION.
1

139
^wfir& dbhavithye
Hfaing bhavitdhe
*ftprta bhavishiyd

The Conditional

(Lrin)

w*frT dbhavishyam

The Periphrastic Future (Luj)

Mflrdifw bhavitdsmi

The Benedictive (As'ir lih) 13. The Subjunctive (Let) occurs

12.

^m bMydsam
in the

Veda

only.

Signification

of the Tenses and Moods.

$291. 1.2. The Present and Imperfect require no explanation. Imperfect takes the Augment (J 300), which has always the accent.
3.

The

The

principal senses of the Optative are,

;

a.

Command
Wish

e. g. ?fr jppw

*T^: tvam

grdmam gachchheh, thou mayest

Let your honour
sit

go,

i.e.

go thou to the
b.
c.
;

village.

e. g.

mif^m!*
e.

bhavdn

ihdsita,

here!

Inquiring;

g.

^nfhftn Tr

7rl*nfhqffaj

vedam adhiyiya, uta tarkam

adhiyiya, Shall I study the Veda or shall I study logic?

d.

Supposition (sambhdvana)

e. g.

M<^*ft 3<MK*ft
is

dHHIM!^ bhaved asau

vedapdrago brdhmanatvdt, he probably he is a Brahman.

e.

a student of the Veda, because

Condition

e.

g.

^N H^wfo

EM^glXm:

IHTTt

dandab chen na bhavel

loke vinasyeyur imdfy prajdh, if there were not punishment in the world, the people would perish. H ^ilM^r^ yafy pathet sa dpnuydt, he ~m T^T^ who studies, will obtain. *(l^^H f^W^W^^^KHr^r. yad yad rocheta

viprebhyas tat tad dadydd amatsarah, whatever pleases the let one give that to them not niggardly.
f. It
is

Brahmans

used in relative dependent sentences ; e.g. *TW H*H ^^T *f yach cha tvam evam kuryd na frraddadhe, I believed not that thou couldst
act thus.

m$

^rll$li:

^pnsr

fH^dfmra yat

tddrisdfy

krishnam ninderann
is

dscharyam, that such persons should revile Krishna,

4.

wonderful

The Imperative
concerned
in
;

requires no explanation, as
ijj^

far as the

e. g.

tuda, Strike

The

first
;

second person is and third persons are used

many

cases in place of the Optative

I

e.

g. 3*41 ft

HTT^^ii

ichchhdmi

bhavdn bhunktdm,
5.
6.

wish your honour

may

eat.

The Reduplicated

Perfect denotes something absolutely past.

Certain verbs which are not allowed to form the reduplicated perfect, form
their perfect periphrastically,
i.

e.

by means of an

auxiliary verb.

7.8. The

First

and Second Aorists

refer generally to time past,

and are the

(

common
9.

historical tenses in narration.

They
;

take the
e.g.

Augment
we

300).

The Future,
devcLS
rice.

also called the Indefinite

Future

ched varshishyati dhdnyam vapsydmah,

if it rain,

shall

sow
life

^N-nil^H^ <l^fri ydvaj-jivam annam ddsyatiy T 2

as

long

as

140
lasts,

SPECIAL
he
will

AND GENERAL TENSES

Under

29!-

give food.

certain circumstances this Future

;

may be used optionally with the Periphrastic Future kadd bhoktd or H^ffi bhokshyate, When will he eat?
10.

e. g. *K^T

H^W

The Conditional

is

used, instead 6f the Optative,

if

things are spoken of

that might have, but have not happened (Pan. in. 3, 139) ; e. g. szwmM^ died abhavishyat tadd subhiksham
abhavishyat, if there
plenty.
11.

had been abundant

takes the
;

rain, there
($

would have been

The Conditional

Augment

300).

The

Periphrastic or Definite Future

e. g. 'snfaflT

TO

JI41rilftl

ayodhydm

&vah praydtdsi, thou wilt to-morrow proceed to Ayodhya.

12.

The Benedictive
wish

in general;

fft
13.
$

*i1mif^

used for expressing not only a blessing, but also a srimdn bMydt, May he be happy! e. g, ^fhfTRJjni^ chiram jivydt, May he live long
is
!

The Subjunctive occurs in the Veda only. 292. The Sanskrit verb has in each tense and mood
Plural, with three persons in each.

three numbers,

Singular, Dual, and

CHAPTER
SPECIAL
J 293.

VIII.

AND GENERAL TENSES AND THE TEN CLASSES OF VERBS.

all

Sanskrit grammarians have divided

verbs into ten classes,

according to certain

modifications which their roots undergo before the

terminations of the Present, the Imperfect, the Optative, and Imperative. This division is very useful, and will be retained with some slight alterations.

One and
to the
i, 70).

the same root

*f

may

belong to different classes.

^jJT

Thus

TS^ bhrds,

HTS^ bhlds,

Bhu

klam, ^3( tras, cJ7 trut, bhram, *%?{ kram, ^ lash belong and Div classes ; T$IW bhrd&ate or WT^m bhrdtyate, &c. (Pan. in.
1

to the
J

Again, ^sku, w^stambh,ffcHstumbh} *^fo^skambh, ^tskumbh belong Su and Kri classes; ^rfiPff skunoti or in. i, 82). ^rrfw skundti (Pan. 394. The four tenses and moods which require this modification of the
;

root will be called the Special or Modified Tenses

the rest the General or

Unmodified Tenses.

Thus

the root fa chi

into

is

changed in the Present,

Imperfect, Optative, and Imperative

chi-nu. fqvj

Hence fajR: chi-nu-mdli,

But the Past Participle f^nr: search; ^rf%pr dchi-nu-ma, we searched. or the Reduplicated Perfect chitdh, searched, chichy-u^ they have
fa^aj:

we

searched, without the

nu.

We

call

f%

chi,

the root, f^fj chinu, the base

of the special tenses.

-$

296.

AND THE TEN CLASSES OP

two

VERBS.
divisions
:

141

bases are first divided into J 295. Verbal

I.

Bases which
Bases which

in the modified tenses

end
end

in *1 a.
in

II.

in the modified tenses

is

any

letter

but

W a.
and the

This second division

subdivided into,

II a. Bases which insert

terminations.

nu

"9 u,

or

*ft

nt y between the root

II

b.

Bases which take the terminations without any intermediate element.

I.

First Division.

J 296.
1.

comprises four classes: The Bhu class (the first with native grammarians, and called by them v^rf^ bhvddi, because the first verb in their lists is ^ bhd, to be).
first division

The

a. iQ
b.

is

added

to the last letter of the root.

The vowel of the root takes Guna, where

if final
;

possible

(i.e.

long or short

t,

u,

r,

short

i,

u,

ri, (i,

if followed

by one consonant).

Ex.

yi budh, to know
he
is.

^tvfiT bodh-a-ti,

he knows.

$M, to be

H^fir bhdv-a-ti,

Note

The

accent in verbs of the

Bhu

class (as

we know from

the ancient Vedic

language) rests

on the radical vowel, except where it is drawn on the augment. such as causatives, HmMiir bhdvdyati, he causes to be; derivative verbs, Many desideratives, ^J?rflT bubhushati, he wishes to be, from *bhu; intensives in the Atmane-

pada, ^faild bebhidydte, he cuts

much

and denominatives, n*nfii namasydti, he worships,

^ftiVdHlfa
2.

lohitdydti,

he grows red,

follow this class.

The Tud
a.
b.

grammarians, and called by them because the first root in their lists is ip tud, to strike). U^rf^ tudddi, ^r a is added to the last letter of the root.
class (the sixth with native

Before this

^ a,

final

and ^ i are changed u and ^l u

to

iy.

to
to

T^ uv.
ft^rty.

^ri ^ri
Ex.

to ^rjr ($

no).

to strike; ij^fif tud-d-ti. ft ri, to go; CUlTd riy-d-ti. "g^tud, praise ; yMfcf nuv-d-ti. ^ mri, to die ; fa^ mriy-d-te.
scatter
;

\nd,

to

tf kri, to

foff^fw kir-d-ti*

Note

The accent

in verbs of the

Tud

class rests

on the intermediate ^? a j hence never

Guna
3.

of the radical vowel.

The Div
a.

grammarians, and called by them because the first root in their lists is f^div y to play), r^mf^ divddi, IT ya is added to the last letter of the root.
class (the fourth with native
t^;

Ex.

nah, to bind ; H^fri ndh-ya-ti.

budh, to awake ;

"3rffr
;

budh-ya-te.

Note
traces to

The

accent in verbs of the Div class rests on the radical vowel

this class

though there are

show that some verbs of

had the accent

originally on

1 ya.

SPECIAL

AND GENERAL TENSES

native grammarians, and
first

297called

4.

The Chur

class (the

tenth with

by

them yiigf
steal).

churddi, because the

root in their

lists

is

^
sr
,

chur, to

a. ^HT
b.

ay a

is

added to the

last letter of the root.

If the root ends in

simple consonant, preceded by

^T

is

lengthened to ^n

d.

Ex.
c.

dal, to cut

^l^^fd ddl-dya-ti, (many exceptions.)

If the root ends in a simple consonant, preceded

by ^ i,

-gr

u,

^
;

rt,

#,

these vowels take Guna, while

^ri becomes
;

$^ir.
to steal

Ex. fg^&fcA, to embrace

chor-dya-ti.

%tnrflT 6lesh-dya-ti.

^
"3

^ cMr,

^Ulfff

mrish, to endure

*rl^W marsh-dya-te.

cfi^

W,

to

praise
d.

GR^S^rrr kirt-dya-ti.

Final ^i,

^,

u, "35^,
|

^H>

an<i "^[r^ take Vriddhi.

ft

Ex. fwyn,togrow old; ^ m\ fajray-dya-ti.

m^, to walk; ifRnrflT mdy-dya-ti.

to
fill
;

^
Note

dhri, to hold; vn^rfK dhdr-dya-ti.

v^pri,

^RTfir pdr-dya-ti.

secondary roots,

Many, if not all roots arranged under this class by native grammarians, are and identical in form with causatives, denominatives, &c. This class differs
classes,

from other

inasmuch

throughout, in the

as verbs belonging to it, keep their modificatory syllable ^HTaya unmodified as well as in the modified tenses, except in the Benedictive

Par. and the Reduplicated Aorist.

The

accent rests on the

first

^ a of ^R ay a.

II.

Second Division.

J 297.

The second

division comprises all verbs

which do not, in the

division

special tenses, end in ^T a before the terminations. It is a distinguishing feature of this second

that,

before

certain terminations,

all

verbs belonging to
nu,

it

require strengthening of their

radical vowel, or if they take

of these syllables.

Guna, but
class.

ft

ni

is

strengthening of the vowels J This strengthening generally takes place by means of raised to *n nd in the Kri, and ^ n to *T na in the Rudh
rft ni,

^ u,

We
strong

shall

call

the

terminations which

require

strengthening

of the

inflective

base, the
;

weak
vice

base

and

terminations, and the base before them, the versd, the terminations which do not require

strengthening of the base, the strong terminations, and the base before

them, the weak base.

vowel of strong terminations, or, if the terminations are weak, on the strong base, thus establishing throughout an equilibrium between base and termination.
a rule, the accent
falls first

As

on the

-$

299II a. Bases
J 298. This
first

AND THB TEN CLASSES OP VERBS.

which take

nu,

lu,
:

subdivision comprises three classes

I.

The Su
nu

class (the fifth class with native

grammarians, and called by

is
*| su).

them ^rf^
J
is

svddi, because the

first

root in their lists

added to the

last letter of the root, before strong terminations,

ftwo before

weak

terminations.
;

Ex.

g su

to squeeze out

ist pers. plur. Pres. *frp: su-nu-mdfr,

ist pers. sing. Pres. ^ffffa su-n6-mi,

a.

The Tan
them

class (the eighth class with native

first

grammarians, and called by

lists is
ir*^

iMlty tanddi, because the

last letter

root in their

tan).

7u
*ft

is

added to the

of the root, before strong terminations,

o before

weak terminations.
inpn tan-u-mdh, ist pers. plur. Pres.
rttftfa

Ex. JG^tan,
Note
3.

to stretch;

tan-6-mi 9 ist pers. sing. Pres.

kri,

All verbs belonging to this class end in ^n, except one, ^f

JiOfH karomi,

do.

The Kri
ctylty

class (the ninth with native

grammarians, and called by them

lists is "aft kri).

kryddi, because the first root in their

ft ni

is

added to the

last letter of the root, before strong terminations,

H nd
Ex.

before

weak terminations,
kri-ni-mdfy, ist pers. plur. Pres.

*{n before strong terminations beginning with vowels.

"aft

W,

to

buy;

"aftarfa:

kri-na-mi, ist pers. sing. Pres.

kri-n-dnti, 3rd pers. plur. Pres.

II b. Bases to
J 399.
i.

which the terminations are joined immediately.

:

The second
class (the

division comprises three classes

The Ad

second class with native grammarians, and called by them

first

^ify adddi, because the

a.

root in their

lists is

ad, to eat).
;

The

terminations are added immediately to the last letter of the base

and

in the contact of vowels with vowels, vowels with consonants,

rules explained above

b.

consonants with vowels, and consonants with consonants, the phonetic ( 107145) must be carefully observed.
before
i. b).

The strong base

possible
($

the

weak terminations takes Guna where

296,
:

Ex.

to lick f?5^ lih, thou lickest ($

($ 1*8).

fc5TO lih-mdh,
1

we

lick

^ftr leh-mi, I lick

1

Tyf^f lek-shi,

27) ;

ctfte

ttdhd,

you

lick (J

28) ; *c*<^ diet, thou lickedst

The accent
weak

vowel of the terminations, except in case of terminations, when the accent falls on the radical vowel.
is

on the

first

144:

SPECIAL

AND GENERAL TENSES AND THE TEN CLASSES OF VERBS.

299-

2.

The Hu class (the third class with native grammarians, and called by them "Spftarf^ juhotyddi, because the first root in their lists is fr hu
a.
b.
c.

The terminations The strong base

are added as in the

Ad

class.

before the

weak terminations takes Guna, where

(Rules of Reduplication,
302.)

possible.

The

root takes reduplication.

sacrifice
:

Ex. ? hu, to
sacrifice.

*JH! ju-hu-mdh,
i,

we

sacrifice

sj^frfa ju-ho-mi,.

(Pan. vi.

192.)

The
The

intensive verbs, conjugated in the Parasmaipada, follow this class.

accent
is

on the

first syllable

of the verb,

if

the terminations are weak, likewise

if

the terminations are strong, but begin with a vowel. Ex. <f*nfff dddhdti; ^vfff dddhati (Pan. vi. i,. 189190). Whether this rule extends to the Optative Atmanepada is doubtful..

We

find in the Rig-veda both dddhita

and

dadhttd.

Prof. Benfey,

who

at first accentuated

dadhitd,

Boehtlingk and Bopp. The Agama is, no doubt, avidyamanavat svaravidhau (Pan. in. 1,3, vart. 2); but the question is siyut whether tta is to be treated as ajadi, beginning with a vowel, or whether the termination

now

places the accent on the

first syllable, like

is ta

with

Agama

i.

given in vi. i, 189.

ajadi

adopt the former view, and see it confirmed by the Pratyudaharana For if ydt of dad-ydt is no longer ajadi, then tia, in ddd-ita must be

on the same ground. The reduplicated verbs bhi> hri, bhri, hu, mad, jan, dhan, daridrd, jdgri have the Udatta on the syllable preceding the terminations, if the terminations are weak. Ex. fwfff bibhdrti, but fwfif UbJirati (Pan. vi. i, 192).
3.

The Rudh class (the seventh class with native grammarians, and called rudh, by them ^vrf^ rudhddi, because the first root in their lists is

T^qffg rundddhi, to obstruct).

a.
b.

The terminations
Between the
in

are

added as in the

Ad

class.
is

and the final consonant <{n the strong base before weak terminations is raised
radical vowel
9
:

inserted,
7f

which

to

na.

Ex. *[*{yuj to join gr*n yu-n-j-mdh, we join glft*T yu-nd-j-mi, I join. The accent falls on tf na, wherever it appears, unless it is attracted by the
;

augment.
First Division.

Bhu Tud
Div

class,

with native grammarians, Bhvadi, I

Tudadi,
Divadi,

class.
class.

class,

class, class,

VI IV

class.

Chur

Churadi,

class.

Second Division.

Su class, with Tan class,

Kri
class,

native grammarians, Svadi,

class.

Tanadi, VIII class.

Kryadi,

IX

class.

Ad

class,

Adadi, II class.
Juhotyadi, III
class.

Hu

class,
class,

Rudh

Rudhadi, VII

class.

302.

AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS.

145

CHAPTER
J 300. Before

IX.

AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS.

we can

leave the subject

which occupies us
its

at present* viz;

the preparation of the root previous to

assuming the terminations,

we

Augment and the Reduplication, processes, modifications of the root with which we are familiar in Greek, and which in
have
to

consider two

the

Sanskrit as well as in Greek form the distinguishing features of certain

tenses (Imperfect, Aorist, Conditional, and Perfect) in every verb.

$301. Roots beginning with consonants take short ^ d as their This ^r a has the accent. Thus from iftbudh, Present augment.
btidhdmi
;

initial

Vtviftr

Roots
result

Imperfect waftv dbodham. beginning with vowels

the
i,

always

take

Vriddhi,

the
initial

irregular

of

combination

of

the

augment

with

the

vdwels.

(Pan. vi.

90.)
*T
vst

a with ^r

a, or

^T a, = wr d.

a with ^ i y \ f, ^ e, or ^ ai, ^ ^t a with T u, ^K d, ^ft o, or ^ft au,

^T

ai.

= ^ au.

a with

ri,

or ^ri,

= ^TP

dr.

From ^^arch, ^rtfir archati, he praises, ^i^drchat, he praised. From ^T iksh, ^?r ikshate, he sees, ^Tf aikshata he saw. From ^undy ^'nfrl unatti, he wets, ^ftq^aunat, he wetted. From i$ri, ^a[fir richchhatij he goes, ^r&l(drchchhat, he went.
y

is

In the more ancient Sanskrit, as in the more ancient Greek, the augment In the later Sanskrit, too, it has to be dropt after the frequently absent.

negative particle *n

md

(Pan. vi. 4, 74).

this!

Let not your Honour do

or

*rr

*fT^ inftTwza sma

ITT

<*mTi^

md

bhavdn kdrshit,

karot.

May he not do it!

Reduplication.
302. Reduplication takes place in Sanskrit not only in the reduplicated Most of the rules of perfect, but likewise in all verbs of the Hu class.
reduplication are the

same

in forming the base of the perfect of all verbs,

and

in forming the special base of the verbs of the

Hu

class.

These

will

be

stated first; afterwards those that are peculiar either to the reduplicatiori of the perfect or to that of the verbs of the Hu class.

The reduplication in intensive and desiderative verbs and in one form of the aorist will have to be treated separately.

146

AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS.

General Rules of Reduplication.

303-

$ 303.

The

first
is

syllable of a root

(i.

e.

that portion of

it

which ends

with a vowel)

repeated.
v$J)hu is exceptional in

budh=z'3^^bubudh. vn. 4, 73.)

forming ^t^babhu.

(Pan.

letters are represented $ 304. Aspirated

in reduplication

by

their cor-

responding unaspirated fas bhid, to cut,

to shake, T^dhu,

letters.

= fwfa^ bibhid.
=^dudhu.
by
their corresponding
4, 62.)

305. Gutturals are represented in reduplication

palatals
;

h ^ by

*(j.

(Pan. vn.
to sever,

^Z kut,

as,

= ^^7 chukut. to dig, = ^^R[ chakhan. to go, = to laugh, =

more than one consonant, the
first

If a root begins with $ 306.

reduplicated.

only

is

ipi kru$, to shout,

fqpikship, to

= ^JST chukruf. throw, = faffcp^ chikship.

by a
tenuis or aspirated

$ 307. If a root begins with a sibilant followed tenuis, the tenuis only is reduplicated.
to praise, ^J stu, W^stan, to sound,

= "$% tushtu (J 103, i). = irer^ tastan. ??nl spardh, to strive, = '^cf^paspardh. WT sthdj to stand, = if^n tasthd. to drop, = ^3g\ Schyut, ^gi^ chu&chyut. But ^ff 5mn, to pine, = TTCR sasmri.
308. If the radical vowel, whether shortened in the reduplicative syllable.
i?T^

final

or

medial,

is

long,

it

is

= TTTT| jagdh. = fsnft chikri. ^ kri, to buy, ^ stid, to strike, = ^^ sushud.

gdh, to enter,
is TJ e

is

309. If the radical (not final) vowel ^ft o or ^ft auy it becomes ^ u.

or

^ ai,

it

becomes ^

i;

if it

%^ sev,

to worship, to

^c^ dhauk,

= ftr^ sishev. approach, = J^cfi dudhauk.

310. Roots with final *e, %ai, ^ffro, are treated like roots ending in a, taking ^r a in the reduplicative syllable. ^ dhe, to feed, ^ft dadhau.

^ gai,

to sing, =s

^ft ^o, to sharpen,

-$312.
f 311.

AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS.

147

The

following roots

are

slightly

irregular

on account of the

semivowels which they contain, and which are liable to be changed into vowels. (This change is called Samprasdrana.) Pan. vi. i, 17.
BOOT.

FIRST PERS. SING. EEDUPL. PERF.

(dja, to sacrifice, (for iprnr yaydja.)

WEAK FORM*.

WEAKEST Fomt-

^
^J^

tj.

uvdcha, to speak.

tick.

uvdda 9 to

say.

^
^

dd.

uvdpa, to sow.
fo,

to wish.
to dwell.

vas

= TTW uvdsa,

vah

= ytfig uvdha,

to carry.

dh.

uh.)

uvdya, to weave.
vivydcha, to surround.

(zu.)

= f^nv vivyddha, to strike. = fzpar^ vivyathe (Pan. vn. 4, 68). = f^HlM sushvdpa, to sleep.
$u$dva, to swell^f.

fafa^ vividh.

(fvidh.)

f^T^ vivyath.

vivydya, to cover.
w, to
;a,

ft^rt riv?.

grow

old.
i, 33).

to call (Pan. vi.

= f&pipye,to grow fat (Pan. vi. i, 29).

-^j^jagrdha 9
to take.
1

= TO^ vavrdscha,to cut (Pan. vi. i,

paprdchchha
9

7).

^^ vavrtich.
TRF&paprachch

to ask.

babhrdjja, to fiy.

^il^

babhrajj.

verbs the weak form in the reduplicated perfect is protected against Samprasarana by the final double consonant. (Pan. i. 2, 5.) Roots beginning with ^ va 9 but ending in double consonants, do not

In the

last three

change ^ va to
J 312.

^ u.

Ex.

^^ vavrite; ^^ vavridht.
^ a, and
ending in a single consonant,

Roots beginning with short contract ^i a + ^ a into 5TI d.

^F ad, to
*
eat,

<

u<{ arf.

nor

The weak forms appear Guna is required.

in all persons of the reduplicated perfect

where neither Vriddhi

t The weakest forms of these verbs do not belong to the reduplicated perfect, but have been added as useful hereafter for the formation of the past participle, the benedictive, the
passive, &c.

a substitute for ^ve, in the reduplicated perfect (Pan. n. 4, 41). If that subvavuh (Pan. vi. i, 40). stitution does not take place, then ^ve forms vavau,
J ^T{vay
is

^T

^t

(1

Pan. vi.

i,

38, 39.

IF

Or f^ITO ^svdya

(Pan. vi.

i,

30).

U 2

148

AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS.

313. Roots beginning with short ^r
a,

3 T 3"-

and ending with more than one

consonant, prefi^ ^T^dn. (Pan. vii. 4, 71.) dndrch. (Also ^rsi as (Su), ^T!^r dna&e.) Pan. vii. 4, 73. ^H^ arch J 314. The root ^j n forms the base of the reduplicated perfect as WT^ dr. Other roots beginning with ri prefix w^ara. (Pan. vii. 4, 71.)

= ^rt

^^r^', These roots are treated in

to obtain,

= ^TPpf dn-rij.
fact as if
i

"^p^ridh,

to thrive,

= ^TRJ>^a/zn^

they were 'W^arch, -zw^ardh, &c.

315. Roots beginning with ^

i

+i

and

tf

+ "$

u+u
i{

into

and

or "su (not prosodially long), contract ^ + ^ ^R u ; but if the radical ^i or ^r u take

Guna

or Vriddhi,
base.

y and

^v

are inserted between the reduplicative syllable

and the

(Pan. vi. 4, 78.)

I have gone. ukh-atuh) they two have withered. T^ftsf uv-okh-a (Guna), I have withered.

^^A = ^g: ish-dtuh, they two have gone.

^^
ukh

= grwg:
=

^^(iy-esh-a (Guna),

As to roots which cannot be reduplicated or are otherwise irregular, see the rujes given for the formation of the Reduplicated and Periphrastic Perfect.
Special Rules of Reduplication. 3 process of reduplication would be the same, whether applied to the bases of the class. But there Reduplicated Perfect or to those of the
1 6.

So

far the

Hu

are
1.

some points on which these two

classes of reduplicated bases differ; viz.

In the Reduplicated
In the bases of the

Perfect, radical

ri,

-^ri, whether final or medial,

are represented in reduplication

2.

by

^r a.

Hu

class, final

-^ri and

^ri
CLASS.

(they do not occur as

PRESENT, &c.

medial) are represented in reduplication REDUPLICATED PERFECT. f

to bear, V[ bhri,

by \i.
Hu
bibhdrti. ^ sri sisarti. ftmfS ^ ^ hri = f^fS jiharti.

= -qvrn: babhdra.

bhri

= fWiff

^
The

sri, to go,

hriy to

= TOCTC sasdra. take, = vf^Ttijahdra.

iy-arti;

root ^ri, to go, forms ^rf

^pn,

to

fill,

fWa piparti.
Hu
class

317. The three verbs f^^nij, f&^vij, and in tfr$ red^plicated syUahle. (Pan. vii. 4, 75.)
;

f^ vish

of the

take

Guna

f*1^

nij,

to wash,

^T% nenekti, %f^ nenikte;

TTJ? veceshti.

f%*tvij, to

separate,

^rf^

vevekti;

f%\vish, to pervade,

f 318. The two verbs TT ma, to measure, and

the reduplicative syllable.
*TT

i?T hd,

to go, of the

Hu

class take

^z

in

(Pan. vii. 4, 76.)

ma,

(H*flri

mimitej ^T hd, f*T%fft jiMtt.

initial

319. Certain roots change their

consonant

if

they are reduplicated.

*^

han, to

kill, *in\*ijaff1idna.

Likewise in the desiderative ftTO^rfw jighdmsati, and the

(Pan. vii. 3, 55.)

intensive
ft[ hi, to

nT3W jahghanydte.

send (Su), f*m\<*jigh$yq.

Likewise in the desiderative fnrt^fTT jighishati, and

(Pan. vii. 3, 56.)

the intensive W*fNTiT jeghiydte.

-$

3^1-

AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS.

Likewise in the desiderative

149
but not

ftf ji, to conquer, (Vl'IIH jigdya.

fwfMn jfyishati ;
3, 57.)

in the intensive, which

is

always ^hftTTTT jejtydte.

>

(Pan. vn.

fa

c/tt,

to gather, has optionally Pi

u4

chichdya or

P^^IM

chikaya.

The same

option

applies

to the desiderative, but in the intensive

we have ^W)in

chechtydte only.

(Pan. vii. 3, 58.)

Terminations.
J 320.

After having explained

how

the verbal roots are modified in ten

different

ways

before they receive the terminations of the four special tenses,

the

Present, Imperfect, Optative, and Imperative,

we

give a table of the

terminations for these so-called special or modified tenses

$ 331.

and moods.

The

terminations for the modified tenses, though on the whole the

same

for all verbs, are subject to certain variations,

according as the verbal bases

take ^? a (First Division), or

^u t "^ni (Second Division, A.), or nothing J nu, Instead of between themselves and the terminations. (Second Division, B.)
gramma-

giving the table of terminations according to the system of native

rians, or according to that of comparative philologists, and explaining the

real or fanciful

different classes of verbs,

changes which they are supposed to have undergone in the it will be more useful to give them in that form

in

which they may mechanically be attached to each verbal base. The beginner should commit to memory the actual paradigms rather than the
different sets
*

of terminations.

Instead of taking ^rre dthe as the termination

^TT

of the 2nd pers. dual Atm., and learning that the

to

d of ^rr$ dthe

is

changed
ithe as

^i

after bases in ^T a (Pan.

vn.

2, 81), it is
;

simpler to take

the termination in the First Division

but

still

simpler to

commit to memory
are.

such forms as
at first

ftvvi

bodhethe, fgmuj dvishdthe, ftwivj mimdthe, without asking

to

any questions as

how they came

to be

what they

FIRST DIVISION.
Bhd, Tud, Div, and Chur Classes. PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPADA.
Present.

Imperf.

Optative. Imperat.

Present.

Imperfect.

Optative.

Imperative.

i.^&faamt

^m
lh
1(t

^Tjiyam^&f^ani ^i
^lih

^*

^ft'ya
thdh
J^ttl

^e

2.f*si
3.

-*
ijta*
^T^T
"ft

$se
^te

*m

ithdh

^ sva
Iff tarn,

fart

^(it

If ta

^W
ithdm
it

ita

^Rava "^iva
ff tarn

ava

W^avahe

W<4 fi$ avahi

^f^

irahi

^R^ arahai
^TTT
it

^lf itam
^iff
it

tarn

^
^n

ithe
ite

^TT
^iff

^ttlRiydthdmJpRithdm
^Minf iydtdm

3. 1ft tah

Iff tarn

dm WT tdm

dm

dm

i.^Rlamah ^Rama ^Rima

z.lftha
If ta

^>T ama ^HR^amahe ^SKf^amahi

If

^f^imahi
^131

WH$_ amahai

^ifVa

ta

U& dhve

*4 dhvam
nT nta

idhvam
iran

l4 dhvam
nff

^ nfe
* In the second and third persons TR1(tdt the sense is benedictive.

ntdm
verbs, if

may be used

as termination after

all

150

AUGMENT, EEDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS.

Su, Tan, PARASMAIPADA.

Present.

SECOND DIVISION. Kri, Ad, Hu and Rudh

9

Classes.

ATMANEPADA.
Imperative.
Present.

Imperfect. Optative.

Imperfect.

Optative.

Imperative.

I.

Uf dhvam
^TrTf

atdm

squares are the weak, i. e. unaccented terminations which require strengthening of the base. When f^ hi is added immediately to the final consonant of a Note i
in

The terminations enclosed

changed to fv dhi (Pan. vi. 4, 101. See No. 162). The verb J hu, though ending in a vowel, takes fqdhi instead of f^ hi, for the sake of euphony. (Pan. vi. 4, 101.) Kri verbs ending in consonants form the 2nd pers. sing. imp. in ana.
root (in the Ad,

Rudh, or

Hu

classes), it is

WT

(See No. 155. Pan. in. i, 83.) In the 2nd pers. sing. imp. Parasm. verbs of the Su and Tan classes take no termination, except when ^ u is preceded by a conjunct consonant. (See

No.

177.)

In the 3rd pers. plur. pres. and imper. Parasm. verbs of the Hu class and ^rvq^f abhyasta, i. e. reduplicated bases, take ^rfir ati and ^nj atu.

Note

In the 3rd pers. plur. imp. Parasm. verbs of the Hu class, reduplicated bases, and ft^ vid, to know, take 7: uh,, before which, verbs ending in a vowel, require Guna. "gt uh is used optionally after verbs in *&\ a, and

Note 3

to hate. (Pan. 111.4, 109112.) means of these terminations the student is able to form the $ 322. By Present, Imperfect, Optative, and Imperative in the Parasmaipada and Atmanepade of all regular verbs in Sanskrit ; and any one who has clearly
after

f&^dvish,

understood

how

receiving their terminations,

the verbal bases are prepared in ten different ways for and who will attach to these verbal bases the

terminations as given above, according to the rules of Sandhi, will have no difficulty in writing out for himself the paradigms of any Sanskrit verb in
four of the most important tenses and moods, both in the Parasmaipada and Some verbs, however, are irregular in the formation of their Atmanepada.

base

these

must be

learnt from the Dhatupatha.

$322'

151

'i

I
r o

152

*
(-H

<

-8
.0;

ji
v

ifkttll

rim

&

153

'I,

lltlil
1
q
Oi
o5

05

^
I

1111
t

M II

.Hill
ts:l

154

f 1 SI
^
ar te

S'xs

!<s)

t o
-g

I 1
3-

l^>^ fa

-i
*

4 HilllMJ
s-

v!
fl

\<s>

-S

-t^e

^ .8
^

"r"

PS ^1
PL,

mil
">o

*|^

&
>

155

fit! I
'5

immmsi
l

1
5

'%

< Q
<tj

-41

W i
J5
<Jl

iiti
t-

!
.

i
o>

1 o
09

H
<

<:

<%

ft*

15 fl

lH*l I

(*

lj

I
.

11

el

<!

I
'^

ri
sri

Pi

156

I
a

g I

1 ^
1

^
I
4

'.g
v

7! P

7 ^ & $ % o

QJ

^e

'?| W ^

tvr

$3*2.

157

^ *.

P 2 a, W

r-

v?

g
'

Kr'TS

~<

? r

5?

^^5 2

J ^
I

ir^S

V-e
x

If Hi!
<^-

&

^2

J5

fc

=8

Bl
'S3
.1
6-

3 B

1^1

P^
l

KS

J?S

lir^ fe)^

158

4
5

't

'is

1045

-1

-J

GENERAL OR UNMODIFIED TENSES.

CHAPTER

X.

GENERAL OR UNMODIFIED TENSES.

which remain, the Reduplicated Perfect, the Peri$323. In the tenses the First and Second Aorist, the Future, the Conditional, phrastic Perfect,
the Periphrastic Future, and Benedictive, the distinction of the ten classes All verbs are treated alike, to whatever class they belong in the vanishes.

modified tenses

and the distinguishing

features, the inserted

nu,

*u

7ft ni,

&c., are removed again from the roots to which they had been attached in

the Present, the Imperfect, the Optative, and Imperative.

of the

Only the verbs

Chur

class preserve their

^R

dya throughout, except in the Aorist

and Benedictive.
Reduplicated Perfect.
J 324.

The

root in

its

primitive

state
($

is

reduplicated.

The

rules

of

reduplication have been given above.

$ 325.
1.

302319.)
all

verbs, except Monosyllabic roots which begin with any vowel prosodially long but to light ; d: such as fr id, to praise ; *vedh, to grow *T a or jp^indh,

The Reduplicated

Perfect can be formed of

'S^und,
2.

to wet.
'

Polysyllabic roots, such as

*w&( chakds,
and

to be bright.

3.

Verbs of the Chur

class

derivative verbs, such

as Causatives,

Desideratives, Intensives, Denominatives.

J 326.

Verbs which cannot form the Perfect by reduplication, form the

Periphrastic Perfect

by means of composition.

(J 340.)

So do likewise
(Pan. in.
i, 37),

^TI day, to pity, &c.,

WR(kds, to cough

to go, ^T^ as, to sit down ^n^ ay, to shine (Pan. in. I, 35); also

(Sar.); optionally ^re ush, to burn, (^fai oshdm), fas vid, to

WR(kds, know, (fe^T viddm),

*TFJ.M0T
cation,
tft

to wake, fapvftjdgardm, Pan. in. bhi (fswrnbibhaydm),-%thri

38); and, after taking redupli(^^jihraydm)^ bhri

i,

and J hu

Pan. in. ("SJ^T juhavdm.

The verb
drnundva as

^
its

i, 39).

drnu, to cover, although polysyllabic, allows only of

Perfect.
fail,

although forms only VMM^ dnarchchha.

^5

richh, to

its

base in the Perfect ends in two consonants,

It is treated, in fact, as if ^^archchh. ($31 3.)

Terminations of the Reduplicated Perfect. SINGULAR.

^a
2.

160

GENERAL OR UNMODIFIED TENSES.

DUAL.
1.

^ iva
^rgt athufy
^BTgj

ivahe

2.

3.

aw#
PLURAL.

i.

^IT

ima

imahe
or

These terminations are here given, without any regard to the systems of native or comparative grammarians, in that form in which they may be

The rules on the omission of mechanically added to the reduplicated roots. the initial ^ i of certain terminations will be given below.
on the terminations in the Parasmaipada and In these Atmanepada, except in the three persons singular Parasmaipada. the accent falls on the root, which therefore is strengthened according to the
327.
falls

The accent

following rules
1.

Vowels capable of Guna, take by one consonant.

9

Guna throughout

the singular,

if

followed

**F^budh,

fa^ bhid f^T^ bibhed-a, fsftf^q bibhed-itha, f^T^ bibhed-a. bubddh-a ^ftftTO bubodh-itha, ^rrtv bubddh-a. j^fai
t

But

*fatjiv, a long medial

vowel not being

liable to

Guna, forms

Pfflcf

jijw-a, PH jflfavjjy iv-itha, P*|fl^ jijiv-a.

2.

Final vowels take Vriddhi or

Guna

in the first,

Guna

in the second,

Vriddhi only in the third person singular.

nindy-a or PHHH nindy-a 9 PHH^ ninetha or
ninay-a.
3. ^r
PfHP*4"i nindy-itha,

if

followed

by

a single consonant, takes Vriddhi or

Guna

in the first,

Guna

in the second, Vriddhi only in the third person singular.

hanS3&K*{jaghdn-a or Wttjaghdn-a, ^qfaRjaghdn-itha, v{*FRJaghdn-a.

If the second person singular
if

Parasmaipada is formed by ^ftha, the accent falls on with ^ZJ itha, the accent may fall on any syllable, but generally it is on the ; In this case the radical vowel may, in certain verbs, be without Guna, termination.
the root
f%*(vij, f^3*1viveja, but P<P=I PiT^T vivijitha.

Note

(Pan. 1.2,2; 3.)

a tendency to strengthen the base in the three persons 328. singular Parasmaipada, so there is a tendency to weaken the base, under
there
is

As

certain circumstances, before the other terminations of the Perfect, Parasmai

and Atmanepada.
i.

Here the following rules must be observed Roots like impat, i. e. roots in which ^ a is preceded and followed by a single consonant, and which in their reduplicated syllable repeat the
:

consonant without any change (this excludes roots beginning with aspirates and with gutturals; roots beginning with 'Zv, and
initial

-f

330.

GENERAL OE UNMODIFIED TENSES.

as* and

161
forms as

^ dad

are likewise excepted), contract such

Vl^pet, Pan. vi. 4, 120, 121.)

into

before the

accented terminations, (including

repack, TF&H papdktha, but ^fan pechithd, ^fqH pechimd,

^: pechufr.

W^ to,
a.

dfdvi tenithd, Trf^Tf tenimd, ?hj:

te/iM/r.

Roots mentioned in $ 311 take then- weak form. vah, 44I uvdha, 3lf^T uhimd. q^vach, TTT^ uvdcha, IPj: uchiih. Note The roots TJ M, Hfc^Aa/, ^^bhaj, W^trap, TBF^srath (Pan. vi. 4, 122), and The in the sense of 'killing' (123), form their Reduplicated Perfect like TT^r4c?A, ifl^pat.

<

roots
J

jrf,

Sn^&Aram, and ^5^/ras (124) may do so optionally; and likewise iPFF^Aan,

TT3Trq/, WT^iAr^/, WTS^bhrds, VfTS^bhlM, ^Ef^syam, ^(^svan.

3.

The

roots

Tp^gam,

^han

*f\jan, T&^khan, TR^ghas drop their radical

vowel.

(Pan. vi. 4, 98.)

'%z{han,

Ttf^gam, *{n*$jagmdtuh.

"*m$ jaghnatuh..

^^khanf^yf.chakh-

ndtuh.
4.

TT^ ghas,

T^: jakshdtuh.

Roots ending in more than one consonant, particularly in consonants preceded by a nasal (Pan. i. 2, 5), such as wi^manth, H^*ra/?w, &c, do not drop their nasal in the weakening forms. Ex. 3rd pers. dual
WSjtfj: babhrajjdtufy
;

*nfa|: mamanthdtufy

if&Rt sasramst.

5.

The verbs ^^ranth, ij^granth,

weakened, and form
'staij:

^ dambh, and^^^va/i;,
Pan.
i.

however,

maybe

krethatuh, ?T*np grethdtuh, ^^15: debhdtuk,

cf.

imA
some

sasvaje (loss of nasal

and e,

2, 6, vart.).

But

according to

grammarians the forms

$|<&jvjg:

sa&ranthdtuh &c. are more correct.

in diphthongs, drop J 329. Roots ending in ^srr a, and many roots ending their final vowel before all terminations beginning with a vowel (Pan. vi. 4, 64).

In the general tenses, verbs ending in diphthongs are treated like verbs

ending in WT

d.

The same
^T da,

roots take

^ au

for

the termination of the

first

and third

persons singular Parasmaipada.

dad-au,

^f^ dad-ivd, ^5:

&c.; see $ 311.
i,

dad-dthuh,

^t dad-ire.

mlai,

TtTjft

maml-au, *rf^ maml-ivd, irygt maml-dthuh, nf|ft maml-ire*.

t

Except

^vye

^ hve,

preceded by one consonant, change their vowels, before terminations beginning with vowels, into *T y, ^ r.
J 330.

Roots ending in ^

^ iy

ri t if

If preceded

by more than one consonant, they change

(

their vowels into

221.)
I

Prasada, p. 13

a.

In a later passage

the Prasada (p. 17 b) decides for both, ^RJ/as and ri forms the perf. ^fR dra, f 3rd pers. dual

^TO

drdtuh.

^\ richh
1

forms

xim^a dndrchchha,

3rd pers. dual

^fM^g!

dnarchchhdtuh.

(Pan. vn. 4,

1.)

162
Roots ending in

THE INTERMEDIATE ^

i.

331-

change these vowels always into f*(w). Most roots ending in ^ri, change the vowel to "^.ar (Pan. vn.

7 u, ^ u,

4,

u).

niny-ivd,

we two have

led.

fa

ri,

fyfeiftra 6i&riy-ivd,

we

two have gone.

two have done. stri, *f kri, ^m^l chakr-dthuh, you tastar-dthuh, you two have spread. 5 yw, ^fJTJ! yuyuv-dthufy, you ri**K^t two have joined. #/, stu, "^f^l tushtuv-dthuh, you two have praised,

eg

p chakar-dthufy,

you two have

scattered.

CHAPTER XL
THE INTERMEDIATE ^
i.

form the paradigms of the Reduplicated $331. Before we can proceed to Perfect by means of joining the terminations with the root, it is necessary

which in the Reduplicated Perfect and in the other unmodified tenses has to be inserted between the verbal base and The rules which the terminations, originally beginning with consonants.
to consider the intermediate ^i,
require, allow, or prohibit the insertion of this
difficult

form one of the most

chapters of Sanskrit grammar, and

it is

the object of the following

paragraphs to simplify these rules as

much

as possible.
is

The

general tendency, and, so far, the general rule,

that the terminations

insert the vowel

of the unmodified or general tenses, originally beginning with consonants, ^ i between base and termination ; and from an historical
point of view
it

would no doubt be more correct to speak of the rules which

require the addition of an intermediate ^ i than (as has been done in $ 326) to represent the ^ i as an integral part of the terminations, and to give the
rules

which require

its

omission.
it

But
will

as the intermediate

*
S{

has prevailed
purposes, to

in the vast majority of verbs,

state the exceptions,
i. e.

be

easier, for practical

the cases in which the ^ Hs not employed, instead of denning the cases in which it must or may be inserted. One termination only, that of the 3rd pers. plur. Perf. Atm., ^tire, keeps the
intermediate
i
35

under

all

circumstances.

In the Veda, however, this

e.

3[ i,

too,

has not yet become

* In Sf

fixed,

and

is

occasionally omitted;

g.

gpr

duduh-re.

fri, <[ dri,

and

"^

pri a further shortening

may

take place;

^KJJ!

sasardtuk

being shortened to

$RTi

sasrdtuh, &c.

(Pan.vn.

4, 12.)

-$

332.

THE INTERMEDIATE ^ t.

163
:

Let

it

be remembered then, that there are three points to be considered

i.

3.

3.

When When When

it

is it is it
is it

necessary to omit the

\i?
i

optional to insert or to omit the ^ necessary to insert the \ i ?

all
i.

For the purposes of reading Sanskrit,

is,

that a student

is

obliged to

know

When

is

necessary to omit the ^

Even

for writing Sanskrit this

knowledge would be
omission
is

sufficient, for in all cases except those in

i

which the

necessary, the ^

may
it

safely

be inserted, although, according

grammarians, may be equally right to omit it. A student therefore, and particularly a beginner, is safe if he only knows the cases in which ^ i is necessarily omitted, nor will anything but extensive
to views of native

reading enable him to

optional or necessary.

know

the verbs in which the insertion

is

either

Native grammarians have indeed laid down a number of rules, but both before and after Panini the language of India has

changed, and even native grammarians are obliged to admit that on the optional insertion of ^ i authorities differ; that is to say, that the literary language of India differed so much in different parts of that enormous
country, and at different periods of
its

long history, that no rules, however

freaks and fancies.
general axiom (Pan. vu.
2,

minute, would suffice to register

all its

332. Taking as the starting-point the

35) that every

termination beginning originally with a consonant (except

represent as a portion of the termination,
in which the

y) takes the

^
i.

",

which we
the cases
off

we proceed

to state the exceptions,

e.

^t must on no account be

inserted, or, as

we should

say,

must be cut

from

the beginning of the termination.

The following
vu.
2, 10), are

verbs, which have been carefully collected

by native grammarians (Pan.

not allowed to take the intermediate

in the so-called general or unmodified

tenses, before terminations or affixes beginning originally with a consonant (except *(y).

(Note
see
1.

The

reduplicated perfect and

its participle in

^^rcrs are not affected by these rules ;

334.)

All monosyllabic roots ending in ^f[d.

2. All

monosyllabic roots ending in

^ t,

except ft* sri, to attend (21, 31)*;

fa 4vi,to grow
Pan. vu.

(23,41).
2, 74-)

(Note

ftRsm*, to laugh, must take ^

in the Desiderative.

3. All

monosyllabic roots ending in ^f, except

si,

df,

to

fly (22,

72

26, 26. anuddtta),

and

$ft
4. All

to rest (24, 22).

monosyllabic roots ending in *5u, except *fyu, to mix (24, 23; not 31,9); ^rw,

to praise (24, 26; 28, 104?); TSJfoAt/, to sound (24,27); to sound (24, 24); "jjnw,
T9JJ

kshnu, to sharpen (24, 28).

2, 36).

^ snu,
2, 72.)

to flow (24, 29), takes

in

Parasmaipada
in the First

(Pan. vu.

(Note

*J

stu, to praise,

and

to pour, *} sw,

take

Aorist Parasmaipada.

Pan. vu.

* These figures refer to the Dhatupaflia inWestergaard's Radices Linguae Sanscrit*, 1841.

Y 2

164
5. All

THE INTERMEDIATE

i.

332-

Important exception

monosyllabic roots ending in ^Jn", except ^t?n, to choose (31, 38). in the Fut. and Cond. in ^T sya, all verbs in ^J ri take
:

^
i

(Pan.

vn.

2, 70).

svri, to

sound, may take

^i

(Pan. vn.

2, 44).

^ bhri, to

carry,

may

take

in the

Desider. (Pan. vn.

2, 49).

to hold, dri, to regard, >jc?An,

and

^n, to
ri

go, take

^i

in the Desider. (Pan.

vn.

2, 74, 75).

In the Benedictive and First Aorist Atmanepada verbs ending in with a conjunct consonant may take ^ i (Pan. vn. 2, 43).
6. All

and beginning

monosyllabic roots ending in

TJ e,

^ ai,

^ft o.
all

Thereforej with few exceptions, as mentioned above,

monosyllabic roots ending in

i.

vowels, except the vowels ^5 u and

7.

ri,

must not take ^

15).

8.

Of roots ending in Of roots ending in

cjf Jc,

to TfT^ fak,

be able (26, 78; 27,

^ ch, ^f^pach, to

cook

(23, 27);

*^vach,

to speak (24, 55);

ipf

much, to loose (28, 136); fa^sich, to sprinkle (28, 140); ft^n'cA, to leave (29, 4); to separate (29, 5).

'fa^wcA,

9.

Of roots ending
(Pan. vn.

in

to ask (28, 120). "^ chh, Tf^prachh,

It

must take ^ i

in the Desider.

2, 75).

10.

Of roots ending

in

*(J,

W^svanj,

to embrace (23, 7); to leave (23, 17); ^T5T fV^tyaj, to worship (23, 29);

sanj, to adhere (23, 18);

^(bhaj,

T^ranj,

to colour (23, 30;

36, 58); TS^yo;, to sacrifice (23, 33);

(25, 12; not 28, 9, or 29, 23); [Kas'.

f^^nij,

to clean (25,

n);

f^w/,

to separate

^mri;]; *[*{yuj, to meditate (26, 68), to join to let off (26, 69; 28, 121); (29, 7); *n^sn)', ^^bhrajj, to bake (28, 4, except to dip (28, 122); to break (28, 123); to bend j Desider.) Tr^majf/, *^*{ruj, V[*{bhuj, to protect (29, 17); lfc(bhafij, to break (29, 16). (28, 124),
1 1.

Of roots ending
to eat (24, i)
j

in

^ d, "^ had, to evacuate (23, 8) ^^ skand, to step (23, 10) ^pad, to go (26, 60) f&^khid, to be distressed, &c. (26, 61
; ;

ad,
;

28, 142

29, 12); "fa^w'eJ, to be (26, 62); "fe^sm'd, to sweat (26, 79); "g^tac?, to strike (28, i) ; "55 nu d, to push (28, 2 ; 28, 132) ; sad, to droop (28, 133) ; sad, to perish

(28, 134);

f^
12.

to find (28, 138? 29, 13; not 24, 56); to cut (29, 2); fo^bhid, to divide (29, 3) ; T5H* kshud, to pound (29, 6). chhid,

f^vid,

Of roots ending
with
^5T5J

in to know (26, 63) ; to fight (26, 64) ; rudh, V(dh, *3p(budh, Ijftyudh, aww, to love (26, 65), to keep off (29, i); TT^rddh, to grow (26, 71; 27, 16);

^H(ya^,

to strike (26, 72);

"^fcrwdA, to be angry

(26, 80);

^1 kshudh,

to be

hungry (26, vn. 2, 52);

81), except Part. "WfVrT kshudhita

and Ger.

ASlfVlr4l

kshudhitvd (Pan.

^JVswdA,
;

achieve (27, 16)

13.

^6awc/A,

to clean (26, 82); to succeed (26, 83); ^TTVsadA, to ftr^sz'dA, to bind (31, 37).

Of roots ending
70); likewise

in r^w, JR^han, to kill (24, 2), except the Fut.

its

and Cond. (Pan. vn.

2,

14.

Of

substitute 'Q^badhj *&[man, to think (26, 67). roots ending in \p, fft*{tip, to pour (10, i ?) ; 1{srip, to go (23, 14)
;

Jf^tap, to heat
(23, 34);
;

(23, 16; 26, 50); STU/op, to swear (23, 31

26, 59); 'SRvap, to

sow

svap, to sleep (24, 60)

''Srr^ap, to

reach (27, 14) ; f^Jcship, to throw (28, 5)

to cut (28, 137)

fflj/np

and

^^drip,

f&{lip, to anoint (28, 139) ; &^chhup, to touch (28, 125). (Note which are generally included, may take ^ , according to Pan.
"&*Xlabh, to take (23, 6)

vii. 2, 45.)
15.

Of roots ending
coire(23, n).

in >T bh, t&(rabh, to desire (23, 5)

T*T yabh,

_$ 33316.

THE INTERMEDIATE J

t.

165

Of

roots ending in *^ro,

to cease (23, 15).

T^ram, to play (20, 23) ; T^nam, to incline (23, 12); But these three take ^ t in Aor. Par. (Pan. vn. 2, 73). If^cm,

to
2,

go

(23, 13),

but

it

takes

before

^* of Put., Cond.,

58).
17.

Also

W^kram,
in
j

to step (13, 31), in

and Desider. Par. (Pan. vn. Atm. (Pan. vn. 2, 36).

Of roots ending
,

to bite (23, 20)

to see (23, 19) ; to shout (20, 26) ; $J(daih, 1{4, "J^Jtri^, ^J^rfftl, small (26, 70; 28, 127); ft^rftV, to show (28, 3); to be fo&S^Ji/,

to hurt (28, 126); ft^rtf, to hurt (28, 126); Fpjaprtf, to touch (28, 128); to rub (28, 131). to enter (28, 130) ;
in

18.

Of roots ending
fg^dvish,
47)
J

"^sA, ff^krish,
;

to hate (24, 3)

; 28, 6) ; ffr^tvish, to shine (23, 32) ; to pervade (25, 13), to separate (31, 54; not 17, ft^vtsA,

iJSJmrtf, to draw (23, 21

^push,

to nourish (26, 73
;

not 17, 50)

;

Jjf{4ush,

to dry (26, 74)

Tfttush, to

please (26, 75)

J^dusA, to
;

spoil (26, 76)

fe^tftsA, to embrace (26, 77); fjf^uA,

(29, 15).

to distinguish (29, 14)

19.

fq^pish,

to

pound

Of Of

^s, ^^t?as, to dwell (23, 36), except Part. ^Cnn; ushitah and Ger. TfoFTT ushitvd (Pan. vn. 2, 52) ; T&^ghas, to eat (17, 65, as substitute for W^cwJ).
roots ending in

20.

roots ending in

A,
;

^? ruA, to

grow

(20, 29)

to sprinkle (23, 23)

^
J^

dah, to burn (23, 22)

fo^ miA,

vah, to carry (23, 35);

lih,

duh, to milk (24, 4; not 17, 87);

f<^ dih,
tenses.

to smear (24, 5); fc5^

are,

to lick (24, 6);

^
*

naA, to bind (26, 57).

333- Other roots there

which must not take ^

in certain only of the general

A. In the future (formed by ITT td\ the future and conditional (formed by *ya), the and the participle in cT ta (Pan. vu. 2, 15; 44), the verb Jf^klip must not desiderative,
take

if

used in the Parasmaipada. (Pan. vn.

2, 60.)

gr^^/ip, to shape, Fut. h rWI kdlptd, Fut.

oF^rfif kalpsyati, Cond.

rn

t^akalpsyat;

Desid. (V|^i%rn cJiiklipsati; Part. giTK kliptah.

B. In the future and conditional (formed by **T sya), the desiderative base, and the participle in IT ta, the following four verbs must not take ^ *, if used in the Parasmaipada. (Pan. vii.
2, 59.)

to exist, Fut. "TO^fa vartsyati, ^!(vrit,

Part.

Cond. ^GRF!(avartsyatj Desid. rq^rofn

15; 56.)

vivritsati;

^:
^:

vrittah.
t

(Pan.

vn.

2,

^(vridh,to grow
Part.

ut.'5j&fKvartsyati, Cond.^31Q3(avartsyatj Desid.

fq^wfn vivritsati;

vriddhah.

^^syand,to
5J^

drop, Fut.

^Wft syantsyati,

Cond. ^^4i^^asyantsyat ; Desid.

sisyantsati; Part.
^tc?A, to hurt,

tiq; syannah.

Fut. 314*) fri tartsyati, Cond.

^^i3i^

asartsyat;

Desid.

Mritsati; Part. ^fSf: sriddhah. C. In the desiderative bases, and in the participle hi

W /a,

monosyllabic roots ending in

^uA, to hide, do not take

7w,

^!M,

^n,

^rl, and

?T^^A,

to take,

and

^ i.

(Pan. vn.

2, 12.)

^L&Att, to be, "yjjrfiff bubhushati; Part.

f=H ITf i/rraA,

^IH

MtftaA.

5f
D.
i.

f Part. rule, cf. Pan. vn. 2, 37). ^H| fAjighrikshati; *prfa:$rn"AftaA (long by special Pan. vn. 2, 44). Part. guh, 'SfflQfftjughukshati; *J: gudhah (cf.

(Verbs ending in

^rt

and

*J0ri

are liable to exceptions.

See

337.

Pan. vn.

2,

38-41.)

Participial formations.

Roots which may be without the ^

it

in

must be without any one of the general tenses,

in the participle in If ta.

166
(Remark that the

THE INTERMEDIATE
participle in

333perfect is

K ta is
5[

most opposed, as the reduplicated

.)

most

disposed to the admission of

Monosyllabic roots ending in ^fu, ^u, ^n", ^ri, do not take 3[ before the participle in 7T ta, nor before other terminations which tend to weaken a verbal base.
(Pan. vn.
2,

u.)
(Pan. vn.
2,

3
^

yu, to join, JIT: yu-tah, ^jf^l^yu-tavdn, fFTT yu-tvd.

cut, cgT: Zw-wa#,

n.)
335, II. 6.)

<Zw, to
ft,

<&HIl lu-navdn,
(Pan. vn.
2,

eSFTT Zw-taa.

(Except ^pu,

to cover, ^Wt vri-tah, '^nm^vri-tavdn, ^r^T vri-tvd.

,

to enter,
its

may form

44) the future as

W^M gdh-i-

hence
,

participle TT2't

gddhah only.
(Pan. vn. 2, 44) the future *frfWT#qp-i-fa or

to protect,

may form

hence
2.

its participle

TOTt guptak only. or

Roots which by native grammarians are marked with technical ^TT

5f

\t do not take

in the participle in
'c?,

K ta.

(Pan. vn.
f>i (**=! t;i

2, 14, 16.)

to sweat (marked as

nishvidd); Ptsrq* svinnah.

olaji};

*>

to be

ashamed (marked
ta or

as

vTlwil

H^J lagnah.

List of Participles in

If

na

wJ^ic^

for special reasons and in special senses

do not take
f^T sri, to

^ i.
See
332, 2.

go ;

f^Ilft fritah, T'JdqT fritvd.

;

(Pan. vii. 2, n.)

"fa w, to swell

SHT: sMwaA. (Pan. vii.

2, 14.)
if it

See

332, 2.
18.)

to shake; "^pr kshubh,

^"art Jcshubdhah,

means the churning-stick. (Pan. vn.2,

See

332, 15.
to sound ; ^flTt svdntah,
;

T3^ svan,
13^

if it

means the mind.

dhvan, to sound

ScJTlf J

dhvdntah,
if it

if it

means darkness.

^, to
fTOT

be near; W?T* lagnah,

means attached.
if it

mlechchh, to speak indistinctly ; ffn?J mUshtah,

virebh, to
,

means

indistinct.

sound
;

fetatt viribdhah,
phdntah,
if it

if it refers

to a note.
effort.

to prepare

Tfife:

means without an
excessive.
it

vdh, to labour ; ^PSTt vddhah, if

,

it

means

to be confident
,

^1

dhrishtah, if
it

means

bold.

(Pan. vii.

2, 19.)

to praise

tVsfUjcU visastah, if

means

arrogant.

drill.,

grow ; 7gl dridhah, if it means strong. (Pan. vii. 2, 20.) parwrih, to grow ; HfY<|<sJ parivridhah, if it means lord. (Pan.
to
,

vii. 2, 21.)
2, 22.)

to try

oFlft Jcashtah, if it
;

means
if it

difficult

or impervious.

(Pan. vii;

to manifest

TJT?t

ghushtah,

does not

mean

proclaimed. (Pan. vii. 2, 23.)

*i*i<5t

^T^ ard, with the prepos.

vii. 2, 24.)

^ saw, f^T wi,

f^

t?i,

^rfh arnnahj

samarnnah, plagued. (Pag.

^I^arc?,

with the prepos. ^rfa aZMy

causative),

WIWi

abhyarnnah,
read.

if it

means

near. (Pan. vii. 2, 25.)

it (as

WJ

vrittah, if it

means

f*fc

mid, to be soft, though having a technical

a,

participle as iP^nJ meditah or fa^J minnah (Pan. vii. 2, 17).

may, in certain senses, form its The same applies to all verbs

marked by

technical ^TT a.

-$

335*

THE INTERMEDIATE J
Intermediate

i.

167

in the Reduplicated Perfect.

334.

The preceding
i

rules, prohibiting in

a number of roots the

for all or

most

general tenses, do not affect the reduplicated perfect.

Most of the verbs

it

just enumerated

which must omit ^

in all other general tenses,

do not omit

in the perfect.

So general,

in fact, has the use of the

prohibited from taking

1.

it.

^ i become in the perfect, that eight roots only are absolutely These are (Pan. vn. 2, 13),
it

If kri,

to do, (unless

t^a(Vq
2.

changed to ^f samchaskariva; 2nd pers. sing.

is

skri),

ist pers. dual

^pf

chakri-va; but

t^WX** samchaskaritha.

3. 4.

^ sri, to go, tlljq sasri-va. ^ bhri, to bear, f$3 babhri-va.

^vri ty^vrirl and ^rnVi*), to choose, Par.

^^ ram-rat, Atm. ^p^ vavri-vahe,

^4
^

vavri-she.

5. ?*J stu, to praise, IJJ^T tushtu-va.

6. "5 dru, to run,
7.

g*W tush^o-tha.
tjtaTiv

J5^
tjt^

dudru-va.
SMsrw-ra.

J^T dudro-tha.
susro-tha.
susro-thn.
3JH>ftVJ

srw, to flow,
^irtt,

8.

to hear,

^^^T

4usru-va.

335- I Q tne second person singular of the reduplicated perfect Par. the
*T /Aa
1.

\i

before

must

necessarily be left out,

In the eight roots, enumerated before.

restricted to the

(The form
is

<*H

vavar-tha, however, being

Veda, ^^^vavaritha

considered the right form.

See No. 142, in

the Dhatupatha.)
2.

In roots ending in vowels, which are necessarily without vn. 2, 61. See 332, where these roots are given.
*TT yd,

5[

in the future (ifT td), Pan,

to go

Fut. Mini ydtd;

;

4JJJIVJ

yayd-tha.

f% cA,
3.

to gather

Fut.

^UT

chetd; P'l'S'q chiche-tha.

In roots ending in consonants and having an ^? a for their radical vowel, which are See in the future (iTT td), Pan. vn. 2, 62. 332, where these necessarily without

^i

roots are given.

Tf^pach, to cook ; Fut. ^Kfpaktd;

HMTH papak-tha.

But pH(V
without ^

krishati,

he drags

Fut. ctff T karshtd; 'qcuPHN chakarsh-i-tha.

(Bharadvaja requires the omission of

i

^i

after roots with

ri only,

in the periphrastic future (Pan.

vn.

2,

63), except root

which are necessarily ri itself. Hence he

allows sf'H'q pechitha, besides

also

MHT^

papaktha; ^MPiiN

iyajitha, besides

^I

iyashtha:

^ftnr yayitha, f'UfilVI chichayitha, &c.)

verbs ending in consonants with any other radical vowel but
all

4. All other

a, require

^*,

and so do
(ltt to).

verbs with which

i is

either optional or indispensable in the future

(31, 38)

^WW

t?nn, (27, 8) ^TTET t?arane, Su.

^t?rn,

(34, 8)

SHN<jJ dvarane, Chur.

rrt,

sambhaktau, Kri.

t The form

<H(M

vavariva y which Westergaard mentions,

may be

derived from another

root "^vri, the rule of Panini being restricted

by

the commentator to

^Trrin and

168
Exceptions
1.
:

THE INTERMEDIATE ^

i.

In

Iffisrij

and

^S^drif,

the omission
or

is

optional.

^(srij,
2.

TO? sasrashtha,

UtjfaTVI sasrijitha.

The verbs ^rf% atti,

^rflf arti,

awfff vyayati must take ^i.

338, 7.

^Tad, ^nf^T dd-i-tha, (exception to No. 3.) fvq dr-i-tha, (exception to No. 2.) ^ri, ^T vye, fa M PHV vivyay-i-tha, (exception to No.
! i

2.)

Tables showing the cases in which the intermediate

^ i must

be omitted between the Unmodified

originally beginning with a

Root and the Terminations of the so-called General Tenses,

Consonant, except *^y.

tive

336. In these tables Jtta stands for the Past Participle; ff^san stands for the Desidera^T sya for the Future and Conditional ; HT td for the Periphrastic Future ;
lin for

for the First Aorist ; f<3

the Benedictive.

I.

For

all

General Tenses, except the Reduplicated Perfect,

Omit \
1.

*',

Before Ttta,

*fi^sare, ^(sya, rTT td, fti^sich, fc5^ In the verbs enumerated 332.

lin

2.

Before Ttta, 'Q^san, ^sya, WT td: In y^klip, if Parasmaipada. 333, A.

Before
IT ta,

3.

*R^san,

*??

sya

In
4.

^?(vrit, ^fivridh,
.

l&^syand, yfts^idh,
"3!

if

Parasmaipada.

333, B.

Before

7f ta, ^H^ saw In monosyllabic verbs ending in T,

u,

^,

rt,

grah, and

J^ guh.

333, C,

5. Before
a.
b.

Tf ta:

All verbs which by native grammarians are marked with The verb fwfri and others enumerated in a general list,
II.

^TTa, \t, or ~&u *.

333,

D.

For

the Reduplicated Perfect,

Omit
1.

i,

Before

all

terminations, except

^C ire :
334.

In eight verbs, mentioned

2.

Before "Htha, 2nd pers. sing.: All verbs of 332 ending in vowels
All verbs of

1 if without

in the

332 ending in consonants with ^Ta as radical vowel /periphrastic future.

Optional insertion of

i.

337'

r practical purposes, as

was stated

before,

it

is

sufficient to

know when

it

would be wrong to use the intermediate

different

^*,- for in all other cases, whatever the views of

it is

grammarians, or the usage of different writers,

safe to insert the

^ i.
which ^ i

As

native grammarians, however, have been at

much pains to

collect the cases in

must or may be
student
*

inserted, a short abstract of their rules

may

here follow, which the early

may

safely pass by.

The technical "ZRu shows that

in the other general tenses the

^i

is

optional.

337, 1. 2.

-$

337-

THE INTERMEDIATE J
^
i

t.

169
:

may
an

or
affix

may

not be inserted

I.

Before any drdhadhdtuka

(i.

e.

of the general tenses not requiring the modified

verbal base) beginning with consonants, except

1.

^y

In the verbs *^svjn; Per. Fut. ^ffXill svar-i-td, or ^rtl svartd, &c. (Pin. vii. (Except future in fQsya, ^fTffTf svarishyati only. Pan. vn. 2, 70.)
(as

2, 44.)

Ad and

Div, not as Tud), wfatilsav-i-td, or *fhn*o/4, &c.

rfAo*rf,

as Tud), Vftrf! dhav-i-td, or vtlfT

&c.

(Except aorist Parasmaipada,

which must take ^ i.

2.

Pan. vn.
"91 tf

2, 72.)

In

all

verbs having a technical

*\\<z\

(Pan. vii.
i.)

2, 44).

TT^ptfA,

Per. Fut.

T^R

gdh-i-td,

or

gddhd.

(See

333, D.

But ^S^anj (though marked must take ^ ^T^ariju)

'wifai'ji dfijishuh.

in the first aorist (Pan. vii. 2, 71.)

3.

In the eight verbs beginning with T^radh.

(Pan. vn.

2, 45.)

(26, 84) T>J radhy to perish,

^ftim radh-i-td, or T^T raddM.

UTT namshtd.

(26, 85)
(26, 86)

TSJ

na

to vanish, *Tf^nn na4-i-td, or

y^/ry*

to delight, rtf5iTT tarp-i-td, or IRfttarptd, or cHIT traptd.

(26, 87) "^Tl^nP. to be proud, (26, 88)

(26, 89) (26, 90)
(26, 91)

^Hni darp-i-td,

or ^Trfarpf<f, or "JTH draptd.

"^T

e?rw^,

to hate, ^)f^HI droh-i-td, or ^t^VT drogdhd, or ^l<il drodhd.

>

lp wwA, to be bewildered, *Af^nf moh-i-td, or

^J^swwA,

*ffr>n

mogdhd, or *ft7T modhd.

to vomit, n^lf^nr snoh-i-td, or ^^VTsno^rfAtf, or 'Wftnsnodhd.

f%^

sniA, to love,

^f^lTT sneh-i-td, or

WVT snegdhd, or ^TT snedhd.

is

According to some this option extends to the reduplicated perfect ; but this
denied by others.
4.

properly

In the verb "^^kush (Chur class), preceded by f^ntr,- but here the participle with if ta. (Pan. vn. 2, 46 ; 47.)

is

necessary in

^
II.
1
.

may

or
:

may

not be inserted

Before certain drdhadhdtukas only

Before drdhadhdtukas beginning with

7f t

In the verbs ^(ish (Tud only),

48.)

^
T

sah, "ty^lubh,

Thrush, ft^rwA.

(Pan. vn. 2,
7.

The

participles in IT ta or

na are treated separately under No.

Hence

^?J
2.

ishtah only, but either

^T

ishtvd or

^PMHI

ishitvd.

Before drdhadhdtukas beginning with ^s, but not in the aorist : In the verbs to cut; Tfl^krit, ^cAnV, to kill; ^? chhrid, to play;
; 2, 57.) Jl^nn7, Before the termination of the desiderative base (^J^san)

trid,

to

strike

to dance.

(Pan. vn.

3.

In the verb

^ vri,

and

all

verbs ending in l^rf.

(Pan. vn.

2, 41.)

In the verbs ending in

^V,
2, 49.)

and

in

f^T^ri, "^P^ridh, ^S^bhrasj, ^^dambh,

^yw, "gp^wrnM,
daridrd.
4.

^J

bhri

(Bhu

class),

"^jiiap, *H^san; also J&^tan, Ifl^pat

first aorist

(Pan. vn.

and Before the terminations of the benedictive (fc5^ lin)

(ftr^stcA)

in the

Atmanepada
In the verb

vri,

and
or

all

verbs ending in
ur.

rt

(Pan. vii. 2, 42).

The

i* is

changed "^ In verbs ending in "^ n and beginning with a conjunct consonant. (Pan. vn.

into

^r

2, 43.)

170
5.

THE INTERMEDIATE ^

i.

338-

Before the gerundial termination T^T tvd :

In verbs having a technical

"3

u.
I

(Pan. vn.

2, 56.)

3I*/am (flQgamu),
6.

Slftfri

samitvd or ^T^f\ sdntvd.

IT

Before the gerundial termination r^T tvd and the participle in In the verb (Pan. vn. 2, 50.) fjfR^klis.

ta

f^P^RK Misitvd
In the verb ^pu.

or f^ifT klishtvd, ffrfspf: klisitah or fjf&: klishtah. (Pan. vn. 2, 51.)

n\*tt*\ pavitvd or T$t31putvd,

^^Alpavitah
2, 74).

or

"JTTt

putah.

It

must take ^

in

the desiderative (Pan. vii.

7.

Before the participial terminations If ta or "ff wa.; (see also 333, D. 2, note) In the verbs %*[dam, to tame, ^f cH ddntah or ^f*Trf: damitah. (Pan. vii. 2, 27.)
:

$T*T /am, to quiet, ^itcH

sdntah or

^rf'TrfJ

samitah.

^Ttpur, to

fill,

^jSt purnah or "%ftjK puritafi.

<^ c?5,

to perish, ^cTJ dastah or ^iftnft ddsitah.

,

to touch,

^re: spashtah or *Mlf$M:

"SfflfJ

spdsitah.

chhad, to cover,
,

chhannah or

(i(^fT! chhdditah.

to inform,

^Ijnaptah
aw^aA or

or ^rPTff t jnapitdh.

i,

to hurt, ^TT?i rushtah or

^PunJ

rushitah.

(Pan. vii.

2, 28.)

am, to go,
,

WrH

^i(*irtt

amitah.

to hasten, IT^J turnah or rqf^nJ tvaritah.

hush, to shout,

UMV* sahghushtah

or

^'^PMdt sanghushitah. (See

333,

D.

2.)

<9^^san,
D.
2.)

to sound, vti taint dsvdntah or vfi^rrtn; dsvanitah.

(See

333,

^mA,

to rejoice,
2, 29.)

^?J

hrishtah or

^f^W

hrishitah, if applied to horripilation.

(Pin. vii.

apa-chi, to honour, smF*frrt apachitah or

8.

<

^TH^irMnt apachdyitah *.

Before the participle of the reduplicated perfect in ^[pas.In the verbs TH #am, to go, ^fH H ll ^jagmivdn or f *l 4 [^jaganvdn f.
1

^^

Aaw, to
7

kill,

^ P q \J(jaghmvdn or

^ M i^T^jaghanvdn.
fcfc|g^ vividvdn.

ia to
.,

know,

PqP3i\crir|[ vividivdn or

V, to enter,
ris,

WV%^T^ vimswdn or f%Pq *a l*^ vivisvdn.

or ^STSTT*^ dadrisvdn.

to see,

^"T^TTP^ dadrisivdn

Necessary insertion of
-

i.

33 8 ^ must be inserted in all verbs in which, as stated before, it is neither prohibited, nor only optionally allowed (Pan. vii. 2, 35). Besides these, the following special cases may be mentioned
:

i.

Before ^^pas, participle of reduplicated perfect: In the verbs ending in ^TT d (Pan. vii. 2, 67).

*TT pd,

In the verbs reduced to a single syllable in the reduplicated perfect (Pan. vii.
^TST as, to eat,
Ssi
I

2, 67).

P^|( i*^ dsivdn.

eat,
i

In the verb fR^ghas, to

Pj \*{jaksMvdn.
(

Other verbs

reject

it.

* Pan. vii.

2, 30.

f Pan.

vii. 2, 68.

-$
2.

34*.

THE INTERMEDIATE ^
r

i.

171

Before T*T*ya of the future and conditional

'

In

all

verbs ending in

^ri, and

in

han (Pan. vii.

2, 70).

In JTl^am,

if

used in

the Parasmaipada (Pan. vii.

3.

a, 58).

Before the terminations of the

first aorist

(fa^ sick)

In the verbs ^J stu, *J su, ^jdhH in the Parasmaipada (Pan. vii. 2, 72). stu, to praise, First Aorist (First Form), ^unlfqM astdvisham;
fFJ

Thus from
but in the

Atmanepada, vmflfM
4.

astoshi.
:

Before the terminations of the desiderative (*P^an)

In the verbs ^f krf, *lffrt, dji, ^dh^-i, and fR^prachh (Pan. vii. if used in the Parasmaipada (Pan. vn. 2, 58). TpT^am,

2, 75);

and

in

In the verbs
5.

ftiR smi,

^pu,

^ n, ^*^

otij,

and ^HT

a/.

(Pan. vii.

2, 74.)
2,
;

Before the gerundial

WT tvd and

the participial termination

K ta.

(Pan. vn.

52-54.)

In the verbs '3R(vas ) to dwell; Ijftkshudh, to hunger; to confound (Dhatupatha 28, 22).
6.

^^ afich, to worship
2, 55.)

<y^/uA,

Before FTT tvd only : In to grow old

7.

; '^{vras'ch, to cut. (Pan. vn. ^[jrt, Before iftha, 2nd pers. sing, reduplicated perfect :

In

W^arf, to eat;
n(V'H dritha,

^n,
3[

to go;

^ vye, to cover.
inserted
is

Wlty"! dditha, against

335, 3;

335, 3, note; PqcMPM^ vivyayitha.

i

J 339. Vriddhi.

The vowel

thus

never

liable

to

Guna

or

Insertion of the long

J 340. Long ^ verb ending in ^
aorist
i

i.

may be

substituted for the short

when subjoined
38-40.)

to a

ri,

also to

vri, except in the reduplicated perfect, the

Parasmaipada, and the benedictive.

Per. Fut. nrfaT taritd or
teritha
;

(Pan. vii.

2,

I.

TtftriT taritd, &c.; but Perf. 2nd pers. sing. Aor. Par. 3rd pers. plur. ^H H PI.M: atdrishufi; Bened.
I

3rd pers. sing,

'rffimlif

tarishishta *.

vri;

Per. Fut. c(0in varita or

Tfcn

varitd;

but

Perf. ^^^<v| vavaritha;

Aor. Par.
341.

avdrishuh ; Bened. 'cifWte varishishta. ^SHifoj: In the desiderative and in the aorist Atm. and benedictive Atm. these verbs may
^[
*

or

may
tri;

not have

(Pan. vii. 2, 41-42), which,

if

used,

is liable

to be changed to

^ t;

not,

however, as far as
"ff

can judge, in the benedictive Atmanepada.

Des.

fnii(V.irir titarishati ;

rddOMPrt

titarishatij

frtiflSfif titirshati;

Aor. Atm.

atarishta,

^fift^

atarishta,

and ^Ti^

attrshta;

Bened. n PvHl 9 tarishishta,

vuvurshate; Aor. Atm.
varishishfa,

tirsMshta.
vjij

Des. fqqfVMci vivarishate;

avarishta,
vrishishta.

feiqOHfi vivarishate;

^^

^Tq<1s avarishta, and ^T^TT avrita; Bened. qf<M*l8

takes the long

The verb
desiderative,

?^
and

^rraA, too,

$ i,

except in the reduplicated perfect, the

2, 37.)
.

certain tenses of the passive.

(Pan. vn.

Per. Fut. il^HI grahitd; Inf. ?T^ grah;

ij^lij

grahitum; but Perf

fjf^T jagrihima.

The forms given

starishishfa, are

in the Calcutta edition of Panini

vn.

2, 42,

MOMlV

varishishta,

wrong.

(See Pan. vn.

2, 39.)

Z 2

172

PARADIGMS OF REDUPLICATED PERFECT.

Periphrastic Perfect.

343-

342. Verbs which, according to $325, cannot form a reduplicated perfect,

affixing ^rf

form their perfect by

abstract

dm

(an accusative termination of a feminine

noun

in

wr

d) to the verbal base,

and adding

to this the reduplicated

perfect of
?,

"cfkri,

to do, *^bhu f to be, or to be* ^r?(as,

to wet,
?,

g^NcFR,

'

s r*$$, ^rrer,

unddmchakdra, babMva, dsa.

to shine, ^cinflM<*K, ^J?, ^ira, chakdsdmchakdra, babhdva, dsa.

bodhaya, to
babhuva, dsa.

make known, ^hWHehTCj ^^,

^TTH,

bodhaydmchakdra,

After verbs which are used in the Atmanepada, the auxiliary verb
is

conjugated as
*j\rff

Hence from
N

Atmanepada, but edhate, he grows,

J

^^

as and

^ bM

f in the Parasmaipada.

kri

^VT^sR edh-amchakre ; but ^*j$ babhtiva and ^TW dsa.

In the passive

all

three auxiliary verbs follow the Atmanepada.

343. Intensive bases which can take

Guna, take

it

before

^srf

dm;

desiderative bases

never admit of Guna.

339.)

w^bobhu,
But
chakdra &c.

frequentative base of

*^bM,

^T^T^cUR

bobhavdmchakdra.

^J^frfVr^ bubodhish, desiderative base of

^V

budh, '^sTlfVjMMohK

&c

bubodhishdm-

Paradigms of the Reduplicated Perfect.

i.

Verbal bases in ^TT

a,
i,

requiring intermediate
to place.

i.

PARASMAIPADA.
SINGULAR.
DUAL.

ATMANEPADA.
PLURAL,
SINGULAR.

DUAL.

PLURAL.

dadhwd
>

dadhimd

dadhtf

dadhivdhe

dadhimdhe

or

2t1

\3$W dadhitha*

_ dadhdthuh dadhd

dadhisM dadhdthe

dadhidhvt

3.

^u dadhati
dadhdtuh

dadhuh

dadht

dadhdte

dadhirf
i.
<5[

2.

Verbal bases in ^i and

^,

preceded by one consonant, and requiring intermediate

*ft ni, to lead.

(_

Mti^
r*iH*(

nindya

ninyivd
Prj^fq:

ninyimd
frf^T

ninyf

ninyivdhe

ninyimdhe

nin&ha or

2.

fff^^
nmyishf

fiMi<i
ninydthe
f'f^T'if

Prjf^^

or

<s

vy 4 (

ion) '

P*llP<4^wmay^a* ninydthuh ninyd

f*frfl}J

mnyidhveor-c
frfpsq^
ninyire

3.

nindya

Pi**i^[J

^*5*
ninyuh
335. 2 ^ and

f*T^
niny

ninydtuh
*

ninydte

335, 3.

-$

3433.

PARADIGMS OF REDUPLICATED PERFECT.

173
t.

Verbal bases in

ri,

preceded by one consonant, and requiring intermediate ^

Vdhji, to hold.
f

^VTT dadhdra or
dadhdra
dadhrvod
<r^3* dadhrdthuh

[f^rt,
2.

dadhrimd

dadhrt

dadhrivdhe

dadhrimdhe

* <prQ dadhdrtha

^
dadhrd
dadhruh

qiMM
dudhrishe

^WTM
dadhrdthe

^Tw or
dadhridhve' or -dhtf

dadhrdtuh
4.

dadhre"

dadhrdte

dadhrirf
t.

Verbal bases

in "^J

//,

preceded by one consonant, not admitting intermediate ^

*

Art, to do.

chakdra or
chakdra
2.

^^T
chakrivd
^BT*J* chakrdthuh

'^'^
chakrimd
lf

^^
chakrt

^*^j^
chakrivdhe

^p*f^
chakrimdhe
1

^RTO
^fSRi'C

chakdrtha

"

^"^
chakrisht

^JIN
chakrdthe

^'?

chakrd

chakridhvf

3.

chakdra

^3>^
chakrdtuh

^"5* chakruh

^
chakre"

^J^iH
chakrate

^l^K
chakrirf

5.

Verbal bases in ^ t or \f, preceded by two consonants, and requiring intermediate

"aft krt,

^ t.

to buy.

* 1

J f^rWT chikrdya
r ._. . T -T f \^%*\ chikrdya

or
chikriyivd

chikriyimd
f^fjli^

chikriye'

chikriyivdhe chikriyimdhe
fcfsfiJJIVf

chikre'tha or
'

fa fdiJJ VJJ

f^f^if^

n^f^ifm? or

[ f^r4^

chikrayitha chikriydthuh chikriyd

chikriyisht chikriydthe

chikriyidfivtor -dhv

3.

fWfliiiJ

chikrdya

fatHH$i
chikriydtuh

r^fju^t
chikriyuh

f^f^W
chikriyd

Pi r<4 in
chikriydte

P^rjrM<
chikriyire"

6.

Verbal bases in TM or "31 u, preceded by one or two consonants, and requiring intermediate ^i.

3 yu,
J ^MII
'

to join.
iffl3

yuydoa or

^^Pqq
yuyuvivd

^*jfaH

^^^q^
yuyuvivdhe

^^fqi^
yuyuvimdhe
yuyuvidhve* or -dhv

L^^ yuydva

yuyuvimd

yuyuv

yuywsdthuh

yuyuvd

yuyuvishe'

yuyuvdthe

yuyuvdtuh
7.

yuyuvuh

yuyuve'

yuyuvate

yuyuvirf

Verbal bases in^M, preceded by one or two consonants, and not admittingthe intermediate ^.

*J

stu, to praise.

(H^ tushtdva

tushtuvd

tushtumd

tushtuve"

tushtuvdhe

tushtumdhe

tushtuvdthuh tushtuvd

tushtusht

tushtuvdthe

tushtudhcf

tushtuvdtuh

tushtuvuh

tushtuvt

tushtuvdte

tushtuvirf

335
If

2>
is

and

335, 3.
9, it

3 yu

taken from Dhatupatfia 31,

p. 46, note.)

may form

JpffaywyrffAa.

(See

335,

2,

and

Westergaard, Radices,

I Bharadvaja might allow fJHfq'<| tushtavitha even against Pan. vn.

2, 13.

174
8.

PARADIGMS OF REDUPLICATED PERFECT.

343.

Verbal bases in ^J ri, preceded by two consonants, and requiring intermediate ? UK stri, to spread.

f
I

f^tTR tastdra or
fftrtX tastdra
"cTCcr^?

nwf^q
tastarivd

'fi^cffiJH

HHT
tastare

cUtlTi,^
tastarivdhe

tastarimd

tastarimdhe

2.

tastdrtha

tastardthuh

tastard

tastarishe

tastardthe

tastaridhve or -dhve'

tastardtuh

tastaruh

tastarg

tastardte

tastarirt

9.

Verbal bases in ^T n, requiring intermediate

cF kri, to scatter.

3[

*.

^fom*. cJiaTcdra or

[ ^ofT^C
2.

chakdra

chakarivd

chakarimd

chakare*

chakarivdhe chakarimdhe
-4 hCI

^nKT^f chakaritha

^R^t

^^f^

^^Ttt^

H <*R.SET or e
chakaridhvt or -dhve*

chakardthuh chakard

chakarishe chakardthe

chakardtuh

chakaruh

chakarts

chakardte

chakarire'

10.

Verbal bases in consonants, requiring intermediate

to strike. lf^ tud,

^[

ijm^ tut6da

^5*^^
tutudivd

33'V** tutudimd

&$
tutudf:

ggfq^^
tutudivdhe

^4^*'^
tutudimdhe

tutuddthuh

tutudd

tutudishe

tutuddthe

tutudidhvt

tutuddtuh

tutuduh

tutude

tutuddte

tutudire'

ii.

Verbal bases in consonants, having

1J e,

and requiring intermediate ^ i,

to stretch.
I

rift

11 tatana or

1,4
|_

fTfTrT

tatdna

tenivd

tenimd

tene"

tenivdhe

tenimdhe

2.

dMV( tenitha
tendthuh tend
tenisht
?T*f

tendthe

tenidhve

3.

ii(i"iJ

tatdna

rfT^[J

W^t
tenuh

tene

12.

Verbal bases in consonants, having Samprasarana, and requiring ^

*.

TWyo/,
i.

to sacrifice.

J 5[^rr5f

iyaja or

^TTT^
ijivd

*fTT
ijimd

^w
tje

S^Wqtj
ijlvdhe

'^f^'H^ ijimdhe

\^lf*fiydja

J
3.

or 5pPH? iydshtJia

^'T^J
ydthuh
^*fij*

^5f
ijd

^ftf^
ijisM

i(TTT
ijdthe

^ftT^
ijidhvt

'\^f3[Hiyajitha
^Tflifiydja

t[5*
ijuh

^
tj<?

^TTn
ijdte

^fR
yire

tjdtuh

-$

344.

PARADIGMS OP REDUPLICATED PERFECT.

Verbal bases in consonants, requiring contraction, and intermediate ^
i.

175

13.

^^ han, to
J
[
*! *4
1

kill.

^\jaghdna or

"^fiji-i

aiiHM

Ifn

flii^^
jaghnivdhe

lfHH
jaghnimdhe

*\n<\jaghdna

jaghnivd

jaghnimd

jaghnt
"SfflT 1^

[fpfajaghdnthaoT WIT^I [ *\ M PH Vjaghanitha jaghndthuh

fH
jaghnd

1HIM

TfWT
jaghnidhvf

jaghnisht jaghndthe

jaghndtuh

jaghnuh

jaghnt

jaghndte

jaghnirt

14.

Verbal base ^JbhH (irregular).

babhuvivd
2.

babhuvimd

babhuvt

babhuvivdhe babhuvimdhe

**$yv<4babhuvitha

HJ5^;

^*?

babhuvdthuh babhtivd

^<J5TM HJJ^H babhumsht babhuvdthe

q'JJ^ufor^
babhucidhvor-dhi;

babhuvdtuh

babhuvuh

babhuce

babhuvdte

babhuvirt

CHAPTER
IN THE SIX REMAINING
J 344.

XII.

STRENGTHENING AND WEAKENING OF THE VERBAL BASES

GENERAL TENSES.
minute
details,

It

may be

useful, without entering into

to dis-

tinguish between two sets of general tenses, moods, and verbal derivatives, which differ from each other by a tendency either to strengthen or to weaken
their base.

The strengthening

takes place chiefly

by Guna,

but, under

special circumstances, likewise

or by nasalization.

ri

to

ir,

or,

by Vriddhi, by lengthening of the vowel, The weakening takes place by shortening, by changing before consonants, to ^T ir, by Samprasarana, or by

There are many roots, however, which either cannot dropping of a nasal. be strengthened or cannot be weakened, and which therefore are liable
to change in one only of these sets.

Some

resist

both strengthening and

weakening,

as,

for instance,

all

derivative bases, causatives, desideratives,

and intensives

as (in the Atm.), which generally have been strengthened, far as their bases will allow, to their taking the conjugational previously

terminations.

176

STRENGTHENING AND WEAKENING OF VERBAL BASES

is,

344if

The base

if possible,
:

The base
i.

is

not strengthened, and,

strengthened in
1.

possible,

weakened

in

The Future.

The

Participle in

K
i).

ta (unless

it

takes

2. 3.

The

Conditional.
1.

intermediate ^

4.

The Periphrastic Future. The Benedictive Atmanepada.

(Except bases ending in conson. or ri, and not taking interm. ^i. Pan. 1. 2, n; 12. vn. 2, 42.)

The Gerund
The
Passive.

in

in tvd
3f

(unless

it

takes

intermediate
3.

*).

4.
5. 6.

5.

The

First Aorist, 1. II. (Except First Aor. II. Itm. of verbs ending in conson., ri, or 350-352.)

The Benedictive Parasmaipada. The First Aorist, IV.

The Second
Aorist.
(Except verbs in
Per.Fut.

ri,

&c.

364.)
First Aor. I. II.

I.

Root.

Base
strengthened.

Future.

Conditional.

Ben.Atm.

(Except bases ending in cons, not taking interm.

'.)

Atm.

bU
tud

bho
ift^

bhavishydti

dbhavishyat

bhavishishtd

dbhavishta

tod

dtotsyat

tottd

(tutsishtd)

dtautsit

VHtjP|*Mi^
div

^Pnu
devitd

^P^ifte

^Hfl
ddevit

dev

ddevishyat

devisMshtd

chur

choray

chorayishydti

dchorayishyat

chorayita

chorayisMshtd

krt

kar

dkanshyat
^T^fhUT^

karitd
tTlrtT

karishishtd

dkdrit

su

so

dsoshyat

sotd
fiPniti

^dPi*Ui^
tan tan
dtanishyat

tanitd

tanisMshtd

%
kri

kre

dkreshyat

dkraishit

dvish

dvekshydti

ddvekshyat

dveshtd

1
hu
ho

dhoshyat

dhaushit

*H
rudh
rodh
Caus.
rotsydti

VUrUlfl
drotsyat
drautsit

-..^-..1^

^
kri

<*i<^

^KP*iMPff
kdrayishydti

^ToFRPH 1^^
dkdrayishyat
kdrayita
1

kdray

kdrayishishtd

F
kri

wf^olftfH^ni f^offtf^ WT fWohTT^tftv Des. f^T^"^ f%c|HfH^ttPrf chiMrsh chikirshishydti dchikirsUsJiyat chikirsUtd chikirshishishtd dchiktrsMt
Int.

^
kri

-(rfil^

^"SftP^^n

ei^unlPM'Mn

^wtftRfT ^rfTIPM'Oy

-ef-qjn^f^

chekrty

chekriyishydte dchekriyishyata chekriyitd

chekriyisMshtd dchekriyishta

-f
II.

345.

IN

THE SIX REMAINING GENERAL TENSES.

Ger. WT/tx?, Passive. without^.

177
First

Root.

Base Part.TT/a, not strengthened, without ^i.

Ben. Par.

Second Aor.

Aor.IV.

and Sec. Aor.

bhu

bM
tud

bhdtdk

bhutvd

bMydte
pr?r

bhuydt

4UM
dtutta
Wfffr

tud
"*

tunnd/i
offhSt

tuttvd
Afclr^T

tudydte
<*)3c$

tudyd't

Vfa
Hr
iv

kri

kirndh

kirtvd

kirydte
1

ktrydt

dktrth{a

IjTCdyutdh VfjRldyutvd'faWdtvydte
'pushydte

(*$Atf()

^"W^A,
dchuchurat

cAur

(choray)

(choritdh)

(chorayitvd) (chorydte)

(chorydt)

su

su

sutdh
THT:

sutvd

suydte

suydt

/an

tan

&

ta

tatdh

tatvd

tanydte

any at

dtata

nfter
kri

kri

kritdh

krtydt

fsv:

55!^
dvish

dvish

dvishtdh

dvishydte

dvishyat

ddvikshat

hu

hu

hutdh

hutvd

Mydte

Mydt
drudhat

rudh
Tf
kri

ruddhdh

ruddhva

rudhydte

rudhydt

druddha

Caus.

kdray

kdritdh

kdrayitvd

kdrydte

kdrydt

dchflcarat

* Des.f^^f
chikirsh

fq^ftflTf:

f^
chikirshydt

chikirshitdh chikirshitvd chikirshydte

^
kri

Int.

chekriy

chekriyitdh chekriyitvd

345- Certain roots which strengthen their base in a peculiar manner,

like

by Vriddhi,

'p^mry, by

lengthening, like

^$rwA, by

transposition, like
all

*p^sn/, by changing \i

into TSRd, like fa mi,

in the
I.

by

nasalization, like

T3^nos, drop

these

marks of strengthening,

weak forms.
Base
strengthened.

Root.

Future.

Conditional.

Per.Fut.

Ben. Aim.

First Aorwt.

f5T
mjij

Tm 4
mdrj
or

HIVSfirH

vj*iiYs<<rt

Trtl

ITMIMIK
mdrjishishtd

^eftun/Tf^

mdrkshydti

dmdrkshyat
vfHrHn'M'n

mdrshtd
*nhnrtl

dmdrkshit

uln^flff
mdrjishydti

(*j/l)
(mrikshishtd)

^tfiiTt^
dmdrjti

dmdrjishyat

mdrjitd

M3-

Or
4

tanitvd.

Pan. vn.

2, 114.

178

STRENGTHENING AND WEAKENING OF VERBAL BASES, &C.

345-

guh

guh
or

ghokshydti

dghokshyat

godhd

(ghukshishtd)

guhishydti

dguhishyat

guhitd

guhishishtd

dguhit

srij

sraj

srakshydti

dsrakshyat

srashtd

dsrdkshit

mi

md
nams

mdsydti

dmdsyat

mdtd

mdsishtd

dmdstt

nas

nankshydti

dnahkshyat

namshtd

srams srams

sramsishydte

dsramsishyata

sramsitd

sramsishishtd

dsramsishta

bandh
II.

bandh
Base

bhantsydti

dbhantsyat

banddhd

dbhdntsfa

Root.

Part.Wte,

Ger.RTtoa,
without^*,

Passive.

Ben. Par. Sec.Aor. First AorJV.

not strengthened, without ^i.

and
mrijydte

II.

Atm.

mrij

mrij

mrishtdh

mrishtvd

mrijydt

guh

guh

gudhdh

gudhvd

guhydte
^f5*nr

guhydt

dghukshat

^^if^
srijydt

snj

srishtdh

srishtvd
f*ir^i

srijydte
*i!*i^

fa
mi

ft
mitdh
\

*nmr
meydt
\

mitvd

miydte

was

nashtdh

nashtvd

nasydte

nasydt

dnasat

srams

sras

srastdh

srastva

srasydte

srasydt

dsrasat

bandh
I

badh
4, 89.
4, 24.

baddhdh
2 6

baddhvd
i,

badhydte
3

badhydt
i,

Pan. vi. Pan. vi.

Pan. vi.

38.

Pan. vi.

50.

4 Pan.

vn.

i,

60.

But with ^i,

128.
8

Hlf'Sfll mdrjitvd, not

Hf^r^T marjitvd.
1. 2.

7
10

As to the long
Roots which
or

3iM, see

Or 'jf^r^T guhitvd,

337,

w^srams

may thus drop their nasal, are written in the Dhatupatha with their nasal, while others which retain their nasal throughout, are written without the

but with an indicatory i; ^f^ nad, &c. (Pan. vi. 4, 24 ; vn. i, 58). Two verbs thus ^ marked by ^ i, c3fH lag and fif^ kap, may, however, drop their nasal, the general rule notwithstanding, if used in certain meanings, f^^fTTT vilagitam, burnt ; f^cfrfiTfT vikapitam,
nasal,

deformed (Pan.vi.4, 24, vart. 1,2). vrih, ^fftvrimhati, drops its nasal before terminations beginning with a vowel, but not before the intermediate ^ij ^"t^ffT varhayati, but sjfsg d'T

^f

vrimhitd.
if it

T^raw/, to tinge, may drop its nasal, even in the causative (i.e. before a vowel), means to sport; TJrfirfff rajayati (Pan.vi. 4, 24, vart. 3, 4). The same root, like some others,
its

drops

nasal before sdrvadhdtuka affixes

T^fff

rajati,

means to worship, must retain its nasal (Pan.

2 > 53)
II
:

vi. 4, 30)

if &c. (Pan. vi. 4, 26). ^^(anch, it and take the intermediate ^ i (Pan. vn.

^N^ff* anchitah, worshipped ; otherwise ^T3u aktah or ^f^lfj anchitah, bent.

Or

-f 347.
Note

AORIST.

179

The verbs beginning with

ku( (Dhatupatha 28, 73-108) do not strengthen

their base, except before terminations

which are marked by *^fl or

^n; fT hif,
I.

to be
2, i).
i.

bent, Put.

^fcmfd
tfrntt,

kujishydti, Per. Fut.

$fzdl

kutitd, First

Aor. *^f\J(dlcuttt (Pan.

Per. Fut. Alftlfll

finery,
3 a),

to fear, never takes

Guna

before intermediate
;

w>W(Pan.

^H
i.

to cover,

may do so optionally

or ^Nijfqni urnuvitd

w5fqni

vrnavitd

(Pan.

2, 3).

CHAPTER
AORIST.
J 346.

XIII.

We

can distinguish in Sanskrit, as in Greek, between two kinds of

Aorists, one formed by means of a sibilant inserted between root and termithis we call the First, another, formed by adding the terminations nation,
to the base, this

we

call the

Second Aorist.

Both Aorists take the Augment, which always has the Udatta, and, with some modifications, the terminations of the Imperfect. The First Aorist is formed in four different ways. J 347.
Terminations of the First Aorist.
1.

First

Form.
ATMANEPADA.

PARASMAIPADA.

^^ isham
$ltft

^^ ishva

^QR ishma
^Tiishta

j^fa

ishi

^^H? ishvahi

^**if^ ishmahi

ishtam

^T^ishthdh

^mu

ishdthdm ^$4 or

idhvam or idhvam

^#
In this

^^ishtdm ^lishuh
first set

^S

ishta

^'mni ishdtdm

^TT ishata

of terminations the intermediate ^ i stands as part of the terminations, because all the verbs that take this form are verbs liable to
i.

take the intermediate ^

differ, in fact,

The

first

and second forms of the First Aorist

which
take,

by

this only, that the former is peculiar to verbs

i.

the latter to verbs which reject intermediate ^

2.

(See $ 332, 4, note.)

PARASMAIPADA.

^ sam

^ sva
s/m

re
^R sma
If

Second Form.

ATMANEPADA.
ft? si

^f\| svahi
(

Wf^ smahi

\ or
sit
-(

ta

\or
-{

^ITt

thdh

^rsffl

[or HT

^:
tarn

stth

^IHI satam

THT sata

[oriT^a

a 2

180
3.

AOKIST.

348-

Third Form.

There are some verbs which add

^s

to

the

end of the root before

taking the terminations of the Aorist, and which after this ^ s, employ the usual terminations with ^ i, viz. ^4 isham, &c. They are conjugated in the

Parasmaipada only.
PARASMAIPADA.
s-i-sham
s-ih (for (for

ftt*i s-ishva
sish(a)h)
fftf?

ftro s-ishma

ffSm

s-ishtam

fav s-ishta
ftnf: s-ishuh

f^^^sish(a)t)

faST s-ishtdm

4.

Fourth Form.
Lastly, there are

ri, by ^ *, mediate ^ i (ksa). PARASMAIPADA.

T u,

some few verbs, ending in ^ s, f^sh, ^ h, preceded which take the following terminations, without an interATMANEPADA.
sama

tTTq sava

*ITH

sdvahi
4

T^T si
*

or
r:

TT^ vahi
.

~_ ^fTHT^ samahi
f 4
[

sah

_ ^Trf

sa/am

sathdh
f hah

*TrT

sata

4
[

^TT^n
or Ml J

5^aw
sdtdm

^?4 sadhvam
or *^

dhvam

Wilsat

^tftsatdm

'ttsan

4 [

or

W ta

^TTirf

^K santa

Special Rules for the First

$ 348.

Form of the

First Aorist.
c3 /w, to cut,

For

final vowel,
2, i).

Vriddhi

in

Parasmaipada*.

dldvisham (Pan. vn.

For

final vowel,

Guna

in

Atmanepada.

dlavishi. <^ hi, ^r??f^f^

For medial or

initial
;

vowel,

Guna

(if

possible) both in
;

Par.

and Atm.

^The
*

budh, to

know
^r a,

Par. ^Vf\ni dbodhisham

Atm.

^TTtfafa dbodhishi.

by a single final consonant, may or may not take Vriddhi in Par. if the verb begins with a consonant f. F^T kan, to sound, ^ToFTfollowed

vowel

dkdnisham or
Except f^f
2, 5).
svi,

^rsfiftj^

dkanisham (Pan. vn.

a, 7)

Atm.

^rcfiftufa

dkanishi.

(Pan. vn.

to swell, to wake, ^TT' i.1 f^ ojdgarit ^Tni*lTf^ asvayit; vTFIjdgri, not take Vriddhi; Wi "^l^wrwM, to cover, may or may ^iTi^ aurnuvit, or

^TRV^J^aurndvit, or ^rr^qRT^aMrwat?^ (Pan. vii. 2, 6). t Roots ending in ^c^aZ or ^:ar always take Vriddhi
to burn, ^'*n<ft?(djvdKt (Pan. vii. 2, 2).

in the

Likewise

^vad,

to speak,

Parasmaipada and

^^jval
to

'Gfi^vraj,

go

Roots ending in A, ^ ^,^y, the roots T5prjA;sA<m, to hurt, ^R^&as, to breathe, and verbs of the Chur class, roots with technical TJe, do not take Vriddhi (Pan. vii. 2, 5).
(Pan. vii.
2, 3).

^f^grah,
throw,

to take, ^lf^J[^dgrahit j
1

^^ifl ?^ dvyayitj
stt ;
,

fQ^syam, to sound, TSR&*ftf{dsyamft; '&F{vyay, to kshan, to hurt, ^"SHUI ?^ dkshantij "^^ svfls, to breathe, "3iT^Mway, to minish, ^n*flf('f(jiunay(t ; TJl^rag, to suspect, *Z(T?f\J(aragtt.
1

"^TJT

to shine,

^ft vet-

to desire, and

^fr^T daridrd, to be poor, drop

their final

vowels, according to the rules on intermediate

; ^ft.^[T daridrd,

-$

35<5-

AORIST.

181
"

349.

No Guna takes
^y,
^y.
if

place in desiderative bases,

"^budh;

Desid.

Aor. ^TJ^tfvfrnt dbubodhishisham.

Intensives in
If the intensive

drop their
final

final

preceded by a consonant, must, certain denominatives in *Jy may, is preceded by a vowel, is left between the

^y

^y

vowel and the intermediate ^t.

to cut; Int. base 4&iv{bebhidy ; Aor. fal^bhid,

Atm.

TO'^faf^ftT dbebhidishi.
bhuyishi.

*^bhd, to be; Int. base

;

"^j^bobhuy

Aor. Atm.

^^jftrfa dbo-

Denom.

base lit*^namasy, to worship

Aor. VSprf^CR dnamasy-isham or <8MHfiHM

dnamas-isham.

Special Rules for the Second

350. Vriddhi in Parasmaipada.

Form of

the First Aorist.

fyi

f^^kship, ^Brips dkshaipsam;

&,

^fhi dsaisham (Pan. vn.

2, i)
if

Guna
Pan.
i.

in
2,

Atmanepada,

v*(pach, *rmfa(dpdkshU (Pan. vn. 2, the verb ends in ^, ^ z, 7, "31 u (not in

;

3).

^
;

rt,

12);

otherwise no change of vowel,

f^r si,

^r^tfo dseshi

but
2r.

fq^kship,

^rftff^r dkshipsi;

rz,

^i^rfa

dkrishi.

Final "^r^ becomes f^

J 351. Terminations beginning with ^ET st or ^sth base ends in a short vowel or in a consonant, except nasals.
^ri|Tf

drop their

^*

if

the

Ex.

2. p.

dual

dkshaip-tam, 3. p. dual ^T%>rf dkshaip-tdm y

2. p.

plur. ^fr%R dkshaip-ta, of

f^^kship; 2. p. sing. Atm. H<$VJT: dkrithdh, But from JRT^ mdnyate, *HHW dmamsta.
352.
pity,
*f

3. p. sing,

^fudkritayof ifkri, Atm.

The

roots FTT

/^^, to stand, ^rc?a, to give, VT

dhd to
y

place, ^rfe, to
i

dhe, to feed,

do, to cut, change their final vowels into ^

i. 2,

before the
;

terminations of the
ff

Atmanepada (Pan.

17).

WT sthd,

3 \\ fal d updsthi-ta
\

updsthi-shdtdm.

In the Parasmaipada they take the Second Aorist.

($

368.)
353-

The

roots iftmi (mindti), to hurt, fa mi (minoti), to throw, and

di,

Atm., to

decay, instead of taking Guna, change their final vowels into ^TTa in the
cl^fr /*,

to stick, does so optionally (Pan. vi.

i,

50-51)*.
/,

Atmanepada; and Thus from *ft mi and fa mi, w*iiw

<

amdsta; from

di,

'W^i^cf addstaj

from c5^

^iw

aldsta or

^^H?
i.

aleshta.

In the

Parasmaipada these verbs take the Third Form.

354 "%*{han, to
kill,

drops

its

nasal in the

Atmanepada (Pan.

2,

14);

V^H

ah at a,

ahasdtdm, &c.
355- 'T^^ffm, to go, drops its nasal in the Atmanepada optionally (Pan. i. 2, 13); JT^cT or agamsta. The same rule applies to the benedictive Atmanepada ;

stshta or ^t^fh? gamstshta.

35^'

y am drops

its

nasal,

necessarily or
i.

optionally,

according to

its

various

meanings;

3<;<<n udayata,
I.

he divulged (Pan.
2, 16).

2,

15);

<JMi^n vpdyata, he espoused, OP

updyamsta (Pan.

* Prof. Weber (Kuhn's Beitrage, vol. vi. p. 102) blames Dr. Kellner for having admitted
^1*1 1 (Vi M*T

amdsisham and similar forms, and denies that these forms are authorised by
i,

Panini.
50.

Dr. Kellner, however, was right, as will be seen from the commentary to Pan. vi. The substitution of ^TT d takes place wherever there would otherwise have

excepting in Sit forms.

182

AOEIST.

357First Aorist.
^TT d,

Special Rules for the Third

f 357.

Form of the

Most

verbs taking this

form of the Aorist end in

their substitute.

or in

diphthongs which

take

as

This

^rr

d remains

unchanged.
358.

In the Atmanepada these verbs take the Second Form.

*ft

The verbs

mi, to hurt,

fa mi, to throw, and

^SRT a.

c^t

li,

to stick, in taking this form,

I

change likewise their final vowels into

tf

Ex. ^faifViM amdsisham,

threw, and

hurt

aldsisham (or ^Trt 1! alaisham).

353.
;

359. Three roots ending in

Hm

take this form

TF^yam,

to hold, to rejoice, T^rawi,

nam, to bend, Aor. ^Hlftre ayamsisham, &c. (Pan. vn.

2, 73.)

Special Rules for the Fourth

$ 360.
see, cf.

Form of the
must end

First Aorist.
in SI ^ (as to to ^j(dri$9
^T,

The

roots which take this form

i,

Pan. in.

47), T{sh, 1(s,

h,

preceded by any vowel but

332,

^n

a.

They must be verbs which

(Pan. in.
361.
i,

45.)
root

reject the intermediate ^ z; Their radical vowel remains unchanged.

1720;

The

^{f^renT aslikshat.
(

takes this form only if it means to embrace (Pan. in. i, 46) ; fig^sUsh Other verbs, such as "tjftpush and sush, are specially excepted.
Tjre

366.)

362.

The

roots

Z^duh,

to milk, f^TeftA, to anoint,

fe^ lih,

to lick, to hide TR^guh,

(Pan. vn.

3, 73),

may

take in the Atmanepada

^rf^ vahi instead of

1RI thdh instead of *T*n* sathdh.

If

ta

^Trf sata.

?4 dhvam
of the
first aorist

tu^f^

sdvahi.

TOI sadhvam.

They thus approach

Ex. gf] duhj

to the Second

Form

in most, but not in all persons.

2. p. sing.

3. p. sing.
1. p.

Atm. ^g'^Tt adugdhdh or ^VTSpITt adhukshathdh. Atm. ^^V adugdha or 'STV'^fT adhukshata.
^Ig3ffl

dual Atm.

aduhvahi or

^V^T^f^ adhukshdvahi.
vi^isjSel

2. p. plur.

Atm. ^npl! adhugdhvam or

adhukshadhvam.

FIRST AORIST.
First Form,
with intermediate
a.
3J
i-

Verbs ending in a vowel; c lu, to cut. Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, Guna in Atmanepada.

PARASMAIPADA.

1.

^T?5Tf^

dldv-isham

^co

fq

*t

dldv-ishva

^rcolPei'^T

dldv-ishma

2.

^Tc5T^J dldv-ih

^?rtlf^^ dldv-ishtam

^Ic^Tf^F dldvi-shta
^TrtlPq^t dldvi-shuh

3. ^Ic^T^fT didv-it

^051^81

dldv-ishtam

ATMANEPADA.
1. ^Tc4'Plfll

dlav-ishi
dlav-islithdh

^TcoTqwif^ dlav-ishvahi
1

^?<5ft^Tf^ dlav-ishmahi
^?c5T%l^ dlav-idhvam or

2.

^r5f?lTt

^Tc^ri

m qT dlav-ishdthdm
i

^ -dhvam

3.

^rafel? dlav-ishta

^r^f^^TUT dlav-ishdtdm

^cofqmi

dlav-ishata

-$ 362.
b.

AORIST.

183

Verbs ending in consonants; wvbudh, to know. Guna in Parasmaipada and Atmanepada.

PARASMAIPADA.
^WTttV1^ abodh-ishoa
WqlP*! 1!? abodh-ishma

1. vi anPt<M

<

abodh-isham

2. ^Bnfftfh

abodh-ih

W^tfVn? abodh-ishtam
^H<riP*4i abodh-ishtdm

W^fViB

abodh-ishta

3.

W^hrh^a&orfA-f/

^TTtfv^: abodh-ishu/i

ATMANEPADA.
1
.

^BpfVfvftf abodh-ishi

vi^P^t^p^ abodh-ishvahi
^T^tfVmxji abodh-ishdthdm
^ToTlfMmrff abodh-ishdtdm

^T^ftfv^Rf^ abodh-ishmahi
TO^ffVl**J

2.

^f\PMiJ
^I^tfw

abodh-ishthdh

abodh-idhvam

3.

abodh-ishta

VH^PyMrf abodh-ishata

Second Form,
without intermediate
a.

^ i.
Ar^z/?,

Verbs ending in consonants

f^^

to throw.

Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, no change in Atmanepada.

PARASMAIPADA.
1
.

vjtsj'^i

akshaip-sam
akshaip-sih

fB|MS akshaip-sva
^T^fff akshaip-tam
(

s^K|^3k akshaip-sma

2.

vj^tdj

351)

^T!pT akshaip-ta

3.

v^^tilf^ akshaip-sit

^I^Trt akshaip-tdm

^\^^l

akshaip-suh

ATMANEPADA.
1.

^TTTSfftl akship-si

^TT^T^f^

akship-svahi

"iPe$M3Hn akship-smahi

2. vfPBj^xflJ

akship-thdh

^rft^Tnrt akship-sdthdm
^P^tiifli akship-sdtdm

^T^Pf

akshib-dhvam

3. isfPsiN

akship-ta

^TPnjtirt akship-sata

b.

Verbs ending in vowels

(^,

^ z,

^r,

^ ^)

tft wi,

to lead.

Vriddhi in Parasmaipada,

Guna

in

Atmanepada.

PARASMAIPADA.
1
.

^Tn *f anaisham
vfiHiJ anaishih

^In^
^fn

anaishva

"ci^**!

anaishma
anaishta

2.

anaishtam

^Tn?

3. ^sH'fli^anaisAft

^T%1T anaishtdm

*I^Jt anaishuh

ATMANEPADA.
1
.

"SfrPH aneshi

vffiw^n^ aneshvahi

^ti^P^

aneshmahi

2.

^MiBit aneshthdh

vt'imMi aneshdthdm
vifiUmt aneshdtdm
c.

)H^

anedhvam
aneshata

3.

^fn

aneshta

^HMif
to do. ^f Arz,

Verbs ending

in

^ n;

Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, no change in Atmanepada.

PARASMAIPADA.
i
.

xt'cRm akdrsham

--Scfciu^

akdrshva

rM=fl^ akdrshma

akdrshih

%M<*|5 akdrshtam

xM4l^ akdrshta

^nfinll akdrshtdm

184

AORIST.

362,

ATMANEPADA.
1.

'^ifa
^I^i

akrishi

'ST^i^f^r akrishvahi

vi

<y

fifc

akrishmahi

2.

V I?
rf

akrithdh

fepmfT akrishdthdm
^TOi^TUT akrishdtdm
d.

^^f" akridhvam
^TOi^ll akrishata

3. ^T^i

a&rzta

Verbs ending in
Atmanepada only j

^?r

a;

^r da, to give.
t.

^TT a

changed into ^

ATMANEPADA.
1.

^Hl^iM adishi

^TT^^f^

adishvahi

^?f^"^Tf^ adishmahi

2.

^ff^rn

adit hah

^rf^m^qi adishdthdm
^rf^^TrTf adishdtdm

^%& adidhvam
vif^qn adishata
*/r^j

3. ^rf^lT ac?^a

e.

Verbs ending in ^jr?/

to stretch.

Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, with intermediate ^i.

In Atmanepada the insertion of ^ i is optional. (See 337, II. 4. Pan. vn. 2, 42.) ^i is inserted, then Guna ( 348) and optionally lengthening of ^i. ( 341.)

If

If

^*

is

not inserted, then

^n changed to ^T2r.

350.)

PARASMAIPADA.

^eiWlW
First

astdrisham, &c., like First Form.

Form,

ATMANEPADA.
SINGULAR.

Second Form,
without
3[
i'

with ^ i.

or *nsi*3"n? astarishi or astarishi or ^RarfanJ astarishthdh or astarishthdh or vitclO? astarishta or astarishta

"wWliM

astirshi

vtwIeK

astirshthdh

^TOft% astirshta

DUAL.
1.

^wft^fifJ or ^^TT^^f^
^Kri'fXmvjj or

astarishvahi or astartshvahi

viWl ^"f^ asttrshvahi

2.

'^wOMfifi astarishdthdm

or astarishdthdm

^HWlSl^l astirshdthdm
^tfliHtclT astirshdtdm

3. ^i tsl

U.H nT or
i

^IwOmin

astarishdtdm or astarishdtdm

PLURAL.
1.

^SMHlX^n^ or -^wO^Hn^ astarishmahi or astarishmahi

^n^l^\k

astirshmahi

2 . ^T4df^c(

or ^HWtHf

^ astaridhvam -dhvam or astaridhvam -dhvam "iWic astirdhvam

vjtflUn astirshata

3. ^JMriPlXri or ^r^cTirt^Tf astarishata or astarishata

f. Verbs

with penultimate

ri

n/, to let off.

Peculiar Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, no change in Atmanepada.

PARASMAIPADA.
asrdksham
\l

^^TSS

asrdkshva

^t*H5^ asrdkshma

asrdkshih

^TFT? asrdshtam
^TWrKf asrdshtam

^H5m

asrdshta

3.

'STOTSffa^asra&s^

^T^rr^t asrdkshuh

ATMANEPADA.
1.

^njfrSf

asnJfo^z

''H^iyr^
^^VijIVjl

asrikshvahi

^^*if^

asrikshmahi

2. ^T^fFTJ

asrishthdh

asrikshdthdm
asrikshdtdm

vujsc asriddhvam

asrishta

^W^ITft

^ti|n

asrikshata

A01MST.

185
to burn.

g.

Verbs ending in rfaA, PARASMAIPADA.

adhdkshva

^i4if adhdksham
^nrnsft: udhdkshth

adhdkshma
addydha
:

2.

addydham addydhdm

3-

udhdkshuh

ATM AN Ei> AD A.
1.

viMf| adhakshi

adhakshvahi

adhakshmahi

2.

^RpVTJ adagdhdh

adhakshdthdm
adhakshdtdm
*Mvr.fii

adhagdhvam
adhakshata

3.

^H^V adagdha

FIRST AORIST.
2%irrf Form. PARASMAIPADA ONLY.

in yd, to go.
aydsisham
aydsishva

aydsishma
aydsishta

aydsishtam
aydsisfy&m

aydsishuh

tenant,
<

to bend.

wijf anamsishat*
anamsih
anamsit
TlT

anamsishva

anamsishma
anamsishta
J

2. virjtil:

anamsishtam
anamsishtdm

3. "f T*i

anamsishuh

FIRST AORIST.
Fourth Form.
s,

to show.

PARASMAIPADA.
adiksham
adikshah
adikshdva

adikshdma
adikshata

adikshatam
adikshatam

v*f^K!^ adikshan

TMANEPADA.
adikshi
;

adikshdvahi

adikshdmahi

adikshathdh

adikshdthdm
adikshdtdm

adikshadhvam
adikshanta

adikshata

irff

^rwA,

to hide.

PARASMAIPADA.
1.

MM>f aghuksham
vi^|J aghukshah

aghukshdva

aghukshdma
aghukshata
VH^V5|^ aghukshan

2.

aghukshatam
aghukshatdm

3.

Bb

186

AORIST.

$363-

ATMANEPADA.
I.

aghukshi

aghukshdoaU or
^H

aguhvahi
I

aghukshdmahi
or
*Jf

2. 41

^ H|'V| [laghukshathdh or^PJcFK agudhdh

aghukshata or

gHj

VJ

aghukshdthdm
aghukshdtdm

*icr

3. ^nrefcf

^^ agudha

vi^im

aghukshanta

It
(I

may
I-

also follow the First

Form, ^nrf^ agdhisham and

aguhishi.

337 >

!)
to smear. fc^; /A,

PARASMAIPADA.
aliksham
j

^?fc5^T^ alikshdva
^rfoJ^iT alikshatam
^rfc^^rrf alikshatam

alikshdma
alikshata

aliksJiah

^f&^l^alikshat

alikshan

ATMANEPADA.
i.

alikshi

^av^m^ alikshdvahi or vtrcodr^ alihvahi

aUdhdh ^&*i\**\ alikshdthdm
alidha
or

alikshdmahi
2

2.

^rfc4H|'m* alikshathdh or

3. "i PC* ej

n alikshata or

w fra

Sj

if i

alikshatam

alikshanta

to milk.

PARASMAIPADA.
adhuksham, &c.

ATMANEPADA.
I.

adhukshi

f^ adhukshdvahi or ^SI'f^ aduhvahi

f^'

adhukshdmahi
or

2.

WJ^nt adhukshathdh or

^Tt adugdhdh

3. ^f^fcT adhukshata or

^87V adugdha
?

adhukshdtdm
c?^, to anoint.

adhukshanta

PARASMAIPADA.
adhiksham, &c.

ATMANEPADA.
.

^rftff^ adhikshi
or

or

adhikshdmahi
or ^rfarSEJ
6

adhiksMthdm

or

adMkshdtdm

adhikshanta

SECOND AORIST.
Verbs adopting
this

J 3^3-

form take the augment, and

of the imperfect
to

attach

the

terminations (First
in ^r
,

Division)

a verbal base

ending

like those of the

Tud

form.
2
4
6

3
5 7

aghukshadhvam or aghudhvam. adhukshadhvam or adhugdhvam.

adhikshathdh or adigdhdh.

alikshadhvam or alidhvam.

adhiksMvahi or adihvahi.
adhikshadhvam or adhigdhvam.

adhikshata or adigdha.

-J

3*7sich, to sprinkle.

AOKIST.

1*7

Pres.

nnchdmi ; Impf. wftK asincham.

asichdva
asichat am

PARASMAIPADA.
asicham
asichah
asichat

agichdma
nail-lint n

asichatdm

asichan

ATMANEPADA.
asichdvahi
:

anchdmahi

asichat hdh

asichethdm
asichetdm

asichadhvam
asichanta

asichata

ve, to call.

Pres. ^rqrfH

hvaydmi ; Impf. ^T^TT ahvayam ; General base PARASMAIPADA.

ahvdva
aJivatam

ahvam
2. >Hd^i

ahvdma
ahvata

ahvah

3.

ahvatdm

ATMANEPADA.
ahvdvahi
2.
t

iihrumnhi

ahvathdh
vi Q^
fii

ahvethdm

ahvadhvam
ahvanta

alivata

ahvetdm

364. Roots ending in

^rr ^,

e,

i,

drop these vowels, and substitute

"??a^

a base ending in

^ Ave

substitutes 3^ Ava, Aor.

ahvam ;

fv& 6vi

substitutes ig M;O, Aor.

^nS asvam.

to see, take Guna ^^ic?m, to go, in short ^? a:

Roots ending in H, and the root (Pan. vn. 4, 16), and then form a base ending
^5T drik t to
:

^sn',

^STTO^asarfltf;

see,

^^T^a?ar^a/.

^365. Roots with penultimate nasal, drop it T3fi<[ skand, to step,^ragi<* askadam. forms are, ^^'M avocham, I spoke, from ^^ vach (according J 366. Irregular
to

Bopp a

apaptam,
VHIMri

I flew,

contracted reduplicated aorist, f 370, for ^^ci^ avavacham) ; ^rni from (possibly a contracted reduplicated aorist for
;

apapatam)

itf^pat ^3R^f anesam, I perished, Kas'.

;

on Pan. vi.

4,

120 (possibly

for xMHH^r

anana&am)

^5?%^ a&isham,

ordered, from

^n^ ^*; WTO dstham,

I threw, from

^s.

(Pan.vii. 4, 17.)

367. Roots which take this form are,

^^os, to throw (^rTO dstham), "Q^vach, to (^af akhyam), if the agent is implied.

speak

(^I^T avocham),
i,

WT Myd,

to speak

(Pan. in.

52.)

fe^Zip, to paint, "ftr^sicfc, to sprinkle, d Jive, to call (irregularly ^2^ ahvam), in Par., and optionally in Atm. (Pan. in. i, 53, 54). Atm. -wfcaHn alipata Par.^feHi^aftpaf,
or vifcoH alipta.

The verbs

classed as

'dyutddi,

"^f^pushddi, beginning with "$\push (Dh. P. 26, 73-136), ^mfV beginning with ^^rfyi/^ (Dh. P. 18), and those marked by a technical "^ /t,
i,

in the

Parasmaipada. (Pan. in.

55.)

B b 2

188
The verbs

AORIST.

368ri,

^ sri, to

go, ^TP^sas, to order,

and ^J

to

go (^nt

tfram), in Par.

and Atm.

(Pan. m.

1,56.)

Optionally, verbs technically

i,

marked by ^ir, but

or ^5W wl
t^
abTiaitsit.

in the

Parasmaipada only (Pan. in.

57).

^fatC^abhidat
fail, ^ScPT

Optionally, *[ jri, to

stambh, to stiffen C^^f^l^astabhat or to go (-Wyi^amruchat or ^rafNh^amrocMtf), jr^mluch,to go, ^J^mrMcA, or to steal, r^^gluch, to steal, *l^$rZttnc^, to go (^Pcf^ agluchat DU* in the Parasmaipada only. f^[ &z, to grow (irregularly ^HST?^ agluncUi),

^w^l^

&)

(Pan.

m.

i,

58.)
d, *J e, ^STt o,

368. There are a few verbs, ending in ^TT

which take

this

form of the

second aorist in the Parasmaipada; also ^bhu, final vowel, except before the Tt uh of the 3rd pers.
rejected.

to be.

They

retain throughout the long

plur., before

which the

final ^?T

is

In the Atmanepada these verbs in ^TT

^TT

d take the Second Form of the

first aorist,

and change

d to

3[

^T da, to

give.

Pres.

^Tf daddmi;
^r^T"^ arfawa
iH^Irt

Impf.

^^

adaddm.

PARASMAIPADA.
1.

^njf arfaw
^T^Tt
arfa/f

^TT

addma

2.

addtam
addtam

3.

^R(Tf^a^

^si^ini

^6^w,
1.

to be.

Pres.

^mPH

bhavdmij Impf.

Wft abhavam.

PABASMAIPADA.

^S^ abhuvam*
5MA
^*j{abhut
this

^*$$ abhuva
^*J? abhutam
^T^WT abhutam
form
;

2. ^T^r:

^^ abhuma ^^ abhuta
^^^abhuvan

3.

Verbs which take

are,
>IT c?A, to

IT #a,

to

go ; ^T

c?, to give

place

*U pa, to drink ;
4, 77.)

WT sthd,
;

to stand

c?e,

to guard;

do, to cut; *j^bhu, to be.

;

(Pan. n.
;

Optionally, TIT #

W, to smell V e?Ae, to
(Pan. n.
4, 78.)

drink

^ft so, to

sharpen

"sft

chho, to cut ;

^fft

50,

to destroy.

369.
pers. sing.

The nine
A

roots of the

Atm.

in ^IT: thdh

Tan class ending in <fT n or Tff n may form the 2nd and 3rd \ and Uta, before which the final nasal is rejected. If^tan, to
*

stretch;

Aor. vjnPrig atanishta or

79).

^TiTlf

atata;

^IirfVn?TJ atanishthdh or ^-Nri^i: atathdh

(Pan.

ii. 4,

These forms might be considered as irregular Atmanepada forms of the

the
first aorist II,

second

aorist, or of

with loss of

initial

^s.

Second or Reduplicated Form of the Second Aorist.

370.
roots,

the

few primitive verbs, and the very numerous class of the Chur denominatives and causatives in ^ro ay, reduplicate their

base in the second aorist, taking the augment as before, and the usual
terminations of the imperfect.
* Irregular in the ist pers. sing., dual, and plur., and in the 3rd pers. plur.

-$374371.

AORIST.

189

The

primitive verbs which take this form are,

fof /ri, to go, "Jrfru, to run,

^ sru, to flow, ^^kam

^ dhe,

to love (Pa?,

ill. I,

48),

if

expressing

the agent.
Optionally,

Ex. ^H f^i fa M r^ asitriyat.

wt, to grow,
to suck (Pan. in.
i,

fa

49), if expressing

the agent.

Ex. Wpfltadadhat,

364, (or \t^4\<^adhdt or ^MMl1i^a<M<sft.)

is

Their reduplicative syllable, as far as consonants are concerned,

reduplicated perfect.
tj

formed

like that of the

he went.

^"^

i^

adudruvat, he ran.

-wtj^qi^flstm-Hra/,

he flowed.

"W f^| fvj JJ he f, he loved. ^V^arfarfAa^, he sucked. |^ asiiviyat, grew; also Sec. Aor. vimi^fl&af and First Aor. "Wll^afoaytt (Pan. in. i, 49). 2^ hve, to call, forms its Aor. Caus. W*\W{ajuhavat (Pan. vi. i, 32).

$ 372.

The verbs
to

in

reduce their

Guna and Vriddhi vowels

n{ay drop ^r^ay, and (with certain exceptions*) to the simple base vowels wr a to ^ a
:

*eto^i; ^ho
Thus
JTlr^frt

*u;

^,^ar,to^H;
if^

mddayati would become

bhedayati

to ^ri. (Pan. vn.4, 7.) $^fr mad, (Aor. nftiT^ amimadam.)

1

fw^ bhid, (Aor. vtffa^ abtbhidam.)

ij^ mud,

modayati

(Aor. ^njjj^

amumudam.)

373. In the exceptional roots, which do not admit this shortening process,

^T d,

ty,

^ e, ^ ai 'md,'?fto,^au
t

are represented in the reduplicative syllable by

mdlayati, ^rmrft
cftcFTrfTT

amamdlam.

zte&folikayati,

^ifc<f;cF

atilikam.

lokayati, ^?$&\3; alu/okam.

In the vast majority of roots, however, the shortening takes place, thus Here the tendency is to make the leaving bases with short ^i a, ^ i y ^u ^ri. Hence all roots in with the augment, either w w or w w reduplicated base,
J 374.
} .

which the shortened vowel

is

not long by position, lengthen the vowel of the

reduplicative syllable (amdmudai).

Those

in

which the vowel

is

long by

position, leave the vowel of the reduplicative syllable short (ararakshat).

Where,

as in roots beginning with double consonants, the vowel of the

is

reduplicative syllable

necessarily long

by

position,

it is

not changed into the

* These exceptional verbs are (Pan. vn. 4, 2, 3),

Certain denominatives
:

From

Hlc4l mala, a garland,

is

formed the denominative

*iioiMrrt

mdlayati, Red. Aor. ^*\*{\<A^amamdlat

j "$f\1{6ds,

Caus. ^utf^fn sdsayati, he punishes,

Red. Aor.

<

31 31

t[^aa3dsat.

Those with technical ^JnW^bddh, to hurt; Caus. "^PHlfTT bddhayati; Aor. SH^HIVTi^
ababddhat.
to lighten, "SfNyfr, to ^dX^bhrdj, to shine, VX^bhds, to shine, *H^bhdsh, to speak, tf*{dip, Ex. live, *ftc^ mil, to meet, tfrSpid, to vex, shorten their vowel optionally. *ff*{bhrdj;

<\ababhrdjat or ^M futiifi^abibhrajat ( 374). t %F^t?es^fy, to surround, cheshtay, to move, take either

i

'SRfc i

^^

"

or

^a

in the

reduplicative syllable

or iH f<4^ 8 ''Z&R'tn^avaveshtat ^aviveshfat.

to lighten, inn^rfyo/ay,

takes

^t; ^?f^f

n iadidyutat.

190

AORIST.

375In roots beginning and ending in

long vowel (achuchyutat , not achuchyutat).

two

consonants, this metrical

rhythm

is

necessarily broken (achaskandat).

375. In the roots which do not

^T a,

resist the

shortening process,

^ i, ^ u
^i,
"3

^J ri are represented in the reduplicative syllable

T(i
;

by

u,

and

all

lengthened, where necessary.

Second or Reduplicated Form of the Second Aorist.

I.

w
;

pack, to cook, M
id, to cut,
,

-M fri

pdchdyati

^Tj^bheddyati;
;

to rejoice, jft^rfff moddyati

rit 9 to exist,
rij,

^t^lfw vartdyati
JJTihrfir

to cleanse,

mdrjdyati ;

^*fl*J1 H

dmimrijat.

rit,

to praise, -sftwqfn kirtdyati ; ^r^\^lT?(dcMkritat^.

nants, because the

The lengthening becomes superfluous before roots beginning with two consotwo consonants make the short vowel heavy (guru].
iq^
tyaj, to leave,

TmRflT tydjdyati

^TT^ bhrdj, to shine, yi'H^fri bhrdjdyati

ip,
,

to throw, "^TTTfw Jcshepdyati

to
fall, ^ftTT^fTT

^Tp^ PH| M

i^ dchikshipat.

chyotdyati
;

svri, to

sound,

^ Tlinfrf svdrdyati

to protect, iHinfrf rakshdyati;

;

bhiksh, to beg, fvnsprfir bhikshdyati

376. If the root begins

and ends with double consonants, this rhythmical law

is

broken.
,

to ask, H-**i Pit prachchhdyatij

<tai^<4fii

^RWSSj^dpaprachchhat.
optionally take

skand, to step,

skanddyati; *x ^ *5h^ dchaskandat.

or

377. Roots with radical

^ri

^n,

followed by a consonant,

may

the

w
*

or

ww

forms.

'TO^ gandy and

take cFTO^ kathdy

or ^T a

optionally;

^*(\*\1&1{djiganat

or

nW?^ djaganat.
t The following verbs take
*3f

a instead of

^i

or

\i

in the reduplicative syllable of the

aorist in the causative

^R

smri,

mrad, ^c[ stri, TT^prath, Caus. ^WT<*( fff smdrdyoti j Aor. fQsmri;
<?

dri, 13T. tvar,

The same verbs which,

^,
"35

as will

be shown hereafter
"3"w,

u,) in the desiderative

by

take

T
if

instead of

474), reduplicate ^l^av, (the Guna of ^* in the reduplicated aorist:

"^nuj Caus. ^\\^^tindvdyatij Des^^^v^fiKnundvayishatij

A or. of Caus.^R ^C

J Radical ^R a

is

reduplicated

by ^T a

the root ends in a double consonant.

-J 380.

AOKIST.

191
^iqqflf^aoacar/af.
j

^W vrit, to be, tli* vartdyati; W<jn i^ TOmry, to cleanse, HlAnfrt indrjdyati; xi

"5SFH

dvivritat or

(Pan. vn. 4, 7.)

i1j

or ^i*ii 1 i^ dmimrijat

f^

dmamdrjat.

M/,

to praise,

4fc)ft^frt

kirtdyati; TI V) <y n i^ dchikritat or wfrnflfrl^ dchikirtat.

Roots beginning with a vowel have the same internal reduplication, which will be described hereafter in the desiderative bases.
J 378.

Thus ^r^as forms the Caus.

*n$fi{dsdy.

This after throwing off

ay,

and shortening the vowel, becomes w^a; this reduplicated, and lastly, with augment and termination, ^nfifllfr d$-i6-am.
In the same manner, 'WtfW archicham, vftfMir aubjijam, &c.
379. Are slightly irregular
:

({ 476.)

m /f,
WT

to drink, which forms its causal aorist as ^Ml*4i^ dpipyat (instead of

dptpayat}.
sthd, to

Pan. vii. 4,

4.
its

stand, which forms

causal aorist as

^rnfMi

dtishjhipat (instead of

TTT ghrd,

to smell, which forms its causal aorist as

^ djighripat

or

djighrapat.

REDUPLICATED AORIST.
PARASMAIPADA.
1

1.

iiI'5tM ds'israyam

asifraydva

asisraydma
uslsrayata

2.

vif^i^Mt a6israyah

asisrayatam
asisrayatam

3. vi f^i

^ ^ i^ atisrayat

asisrayan

ATMANEPADA.
asisraye
2.
I

f^ asisraydvahi
asisrayethdm
as'israyetdm

^ asisraydmahi
aisrayadhvam
asisrayanta

asisrayathdh

asisrayata

occasional rules have been given as to the 380. In the preceding or classes of verbs adopt. particular forms of the aorist which certain verbs

As

in Greek, so in Sanskrit, too, practice only

can effectually teach which

forms do actually occur of each verb; and the rules of grammarians, however minute and complicated, are not unfrequently contradicted by the
usage of Sanskrit authors.

is

However, the general rule is that verbs follow the first aorist, unless this specially prohibited, and that they take the first form of the first aorist,

unless they are barred

diate ^
i.

by general rules from the employment of the intermethus barred, take the second form of the first aorist. Verbs,
verbs which take the third form of the
JT

The number of
The

first aorist is

very

limited, three roots ending in

m, and roots ending

roots which

in

^T

d.
;

fourth form of the

first aorist is

likewise of very limited use

see
it

360.
are

As

to the second aorist, the

must or may

follow

192
indicated in

FUTURE.

381-

367, and so are the roots which take the reduplicated form of

the second aorist in $ 37 1 * Roots which follow the second aorist optionally, or in the Parasmaipada only, are allowed to be conjugated in the first aorist, subject to the general
rules.

CHAPTER
Future.

XIV.

FUTUKE, CONDITIONAL, PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE, AND BENEDICTIVE.

$381.
SINGULAR.
1.

Terminations.

PARASMAIPADA.
DUAL.
Sf^TRJ isJiydvah

PLURAL.
3pR*{\ ishydmah

i^*miH ishydmi

2.

3^4

(Vi

ishydsi

^3T*K ishydthah
S^tQTI!

^wfH ishydtha
^<4ffl ishydnti

3. ^Hjfrr ishydti

ishydtah

ATMANEPADA.
1.

^$tishy6

$*MI^

ishydvahe

^*MIH^ ishydmahe

2.

^W
^HT

ishydse
ishydte

^^fa ishyethe
sfSTcT ishytie

^f&l
^^TT

ishyddhve

3.

ishydnte

The

cases in

which the ^

have been stated in chapter XI, $ 33 1 seq.

of ^snfa ishydmi &c. must be or may be omitted For the cases in which *(i is

changed to ^

On

On the change of w sha and *r sa, see $ 100 seq. see $ 340. the strengthening of the radical vowel, see chapter XII, $ 344 seq. which the base undergoes before the terminations of $ 382. The changes
,

the strengthening tenses, the two futures, the conditional, and the benedictive

Atm.

are regulated

by one general principle,

that of giving weight to the base,

though

their application varies according to the peculiarities of certain verbs.

These See illustrations in $ 344 (bhavishydmi) and $ 345 (mdrkshydmi). must be learnt by practice, but a few general rules may here be peculiarities
repeated
1.
:

Final

e,

$"

ai 9

^\

are

changed to
'^ ri

^TT

d;

gai,

to

sing,

JllHJlfa

gdsyami, &c.
2.

Final

^ i and

\i,

^u ^u
)

and ^

ri,

take

Guna

f*tji, to

conquer,

^mifajeshydmi; *%bhu, HfcujifH bhavishydmi;

kri } gft"5|rftT karishyami;

dri, to tear,

^fXmifH darishydmi or ^^NnfH darishyami.

cF
9

There are the

(J 345, note.)

usual exceptions,
3.

ku, to sound,

^f^RTfT kuvishydmi.

Penultimate ^

i,

^u

^ri, prosodially short, take

;

Guna; ^ri becomes

%$ir;

budh, ^tfv^nfif bodhishydmi

-1 383-

FUTURE.
to

193

know,

with intermediate ^i.

PARASMAIPADA.
SINGULAR.
DUAL.
;

PLURAL.
ft

bodhishydmi
2.
Tl

bodhishydvah
bodhlshydthak
bodhishydtah

bodhishyamah

PM

M fa bodhishydsi

bodhithydtha
TtfVTBTfTT bodhishydnti

3.

^fViwifn bodhishydti

ATMANEPADA.
1
.

^ftftnifr

bodhishyt

4iq^ bodhishydvahe
bodhishy&he
bodhishydte

? bodhishydmahe
bodhishyddhve

2.

*ffrftnmi bodhishydse
*fl(V|*Mif

3.

bodhishydte

^Vftn*Tn bodhishydnte

i>

to go,

without intermediate

PARASMAIPADA.
1
.

<MI(*I eshydmi

*.

eshydvah
eshydthah

eshydmah

2.

<iU^
<HPn
JHs

eshydsi
eshydti
t

eshydtha
t*qfn eshydnti

3.

eshydtah

ATMANEPADA.
1.

eshytf

hydvahe
eshytthe

jmi^

eshydmaht

2.

iMti eshydse
i^Hii eshydte

eshyddhce
eshydnte

3.

lMn eshy&e
Conditional.

The future is changed into the conditional by the same process which a present of the Tud class is changed into an imperfect. by
J 383.

5^
SINGULAR.
i.

fa^A, to know,
.

with intermediate

PARASMAIPADA.
DUAL.
dbodhishydva

PLURAL.

^^(VoT dbodhishyam
abodhishyah
<

abodhishydma
abodhishyata

2.
iT

abodhishyatam

abodhishyat

^^f^ronrt abodhishyatdm

iVfvon^ abodhishyan

ATMANEPADA.
dbodhishye
2.
t

f^ abodhishydvahi

H$ dbodhishydmahi

abodhishyathdh

abodhishyethdm
abodhishyetdm
'SriT

abodhishyadhvam
abodhishyanta

abodhishyata

without intermediate

3[

PARASMAIPADA.
1.

BT atshyam

aishydva

aishydma
aishyata

2.

<*4i aishyah

aishyatam
aishyatdm

3.

^H^ aisJiyan

C C

PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE.

$384-

ATMANEPADA.
1
.

J*tq aishye

aishydvahi

aishydmahi

2.

jwfqit aishyathdh
aisJiyetdm

aishyadhvam
aishyanta

3. JrofiT aishyata

Periphrastic Future.

384.

The terminations

are,

PARASMAIPADA.
1
.

^niPw

itdsmi

^dl^t

itdsvah
itdsthah
\

2.

^ruP** itdsi

$HIW

itdstha

3. ^cTT ltd

^rillJ itdrau

itarah

ATMANEPADA.
i.

i^HI*

itdhe

^fli*3

itdsvahe

itdsmahe

3. 3[HT

^rtl'U itdrau

These terminations are clearly compounded of in td (base ^ tfn), the common There suffix for forming nomina agentis, and the auxiliary verb to be. ^rc^ as,
is,

however, with regard to

TTT

td,

no

distinction of

number and gender

^

in the

ist

and 2nd persons, and no

distinction of gender in the 3rd person.

i,

On
On

the retention or omission of intermediate ^ i or the strengthening of the radical vowel, see 382.
budh,
to

see J 331 seq.

*ry^

know,

with intermediate

^ i. PARASMAIPADA.
DUAL.

SINGULAR.
1.
<B

PLURAL.

M fV

ci i

Ujf bodhitasmi
*

2.

^tfwrf?? lodhitdsi
il

bodhitdsthah

nPviril^| bodhitd'stha

3.

TM ri

bodhitd

bodhitdrau

bodhitdrak

ATMANEPADA.
1.

WTTVffll^ bodhitdhe
Tl

bodhitdsvahe
bodhitdsdthe
bodhitd'dhve
bodhitd'rah

2. 3-

PM n

itf

bodhitd'se

WtfvnTO

bodhitd'rau

without intermediate ^

'.

PARASMAIPADA.
tdsmi
etdsvah
etd'sthah
I

etdsmah

<ni<J etdrau

etdrah

388.

BENEDICTIVE.

195

ATMANEPADA.
i
.

FrT!^ etdhe

JgrilH^ etdsvahe

*niHC
niC

etdsmahc

2. ^rtlfi etdse

<niim

etdsdthe

3711*4 etddhte
et draft

3. ^TTT e/d

:niCf etdrau

Benedictive.

analogy to the It differs from the optative by not admitting the full modified verbal optative. base, and, secondly, by the insertion of an "^s before the personal terminaJ 385.

The

so-called

benedictive

is

formed

in

close

tions.

In the Parasmaipada this ^s stands between the TTT yd of the optative and the actual signs of the persons, being lost, however, in the 2nd and
3rd pers. sing.
Opt.
if,

Thus, instead of
TK,
ydh,
iTTt,

TTT^,
ydt,

*TR,

inf,

Trnrf,

*n*r,

*rnr,

3:,

ydm,
Ben.

ydva y ydtam,

ydtdm,

ydma,
*JTO,

ydta,

yuh,

we have

1TO,

TTT^, 1TTO,
ydt,

1T^,

^IWI,

irer,

TR}:.

ydsam, ydh,

ydsva, ydstam, ydstum,

ydsma,

ydsta, ydsuh.

As the
ancient

optative

is

a verbal

compound
In *TH

of the modified base with an ancient second aorist

similar

of the root

IT yd, the benedictive seems a

of
*TT yd.

first aorist

compound of the unmodified base with an ydh and Tffl^ydt we have contractions of n^y<fos
is

and

<t\*(t{ydst.

In the Veda the 3rd pers. sing,

594; and Pan.

HI y^.

(See Bollensen, Zeitschrift

der D.

M.

G., vol. xxii. p.

vm.

2,

7374.)

In the Atmanepada the

e.

s stands before the terminations of the optative,

g.

T&nstya instead of ^IT iya.

beginning with j(Jt or

Opt.

th take
f*ft>,
foa'Ai,

Besides this, the personal terminations originally an additional ^s. Cf. $ 351. Thus, instead of

fs,
iya,

^n:,
fa/A,
l8it,

fw,
#a',

ty^>
iydthdm,
^ilqiteqi,

t^>
iydtdm,

t1^*
imdhi,

t^l>
we have

idhvdm, trdn,
?fh^,
<i"lv.^

Ben. TR^T,
x

?ft7,

filqf^,

'*OilUHi, til^P^,

siy

sfshthdh, sishtd, sivdhi,

siydsthdm, siydstdm, simdhi, sidhvdm,

is

sirdn.

Thus from Atmanepada really an optative of the first aorist. Aor. ^wfq fa abhavishi, Ben. HfclMl^ bhavishfya; from Atm. ^bhu, ^J stu, Opt. stuvita, Aor. ^cft? astoshta, Ben. W*l 'il K stoshishta; from "S^Arf, Opt. Atm.
benedictive in the
'

The

Aor. VN^iMtf akreshata, Ben. ^TT^ArresA^ran. 386. Verbal bases ending in ^H^ay (Chur, Caus.
terminations of the benedictive Par.:
"

Denom. &c.) drop ^Tay before the Ben. *ft^nf chorydsam; but in Atm. ^ft^choray, chorayishtyd. Denominative bases in ^y drop ^y in the Ben. Par.
: 1

Ben.

^1

tt

putriydsam ;

but in Atm. ^cfl fMMll putriyishiyd.

387.

The

benedictive

Parasmaipada belongs to the weakening, the Atmanepada to the strengthening forms ($ 344). Hence from
benedictive

f^chit, Par. faqiti chitydsam, Atm.

388. The
benedictive

^fWN chetishiyd.
^
i.

benedictive Parasmaipada never takes intermediate

t.

The

provided for

Atmanepada generally takes intermediate ^ by the rules 331 seq.

c c a

Exceptions are

196
Weakening of
389.
the

BENEDICTIVE.
Base before Terminations beginning with

389-

y.

Some

of the rules regulating the weakening of the base, which

is

required in the

benedictive Parasmaipada,

may

here be stated together with the rules that apply to the

weakening of the base

in the passive

and

intensive.

390. While, generally speaking, the terminations of the benedictive, passive, and
intensive exercise a weakening influence

on the verbal base, there

is

one important, though

3[ i,

only apparent, exception to this rule with regard to verbs ending in

^ u,
and

^J ri.

Final

^i and Tw, before the ^y of the terminations of benedictive, lengthened (Pan. vn. 4, 25), but not strengthened by Guna.

passive,

intensive, are

fa chi,

to gather; Ben. Pass. **ft*tt chiydte; Int. ^T^falff chechiydte. -*ftm'i\chiyd't;

is

Final ^J ri

changed to ft ri.
;

(Pan. vn. 4, 28.)

Pass. Pj**4H kriydte.

^ kri,

to do

Ben.

(VhHli^ kriydt;

(The Intensive has

^nO^n

chekriydte.,

Pan. vn. 4, 27.)

In roots, however, beginning with conjunct consonants, final

r* ia actually

strengthened

by Guna, and appears as

^R ar.

(Pan. vn.

4, 29.)

^smri, to remember ; Ben. W*\\i[smaryc[t ;

Also in
Final

Pass. T&fasmarydte; Int. Wfwflrt sdsmarydte.

^n,
is

to go; Ben.

^^(arydt;

Pass. ^f*fiT arydte; Int.

^C(5n

ardrydte.

^Tn
to

changed to fjfr, and,

after labials, to

^.ur.
stirydte; Int.
Int.

^stri,
^pri,

to stretch; Ben. *sl\*\\^stirya[t; Pass.

fill;
:

WlAd

iNcfWft

testirydte.

Ben.
is

^Tf^purydtj
changed to

Pass.

"$% purydte;

^^fl popury ate.

is

Exceptions
^ft
si,

l$si

TJP^s'ay.

to He

down; (Ben. $\m\i\sayydt does not

^t
I

occur, because the verb

Atmanepadin);

Pass. "^H^ff sayydte; Int.

3[ i,

^1^^" sdsayydte.
5f i

(Pan. VIT. 4, 22.)

in the benedictive.

after prepositions, does

not lengthen the final

^,

to go; Ben. \Hit(iydtj but ^T*\Wi(^samiydt.

is

(Pan. vn. 4, 24.)

to understand, after prepositions, "35^ uh,

shortened to
.

7^ uh.

(Pan. vn.

4, 23.)

Ben. &#[^uhydt; Pass. "Zv&lt uhydte Ben. ti^^i IT samuhydt; Pass. samuhydte.
i

t4j^in

39 1

The

following roots

may

or

may
or

not drop their final ^w, and then lengthen the

preceding vowel.

(Pan. vi. 4, 43.)

;

*F[jan, to beget

Ben.

"SfT^m^/ay/jf

P*ffity'arey<&

Pass. Himtijdydte or *\*njanydtej

Int. **R*fmft jdjdydte or

TW^TiT janjanydte.

^*{san,to obtain; Ben. WHTI^sdyd't

Int. tiitiiMrt sdsdydte or

orW^^anyat;
samsanydte.
I

Pass.^T'Tfl' sdydte or

'ff^ sany ate;

<?r*mi

^^Pmf

^*{khan, to dig; Ben. '^1^41^ khdy dt or !?(*{ ^khanydt; Pass. <sii*ifl khdydte or chahkhanydte. khanydte; Int. ^KNI^rt chdkhdydte or

^<n

In the passive only, fT^frw, to stretch;

tanydte; Int.
ffrT^Rff

Ben.

n*\<(^tanydt;

Pass. ni<qn

#ay^e or

nMn

tantanydte.

392. According to a general rule, roots ending in ** ai and

o change then* final

diphthong in the general tenses into ^TT d:

^TT d retain it: "TT^a, TTTff pdydte, he
final
it

"Wf

dhyai, UTnTlf dhydydte.

Roots ending in
roots change their

is

protected.

But the following

vowel into

\f in

the passive and intensive; into "Ze in the benedictive Par.; and keep

unchanged before gerundial

1 ya.

(Pan. vi. 4, 66, 67, 69.)

-$

395six verbs called

BENEDICTIVE.
*ghu*, and the
following verbs
:

197

The

PASSIVE.
IJT

INTENSIVE.
<;<{l<4n

BENEOICTIVE
IpRl^deyctt

f.

GERUND.
Tf$\H praddya

ddy to give
mdy to measure
to stand

OMII
'ffaTfl'

diydte

dediydte

ITT

miydte

*iil4H memiydte
rfulqi) teshthiydte

*fami mey<&

TFTR pramdya

WT s/H

Wtan sthiydte
ifbfKgtydte
TftTft piydte

'Wm^stheydt
^Tf^geyclt
Tfrtfl(jpeydt

UWHT prasthdya
Wmpragdya
VKFlprapdya

l\ gai, to sing

wfanT jegiydte
^Mlqi) pepiydte
^IJInj'eAfyrffe
tlH)<u) seshiydte

TRpd, to drink
^T
Ad, to leave

^I^H

Afy<ft<?

^Tn^Aey<&

HfRpraWya

*ft so, to finish

^^(siydte
verbs take

HW^seydt
in the

HFR pra*/ya

393.

The following
to speak;
i.

Samprasarana
vi. 1, 15.)

benedictive (Pan. in. 4, 104),

passive, participle,

and gerund. (Pan.

^racA,
Ben.

^^waptH,
e.

to sleep;

^t?a/

(Pan.vi.

i,

20), to wish;

and the

4iif^ yajddi,

those following *H^ yaj.

Part.

T^TTT^McAy^;
are, (23,

Pass.T^ uchydte;

T1K u^<A

Ger.

TW tt^t?/
vah, to

The Mlif^

to dwell;
f^Gf sut||,

33-41) i&^yqj, to sacrifice; ^*{vap, to sow ; vc, to weave; ^t?ye||,to cover; 3$ hve\\, to

cany ; T^ro*,
rarf,

call;

to speak;

to grow.
in the

394.

The following verbs take Samprasarana

|

benedictive, passive, participle,

gerund, and intensive. (Pan.vi.

,

i, 16.)

to take; 'vlfljyd, to

fail;

**F^vyadh, to pierce;

H^t?yacA, to surround;

vratch, to cut; Tf^prachh, to ask; VlTS^bhrajj, to fry.

As

to

W^sca
Ger.

and

^ rye, see
Ben
.

393, note
c^ grihydt;
i

||.

J|^I I

Pass.

J^lii

grihydte;

Part.

i^lfft grihitdh;

grihftvd; Int.

'^

t$l

d jarigrihydte.

395*

^T^
U||
i^

s&, to

rule, substitutes f^T^ sish, in the

benedictive, passive, participle,

gerund, intensive, also in the second aorist.

(Pan. vi. 4, 34.)

;

Ben.

fijl

tishydt ;

Pass. f^PRff sishydte

Part. f^t?t &shtdh;

Ger. (31^1 $ishtvd ;

Aor.

^ir^im^osisAa^.
is

Roots ending in consonants preceded by a nasal (which

really written as

belonging to

the root) lose that nasal before weakening terminations (Kit, Nit, Pan. vi. 4, 24). * This term comprises the six roots J^IM, ^Rff, ^T, the radicals

Thus
of

^, f*H^, and *te,

all varieties

<JT dd and VT dhd; but not ^T^and ^^, i. e. <JTfrT ddti, he cuts, and ^mfin ddy at i, he cleans (Pan. 1. 1, 20). Hence fffrnt diyate, it is given; but ^mnddyate, it is cleaned.

t In other
wither ;

roots,

ending in ^IT d or diphthongs, and beginning with more than one con-

sonant, the change into

^e

in the benedictive Par.

is

optional (Pan. vi. 4, 68).

glai, to

or to call ; ^im^khydydt or wmi(khyeyd't. jpffi^ gleydt ^fT^T^gldydt. ^TT khyd, J ^fl^svdp, to send to sleep, takes Samprasarana in the reduplicated aorist (Pan. vi.

I, 18).
||

^f^^asushupat.
to
sleep, ^tpT
i,

^^ svap,

syam, to sound, and

^ rye,

take Samprasarana in the

sesimydte,
i,

intensive also (Pan.vi.

19);

tftMU^ soshupydte, ^PHWIn

Int.

fql^n

veviydte.

f^ifvi takes Samprasarana optionally in the intensive (Pan.vi.

or ^THlt^H sesviydte.

30);

^i\a^Mn so&ydtc

% hve forms

forms Mcfclnlf cheMydte (Pan.vi.

^\*W johuydte (Pan. vi. I, 33). In the intensive i, 21); ^pydy, ^TNTT pepiydte (Pan. vi. 1,29).

198
from ^R(srams,
srastvd,

PASSIVE.
Part.

396-

&*$:

srastdh, Pass.

^TR^

srasydte, Ben.
;

HWi^ srasydt,
Ben.

Ger.

Int.T&ft&QR

sanisrasydte,

^on.^B^dsrasat
rctoa

fromt^ranj,

Pass. <Tl|ri rajydte, Part.

t3K

raktdh, Ger. TiiT

(or

tw ranktvd, Pan. vi. 4, 32).

see the general rules as to

$ 396.

With regard

to the benedictive

Atm.

Remember, the strengthening of the base, $ 344, and particularly $ 348 seq. that if the benedictive Atm. does not take intermediate ^ i, penultimate ^ i, tenses they take "3u,?$ri are left unchanged, whereas in other strengthening and ^ri becomes ir, Guna 344). Final ri, too, remains unchanged,
(f

or, after labials,

4r.

fq^kship, to throw, ftfml4 kshipsiyd; ^pri, to

fill,

Benedictive.

PARASMAIPADA.
1.

"JUJTtf

budhydsam

^HITO budhydsva
^*HHfl budhydstam
^M I

'3p$m budliydsma
^irai budhydsta
^*Hi^t budhydsuh

2.

^TH budhydh
TURff budhydt

3.

budhydstdm

ATMANBPADA.
1.

'^IfM^^ bodhishiyd

^flfVM'HfV bodhishivdhi

^Vftml*tf^ bodhisMmdhi

2.

^fFmflaU bodhisMshthdh

HtlVll^lW
"T

bodhishiydsthdm
bodhishiydstdm

^tfVT^?4 bodhishidJivdm
^i(VfMii5^ bodhishirdn

CHAPTER
PASSIVE.
5 397.

XV.

The

passive takes the terminations of the Atmanepada.

Special Tenses of the Passive.

398.

The

present, imperfect, optative, and imperative of the passive are

formed by adding IT 2/a to the root. This if ya is added in the same manner as it is in the Div verbs, so that the Atmanepada of Div verbs is in all
respects (except in the accent) identical with the passive.

Atm.

T^fff

ndhyate, he binds

Pass,

rf^ nahydte, he
&c.) drop

is

bound.

399. Bases in
passive.

^T^ ay (Chur, Caus. Denom.

to

^T^ ay
is

before

ya of the

"*tt*n^bodhdy

',

make one know; ^tWrf

j

to steal **TV<*^ chordy>

^n

bodh-ydte^ he
is

made

to

knuw.

chor-ydte, he
their

stolen.

Intensive bases ending in

^y retain
much j

1y,

to which the

lya

of the passive

is

added

without any intermediate vowel.

,

to cut

3fico*sn loluyydte, he

is

cut much.

PASSIVE.
a consonant, drop their Intensive bases ending in *^y, preceded by

199
^y.

qfal^bebkidy,
<fhft

to sever

^(*iwn bebhidydte,

it IB

severed.

didM, to shine,
as usual.
^t*ft didhi,

q^ vevt, to

yearn, q(V.' daridrd, to be poor, drop their final vowel,

^teti didhydte,

it is

lightened,

i.

e. it

lightens.

$ 400.

As

to the

weakening of the base, see the rules given

Passive.

for the

benedictive, J

389

seq.

SINGULAR.
I.

2.

3.

Pres.

vj$bhdy6

$TH* bhuydse

07*

bMydte

Impf.

*ng$ dbhdye

WgW. dbhdyathdh
tgWCbMytthdh
*j*tt bhuydsva

*TqTT dbMyata
VgfrbMytta
*gllft

Opt.

VgWbMyfya

Imp.

^bMya(
vgtt^bMydvahe

bhuydtdm

DUAL.
Pres.

^q^ bh&ytthe
^T^^lf dbhuyethdm

*& bhuytte
^J^iff dbhuyetdm

Impf. ^T^lT^f^ dbhuydvahi

Opt.

^4*1^

bhuytuahi

>J5^Rt bhuyfydtkdm
*J^zn bhuytihdm

^Tnrf bhtiyfy&tdm

Imp.

*JJJN^ bhtiydvahai

^iH bhuyttdm
^-qiT bhuydnte

PLURAL.
Pres.

^TR^ bhuydmahe
^l*lf^ bhuytmahi

*$$& bhuyddhve
^T*J?T5I dbhuyadhvam

Impf. ^UJTHHf^ dbhuydmahi

^NJjTiT dbhuyanta

Opt.

Imp.

^Twt bhuydmahai

^^ bhuytdhvam ^^ bhuyddhvam
General Tenses of the Passive.

V^f^bhuy^ran
^TiTf bhuydntdm

tenses of the passive, ^ya is dropt, so that, with f 401. In the general certain exceptions to be mentioned hereafter, there is no distinction between

the general tenses of the passive and those of the Atmanepada. The ifya of the passive is treated, in fact, like one of the conjugational class-marks
(vikaranas),

which are retained in the

special tenses only,

and

it

differs

thereby from the derivative syllables of causative, desiderative, and intensive

verbs, which, with certain exceptions, remain throughout both in the special

and

in the general tenses.

Reduplicated Perfect.

The

reduplicated perfect

is

the same as in the Atmanepada.

Periphrastic Perfect.

The

periphrastic perfect

is

auxiliary verbs

as and

the same as in the Atmanepada, but the bM must be conjugated in the Atmanepada,

as well as

kri.

(J 342.)

200

PASSIVE.
Aorist.

$403-

402. Verbs

may be

conjugated in the three forms of the

differing

first

aorist

which admit of Atmanepada, and without

from the paradigms given

above, except in the third person singular.

not to be used in a purely passive sense *. has been fixed in the J 403. In the third person singular a peculiar form medial passive, ending in ^ i, and requiring Vriddhi of final, and Guna of vowels (but ^r a is lengthened), followed by one consonant.
aorist

The second

Atmanepada

is

Thus, instead of^wfay dlavishta, we find

^T^tfv? abodhishta,
^rfojTT

dldv-i.

abodh-i.
akshep-i.

,,,.

> J

First

Form.

akshipta,

anay-i.
^T^rT akrita,

akdr-i.

^iftj addy-i.
astirshta,
asrishta,
^HsTTft astdr-i.

fc

Second Form.

^T*rf^ asarj-i.

^xv adagdha,
TBrf^Tf adikshata,

addh-i.

agtih-i.

alikshata,

aleh-i.

Fourth Form.

adhukshata,
^rftrep adhikshata,
404. Verbs ending in ^TT
<fT

adoh-i.
adeh-i.
*.

or diphthongs, take T^y before the passive

2[

da,

H^|ftl addyi, instead of ^fq'ff adita.

405. Verbs ending in

^*{ay (Chur, Caus. Denom. &c.) drop

^f ay before the passive

Hya, the
original

^ t, though in may reappear,

the general tenses, after the dropping of the passive

i.e.

^P^ay

the Atm.

may

be used as passive.
ardji.

H V*I bodhay,

^^nf dbodhi;

^\X*T choray, ^ef^TK achorij TT*fQrdjay, ^Ujfi

In the other persons these verbs may either drop either case after the first form of the first aorist."

^^ay

or retain

it,

being conjugated in

abhdvisM, ^^ilVsiJ abhdvishtJidh,

fJ

^MTf%

abhdvij or

abhdvayishthdh, ^MTf^f abhdvi.

^[ i,

406. Intensive bases in T^y add the passive

Int.

without Guna.

Tft*$l(bobhuy, ^T^t>jftr abobMyi.

Intensive bases ending in

Int.

^y, preceded by a consonant, drop ^y, and

^T^rftrf^ abebhidi.

refuse

Guna.

^fWST bebhidy; Aor.

Desiderative bases, likewise, refuse Guna.

Des.

^hf^fbubodhishj Aor. ^R^rfvfa

if Jcartari

abubodhishi.

* This would follow

extends to Pan. in.

i,

54, 56.

4* I
407.

PASSIVE. The

201
:

following are a few irregular formations of the 3rd pers. sing, aorist passive
i, I,
I,

to desire, forms ^itf*? arambhi. (Pan. vn. T>^ rabh,

63.)
61.)

See

345,

10 .

^
>H^

radh, to

kill,

^rtfv arandhi. (Pan. vn.

^Tiffa ujambhi.
(Pan. vn.

yf^jabh,

to yawn,

61.)

bhafij, to break,

WTftf

abhufiji or VMlfaf abhdji. (Pan. vi. 4, 33.)

i,

W^fa alambhi or <No6lfa a/M. (Pan. vn. c5^ teM, to take, With prepositions c5^ /a6/i always forms Vcjftr alambhi.
*&{jan, to beget,

69.)

W3ffa

o/ant.

(Pan. vn. 3, 35.)

^
Tfl*T

badh, to strike,

Vffv abadhi.

(Pan. vn. 3, 35.)

(

408. Roots ending in

their radical vowel.

V^am, which admit of intermediate 5[

3, 34.)

332, 16), do not lengthen

(Pan. vn.

sam, SM^ifa ajami; "i&^tam, ^HrifH a/ami; but

IT yam, W*JTfa

aydmi.

Panini excepts

^T vam,

fTT

^n^fleAam, nam (Pan. vn. 3,

to rinse, which forms

34, vart.).

^TOfa dchdmi.

Others add ^n^Jtaro,

Thus the paradigms given in the Atmanepada may be used in the of the aorist, with the exception of the 3rd pers. sing. (See p. 182.) passive
J 409.
alavishi

vjcaTq^f^ alavishvahi

^c^f^^r^
Wc?f%l4 or

alavishmahi

alavishthdh
aldvi

^MrtrmiMi alavishdthdm
xt^fciMiffi alavishdtdm

alavidhvam or -dhvam

w&fwn

alavishata

The Two Futures, the Conditional, and the Benedictive Passive.

J 410.

These formations are

identically the

same

in the passive as in the

Atmanepada.

Hence
Fut. ^tftnq bodhishye, I shall be

known.
known.
!

Cond.
Periphr. Fut.

erfl(V|*M
flfilriUJ

dbodhishye, I

should be known.

bodhitahe, I shall be

Bened.

^ffrftNta

bodhishiyd,

May

be known

Secondary Form of the Aorist, the Two Futures, the Conditional, and Benedictive of Verbs ending in Vowels.
han, to 411. All verbs ending in vowels, in *r^ay, and likewise to take, may form a secondary base (really to see, strike, dns, grah,

^
.

denominative), being identical with the peculiar third person singular of the
aorist passive, described before.

Thus from
i

from

this,
i

by

treating the final 5

as the

we have Wc4lfc aldvi, and intermediate ^ i, we form,

<g

lu

Sing,

pers. ^rilfafii aldvi-shi,

by the

side of

c4rqfM aldvi-shi.

1.

NSMlfcm: aldvi-shthdfy,

^wfaai: aldvi-shthdh.
wtfTfa aldvi.

3.

WSlfa

aldvi,

D d

202
Dual
r.

PASSIVE.

411side of Hc*PiHP^ alavi-shvahi.

'HoiiVmvjj aldvi-shdthdm.

pers. -?Hc*lP^Hf^ aldvi-shvahi,

i

by the

aldvi-shdthdm,

3.

^TcSTfr^Tiri

aldvi-shdtdm,

^cSfamdl alavi-shdtdm.

Plur.

i.

pers. ^TcSTfaTf^ aldvi-shmahi,

by the

side of

swfV^ng

aldvi-shmahi.

%. 3.

^K&ifasafaldvi-dhvamor^^dhvam
MlP<4Mff aldvi-shata,

^roFfesr aldvi-dhvam or ^.

^c-ifMMH aldvi-shata.

Fut. c^TPM^J Idvi-shye,

by

the side of

c*P<^tM Idvi-shye.

Cond.

-flrtlfciui

aldvi-shye,
*

^Jc5p^

aldvi-shye.

Per. Fut. oSlfcrilj Idvi-tdhe,

c^P^ril^ Idvi-tdhe.
e3P^*fln Idvi-shiya.

Ben. fyrP^t^ Idvi-sMya,

From

f% chi, to gather, 3rd pers. sing. Aor. Pass. -4Mipjj achdyi; hence Aor. ^T^P^PM achdyishi, besides ^?^f^ acheshi, &(i.
Fut.

P<M^ chdyishye,

^"^ cheshye.
SH^ul acheshye.

Cond.

^r-cftPnui

achdyishye,

Per. Fut. xjiPuHI^ chdyitdhe,

^TTT% cheiahe. ^"^hl cheshiya.

Ben. ^iP^Mln chdyishiya,

From inghrd,

to smell, 3rd pers. sing. Aor. Pass, ^mfa aghrdyi; hence Aor. SHmHuPM aghrdyishi) besides SHUlPu aghrdsi.

Fut.

i||Pi|u)
-*{ ||
|

ghrdyishye,
aghrdyishye,

TTT^ ghrdsye.
^.syif^

Cond.

Pn ul

aghrdsye.

Per. Fut. MlfMril^ ghrdyitdhe,

UMI^ ghrdtdhe.
l||^^ ghrdsiya.

Ben.

uiPijtflii

ghrdyishiya,

From

to hurt, 3rd pers. sing. Aor. Pass, ^wsnft adhvdri; i^ c?^t;n,

^Ifi|f^

hence

Aor. ^rc^rfcfa adhvdrishi, besides

Fut. t^lfc^ dhvdrishye,
Per. Fut.

adhvrishi or ^ruiftft adhvarishi.

isrftw dhvdrishye.

nfbn^ dhvdritdhe,
nfbrfa dhvdrishiya,

i9%1% dhvdrtdhe.

Ben.

From

^?z, to

sq^dhvrishiyaorvstfttvdhvarishtya*. Aor. Pass. ^iinP^ aghdni; hence kill, 3rd pers. sing. Aor. ^HlPnPK aghdnishi, besides ( ^ 3 Py Pn avadhishi). Pan.vi.4,62 tFut. MlPn^ ghdnishye,
^Pnul hanishye.
-

Per. Fut. TfiffTdl^ ghdnitdhe,

^ffrt hantdhe.
(c|Pififln

Ben. yifHMl^ ghdnishiya,

vadhishiya).

From

to see, ~^5{dri&,

3rd pers. sing. Aor. Pass.

^f$t

adar&i; hence

Aor. ^n^tfa adarsishi,

Fut.

besides ^rfPf adrikshi.

fiss drakshye.

^f^^

darsishye,

Per. Fut. ^Pjlrii^ darsitdhe,

-5^^ drashtdhe.

Ben.
* See

^P$|*(hl

dar&shtya,

^l drikshiya.
seems to allow

332, 5.
vol.

f Siddh.-Kaum.

n,

p. 270,

^P* ahasi.

-J 414.

PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS,

AND

INFINITIVE.

203
hence

From TRyrah,
Aor.

to take, 3rd pers. sing. Aor. Pass,

<{{jif]gfa

^nft agrdhi;

agrdhishi,

besides Wil^lfM agrahishi.

inf^*f grahishye.

Fut. ?rrfT*f grdhishye,

Per. Fut. Trfziri^grdhitdhe,

IF&lrik grahitdhe.
i|^1*rlq grahishiya.

Ben. yifgiflq grdhishiya,

JTT^ ramay, weft arami or ^Klfa ard/we ;

From

to delight,

Caus. of t1 ram, 3rd pers. sing. Aor. Pass. ^ hence

Aor.

mfcCM aramishi

or ^Tifirfa ardmishi, besides

KHfafo aramayishi.
^* in the 3rd pers. sing. Atmanepada of a Div

412. Certain verbs of an intransitive meaning take the passive

Aor. Atm.
verb),

Thus IrqClff utpadyate (3rd

pers. sing, present of the

he

arises,

other persons,

o^MWini

becomes J^Mlty udapddi, he arose, he sprang up ; but it is regular in the udapatsdtdm, they two arose, &c. (Pan. in. i, 60.)

413. Other verbs of an intransitive character take the

(<j1u|d dtpyate, he burns, Div, Atm.),
*<1

same form optionally (Pan. HI. 1,61) ;

fM adipi or ^<OrMK adipish^a.

it

jan (*i\*M jdyate, he

is

born, he

is,

Div, Atm.;

cannot be formed from Iffy'an

(Hu,

Par.)> to beget), ^lTf*T ajani or ^enifne ajanishta.

is

(^W budhyate, he

conscious, Div, Atm.), ^TTtfV abodhi or

VJl abuddha.
Mlfa
atdyi or

^T*. apuri or Wjfn? apurishta. ^L^frt purayati, he fills, Chur.), (TTRff tdyate, he spreads, Bhu, Atm.; really Div form of Tan),

atdyishta.

dyate,

he grows), xiqifl apydyi or -*mrM8 apydyishta.

CHAPTER
PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS,

XVI.
AND
INFINITIVE.

Parasmaipada retains the Vikaranas of the ten classes. It is most easily formed by taking the 3rd pers. plur. of This gives us the Ahga base, from the present, and dropping the final ^ i.
participle of the present

$414. The

which the Pada and Bha base can be

rules
(J 182).
it

easily

The accent remains

in the 3rd pers. plur.
if

in the participle

deduced according to general on the same syllable

falls

where

was

If the accent

on the

last syllable
all

of the participle, and

cases

that participle does not take a nasal, then

Bha

and the feminine

H^TT
bhdvant

suffix receive the accent.

(Pan. vi.

I,

173.)

Thus

H^f?T
bhdvanti

Nom.

S.

>T^
bhdvan

Ace. HWTf

Instr.

>T^HT &c.
bhdvatd

bhdvantam

tuddnti

tuddnt

tuddn

tuddntam

tudatd

dtoyanti

dfvyant

dirynn

divyant am

dtryatd

D d

204

PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS,
Norn. S.
chordyant

AND

INFINITIVE.

$415-

^K*J^
chordyan

Ace. ^TCTIT

Instr. qioiifi &c.

chordyantam

chordyatd

sunvdnt

sunvn

sunvdntam
&c.

tanvdnt

tanvdn
"BfalF^

tanvdntam
&c.

WtWi^
krmdnt

krmdn

krmdntam

krinatd
^fifrTT&c.

s^i^
addnt

addn

addnt am

adatd
aJ^riT
(

184)

jtibvati

juhvat

juhvat

juhvatam

juhvatd

rundhdnt
Intens.
*TT*J^T^

rundhdn
fl*j<if^

rundhdnt am

rundhatd
"37*j^ni
(

^JTff
b6bhuvatam

184)

bdbhuvat

bobhuvat

bobhuvatd

415.

The

participle of the future is

formed on the same principle.

Ace.

^fatq-^
bhavishydnti

Norn. S. Hftra^
bhavishydn

H fa *M rf
bhavishydntam

Instr. Hfcufri'l

bhavishydnt

bhavishyatd

416.

The

participle of the reduplicated perfect

may

best be formed

by

This corresponds, both in form and taking the 3rd pers. plur. of that tense. accent, with the Bha base of the participle, only that the s, as it is always

Having the Bha base, it is easy to changed to ^ sh. form the Anga and Pada bases, according to In forming the Anga 204. and Pada bases, it must be remembered,
followed

by a vowel,

is

1.

That roots ending in a vowel, restore that vowel, which, before T: uh, had been naturally changed into a semivowel.
That, according to the rules on intermediate ^ i, all verbs which, without counting the "3: uh, are monosyllabic in the 3rd pers. plur., insert ^ i.
(See Necessary ^
i,

2.

338,

Optional ^
Sing.

i,

337,

8.)
Instr. Plur.

3rd P. Plur.

Instr. Sing.

Nom.

Ace. Sing.

babhuvuh

babhuvushd

babhuvdn

babhuvddbhih

ninyuh

ninyushd

ninivdn
tJl^SlT^

nintvdmsam

ninivddbhih

3^fk
tutudvdmsam
tutudvddbhih

tutuduh

tutudushd

tutudvdn

f^f^t
didivuh

f^r^ji^
didivushd
^K*(T*Jt4j
lit

didivdn

didivdmsam
^nT^TTTTf^T^T^f

didivddbhih

^TIj'nTPgJ

^TKTn^TMFT^T^
choraydmdsivan

^ftonHTfirafg:
choraydmdsivddbhih

choraydmdsuh

choraydmdsushd

choraydmdsivdmsam

PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS,
3rd P. Plur.
Instr. Sing.

AND

INFINITIVE.
Instr. Plur.

205

Nom.

Sing.

Ace. Sing.

fTO
sushnvuh

sushuvushd

sushuvdn
7ffTTF*^
tenlvdn

sushuvdihsam

tushuvddbhih

v
cTjm
ten lilt

tenushd

teniva/hsam
P*iftl<iiti

tenivddbhih

fafag:
chikriyuh
chikriytishd

chikriodn

chikriodmsam

chikricddbhih

^IJtn
dduh
ddushd

^Nlf^l^
ddivdn

ddivdmsam

ddivddbhih
*lf '-ffe*

*J?^^T
juhuvuh
juhuvushd

^Sc|[c^

juhuvdn

juhuvdmsam

juhuvddbhih

rurudhuh

rurudhushd

rurudhvdn

rurudhvdmsam

rurudhvddbhih
is

417. In five verbs, where the insertion of

before

optional

337, 8),

we

get the following forms

3rd P. Plur.

Instr. Sing.

Nom.

Sing.
or

Ace. Sing.

Instr. Plur.

jagmuh

jagmushd

jagmivdn or jaganvdn

jagmivdrhsam

jagmicddbhih

jaghnuh

jaghnushd

jaghnivan or jaghanvdn

jaghnivamsam

jaghnivddbhih

vividuh

vividushd

vividvan or vividivdn
or

vividvdmsam

vioidcddbhih

vivisuh

vivisushd

vivisvdn or vivisivdn

vivisvdmsam

vivifvddbhih

dris

dadrisuh

dadrisushd

dadrisvdn or dadrisivan

dadrisvdmsam

dadrisvddbhih
is

418.

The

participle of the reduplicated perfect

ire,

Atmanepada

formed

by dropping ^T

the

termination of the

3rd pers. plur. Atm., and

substituting ^TTT dna.

babhdvire
chakrire

^L^M:

babhuvdndfy

^?W^n: chakrdndh

dadire
J

^R:

daddnah,

419.

The

participle present

Atmanepada has two

terminations,

ITR

mdna

for verbs of the First Division (J 295),

^R dna

for verbs of the

Second

Division.

In the First Division we

drop the termination

may

again take the 3rd pers. plur. present Atm.,

it

^ nte,

and replace

by

JfRt mdnah.

In the Second Division we

may

likewise take the 3rd pers. plur. present

it

Atm., drop the termination ^nr ate, and replace

*

by ^TR!

dnafy.

The same

optional forms run through

all

the Pada and

Bha

cases.

206

PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS,
First Division.

AND

INFINITIVE.

420-

Second Division.

bhdva-nte
tudd-nte

VRJTR: bhdva^mdnafy
IJ^TRJ tudd-mdnah

sunv-dte
^rnreff dpnuv-yte

g^R: sunv-dndfy
^MI^HM: dpnuv-dn*
:

divya-nte

^Nmr^r: divya-mdnah
iJUquUU: chordya-mdnah

tanv-dnd
krin-dndfy

chordya-nte

krm-dte
ad-dte
uhv-ate

jfftaiFT:

tudyd-nte

^HMt

tudyd-mdnah

^f'^HS

ad-dndh

bhdvdya-nte

HN+HM: bhdvdya-mdnah
^JWT&: bubhusha-mdnah
"^JtWHt bobhuyd-mdnah

^3^1~*{\ juhv-dnah,

Des. ^^bubhusha-nte
Int.

rundh-dte

%VTf: rundh-dndfy

^ft^l^ bodhuyd-nte

420.
:

The

in the participle of the future

Atmanepada

is

formed by adding

mdnah

in the

same manner.
^P^U|Hri!j:

bhavishyd-nte

bhavishyd-mdnafy

R neshyd-nte
totsyd-nte

T^iMHRd:

neshyd-mdnah

iftwui^: totsyd-mdnah
^Puu(H|iii:

i
J 421.

edhishyd-nte

edhishyd-mdnah

The

participles of the present

and future passive

are

formed by

adding *TRt mdnah in the same manner.

bhiiyd-nte

IJJJHH* bhtiyd-mdnafy

^i4^ budhyd-nte
stuyd-nte

IURT^T: budhyd-mdnah

bhdvishyd-nte-

bhdvishyd-mdnah

^TRTT: stuyd-mdnah
f&q*TO; Jcriyd-mdnafy
HTsq^R: bhdvyd-mdnah
ndyishyd-nte

kriyd-nte

ndyishyd-mdnah

HT^ bhdvyd-nte

Or like

the Part. Put. Atm.

The Past Participle Passive in 7H tah and the Gerund in

J

i^T tva.

422.

The past

participle passive is
^r?f:

to the root.

^ fai,

kritdh,

formed by adding IT: tdh or eft ndb done, masc. ; ^f?n kritd, fern. ; epf kritdm,
saw, most opposed to the insertion of inter-

neut.

<J[ /i<,

cut. <gT: lundh,

7T

This termination

^a

is,

as

we

which may form any one general tense mediate ^ i y so The number with or without ^ i, always form their past participle without it. which must insert ^ i before if ta is very small. ($ 332, D.) of verbs
so that verbs

much

Besides being averse to the insertion of intermediate ^ i } the participial termination H ta, having always the Udatta, is one of those which have a

tendency to weaken verbal bases.

$ 423.
root.

(See $ 344.)
is

The gerund of simple verbs

having done,

formed by adding
"^pu, Tg^lputvd
or,

FTT tva to

the

kritva 3 ?f kri, "ag^R

from Tf^pun,
tvd have

MfaHl pavitva, having purified.

The

rules as to the insertion of the intermediate

before

?=rT

been given before.

With regard

to the strengthening or

weakening of the

430.

PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS,
is

AND

INFINITIVE.

207
i

base, the general rule

that

WT tvd without intermediate ^

weakens, with

It always has the intermediate ^ i strengthens the root (Pan. i. 2, 18). In giving a few more special rules on this point, it will be conUdatta.

venient to take the terminations w ta and

iWT

tvd together, as they agree to

a great extent, though not altogether.

I.

H:

ah "in I F7T
3[

v;\,

with intermediate ?

i.

424. If
case the
^ft
si,

IT.

tah takes intermediate

is

it

may

in certain verbs produce

Guna.

In this

Guna
to
lie

before r^T tvd

regular.
i.

down,

^|f<4ni fayitdh (Pan.

2, 19)

31 fora

$ayitvd.
sveditvd.

avid, to sweat, ^jtyrit sveditdh or (V<lf|! svinndh ;

mtrf,

^ff^HI

to be soft, ^f^TTJ meditdh

i^ni

meditvd.

k thrill. to drip,
,

8^1^ lit kshveditdh; a^i^rm kshveditvd.

to dare, vftlf* dharshitdh; Vnti^T dharshitvd. to bear,

fftwt marshltdh

(patient), (Pan.
I.

i.

2,

20)

Hf*lill marshitvd.

purify, ^f^lf* pavtidh (Pan.

2,

22)

425. Verbs with penultimate

TK

may
iTl Pn

or

MPii<n^amW, from ^[^/wn. See No. 156. may not take Guna before Tf fa with interit

mediate ^

*,

if

they are used impersonally.

Wi{dyut,

to shine,

^fnn

dyutitdm or

n dyotitdm,
it

has been shining. (Pan.

i.

2, ai.)
i.

426. If

WT tod

takes intermediate

^,

requires, as a general rule,

Guna
e.

(Pan.

2,

18), or at all events

does not produce any weakening of the base.

to
fall,
i.

vartitvd.

^^srams,

tjiftfrm sramsitod (Pan.

2, 22).

i.

2, 23).

^crtV, ^ pu (i.

to exist, qfrfrti

^^pun)

to

purify, sfqrqi pavitvd (Pan.

Verbs, however, beginning with consonants, and ending in any single consonant except
*^y
or
^t>, preceded

by

^, "^ror

"3",

"31

u,

take

Guna

optionally (Pan.

i. 2,

26)

Ip^cfyttf,

to
;

shine, tflfriril

IJ^mmA,
427.

dyotitvd or '^PriHl dyutitvL The same option applies to Jfitrish, to thirst to bear; attenuate (Pan. 1. 2, 25) ; "jfar^T trishitvd or nf^rqi tarshitvd. ^5^A:m, to

Though taking
in

intermediate

weakens the base,

^ *,

rTT tvd does not produce

I.

Guna, but,

if possible,

rud, to cry, tjRrqi ruditvd (Pan.

2, 8)

f^ md, to know, (%f<;rm

J

viditvd; Ig^mush, to steal,

^fm^l

mushitvd ;
7);

*J^

gra.h, to take,

]^1rli grihitvd; ifcmrid,

to delight, ijf^r^T mriditvd (Pan.

cover, JjPviHI gudhitvd;

i. 2,

mrirf, to

rub, jH;iii mriditvd; ^TV^urfA, to

f^iS^&fr/,

to hurt, f^iP^IHI klisitvd;

^vad,

to speak,

uditvd; '3R(vas, to dwell, ^fm^fi ushitvd.

nasal before

428. Roots ending in "^fA or "^pA, preceded by a nasal, may or may not drop the WT tvd (Pan. i. 2, 23); iifVrti granthitvd or 44 fan grathitvat, having twisted.
i

The same

applies to the roots ^^vafich, to cheat,

I

and

rJ^/ancA,

to pluck (Pan.

I. 2,

24);

vanchitvd or ^f-Hr^ vachitvd.

II.

Kl tah and

WT tva,

without intermediate

i.

429. Roots ending in nasals lengthen their vowel before WJ tah and r^T ted (Pan. vi.
15).

4,

SH* saw, to

rest, ^TTTr: sdntdh, T^rfi^T sdntvd.

to step, JfP{ Arram,

may

or

may

not lengthen
"air^T

its

vowel before i^T tvd (Pan. vi.

4, 18).

WT kram,
430.
vi. 4, 37-)

"ZRtf:

krdntdh, jfclHI

krdntvd or

krantvd; also ^iPirGU kramitvd.

The

following roots, ending in nasals, drop

them before WJ

taA

and

WT fp<

208

PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS,

AND

INFINITIVE.
TTtt ratdh,

431*R nam t
to

TJ^yam, to check, TcH yatdh,Tfft[yatvd*; T^\rom, to sport,

to bend, 'ffttnatdh,

TJ^T ratvd;
'

^^[natvdj
/

'%*fkan, to

kill, ^TfTt AafrfA,

J&znhatvctj

T* gam,

go, TlTt gatdh, lli^R gdtvdj

l&^man, to think,
ffi^T tatvdj

*HTt matdh,

IfFRmatvdj "^^van, to
class,

ask; TT^faw, to stretch, fTTH faa$,

and the other verbs of the Tan

ending in 5^w. Note Of the same verbs those ending in ^w drop the nasal before the gerundial
THTTT pramdtya (Pan. vi. 4, 38) : those ending in 1(m may or l^tj the nasal before the gerundial Hya; 11*171 pragdtya or WFRtpragdmya.

Hya

and

insert

may

not drop

431.

The following verbs drop

final *{n,

and lengthen the vowel.

^ff^jan, to bear, ^Ttfljdtah,

*\\ri\jdtvd:
Tsllril

W^san,

to obtain, OTtTi sdtah, '*Hril sdtvd;

^t^ khan,
1.

to dig, ^Trf: khdtah,

khdtvd.

Roots ending in
,

or substitute t| cM, 3^^ and "3i w. (Pan. vi. 4, 19.) "^v, to ask, 125), iffl prishtvd; f^div, to play, fpTJ dyunah, TJFI prishtah (

dyutvd.
2.

Roots ending in "^ rc^A, or

^r,

drop their

final consonant.

(Pan. vi. 4, 21.)

#wr, to strike, wftj turnah. l^murchh, to faint, ^J murtah; 432. The following verbs change their ^v with the preceding or following vowel
^i u.

^
I

into

(Pan. vi. 4, 20.)

,

to

ail,

*T*!fcjurnah,

*{rT jurtvd; 13Ttvar, to hasten,

"^t

turnah, Hr^T turtvd;

iv, to dry, ^JTH srutah, t|rl

,

srutvdj *8*{av, to protect, ^Tft wtaA, wrqi

w^a;

to bind, 1JTH wi^aA,

^^r^Tmw^.
substitute ^TT d;
sing, *ft?H
tjtff J

433. Roots

ending in

dhydtvd: or
are

I,

^ ai T gai, to

^ dhyai,
Iftr5TT
i

to meditate,

"UTTfT:

dhydtah,

^^^,

^i^a.

Final

TJ e

and

^TT a, too,

changed to \i; fftpd, to drink,

pitah, M! rq pitvd;

dhe, to suck, Vhftt dhitah,

434.

The following

roots change their final vowel into

i.

do, to cut, f^TTt rf7^, f^rfl c?z^a (Pan.

vn.

4, 40)

^ft so, to finish, ftfWJ sitah,

5toa; *TTma, to measure,

f^Tr^T sthitvdj VT
rf^a,

ftlft rnzYa/^, (*iil!

mitvd; l&l sthd, to stand, f&Tftl sthitah,

to place, f^cf: AzYa^,

f^T Ai^a

(Pan. vn. 4, 42); ^T

M,

to

leave (^*T: Mwa^), f^r=lT

Az^a (Pan.
t

vii. 4, 43).

435. 'JJTWo, to sharpen,

$ft so,

and

chho, to cut, substitute

%JT: AVa^ or
forms

^TTrT: sdtah,
:

f^JHI si'^a or $llril

^ i, or take the regular sa^a (Pan. vii. 4, 41).

^TT a.

436. Exceptional forms

<JT

da, to give,

^: dattah^,
^FRii'KJ

c^STT dattvd (Pan. vii. 4, 46).

sphdy, to grow, forms

ai,

sphitah (Pan. vi.

i,

22).
i,

to call (with Tt pra), forms Mfeilri: prastitah (Pan. vi.

2, 54).

23) and Trert??: prastimah

(Pan. vin.
/ai,

to curdle, forms ^ftTt sinah,

vi. i, 24, 25).

and

^ftrT s^a^, cold

but 'H^flT^J samsydnah, rolled

up (Pan.
,

to grow, forms fft^lpinah; but "OfR:

28).

pydnah

after certain prepositions (Pan.

vi.

i,

437.

The verbs which take Samprasarana

3[
t.

before Kt tah and

WT taahave been mentioned

* See verbs without intermediate

332, 13, and 16.)

t After prepositions ending

preposition lengthened.

in vowels,

^ da may
fffil

be dropt, and the final

3[

and

^ w of a

H^rtl pradattdh,

prattah; "Q^'* sudattah,

^^J suttah.

in

442.

PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS,

AND

INFINITIVE.

209
^WtwicA, to

393 as undergoing the same change in the benedictive and passive. speak, T^K uktah, T15T uktvd, &c.
438. Roots which can lose their nasal
(

345,

10
)

lose

it

before WI tah

and ill tod.

H^
FT7VT

srams, to tear, ^RrT; srastah,

tlMI

srastvd.
its

But

^fi^ s*anrf, to stride, forms

gerund 3&r4l skantvd, and

*yanrf, to flow,

*yantarf (Pan. vi. 4, 3 1 ),

although their

^ n is otherwise liable to be lost.

in

Part.

^R: skannah,

fQftl syannah.

T^na/, to

perish,

and roots ending

l{j, otherwise liable to nasalization, retain the

tT^T namshtvd or

nasal optionally before FIT tvd (Pan. vi. 4, 32).

rahktvd or T1!T raktvd (but only TJKraktah)-, Wlnashtah); If^majj, to dive, mahktvd or HliT maktvd (Pan. VH. i, 60).

TW

^T nash(vd (but

only

f 439. Causal verbs form the participle after rejecting

*R

ay a

kdrayati, lifter: kdritah, but

^Rf^^T kdrayitvd.
form the participle and gerund regularly;
chikirshitah, facfcirQ^t chikirshitvd.

440.

Desiderative verbs
Pqofclfiirf:

PM*Wrr

chikirshati,

441. Intensive verbs Atm. of roots ending in vowels form the participle

and gerund regularly

chekriyitvd.

^jftift

chekriyate, 3a>lfqrf: chekriyitah,

^f1
is

^m

After roots ending in consonants the intensive

^y

dropt

bebhidyate, ^fafijrr. bebhiditah,

^frf^T

bebhiditvd.

Intensive verbs Par. form the

charkarti, ^f3iH: charkritah,

participle

and gerund regularly

^4f<HI charkaritvd.

*TJ

nah instead of

IT:

tah iw

Me Pa^

Participle.

442. Certain verbs take tK

passive, provided they
1.

wA

instead of

faj in the past participle

do not take the intermediate ^ i. Id, to cut, <%: Twenty-one verbs of the Kri class, beginning with lunah (Dhatupatha 31, 13 ; Pan. viu. 2, 44). The most important are,

>jtf:

dhunah, shaken

ifhr: jinah, decayed.

Some of them come under

the next rule.

2.

Twelve verbs of the Div

Pan. viu.
2, 45).
;

class,

beginning with ^sti (Dhatupa^ha 26,

are, g?r:

2335
;

The most important

prinah, loved.
is

dunah, pained

dinah, wasted
3.

jrfai:

Verbs ending in

^ n, which
;

changed into $*.ir or

;

W^\
4.

dr.

'j
;

stirnah, spread

^rtw: birnah, injured

^S:

dirnah, torn

jirnah, decayed.

Verbs ending in ^ d ; fk^ bhid, f*T$i bhinnah, broken ; ft^ chhid, In g^ nud, to But chhinnah, cut. mad, iTO mattah, intoxicated. to wet, the substitution is optional vid, to find, and push, f^ und,

(Pan. viu. 2, 56)

5.

J^:

nunnah or

pr:

nuttah.
in the

Verbs which native grammarians have marked E e

Dhatupa^ha with

210

PARTICIPLES, GEKUNDS,

AND

INFINITIVE.

443-

an indicatory
^T7f:

^rt o;

^W bhuj (^ft bhujo,

Dhatupatha

28, 124), to bend,

bhugnah.

6.

Verbs beginning with a double consonant, one of them being a semivowel, and ending in ^1 d, or J? e, T* at, o, changeable to ^n d (Pan. vin. 2,

43)

fl

fl

*>

JJW

gldnafy, faded.
2,

Except

^ dhyai,

to meditate, w?r:

dhydtah (Pan. viu.

^(trai, to protect,

57)

^TT

%^,

to proclaim,

WTW: khydtah.
is

In
grot

TRghrd, to smell, the substitution

2, 56.)

optional

trdnah or ^nr: fr*a/0# (Pan. viu.

7.

Miscellaneous participles in T: wa/L- ^S: ptirnah, only if derived from *pilr, and then with an optional form ^fTTH ptiritah (Pan. vii. 2, 27);
is said to be trS: purtah (Pan. viu. 2, 57) ; while the participle of T^pri &s^, to waste; ^R: dytinah, from f^.dit;, to ^far: kshinah, from

play, (not to gamble, where

/a^, to

it is

inn dyutah) *
2,

cIP^Tt

lagnah, from c^T

laj,

be in contact with (Pan. vii.

^fhr: sinah

18); also from c*^

$ffa:

to be

ashamed;

^Nr: hrmafy or

^tlf: hritah,

and 9^H: sydnah, coagulated, but ashamed (Pan. viu. 2, 56).

are

s^a^, cold;

443. Native grammarians enumerate certain words as participles which, though by

their

meaning they may take the place of

participles,

classed as adjectives or substantives rather than as participles.

by their formation to be Thus "T^it pakvdh, ripe ; H tctl 1 prastimdh

1
,

^^ilsushJcah, dry (Pan.vi.

i,

206); "tflRtkshdmdh,weak', T$Kkrisdh,thiYi',

isffat kshivdh,

crowded; "J^: phulldh, expanded;

J 444.

drunk, &c.

By

in

ta

and

adding the possessive suffix "^vat ( 187) to the participles T na y a new participle of very common occurrence is formed,

being in fact a participle perfect active.

kritdvdn, one

Thus ^K\
the

kritdh, done,

becomes

who has

done, but generally used as a definite verb.

^
*rr

sa katam kritavdn, he has

made

mat

or in the feminine

sd kritavati, and in the neuter fTrepTT^^ kritavat. declined throughout like adjectives in

They

are regularly

Gerund
j 445. ^T a, take

in

"q

ya.

Compound
IT

verbs, but not verbs preceded

by the negative

particle

ya (without the accent), instead of ?^T tvd. Thus, instead of *3\bMtva, we find H*$$sambMya; but ^rftfi^T ajitvd, not having conquered.
j 446. Verbs ending in a short vowel take

tya instead of

if

ya.

f*f

to conquer, fartijitva, having conquered;

carry, vp^T bhritvd
;

but f%fww

vijitya.

bhri, to
frsy

but

TOfFI sambhritya, having collected.

Except

kshi,

which forms TRsfaprakshiya, having destroyed (Pan.

* Pan. viu.
2,

vi. 4, 59).

49, allows

tJT cfywwa

in all senses of the root

f^ div, except

in that of

gambling; see Dhatupatha 26, i. ?JT dyuna and <4P<.^H( paridyuna, pained, come from a different root, f^f div, to pain, Dhatupatha 33, 51.

-453before

VERBAL ADJECTIVES.

211
^H{ ay

447. Causative bases with short penultimate vowel, keep the causative suffix

T ya

(Pan. vi. 4, 56): WlWlfri sahyamdyati, *li*iH sunyamdyya, having caused to

suffix
is,

assemble.

Otherwise the causative

as usual, dropt : ifiMifii tdrdyati, nn\*\pratarya,

UHnifff prdpdyati forms having caused to advance. having caused to reach (Pan. vi. 4, 57).
$ 448. The verbs called
"*J

UTO

prapya and HIM*** prdpdyya,

ghu

392

*), *TT

md, to measure,

WT

thd, to stand, *TT gd, to

d,

sing or to go, TJT pd, to drink or to protect, ^T hd, to leave, ?ft *o, to finish, take ^JT

not

( (Pan. vi. 4, 69).

do, to cut,

^H^TO avaddya ;

OT sthd,

HWR prasthdya.
,

But TRpd,

to drink,

may form

Jim*f prapaya or wf\ft praptya (Sar.).

449. Verbs ending in

drop their *Tm.

Ex.

may ^m, which do not admit of intermediate ^ may to bow, Vk*$+*\prandmya or H<u m pru ndty a ; T^^am, to T^am,
or

not
go,

^SMIW| agamy a or WMIi^ dgdtya.

\i, or belonging to the
"ifr^

Other verbs ending

in nasals,

not admitting of intermediate

Tan

class,

always drop their final nasal.

Ex.

^Aan, Tf&lprahdtya;
^TT khdya,
Ex.

tan,

nnm pratdtya^. ?f^ khan

and v&[jan form ^n^I khdnya or

or "SfR j/ya. 450. Verbs ending in

vittrya,

having crossed

^n change to fr ^p sampurya, having

it

tr,

and, after labials, into "3Rdr.

filled.

451. Certain verbs are irregular in not taking Samprasarana.

Thus

% ve,
i,

to weave,

forms

Wmpravdya;
Some

"^\jyd, to

fail,
I

d M -rt|

N upajydya

but after ijftpari optionally

452.
destroys,

^ f^^M

*1

parivydya or

^vye, to ^ft^^I parivJy a

;

cover, H<**m pravydya,

(Pan. vi.

4144).
rntndti,

verbs change final

f*ll\fff mindti,

^i

and

into ^TT d.
fi*ii*i

Thus
nimdya;

*ft mf,

^liifff

he

and fH mi,

he throws, form

ctf,

to destroy,
i,

upaddya; c5^ /I, to melt, optionally

flc6l*Ttn/tfy a or f=ic4l*lt?i%a (Pan. vi.

50-51).

CHAPTER
Verbal Adjectives in
cf^:

XVII.

VERBAL ADJECTIVES.
tavyah (or tavyah), ^tfhi: aniyah, a/w/ IK yah
(or k

yah and yah).

453- These verbal adjectives (called Kiitya) correspond in meaning to the Latin participles in ndus, conveying the idea that the action expressed by the
verbs ought to be done or will be done.
cfir:

<*ri^:

kartavyah, <*uul4U karaniyah,

is

to

kdryah J, faciendus. be done by thee.

Ex.

VHMm F^: dharmas

tvayd kartavyah, right

t Versus memorials of these verbs

ifH3(*H*i1 ^fcTCg^rWT irfHHfn:

rPJ

% Another suffix for forming verbal adjectives

rare occurrence;

is

^cOT

eliinah,

which

is,

however, of
fit

to cook, Tf^pach,

wf<?J*n TRiC pachelimd mdshdh, beans

(Pan. in.
i,

to cook;

bhidelimali, brickie, fragile.

96, vart.)

e 2

212
J

VEEBAL ADJECTIVES.
:

$454-

454 In order to form the adjective in ffst, tavyah, take the periphrastic future, and instead of KT td put risq: tavyah.
Thus ^T
c?o,

to give to sing

^THT ddtd
TTtfT gdtd

^TW^ft ddtdvyah

n gai,

TTrf^J gdtavyah
STcT^K jetavyah

gdniyah

'TO ^eyaA

f^Tjz, to conquer

*m*f\q:jaya
t

*.bhu, to be
to do of kri,
/rl,

*?ferTT bhavitd
:

bhavitavyah

bhavaniyah
karantyah
:

kartavyah

kdryc

to

grow old

kshvid, to

sweat
to ^J>I budh,
i,

kshveditd

kshveditavyah

kshvedaniyah
ft V*t1 **i bodhaniyah

kshvcdyah

know

bodhitd

H f^l H'M bodhitavyah

J

to draw

meeze
mih, to sprmkle
,

kuchitd

'^i

Pi ri **|: kuchitavyah ^^lfl<4t kuchaniyah

uchyc

T^T medhd
'TTfT Crania

medhavyah
gantavyah
drashtavyah
darsaniyah

to go

nV, to see
hs,

rashtd

to bite

^FT damshtd

damshtavyah

damsaniyah

Caus.

,to
cause to be
bhdvayitd
to

bhavaniyah

bhdvyah

I^bubhush, wish to be

^rcfhr.
bubhushitd

I^T:
bubhushyah

bubhushanfyah

bobhuyitd

bobhuyaniyah

bobhuyyah

Int.-sft^bobhu
bobhavitd
Int. ^fftrir bebhidy

^riHff)^;
bobhavaniyap,

nHqt
bobhavyah

^i^^rflu:
bebhiditd

bebhidaniyah
^Trfhj:

bebhidy ah
it

455. In order to form the adjective in

sufficient to take the root as
it

aniyah,

is

generally

intermediate

i,

appears before inq: tavyah, omitting, however, Guna-vowels before and putting ^rfa: aniyah instead.

^nl^t aniyah have, of course, the semivowel for their final element, and The ^n( ay of the there can be no occasion for the intermediate 3[ i.
causative

and the

^y

after

consonants of intensives and other derivative

bodhani'^^budh, ^tvqfif bodhayati, ^tVTfat
"3rf*r<*rffan

verbs are, as usual, rejected,

yah

f>?<*

bhidy

"srftrenr

bebhidy ate,

bebhidaniyah.
irt

456.

In order to form the adjective in

yah (i&jinyat, &c.)

it

is

karshtd or krashtd.

2
(

karshtavyah or krashtavyah.

456, 3.
or

Never takes Guna

is

345, note), except before terminations

which have

This termination

-$ 45 6

VBKBAL ADJECTIVES.
^nffar.

213
aniyah and to cut off
^rfffffar.

generally sufficient to take the adjective in

ani.

Thus

HqHl*T. bhav-am-yah

becomes H*n bhavyah;

f|i|Hl<j:

chet-ani-yah,

%W: chetyah; qqflq: vay-ani-yah, $n: veyah;

bodhyah.
1.

bodh-ani-yah,

^m:
:

A few

more
e,

special rules, however, have here to be

cz,

mentioned

Final ^TT a,

*ft o,

become *
(Pan. in.
i,

e.

^T

rfd,

to

give, ^itf

deyah

itaai, to sing, *m: geyah.

2.

98;

vi. 4, 65.)

Final

^i and ^z take Guna, as before vpfaaniya; filji, ^W.jeyah, be conquered, different from ^m: jayyafy, conquerable f% kshi,
;

to to

destroy,
vi.
i,

^^: ksheyah,
Final

different

from

Tspzn

kshayyah, destructible (Pan.

81).

u and

15 ^,

under the same circumstances, are

changed to *r^ av y
necessity
is

or,

after wsr^r avafya,

when a high degree of

expressed, to
^friHl

^n^

dv;

H*i:

bhavyah or

^^^m<:

avasya-

bhdvyah ; be pure.
as

f^w
Final

m^ viprena
appears as

uchind bhdvyam, a

Brahman must

7u

if it

T^ uv

before VMl*J anfya, appears

^u

before

nya;

i^gu, to sound, 'NHl ^ guvaniya, i^Qguya.

before
*r:

3. Final

^n

and

^r

ya/t,

but not before kdryah

;

wfN:

aniyah, take

Vriddhi instead of Guna.

120, 124.)
4.

wA:

trnfc

pdryah.

(Pan, in.

i,

Penultimate

ri,

which takes Guna before

vfiMlq:

aniyah, does not take

Guna

before ^: yaA, with few exceptions

i,

(Pan. in.
kill,

no).

But

tf^krip, to do,
;

; ^m: vridhyah, "%$m dri&yah forms W&T. kalpyah; ^(^chrit, to

^5: chartyah (Pan. in. i, no) or ^q: varshyah (Pan. in. i, 120),
c|7^
ferity

^vrish, to sprinkle, ^q: vrishyah Penultimate ^re becomes

^^;

|i^: kirtyab.

5.

Penultimate ^e and g'w take

fs^vid,

Guna

before

ij:

ya/^, as

before w?ffan aniyah;

^ivedyah;
is

yj^tush, $fta: soshyafy.

6.

Penultimate
aniyah,
i,

^r a, prosodially short, before

yah, but not before WH*N:

is

lengthened, unless the final consonant

a labial (Pan. in.

vah,

98; 124);

has, to laugh,

*TRm:
;

hdsyah

TRH

vdhyah.
^J

But $r^ sjo,

to curse, ^"0^ sapyah

cyK /a6A, c?i: labhyah.

The

remains likewise short in ^pw: fakyah, from ^a^, to be able ; in from to bear (Pan. in. i, 99), and some other verbs*. *T?T. sahyah,

^sah,

^f^khan forms WTt kheyah (Pan. in. derived from ^ khai, to dig han
;

i,

in), which, however, may be

or Tmq: ghdtyah.

W. vadhyah
mad,

* Panini (in.
preposition.

i,

100) mentions only

1^ gad, T^

^^ char, 1H yam,

if

used without
s'ak,

The

Sarasvati (in. 7, 7) includes

among

the Sakadi verbs,

$T^

sah,

214:

VERBAL ADJECTIVES,
457.

457-

The following

are a few derivatives in

*tt

yah, formed against the general rules:

1,

3Ji|

guh, to hide,

may form

iTS'.guhyah or llt^K gohyah (Pan. in.

109, Kasika);

to cherish, ^fmijushyahj after TTHT prati and ?J^ graJi, to take, *l^l grihyah,

op*/
Jf*TT

vad, to speak,

73TJ udyah, in composition (Pan. in.

*J,

i,

106; 114.

brahmodyd kathd, a story told by a Brahman) ;

i,

bM,

to be, &JIJ bhuya, in

j

composition (Pan. in.

107.

^T^ TH* brahmabMyamgatah,&Yr\.ved atBrahmahood)

in analogy to the gerunds in

^T^sas, to rule, f^T^T* s'ishyah, pupil.

We
^

find
:

IT

inserted before

*l

f/a$,

1 jra,

in the following

verbs
i,

to go,
"<

^mt

ityah;

<

S ^M > *

praise,

^JW* stwtyah- 3^vri,

to choose,
*

^WJ

vrityah;
ejfiq:

c?n, to

regard,

^Wt

drityah;

to bear, *[ Z^ri,

^m:

bhrityahj

kri, to do,

krityah.

But many of these forms

are only used in certain senses,

and must not be

considered as supplanting the regular verbal adjectives.

*fltjn

Thus ^TJ guhyah and

cF
n

gohyah both occur ; g^i: duhyah and

^./

<ftT?n

dohyah, &c.

458. Verbs ending in ^T ch or

change their

final

consonant into

A:

or

'T

if

the

following

1 ya
are,

(nycit)

requires the lengthening of the vowel.

"^Spach, Hi

w pdkyamj
3, 69).

^pT

bhuj, to enjoy,

>rW bhogyam,

but

> ft5*f
;

bhojyam, what

is

to be eaten (Pan.

vn.

There

however, several exceptions.

Verbs beginning with a guttural do not admit

the substitution of gutturals.

Likewise the following verbs: ^^^fl/, TR^ydch, ^T^rMcA,

TR^ pravach,
Mii^i ydjyam,

^^ricJi, m*{tyaj, '%*{puj, ^H^ aj, '3*{vraj, ^^vanch (to go). Thus *TRT ydchyam, Xt^T rochyam, n<4 *! pravdchyam, W3? archyam, wirq tydjyam,
\

(Prakriya-Kaumudi,

p.

55

b).

Infinitive in

turn.

formed by adding g to&, which has no accent. The base has the same form as before the KT ta of the periphrastic future, or
J 459.
infinitive is

The

before the K*n\ tdvyah of the verbal adjective.

|*r

budh,

^ftfVTJ

bodhitum.

(See J 454.)

Ex.

^ratf

^affrr

krishnam drashtum vrajati, he goes to see

it is

Krishna

>f

RTc5:

bhoktum kdlah,

time to

eat.

Verbal Adverb.
J

460.

rule, is

By means of the unaccentuated suffix ^f am, which, as a general added to that form which the verb assumes before the passive ^ i
is

(3rd pers. sing. aor. pass., J 403), a verbal adverb

to eat,

formed.

From

*hr bhojam ; from in pd,

Ex.

to drink, irni

pdyam.

Ex.

*p^ bhuj,
is

vfof 33Tfcf

agre bhojam vrajati, having frequently used twice over.

first eaten,

he goes.

This verbal adverb

most

*ThT rftf ?TffiT

eaten and eaten, he goes (Pan. in. 4, 22).

It is likewise

bhojam bhojam vrajati, having used at the end of

compounds;
loudly.

%VcfiTt

dvaidhamkdram, having divided ; TincRTt uchchaihkdram,

- 46

CAUSATIVE VEBBS.

215

CHAPTER
J 461.

XVIII.

CAUSATIVE VERBS.
Simple roots are changed into causal bases by

Guna

or Vriddhi

of their radical vowel, and by the addition of a final ^ i. The root is then treated as following the Bhu class, so that ^i appears in the special tenses as
^Tir

ay a.

Thus \^bM becomes mfa bhdvi and

bodhi and
qtaiifri
is

^T^Trrif

bhdvdyati, he causes to

be

^V budh becomes ^fv

462.

bodhdyati, he causes to know.

The accent

on the a of dya.
which the vowel takes either Guna or Vriddhi are as

The

rules according to

follows
1.

Final

\i and \i, 'Su and

f*3H smi,

"31 tf,

ri

and

^ri take Vriddhi.

makes laugh.

Thus

to laugh, wi<4<*fci smdyayati, he

lead,

ft

m, to

niMMPn
i
i

ndyayati, he causes to lead.

^plu,

to swim,

q <4 fff pldvayati, he makes swim.

bhdvayati, he causes to be.
kdrayati, he causes to

V^bhu, to be,
"8f

^m^ffl

kri,

to make,

cBK^fn

make.

cjT

kri, to scatter,

cFK^frt kdrayati, he causes to scatter.

2.

Medial

^, TM, ^n,
t?fc?,

"<5& followed by a single consonant, take Guna;

^rf becomes

Thus

to

know,

q^n vedayati, he makes know.

n4Mfn
kalpayati, he renders
is

fU budh,
^Tff A;ri/,

to

know, uv*4rn bodhayati, he makes know.

to cut, ^R4ifl kartayatiy he causes to cut.

to be able,
fit.

JSj^klip,
3.

Medial ^T a followed by a single consonant

TfffJ

lengthened, but there are

many exceptions.

sac?,
,

to to

sit,

*u^*ffn sddayati, he sets.

^TTHifir pdtayati, he
fells.

fall,

Exceptions
I.

Most verbs ending

in

W^aw

do not lengthen their vowel :

^TPTgram, to go, 'i*mfii gamayati, he

makes

go.
stride.

"aW kram, to

stride,

ai^MPn kramayati, he causes to

Verbs

^X^am which do lengthen the vowel are, to desire, 4rH^?f kdmayate, he desires; Caus. cFTTTfiT kdmayati, he makes cli^Jtam,
in

desire.

^SW am, to move, wiTn amati, he moves

^*T cAam, to
,

Caus. ^i*iMPn dmayati, he makes move. Caus. SIH*lfH chdmayati, he makes

eat.

eat, ^nrfTT chamati,

he eats

if it

means to

see, ^IIWjflT sdmyati,

he sees; Caus. ^n*mf sdmayati, he shows;

but ^nPjflrr samayati, he quiets.

unless it means to eat, Tf^fftyachchhati; Caus. <i*iMfiiyamffyaf*, he extends; but *IH*|(H yamayati, he feeds.
,

216
TH nam,

CAUSATIVE VERBS.
to bend, optionally lengthens
its

$462used without a preposition

;

vowel

if it is

*f 1*1*4

fr ndmayati or i*f^Pff namayati, he bends.

If preceded

by a preposition, the

vowel always ought to remain short (Dh. P.

19, 67).
if it is

^^vam,

to vomit, optionally lengthens

its

vowel

used without a preposition;

If preceded

q*i<4Pn vdmayati or ^*T*tfrf vamayati, he makes vomit.

by a preposition,

the vowel always ought to remain short (Dh. P. 19, 67)*.

II.

class of verbs collected

19, i),

by native grammarians, and beginning with ftf ghat (Dh. P. do not lengthen their vowel. The same verbs may optionally retain their short
pers. sing, aorist of the causative passive
(

vowel in the 3rd

405).

The following

list

contains the more important

among

these verbs

CAUSATIVE.
Eoot.
1
.

3rd Pers. Sing. Pres. Par.

,

3rd Pers. Sing. Aor. Passive.

THf ghat to strive

ghatayati
vyathayati
'

aghati

2. ^T^T vyath, to fear

avyathi aprathi

3.
4. 5. 6.
7.

Tf^prath,
TEf<2[

to be famous

prathayati

mrad, to rub

mradayati
krapayati
tvarayati
'

amradi
akrapi
atvdri
ajvari

"a^ro;), to pity

FTC

yar, to

hurry
fever

W^j^r, to burn with

nr nat, to dance

jvarayati
natayati
srathayati

8.

9. ^T*^*rfltfA, to kill

10. ^prJtMm, to

actf

pravanayati
prajvalayati
or

11. *3c*jval, to shine "f"

12.

5e|"I

fc^ prdjvali

W smn,

to regret

smarayati
<;<4fa darayati
srapayati
or
or

asmari

13.

? c?n, to respect, (not to tear)

^i. adari
^TOTnJ asrapi

14. ^IT sra, to boil

15. '^TTjna, to slay, to please, to

or %i9rftf ajnapi

sharpen
1

(?),

to perceive

6.

T^ cAa?, to tremble
T^ mac?,
to rejoice, &c.

chalayati

or
or

achali

17.
1 8.

madayati
dhvanayati
dalayati (optional)
valayati (optional)

amadi
adhvani
adali
avali

el^c?^aw,to sound, to ring

or or

19.

^<^

dal, to cut

20. 21. 22.

23.

^W vaZ, to cover
Hdc^skhal,
to drop

or

skhalayati (optional)
trapayati
jM<4flT

or 'iHjaiPco askhali
or ^TGtl PM atrapi
or ^HJtP'if akshdpi

W^trap,

to be

ashamed

"^ kshai, to wane

*

kshapayati

Dhatupatha
-^ 'riM

19, 67.
i

IT^

^MHI*i5IT^ft)

It

seems indeed that the verbs without prepositions

only, are optionally mit (i.e. short-voweled), while with prepositions they are mit,

and

nothing

else.

See, however, Colebrooke, Sanskrit

Grammar,

p. 317, note.

t Without a preposition, and optionally with a preposition.

See note

*.

4^3-

CAUSATIVE VERBS.
unufnjanayati
old
n,MPn.;arflya/
<.n *4 fit or Tl| rajayati or raft/a-

217
^BWfa or^miPn
"v
i

24. *{*{jan (Div), nasci 25. **[jri (Div), to

26.

ajani

grow

P< or

V 41 ft. ajari

Tfrafl;(Bhu),tohunt,todye*

^i<JPi or Tujfuartf/i

2 7-

H 3^t

o f flfftoi, to fade

yssPn

or

JiMMPn glapayati

Tiyl% or ^*|ifM apiapi

28. ^WT *n4f, to 29.

wash

^MMPn
flMin

or WIHMPfl gnapayati

W^
^mii

or *!%HfVj asnapi

^J

rant, to cherish

or

qif^Pn vanayati
4n*UMllf(?)
J

or ^iqiPn ffan

30. TR^/jAaw, to

go

lh*UMlTT<)r

p/twya/*
i.

v Hi(Vl or ^i mifVj aphani

Note

Some
if

of these verbs are to be considered as mil,

e. if

as having a short vowel in

the causative,
sections of the

employed

in the sense given different

above j while

they occur again in other

conjugated likewise as

Dhatupa^ha and with

meanings, they

may be

ordinary verbs.

463.
I.

Some
all

verbs form their causative base anomalously

Nearly

verbs ending in *n a, and most ending in

* e, ^ ai,

isft

o,

change-

able to ^na, insert i{p before the causal termination. (Pan. vii. 3, 36.)

Thus

^r da, to give, ^rflT daddti, he gives to give.

^m^Prt ddpayati, he causes

^ de,

to pity,

^q^ day ate, he

pities

^iMilfrt

ddpayati, he causes pity.

;

^t do, to cut, ^rfw ddti or

^rfff

dyati,

he cuts

^imifiT ddpayati,

he

causes cutting.
t*

dai, to purify, ^nrfw ddyati,

he purifies

<imifd ddpayati, he causes

to purify.
II.

Other irregular causatives are given in the following list. Their irregularity consists chiefly in taking \p with Guna or Vriddhi of the radical
vowel
;

sometimes in lengthening the vowel instead of raising it to

in substituting a

Guna

and frequently
1.

new
;

base.

*,

to go, in T&ffyi adMte,

{.

he reads

Caus. ^tuiimfd adhydpayati, he

teaches
2.

(Pan. vi.

I,

48.)

3.

^ri,togo,^r&forichchhati; Caus. ^ftqfaarpayati, he places. (Pan. vi 1.3, 36.) to sound, Caus. ^m^knopayati y he causes to sound.
*aft

4.

Jg{kniiy, Jgtffttknilndti; kri, to buy, rfHiurfd krindti; Caus. arimfrf Jcrdpayati,

he causes to buy.

5.

^n^ kshmdy,

to tremble, U4{m^ kshmdyate

Caus. HHIM^Pri kshmdpayati,

he causes to tremble.
* If the causative

(Pan. vii. 3, 36.)

means

to hunt, the
1-1

^n

is

rejected

!>HjPd *JJ|I^ rajayati mrigdn,

he hunts deer; <nM(TT ^tf^'P*

ranjayati vastrdni, he dies clothes.

We may

also

form

but vi^iPn ardnji

is

wrong,

t With a
writers varies,

preposition, but optionally without a preposition.

The usage

of the best
19,

and Indian grammarians vary

in their interpretation of

Dhatupatha

67-68.

See note (on preceding page).

J Rut
-f-

understand, M KI1 *W Prt pratydyayati.

^prati+i,to approach, forms its causal regularly when it means to make a person Otherwise the causative of ^t is formed

Pf

218
6.

CAUSATIVE VEKBS.
chi, to

463-

fa

collect, f^nftfif chinoti;

Caus. *nnqP7T chdpayati, or regularly

7.
8.

^rqqPd chdyayati, he causes to collect. (Pan. vi. i, 54.) chho, to cut, "SFlfw chhyati ; Caus. ^m^Prf chhdyayati, he causes to cut.

to be awake, W*tf%jdgarti; Caus. *wwfajdgarayati, he rouses. *R*[jdgri, to conquer, *wfajayati; Caus. vWFtfnjdpayati, he causes to conquer. 9. -ftr/i,
10. ^fr^T daridrd, to be poor, ^ft^rfrT daridrdti
;

Caus. ^(X.$qfr daridrayati,

he makes poor.
1 1.

^hft c?^2, to shine, ^hflrf didhite ; Caus. ^fanifrr didhayati,

he causes to shine.
;

12.

Caus. he causes to sin to sin, ^^qfcf dushayati, g^fff dushyati; <j^dush, he demoralizes. (Pan. vi. 4, 91.) also ^faqfif doshayati,
>JrftflT

13. i^dhu, to shake,

dhunoti ; Caus. VfT^rfw dhunayati, he causes to shake.

;

14. JJTjoa, to drink,

ftRfiff pibati

Caus.

TTTPptrfTT

pdyayati, he causes to drink;

also vpai, tfTOfw pdyati, to

be dry.

mfa pdti; Caus. W5*lfTT pdlayati, he protects. 15. iCTjt?^, 1 6. iftpri, to love, Tfanfir prindti ; Caus. iftTprfif prinayati, he delights.
to protect,
1 7.

to roast, ^J^5rflT bhrijjati ; Caus. ^r^irflT bhrqjjayati, he ^R3^ bhrajj, roast, or >TWTfif bharjjayati, from gi^ 6Ary.
bhij to fear5 f^Hfir bibheti;

makes

1 8. tft

Caus. >rrT^ bhdpayate or NlquH bhishayate,

Hl^^lfd bhdyayati.

he frightens; also regularly

19. f?Tm^ to throw, fa^Til minoti,

(Pan. vi.

I,

56.)

and

ift

mi, to destroy, PHHlfri mindti,

form

their Caus. like

^o.
2,1.
T:t

*TT

m<^.

ri, to flow, or to go, ufaff riyate; Caus.\cnrflT repayati,

he makes flow.

^ he

ruh, to grow, T^frr rohati;

Caus. <|^qPff rohayati, ft^rfff ropayati,

3, 43.)
ctftaw

causes to grow.

(Pan. vn.

22. 3ft U, to adhere,

Poifflfif lindti

and

Uyate; Caus. oil H H Pd linayati,

if the root takes the
;

Idpayati, and riH^Pri Idyayati; and,

form

c5T /a, also

f7Te?niffTM/0y^(Pan.vii.3539).
23. ^T^a, to blow, *%\favdti;
24.
"3ft

Caus.

vfi

The meaning varies seePan.vi. 1,48; 51. ^ ^ PrT vdjayati, if it means he shakes.
vdpayati or ^nitrfif vdyayati,
if it

vz,

to obtain, ^fk
to

#e^ ; Caus.

^Tq^rfiT

means
25.
26.

make

conceive.

(Pan. vi. I, 55.)

^ve, to weave, ^fRvayati; Caus. ^HRfw vdyayati, he causes to weave. ^^t vevit to conceive, ^^^ vevite; Caus. M^nPrf vevayati.

27. 28. 29.

^ vye, to cover, ^^(vyayati;

t /z, to jj^
f

^ means
it

Caus. ^[T^?(vydyayati, he causes to cover. choose, fjififnvlindti; Caus.^qqfftvlepayati, he causes to choose. to fall, ^ftrrw siyate; Caus. ^iri^Pri $dtayati, he fells ; but not, if sad,
to move.

(Pan. vn. 3, 42.)

30. $ft

s>

to sharpen, ^irfcf syati;

Caus.

^ll^^Pri

sdyayati, he causes to sharpen.

31. fw^sidh, to succeed, teqfrr sidhyati; Caus. Tnwrfif sddhayati,

but
32.
*f) so,

he performs ; he performs sacred acts. ^hnrfir sedhayati, to destroy, ^rfr 5y^; Caus. m^Pd sdyayati, he causes to destroy.

-$ 466.
33. ^pc sphur,
to

CAUSATIVE VERBS.
sparkle,
FJ*f?r sphurati
;

219
and

Caus. tuUUlfd sphdrayati

^Mttmfh sphorayati, he

makes

sparkle.

34. ^ORnsphdy, to grow, WHTUTT sphdyate;

to grow.

Caus. miiqqfa sphdvayati, he causes

35. fars?tti, to smile,

also

36.

w*fb smayate ; Caus. WIM^ smdpayate, he astonishes; WN^fri smdyayati) he causes a smile by something. (Pan.vi. i, 57.) Arz, to be ashamed, faff! fid jihreti ; Caus. ^Mlfff hrepayati, he makes
(Pan. vu. 3, 36.)
to call,

ashamed.
37.

%Ave,

^[^hvayati; Caus.

grnHTfo hvdyayati, he causes to call.

kill.

38. -^Aa/i, to
J 464.

kill,

T$fnhanti; Caus. imnifiT ghdtayati, he causes to

As

causative verbs are conjugated exactly like verbs of the

Chur

class, there is

no necessity

for giving here a

complete paradigm.

Like Chur

verbs they retain ^n^ay throughout, except in tfce reduplicated aorist and the benedictive Parasmaipada ; and they form the perfect periphrastically.

The only
ZFUMfrf,

difficulty in causative

verbs

is

the formation of their bases, and the

causative, forms Pres. Par.
J[,

formation of the aorist.

7fr,

Thus

^ kri, as

and Atm.

kdrayati, -te; Impf. %4<*im^,

;

akdrayat, -ta; Opt.

;

kdrayet, -ta

Imp. cFTC^,
($

lff,

kdrayatu, -tdm
;

Red. Perf.

kdraydnchakdra, -chakre
uifd,
T^,

342)

Aor.

iH^cfc^,

achikarat, -ta
^,

Fut.

kdrayishyati, -te;

Cond. ^obKf<Mm,

akdrayishyat, -ta;

Ben. wtfft\kdrydt ; <*!Ml? kdrayishishta. If a causative verb has to be used in the passive, ^m ay is dropt (J 399), J 465. the root remains the same as it would have been with ^n^ay. but Hence Pres.
Per. Fut. ^Rfqril kdrayitd;
ohliVfr

kdryate, he

is

made

to do

Clmrt

ropy ate, from

CT

ruh, he

is

made

to

grow.
perfect

The
is

imperfect, optative,

and imperative are formed regularly.

The

periphrastic with the auxiliary verbs in the Atmanepada.

In the general tenses, however, where the n ya of the passive disappears ($ 401), the causative ^n^ ay may or may not reappear, and we
J 466.

thus get two forms throughout (see Colebrooke, p. 198, note):

Fut. ^mfrut bhdvayishye or

mfV^ bhdvishye.

Cond.

iHmcjfijuJi

abhdvayishye or ^HHifVuj abhdvishye.

Per. Fut. HNfrdlf! bhdvayitdhe or Hlf^ril^ bhdvitdhe.

Ben. MHfrtflJI bhdvayishiya or Mrf^mln bhdvishiya.

First Aor. 1.
1.

p.

^MHfufa abhdvayishi

or ^MtfVf^ abhdvishi.

2. p.

3.

^WNfuai: abhdvayishthdh or ^wif^8T: abhdvishthdh. p. ^Wli^ abhdvi.

220

DESIDERATIVE VERBS.

467-

CHAPTER
Desiderative bases $ 467.
are formed

XIX.

DESIDERATIVE VERBS.

by

reduplication, the peculiarities

of which will have to be treated separately, and by adding

^s

to the root.
is

Thus from ^bh4

468. These

to be,

^^

bubhush, to

wish to be.

The accent
roots.

on the

reduplicative syllable.

new

bases are conjugated like

Tud

^J^TTfo

bubhu-

shdmiy "gij^fa bubhtishasi, ^]tflT bubhushati, yj]TO: bubhushdvah, &c. The roots which take the intermediate ^ i have been given before $ 469.
(

33 I y

34)

as

we ^

as those

to

know,

fefef^r vividish, to wish to

which take intermediate ^ i. know ; from TT tri, to

Thus from f%^ vid,

cross, finrfT!^ titarish

or firRfcttitartsh, to wish to cross.

470.

As a

general rule, though liable to exceptions,

it

may be

stated that bases ending

in one consonant

may be

strengthened by Guna,
bubodhishati ;

if

they take the intermediate

also
<|r

i.

Thus

^V budh forms
2, 10);

^rnfvflPil

u^ div, !^P*f*lPiT didevishati:

But fa^
In
fact,

kri,
i.

chikarishati; ^dri,

f^fc^flT

didarishati.

bhid, Des. f^ftTf^rfk bibhitsati (Pan.

3J? guh,
?[
i>

vii. 2, 12). *J"3^frf jughukshati (Pan.

no Guna without

inter-

mediate

471.
is

But there

are important exceptions.

In

neither strengthened nor

weakened ;

rud,

many cases the base of the desiderative ^^f^^fw rurudishati. Other bases may

be strengthened optionally ; lp^ dyut, f^jfrf^fi didyutishate or f^rftflf^TI didyotishate. Certain bases which do not take intermediate ^i are actually weakened ;

1.

Verbs which do not take Guna, though they have intermediate ^

i.

*$ritdj to cry, l^jft^frt rurudishati j T3i$vid, to know,

to steal,
2.

n^Ni^MuT

vividishatij *|^ mush,

^rnHfn

mumushisJiati.

(Pan.

i.

2, 8.)

Verbs which may or may not take Guna, though they have intermediate 3[ *. Verbs beginning with consonants, and ending in any single consonant, except

TI

y or

^ v,

and having

3[

or

"3"

u for their vowel. (Pan.

i.

2, 26.)

or f^ftfw^Icf ^(^dyut f Pt^Prmfl didyutishate

didyotishate.

But

f^
and

div,

r^rmflf

didevishati or, without

fe<JNirrt

*,

^^5^
^[ i,

dudyushati (Pan. vii.

2,

49)

l^rrif,
3.

f^fiT^TI vivartishate or
^T w,

vivritsati.

Verbs ending in ^ i or

not taking intermediate

lengthen their vowel;

final

^[

ri

^ri

become t^ir, and,

after labials, "3ft ur.

(Pan. vi. 4, 16.)

f*{ji, to conquer,

Mt'iT^nr jigishati;

^ yu,

to mix, ^^HiTl yuyushati.

kri,

to do, P^iqi^rn chikirshati

IT tri,

to cross, (anl^Ta titirshati.

fill,

^
If,

mri, to die, *J*J^nT mumurshatij "^pri, to

3{ i,

*J^*ni pupurshatL

however, they take intermediate

they likewise take

Guna.

f^Rsmi,to smile, ftrwftRW sismayishate j ^pu, to purify, fcT^fciUrt pipavishate; t^gri, to

swallow, f*fl[ri^ff[jigarishatij ~dri, to respect,

f^U^ln

didarishate.

4.

472.

DESIDERATIVE VERB&

221
to
kill,

*1*{gam, to go, as a substitute for

before the

^,

to go, and

f^Aan,

lengthen their vowel

^s

of the desiderative.

(Pan. vi. 4, 16.)

IT^ yam, wishes to go.

^rfvfn'iitirt adhijigdmsate,

he wishes to read ; but ftflftncfir jigami$hati, he

T^han, fi MI* fri jighdmsati, he wishes

5.

to kill.

71^ tan, to stretch, lengthens

"fl^tftn,
fii

its

vowel optionally.

(Pan. v. 4, 17.)

cii^fcr titdrhsati or

fflrtUfHI titariisati;

but also

rrtrtfHMfil titanishati.

(Pan.

vn. 2,49, vart.)

6.

^H^san, to obtain, drops

(Pan. vi. 4, 42.)

its

*^n and lengthens the vowel before the ^* of the desiderative.

TO^san, ftis
7.

Pn sishdsati ; but

(VmfnMfn

sisanishati.

to sleep, and ?T^3TaA, to take, 1&{svap,

Hi^racAA,

to ask, shorten their bases by

Samprasarana.

(Pan.

I.

2, 8.)

3T^ #raA, flT^TKjflT jsgrAfifoAalt.

TX?^prachh, frnjf^a^fif piprichchhishati.
8.

*3TR.sca/>, tjjjtifii sushupsati.

The following verbs shorten their vowel to ^ before the vn. 4, 54), and reject the reduplication. J{t (Pan.
*ft rni (HTHlfci mindti, to destroy,

^*

of the desiderative, insert

and

fatitfif mino/t, to throw),

Des.

(miTm

mitsati.

m md

(TlflT wia^', to

measure,

r*iilri mimite, to

measure, TTrf mayate, to change), Des.

farwfii mitsati,

lirwn mitsate.
to give, c^w,
;

^ da

(^rfk

rfarfa^',

Dh.

P. 25, 9,

rfrfw,

Dh. P.

22, 32; Iffif c?ya/, to cut,

it is

do,
cf.

Dh. P.
392;

26,

39

but not ^Tfac?a/, to cut, dap, Dh. P. 24, 51, because

not ghu,

^ITfr

day ate, to pity, den,

Dh. P.

22, 66), Des.

f<{

rW

frt

ditsati, f<Jcfhl ditsate.

VT c?A<f (^Vlfir dadhdti, to

9.

place, Vlflf dhayati, to driuk), Des.

:

fVrofn

dhitsati.

Other desideratives formed without reduplication

,

to begin (T>Trtra&ate), Des. f^Hin ripsate.

,

to take (77HTT labhate), Des. fco ti n lipsate.

to be able (^T^tflT saknoti, ^r^fif sakyati), Des.
frf

^151^

sikshati.

to fall (Wfil^fl^^), Des. fa r to

pif sa*i.
pitsate.

go (T&XH padyate), Des. Ps ro n

to obtain (-*n>flfK dpnoti), Des. ^tifn (psa/i.

,

to to
,

command
grow

( siJIM

^ Prt jnapayati), Des.

sflnffn jfttpsati.

(^flftfff ridhnoti), Des. ^rSfrf frfsart.

to deceive (^ftft dabhnoti), Des. vfHrfiT dhtpsati or fVr^rfk dhipsati.

to free (*J^flT munchati), Des. H^Hfd mokshate or

^g|ri mumukshate, he wishes

in the sense of injuring

for spiritual freedom.

,

to finish (THflfK rddhyati), Des.

nfd Oli^ fd prati-ritsati,

fd rirdtsati (not

(Pan. vii. 4, 54, vart.), otherwise

472. Certain verbs which are
really desiderative bases.
it,

ful r

f^w Pn riritsati).
Bhu
class are

commonly considered

to belong to the

fafchrHrt chikitsate, he cures.

titikshate,

he despises. gup, '$*l**M jugupsate,

he bears.

he investigates. Tlt^ man, HlHltlH mimdihsate,

222

DESIDERATIVE VERBS.
"^WTT bibhatsate, he loathes.
sisdmsate, he sharpens.

473diddmsate, he straightens.

^^ badh,

^\^(ddn,

^^THn

Reduplication in Desideratives.
473. Besides the general rules of reduplication given in 302-319*, the following special rules with regard to the vowel of the reduplicative syllable are to be observed in forming the desiderative base :

Radical ^r a and ^n d are represented by ^

(Pan. vn. 4, 79).

in the reduplicative syllable

if^pach,
474. ^B^ av

films; fri

pipakshati

^qr sthd, PriKiuPff tishthdsati.

radical

and ^TT^ dv, standing as Guna or Vriddhi of

in the reduplicative syllable, provided they

^u

or

"SR

w, are

represented by

5[

be preceded by

^ p,

TR ph,

m, Hy, Tr, <Z, ^t>,

^j

(Pan. vn. 4, 80).

fq<n*r f*ll(lf pipdvayishati, (Red. Aor. <l lfl

IH i^ apipavat.}

See

375.

3
But

mrimfri bibhdvayishati, (Red. Aor. ^nrfaRT^ abibhavat.) yw, "ftnrf^ 1 Pn yiyavishati, and Caus. Desid. f<f *4 q f*< H fif yiydvayishati.
1 i

*ju, fnni
"5 WM, ^ji
I

P*t

q Hr jijdvayisJiati, (Red. Aor. ^^il

"**

<m^ ajijavat.)

q Pq H (n nundvayishati, (Red. Aor.

<j^in^antfna0a.)

See

375 f.

475. Roots f^sru, to flow,

swim, ^g cAyw, to

fall,

may

^ru, to hear, "grfrw, to run, Tpru, to approach, &plu, to u in the under similar circumstances optionally take ^ * or

reduplicative syllable.
nfri sisrdvayishati or

tjtsmfVHrfi susrdvayishati ; but the simple desidera-

tive

^Jt^n
,

susrushati only.

the Caus. of

^{svap, forms

^J^TtrfirqfTf sushvdpayishati.

J 476. Roots beginning with a vowel have a peculiar kind of internal Thus (Pan. vi. I, 2) reduplication, to which allusion was made in $ 378.

+ ^fil ais + ishati. at forms + 5[^fTT /^ + ishati. ^rfr^ aA;5A forms ^rf%^ + ^ft achiksh + ishati. uchchh forms ^fc-cd 4- ^^fll uchichchh + ishati.
forms ^f^T5T
477. If the root ends in a double consonant, the first letter of which
is

^w, ^d, or

then the second letter

is

reduplicated.
archich-ishati.
ubjij-ishati.
is

^T^ arch,
o*j\ ubj,

^nK^^n
& 1*11*1*1111

"^ und,

^(^r^Hfn

undid-ishati.

In

"^Hrs%

the last consonant

reduplicated.
or $/Hifi^fii irshyish-ishati.
(

Pn ir shy iy -ishati

(Pan. vi.

1, 3, vart.)

In the verbs beginning with

cn^fi

Jcanduyati

498) the final

^y

is

reduplicated.

CBSU kanduy,
*

-ishati. ""^T^fVrMHPcl kanduyiy

Exceptional reduplication occurs in

3,

MciiHn

chikishati, besides

^fsin

chichishati,

from "N chi (Pan. vu.

58)

in f^TEThrfTf jigUshati

from

fi? M (Pan. vn. 3, 56), &c.

~$

481.

INTENSIVE VERBS.

223

CHAPTER
as they are { 478. Intensive, or, are

XX.

INTENSIVE VERBS.
sometimes
called, frequentative

bases

convey an intenseness or frequent repetition of the action the simple verb. Simple verbs, expressive of motion, someexpressed by times receive the idea of tortuous motion, if used as intensives. Some
to

meant

intensive bases convey the idea of reproach or disgrace, &c.

$ 479.

syllable, are liable to be turned into intensive bases.

Only bases beginning with a consonant, and consisting of one Verbs of the Chur
There
are,

class

cannot be changed into intensive verbs.

however, some

exceptions. go, though beginning with a vowel, forms rt, vui<k|H aldtyate, he wanders about ; TO{ a, to eat, VH^ll^ a&dsyate ; to go, <enj 5^ ardryate and wrfir ararti (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. u. p. 2 16) ; ifl^ tfrnu,
^T7 at, to

Thus

to cover, **uTJM^ drnonuyate (Pan. in.

$
1.

i,

22).
:

480. There are two ways of forming intensive verbs

By

a peculiar reduplication and adding

*i

yd

at the end.

This yd has

the accent.
2.

By

the same peculiar reduplication without any modification in the final

portion of the base.

The

latter

form occurs

less frequently.

It

has

the accent on the reduplicative syllable.

Bases formed in the former

way admit of Atmanepada

only.

Ex.

v$J)hu

^^J5Tff bobhuydte.

Bases formed in the

to

latter

way admit of Parasmaipada

also

only, though, according

some grammarians, the Atmanepada

Ex. v^bhu,
qflHcTird
*ft*J7T

may

be formed.

bobhaviti or 'ql^fri bobhoti.

The Atmanepada would be

bobhute.

Roots ending in vowels retain the TJ ya of the intensive base in the general tenses ; roots ending in consonants drop it. Hence ^fojifaiTT bobhuyitd, but '-Hto^faHT sosuchitd. (Pan.vi. 4, 49.)
$ 481.

When Hya
fq
^TT

is

added, the effect on the base

($ 389).
;

is

generally the
final

same

as in

the passive

and benedictive Par.

to

Thus

vowels are

lengthened:
&oruyate.

chi,
is

gather, ^rvflu^ chechiyate

to

to hear, ^J 6ru,

sft^d

changed

\i

VT dhd, to place, ^frqrr dedhiyate.

ri

becomes
to
fill,

$$.ir, or, after labials, ^i^iir:

tri,

to cross,

TTiTfinr

tetiryate;

^prit

tfl^5d poptiryate.
is

Final

ri,

however, when
ri
:

following a simple

consonant,

changed

to tf rt,

not to ft
it

kri, to do,

MdHqii chekriyate.
ar:

When

following a double consonant

is

changed

to

we

srtiri^

to

224:

INTENSIVE VERBS.
jTimffii

483like

remember,

sdsmaryate.

These intensive bases are conjugated

It should be observed, however, bases of the Div class in the Atmanepada. that in the general tenses roots ending in vowels retain ^ y before the

intermediate ^ i, while roots ending in consonants throw off the *r ya of Thus from ^J?I bobhuya, ^tJjftnrT bobhu-y-itd; the special tenses altogether.

from

^rfozx bebhidya, ^rfaf^iTT bebhiditd.

482.

When

T^ya

is

not added, the intensive bases are treated like bases

of the

Hu class.

The rules of reduplication

ri

that verbs with final or penultimate ^j

($489, 490), and verbs in ^ri start in the reduplicative syllable. ^TT
IfTfirtfiT

Observe, however, have peculiar forms of their own from a base in ar, and therefore have

are the same.

tCTjar, J^tri,

cTTTTf*

tdtarmi; 3rd pers. plur.

tdtirati.

483. According to the rules of the

Hu class, the weak terminations require

^twtfvr bobodhmi; but ^fawr: bo;

Guna

($ 297).

Hence from ift^^bobudh,

budhmah.
bobhumah.
Impf.,
3. p.

From

^^ bobhu,

sftoftfa

bobhomi, TTfwfrr bobhavdni

but ^t^t

Remark, however, that in 1.2. 3. p. sing. sing. Imp. \i may be optionally inserted
:

Pres., 2. 3. p. sing.

T^ftfl bobodhmi or ^t^ftfo bobudhimi; ^TtfH bobhomi or ^t*f=flfH bobhavimi. And remark further, that before this intermediate ^ i, and likewise before

weak terminations beginning with a vowel,

sonants do not take
"^fanJrfVl

intensive bases ending in con-

Guna

(Pan. vii. 3, 87).

Hence ^tyftfa bobudhimi,

IMPERATIVE.

bobudhdni,

^{<sfl^^

abobudham.

From

f%^ vid,

PRESENT.

IMPERFECT.

or

vevedmi or vevidimi

avevidam

veviddni

^iw or
^%fw or

Tf^tfq

^T^?^

or ^nf%^t:

%f^fe
veviddhi
or

vevetsi or vevidishi
^f%c(tfir

avevet or avevidih ^T^Ti^ ^P|<(lf^ avevet or avevidit

or

^T^

vevetti or veviditi
^"f^TJ vevidvahy

vevettu or veviditu
^fc|^|'c(

&c.

^TTfol avevidva

veviddva

Rules of Reduplication for Intensives.

f 484. The simplest way to form the peculiar reduplication of intensives, is to take the base used in the general tenses, to change it into a passive base

by adding IT ya, then to reduplicate, according to the general rules of reduplication, and lastly, to raise, where possible, the vowel of the reduplicative
syllable

by Guna (Pan.
to abuse,

vii. 4, 82),

and

^{

a to

^TT

d (Pan. vn.

4, 83).

fq

chi, to gather, ^ffar chiya, ^^NNrff chechiyate;

^%fw checheti.
^sffaitffc
;

^[qkrusya,

'^Tsfiifft

chokru&yate;

chokroshti.

trauk, to approach,

^R traukya, TTt^l^d totraukyate

ff^^ftj totraukti.

-f

489*r rek, to suspect,

INTENSIVE VEEBS.
3H retya,
TT^nif rerekyate
;

225
irfti rerekti.

f ^ W,
rz,

kri, to do,

frw

to scatter, to
fill,

kriya, %sfonr chekriyate (Pan.vn.4, 27); ^SrfS charkarti. tfHi foVya, ^frrft chekiryate ; ^rofft chdkarti. ($ 482.)
Tft^ft popuryate
;

^purya,
<%a,

TnrrfS

pdparti .
?n5RfS sarsmarti *.

n, to remember,
T

w5 smarya,

*nm*M sdsmaryate ;
;

da, to give, <fhf

/we, to call,
485.
,

^fhrit dediyate

^T^rfTT c/arfa/.

^%a, ^fg&johuyate ;

ift^fTT johoti.
t

The roots ^raffcA, IZ^srams, VSR^dhvams, VR(bhrams, 1R(ka8, ^\pat ^pad,

place
,

ft

n^ between the reduplicative syllable and the root.

(Pan. vn.

4, 84.)

to

go round, ^ffaxJTTf va nt vachyate; c|/l^Mlfif vantvaficMti.

to tear,
fall,

n1tf*K

sa nt srasyate;
rfa

WJ}y*X\fn

sanisramstti.

l4^

dhvams, to
,

^ilw<^W

nt dhvasyate;

^ftt4^1 fd

dantdhvamstti.

to

fall,

TTttf^lT 6a nl bhrasyate- "Tfhj^ftflT bantbhramsiti.

^*flofcfflfd chanikasiti.

as, to go,
,

^TfNr^Trf c^a nf kasyate;

to

fly,

Mnlmsn^a

nipatyate; M^l M dl fcf pantpattti.

to go,

MrOsn^a

nipadyate; 'MHlMrflfd panipadtti.

w* skadyate;

^K^

skand, to step,

^^t^rETW cAa

H<\\*3i\fa chanlskanditi.

486. Roots ending in a nasal, preceded

syllable (Pan.

by ^T a, repeat the nasal in the reduplicative

is

vn.

4, 85).

The repeated

nasal

treated like

^w, and

the vowel, being long

by position,

is

not lengthened.
,

to go,
,

*H n jahgamyate ;

l'l*flfw jangamiti.

to roam, ^^J^Iff
i

bambhramyate; ^OTtfk bambhramtti.

nTrftfir janghaniti.

^^ han, to kill,
The

M M n janghanyate;

roots *F{jap, to recite, to yawn, <^T daA, to burn, <^cfem,/, to 487. *{*^jabh, bite, >T5^6Aa%', to break, TO^as, to bind, insert a nasal in the reduplicative syllable.

(Pan. vn.

4, 86.)

W^j'op, *\*\"injanjapyate; wNfijanjapfti.

^^T dams, <;^<4n damdaiyate;

488.

^?j\n

daihda&ti.

The

roots

^cAar and

chanchuryate and

TR^phal form theu- intensives as, ^-sOfn chaftchuriti or ^^fff chartchtirti.

(Pan. vin. 4, 87.)

pamphulyate and M ^rt^fff pamphuliti or M^f^H pamphulti.

489. Roots with penultimate

ri insert Tit ri in their reduplicative syllable.

vn.

4, 90.)

p^tfnV,

<0<jiMn va

vrityate; lO^fllPn 0a r< vrittti.

In the Parasmaipada these roots allow of six formations.

l^rt
1111

(Pan. vn.

4, 91.)

va r

vrittti.

^nrf

varvarti.
varivarti.

qf^nlfn va

ri vritfti.

qr^fS

t?a rl vrittti.

'lO^fH vanvarti.

* This form follows from Pan.

vn. 4,

92,

and

is

supported by the Madhaviya-dhatuvrittu

Other grammarians give

Wwfd sdsmarti.

226
490.

INTENSIVE VERBS.
The same
in applies to roots ending

490used in the Parasmaipada. (Pan.

^J n,

if

vii. 4, 9 2 -)

krij

^TTtfiT cha

r kariti.
ri kariti. ri kariti.

^%fS charkarti.
^ft^ffff charikarti.

cha cha
491.

^Tfarft

charikarti.

A few frequentative bases

to sleep,
hf^*trf

are peculiar in the formation of their base *.

^P^ svap,

soshupyate; but ttKflPx sdsvapti.

(Pan. vi.

1, 19.)

syam, to sound, ^?Ptu-Mn sesimyate; but ^T^TTff samsyanti.

or vye, to cover, qfl*lrt veviyate; but qiqiPfl vdvydtiT
(

483) n*tPn vdvyeti.

i,

vus, to desire,
,

to

m^Ps vdvashti. 'IN^n ^NftiW cheUyate; M*Pn cheketi. regard,

vdvasyate;

(Pan. vi.

20.)

(Pan. vi. i, 21.)

vi. i, 29.)

to grow, ^fi^jMgrfytife;
31)94*1*1}

m*MiPn_p^py^. (Pan.

sw, to swell,

sosuyate or ^i*yl*4n sesmyate; ^nSfflT sesveti.

(Pan. vi.

i,

30.)

An,
,

to

kill,

^Jll-M^ jeghniyate; ^TZfajanghanti.

(Pan. vii. 4, 30, vart.)

to smell, %TTta7T jeghriyate;

,

lliPn jdghrdti.

(Pan. vn. 4, 31.)

to blow, ^TWT^lTff dedhmiyate; ^TWnfff dddhmdti.

(Pan. vii. 4, 31.)

to swallow, ^HTtiiM ff jegilyate ; WT^TfS jdgarti.

,

(Pan.

vm.

2, 20.)

to

lie

down, ^H^^Mri sdsayyate;

derivative verbs

^t^rfrf seseti.

(Pan. vii. 4, 22.)

$ 492.

From

new

derivatives

may be

formed, most

o1

which, however, are rather the creation of grammarians^ than the property
of the spoken language. Thus from HH^Pri bhdvayati, the causal of ^ bM, he causes to be, a new desiderative is derived, f^HHf^MPlT bibhdvayishati, he

So from the intensive ^jrnr bobhuyate, he existence. formed ^jfrRfiT bobhuyishati, he wishes to exist really ; then a new causative may be formed, ^^pimrPrf bobhuyishayati, he causes a
wishes to cause
exists really, is

wish to exist really ; and again a new desiderative, ^jfj-mP^fa bobhuyishayishati, he wishes to excite the desire of real existence.
*

The formation and conjugation

of the Intensive in the Parasmaipada, or the so-called

Charkarita, have given rise to a great

deal of discussion

among

native grammarians.

According to their theory "T^ yah, the sign of the Intensive

pressed by cj^i luk.

Atmanepada, has to be sup-

By

this suppression the

changes produced in the verbal base by Tj^yaii

would cease (Pan.

Anangakarya, phanges not affecting the base, such as reduplication. Changes of the root that are to take place not only in the Intens. Atm., but also in the Intens. Par., are distinctly mentioned by
Panini, vii. 4, 82-92.

i. i,

63), except certain changes which are considered as

About other changes, not

directly

extended to the Intens. Par.,

grammarians
i, 19,

differ.

Thus the Prakriya-Kaumudi forms

wfff cheketi

*flHlPN soshopti, because Pan. vi.

prescribes TFnjpfiT soshupyate; other authorities

form only UUjlPH sdsvapti

i,

sdsvapiti.

Colebrooke allows

(p.

332), because Pan. vi.

21, prescribes

chekiyate,

declines

and the commentary argues in favour of ^fflT cheketi. But Colebrooke (p. 321) to form ^rfiffi sesinte> because it is in the Atm. only that Pan. vi. i, 19, allows

*lPtfffl sesimyate.

Whether the

Perfect should be periphrastic or reduplicated

;

is

likewise

a moot point

among grammarians

some forming "sffa^facKTC bobhavdnchakdra, others

bobhuva, others

^TT^

bobhdva.

- 49 6

'

DENOMINATIVE VERBS.

227

CHAPTER
493. There are

XXI.

DENOMINATIVE VERBS.

many

verbs in Sanskrit which are clearly derived from

nominal bases*, and which generally have the meaning of behaving like, or treating some one like, or wishing for or doing whatever is expressed by the
noun.
like

Thus from ^TR h/ena, hawk, we have 3*H*M syendydte, he behaves a hawk from putra, son, yflWrt putriydti, he treats some one like
;

a son, or he wishes for a son.

derivative syllable.

Krishna

Some denominatives are formed without any Thus from ifm krishnd, ;*nfif krishndti, he behaves like from f^pitri, father, fmnfn pitdrati, he behaves like a father.

These denominative verbs, however, cannot be formed at pleasure; and many even of those which would be sanctioned by the rules of native grammarians,
are of rare occurrence in the national literature of India.

These verbs should

therefore be looked for in the dictionary rather than in a

rules,

grammar. A few on their formation and general meaning, may here be given. however,
Denominatives in ^ ya, Parasmaipada.

494.

By

adding

expressing a wish.

^ yd to the base of a noun, denominatives are formed From ift go, cow, Jnqfir gavyati, he wishes for cows.

These verbs might be called nominal desideratives, and they never govern a

new

accusative.

adding the same Hya, denominatives are formed expressing one's looking upon or treating something like the subject expressed by the noun. Thus from "^f putra, son, ijcfhrfa fsntf putriyati sishyam, he treats the pupil like
J 495.

By

a son.

By a similar process imrr^W?f prdsddiyati, from mn^prdsdda, palace,

to

means

behave as

if

one were in a palace

HHU^I^frf
if it

ffigjf

firer:

prdsddiyati

kutydm bhikshuh, the beggar lives in his hut as

496. Before this
I.

were a palace.

H ya,

Final ^T a and ^TT d are changed to \i; *pTT sutd, daughter, ^Jdl^PH surfyati, he wishes
for a daughter tt

and

^u are lengthened;
kavi,

rfftpati, master, McflMffl patty atiy he treats like a master;

kaviyati,

poet, FV) *l fit

he wishes to be a poet.

They

are called in Sanskrit

*TfiJ

fc5>{ lidhu,

from fc^T
p. 543.)

linga,

it is

said,

a crude sound, and

dhu, for

dhdtu, root.

(Carey,

Grammar,

t Minute distinctions are made between ^^"^hrfff asaniyati, he wishes to eat at the proper time, and ~4i ^| 11 *fif! asandyati, he is ravenously hungry; between <J^ nT Miff udakiyati, he wishes
for water,
is

and ^ ^ ^ fri udanyati, he starves and craves for water; bet ween V1llffi dhandyati, he
and VffafH dhaniyati, he asks
for

greedy for wealth,

some money. (Pan.

vii. 4, 34.)

G g 2

228
3.

DENOMINATIVE YERBS.
becomes

497f^pitri, father,

^ri

rt,

^ft o

becomes

*&^av,

au becomes ^TT^Tay;

pitriyati,

he treats

like a father;

TT waw, ship, ^TRlflf ndvyati,

he wishes

for a ship.
4. Final T

is

dropt, and other final consonants remain

unchanged;

<Jf^ rdjan,

king,

^1

fl Jjfrf rdjiyati,

he treats a
;

man

like a

king; nm^payas, milk,

i.

MM^fK payasyati,
iit^ namas,

he wishes for milk

^^vdch,

speech, ^T^Tfcf vdchyati (Pan.

i, 19).

4, 15);

worship, fHmfiT namasyati, he worships (Pan. in.

Denominatives in

if

ya, Atmanepada.
T*

$497.

second class of denominatives, formed by adding

like, or

yd, has

the meaning of behaving expressed by the noun.

following the
final letters
1.

They

differ

becoming like, or actually doing what is from the preceding class by generally
difference in the modification of the

Atmanepada*, and by a
is

of the nominal base.

Thus
hawk,
$7)r(m7i syendyate,

Final ^r a
like a

lengthened

^frf syena,

he behaves

hawk
;

he sounds

; $T^ sabda, sound, ^i^|<Mri sabddyate, he makes a sound, he becomes much ; *jpjr bhrisa, much, vpfrnfir bhrisdyate,

OFF kashta,

mischief,

oFFnTff

kashtdyate,

he plots
the

tfoHr

romantha,

ruminating,

dHITilrf romanthdyate,
is

he ruminates.

The

final

of

feminine bases
instead;
girl.
2,

generally dropt, and

girl,

masculine

base

taken

^pT^t kwndri,
3,

'$HKl4ri kumdrdyate, he behaves like a

(Pan. vi.
i

3641.)

and

4.

496 ; ^f% he becomes pure. Final 5^ n is dropt, and the preceding vowel is lengthened TTJf^ rdjan, king, '<M|i|ri rdjdyate, he behaves like a king; ^'fcH^ ushman, heat,
"SJ^t^ suchiyate,
;

3. Final ^ uchi } pure,

and

T u,

ri, ^rt o,

^ au

are treated as in J

<f4^THW ushmdyate,

it

sends out heat.

Some nominal
vidvasyate or
milk,

bases in

^s

and

i(t

treated like nominal bases in ^j a.

Pc|^||i|7i

may, others must (Pan. in. i, n) be Hence from (Vg ^ vidvas, wise,
1

vidvdyate, he behaves like a wise

xnTFTW paydyate,
it

man

from
;

"MU^W payasyate or

becomes milk
an Apsaras
i,
;

from
brihat,

apsaras, xsmi^i^H apsardyate, she behaves like

great, ^^|i|H brihdyate,
498.

from ^TT

he becomes great.

(Pan. in.

12.)
i.

Some

verbs are classed together by native grammarians as Kandvadi's,

e.

beginning with Kandu.

it
(

both in Parasmaipada and Atmanepada, and keep through the general tenses under the restrictions applying to other denominatives in Tya

They take

*T ya,

501).

Nouns ending

in ^T a drop

it

before

"*T

ya.

Thus from ^TT^ agada,

free

from

* Those that

may

take both Parasmaipada and Atmanepada are said to be formed by

^T^ kyash, the rest by

or
-te,

^T^ kyan. Thus

i,

from c^tf^W

lohita, red, c5Vf^rrr^flf or fl lohitdyati

he becomes red. (Pan. in.

13.)

-$

502.
he
is

DENOMINATIVE VERBS.
free

229

illness, vf'itirt aaadyati,

from

illness

he gives pleasure

from

from *pl sukha, pleasure, *pwftf sukhyati,

kandu, scratching,

H|MPn

or

n kanduyati or

-te,

he scratches.

Denominatives in

sya.

499. Certain denominative verbs, which express a wish, take

^T sya

instead of
;

1 ya.

Thus from
lavana,
salt,

T5|fa kshira, milk, JSil^t^fn kshirasyati, the child longs for milk

from <4*Q

wsKUt^fn
;

lavanasyati, he desires salt.

Likewise WH4 fulfill ascasyati, the mare

for the bull (Pan.

longs for the horse

<jm^fd vrishasyati, the

and

cow longs

vn.

i,

52).

Some
nominal

authorities admit ^HT sya

^TO asya,

in the sense of extreme desire, after all

bases.

Thus from *PJ madhu, honey, H^t Pn madhusyati

Denominatives in
ni**j

or TScHmflT madhvasyati, he longs

for honey.

kamya.

500. It is

usual to form desiderative verbs by compounding a nominal base with

4IWJ kdmya,
to be dropt.

a denominative from
;

VR kdma, love.
i

Thus

^<a <* i*<< Pn putrakdmyati, he has

the wish for a son

Put.

<a

P*-q n

putrakdmyitd.

Here the

^y,

it is

said, is

not

liable

(Siddh.-Kaum.

vol.

n.

p. 222.)

$501. The denominatives in ^ ya are conjugated like verbs of the Bhu Pres. y dim ft putriydmi, Impf. class in the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada.
aputriyam, Imp. ^l^rrfin putriydni, Opt. "J^Hnc putriyeyam.
kyendye,
Pres.

fyendyeya.

Impf. 4J$i|HHJ asyendye, Imp. ^Hltj Syenayai, Opt. In the general tenses the base is or ^Hl^

^f\\putriy
4, 50).

but when the denominative

^y

is

preceded by a consonant,

TJ

may

or

may

not be dropt in the general tenses (Pan. vi.

Hence, Per. Perf.

putriydmdsa ( 325, 3), Aor. xH^lfMM aputriyisham, Fut. putriyishydmi, Per. Fut. g^ftin putriyitd, Ben. ^iMIfi putriydsam.

From ^nin"S From

Syendyate, Per. Perf. ^HI^IHI^I tyendydmdsa, Aor.

a&yendyishiy Fut. ^JHlfrtM syendyishye, &c.

^f?T^ samidh, fuel,
^TfJTvrfiT

samidhyati, he wishes for fuel

Per. Fut.

samidhyitd or

^rfJTfVnn

samidhitd, &c. (Pan. vi. 4, 50).

Denominatives in

WT

aya.

formed by adding ^SR aya to certain nominal bases. 502. the act implied by the nominal base. They may be looked upon as They generally express verbs of the Chur class. They are conjugated in the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada, some
are
in the

Some denominative verbs

Atmanepada
and

only.

that apply to verbs of the

aorist, &c.) 5

They retain ^H^ay in the general tenses under the limitations Chur class and causatives (viz. benedictive Par., reduplicated

their radical vowels are modified according to the rules applying to the
class
(

verbs of the

Chur

296, 4).

Thus from

^TT^T pdsa, fetter,

r^m^iMrn

vipdsayati, he unties;

from w*{varman, armour,

sathvarmayati, he arms, (the final

mundayati, he shaves

from

^Smunda, shaven, ^P^ sabda, sound, ^i^MPn s'abdayati, he makes

^n

being dropt); from

a sound (Dhatupatha 33, 40); from fifW

(Pan.

mis'ra,

mixed, fii^^fn misrayati, he mixes

m.

i,

21; 25).

230
Some

PREPOSITIONS AND PARTICLES.

of these verbs are always Atmanepada.
lifts

503
tail,

Thus from Tp$ puchchha,

i, 20).

utpuchchkayate, he
is

up the

tail

(Pan. in.

to be

vin,

these affixes

added to nouns formed by the secondary affixes *H(mat, ^l(vat, must be dropt. From tsrf'q^ sragvin, having garlands,

srajayati.

If

^HT aya

is

masculine base.
white (Pan. vi.

added to feminine bases, they are generally replaced by the corresponding From T^ffi syeni ( 247), white, 3<4imfn syetayati, he makes her
3, 36).

Certain adjectives which change their base before

ishtha of the superlative, do the

;

same before ^HT aya.

ijg mridu, soft,

^*tPn

mradayati, he softens

g^ dura,

far,

^cf^fcf davayati, he removes.

Some nominal

bases take ^T^PT dpaya.

Thus from WiQ

satya, true, ^KMiMMirr satydpayati,

he speaks truly; from ^TO artha, sense,

WinnTfr

arthdpayati, he explains.

Denominatives without any

to

Affix.

every nominal base may be turned into a 503. According denominative verb by adding the ordinary verbal terminations of the First Division, and ^T a is added to the base, except treating the base like a verbal base of the Bhu class.
authorities

some

where

it

exists already as the final of the in the

nominal base ; other

final

and medial vowels take

Guna, where possible, as

Bhu

class.

Thus from

^Wt

krishna,

effHUfH Jcrishnati,

he behaves

like

Krishna; from

5RT?ST maid,

garland, *Uc*5lflT mdldti, it is like

amdldsit; from olffe
bird, ^rfff vayati,
like a father
4, 15);

Aor. a garland, Impf. vi*iic5if^ama/a, cRTPrfff kavayati, he behaves like a poet ; from f^ kavi, poet,
flies like

vi,
is

he

a bird

from fxnj

pitri, father, PM n ^.fn pitarati,

he

from

TTf^ rdjan,

king,

TTTRflf

rdjdnati,

he

is

like a

king (Pan. vi.

CHAPTER
PREPOSITIONS
504.
called

XXII.
PARTICLES.
joined with verbs, and are then
;

AND

The

following prepositions
i.

may be
4,

Upasarga in Sanskrit (Pan.

beyond,
apa,
ava,
off.

5861

148).
dhi).
^Tcj

^rfcf ati,
^5itj

^rfv adhi,
^srftj

over

(sometimes fv

anu, after.

api,

'Siw

down (sometimes ^va).

g: duh,
ill.

upon (sometimes ft pi), W( d, near to. T^

fVr ni,

^rfa abhi, towards.

ud, up.

^TJ upa,

next, below,

into,

downwards,
if

fa: nih, without.

Trfif

"q^ para, back, away, tjft pari, around, back. ^ sam, together. ^ f% vi, apart. uddtta on the
first syllable

pra, before.

prati,

w, well.

They

all

have the

except ^rfa abhi.

Certain adverbs, called Gati in Sanskrit, a J 505.

term applicable

also to the

Upasargas (Pan.

i.

4, 60),

may

be prefixed,

like prepositions, to certain verbs,

particularly to *^bhu, to be, ^R(as, to be,

of kri,

to do,

and i\p{gam,

to go.

-$ 57'
achchha ;
e. g.

PREPOSITIONS

AND

PARTICLES.

231
($

fUMIfl achchhagatya, having approached

^nj:

445)

achchhodya, having addressed,

adah

e. g.

^:^?l

adahkritya,

having done it thus, vrir^antar; e.g. ^wftW antaritya, having passed e. g. between. ^J?* alam; ^ic^T1' olaAkfilya 9 having ornamented. e. g. Wfei'lfl astahgatya, having gone to rest, having ^TCcr astam;
set.
e.

^nfa: dvih;

e. g.

wfa|jl dvirbMya, having appeared,

disappeared,
($

fin:: tirafy;

g.

fir^pj tirobhuya, having

ip: purafy

e. g.

puraskritya, having placed before

89, II. i).

TRgiprdduh; e.g.
sat

prddurbhuya, having become manifest.

expressing regard or contempt
regarded.
Uiqif^ sdkshdt;
like
e.
;

*n^

and ^nn^

asat,

when
made

e.

g.

Wtir^HJ asatkritya, having dis-

g.

UlJ!r<sjit<J

sdkshdtkritya, having

known. Words
(Here the final
final
^BT

in ^raft suklt,
is

^r

a ofyr$ukla
is

a or

^TT

changed
;

to

made white. SJ^l^d suklikritya, having to ^ i. Sometimes, but rarely, changed ^n d. Final ^ i and TM are lengthened ;
lG{an and "W^as
like

ri is

changed

to "ftri

final

are changed to

^1;

e. g.

TTri^[rw rdjikritya,

*^<jw
sound ;

urikritya y
e.

having made king.) Words having assented.

Words

like iit^ urt, in

TQRl(khdt t imitative of

g. ifirj<7T khdtkritya,

having made khdt, the sound produced

in clearing one's throat.

506. Several of the prepositions mentioned in J 503 are also used with nouns, and are then said to govern certain cases. They are then called Kar-

mapravachaniya, and they frequently follow the noun which

is

governed by

them (Pan.

i.

4, 83).
is

The

accusative
ufiff

governed by

^rfir ati,

beyond;

^rfa abhi,

towards;

part, around;
t

prati, against; ^rg anu, after;

ati ne&varah, Is'vara is

^q

upa, upon.

Ex.
"

govindam

not beyond Govinda;

;

haram prati haldhalam, venom was for Hara (4 UMH H ^ d vishnumanvarchyate, he is worshipped after Vishnu ; ^T*J ^ft ^Ut anu harim surah,
the gods are less than Hari.

The

ablative

is

governed by

Tfflf

prati, Tjft part, ^rcr

apa

^rr d-

Ex. H%:

U^iT bhakteh praty amritam, immortality in return for faith;

t.mtyoh, until death;

wr

^R

f^TTW^ft

^ ^:
xrft;

Jpffc

d
it

apa trigartebhyo

vrishto devah,

has rained away from Trigarta, or Trigarta, without touching Trigarta.

f^TTW: pari trigartebhyah, round

fH^fi 4IMIMIU

Ex. ITT governed by TQupa and ^rfv adhi. nishke Mrshdpanam, a is more than a Nishka Karshapana
locative is
;

The

vpa

adhi panchdleshu brahmadattah, Brahmadatta governs over the Pafichalas. 507. There are many other adverbs in Sanskrit, some of which may

here be mentioned.
i.

The

accusative of adjectives in the neuter

may

be used as an adverb.

232

PREPOSITIONS

AND

PARTICLES.

507;

Thus from ^: mandah,

^fftr
2.

slow,

^ $% mandam mandam, slowly, slowly

truly.

ttghram, quickly

g^f dhruvam,

Certain compounds, ending like accusatives of neuters, are used adveras TreT^rfli yathdsakti, according to one's power. For bially, such
these see the rules on composition.

3.

Adverbs of place

^rTT antar, within, with loc. and gen.

between, with ace.

WO antard,
without, with
UH'41

between, with ace.

SHiTOl antarena, between,

with

ace.;

WKTi^ drat, samayd, near, with

nichaih, low.
^iv:

ace.

far off,

with

abl.

^fff :

vahih, outside, with abl.

ace.

f^TF^T nikashd, near, with ace.

"5rih

Tqft. upari,
tft^h

above, over, with ace. and gen.

uchchaih, high, or loud,

abl.

with gen,
before.

adhah, below, with gen. and fro tirah, across, with ace. or loc.

^re: avah, below,

t(rT

iha, here.

purd,

W^samaksham, ^^^(sdkshdt,

in the presence.

'3&R\^(sakdsdt,

with gen. ^RT amd, ^r^T sachd, *nofT sdkam, ijTS purah, before, ^WT samd, ^TTV sdrdham, together, with instr. ^r5T7r: abhitah, on all sides,
from.

with ace.

'WTrf: ubhayatah,

on both
with

sides,

with ace.

iwwn^samantdt,
^rfrTcjf

from

all sides,

gt duram,

far,

ace., abl.,

and gen.

antikam,

near, with ace., abl.,

4.

and gen.

ty\)ch

ridhak, 1^<* prithak, apart.

Adverbs of time

nidi, prdtar, early,

^rnf

say am, at eve.

Tfii

f^T

diva,

by

day.

-*Hj|i|

ahndya,
early.

by
7

day.

^far doshd,
at

g ?^ yugapad,
to-morrow.
fgTTT^ chirdt,

by night. the same time,

naktam, by night.
"?r:

T^T ushd,

^f?r: purvedyuh, yesterday.

Tzfto^

^nr adya, to-day. ^: JvaA, to-morrow,

%A, yesterday.

^glfk paredyavi,

fqt chiram, "Nr^T chirena, f^TTR chirdya, fro*T chirasya, long. ^RT *awa, *Hlt^ sandt, ^Rl^ sanat,
jyok, long,
^it

perpetually,

rm,

quickly.
1

-51%:

sanaih, slowly.

^j?r:

sadyah, at

once.

TOffw samprati, now.

5^j9wwar, gj: muhuh,

"gtT

^:

bhuyah, ^rt

vdram, again,
before.
after,
-gK

^r^

sa krit, once.
after,

jowm, formerly.
immediately.

^ purvam,
iren^a^M^,
always.

urdhvam,

^n^ sapadi,

with abl.

*rnj./a/w,

once upon a time, ever,

5ac?a,

^npn adhund, now.

^inT
^Tc5

iddnim, now.

^T
:

^mi santatam,

^ifVf^ anisam,

a/am, enough, with dat. or instr.

5.

Adverbs of circumstance

ipn mrishd, fi^in mithyd, falsely.

tushnim, quietly.

*nTTojr

mandk,

|ifi^

^^/,
in

little,

rranflf

*pn vrz//a,

yn

mudhd,

in vain.

*nfa 5am^, half. a whisper,

firo

^^TWTTf akasmdt, unexpectedly,

mithah, together.
ingly,
cirrt

-^fsj updm&u, m*r: pray ah, frequently, almost,

aft^

^nfhr ativa, exceedcertainly.

kdmam,

josham, gladly,

-ei^^ avasyam,

- 5 10

COMPOUND WORDS.
kila, indeed.

233
t\TT vind, without, with ace.,
abl.

*nj khalu,

certainly.

instr., or abl.

^JTT rite,

without, with ace. or

dush{hu, badly.

iftmndnd, variously.
luckily,

gg

sushfhu, well,
et

jj
?

f^WT dishtyd,
abl.
?

mffir

prabhriti,

cetera,

and the

rest,

with

ffrl^ kuvit, really?

t/t,

^if%T^ kachchit, really

5pT

*ri katham,

how

^fw

itthqm, thus.

w0, as

^ftfiu Aarir tva, like Hari.

^va/,

enclitic; ^fOTf^Aflrivo*,

like Hari.

Conjunctions

and other
then,

Particles.

508. ^ni atha, ^nft aMo,

now

^fa
yet.

i/e,

thus,
cAc/,

ijfij
if.

ya</i,
IT

when.

yadyapi, although,
not.
ITT

rt^ifq tathdpi,

^
md

a, ^ft no,

cAa, and, always enclitic, like gwe.

"fiiw

kimcha, and.
either

n f4
or.

or

FT

sma, not, prohibitively.

TC vd, or.
(*T

TTva ^TV^,

wi^i
thus.

athavd, or.
jrT

^^

eva, even, very

*3

sa eva, the same.)

tdvat, as

rt evam,
as.

nilnam, doubtlessly,
^TJ

ff^ tathd, as -so.

yena

^^ydvat'irt^ ?R tena, if^yadj^

tathdhi,

much
^

inn yathd
correlatives,
ftirg

tad,

and other
^w,
^it

because

therefore.

dvjif^

thus,

for.

param,

kintu, but.

f%w

cAe/,
;

^IT chana, subjoined to

'^fly^ kaschit,
"^if

the interrogative pronoun

;

fa

iw, any,

some
for,

as

some one

odvj^H kathanchana,
tfTT

any-

how.

t\

Ai,

because,

uta,

TcTTfT utdho, or.

TIM,

ndma, namely.

pratyuta, on the contrary,

svit,

perhaps.
fl/w,

again.

n*fy?^ kimsvit, perhaps, nf nilnam , certainly.

^rf^

rg wanw, Is it not 1 ^rftr ^1 api cha, also, even,

J 509.
re,

^e, Ht
!

^o, vocative

particles,

^n? aye,

Aaye,

Ah

are, Fie

CHAPTER
J 510.

XXIII.

COMPOUND WORDS.
The power of forming two
or

more words

into one,

which belongs

to all

of the

Aryan languages, has been so largely developed in Sanskrit that a few more general rules of composition claim a place even in an elementary
a

grammar.

which form a compound drop their inflectional terminations, except the last. They appear in that form which is called their base, and when they have more than one, in their Pada base
general
rule,
all

As

words

80).

Hence

^cj^iu: deva-ddsah, a servant

of god; IMg^t: rdjapurushah,

a king's

man

lW*jy. pratyaamukhah, facing west. H h

234

COMPOUND WORDS.

511-

may

be retained.
lose

in the prior elements of a compound 511. Sometimes the sign of the feminine gender This is chiefly the case when the feminine is treated as an appellative,
its

and would

distinctive

meaning

by losing the feminine

suffix

vi. 3, 34) ; kathibhdryah, kalydnimdtd, the mother of a beautiful daughter (Pan. If the feminine forms a mere predicate, a Kathi for one's wife (Pan. vi. 3, 41). having
it

^*T:

generally loses
3,

its

feminine suffix

TjffrR>Trt sobhanabhdryap, having a beautiful wife

(Pan. vi.

34

42).

The phonetic rules

as explained in

to be observed are those of external Sandhi with certain modifications,

24 seq.*

$ 512.
adjectival,

Compound words might have been

and adverbial.

divided

into

substantival,

Thus words

like

Hrg^J: tatpurushah, his man,

blue lotus, f^n^ dvigavam, two oxen, ^rirpjjft agniand smoke, might have been classed as substantival ^"aH^: dhumau, bahuvrihih, possessing much rice, as an adjectival; and iWltyfffi yathasakti, according to one's strength, as an adverbial compound.
ftcSfara nllotpalam,
fire
;

sion, classing all

Native grammarians, however, have adopted a different principle of divicompounds under six different heads, under the names of

Tatpurusha, Karmadhdraya, Dvigu, Dvandva } Bahuvrihi, and Avyayibhdva.

I.

Tatpurusha

is

compound

in

which the

last

word

is

determined by the

preceding words, for instance, Wr^^J tat-purushah, his man, or

rdja-purushah, king's man.

As a

general term the Tatpurusha

subdivisions of

Karmadhdraya

(I b)

and Dvigu

compound comprehends the two The Karmadha(I c).

raya is in fact a Tatpurusha compound, in which the last word is determined by a preceding adjective, e. g. Tfcyfajcfc ntlotpalam, blue lotus The component words, if dissolved, would stand in the same case,

whereas in other Tatpurushas the preceding word

last,

is

governed by

the

man

of the king, or

fire- wood,

i.

e.

wood

for fire.

The Dvigu again may be

:

called a subdivision of the

Karmadharaya,

being a compound in which the first word is not an adjective in general, but always a numeral figFR dvigavam, two oxen, or fg^j: dvigufy, bought
for
*

two oxen.
it,

Occasionally bases ending in a long vowel shorten

it

and bases ending

in a short

vowel lengthen

in the middle of a

compound; 3<(<kudaka,

water, ^TT^ pdda, foot,

.hridaya, heart, frequently substitute the bases

"Z^udan

(i.e.

T^ udci),

Tf^pad, and

<

hrid.

^t*T: hridrogah, heart-disease, or ^^TCto: hridayarogah. (Pan. vi. 3, 51-60.) The particle "^ ku, which is intended to express contempt, as ^WTSr^TJ kubrdhmanah,
a bad Brahman, substitutes
cfftl

with consonants

a bad camel. ^r^5J kadushtrah,

trina
:

kad in a determinative compound before words beginning The same takes place before T^f ratha,
of

vada, and

TJJJT

grass.

The same

particle is

^i^^J kadrathah, a bad carriage ; <*^UI kattrinam, a bad kind changed to WT kd before ^f^pathin and ^TCf aksha:
(Pan. vi. 3, 101-107.)

kdpathaJi,

and optionally before ^jTC purusha.

513-

COMPOUND WORDS.

235

These three classes of compounds may be comprehended under the

general

name of Determinative Compounds, while the Karmadharaya (I b) be distinguished as appositional determinatives, the Dvigu (I c) as may numeral determinatives.
class, called

II.

The next

Dvandva, consists of compounds

in

which two words

are simply joined together, the compound taking either the terminations of the dual or plural, according to the number of compounded nouns,

or the terminations of the singular, being treated as a collective term

^rfrnjfll

agni-dhumau,

fire

and smoke

3T$r$3IMr4l$u: fasa-kusa-paldsdh,

nom.

plur. masc. three kinds of plants, or 3l$l$3IMc4l3l sasa-kusa-paldsam,

sing. neut.
class,

nom.
III.

The next

be called Collective Compounds. called Bahuvrihi by native grammarians, comprises com-

They

will

pounds which are used as adjectives. The notion expressed by the last word, and which may be variously determined, forms the predicate of some
other subject.

They may be

called Possessive
rice, scil.

Compounds.

Thus
;

bahu-vrthih, possessed of

much

^^K desak, country

scil.
4.1

rupavad-bhdryah, possessing a handsome wife,

Determinative compounds

*n rdjd, king.

may be

turned into possessive compounds,

sometimes without any change, except that of accent, sometimes by slight changes in the last word.

The gender of possessive compounds,

to the gender of the substantives to

like that of adjectives,

conforms

IV.

The

last class, called

Avyayibhdva,

is

which they belong. formed by joining an indeclinable

particle with another word.

The

resulting

compound,
is

in

which the

indeclinable particle always forms the first element,

again indeclinable,

and generally ends, like adverbs, in the ordinary terminations of the nom. or ace. neut. ^rfvfi^f adhi-stri, for woman, as in
:

adhistri grihakdrydni, household duties are

for

women.

They may

be called Adverbial Compounds.

I.

Determinative Compounds.

513. This class (Tatpurusha) comprehends the last

word governs the preceding one.

which the

The

last

compounds in which generally word may be a substantive

in the Accusative:

or a participle or an adjective, if capable of governing a noun.

i.

Compounds

in

first
f.

noun would be

^Wfw:

krishna-frritah,

instead of ^stf ftnr:

gone krishnam sritah.

m.

n.

to Krishna, dependent
|:*flrf1d:

on Krishna, duhkha-atitafy, m. f. n.
atitah.
JjlHJirff:

having overcome pain, instead of JtlsWdld: duhkham varsha-bhogyahy m. f. n. to be enjoyed a year long.
prdptah, m.
f.

<nUfl'<ji

grdma-

n. having reached the

village, instead of ?jn} UTH:

grdmam

H h 2

236
prdptah
(Pan.
:

COMPOUND WORDS.
it

513say
MlvtiflH:

is

more

usual, however, to

ii.

2, 4).

Similarly

are

formed

determinatives

prdptagrdmah by means of
hill,
;

adverbs or prepositions, such as

^fjrflftL atigiri,

past the

used as
^rfaj|^

an adverb, or as an adjective,

'^frffnfX: atigirih,

ultramontane

abhimukham,
2.

facing, &c.

Compounds
;

in

which the

first

noun would be

in the Instrumental

dhdnya-arthah, m. wealth (arthaK) (acquired) by grain (dhdnyena). : sankuld-khandah, m. a piece (khandah) (cut) by nippers (sanku^l^f-gJTC ddtra-chchhinnah, m. f. n. cut (chhinnah) by a knife Idbhih}.
(ddtrena).
^ft^Trf: hari-trdtah,

m. f. n. protected
(devaili),

(trdtaJi)

by Hari.

^^w:

deva-dattah, given (dattah)

by the gods

or as a proper

name with

the supposed auspicious sense, may the gods give him (Dieu-donne). m. f. n. like the father, i. e. pitrd samah. ^frl!*^: fxj^nr: pitri-samah,

asunder (nirbhinnaJi) by the nails (nakhaih). visva-updsyah, m. f. n. to be worshipped by all. svayam-kritah, m. f. n. done by oneself.
nakha-nirbhinnah 9 m.
f.

n. cut

Compounds

in

which the

first

noun would be

in the Dative

IM^UV yupa-ddru, n.

wood

(ddru) for a

sacrificial stake (ytipdyd).

iftf^TT:

go-

hitah,m.f.n. good
object (arthd),
i.

(hitaJi) for cows (gobhyah).

(V*H: dvija-arthah, m.f.n.

Determinative compounds,

e.

intended for Brahmans.

when
neut.
;

treated as possessive, take the terminations of the masc., fern.,

e. g. finrr^TT

and

*RT*r: dvijdrthd
first

yavdguh,

fern,

gruel for Brahmans.

:

Compounds

in

which the

noun would be

in the Ablative

chora-bhayam, n. fear (bhayam) arising from thieves (chorebhyah). r: svarga-patitah, m. f. n. fallen from heaven. ^TJJJW: apa-grdmah,

5.

gone from the village. Compounds in which the first noun would be in the Genitive
f.

m.

n.

TTTJ^: tat-purushah, m.

man, instead of tasya, of him, purushah, the man*. TTafJ^: rdja-purushah, m. the king's man, instead of rdjnah, of the king, tT5TH^ rdja-sakhah, m. the king's friend. In these purushah, the man.
his

compounds sakhi, friend, is changed maker (kdrah) of pots (kumbhdndm)

.

to sakhah.

cgHcRK:

kumbha-kdrah, a

jft^nr go-sat am,

a hundred of cows.
:

6.

Compounds

in

which the

first
f.

noun would be

in the Locative

*J<UjU: aksha-saundah, m.

n.

devoted to dice.

TCfa": uro-jah,

m.

f.

n.

produced on the breast.

*

Most words ending

in

"J

tri

Hence ^TT^T

^TrTT katasya kartd,

or R ka are not allowed to form compounds of this kind. maker of a mat, not o^oF'ST katakartd; $TT H^T purdm
are,

bhettd, breaker of towns.

There

however,

many

exceptions, such as

^llu deva-

pujakah, worshipper of the gods, &c.

COMPOUND WORDS.
514. Certain Tatpurusha

237
governed

compounds

retain the case-terminations in the

noun.
T:

sahasd-kritah,

done suddenly (Pan.

vi. 3, 3).

riiwtlH:

dlmand-shashtha/i, the

sixth with oneself (Pan. vi. 3, 6).

swm; parasmai-padam,

a word for the sake of

another,

i.e.

the transitive form of verbs (Pan. vi.3, 7,8).

difficulty.

$ *4&lgJf krichchhrdl-

labdham, obtained with

23).

^SHp*}^' svasuh-putrah, sister's son (Pan. vi. 3,

(^eitHCri: dioas-patih, lord of heaven.

l

qi^rMPn; vdchas-patih, lord of speech.

ignorant
person.

devdndm-priyaJi, beloved of the gods, a goat, an

gehe-panditah, learned at home, i.e. where no one can contradict him.

air.

khecharah, moving in the

hridi-spris,

tKJVui! sarasi-jah, born

in a

pond, water-lily.
in
battle,

touching the heart.

3, 9).

jfvf^TJ yudhishthirah, firm

a proper name (Pan. vi.

515.

To

this class a

number

of

compounds

element
body,
night
2, i).
i.

is e.

supposed to take the first place.

the fore-body
;

are referred in which the governing Ex. ^[5bi<; purva-kdyah, the fore-part of the
first

^5<lcf! purva-rdtrah, the

lit.

part of the night,

i.

i.

e.

the fore-

JJ^iK

rdjadantah, the king of teeth,

better be looked

the king-teeth,
;

e.

the fore-teeth (Pan. n.

517.

They would

upon

as

Karmadharayas

cf.

516. If the second part of a determinative

compound

is

a verbal base, no change takes

place in bases ending in consonants or long vowels, except that diphthongs, as usual, are

changed to ^\d.

Soma-drinking, nom.

Hence *Tc$g^ jalamuch, water-dropping, sing, ^ffam: somapdh ( 239).

:

i.

e.

a cloud;

tftHMI soma-pd t

from

Bases ending in short vowels generally take a final J(Jt Pq *a fi i(visvajit, all-conquering, Other suffixes used for the same purpose are ^T a, ^tn, &c. ftfj'i, to conquer.
I b.

Appositional Determinative Compounds.

compounds (Karmadharaya) form a subdivision of the deterIn them the first portion stands as the minative compounds (Tatpurusha).
J

517. These

predicate of the second portion, such as in black-beetle^ sky-blue, &c.

The

following are

some instances of appositional compounds

m,H
I

nila-utpalam, neut. the blue lotus.

rH

parama-dtmd, masc. the

supreme spirit. 3llomiPlH; sdka-pdrthivah, masc. a Saka-king, explained as a king such as the Sakas would like, not as the king of the Sakas. SHUd: sarva-rdtrah, masc. the whole night, from sarva, whole, and
rdtrih, night.

Rdtrih,

fern., is

changed

to rdtra; cf. ^trra: purva-rdtrafy,

masc. the fore-night; *TlTra: madhya-rdtrah, masc. midnight; yiwu^: i^TTW dvi-rdtram, neut. a space of punya-rdtrah, masc. a holy night. two nights, is a numeral compound (Dvigu). H^KlT. mahd-rdjah, masc.
a great king.

In these compounds

*nr?T

inahat, great, always

becomes

JT^TwaM

(Pan. vi. 3, 46), and {W*{rdjan 9

:

king, Tf*fi rajah; as

parama-rdjah, a supreme king but 4}{j*U su-rdjd, a good king, f!m4i: priya-sakhah, masc. kimrdjd, a bad king (Pan. v. 4, 69, 70).
a dear friend.

*T% sakhi

is

masc. the highest day.

changed to ?re: sakhah. ^THT^: parama-ahah, In these compounds ^5^ ahan, day, becomes

238
^Tjf

COMPOUND WORDS.
aha;
cf.

518Sometimes

drHl^t uttamdhah, the last day.

for

^r

ahna

is

substituted

^^ ahan;

^tr^:

purvdhnah, the fore-QOon.

f^^:

TTT^T^: praJcu-purushah, masc. a bad man, or cfirg^: kdpurushah,. a hereditary teacher, i. e. one who has been a teacher dchdryah, masc.
-*\d\$(W. a-brdhmanah, masc. a non(dchdryd) before or formerly (pro). i.e. not a Brahman. ^TTO an-asvah, masc. a non-horse, i.e. not Brahman,

^nT^iTW ghana-sydmah, m.f. n. cloud-black, from ghana, cloud, and sydma, black. ^frXRcS: ishat-pihgalah, m. f. n. a little brown, m. f. n. from ishat, a little, and pingala, brown. srrfo^fT: sdmi-kritah,
a horse.
half-done, from sdmi, half,
518. In

and

krita, done.
is

some appositional compounds, the qualifying word

placed

last.

vipragaurah, a white Brahman; TT^TTVtt rdjddhamah, the lowest king; H^if^ro bharatafreshthah, the best Bharata ; ^v^CTTn purusha-vydglirah, a tiger-like man, a great man ;
t

govrindarakah, a prime cow.

I c.
$ 519.

Numeral Determinative Compounds.

first

Determinative compounds, the

portion of which

is

a numeral,

are called Dvigu.

follows.

The numeral

is

always the predicate of the noun which

They

are generally neuters, or feminines,

and are meant

to express

aggregates, but they

may

also

form adjectives, thus becoming possessive

suffixes.
^r

compounds, with or without secondary

If an aggregate

compound

is

formed, final

is

changed to ^ i,

fern.,

or in

some cases

to

^ am, neut.

Final ^r^ an and ^n d are changed to ^z or

^ am.

Tfarre pancha-gavam, neut. an aggregate of five cows, from panchan, five,

and go, cow.

(Pan. u.
adjective,
i,

iftgo (in

23),

and
five
1

worth

an aggregate compound) is changed to imgava tft nau to TTR ndva. tNg: pancha-guh, as an cows (Pan. v. 4, 92). flg^fb dvinauh, bought for

two

ships.

ST^cS dvy-ahgulam, neut.

dvi,

what has the measure of two

fingers,
gr^:

from

two, and angulih, finger; final

;

dvy-ahah, masc. a space of two days

^GRTTTc^: pancha-kapdlah,
in

i, 23).

i being changed to a. ahan changed to ahah (Pan. n. m. f. n. an offering (puroddsah)

made

a dish with five

i,

compartments, from panchan,

51,

five,

and
fern.

kapdlam } neut. (Pan. n.

the three worlds
:

52;

iv. i, 88).

f<^c5J<*l

tri-loM,

here the Dvigu

compound
21).

takes the fern, termination

to express an aggregate (Pan. iv.

three worlds

here the Dvigu

<^$l$HlO dasa-kumdri, fern,

f^J^f tri-bhuvanam, neut. the compound takes the neuter termination. an assemblage of ten youths, "^f n chaturi,

yugam, neut. the four ages.

520.

The following

compounds.

rules apply to the changes of the final syllables in determinative few of them are general as requiring a change without any regard to the Very

-J 520.

COMPOUND WORDS.

239

preceding words in the compound. The general rules are given first, afterwards the more special, while rules for the formation of one single compound are left out, such compounds

being within the sphere of a dictionary rather than of a grammar.

1.

^^rich
final

verse,

^pur,

town, VT^ap, water,

1

^a

dhur, charge, vfal^pathin, path, add

(Pan. v. 4, 74);

"WM ^: ardharchah, a half-verse.

This

is

optional with

nfa<\pathin after the negative

2.

^a;

XIMI aputham

or

vfai:

apanthdJi.
rdja,

<j*i\nf)'an, king,

xi^aAan,
mahdrdjah.
chief,

day, *rfe sakhi, friend,

become THT

^J^ aha, *Rf

sukha;
3.

H^KIH*
if it

(Pan. v. 4, 91.)

7T^

wr0s,

means

becomes TT^I urasa;

if

Vinftui ascorasam, an excellent

the locative
is

horse (Pan. v. 4, 93).

Likewise after TTf?T/>r/i,

v. 4, 82).
if it

expressed; HrfJM<

pratyurasam, on the chest (Pan.

4.
isf\5f erArsAt,

eye,

becomes ^HSf aksha,

j^f5J*tlifK|

ceases to

mean

eye.

'ifiQft gavdkshah,

window ; but
5. ^frft^anas, cart,
if

brdhmandkshi, the eye of a Brahman.

(Pan. v. 4, 76.)

the

TOS*^ a * m w stone, ^m^ ayas, iron, compound expresses a kind or forms a name.

^TO^sffras, lake, take final ^f a

<nicoi<4<f

kdldyasam, black-iron;

6.

but *i^*J sadayah, a piece of good iron. (Pan. v. 4, 94.) H\ brahman becomes WCf brahma, if preceded by the name of a country ; *}<jgtf: ku and TffT surdshtrabrahmah, a Brahman of Surashtra (Pan. v. 4, 104). After

mahd that
7.

substitution

is

optional (Pan. v. 4, 105).

nj^ takshan takes

village carpenter.

final ^T a after ?JTH

ardma and

FT7 kauta;

141*1(1*3*

yrdmatakshaJi,

(Pan. v. 4, 95.)
ati,

8. iJJ^/tfan,

dog, takes final ^Ta after ^fnT

it is

and

after certain words, not the

names of

animals, with which

compared

^JlafiH^I* dkarshasvah,

a dog of a die, a bad

throw
9.

(?).

(Pan. v.

4, 97.)
;

10.

^Tln^ adhvan becomes ^TUI adhva after prepositions TO*!* prddhrah. (Pan. v. 4, 85.) *U1^ sdman, hymn, and cOm*^ loman, hair, become ^T*T sdma and rtl*i /owia after Unf
pro^",

^Tg anw, and

^T
i.

aray
e.

adv. *j^rt\t* anulomaJt, regular; ^TJo5ta anulomam,

with the hair or grain,

11.

regularly.

(Pan. v. 4, 75.)
a?;a,

fTP^tamas becomes

!T*TO

tamasa after ^T^

TTsam, and

^V andha;

^in*i*i andha-

tamasam, blind darkness.

12.

(Pan. v. 4, 79.)
after

H?^

raAas becomes T^TT rahasa

^"^ anu,

^8ft ava,

and 1TR lapta; ^J^T^Tt

q^t* brahma-

anurahasah, solitary.
13.

(Pan. v. 4, 81.)
after

"^^varchas becomes

M^H varchasa
at the

*^( brahma and fH^TAasf/;

varchasam, the power of a Brahman.

14. 'ft^o
five
15.
ft

(Pan. v. 4, 78.)
adjectival

becomes *T3gava, except

cows
<l

end of an

Dvigu.

M'S'iq panchagavam,

nau, ship,

but t^Jt ponchaguh, bought for five cows. (Pan. v. 4, 92.) becomes TTO ndva, if it forms a numerical aggregate ; ^^ni^panchandvam,
not when
it

five ships

forms a numerical adjective

s^ntt panchanauh, worth

five

ships.
16.

(Pan. v. 4, 99.)

nau, ship, after ^IV ardha, becomes

"^mndva; ^T^TT^ ardhandcam,

as an aggregate;

half a ship.

(Pan.v.
17.

4, 100.)

^P^khdrt, a measure of grain, becomes ^tTZkhara

also after

PS <s

<-

drikhdram

ardha;

^I^lt ardhakhdram.
f^
dvi or

(Pan. v. 4, 101.)

18.

^ffc5

anjali,

a handful, after

f^

tri,

may, as an aggregate, take

v. 4, 102.)

final

^ a;

dvyafijalain or si^lta dryarijali,

two handfuls. (Pan.

240
after 19. ^bjfc5fl%w/i, finger,

COMPOUND WORDS.
numerals and indeclinables, becomes
(Pan. v. 4, 86.)
after

521*Te3 ahgula;

dvyahgulam, a length of two fingers.

20. UlVvj sakthi, thigh,

becomes "QW*l saktha

(Pan. v. 4, 98.)

"Z^^uttara, ipl mriga, and

*$

purva;

^N U optf purvasaktham.

21. ^rf^ra^ri, night, after "*f% sarra, after partitive words, after ti<?Min sankhydta,

punya, likewise after numerals and indeclinables, becomes TTc? rdtra; ^fW^T^ft sarvardtrah, the whole night; ^^TT^I purvardtrah, the fore-night; VST'Ucf dvirdtram, two
nights.

(Pan.v.

4, 87.)

22. ^C%*[ahan, day,

under the same circumstances, becomes ^1^ aAwa; 4HI^$! sarvdhnah the whole day but not after a numeral when it expresses an aggregate ; 3R* dvyahah two days. Except also ^'^H^ punydham, a good day, and JJoFI^ ekdham, n. and m
:

a single day. (Pan. y.

4,

88-90.)

II.

Collective

Compounds.
are divided into two classes.
in

521. Collective
first class (called

compounds (Dvandva)

The

^tftrR itaretara) comprises compounds words, that would naturally be connected by and, are united, the last taking the terminations either of the dual or the plural, according to the number

which two or more

of words forming the compound. The second class (called MHI^K samdhdra comprises the same kind of compounds but formed into neuter nouns in the
singular.
^frt'y!

hasty -asvau, an elephant and a horse,

is

an instance of the

former,

^WS[

hastyasvam, the elephants and horses (in an army), an instance

of the latter

class.

Likewise
horse.

91

fioh ujll

sukla-krishnau, white

and black

gavdsvam, a

cow and a

If instead of a horse
is to express horses

and an elephant, ^f^yji hastyasvau, the intention

and elephants, the compound takes the terminations of

which words should stand
first
:

the plural,
522.

^4-KJHji:

hastyasvdh.
first in

pound.
stand
"3"

SQme Words with

rules are given as to

Dvandva comand
in ^? a should
eh)

fewer syllables should stand

(Vqon^ni

siva-kesavau, S'iva

Kes'ava; not W^r^ftfT^T kesavasivau.

first
:

Words beginning with a vowel and ending

and Krishna.

$(ep

!lt

isa-krishnau, fs'a
first
:

Words ending

in

u (gen. ^uJ o#) should stand

*?fenCT hari-harau, Hari and

^ i (gen. Ut Kara ; also

and

bhoktri-bhogyau, the enjoyer and the enjoyed.

Lastly, words of greater importance should

have precedence
kshatriyau, a

<^^m deva-daityau,

the god and the

;

demon

cns(<J.i5ir<a<ii

brdhmanafather,

Brahman and

a Kshatriya

TTrTlftniTr mdtd-pitarau,

mother and

but

in earlier Sanskrit 04 rRl*f I riTT pitard-mdtard, father

and mother. (Pan.

vi. 3, 33.)

first

5 2 3- Words ending in ^J ri, expressive of relationship, or sacred titles, forming the member of a compound, and being followed by another word ending in ri, or by
putra, son, change their ^J ri into
T

Wd

(Pan. vi.

3, 25).
1

TTiJ mdtn-\- f^fff pitri

I

form

mdtdpitarau, father and mother; "faj pitri gW putra form f"4 ri yyt pitdputrauj ^orm ^^T^^Tfj hotdpotdrau, the Hotri and Potri priests. fil potri

524.
its

When

the names of certain deities are compounded, the

vi. 3, 26).

first

sometimes lengthens

final

vowel (Pan.

Thus fry N ^H(! mitrdvarunau, Mitra and Varuna; Similar irregularities appear in words like agmshomau, Agni and Soma.

-$ 528.
cMf dydvd-prithwyau,

COMPOUND WORDS.
heaven and earth
;

241
dawn and night

SMIUH* ushdsd-naktam,

(Pan- vi. 3, 29-31).

525. If the

compound takes the termination

sA
>

of the singular, then final

^ ch, ^ chh,
form

*(j>

T*

J h \d>
>

and

h take an additional
4, 106).

Va.

^T*l

vdch+'H^tvach
(see

vdktvacham, speech and skin (Pan. v.

rdtri,

V^^ahan, day

90, 196),

and

night,

form the compound vcVuci: ahordtrah, a day and night, a

bhrdtarau

(Pan. v. 4, 87).
526.

OTTO

may be used

in the sense of brother

and

sister;

'$& jtutrau

in

the sense of son and daughter; fHinJ pitarau in the sense of father and mother; *31TTt

soasurau in the sense of father and mother-in-law.

i

Man and

wife

may be

expressed by

M is cil jdyd-pati,

Jsn*l jampatt, or

^Mnl dampatt.

III.
J 527.

Possessive Compounds.
are always predicates referring

Possessive

compounds (Bahuvrihi)

to

some subject or other. A determinative may be used as a possessive compound by a mere change of termination or accent. Thus *f1<^rMc6 nilais

utpalam, a blue lotus,

;

a determinative
ftr5taje5 JTCJ

compound (Tatpurusha,

subdivision

Karmadharaya) is an adjective and as such a predicative or possessive comIn the same manner <H*g; anasvah, Pan. n. 2, 24, com.) pound; (see
nilotpalam
not-a-horse,
is

but in

nilotpalam sarah, a blue lotus lake,

a determinative, ^M^ft

T^T:

anasvo rathah, a cart without a

horse, a horseless cart, a possessive compound.

Examples

HiwV,*t ^TH: prdpta-udako grdmah, a water-reached village, a

village reached

by water.
is

^^SH^ udha-ratho 'nadvdn, a bull by

drawn
(udha).
cattle (pasuh) is offered (upahritd).

whom

a cart (rathah)

rudrah, Rudra to

whom

^H^riMS^ ^5: upahrita-pabii ^HlflO

inrih prafallen
off.

^fo pita-ambaro harih, Hari possessing yellow garments, parnah, leafless, i. e. a tree from which the leaves are
:

a-putrah, sonless.

of a brindled cow. f-*i'a*j; chitra-guh, possessed of a beautiful wife. dviriipavad-bhdryah, possessed f?T^5l
:

murdhah, two-headed
two-legged
:

here murdha stands for iniirdhan.

stands for pdda.

f^MK dvi-pdd,

here

heart, a friend,

having a good ^fssnrfasn bhakshita-bhikshah, one who has eaten his

pad

^^ su-hrid,

alms.

rft?ftT3i75'^g: nila-ujjvala-vapuh,

having a blue resplendent body.

The following
rules apply to the

528. Bahuvrihi

compounds frequently take

and

suffixes.
:

changes of the final syllables in possessive compounds

1.

^fen

sakthi, thigh,

^tfBSf akshi, eye, if

they

mean

really thigh

and

eye, take final

^ a;
2.

cnio5ns$: kamalakshah, lotus-eyed.

(Pan. v. 4, 113.)
it

^T^JTc? ahguli, finger, substitutes final ^T a if

refers to

wood;

JU^jrt ^If* dry angular*

ddru, a piece of

wood with two prongs*.

(Pan. v. 4, 114.)

Prakriya-Kaumudi.

242
3.

COMPOUND WOKDS.
final ^T

5 2 9ffc trij

Igfi^murdhan, head, substitutes

a after

"% dm and

%^VJ

dvimurdhah,

having two heads. (Pan.

4.

v. 4, 115.)
final ^T a after

ojta^/omaw, hair, substitutes

^TcT^

antar and ^f^t vahih; ^iic5it! antar-

lomah, having the hairy part inside.

5. Hir<H<*lwasz7;a, nose,

(Pan. v.
if it

4, 117.)

becomes "^^nasa,
but not

stands at the end of a

name ;

*nntt! gonasah,

cow-nosed,

i.

e.

a snake;

after

*?$& sthula;

<^cOllftloK sthiila-ndsikah,

large-nosed, i.e. a hog.

The same change takes

place after prepositions;

unnasah, with a prominent nose.

6.

(Pan. v. 4, 118, 119.)

After

final
7.

^a;

or tf su, f?fc3 kali, furrow, and tffflrq sakthi, thigh, g: duh, ^T^cSt ahalah or ^("cot ahalih. (Pan. v. 4, 121.)

may

substitute

After the same particles,

JHU pro/a,

nouns ending
8.

in

^H(asj g^ITt

progeny, and HVTmec?Aa, mind, are treated like durmedhdh. (Pan. v. 4, 122.)

VT dharma, law, preceded by one word, is treated like a noun ending in

kalydnadharmd.
(Pan. v. 4, 124.)

9.

ifaljambhd, jaw, after certain words, becomes '^fo^jambhanj

SfHJ./awM, knee, after Tlpra

^^TT sujambhd.
v. 4, 129).

10.

and

IT

5aw, becomes

^Jnw^ U3J prajnuh (Pan.

This
11.
12.

is

optional after

ttkurdhva (Pan.

v. 4, 130).
V. 4, 131.)

*3\W(udhas, udder, becomes

"3W^ w^aw ; ^$nft kundodhni. (Pan.

V^[

dhanus, bow, becomes

^^^dhanvan;
In names this
is

^TV^T pushpadhanvd, having a

optional.

bow

of

flowers (Pan. v. 4, 132).

13.
14.

iRRljdyd, wife, becomes iHfajdni; ^JH^TTf^TJ subhajdnih. (Pan. v. 4, 134.) *TV gandha, smell, substitutes *tfVf $rawS/M after certain words; ^nfvt sugandhih.

(Pan.

v 4 135-1370
-

15.

^l^pdda,
^

foot,

becomes ""n^^ac?

after certain

words; <=qiMi^ vydgJirapdd. (Pan.

v. 4,

138-140.)
danta, tooth, becomes
(sign of a certain age)
;

16.

<fiT

^c?a#
fern,

after

many words; flT^dwe/an, having two

(Pan. v. 4, 141-145.)

teeth,

fk^cft dvidati.

kakuda, hump, becomes 'h^^ kakud after certain words and in certain senses ajdtakakudj a young bull before his humps have grown. (Pan. v.
X
i 4 6-i 4 8.)

1 8.

'3T^ uras and other words belonging to the same

vyudhoraskah, broad-chested.
(Pan. v.
4, 151.)

class

add

final ^i

kaj

19.

Words

in

^t'n add

final

cR&a ih the feminine;

^^iHcM bahusvdmikd,
in

having many

masters, from Wffo*{svdmin, master.

20.

(Pan. v. 4, 152.)

Feminine words in
bahukumdrikah,

^,

like

^T^

nadi,

and words

^J

ri,

add

final

^ ka;
having

having
or

many maidens;

^J>roBJ bahubhartrikah,
N $*i I c4 <*u

many

husbands.
21.

(Pan. v. 4, 153.)

Most other words may

bahumdldkah or

may

not add final cfi&a;

bahumdlakah

^Jittc*:

bahumdlah.

(Pan. v. 4, 154.)

IV. Adverbial Compounds.

or indeclinable compounds (Avyayibhava) are formed by $ 539. Adverbial The resulting comjoining an indeclinable particle with another word.

pounds, in which the indeclinable particle forms always the

are

first

element,

again indeclinable, and generally end, like adverbs, in the ordinary. terminations of the nom. or ace. neut.

-J

531.

COMPOUND WORDS.
:

243
f
adhi harau,
^Tej

Examples
loc.

vifij^fi:

adhi-hari,

upon Hari,

instead of *ftf

sing,

^froj

anu~vishnu, after

Vishnu, instead of

faujj

anu

vishnum, ace. sing.

3MJuu upa-krishnam, near

flies, flylessly.

to Krishna.

fVrtfgpii

nir-makshikam, free from

winter, after
M^fKJilJ
i.

the winter, instead

^ffff^H ati-himam, past the of ^HlT f^f ati himam, ace. sing.

e.

pradakshinam, to the right. Vfrj^q anu-rdpam, after the form, instead of anu rupam 9 ace. sing, 'Jjvji^ifa yathdaccordingly, OTJ ^q

according to one's ability, instead of ^if^vji baktir yathd. inptt sa-trinam with the grass; ugmtjfe satrinam atti, he eats (everything) even the grass, instead of trinena saha, with the grass, ^N^l*
Sakti,

ipg*i

until final delivery. ydvach-chhlokam, at every verse, ^rr^f^i amukti, near the Ganga. TT^TC]^ upa-saradam, near the vicjJNi anu-gahgam,

autumn; from ^TO sarad, autumn (Pan. v.

at the

4, 107).

<5M^i^* upa-jarasam,
(J 167).

approach of old age

from iRQjaras, old age

4MHPH^M/?a*rfir^ samidh,

samit or <5MHPH^ upa-samidham, near the fire-wood ; from

fire-wood.
530. There are
particle.

^mT upa-rajam,
where the

near the king; from tr*F{rdjan, king.

first

some Avyayibhavas the

tishthad-gu, at the time

element of which

is

not an indeclinable
;

Ex. fn8

when

the cows stand to be milked

M'S'i'i

pancha-gahgam,
Benares);
531.

at the place

five Gaiigas

meet, (near the Madhav-rao ghat at

McM'^m pratyag-grdmam, west

The following
:

of the village.

rules apply to the changes of the final syllables in adverbial

compounds
1.

Words ending

in

mutes

(k, kh, g,

gh,

cji,

chh,j, jh,

t,

th>

dy

dh,

t,

th, d, dh,

p, ph,

b,

bh)

may
2.

or

may

not take final *8a;

(Pan. v.
4,

ITRTfW upasamidham
^B?

or

zwfal^upasamit,

near

the fire-wood.

in.)
a;

Words ending
self.

in

^^an

substitute final

^rnT adhydtmam, with

or

regard to one-

(Pan. v. 4, 108.)
in

3.

But neuters
the skin.

^f^an may

or

may

not;

^M^H upacharmam

^'H upacharma, near

or

(Pan. v.

4, 109.)

4.

T<^ nadf,

*il<5*il4ll paurnamdsi,

^iiiisi^<u1 dgrahdyani, and

mR^irt may
river.

may

not

take final

^mf^

upanadi or

<im^

upanadam, near the

(Pan. v. 4,

no,

and
5.

112.)
final

Words belonging

sarad take to the class beginning with STC^ about autumn. (Pan. v. 4, 107.) upasaradam,

^a

3*431 45

1 l

APPENDIX

I.

DHATUPATHA OR LIST OF VERBS.

Explanation of some of the Verbal Anubandhas or Indicatory Letters.
^T

is

put at the end of roots ending in a consonant in order to

facilitate

their pronunciation.

Accent.

The

last letter of

a root

is

accented with the acute, the grave, or

circumflex accent, in order to show that the verb follows the Parasmai-

pada, the Atmanepada, or both forms.

The

roots themselves are divided into uddtta, acutely accented,

and anuddtta,

gravely accented, the former admitting, the latter rejecting the inter-

^TT

mediate ^ i. d prohibits the use of the intermediate

(

3[

Hn the formation of the Nishthas

fHMicftI

333>

-D. 2),

Pan. vii.

2, 16.

Ex. TJ^: phullah from

is

niphald.

^i requires the
is

insertion of a nasal after the last radical vowel,

which nasal

not to be omitted where a nasal that

10

actually written would be

omitted

($

345,

),

Pan. vii.

i,

nadi 3 Pass.

tfera

nandyate;

Ex. *f^f?f nandati from 58 ; vi. 4, 24. or but from Hr^ month, Pres. ih^
first

manthati, Pass. Hs-MH mathyate.

^
\
i

ir

shows that a verb

($ 367),

may

take the
57.

or second aorist in the Parasmaior

"Vjfw^chyutir. prohibits the use of the intermediate ^

(

pada from

Pan. in.

i,

Ex.

^r^l^achyutat
i

in the formation of the

Nishthas

333> D.

2),

Pan. vii.

2, 14.

Ex.

"33:

unnah from -$$ undi.

^u

renders the admission of the intermediate ^ i optional before the gerundial tttva ( 337, II. 5), Pan. vn. 2, 56; and therefore inadmissible in the past participle (Pan. vn.
^ig samu; but
2, 15).

Ex.

^rfai^T

samitvd or ^nFTT sdntvd from

^ifw: sdntah.

"&

u renders the admission of the intermediate ^ i optional in the general tenses before all consonants but \y ( 337, ! 2), Pan. vn. 2,44; and
therefore inadmissible in the Ex. past participle (Pan. vii. 2, 15). seddhd or iffwr sedhitd from but ftr^t siddhah. fa\t^sidhu ; ri prevents the substitution of the short for the long vowel in the redupli-

^T

cated aorist of causals ($ 372*), Pan. vii. 4,

2.

Ex. ^aftoin^ alulokat

from

fjffti

lokri.

CLASS,
75
li

PARASMAIPADA VERBS.
aorist in the
ffamfi.
2, 5.

245
($ 367),

shows that the verb takes the second

Pan.
iji. i,

Parasmaipada

55,

Ex. *Pl*n{agamat from ng

*e

forbids Vriddhi in the first aorist ($

thit

348 *), Pan. vn.

Ex. inrTfyawa442, 5),

from if^ maths.

^
^

o indicates that the participle is

formed in

tf

na instead of n ta

(J

Pan. vin.

2, 45.

Ex.

Tffa:

pinafy from

^ffarnft opydyi.

*T/*

shows that the verb follows the Atmanepada (Pan. I. 3, 12). shows that the verb follows both the Atmanepada and Parasmaipada,
the former
if

the act reverts to the subject (Pan.

i.

3, 72).

f*T

ni

shows that the past participle has the power of the present (Pan. in. Ex. TJ^: phullafy, blown, from fowl niphald. 2, 187).

shows that the vowel

Pan. vi.
4,

not lengthened in the causative ( 462, note), 92; and that the vowel is optionally lengthened in the aorist
is

of the passive (Pan. vi. 4, 93).

Bhu
I.

Class (Bhvddi,

I Class).

Parasmaipada Verbs.
i.

^J)hu y to be.
2.

4.

Parasmaipada *^R: Ihdvdvah,

Ihdvatha,

P.
5.

i.

*mfa Ihdvdmi,
bhdvathah,
bhdvanti,
I.
5. 6.
i.

H^ftr bhdvasi, 3
7.

Ihdvati,

HTO

Witt Ihdvatah,
^nrt dbhavam,

bhdvdmah,
2.
:

8. *r^*T

9. H^fif
4.

dbhavah,

3
7.

^ava/,

^M^TR dbhavdva,
8.

^M^ff dbhavatam,
9.

6.

dbhavatdm,
i.

^IHTR dbhavdma,
VR: bhdveh,
3.

^W^Trf dbhavata,
4.

^w^a^avaw,
5.

O.

>i^ Ihdveyam,
*^rri bhdvetdm,
3

2. 7.

H^i/iav^,
4.

H^ Ihdveva, >m bhdvetam,

5.

6.

H^T&Mvema,
>T^g bftdvatu,
8.

8. >TWlf

Ihdveta,

9.^^: Ihdveyuh, l.i.*Fnfolhdvdni 2.*&lhdva,

H^TT bhdvatam,
\\

3.

H^T^ bhdvdva,
9.

6.

*T^nf

bhdvatdm,

7.

*TqTR

bhdvdma,
2.

H^ff bhdvata,

T| Ihdvantu
4.

Pf.

i.

"^^5 babMva^ (see p. 175),

5.

^jfT*T babMvitha,

3. *nj<r
7.

babMva,

^f^
8.

babhuvivd,

^pTj: babMvdthuh,
9 . ^ijj:

6. T$]snj:

babMvdtuh,

^f^iT babMvimd,

^>J5 babMvd,
3
8
3.

babhdvuh,

II A.
5.

i.

^r^
i.

dbhdvam
6.

(see p.

1,
2.

2.

^ij:

azA,

^*$$dbhutam,
F.

^Jlff

dbMtam,

7. ^TJJIT

dbhuma,

HP^uflfH bhavishyami,

Nfcuifo bhavishydsi,
6.

bhavishydti,

4
7

bhavishyavafi,

5.

HfrtTO bhavishydthah,
8.

bhavishydtah,
bhavishydnti,

bhavishydmah,
i

bhavishydtha,
t

9.
3.

C.

dbhavishyam,
5.

dbhavishyafy,
6.

dbhavishyat,

dbhavishydva,

dbhavishyatam,
8.

dbhavishyat6m t
9.

dbhavishydma^
t The reduplicative
(Pan.
i.

dbhavishyata,
is

dbhavishyan^
base, too,
is

syllable

^6a

irregular, instead of

irregular

2, 6)

the regular form would have been

^^ bubhdoa.

246

BHU

CLASS,
2.

PARASMAIPADA VERBS.
3.

P. F. i.vrfacTTftR bhavitasmi,
bhavitasvah,
5.

Hfaffrftr bhavitdsi,

tf^TTT bhavitd, 4
7. i.

^f^iTT^r: bhavitdsthah, 6.
9.
.

Hf%WT

bhavitdrau,

ufarfiw: bhavi-

tdsmah,
2.

8.

>rfVriHW bhavitdstha,
3.

^forTO bhavitdrah, B.
bhuydsva,
5.

JJITO bhtiydsam,
6.
\\

*gn: bhuydh,

^fi-^bhuydf, 4

^rns
8.

m*T bMydstam,

$inw

Part. >J?n^r 9. ij^ng: bhuydsuh bhuydstdm, 7. JJ5TRR bhuydsma, Fut. HfmM^ bhavishydn, Ger. Pres. i?^ bhdvan, Perf. ^^T^ babhuvdn,

bMydsta,

bhdtvd or

ijTr

-bhuya, Adj. Hf^n^r: bhavitdvyah,

H^fti: bhavaniyah,

bhavyah

(J

456).
:

Atmanepada'""
bhdvdvahe,
vadhve,
9.

P.

i.

>r^ bhdve,
6.

2.

VR*i bhdvase,

3. *r^ff

bhdvate,

4.

5.^^
H^W
4.

bhdvethe,
I.

H^ bhdvete,
^SM^r
5.

y.HTR^ bhdvdmahe, 8.HT

2.

bhdvante,

i.

dbhave,

^nnvji; dbhavathdh,
6.

3.

dbhavata,
7.

^nm^f^

dbhavdvahi,
8.

^WT*TT dbhavethdm,
9.
4.

^TH^Hf dbhavetdm,
i.

^M^THf^ dbhavdmahi,
2.

^T>WEJ dbhavadhvam,
3.

^WRTT dbhavanta, O.

bhdveya,

HT*n: bhdvethdh,
6.

^Tif bhdveta,
7.

^^rf^ bhdvevahi,
8.

bhdveydthdm,
9.

HTTTTlf bhdveydtdm,
1. 1.

*RJ*ff bhdvemahi,
3.

^*4 bhdvedhvam,
4.

>TTO^ bhdveran,

*t

bhdvai,

2.

HW^ bhdvasva,

*R7TT bhdvatdm,

bhdvdvahai, 5. H^JT bhdvethdm, 6. *TTfl7 bhdvetdm, >j.*f3TP^bhdvdmahai } Pf. i.'f^ babMve (see note f, page bhdvadhvam, 9. vr^irt bhdvantdm
\\

245),

2.

TT^f^ babhuvishe,
6.

vdthe,

3. "^^ babMve, 4. ^ijf^t babhuvivdhe, 5. ^^5m Idbhuvdte, 7. ^Jjf^m% babhuvimdhe, 8. ^f^i^ or ^

"sn^rre babhu-

babhuvidhve
2.

or -^Ave (see J 105),

dbhavishthdh,
3.

9.

^jfft

babhdvire, I
4.

A.

i.

^wfaft dbhavishi,
5.

^^f^?r:

^nrf^? dbhavishta,

^swf^f^f^ dbhavishvahi,
7.

^swi^TTf a&Aa8.

vishdthdm, 6.^wf^Tcrf dbhavishdtdm,

^Mfr^rf^ dbhavishmahi,
F.

^wfe4 or ^

dbhavidhvam or -dhvam,
C.
3.

9.

^wf%mr dbhavishafa,
P.

vrfr^ bhavishye &c.,

2.

^THftrsir

dbhavishye &c.,

F.

i.

*fa!TRf lhavitdhe,
5.

Hf^TTO bhavitdse,
6.

HfVtfT bhavitd, 4.
7.

^f^ril^^ bhavitdsvahe,
8.

^f^dWR

bhavitdsdthe,
9.
3.
6.

HfaflW

bhavitdrau,
tdrah, B.
shishtd,
4.
i.

>TfVffTWf bkavitdsmahe,

Hf^TTT^ bhavitddhve,
lhavishishthdh,

^fViTR* bhavi-

HMfar

lhavishiyd,

2.

HW^Tt
8.

^ fmd^f^ bhavishwdhi,
7.

5.

^f^Ml^ll^i bhavishiydsthdm,

^rf^^^f^ bhavishimdhi,
bhavishirdn
\\

HP^D^4 or

S"

lhavishidhvdm or
Perf.

-dhvdm,

9.

Hf^hj^

Part. Pres.

H^TRt bhdvamdnah,
1

babMvdndh, Fut. yfarq'*^: bhavishydmdnah. Passive P. i. lMye\ 2 ^PW bhuydse,

:

3. Jjrra

Ihdydte, 4 Jjm
.

ydvahe,
9. $?fir

5.^^

Ihuyethe, 6.>J^ bhuyete,

I.

7.

^TT^ bhuydmahe, 8.^W bMyddhve,

Jj^ij

bhuydnte,

^^ aM%e
:

&c.,

O.

bhuyeya &c.,

I.

^ ^%az
Even by

&c.

be used in the Atmanepada after certain prepositions.

itself it is

used in the sense of obtaining

P- 4,
1.

*T

f^R *T^ sa

sriyam bhavate, he obtains happiness.

(Sar.

3-) in

means

to perceive,

and may

yield a passive.

BH&
Pf.
2.

CLASS,

PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

247

*n*$babMve

&c., like

^swfatfi: or

^wrftm: dbh&vilhjhdb,

Atmanepada, I A. i. wfofo or ^wrWw dbhavishi, 3. *wrfa dbhdvi, 4 ^wf^fif dbhdvtihvahi

.

&c., like

Atmanepada, F. *f?n& or

mf^ bhdvishye

c.,

C.

wfro

or

dbhavishye &c., P. F. Hfadl^ or mfcirfig bhavitdhe

bhdvishiyd &c.
II

c.,

B. Hfrifa or

Part. Pres. tgiJHM:

bhdydmdnah, Fut. HfqqjHm: bhdvishyd-

mdnaJi) Past $TT. bhutdfy.

Causative, Parasmaipada P. Mi^ifa bhdvdydmi, I. ^XFTQ dbhavayam, 0. HN^ii bhdvdyeyam, I. HIMmfH bhdvdydni Pf. HN^i^^iTC bhdvaydiichakdra,
:

\\

II A.

wr^T^ dbtbhavam,

F.

shyam, P. F. WNf^rilfw bhdvayitasmi^ B.

UNfamifa bhavayishyanii^ C. WHnf'nQ dbhdvayiHT*TW bhdvyasam.

:

Causative,
bhdvdyeya,
I.

Atmanepada
HT^I bhdvdyai

P.
\\

nm bhdvdye,

I.

mm

dbhdvaye, O.

Pf.

HR*d'*n* bhdvaydiichakre, II A.

dbibhave, F.

m^fTO

bhdvayishyt, C. ^TMNfauj dbhdvayishye, P. F.

bhdvayitdhe, B. HNf-M ifl^ bhdvayishiyd.

Causative, Passive
1.

P.

HT^

bhdvye,

I.

^MT^ dbhdvye, O. m*nr bhdvyeya,

HT^ Ihdvyai

\\

Pf.

HN^I^rii,

A. ^WRftrfa dbhdvayishi or
bhdvishye,

dbhdvishi, F. HTCfirofr Ihdvayishye or C. ^wreftr^ dbhdvayishye or wrfa*T dbhdvishye, P. F.

^^, ^rmf^

TT^, Ihdvaydiichakre, -babhdve, -dse,

bhdvayitdhe
bhdvishlyd.

or

Hlf^ril^

bhdvitdhe,

B. Hreftnfal bhdvayishiyd

or

Desiderative, Parasmaipada P. "yj^rfa lulhushdmi, I. ^ryjw dbulhusham, O. "^J^W bulhusheyam, I. "J^mftT bubhushdni u Pf. ^JJ5T^BR bubhtishdii:

A. ^rygfw dbubMshisham^ Y.^^f^snf^bubhushishydmi, dbubhilshishyam, P. F. ^^fMrfifiH bubhushitdsmi, B. *^)jTxn^ bubhushydsam.

chakdra,
I

Desiderative, Atmanepada P. ^$5 bubhushe,

:

bubhusheya,

I.

g^5
C.

lubhushai

\\

Pf.

^^5a&MtAz(5A6, 0. I ^%MN*ft bubhushdiichakre, A.

I.
3.

dbubhushishi,

2.

^^jwr:

dbubhushishthdh,
dbubhushishye,

^R$ftF

dbubhushishta,

bubhushishye,

^ijf^
:

P. F. gflfafn^ bubhushitdhe,

B.

^ijfq^

bubhushishiyd.

Desiderative, Passive

P.-z^bubhiishye,
u

I.

^f

dbubhtishye,
I

O.

lubhushyeya, l.^-^lubhushyai
dbubhushishi^
2.

^^jjwr:

dbubhushishthdh,

Pf.^^f^raiiwiA^A^icAaArre, dbubhushi (see J 406), 3. ^TJ^jf^

A.

i.

F.

5^^ bubhushishye, C. ^*jfaiq dbubhushishye, P. F. ^fwf^ bubhushitdhe,

Intensive,
.

B. ^fq^rhr bubhiishishiyd.

Atmanepada
8.

P.

i.

-sft^bobhuye,
5.

2.

^ivg&lobhuydse,
6.

3.

^t$inr

lobhuydte, 4 ^^JirT^t bobhuydvahe,

7. sftjJTT'R^

^t^J^

bobhiiyethe,

^^fff bobhuyete,
i
.

bobhuydmahe,
2.

^t^TO bobhiiyddhve, 9.^$^ bobhuydnte, I.

3. ^nrfr$5iT
6.

dbobhuye,
bhtiydvahi,

^t^-q^n: dbobhuyathdh,

dbobhiiyata, 4

^t$5*U dbobhuyethdm, dbobhuydmahi, 8. ^R^JjW dbobhuyadhvam,

5.

'3nftinri dbobhdyetdm,
9.

7.

^^^?T dbobhiiyanta,

O.

248
lobMyeya
4.
7.

BHfi CLASS,

PARASMAIPADA VERBS.
2.

&c.,

1. 1. -aft^rr

IdbMyat,
5. 8.

*ftJTO lobhdydsva,
bobhuyethdm,
6.

3. -sfhjTnri

lobhuydtdm,

wfojTjret

lobhuydvahai,

*ft$ifcrf

^^in
2.

lobMyetdm^
\\

^*J5Tm| lobhuydmahai)

sfrj^&sj
i.

bobhuyddhvam,

9. sftiJTriri

lobhdydntdm

PF.

-sfr^^bobhuydmchakre, I A.
3.

^pfrjlfafa dbobhuyishi,

^rsft^ftrsr.

dbobhu-

yishthdh,

^nft^ftrf dbobhuyishta,

dbobhdyishdthdm,
8.

WTtijftrsor

or

cT

dbobhtiyidhvam or -dhvam,

9.

^l^iflfwiT dbobhuyishata,

F. sftsjnra bobhiiyishye, C.

^t^ft^
:

dbobhuyishye, P. F.

^frnn^

bobhuyitdhe,

B.

-sftsftpfta

bobhuyishiyd.
P.
i.

Intensive, Parasmaipada
2.

^>^fT bobhomi or
3. ^tvrVlTf 6.

^ffartf*?

bobhavimi,

^^ft bobhoshi

or ^ftaTfrfa bobhavishi,
5.
.

bobhoti or TmrtilT bobhaviti,

7.

4. "sft$5:
8.

bobhuvdh,

^t^:
3.

bobMthdh,

*frp: bobhutdh,

^t^: bobhumdh,
2.

*fh*T bobhuthd, 9 sftg^fiT bdbhuvati,

I. i.

^RtH^ dbobhavam,

^ftnt: dbobhoh
4.

or

wqto^h dbobhavih,
5. ^?^t)Jlf

^iwt>Th^
6.

dbobhot or

^Rfarh^ dbobhavit,
7.

^TWt^JW a^o8.

bhuva,

dbobhutam,

^t^Jjrrf

dbobhutdm,

^t^T dbobhuma,
I. i.

^^JJT

dbobhuta,
2.

^nfta^t dbobhavuh, O. bobhotu or Tfrsft bobhuhi, 3

9.
.

^^
7.

bobhuydm,

^HWTf^T bobhavdni,

^^5
\\

sftarfc| bobhavitu, 4.

^H^ra
8.
4.

bdbhavdva,

5. ^t^Jrf 9-

bobhutdm,
bobhuvatu
7.

6. "sft^HT

bobhutdm,

^T^TH bdbhavdma,
also
i.

^t^FT bobhutd,
1

^J^l

Pf. i.^fa^HroFTT

bobhavdmchakdra,

^fa^N^
4.

bobha-

vdmchakriva,
bobhuva,
2.

ThT^f^fR bobhavdmchakrima ;
3.
6.

'fiHm bobhdva or
bobhuva,

^hff^T bobhuvitha,
5.

'rt)?R bobhdva or

^$^
7.

bobhuvivd*,
8.

Tt^T^: bobhuvdthuh,
9.

Wt^J^t bobhdvdtuh,
i.

^t^f%JT bobhuvimd,
2.

Wt$5 bobhdvd,

^^jg: bobhuvuh, II A.
3.

^TTt^5 dbobhuvam,

^[^ dbobhufy
i.f ^r

or ^T^)J5^: dbobhuvih,

^Mv,

5.

^nft$^ dbobMt or ^T^t^Ttl^ dbobhuvit, 4. ^nsft5 a&o^R^ijif dbobhdtam, 6. ^I^ft^ifrf dbobhutdm, 7. ^nA^5 dbobhuma, 8.
9.

dbobhuta,

^rwt)J|:
4.

dbobhilvuh

(not

^TT^5^
7.

dbobhuvan), I A.
1

dbobhdvisham,

^rwtHTf^B^ dbobhdvishva,

^^Trfa ^ dbobhdvishma,

F.

"^fafranft bobhavishydmi, C. ^r^t^fVa} dbobhavishyam, P. F. 'sjfaf^rilfw bobhavitdsmi, B. ^rijtrr^ lobhuydsam.

Note

Grammarians who allow the intensive without Tya

:

to

form an Atmanepada, give

the following forms

Pres. ^ft$% bobhute, Impf. ^sft'JW dbobhuta, Opt.

Tt^hf

bdbliuvita,

Imp.
Fut.
,

^ftjlTT bobhutdm, Per. Perf.

Tta^teTfi bobhavdmchakre, Aor.

'SI^Tf^

dbobhavishta,

WNTfrHnT
Ben.

bobhavishydte, Cond. ^rwVHf^Efif dbobhavishyata, Per. Fut.

TtHf^^ bobhamshishtd.

(See Colebrooke, p. 194.)

The form

t$^ bobhuviva
optionally for

is

not sanctioned by any rule of Panini.

t The
second
the

first aorist is

the usual form for intensives, but in

^5M

it is

superseded by the

aorist, this

being enjoined for the simple verb.

first aorist

^5M

(Colebr. p. 193).

Some grammarians, however, admit The conflicting opinions of native

by Colebrooke,
p. 191 seq.

grammarians on the conjugation of intensives are

fully stated

CLASS, PAR ASM AI PAD A VERBS.

2.

249

f^ chit,
I.

to think,
Ifl

The Anubandha \t shows

P. ^TiffiT,
5.

that the participle in

tah takes

no intermediate ^i.
3.
i.

I.
6.
4.

'Hlrt^,

O.

*J?n^,
7.

^IHJ

II

Pf.

i.

fa^lff, 2.

fa ^ fall, I A.
8.

f^^Tf, 4

f^Pqn^:,

(Vifarijj:,

faf^fTW,
^T^fifF,

8.

flP^rf,

9. "fafaljt,

W^fdM,

2.

3.

5. virf?nr, 9. 7. ^?^?rh^, F. ^finqfiT, C. wfinqr^, P. F. ^frnn, B. f^rwr^ u Pt. fro, f*f**r^, Ger. or fafwr^r, fniT, Adj. ^finnr:, ^jnrhi:, u Pass, fra?*, Aor. ^fw, Caus.

^ref?n^,

6. ^rirfrfFf,

w*rfrr*T,

^:

^rnrfir,

Aor.

or f^f^Omfir, Int. ^farnr, ^T^farn^, Des. f^fif^fTr

3.

^^fw.

-^ chyut,
I.

to sprinkle, (^fllT.)
first

The Anubandha
P.
-^ftiffff,

^tr

shows that the verb may take the

Pf. aftirg u
i.

and second

aorist.

2. ^xiftfrvj, 4 ^gfirf, or II A. 1.^*5^, 2. ^ngn:, ^fWVrftj, 3. w^ftrftir, 9. v^fir^:, 3 wajrn^, 9.^^^;, F. ^VfrofTT, C. ^r^ftfTnxnT, P. F. ^ftfinTT, B. 557^11 Pt. or ^q>%lT:, Pass. ^jfinr: -j^jH!^, Ger. ^aftfiraT or -^fiTr^T, Adj. **ftfrfiTM: u

I.

^^fTir^, O.^frTr^,
2.

^pjfrf,

I A. i.^r^fVfinT,
.

Caus.

^tftfnrf?f,

Aor.

^T^^Jtn^,
4.

Des.

^ftfiRfiff

or

ffrafii,

Int.

'QBI^schyut,

to flow,

I.vS>4lflHi^, O.^firti^, I.vftiT^llPf.i.'Wvftir,

:,

or

II A.

I.TOJTT,

F. wrfif^fiT,

9.^^^:, IA. i. C.^^Trim^, P. F.wtfinn, B.

&c.
Note
This verb
is

sometimes written
5.

^tj.

qi^manth,
.

to shake.
unTvjn,
8.

P. Jhrfir u Pf.
correctly,
10

i.

mfa,

2.

^nlftnr, 3

nr^,

7.

M^: (Pan.
u
3.

i.

2,

5) or, less

JT*nrg: (J

328, 4),

I A.

wWhr,
(cf.

F.

^ftroifTf,

P. F. Hfwr,

B.

($

345^
i.

Pt. Hftnr:, TH^JT^ or

^fwi^

395, note), Ger. irfapn or nfv

(Pan.

23; f 428),JniT, Adj.nTv|d'*M;, J^IThi:, Des. fMftj^flf, Int. HlHanw, or ^^^ftflT, Impf.
2,

m:

m4%

Roots ending in consonants preceded by a nasal, lose the nasal before weakening (kit, nit) terminations (Pan. vi. 4, 24) ; but not roots written with Anubandha ^. The terminations
of the reduplicated perfect in the dual and plural are weakening
in
(kit),

Note

except after roots ending

is

double consonants (Pan.

i.

2, 5).
:

According to some, however, the weakening

I

allowed

even after double consonants

<5

^ff^ffiT
1

M*flMl<<f%fliTiJ<

TT5JT

foF^TT

<AiijJ iA^jWrt

II

Roots, however, which thus drop the penultimate

:

nasal in the perfect, need not take

instead of reduplication

Prakriya-Kaumudi,

p. 7 b.

Native grammarians admit a verb HVjfd (mathe), and another

variety of verbal derivatives.
6.

i^ifn,

which supply a

to "f^ kunth,

strike, (^fa.)

nasal throughout Roots marked in the Dhatupatha by technical final ^t keep their penultimate This root can take no Guna, on account of its final conjunct consonant.

P-

fTrfiT,

I.

*f^,

O. -f^,

I.

$^r

Pf.

i.

^pr,

2.

^tf^ni,

9-

^^> l A

K k

250

BHfr CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

J 99>

not

with lingual ^, as Carey gives

Adj.-ffzm^i:
7.
II

it)

Pt. -f ftmr,

Pass, "f Wff, Caus.-fTrefir, Des. ^faitfTT, Int.

to ftn{ sidA,
I.

P. *vfn (fMwftf *), P. F.

^^

go (fto ), and fav sidh, to command (fan*). x " pf 1. ft** 2. ftrefw, 9 fttfw, I A.
.

F. irftrofir, ftftrar, B. ftnsr^. In the sense of commanding or ordaining, this root

gj

is

(f^v

),

and hence the intermediate ^ may be omitted.

4. ftrfafire

marked by technical Thus Pf. 2.

or ftre^,

or fafasT &c., F.
i.

itfvnrfir

or %wfiT, P. F. irfVnn or
3. ^Srtt'lf^,

I A. ^T^rtl^ (as before), or

,

^T%W,

2.

^rentfh,

4. viSr*3, 5.

7. 'sitr^T,

or TO^i:
Int. ^fTOff,

II

n Pt. ftr^.% Ger. irftn^r or 8. ^rite, 9. ftr^r, ftnff, Adj. 'srirg: Pass, ftnflff, Caus. ihnrfw, Des. ftrefVmfif or ftff^rfiT ( 103),

H^fe
8.

khad, to be steady, to ^^ft^r,

3.

kill,
4.

to eat.
5.

P.
7.

^fff
8.

Pf.

i.^^T^
9.

(a), 2.

M'l^,

^^f^,

^^^t,
JJ,

6.

-q^gt,

^^f^fT,

^^,

^^:,
B.

I A.

^^T^^

or

W^(fi),

(Pan. vn.

7; f 348), ^Rr, Adj.

F. ^^rfif, P. F.
U

^HT,

^Em^ u

Pt. ^rf^ir:,

^T^TT^, Ger. ^f^r,

Pass. ^?rw, Caus. yi^fii, Des. f^^f^flT, Int.

9.

IT^

gad, to speak.

P. T^fw (nftpr^frr),
2.

I.

*&I?T( (THRITT^),

*fTf^r,

9. SFTg:,

A.

^nn^or ^SR^(a),
B^nim^ w Caus.
T^ rad, to
10.

O. TT^, I. n^g u Pf. i. (Pan. vn. 2, 7; $ 348), F.

C.

^rnf^n^,

P. F. nf^wr,

in^rfw, Des. ftFrf^fir, Int.

P. ^fif

II

Pf.

i.

TTT<? (&), 2.

V^T,

9.

^ A ^H ^K
I
-

trace, to scratch.

or

()

(J

n. r^nad,
P.
T^f7r (iro^fir,

to

hum, (^.)
2.

wfim^fif)

u Pf. i.

HII^ (),

Hf^'M, 9 ^j:, I
.

A. vfi<

or

12. ^rf ard, to go, to ask, to pain.

P. ^rf fif,

I.

^nfir

ii

Pf.

i.

wfrrf ,

2. ^Tfjrff *r,
II

9. 'sri'Tjt,

I A.

wnfFf^,

F.

^rf^'orfiT u

Pt. ^f^jtt, not ^rra*, see also p.

13.

166

Caus. -si^fw, ^nf^TJ, Des.

^
I.

ind, to govern,
u Pf.

P. ^fir,
*
It is

1."^, O.
of

^,
is

^rg

^pq^R

(I

325) or

^m(

or
to go.

The change

^ into ^

forbidden by Panini vin. 3, 113,

when ftfV means

admitted by the Sar. The Anubandha <T is sometimes added to to go, but is "ftr^ explained to be for the sake of pronunciation only. Colebrooke marks it as erroneous.
Its

proper meaning would be that intermediate

(

is

optional in the gerund, and forbidden

in the past participle

337,

II. 5).

The forms without intermediate ^ belong properly only

its initial

to

ftr^

to

command.

This verb must change

^ after prepositions

BHU

CLASS,

PARASMAJPADA VERBS.

251

IA. i.FfH, a^W:, F. fomfr, C.Vf^nf,

or Wlf4|1^, Perf. Pass.

14.

P.F.^in, B.jim^ n Pt. jfijTn, Perf. ^Nftuu: or "^JTR: or

(fiffft.)

ffanind, to blame,

P.

fchjfir (uftfrsT

or

nM<i,

J 98, 8, 2) u Pf. frfrfc, I

A.

^fHTfy

F.

P. F. fctfsWT, B. fTOT^.
15. "Pro niksh, to kiss, (fiin^.)

P. fa H| fa (R^^ITT, not

RffffSffrr,

$ 98,

8,

2)

II

Pf. fHfHHf,

I A.

F.

firKJU4Pn, P. F. f^Tf^TTT,

B.

frltt^m.

16.

TGukh,
II

to go.
i.

P.
7.

vftwfrf (litarrf,

43),

I.

y&U44|^

Pf.

T^T

(J

314))

2.

J^favj,

3.

JlflSH,

I A.

'sriWlc^,

F. ^finwu^frf, C. P. F. ^f?HfT, VHrf^mf^,

^ftf%f^nrfTT.

B.

Pass. ^lUjd, Caus.

^n^fH, Des.

17. w*l andi, to go, to worship,

(^^ and

^rfv.)
i

The Anubandha

"7 w of

^^ aficAu allows the option of intermediate 7

its

in the

gerund,

anchitvd or "wm\ aktvd, and

nasal remains, except before weakening forms (see month,

but the Anubandha ^t of ^Tfafac/iirequiresthe nasal throughout (Dhatupatha 7, 6).

PNo.5); P.^fff
F. qjpqmfw,

n Pf. i.

'srnH
10

C.

wf^tir^,
345,
.

^rnf^t (but see No. 5, note), I A. P. F. <iPMd!, B. (may he worship),

313),
9.

^TT^

(may he
Pass.

go),

^^TT and

^NjTT, Caus.

Mnf7f,

Des.

^
its

Distinguish between

^faff! worshipped, Ger. vPqrii having worshipped, and

vi. 4, 30);
is

moved

(Pan. vn. 2, 53;

^T

never seems to lose

nasal

when

it

means to

honour: Pass. a*MH he

not always kept distinct.

honoured, iH^Mri

he

is

moved.

The two

roots, however, are

1 8.

^r^dnchh,
or

to stretch, farf%.)

P. WSrfTT

II

Pf.

^Ml^

w^

(J

313), I A. Wflfli^

F.

^nTamfd

Caus.

^ii^Mfn, Des. viiPira.Hrn. ,

19.

mruch, to go, (33.)

$

^tafir n This

and other verbs enumerated

;

367 take optionally the

Perf.

first

or second aorist

mtfiWli^

or

Wj*l^

II

Pt.

^5:,

^^^|t^,

Ger. HfBR^T,

(Pan.

i.

2, 26), or ^IRT.

20.

P.

fAfir

(J 143)

H Pf.

j% hurchh, to be crooked, (5%.) ^|*, I A. wpefit n Pt. jf*r or |*

21.

(j

431,

2).

snjwz/,
2.

to go.
(f

P.

^rsrfiT
<fif.

ii

Pf.

i.

^nr

(a),
22.

^finT

328),

A. <nfl^ or

F.

<q

Hn

vrq;, to go.

P. TnTft n Pf.

i.

^niT

(a),

2 ^^ftriT,
.

I A.

w*mrX

34^*)

Pt

Caus. ^M^fd, Des.

(^1^^,

Int.

^id^fj

K k

252

BH#

CLASS,

PAKASMAIPADA VERBS.

23. ^T5T/, to go, to throw.

P. *mfw,

I.

^n*fi^

II

tf

must be substituted
Before
i.

in the general tenses before

all

terminations beginning with vowels. u. 4, 56, vart.) this substitution is optional,

Pf.
($
i.

e.

consonants except ^(Pan. both and may be used

II

f^nmr

(a),

2.

f^j

or ftnrftro (I 335, 3),

6. faaiij:,
7.

[jsrrftnr],
8.

3.

f^ro,

4.

fafere

334), [^iftre],

5.

f^i^r:,

fafai* [^TTftnr],

fa*r, 9. f^j:, I

A.

^%^ [>nrX]>
Pass.

9.

nty, F.

TOfir

(1

332, 3), C.
n

^nn^,

P. F. Tin, B.
Perf.

[F. ^rf^TfTT, C. ^rf^ni;,

P. F. ^fw?n]

Pt. tfir: [>ftTff:],

Ijsnftnn^], Ger. ^terr [^ftr^r],

Thr, Adj. ^ff^r: [^ftnr*i:], -cf^H^:,

w:
is

^7T, Caus.

-qTHJ^frf,

Des.

f^Wrr

[^ftTf^frr], Int.

?3tTR (WlT

not

sanctioned by Panini).
24. fs? ^Ai, to wane, /r/i*. to diminish, (Colebrooke.)

P. H^fff

Pf.

i.

f^^Tir
(

(a),
II

2.

f%T5pr or f^^ffiT^r,

9.

fafofft,

I A.

-si

tfl

r^,

F.

-^BTflT,

B.

^tinr^

390)

Pt. ftp: or -^tan U Pass. 'HjT^H, Caus. 3JH4Hfri,

Des. fq^lMfrf, Int,

II. 23) *.

^Sjfaffir,

%%fif.

The Caus.

^qnfrt belongs to

(f

462,

25.

oFT kaf, to rain, to

1J e

encompass,

(oF7.)

The Anubandha
P.
-sreffT
II

prevents the lengthening of the vowel in the aorist.

Pf.

^^TJ, I A.

*oh^(no Vriddhi,

348 1).

26. T{(/up, to protect, (n^.)

The

verbs ^J^^M^, to guard,

to praise, take

W^dMp, to warm,

ftr^ vichh, to go,

"^TTT

^an, to

traffic,

tJ^ JJOTI,

WI

aya in the special tenses, and take

it

optionally in

the rest.

(Pan.

m.

1,28; 31.)
I.

or

'ftTnrg *i\m*n^, wftum^, I A. ^TTfhrnft^ , or ^H'itmlrt (J 337, 1. 2), "spfhr, ^RViffy

P. jfarrafir,

O.

I.

Pf-

i^m^i^auK
6.

325^ 3)

"snmr, F.

TrVqiftrofff,

or
Pt.
Trttrrftnr:
II

Tft^FrfiT,

P. F. jfimrnHi,

^ftftnrr,

or

Tf^rr,

B. jplm^iri or
.

^ur^

or

nir:,

Ger. jilMif^Hi,

nVftrf^T,

or

JTRT,

Adj

Tft

or TU^K

Caus.

JTfairflT

or JntjTHnfjT,

Des.

^'ItsPrt,

WnfxjwTfTj

'T'TTnT^nT,

or

*FftTTftrefff, Int.

27. W^dhilp, to

warm.
is

P. vtmrfir

U Pf.

vqmNcFTC

or ?WTJ (no Guna, because the vowel

long),

I A. ^JqFffa or
28. if^ tap, to burn, (J 332, 14.)

P. rmfw
2.

II

Pf.

i.

ffiTTxr

(a),

2.

rTH^ or wfxR
(f

335, 3),
P. F.

3. cfffTtT,

I A.
n

i.

wrwt:,
*

3.

^nn^il^,

6. ^nrTrrt

351), F.

-ax^rfiT,

wm, B.

TfTam^

Pt.

The causative cannot have short a, and though both Westergaard and Boehtlingk Roth give the short a, they produce no authority for it. The participle Hjf^ri: is equally impossible, and should always be changed into

CLASS,

PAKASMAIPADA VEKBS.

253
456, 6) u

Pass.

Ger. mjT, Adj. FTO:, TO: (short, because it ends in ^, rUMff, Caus. ATM<lfff, Des. fffn^fn, Int. ninM?T9 fimfw.

Note
fTfUTff
Iftj:
it

With

certain prepositions TH^ takes the

It
;

shines.

has an active sense in the passive

n*Mri

Atmanepada (Pan. I. 3, 37) (i.e. Div Atm.), if it

THHTTf,
refers to

austere devotion

nmxtiH:
it

sense of regretting (being burnt)

distressed by a sinful act.

the devotee performs austere devotion. In the forms the Aor. ^tnw ; ^i*iqinN MIMI *ui he was

(Colebr.)

29.

Vf

cham, to

eat, (*nj.)

The

following verbs lengthen their vowel in the special tenses (Pan.

if

vn.

3, 75, 76)

^T cham,
shthtvati

preceded by

^TT d, to rinse, iMi'^iHfri dchdmati

f^^shfhiv t to spit,
;

iThlfiff

(see

No. 35)

#wA, to hide, JJffrf guhati, follows a different rule, lengthening instead of taking Guna, when a vowel follows. (Pan. vi. 4, 89.) throughout,
kldmati.

H5^

kram, to stride,

fliT*tffT

krdmati (see ^No. 30)

^H^kfam, to tire, "JITTfiT

its

vowel

P. *Rfw, but after the prep, ^n,

(J

WMIHfr

II

Pf.

i.

^TTR

(a), 2.

^ftro &c., I A.

348^)
i,

u Pt. ^ifw:
u

429), Ger. ^fr^r or ^farff, Adj.

(J

^ftnw

(Pan. in.

126)

Caus. ^IHMfri
30.

462).
to stride,
("^55.)

W1 kram,

JK$ kram, to stride,

to
fail,

W5T bhrds,

to shine, >TT5T 6^/<w, to shine, tfJJ bhram, to roam,

Gflft tras, to tremble,

^T trut,

to cut, c5^?asA, to desire,

may take 1 ya
i,

in

the

special tenses.

Hence ^IW^fd bhrdmyati

I.

or WTftf bhramati.

(Pan. in.

70.)
(

P. F.

fRTHfiT

or

-jRTJsifr,

^^T^ or ^^i^^ u

Pf. *nRT*, I

A.

-sniiirl^

348*),

-aifinqfif, P. F. -afar, B. -ai^T^ n aw lengthens its vowel in the general tenses

(sit)

of the Parasmaipada

(Pan. vii. 3, 76).

<

Hence

jMHfrf,
"^TTT,

the Atm.; Fut. a$*IF, P. F. intermediate

^.

no intermediate ^ in Aor. ^T^cT; but some grammarians admit

but wti.
It takes
(a) or ^fHr^T

Pt. -afar, Perf. ^^TRTT^, Ger.

"affq^r,

^f^T

429), Adj.

a fa dm:

Pass.

Caus. WRflf, J 461, (after prep, also

^Tfifif .

ailHqffl),

Des.

f^aif*T^flT

or f^^^d,

Int.

v*w<^,
It

Note

has been doubted whether "3RH in the Div class also lengthens
;

its

vowel.
is

It is

not one of the eight S'am verbs (Pan. vn. 3, 74)

valid.

and

in Pan.
"

vn.

3, 76,

tyan

no longer
I

The Prasada

'gives

a^Pii

but adds,

^jPTiT

^44x4 fs
i,

^&:

j^i^nlfri

The

Sarasvati decides for jnu-qPn, giving the general rule (n.

145) ^iii<{lii ql^i H^fTT McniV

"Rl and enumerating as ^ITrf^, ^IJT^^HH^^'^'aiHR^. But "aWis not a Samadi at all, and instead of "a*T we ought to read UW. Taranatha in the Dhaturupadarsa gives ffMjffl,
Rajaramas'astri supports jni*^fff.

31.

HH yam,

to stop.
for

The

roots T*T gam, to go, THT yam, to cease,

their final in the special

and "S^ish, to wish, substitute ^5 chchha tenses. (Pan. vn. 3, 77.)

P.-rarfir, I.

XS^HII
iJTn,

Pf. i.irow(5),

2.

ir^for ^fni,

%:,

I A.

^wh^($359)>
TTW,

F.

Tfcqfir,

p. F.

B. TH

Pt. ^nr:,

^^RT^,

Ger. *I^T,

^^ or

Adj.

254

Bffft

CLASS,

PARASMAIPADA
Caus. Tmnfa

VEfcBS.

TOT: (fifinwr:)

Pass,

*iT*rff,

(a),

461), II A.

Des.

finfafiT, Int. TfanajTT or iRfiT.

Note

*PT
t

may be used

in the

Atm. with the

its

prep. ^TT, if

it

is

either intransitive,
;

the tree spreads, or governs as

object a

member

of the agent's body

"3^,
if it is

he puts forth his hand.

reflectively
;

Likewise with the prep.

^5?T, ?T,

used

^od.H
;

means

to espouse

he heaps together his own rice. Likewise after 1"*T, when it TTTt *f)ril*JMH4ttf Rama married Sita: here the Aor. may also be OMIMH;
'ril^l*^

like ^<JNrt

he divulged another's 32.

faults.

356.)

TH nam,
2.

to

bow,
.

(*PT.)

P. -^fw n Pf.

i.

^n*

(),

-JR^T or ^firo, 9

%,

I A.

^Hfi^

(f 359),

F.

P. F.
"qi?

tfiTT,

B. Tfnrn^&c.,

like

HT.

On

the Causative, see $ 461.

(Pan. in.
is

may

be conjugated in the Atmanepada.

i, 89.)

The Anubandha

^ given to

it

by some grammarians

declared

wrong by

others.

33.

TTH^aw, to go,
2. -STHrfVpz?

(IT*.)
<

P. n^fiT
5.

II

Pf.

i.

^TITR (a),

or ^rf^,
(J

3.

^17??,

4.

*fn^
TTFT,

(J

328, 3),
n

II A. 3T"rg: &c.,

^riT^

367), F. TrfrofiT

338,

2), P. F.
O
JTTT,

B. JTWT

Pt. inr:, Perf.

^fn^n^
prep.

or ^TTP^T^, Ger. JTRT,

TTI or

Adj.

TTTTO:,

Pass.

J|Hjrl,

Caus. j|*Hfn, Aor. ^^l^*iri, Des.

firnfH^fiT, Int. ^J|*^ri or

Note
S5TT,

With

^ it

follows the Atm.,

it

if intransitive.

The Caus.

too, with the prep.

may

follow the Atm., if

*T

means

to have patience;

^I'ii1^ TTT^wait

little.

In

the Atm. the final

(See
355.)

may be

dropt in the Aor. and Ben. ;

twin

or ti^'iw, ^Urtilg or

34. TKcfphal, to burst, (fHMWI.)

P.

tfic5fff

||

Pf.

i.

-qTRTH (d),

2.

^ffTC
II

(f

336, II.

2),

3.

TTOc*,

4II

I A. ^nfiTc^ (I 348*), F. TfifoTirfH Pass. TB^TW, Caus. TBTT^irfff, Aor.

(Pan. vn. 4, 87-89.)

Pt.

^IifliMr^

vin. 2, 55), Ger. MifaHl ipr: (Pan. Des. f^tfifj^fiT, Int. qij^ri, TT^foff.

35. f?^ shthiv, to spit, (fi^.)

P. -sWff
({

Pf. ftnhr or

ftH

I A.

<3nNfy F.

^f%^?fiT n

Pt.

&g:

Pass.
Int.

143), Caus. ^^fiT, Des. fff^f^fk or g^T^fff (Pan. vn.

2, 49),

No

Intensive Parasmaipada.
in special tenses (see

Vowel lengthened

No.

29).

Initial sibilant

unchangeable

103).

36. f^ji, to excel.

P. nMPff
6.

n Pf. i.f^rrnr

(),

2.
.

f|j|vr

or

f^Jifiivi, 3.f*nrnr, 4. r5ff"?"=r, 5. ftn^rjt,

f^nrg:,
'sfhlTfl;
:

7.
II

ftrfnur,

s.

ftrnr, 9 fsrg:, I A.

^^^

(J

350), F. imfr, P. F. inn,

B.

Pt.

flTff:,

Perf.

fuDNl^, Ger.

flfSrT,

(f

45^ 2)9 ftw* only with ^fe: (Pan. in. i, 117) Caus. ^TTRfff, Aor. Des. ftfnWff, Int. ^nf^HTi^,

Adj. %rf^T:, ^HRhi:, ^H, and Pass, iftnw, Aor.

II

^ft^,

^%fif.

It

follows the

Atmanepada with the prepositions

TO
is

and

fw.
(

The change of l^into

Tx in

the reduplicated perfect

anomalous

319).

It does

CLASS,
take place in 7*n to wither
that root after
it

PARASMAIPADA VERB*.

255

ntllT, although the rule of Panini might seem to comprehend

i*n forms
its

has taken Samprasarana.

reduplicated perfect flT*ii.

37. ^HS( aksh, to obtain, (v^.)

^^uksh
P.
5.

follows also the

Su

class, Vt^jllftOl akshnoti

3.

&c.

^TE|fTT

II

Pf.

i.

-viiiGf,
7.

2. vj|fiPB|X4

or xiitK,
s.

^TPTSf,
9.

4.

VMfyq

OF
i.

vnisj^,
^rref,

6.

-winsjg'j
3.

^sTRfepr or *urif,

wrrcr,

Mgr,

I A.

or

2. VHIVSJ'):,
1

or ^ror, 5. ^rrfsr* or ^m?, 6. ^rrf^jf or ^msfri^, 4. VNI(H|H

8.

7. vHifHf
r,

*!

or ^rrep,

wrftf^ or
II

^BTTF,

9. ^wrfiejg:

P. F.

mftsfri!

or ^??T

Pt. ^T?:,

Ger.
(J

^T

or VTTJ:, F. vfujviffl or or ^?ft|?^T n Pass. V^T?T,

Caus. SH^Mfri, Aor.

*snfat|i^,

Des. vnf^nsjMfk

476).

K^,
Su

to

hew, follows

W^

throughout, also in the optional forms of the

class.

38. P.
2.

^
. .

krish) to

drag along, to furrow.

.

^fr

u Pf. i.

*n*t, 2 q^ft^, 3
^IcRn^,
5.

^it,
6.

^fVre

(f

335, 3), I A.

i.

viomefT;,

3. ^nirnsflfi^, 4.

*t*iS,

^MWKT,

7. VCIIIQI, 8.

^Kii,

9.

or ^nsr?| &c., or I A. 4 *?^rsf &c.

If used in the Atmanepada, the two

forms would be,

I A.
2. i.WfflSf,
i.

2.Wn,
2.

3-

I A. 4. I A.

id.

*i$KfV|i:,

3.

2. 4. ^ejT^f^r,
4.

5. ^cyGlixif, 5. 8. 8.

6.
6.

Vf H||(ff,
id.

I A. 4. I A.

^T^VSINf^,

id.

2. 7.

^^fif,
P. F. TOT or ?R|T or
^T^^i^i^,

^S?^f

9.

I A. 4.
F. ai^frf or

7. -Hc(ilSJIHflf,

^p|l4,
Pt.

9.

^fw,

11

f Bt,

Ger.

^T

"

Pass. ^nr?r, Caus.

Aor. xM^ohMH

Des. f^Effff,

Int.

^O^f^lrt,

^0*1?

or

The

peculiar

Guna and Vriddhi

and

of

^,

viz.

^and

TT, instead
j

of

^T^

and WIT, take place

"JFT,

necessarily in '&*{, to emit,

to see (Pan. vi. i, 58) "^ST,

^TT,

^9T^TT^, and

V^UJjIlT
59)
'>

optionally in verbs with penultimate

^,

which

reject intermediate

(Pan. vi.

i,

71

to rejoice, <3TTT or tT^T, Aor. vtni-^flTi^, 'STWT'^rh^ or

39.

^^rush,

to kill.

P.tt^fwu Pf. i.^d*, 2.^df^r, 9.^^:,

or

lA.^CiMX,

F.dft^fir, P. F.

df^n
P.

(I

337, II.

i).

40. "S^ush, to burn.

^ft^tlr, I.

"sfrm^

Pf.

i.

^fteNoRn: or gr^r^

(J

326),

2.

^fmy,
11

3.

&c., lA.'sftrh^, F.'sftfTOfrr,

(

P. F.^>ftir,

B.

^qr^

Pt.

^ir. or

425)

Des.

'sftfafinrfiT.

P.

Mr

ii

Pf.

i.

41. t^; mih, to sprinkle. fifWT> 2. f^f^zr, I A. <*f*ren^ ( 360), F.

TCjrfrr,

P. F.

TT

256
Pt.
*fte:,

BHU
Perf.

CLASS,

PAKASMAIPADA VERBS.
jft^T
II

jf^T^(fafaa^),

Ger.

Caus. *f trfrr, Wifift^, Des.

Int. *fWff,

wfe,

(*frfe, Westerg.)

42.

^ dah,
or

to burn.

P.

^ft
.

II

Pf.

i.

^T*r
2.

(&), 2.

\f^
3.

^iv,
4-

F. vsgfr
5.

(J

118), P. F. <pvr, B.
5.

<mir1, I A.
8.

i. 'srvTEf,

wrcfttj

^visf)^

^rorw,

^FV,

^PVT,

7.

^nn^r,

^mr,

9 ^rorer: (see p. 185) u Pt. ^nsr. u

Caus.

^qfw,

Aor.

^^^,

Des.

f^rayfir, Int.

^3ff,
43.

^f

T V.

T%

glai, to
II

droop

also

J mlai,
9.

to fade.

P. TcSnrfiT,

O. r<3T^
^ri^nT^fTj

Pf.
7.

i.

W&t

(I 329),

2. STfroFZI

or !Tc5T^,

3.

^Tc^,
357),

^irfrc^r, 5.^0^5:, 6.^755:,

2. 8.

irfrcW, 8.^c7,

I A. i.u?5Tftw ^r^:,
6.

(J

^P"c5nT^,

3.

4. ^f<5Tftr^=r,

5. ^r^cyrfti'?}

^PTSTftreij

7.

^^^TftT^Tj
n

^T<3Tftre, 9. ^Tcjrftr-q:,

F. T^i^rfF, P. F. TOnrT, B. ^Hrmi^or

'c5T^,

THU^ (J 3921)

Pt. TOJPT:,
,

Ger. r^TF^T,

Adj. THTW^:, TcSlWhKj ^WT.

Pass, (impers.)

Caus.

Te^rinrfk or

T^q^rcT (Dh. P. 19, 68),

Des. fuFcsrefrf , Int.

n-

44- *tffai, to sing; also "\rctf, to bark,

P.
'1T*lftf
II

% kai,
u

to croak.

Pf.

Hn, I A. ^TTCrfa^, F.

Jlimfrt,

P. F.

Jllril,

B.

mir^

39 2 )'

Mark
T,

the difference between

^ and
U

in the

Bened.

Pt. *ffa:, Ger. jf)HI

Adj.

JTTtTSJ^

TT^T^:, ^rm

Pass. ift^H, Aor.

>HJ||f^,

Caus. Tl^nfrf, Aor.

45.
P.

w shtyai) to
or
INMIr^
H

sound, to gather; also TO styai, the same.

II

($ 103.)
KMirti)

KMiMfifT (^

103)? ! ^TPrnTW
Pt. ^miTJ,

Pf. ?TBTr, I

A.

^STWT^T^IT,
(J

F. KMitMfn, P. F.

B.

wiHlr^

Trcrt7fl,

HWlTt

443).

Note
Pan. vi.
til

With regard
i,
1

to the initial lingual sibilant, the Prasada quotes the Varttika to

I

64, as ^SkTT^W^'Kfif^^T ^r^frf^Vi

marginal note says,

i
i

<*ii^rM

brti

t^'"

im (*jtT*T^>?J"^ HT^i'mopr^^^^ imr

"

3TTw*i ^^fira

flT

31

^*i M n MI K.fn
i

MC*<n

46.
This verb
is

dai, to cleanse,

distinguished by a mute

^p

from other verbs,

(

like

<fT

da &c.

It is therefore

not comprised under the

^
i.

ghu verbs

392*);

it

takes the

first aorist

(3rd form),

and does not substitute \i or

TJ e for ^ST a.

P. ^nrfff

u Pf.
II

^,

A.

^rftnr,

^T^ft: &c., F. ^r^frr, P. F.

^m,

B.

^RTf^

II

Pt. ^Trf:

Pass. ^TOW, Caus. ^HnrffT, Des. f^T^fk, Int. ^T^n^, ^Tfif.

47.

V 6?^e,

to drink, (TIT.)
in the general tenses

This verb

is

one of the

six so-called

** ghu roots ( 392), roots which have for their base ^T da or VT dA<l

P.

vrrfif u Pf.

i.^,

2.

^mor ^VTO,
A.

8.^V, 9 .^:.

It admits I

4. ^ftw, 5. ^Tj:, 6. ^>Tg:, 7 II A. ($368), and Red. II A. ($371): 3. ($357),

3.

^,

BH6

CLASS,

PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

257

2.

9.

F. vrofiT, P. F.

vm,

B.

wi^

ii

Pt. >far:,

Ger. \flwr,

vnr

Pass, vhnr, Caus.

vrWir (Atm.
or,

T*

to swallow), Aor.

*r^him^ DCS.

fvwfir, Int. ^vhrir, ^rvrfir,

with the always optional

48.

f, ^rvfif.

pldrtf, tosee,

(%*.)
i. <*<n$r,

This root substitutes

H^ pasi/a in the special tenses.

Wt%
7.

P.
3.
2.

iflRfir, I.
.

WI^,

O.

H^,
6.

I.

H Pf.

2.

<ji^N or
9 TfS}:,
.

^8 ($ 335),
i.

^r,

4 <$fyif, 5.
3.

T?3Hp5
4. vi
i.

^$nj:,
5. xi

^jfijm,
6.

8.

^pr,
7.

I A.

>eii3f1:,

^ JIG|1^,

ji8i,

JIK,

^"^TTT,

^^l*l,

8.

^TJTF,

9.

(^

360, 364); or II A.
:,

^, *^,
9
.

F.

F. -5*1, B. -j^rfir, P.
H

^^ni^

R.
or

Ger.
(

^,
1),

-piT, Adj. -5^^:,

^fN:, pu:

Pass.

-5^,

F.

^finr

41

P. F. ^f$rf! or "^T, B. ^f$rts or Aor. W^i^, Caus. ij^hrnr, ^Hjlg,

or

Aor.

xM^^^lf^

^T^^,

Des.

f^K|H (Atm.),
instead of

Int.

^O^^Mrf, ^fff
;

"^^r

and

^^

take ^ and

IT?

^T and
i,

3nr,
58).

as their

Guna and

Vriddhi before consonantal terminations (Pan. vi.

See No. 38.

Other verbs which substitute

3> 7*0
UT,
:

different bases in the special tenses (Pan. vir.

^ forms
;

^a[f?f; ^,
;

VRfw;
frtHPn
;

^,

^ft^W (Atm.);
;

^,

tft^frr;

"^IT,

fM^fd

fiMPn

"NTT,

VTfiT

^JT,

^T, HHfif

^T, ^(^rri.

49.
P.
4.

^ n,
8.

to go.
i.

'^TjAfif
5.

(dm SO,
^TR^:,
^rnj:
;
;

44), I. ^rrti^ u Pf.

^TRIJ:,
7.

^nr,
9.

2.

^ifXvj (^ 338, 7), 3 ^IR,

.

^rrfr^,

6.

^HifuH,

^nr,

^rr^:,

I A. i.^fl,

2. ^rnflf:,

3. ^rr^ffr^,

9.

the Second Aor. ^rrt

(

is

generaUy referred to the

^ of the

Hu class,
Pt.
-^TT:

^ufff

F. ^rftwfTr

338,

2),
u

C.

^ftm^,

or

^n,

Ger. ^r^T,

^w

Pass.

^^,

P. F. *r, B. ( 390) u Caus. ^ijfif, Des. ^fXCmfo,

^T^

Int. ^Xl5rt 5 ^RfS, ^rftmfS, ^n^fif,

VHr^OHn (exceptional intensive, { 479, with

the sense of

moving

tortuously).

50.

sri, to

go.

P. VT^rfw always

means
2.

to run, while ^rcfk is used likewise in the sense of

*rar$ (I
i.

going
7.

u
?

Pf.
8.

i.

*raR(<),

335, 3), 3 **TT, 4

.

**p

wy.,

6.

^TH?:,

wpT

^r, 9."^^:, I A.
390)
u

^rarrt,

2. "^nrrtf:,

3.

^rat

is

generally referred to the

(I

of the

Hu

class

^Hi*(T^; F. ^r^mfri, P. F. ^HT, ;

ftnfttfrr,

the Second Aor.

B.
($

ftnm^
490)-

Pt. ww:

Caus.

m^fd,

Des.

Int.

TO^TT,

51.

tad, to wither,

(^rjj.)

(The
P.
^fhrpr,

special tenses take the

I. ^fhnrf u

Atmanepada.
i.

I. sH^pjjri,

O. s^tWj

Pf.

5151 1<

()?

2.

^nrw

or

258
9. ^[^t,

BHU
II A. ^^^fi , F.

CLASS,

PARASMA1PADA VERBS.
Tjr^T,

^i(t<fPfl,

P. F.

B.

tysi

II

Caus.

$(lrtHfirf

(^fl^'Mfa

he

drives), Des. O^lrMPrt, Int. ^i^iejn,

$|l$(Pr(.

52. ?re sad, to perish, ('*&)

P.

tflqPn

(Pn^l^Pn)
tutttPft,

Pf.

i.

TOTT^ (),

2.

^f^*r or
Pt. ^r^t

^rarr'zr,

9.

$^:,

II A.

^srnfff

('MH^r^),

F.

P. F. ^T^T, B. TOTn^

Pass. USM, Aor.

T^rf%.

^T^rrf^,

Caus.

^TT^ilfir,

Aor.

^re^R^, Des.

"ftr^wflT, Int. TtU(lri,

53. tn pd, to drink.

P. ftRfrr
inirr,

Pf.
(j

i. ^nTTj

2. ^rf^^i

or Tqrer,

9. ^ijjj

II A.

'SRTIT,

F. mmPrf, P. F.

B.

M*in^

392)

Pt.

"iffan,

Ger.

iflni,

^nr, Adj. tnTT^rt, mnl^it, "^rt u

to swallow), Aor.
-fl

Pass. tfhfF, Aor. ^Rlftr, Caus. mnijOT (or

Vii. 4, 4), Des. fVnrwfir, Int.
i|i(1^ri,

ql

m^

(Pan.

m^iPn.

54. in ghrd, to smell, to perceive odour. P.

r^'iifrf) I.

itPiif^,

O. ftnn^,
i

I.

f^yg

u Pf. i.

*fw,

2.

iPiivi

or ^vi^,

9.

nrr,

or I A. II A. ^irn^j

^*

til

i^ (j

368, 357)5 F. Tn^rfw, P. F. nid r, B. ymiri or

TTTr^T U

392 1)

Pt.

TTTiT:

or UTOt, Ger.

Pass. ITR^", Aor.

nisiiuPfi, Int.

Jj*j|p{{,

Caus.

^rP5rn?^TfT

or

vi P^i pjj|

4 n (Pan vu. 4?
.

6),

Des.

^'ifl^rf, ^fTMlPri.

55. IRT

dhmd, to blow.
F. im^jPd, B. or ^TTTH urnni^
u

P. vrfrr

Pf.

^w?

I A.

HMiin1i^,

Pt. i*mf* u

Pass. "WTRff,

Aor.

^TWTTftr,

Caus.

iRm'Tfrr,

Aor. ^Tfi*unTH, Des. f^urrafff, Int.

56.

^n

sthd) to stand, (FT.)

P. firefr

Pf.
u

K^

(^rfVfir^),

II A.
OT*?,

392) Aor.

Pt.

f^znr:, f^Tr^T,

F ^rr^fw, B. > Tsn&m (**0> 9Adj. ^mr^:, wnl^:, ^i: n Pass,

:
-

-?H^j|ftr, Caus. Frm^fii, Aor. ^fdfs^r^, Des. Pd8rfrri, Int. ri^/l^rf, Note After *t, W^", TT, and f^T, ^TT is used in the Aim. ; also after "33T, if it means
"3"^, if it

to affirm;
:

with

means

to strive, not to rise

or with

"3^1, if it

means

to worship, &c.

Pres.

f?r&W, Red. Perf. "jf^r, Aor. ^rfWiT, 9. ^ftfif^rf, Fut. WT^?ff, Ben.

WRfte.

57. ^T mnd) to study.

P. TTfiT

II

Pf.

i.

*TW?

2.

*irxf or

Pt. OTiT. U Pass,

^pm, Caus.

T^R, 9. TOt, I A. ^rwWlf^, B. ^rnrn^or #m^ OTTCfr, Aor.^rH^M, Des. fH^iqfff, Int. HltiNri,
^r

II

58.

d,

to give,

II A. P. ^aiiT* (Trftr^^fw) n Pf. ^r^, B. ^in^ (f 392) u Pt. ^r:, Ger. (see No. 200, Pan. vu. 4, 46), ^T, Adj. ^nT^t, ^TTftiT:, ^q: H Pass. ^hlW,

^,

Caus.

^IMMfrf,

Des.

f^rHfri, Int. T^fanr, ^T^rfH .

59. 5^ hvri, to bend.

P. d^fW

II

Pf.

i.

^d^K 0),

2.

^T^
it

(J 335), 3-

W*,
in the

4-

^fe (J 330,

334),

* After the preposition *T

may be used

Atmanepada.

CLASS,
iT5^:,
I A.

PARASMAIPADA VERBS.
:,

259

<a*rffy

9-

**rf

F. ^fr^fir (f 338),

P. F.

^r,

B.

($

390) u Pt. ^rr:, Ger. 2^, ^w, Adj. Caus. s^mrfff, Des. 'rSfl!', Int. *lldgqrf,
60.

^a:,

3^fl^n, *ni: u Pass,

"^

skand, to approach

P.
or
.

^f?r (tfba^fw
9.

or or

Trfccfr^fir,

P4n.

vm. 3,

73, 74) u Pf.

5),

*nfi?zr,
;

*nfi*:

*raj: (see
u

9 *mifRr:
(
(

or II A. ^r^f, F.

Jsfcwfir,

103, 6),

Ger.
'

^RH

438)

TOKrafl^, 10 P. F. ^swr, B. ^urn^ ($ 345, ) u Pt. Pass. ^sir>, Caus. ^qfr, Aor.

No. if^,

I A.

6.

374)

D GS

r*llir^rH, Int. ^Hl^MI'ri (J 485), ^Hl**ffl.

61.

TT

M,

to cross.
.

P.

tfrfiT

u Pf.

i.

tnm: (a),

Ttfnr, 3. w?nt, 4
inihrT,

?K^,
TrtSnj.

1 A.

^nnr^,

F.

or irrNfTT

In the Atmanepada ( 340), verb used as Tudadi, P. firo, Pf. ST, Aor. we generally find the
P. F. wftin or

B.

or
Ht

^mto
u

or ^nnrte, F.

Kftw^

(?),

B.

wfW?

or ifWft?

u Pt.

irWh, Ger. or frirtOMfd or

Pass. ifHiw,

Aor. ^nnft,

Caus. dimfa,

Des.

rrtdfimfif

finrfrtfir,

Int. wrft^w, irnrfS.

62.
This verb and
4, 25, 26),

t^ ranji

to tinge.
svafij,

^(dams,

to stick, and T?T5{ to bite, ^3^saf?j,

(

to embrace (Pan. vi.

)

drop the penultimate nasal in the special tenses

345,

10

and in the weakening

forms

344, 395, note).

I.

P. Mfri,
4 ttftm,
.

^tn^, O.
I A.
:

t^,

I. TfiJ

II

Pf.

i.

TT3T,

2.

lAPfV| or ttpzr,

3.

TTT,

9.

rig:,

F. mdvsfl^,

i^iflT,

in the

Atmanepada

P. Tinr, Pf.

i.

P. F. t^r, B. 7^11^. Also used 2. rtfW^, I A. 3. ''st^i, 9. ^lfd u TT^,

II

Pt. T3i:, Ger.

TW or

Caus. M^Pri
fM.Hj(H, Int.

or M^frt

Pass. n^TT (Pan. HI. i, 90), TUT (Pan. vi. 4, 31, $ 438) to hunt (J 462, 26), Aor. ^Oif^ or VHUif^, Des.
.

iK^^l,

TTtf^i

63.

f^ kit, to
it

cure,

(faff.)

This and some other verbs which are referred to the

terminations,
if

Bhu

class always take the desiderative

used in certain senses.

"fau^JhV,

if it

means

to dwell, belongs to the

Chur
but
\

class, or, according to Vopadeva,

may

be regularly conjugated as a

Bhu

verb

if it

means

to cure,

it is

Pi Pen

w Pn chikitsati.
n

P. fatorfir, I.
,

^fawn^

&c.

Pf.

f^fawrNsRK, I A. .niVcMn^, F. fa-

P. F.

r*i 14111*1 ril.

In the same way are conjugated

i
.

IJT^

2.

fir^

472) (to conceal), jJjmrf he despises. (to sharpen), ffffrr^TT he endures.

(J
:

3.

*TF( (to revere), Htaitiri

4. 5.
6.

"^ (to

bind),

{tarUri

he investigates. he loathes.

<^

(to cut), ^1^1 U(H

^rr^ (to

he straightens. sharpen), ^ft^rNrfif he sharpens.

L!

260

BHU

CLASS,
64.

ATMAKEPADA VERBS.
to
fall,

r^pat,

P.
Pt.
(

tnrfff

faftnTrrfff)
n

II

Pf.

i.

Wff,

9.

%&, II A.

WW

(f

366), F.
ftrofirefir

"qflT^fff R

trfrnr:

Pass.

tjmff,

Aor. ^nrrfw, Caus. inrRfir, Des.

to dwell.

or

337,

H.

3).

65.

^wz$,
I A.
i.

P.
6. 6.

'cJ'uPri

II

Pf.

i.

44144 (a),

2.

^ftr^T or

T3W

3.

<HIU,
2.

4. '^ifta,

5.

"3^:,

7.

dufw,

8. irer,

9. "3n|i,

'snntf ($ 132),

-sHirHl:, 3.
-3-faH:,

^qi%ri (J 351),
II

F. ^wfif,

P. F.

WT,

B.

-s^ni^

II

Pt.

Ger.

T^I

Pass.

T$, Aor.

^imftr,

Caus. MltmPrf,

Aor.

^m^^T^, Des.

Int. ^Nf^Tf, mqftct.

66.

^vad,
U

to speak.
.

P. ^fir
u
,

Pf.

i.

T^

(a),

2.

^f^zr, 9

-95:,

I A.

^nn^^,

F. tfiptfa, B.

Pt. Tf^TT:,

Ger. Tf^r^T

Pass. ^IW, Aor. ^^rf^9 Caus. Tr^fw, Aor.

Des. n=Ni^MfH, Int. TI^OT? *^R%.

67. f*$ svi, to swell, (4?) fry.)

P.

*y^Pri

II

Pf.

i.

or "^TR ()
or f^rf^f^W, or

%y<j||i| (a),
5.

2.

"Sprf^I

or f^mrMM,
9.

3.

or f^P^T'T?

4.

5J5jP=|^

^^"^i

or f^lf^M^t,
1

"^1*

I A.
B.

^T^^l^,

Int.

^nm( u 'md^H

^ren^ Pt. ^15: u Pass, or

II A.

and ^T%f^R(^

^T^Tji

^,

F.

ifffquiftr,

P. F.

-gnr^,

Caus. Tgn^fff, Aor. ^f$n3R^, Des.

II.

Atmanepada Verbs.
68.
T&s^edh,
II

to grow.

P. Wff,
T,

I. ^VJT,
i.

O. l^W,
2.

I. *TTHT

Pf.

UVmm*,
4.

F.

JjfVnqTT,
5.

C. $fVHHT, P.
6.

I A.
8.

^fvfw,

$fwr:,

3. SrfvF,

^f^^f^,
n

^(VtTqi,
u

7.

^fv^rf^,

faf

or

i4, 9. ijftnfiT,
ff,

B. ^fVpft^

Pt.

irfMrr:

Pass,

umw, Aor

$fv,
ir,

Caus. Pres.
Tjvfinrr,

Tj>nri7r,

Perf.
Tf,

P. F.

II A.

$f^>^,
69.

B.

JJWTm, F. ^r^mPri, 7T, Cond. uvMte, Des. ^f\^w.

iksh, to see.
n

^
u

P. ^^w?

I.

$^IT, O. ^?f,

I.

f[3nri

Pf. ^^rf^;,

I A.

$%?,

F.

C.

Pqmri, P. F.
^PeiftjfMH.

^%in, B.

|f^F
70.

Pt. ^f^ff: u Caus.

^ufr,

Aor.

Des.

P.

c?0c?,
,,

to give.
.

I.

^^r, O. ^r,

I.

^rf
F.

pf. 3

(j

328,

i),

6.

(Pan. vi. 4, 126),

Pass,
^srff,

IA.^f^,

^nnr,

P. F.

^WT,

B.

^^

^*r?r, 9
n

Pt.

Aor. ^Tf^, Caus. ^TrfTr, Aor.

^^c,

Des.

f^c(P^Mri, Int.

and ^^J5

are used in the Parasmaipada, ^"35 in the

Atmanepada.

It is

only in

the passive that ^n*T and

^$5

take

Atmanepada terminations.

CLASS,
7
1

ATMANEPADA VERBS.
shvashk, to go.

261

ctrta^

P. *!p3inr,

T.

qMmrt

Pf. *inair, I

A. **cfair*, F. rfV*nr, P. F. mrt*di,

B.

*|Pi.3|i*fltf.

Note
p. 219.)

The

initial

^is not liable to become ^. (See

72.

No 45

Pan. vi.

i,

64, i.

Colebrooke,

^y^ rij,
wnpfr,
I

to go, to gain, &c.

P. ^nSr,

I. *rr^?r

Pf.

A. *nftre, F. ^f^nnr, p. F. *f^r, B.

"^
T

II

Pass. ^-i*Jd

(wi-r^ri),

Caus. ^T^rfr, Aor. W|f3*1^, Des.

vf

73.

^Hr wanj,

to embrace.

dams, '^safij, f*T*{svaflj drop their nasal in the special tenses (Pan. vi. 4, 25). See No. 62.

P. ^nrfr,

I.

^H^nnr
4.

Pf.

TO^
5.
II

or

*^nr (Pan.
6.

i.

2, 6, vart.),
7.

I A.

i.

2. ^^JofV/i:, 3.

^T^^J,
*^'>rHn,

^h^f^,

^HHK|l^i,

^HBfldf,

^^VJ^f^,

8.

9. vi *s

if,

F.

B. tf|l^

Pass,

^-rtlri,

Caus. ^'iMPn, Des. fa HUM,

Int. flll^Tt|H, H|f<jr*.

74. g^/ro/7, to

be ashamed, (^p.)
6.

P. crnr,

I.

^RW

Pf.

3.

w^

(Pan. vi. 4, 122),

ifar*,

9.

ftft,

I A.

i.

w^rqfM or

^?cfftf, 2.

^Tcffwn or

^Tcf'-'m:, 3.

VH^fm; or

XICIM,

F. c^TMUjd or

B. ^fMMlg or dufly.
75. f?T5^ ^y, to forbear.

P.

fTTfffT|K

Pf. frifdKfi^^.

I A. xMfdfrimv, F. fdfdfymri, B. rflfdP

Caus. Hnrfif.
Note
See No. 63.

The simple verb

76.
TTCT

is

said to

form

if

Tcf

he sharpens.

pan, to praise.

P.

WRff,
Aor.

I.

^TWTCH
1

II

Pf. miimNlfi or
Miilif^uiii

Aor. ^mnjTftn? or
^iiiy*riT,
xN

^rtrJT^rg ,

F.

or

Thus likewise (without ^TT^). B. Miuif^^K or Ruimltf H Caus. 'Mftyujri,

TO

L/1

mil rj

Des.

fimflUMrl, Int.

^M^n.

This verb (see No. 26) takes ^TR, but, as it is mentioned by Panini HI. i, 28, with T^, with which it shares but the meaning of to praise, it is argued that it does together not take WT, unless it means to praise. It is likewise argued that ^T, if it takes WTTf,
does not follow the Atmanepada, because the Anubandha, requiring the Atmanepada, applies mtM he traffics. Other grammarians, however, allow both only to the simple verb,
"^P^,

Note

the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada.

(Pan.
ITI. i, 31.)

The

suffix

^TR may

be kept in the general tenses.

77.

W\ kam,
^nrqf^

to love, (w%.)

P. -SBTO^, I. ^reT*nra

n Pf.

(Pan. in.
Pass,
oh'ujri

i,

48, vart.), F.
XS<*I(H

(), Aor.

or (without *ni) B. chfHMlg or ofimftnft? -SF^rHiTr or^FmfWr, vn. 3, 34, vart.), Caus. <*l*^fd, Des. (Pan.

or ^OR^, I A.

^sr*rtai*ra

II

^W

This verb in the special tenses takes ^HT, like a verb of the Chur class, and Vriddhi (Pan. in. i, 30). In the general tenses ^H^ is optional. Or, if we admit two roots, the one would be defective in the special tenses, while the other ^RTH^is conjugated all through.

Note

262

BHU

CLASS,
78.

ATMANEPADA VERBS.
^nr ay, to go.

P.

^nrff,
4.

I.

^ntnr

Pf.
5.

^nrNn* (Pan.
6.

m.

i, 37),

I A. i.^nftrftr,

2.

3. 'snfag'j

^Tlftr^f^j

vnPMm'qi,
-(P*(flg U
flees

^nfqmrfl,

7. ^nftr^Rfi^,

8. ^nftflc}

or

^,

9.

PM H7T,

F. ^rftnmfj B.

Caus.

*5<|imPri,
2, 19),

Des. wftrfir^.
Ger. ^c*5lf ; with H, JTTTif
J

With

tflCT it

forms *Ic3T*nf he

(Pan. vin.

and

with TTfr, m^i^n".

79. i^; ih, to aim.

P.

^,

I.

^tf

Pf.

t*Nfc> I A. ^ff?, F.

^m,

B.

|f^

Caus. t^rfif,

Aor.

Jjftnr?^,

Des. ^ftrf^ff.
80. SRTST

Ms,
(

to shine,

(^BTST.)

P. SRT^TW

||

Pf. ^GRT^T or

ehl3rMa

326), I A.

^TSRTf^re,

F. ^T%BTff

Caus.

^M^mffT, Aor. ^^chi^i^, Des. f^firf^ff, Int.

8 1.

SRT^

Ms,
II

to cough,
SRHRfiff,

P.

"Sfimff

II

Pf.

"SRmf^

326)

Caus.
to

Aor.

SJMhWr^

(f

372*).

P.

^
II

(TTf^w)

serve, (^.) fa^siv, Pf. ftr^, I A. ^f^, F. ^PmMH

82.

ii

Caus. &Rfr, Aor.

Des. ftref^w, Int. ^^q?r. ^rftr^?^,

83.
ITT

yd, to go, (m^.)

ft,

P.

3. TTff, 6. TTTTT,

9.

irm, ist pers. sing,

i'iin,
9.

I.
L

imrt, ist pers. sing,

it,

O.

5nr,

I. ^1'iiff

Pf.

3. ^TT,
ii

6.

rfhT,

I A.

i.

a*riftf, 2.

^TTTWTJ,

3. si'iiw

&c.,

F. TT^W, B. TTRrt?
i)

Pass,

jffafif,

Aor. '^iiTf^ Caus.

TTItmfif,

Aor.

^^IJIM^?

Des.

Int. ^TTtinf.

P. T3%

II

^ ru, to go, to kill (?), to speak, (^.) Caus. Pf. 3. ^^, 6. wriff? 9- ^^Nt I A ^ffe?
84.
9
II

iHJiPir,

Aor.

P.

II

Pf.

i.

f^

^ ^e, to protect, vn. 4, 9), 2. f^frift, (Pan.

85.
u

3.

f, I A.

i.

^ft,

2.

3. -^r^rf,

F.

^i^Mtf,

B. ^T^H^

Pt. ^w: u Pass, ^fanr, Caus.

^m^Pn, Des.

Int. ^^Hff.

Note

It is

one of the

1|

verbs

^,

to protect, forms

^RTT

in the present,

but follows

in the general tenses.

86.

tt(^dyut,

to shine, (uiT.)

P. tftaK
3, 91; in.

U Pf.

f^re (Pan. vn.

4, 67), lA.'^rertfTTF or
u

Pan. mSJrit^ 367:

Aor.

i.

i, 55), F.sftfinirff,

B. ?ftf?r^

Caus.

sftiRfiT,

^^7T^,
(

Des.

P^aiirtfK or P^silPn ^|^, Int. ^i&mff, ^eftfw.

Note

^The verbs beginning with

^T^ optionally admit the

II Aor.

Parasmaipada

367).

P.

87.
II

^vrit,

to be, (^.)
u

Pf. *FW, I A. ^nrfre or

?n, F. ?rfff*nr or ^flf, B. ^fNte

Caus.

CLASS,
or *nnrff

ITMANKPADA
7),

VERBS.

263

(Pan. vn. 4,

Des. ftRfihw or f^pwfir, Int.

Parasmaiverbs do
2,

Note
pada

The verbs beginning with ^,

i.

e.

^, ^, 3|V, ^^, ^, are optionally

i.
;

in the aorist, future, conditional, desiderative (Pan.

3,

9193).

The same
see Pan.

not take

in their

Parasmaipada tenses (Pan. vn.

88.

2,

59)

as to

J^,

vn.

60,

and

i.

3, 93.

^^ syand)
2.

to sprinkle or drop, (FIJ.)

4.

P. ^TTT
6.

II

Pf. i.tKH^,
;

*JP<^ or *U4rt),

**iP<<!

or *mbr?. I A.

3.

^^r^MMT
t,

or

^hf

(6.

^fMrWIdi), or II A.
2,

*TO^

(not w*q^), F.

or ^tenr or

59; see No. 87), B.^pftF or wnrfte u Pt. Ger.Tqf^T or ^TWT (Pan. vi. 4, 31) u Caus. Tg^Trfir, Des. frwrf^TT or
j-MimPri

(Pan. vn.

or ffc^TWfiT.
89. ip^krip) to be able, (^g.)
Pf. ^|"^) I A. 3. ^cfcfVjy or ^TR, 6. ^r*mirtl, 9. ^5*ffif, or II Aor. P. <*^ or Par. w<|Mi^, F. off^mrt or 4htmiH or cfc^^iifrf, P. F. 2. <+f^4riIW or fc-Hl B. chfgMMl? or ^ft^ u Pt. ^rw: u Caus. 4-^ fa, Des. p^^rrMMff or
II

Int.

^Tc9nmT
90.

or ^f^eR^orn or
to fear, to suffer pain.
68), I A. *mfvjK, F. ^ftnqTT n Pass,
1

P. srznr

n Pf.

i^ vyath, f^g^ (Pan. vn. 4,

(J

Aor. ^nqfa (),

462), Caus.
91.

uiviqfri ,

Des. fcf^nqMrf, Int. ^r^^r^, m^P^.

(TJ.)

^T ram, to sport,

P. TH^; with fa, ^TT, trft,

3, 83) u

T^, optionally Parasmaipada;

fanrfTT (Pan.

i.

Pf.^R,

I
II

^r, THTorTjq

A. ^TOT, after prepositions 9|l1^, F. tsnr U Pt. ^ir:, Ger. Caus. fRftf, Aor. ^CkHi^, Des.frt^TT, Int.tcwjTT,
92.

r^T tvar, to hurry, (PHH^I.)

The verbs *^jvar, r^ "3\ u, l^mu (Pan. vi.

ffer^m>, ^T^av, iT^mat?, substitute ^/iir, TJJ tur, before weakening terminations beginning with consonants, Hence "3JT&: jurnah, except semivowels, and if used as monosyllabic nominal bases.
tvar,
4, 20)

7nih turnah, ^JfH srutaft,

"^Rfft

utah,

^TH mutah.
8.

P.iror
432) or

Pf. rfi^t, I
wftlT:
H

A.

3 ^Hft.g,
.

Caus. H^frt
<

5n^ft4 or *wfi^*, F/nPiniri'ii Pt. TJ^: 462, II. 6), Aor. ^dH^ ( 375 1), Des.
1

Hri.Mrd, Int. TTTrW^if,

lf^

i|fw.

93.

sah, to bear,

(^.)

P.

^w

n Pf.

it

I A. ^raf^r, F. *f^ni7r, P. F.

^in
1

or *ter (J 337, II. 2) n

Pt. *fte:, Adj.

*r?r: (^

456, 6)

Pass,

^nprff,

Caus. TnfrfiT, Aor.

.

^*!M^,

Caus.

Des. fTOT^ftr^fir, Des. ftr^f^M^, Int. ^I^^H, wr^ftf^

Note
^T? and
?[

^?

change ^T into

'Sn

when
(

^ would be followed
3, 112.

by

^T,

the result of the

amalgamation of

with a following dental

128). Pan. vi.

III.

Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.

94.

?^ rdj\

to shine, (*T*|.)

P. Tnffff,

?T

II

Pf. T^HT,

XTT^ or

"^

(Pan. vi. 4, 125), I A.

264:

Birfr

CLASS,

PARASMAIPADA AND ITMANEPADA VERBS.

II

F. TTf*i *MflTj
ff,

n?

B.

Caus.

tT*nrfJT,

Aor.

41

UN

1^9

Des.

Int.

miW?
95. ^f^ khan, to dig.
II

P. JjRfff*

Pf-3. -<WIT,

6.^3:,

9.

^:
u

(f

328, 3), I A. 4rtfli^(a),

^T*TTi^
(

($

348),

but Atm. m<Pf|g only, F.

or
r,

^fVfiqfir,
(

B.

T3"Hffi^

or

391)

II

Pt.
(f

TfTiT:,

Ger.

JsrfVrrTT,

Adj. ^q:

456, 6)

Pass. ^RTff or ^n*?T

ff,

391),
(

Caus.
391)9

Aor. 'g^ffcRTT) Des.

fVftlPHtPfl?

Int.

^MH

or ^n?rmw

96.

<

An, to take,
T^^,
ii

P. ^cfTT

Pf.

i.

Tf^TT (a),

2.

9.

Tj:,

I A.

^T^T^, Atm. ^TW

(J

351),

Pt. ^TT:, Ger. ^^r, Adj. u Pass. F. fficoifrr, P. F. -^T, B. Pgmi^ Aor. ^nrfft, Caus. ^rciflfj Des. ftT^^fif, rT, Int. ^^H^, irff^ &c.

^:

^f

guli

takes

"3i

u before terminations beginning with vowels that would

require Guna.

ordinarily

P. J^Prl

||

Pf.
2.

I.

^^9
or

2.

^7jf^^I

Or

pft<?,

3.

^^9

4'

"55^^'

5'

'J'vJ^*

^ C>

'

Atm.

or I Aor. see J 362, F. JjP^uiPrt "^^9 "^"5% ^|]f%^ &c., Ben. Atm. nff $% or gHfl^ (J 345) n Pt. JT^:, Adj. n^n or P. F.^rf^JH or 77^19
i.

jft^l (^
(

457)

II

Pass.

1 Des. ^plF, Aor. ^I jf^9 Caus. ^qPir, Aor. HJJJ^H,

470), Int.

"sft'j^fn,

^jWtfe.
98. f^r sri, to go, to serve, (fa^.)

P. ^irfir

Pf.
(

i. frjpsrrpf

(),

2. Pijpjrftpzr,

3. f^i^jnr,

4.

f^jforftR,

5.

II A. ^r%f^ir^ TSITI^rflf, Aor.

Int.
^P^ffafiT.

^ff^T^^Tr^9

371), F. -^fimfif, B. ^ftim^ u Pass, ^fturr, Aor. ^rerrfr, Caus. Des. f^l^rfn^PrJ or f^T^ft^flT (J 471, 3; jj 3379 3)5

99. TTT

y/9
2.

to worship.
(^

P.

inrfflr u

Pf.

i.

^rrf (), (^311),

s.

^iftnj or ^ir?

335^

3)? 4-

^Pi ^9

5.

5.

^nn?9
^*n?,

6. ^i^rr&T9 4.

7. v*"*ii*f,

^MIK,

9.

^Hnwt, I Aor. Atm.

7. ^nrBstrf^j

i.

^?^f%,
(not

2.

3.

^my P^,

5.

^H^ii^i,

6. '^mnfirii,

8. ~f*rse'

r,

F. ^^rfw, P. F. ITFT
*{
\

B. (J 124),

II

Pass. ?^Tff, Caus.

^ nftr,

^fi^ (^ 393) u Pt. ^:, Ger. Aor. ^j^fli(5fffT, Des. ftnj^flf, I n t.

^,

100. ^t^vo/?, to sow, to weave,

P.
,

II

Pf.
,

i.

(a),

2.

^fi|V| or ^ cjisj,
u

9. "35^:,

I A.

Atm.

F.

P. F.

B.

Pt. -TO u Pass.

*
their

The Atmanepada forms

will in future only

be given when they have peculiarities of

own, or are otherwise difficult.

TUD

CLASS,

PARASMAIPADA AND ATMANEPADA VERBS.

ioi.

265

^
I A.

vah, to carry.
TTtTS,
3.

P. **fir
6.

II

Pf.

i.

TOTf
wf,

(d),

2.

ftf&l or
i.

TO*,
3.

4.

*fa,

5.

9^3:,

7.

grf^r,

8.
7.

9. "315:, 8.

^nrraj,

2. ^ranraft:,

w*n0^,
i.

4.
2.

5. TicTlc, 6. xiqtaf,

^tn*i,
5.

viqW,
6.

9.

^RT8{:,
7.

I Aor.

Atm.
8.

^ftf,
9.

3.

^ftr,

4.

^N*wf*,
*fter,

^vsjrvjf,

^mfTcri,

^msrfir,

*ritaf,

W^TT,

F.

wrfir, P. F.

B.

*jtm(

Pt. -37:, Adj. ^nra: u

Pass. vir>, Caus.

Aor.

^refN, Des.

f^^Hirrf, Int.
1

02.

ve9 to weave,
(or BWj:),
2.

P. ^?fTf
9- ^"3*

II

Pf. 3

^, ^:
6.
!

9.
3.

^:

(or ^5:); or

3.

T^T,

6.

(?

3 11 )* I A.

^^if^

^,

^Hitft:,

^RT^rh^,

Atm. ^wrer, F.
in^, Caus.

P. F.

WT,

B.

<

5RT^, Atm. TRrh?

II

Pt. Trf: (Pan. vi. 4, 2) U Pass,

^iMMfn, Des.

rq^ittfri, Int.

^HHi^

m^lfd.
(s$*T.)
4.

103.

hve, to emulate, to call,

2.

P.
(

asTTfir u

Pf.
-

r.

*j^re (S),

^f^r

or -;pta, 3 -^r^,
.

-gfi^,

II

3 6 3\

^tm

^TT> or

I A.

^m,

F. ^iwfrt, B. Ger. u Pt. ^jn, ^Tni^

Pass,
Int.

i^w,

Aor. SH^lHl,

Caus. ^mJjfri, Aor.

^^^^

371),

Des.

Tud
I.

Class (Tudddi,

VI

Class).

Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.

104.

tud, to strike.

P.

ij^fir

Pf.

^, F.

fftwfir,

P. F. ift^r, I A. *ri1t*fl^

Atm.

Ger. psn

Pass, prff, Caus.

ift^rfiT,

Aor.

WT,

^w

u Pt.

Des. ^rufrf, Int.

105. \=R^ bhrqjji to fry,

j takes Sampras&rana before weakening terminations, the same as

p^vyadh, ^^1
if possible.

vat,

*f^vyach, 'Z^vrasch, K^prachh (Pan.

vi. i, 16).

The

terminations of the special tenses of

Tud verbs are

never strengthening, but weakening,

P. ^rftr

II

Pf.

i.

W^*,

2.

TOfSR

or

w*,

9.

TO^Jt (Pan.

i.

2,5), or

&c. (Pan. vi. 4, 47), I A.

or H^fff, P. F. srer or
,

Caus.

or wt, F. Atm. or swrcjf^, B. *prn^, Atm. wqte or ^Tfe n Pt. ^?: u Pass. >m, l^|f7r, Aor. ^i^JWor ^^>ntl, Des. fw?|fff or fw^fir, Int

^rorc^

^^

106.

^A:mA,

to

draw a

line.

(See No. 38.)

P.

or

f^fir u Pf. ^R, I A. mim(r^ or *aiK/lf^ Atm. ^^^r or ^f?, F. ^fw, P. F. -sufr or -g^r, B. f^n^, Atm. ^te u Pt. f: n Pass,
chM^fifj

Caus.

Aor.

S!M<*M!^

or

^r^fi^^, Des.

f^^vsjfH,

Int.

266

TUD CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

107.

much, to loosen,
in the special tenses.

Certain verbs beginning with *|^[

much take a nasal

vid, to find,

They

are,

If^much,
^ff(kritt

cf^/Hjp, to cut,

f^

fc5^/p,
to form.

to paint,

fa ^
1

sich, to sprinkle,

to cut, to pain, ftsi pi f^TrJ khid,

u

(Pan. vn.
(}

i,

59.)

P. *hrfff

Pf.

*pfN, I A. ^ripn^, Atm.

108.

^^

367), Des. ff^fff or jftspr

C$47
P.
Pt.

1!

9)-

f^

vid, to find, (f^f.)

%fw
f^ft

u Pf.

ftR?, II

A.^ft^, Atm.
109.

vftnr, F. TOfif or ^firvrfk (f 332,

1 1) u

ft*.

fc^ fej,
(J

to paint.

P.
(5

u Pf.

fo^t?, II A. ^rfc5^

367),

Atm. II A.

vaifaMW or I A. ^rfo*

3*7).'

II.

Parasmaipada Verbs. no. ^nf, to cut, (^ift.)

Pf.

P.

rTflf

(see

No. 107)

^FW,

A.
II

^Toinff^,

F. ^fd^fff or cF^flT (J 337,

II. 2), P. F.

SfifffrTT,

B.funi^U

Pt. if*:

Pass.^m^, Caus. omrfff, Aor. ^-qohS^

337, II. 2), Int. ^T^mTT.

or

^r*fhfin^9

Des. f^^ifS^ftT or f^^rfk

(J

in.
Certain verbs beginning with

^
^7

kut, to

be crooked, to bend.

kut (Dhatupatha 28,

73108) do not admit

of

Guna

or

Vriddhi, except in the reduplicated perfect, the causative,

and the intensive Parasmai-

pada.

(Pan.
II

i. 2, i

345, note.)

P.

f*fw

Pf. i.^pite,

2.<3ffH IA.<*^fy
to cut,
2.

F.^fradTT, P.F. ffrin

Caus.

112.

'Z^vrasch,
u

P.

^jfir (see

No. 105)
1. 2),

Pf.

i.

T9^,
giv^Pir,

"^af^^ or TOr, I A. ^d^fl ^ or

1

rcfh^ (f 337,

F. wft^rfif or
113.
OF

B.

'jw^ n

Pt.

^ro:.

W,
U

to scatter.

P.

f%^

II

Pf. 3. ^cfin:, 6. ^rWTTj:, 9.

(f

or onrhiflf

340), B. wftr^

^^F^: (Pan. vii. 4, n), I A. *hlOr^ F. Pt. -sifhS: u Pass. -SR^W, Caus.

Des.
Note
he
cuts,

After ^^T and

Tlflff,

cF takes

an

initial

if it

means

to cut or to strike
i,

3M

oM'qtaK. 5

UfTT(VpfHJV he cuts or he strikes (Pan. vi.

140, 141).

Also

he drops (Pan.

vi. i, 142).
1

14. ^q^T spris, to touch.

n^HiBfl'?^or

P.^Sfrfrr

Pf.

i|44|$i,

I A.

nwiHjTr^or ^trMi^,

F.

B. ^q^li

Pt.

?:

II

Des.

ftFflT
115.

Int.

qO^^rt
to ask.
*TlTfe*r or
trfflF,

H^prachh,
i.

P. ifSjfw (see
,

No. 105)

II

Pf.

^JFSS,

2.

9'

MM'-^J (}
Trssnrfrr,

3^)>
Des.

F. TT^rfw, B.Tj^nr^

Pt. yv;

Pass,

ipa.q'ff,

Caus.

Int.

"PI

DIV CLASS, PARA8MAIPADA VERBS.

*JH*n/, to let off. *mP$"i or TOU (see No. 48), I A. wuiuflj^ F.
1 1 6.

267

P.

*J"^PiT
.

u Pf.

i.

TOrif,

2.

umfn

\\

Pt 1 t.

mr C
*1

117.

Hl^

m/,

to sink, (TOrt.)

^T^majj and *n^na.9 (Div)

P.
9.

insert a nasal before strengthening terminations beginning with

i,

consonants, except nasals and semivowels. (Pan. vn.

H-njfrt
II

60.)
6.

Pf.

i.

HH-nJ,

2.

HHP|VJ or
n

HH4-VJ, I A.

*mrsr:,

F. nv^fd,

P. F. ifar

Pt. ijnr:,

^HJK/1^ (J 345)1 Ger. hfl or TOT ($ 438)

3.

WlifW,

Caus.

*n5nrfff,

Aor. 'snPTWcT? Des.

1 1

P*iHjPrt, Int. 11*1 TJ*J

8.

^
II
L

ish 9 to wish,
Pf.

P. $*dPfl (see No. 31),

6.

I. il^Ad

^j|*,

7.

^^*T,

8.

^Tj

9.

^H*> ^ ^

^*^fl>
u

II. i) u Pt. ^?:

Ger. ^yr or

^?n

^fMV|, 3. ^fa, 4. ^f^T, 5 F. ^fmHffl, P. F. FFT or ^iMrti (^ 337 Pass, ^q^, Aor. %ftr, Caus. smjfa, Aor.

i.

^^,

2.

III.

Atmanepada Verbs.
in the special

119. ^Twn, to die, (*J^.)

^[

mri, to die,

though an Atmanepada verb, takes Atmanepada forms only tenses, the aorist, and benedictive. (Pan. i. 3, 61.)
I.
i.

P. fa*m*,
5.

^rftnnr,

O.

f^t^n, I. ftnl

Pf.

i.

**m.,

2.1^,

3. *nrrc, 4.

iUif ,
u

*WK?
II

I A.

^njfa,

2.

^^V|it, 3. ^HJIT, F. HfVmfrf,

F. *inifw? B. Jpcn?

Pt.

^TTJ

Pass,

ftnfif,

Caus. HK^frt, Des. ig^Ori, Int.

1

20.

to observe, "j dri,

P.

f^

Pf.

^,

I A.

^|Tr,
(

Caus. ^Kqfd, Des. ^ft^ff

'WT to

F. ^fbRff, P. F. ^r, B. -^rt? u Pass. 332, 5). It is chiefly used with the preposition

regard, to consider.

Div Class (Divddi,

I.

IV

Class).

Parasmaipada Verbs.

121.

f^ div

to play,

(f^J.)

P. ^faifiT ($ 143) u Pf.

Pt. ^tf: or

f^^> I A.^n^ir, F.
Ger.ijr^T
I nt
(

^f^uifH, P. F.^PMHI, B.
^Pcfrii
u

^1mj^

^K:

(J

442,
(j

7),

431, i) or

Caus. ^^Prtj Des.

f^^P<=mPn or

g*Pir

474)5

^HliT.
to dance, (Jlft.)
i!Hrt7^,

122.

ifl^nrit,

P.
Ji<|Prf

II

Pf. 3. ffHri,
n

9. *TJ3J>

I A.

F. HPRvjPn or

*if^Tn (}

337

II. 2)

II

Pt.

TO:

Caus. ^ifir, Aor. ^T^TWrT or mlddii, Des. Pn^fdNPri or

* Final
*T

is

changed to ft

no)

in the special tenses of

Tud

verbs, likewise before the

of the passive and benedictive (Pan. vn.4, 28).

Afterwards ft again becomes ft^, according

to Pan. vi. 4, 77.

268

DIV CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

r*i

to

grow

old,

P. *Mfir*

Pf-s-^nrn:, 9 snrs: (Guna,

.

330) or w^:

(f

328,

2),

I
\\

A.
Pt.

or II A.
fhS:
n

^nro^

Caus.

srcqfcr (J

367), F. irfbufir or ^rcftafir (f 340)5 B. -sffii^ 462, 25), Des. firaFoifrf or firWlSPir (J 337? II. 3).
(f

124. $ft Jo, to sharpen.

Verbs ending in ^ft

drop ^ft o before the *T ya of the

^ft chho, to cut,

Div

class (Pan.

vn.

3,

71);

e. g.

^U 50,

to finish,

<ft

do, to cut.

P. ^rfk,
VTQITI,

I.

SET^, O.

^,

I. 3115

Pf.

3i^

(}

329), I A.

x^ruO^ or

II A.
u

F. srrafiT, P. F. snwr, B.

Pass,

^rnrffj

Caus.

tylJWffi,

smn^ (J 392) n Pt. $nw: or Des. f^n^rfrf, Int. ^TT^nTff.

125. BV 50, to finish.

%r:

(j

435)

P. ^ifr u Pf.
(

*rcft,

I A.

39^)

Pt-

^^

^mr^,
-

II A.

^m\

F. ^r^fw, P. F. *nn, B.
(

^mi

G er

^nir

II

Pass, ^(hm

392),

Caus. ^N^fri, Des.

f^rafFj Int.

^H)i(ri.
1

26.
n

tqv vyadh, to strike.

Pf. 3
.

P. frofir (see No. 105)

2. ^r^rn^ft*,

f^qm
5.

(J 311), 9 . f%ftv:,
6.

I A.

i.

3.

'^i^uWli^,

4.

*imr*9,

^^mi,

%tm^|i,

7.
II

-imr9T,
Pass,

8.

9.

W3ffi:, F.^TWfrT,

P. F. ^|^T,

B.

f?nnr^

Pt.

f^t

f^m,

Caus.

'Ull'imfifj

Des.

fcj

^4 rH

Pff,

Int. ^f^ziff.

127.

^Hp?

to delight.
1

nqTMH I A. or I. 3) or (see No. 38) or II A. (J 337, ^HHMTc^ ^wmflPi^ ^Tdl^lf^ F. -rTfcNrffl or in^flT or ^x^fir, P. F. ITf^WT, WWT or ^WT, B. Pt.
31

P. q^fn

II

Pf.

i.

7nr,

2.

TTiTf^T or rnn^r or rid

Tnrt5

4.

or

^Tr^

II

Pass,
Int.

-^w, Caus.

irthrfir,

Aor.

^snr^tfi^

or

Winh^, Des.

frijHtfri

or

flOg<Hfl*

128. P. g^rfir
u

mw^,

to be foolish.

F. Hl^fri or Pass. or
*J?fiT,

yft^, 2. giftfi^ or gjftm or yf^, II A. ^rp^ (J 367, ^rf^) t, Pt. yv: or ^: u iftf^BTftr, P. F. Jf>vr or jffer ( 129) or iftfigHT
Pf.
i.
II

Caus. *ft^TfWj Des.

Jj4jHjf7,

^^P^Pfl

*i^^ 4 ^? Int.

* Final

^,

changed to

^,

and lengthened before ^.

t The Sarasvati gives besides the second

Wlsfh^
(

337,

I. 3,

OTf^)

3^7), the forms of the first aorist

According to Pan. in. i, 55 are allowed in the Atmanepada only; but later gramor
(

^^

aorist the optional

forms of the

first aorist

360).

marians frequently admit forms as optional which are opposed to the grammatical system of Panini. Sometimes the evasion of the strict rules of Panini may be explained by the admission of different roots, as, for instance, in No. 130, where the first aorist Parasmaipada
in the Sarasvati, which ^TSPfti^ given Kri class.
is

wrong

in the

Div

class,

might be referred to the

DIV CLASS, ATMANEPADA VERBS.

129.
tTJI

269

nas, to perish,

(*U3T.)

P.

f^Pd

ii

Pf. 3.

?T?TO

9.

%^j:,
II

II A.
Pt.

*R^ (ynfi?)
?Tyi

or

w^n^
(

366), F.

?Tf?nqfff or HVSflfd (see

No. 117)
130.
Tflir

TO, Ger.

or

^T

438).

6am, to cease,

(313.)

Eight Div verbs, fp(4am, IC^tam, Ip^dam, Vfi($ram, W{bhram, '^^kgham, Jf^klam, *V^mad, lengthen their vowel in the special tenses. (Pan. vn. 3, 74.)

P. ^rmifff
Pt. sitm
(

ii

Pf. 3

^rro,

9.

$3:, II A.
II

*^nn^

F. ^rfTOfir, P. F.

jrftnrr

11

429), Ger. 5TTRT or ^rfar^T

$TT*nnr or
ftr

Pass. ^TOW, Caus. Jinqfif ($ 462) he

19, 70.)
(fH(H<l.)
(Pan. vii. 3, 82.)

quiets, but

he

sees.

(Dhatupatha
to

131.

f^midf

be wet,

f^mtrf
P. ^irfir n

takes

Guna

in the special tenses.

Pt. fro: wet, or aflpi: (J 333,

D. 2*).
Verbs.

II.

Atmanepada
t

132.

^^jan
IfTj'tf

to spring up, (*n

(Pan. vii. 3, 79.)
(f

an substitutes

in the special tenses.

P. ^TOW
,

Pf.

^
u

(f

328, 3), I A. ^irfng or ^rftr

413), F. irf^rir, P. F.

B.

rfiMl8

Pt. irnn,

Caus.

HITITITT,

Des. r^HrnMd, Int.

HMIMH

or

133P.-quir
ii

*$P a *9

t0

g'

B.

Tntfte

n (J

Pf.^, A. 3 .wnf^(^4i2), 6.^nrwnfff, 9.^nrwir,F.TTWTr, P.F.^nrr, Pt. TO u Caus. in^nfrt, Aor. ^MlM^, Des. fqwir ($471, 9), Int.
I

tnrtasra

485).
134. 'jv budh, to perceive.

P.
5.

yz&

u
6.

Pf.

^v,

I
7.

A.

i.

*$fw,
8.

2.

wj^rr:, 3
9.

^3^

or

^fHv,

4.

^p^,

^JrMI^I,

^JrWIril,
II

^Jrwf^,

^T^,

^RtHf, F. HWff. P. F. ^ST, B.

Caus. ^>nrfw, Aor. Des. J^TOTT ^Ert? U Pt. ^5: '^T^sr^, (3^ of the Div class can never take intermediate 5, see J 332, 12; see also Kuhn, Beitrage,
vol. vi. p. 104), Int.

III.

Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.

J 35-

to bind, "T^ nah,

(^.)

P. TRrfTT or
2.

|^

n Pf. i. TpfTf, 2.

TT3

or ^f^T, (J 130)
7.

Atm. ^t, I A.

i.

vfTtlwIt)

3.

6. viniSl, vtrnr^li^? 4. ^l^Tr^j 5. ^fTi^,

vllr9Tj
6.

8.^i!,

Atm. i.^nrfw?
8.

2.

xsn^i:,

3.

^H^J ?

4.

wrfr^f^,
u

5.

vvirai^Yy

^Rf

9 ^nranr, F. Hi^fri, P. F. TCT

.

Pt. TC:, Ger. rfT,

?T?T u

Pass.

Aor.

^fr((r^,

Caus.

fr^rfir,

Des. fHHrHF? Int.

270

CHUR

CLASS,

PARASMAIPADA VERBS ONLY.

Chur Class (Churddi,

X Class).
only.

Parasmaipada Verbs
136.
u

^
ll

Pf.^torhnRR,

A.

^,
Pass.
verbs.

chur^ to steal.

F.^f^rfir, P.F.^fkftnn, B.

(J

386)

Pt. <*ftn;:, Ger.

^frrTT
fa

^?T,

Caus. ^frfr, Des.

<f*rkftrefif.

No

Intensive (f 479).
137.
cfo',

to gather, (fa*r.)

The changes which

same roots

roots undergo as causatives, take likewise place if the

are treated as

Chur

Hence according
is

to f 463, II. 6,

f%

as a

Chur

verb,

may form

P. ^tprfTT or -mmCd, the vowel, however,

verb, fq
^TOTr^.
i.

remaining short because, as a

Chur

said to be

f*n^($ 462, note)

I A. ^Ml^Mr^ or 'sreffa^, B. -OHHII^ Note Several Chur verbs are marked

of which were mentioned
in

or

as folj,

e.

as not lengthening their vowel,

some

462,
to

among

the causatives.
if it

Such
;

are

sf^to know,
to live.

to

make

known

^t^to pound

pound ;

*HT,

means

to feed

^c

138. Wi^krit, to praise.

P. qflfafrf

(j

463, 2)

II

I A.

^NtfTfr^

or

'SrfagftS^

377)-

Su
I.

Class (Svddi,

V Class).

Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.

139.

^ su

to distil, (*pT.)

Atm. g^, I A. 332, 4) ^fw, 1. 2. 33 (j 321 *) ji Pf. '^mTTh^jJ Sarasvati allows also Pan.vn. 2, 72), Atm. the ^PEutfh^ (but against the Sar. allows also ^raf^^ (but see Pan.vn. 2, 72); F. ^ffrqfif, P. F.
P.

^^,

B.

rTT

ll

Pass,

^iffi,

Aor. ^wrf%, Caus. ^R^fir, Aor.

^, Des.
^

40,
or *f,

Int.

Note
requiring

The

^ of
;

may be
is

dropt before terminations beginning with

if
J
is

and not

Guna

but this

not the case

^J*jTt

preceded by a consonant.

This explains the

;

double forms ^J*J^ and

^*^5

and tjHj, ^f^JJ^ and ^TCp^, ^TCJT*T and ^TCp^T

and

Atm.

tj^^ or 'p'^sf j 53^^ or ^p*l*r? same rule applies to the Tan verbs.
140. P. f%*ftf7r
U

^nJ^f*

or

^*J*^Vj i^jHf^

or

^TCprf^.

The

"N

chi, to collect, (f%>^.)

Pf.

3.

f^R or N
or

chili, 2.

"N^^I or (V^nf or, according to Bharadvaja

335) 3)? fM^fMM

f^oRfrnzTj 9.

3, 58), I

A.

vN^fcli^,

Atm.
(j

or f^Pjt, Atm. f^f'O) or f^<^ (Pan. vir. ^r%^, F. ^ifiT, P. F. ^irr, B. <sffarn^ u
f^^J*

Caus.

-^r^nrif or -qm^fn

463, II. 6, and No. 137)9 Des. f%^NfiT or

(Pan. vii. 3, 58), Int. ^chrir.

141.
^cT stri, e

to cover,

facT>T.) v e \ '

P.

<ui fn

II

Pf. riWK.

Atm. H^CK,

I A. ^^n^fif ,

Atm. ^Mfl^y

(not

SU CLASS, PABASMAIPADA VERBS.

if

271

wrfty or ^rwff
T*rfb*fir
^riffi,
(

F.

332, 5, a rule which applies to the Atmanepada only), 332, 5), P. F. *tfr, B. *rfT^, Atm. *jprfa or *rfWfr ( 332, 5) u
($
PflfefliiPd,

Pass.

Caus. WKljPri, DCS.

142.

Int.

vri, to
a.

choose,
3.

P.
7.

^ftftr
8.

Pf.

i.

TOt (a),
I A.
tcfYurPff

^nr*,
($

*pp,
(J

TO,

9. *n|:,

wufti^

332, 5),

^TT, 4 ^r, 5 TW^, 6. Atm. wfty or *rofa ($ 340) or

. .

337, II. 4), F.

(not
tf'Oiflv,

or qOmPfl, P. F.^ftin or *flwr, B. ftnrn^, Pan. VH. 2, 39) Pass, ftnrif, Aor. ^nrft, Caus.
II

Atm.

Des. rfqRMfrt,

P^clOMffr or

Mfrl,

Int.

II.

Parasmaipada Verbs.

143. f^ Az, to go, to grow.

P.

f^ft
n

B.

^hrn^

Pf. ftnrR (Pan. vil. 3, 56), I A.^H^, F. l^fTT, P. F. Caus. ^N^ri!, Aor. *H*fl^ii (Pan. vn. 3, 56), Des. foiflMfii, Int. x
II

144. ^nfi 6ak, to be able, (^rf

n Pf. 3 .^n^,

.)

Pass. $r^rff (^rw ^T^Tff

%8(riT, Int. 3!i3(<mri.

it

9.$^:, lA.^rarn;, F.^nsnir, P.F.^HRT n Pt.^r: n can be done), Caus. $M*^frt, Aor. ^^0^1*^, Des.
145.

ru, to hear.
verbs,

This verb

is

by native grammarians classed with the Bhu

substitutes 5T sri for

though as

irregular.

It

s'ru

in the special tenses.

P.

3.

sjwtfw,
3.

6.

3ngir:, 9. ^TTRfiT
4-

4.

spg^:
6

or

^?p:
: '

u
7"

Pf.

i.

5j^N

(5), 2.

(?334>8),
I A.

^5TR,
F.

'^^,
P. F.

5-

UTHP'
B.

'^^
II

VH^Itfl^,
,

-^ft^TfTT,

-^sftin,

T^Tr^

Pass. ^Tfr, Aor. *mifa, Caus.

I.

Aor.

^IT^Rif

or

^r%^Ti^(J 475), Des. ^*Mri (Pan.

146.

3, 57), Int.

*rm dp,

to obtain, (^TTJ.)

P.

3. ^TntftfTT, 4.

^TTR^I,

9. VHI>jifH, I. >snNli^,

O.

^i^*iir\,
ll

I. 3.

Aor.^TT^, F.^r^^Pri, P.F.^TTTT

Aor.
^rrftrm^,

Pt.^mr:

Pass.

Des. ^fir.
III.

Atmanepada Verbs.
4.
7.

147. ^T^ as, to pervade, (^1^.)

P.
4.

3.

^^,
2.

6.

xM^mri^
6.

9.

^T^TT,

^^t,
5-

I. i.

VMIJgP^,
9.

2.

^TCpn:,
rt

3.

^Hi^cjP^,
i.

5. ^Hiiycuvjf,

^TTg^nff,
4-

^i^nf^, 8.^rrgj4,
^^^i^i,
or
6.

^i^c,

O.

I.

^rwl,

^fN,
f

3. ^renri,

'^w^i^tj
2.

^i
i.

Pf. i.^r^ir,
vii. 2, 13,

^T^R

^rro, I A.
but Pan. vn.

According to Pan.
j.

we might form

^T&
.

2, 63,

would sanction

The

special restriction, however, of

^^

to the

Veda

in

Pan. vn.
.

2, 64, is sufficient

fix

HPi;t| as the proper form in ordinary Sanskrit.

272

TAN

CLASS,

PARASMAIPADA AND ATMANEPADA VERBS.

^rr^4,
9.

6. ^rreprrf, 7. ^U4*ii\r, 8. 3. ^rn?, 4. ^nivyfV, 5. ^rrerrcrf,

2.

vmsjn

or

i.

wf^rBK,
II

3. ^rrfifre,

P. F. ^rei or ^tfyrft, F.^ujiri or ^fyWffj B.

^reffa?

or

^rf^i'tfh? u

Pt. *re:

Pass. ^5R7, Aor.

^n%, Cans. ^fRfr, Aor.

^nf$|$li^,

Des.

Int.

^li^Mn.

Tan Class (Tanvddi, VIII

Atmanepada Verbs.
148. Tf^ tan, to stretch,
P.
I.
rirflTri,

Class).

All verbs belonging to this class are Parasmaipada and

(fT*J.)

I.

^nnftf^,

O. TTprn^,
A.
or

I.

if

*ftg

Atm. P.

I.
TT^JfT,

vin^n, O.
3. 'anrftre

ft-jnr

I Pf. 3. Tnrre, 9. ^g:,

2. ^Trrf^r^T:

WR^
II

^TrTiT (

3^9),
Pt.

w*n:,
TrfVn^T

vriCHl^ ( F. TTf^rfw, P. F. Tif?nrT, B.

or

348), Atm.

or

fr^rr^,

Atm.

II

cfff:,
1

Ger. cT^n or

Pass.

TTnTff

or in?m

(J

391), Caus.

Aor.

^snftlfrl

^,

Des.

fffTfffiMfrf

or

finrf^fiT, Int.

HTnmf.
vowel by Guna;

Note

Verbs of the Tan

class

may

raise their penultimate short

:

to go, TOfffW or ^ftflT.

TnTT^^VTTr
149.
TSfUT

^TT "faffr, Sar. [TTrft

n.

n,

3.

kshan, to

kill,

(^^.)

P. T^ftfw
vnsjPiyBit

Pf.

^m,
u

I A.

^Hjiifl^ (J

348*), Atm. 3 .^reyftre or

^^

2.

or

vft;x4n.

150. fspn kshin, to kill.

P.

fopsrVfrr

or

^'iinfrr

I A.

-^

^ iiil H Atm.
,

^Hfftiiy or ^rftjw.

151. "Q^san, to obtain,

P. ^nfrfk
II

Pf.

**R, Atm. %^,

153.

A.

^M^

(a),

(^.) Atm. ^^fT? or

^T^rnr

(Pan.

11.4,79;

vi. 4, 42).

^
fi^

to do, (sopr.)
kar, but before strong terminations

^ A:n

before

weak terminations becomes

and Hm, and the "^v
*f

^^

kur.

Before
radical

y of the optative, the Vikarana

7w
5

is

rejected,

but the

"3"

is

not lengthened.
2. wfiftr,
2.

P.
9.
8.

i.

^dfa?
I.

3. ^rdfrr,
3.
.

4-

ft'?
4.

5-

f^n,
5.

6.

ftfw,
^Tf^ir,

i.^i^t^,

^rard:,
i.

^R?d^,

wf%,
II

^
2.

f^ir:
^if,

7.

fH:,

6.

9. vt
-

^5

T^,
7-

O.

-^$r,
8.

9 -^|: 5
9.

1. 1.

grwftir,
Pf.
I
i.

f^,
2.

3.

5-

f^>

6
5.

f ^f
6.

^t3W,
7.

f^TT,
^GFI^,

f%

^^5R
F.

(a), 2.

4. 4.
i.

^^

^afg**

^asg:,

^^JT,

8. ^^a?, 9.

^"g:,

A. L^rar!,
^rar^:,
6.

^oRr^f:, 3

^?^rn%, 5.^r^T,
f^^TTO,

6. ^r^T'fr, 7.

8. ^ToRrf, 9.
5.

4^^,
7

P. F.

CRTT,

B.

2. farer:, '3.

f^^Tf,

4.

f^vTrer,

f^^nw,

f^Miwi,

Atmanepada
8.

P. i.f%",

2.

f^,

9. f%7T, I.i.

^Jf ft,

2.

^Tf^lT:,

3.

^If ^F,

4.

^Tf
u

6.

tinf,

7.

KT^wt,

8.

^i4,

trrf

Pf.

i.

KRt CLASS, PAHASMAIPADA

4.

AND ATMANEPADA

VEBBS.
i.

273
2.

^^r?,

5. 4.

^TO,
wp-rfy,

6.

^WTT,
-.

7.

^pre,
6.

8.

^,
7.

y. ^rffct,

A.
8.

3. *T^iT,
<*fl,U|rt,

^Kjmiqi,
H

Wf MITlf,

W^TOfV,

^TJ,

9.

^HJWIf, F.

B.

3. ojiifti?, 8.

^pftj
n

Pt. ^nK, Ger.

^r

Pass, fa^nr, Aor.

wuft, Caus.
(

*TTSfir,

Aor.

Des.

f^rarftfr, Int.

TOftTT,

TOfS

&c., or ^irflfic &c.

490).

CZoss (Kryddi,
I.

IX

Class).

Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.

153-

**

M
8.

to buy, (pftR.)

P. af)<uiPn
5.

<

Pf.

i.

ON am (),
7.

2.

N*nivi or iV^r,
9.

3.

fVarpr,

4.

fafWRy.,

6.

PqffliHg:,

r^rwrqi,

f^r*^,

I A. f^fi^^:,
Pt. nfhr:
u

^?%n^, Atm.
Pass. nfN^, Caus.

F. TOft, P. F.
tfUMMfn,

wr,

B. T^UTH,
Int.

Atm. ^fty

Des. r^^lMfrt,

^ifl^.
ift
rff

154.

mt, to

kill,

(rN.)

The

roots

ift wi^,

fH mi (Su), and

(Div) take final

VT

<i

whenever their %t or ^t would

(

be liable to

Guna
Pf.
i.

or Vriddhi, and in the gerund in

Tya

452).

Pan. vi.

i,

50.

P. ^Tiifif
7.

*nS,

2.

ITTTT or

irftro, 3. inft, 4.

fafwH,

5. PHWJVJ:, 6.

ftrft^,

s.

P. F. HTWT,

^mTFh^ Atm. *rnr^ u Pt. B. irhm^,

.

fiTT, 9 frrg:, I A.

(J 353),
rhf:,

Atm. TOTCT
Ger. H^WT,
8), Int.

(f

353), F.
Pass,

iniT u

n^,

Caus. mMMfff

(f

463,

II. 19),

Des.

ftmrflT (J

471,

^fhm.

155.

W^stamlh,

to support, (w$.)

The

verbs

WH stambh, Ig^stumbh, f&^skambh, ^ftskumbh, and ^sfo* may be conjugated

as Kri or as

Su

verbs.
I.

P. wttifrf or Mtilfri &c.,

4. ^TVfT^, 5.

I.^cron^ O.^aVhrn^,
7.

i.Hvrfir,
II

H^rtlT,

6. Jdtilril,

W^IH,

8.

W*ftiT, 9.

^TVg

Pf IRcN,
n

II A. 'TO*fj F. v (J 367),

MfHmfd, P.

F. ^ftnn, B.

wn^

Pt. ^rw:, Ger.

or ^T3JT

II

Pass. WITT, Caus. W>TTfTT, Des. rrtwf*mfff, Int. rrcrnr.

156.

^pd,

to purify,

(^.)
are,
/u,

The Kri verbs beginning with They stand Dhatupatha

cover,

^ pu shorten their vowel in the special tenses (Pan. vn. 3, 80).

The more important
^pri,
to
fill,

31, 12-32.

to cut,

^*/Hi

to choose, ^vrt,
grffir
II

^dhu,
u

to shake,

?drl, to tear, ^j'H, to wither. I

P. ^nfir, Atm.
r,

Pf. tprre,
TJti:,

Atm.

^,

A. *nntf n, Atm.
(J

wrf^,

F.

P. F. trfVjn

Pt.

Ger.

^T
U

(*Tfan:

and MP^HI

424) belong to

(Bhu

class), see $ 333.

D)

Pass. ^qiT, Caus. MNJjPri, Aor.

TRTT,

^MlMM^,
Int.

Des. ^^fri (P^^P^^ri belongs to

^,

BhA

class,

Pan. vn.

2, 74),

* Kri verbs ending in consonants form the 2nd pers. sing, imperative in

wij

321, note 2.

N n

274:

KR! CLASS, PARASMAIPADA

AND iTMANEPADA

VERBS.

157. q^; grah, to take. This root takes Samprasarana in the special tenses and before other weakening terminations.
(Pan. vi.
i,

16.)

P.
I.

l^slPri,

-M^sig

Atm. Jl^lS, I. ^ J]^lf^ Atm. ^]^"lri, O. '%i1<if^, Atm. J Pf. i. *rarn ()> 2. n^P?^ 3- *t4's> 4(2. *J^TO), Atm. ]^1rti u
<

J J 5- *f 1^3*> 6. *PJ^iJij 7. *T T(Vi, 8.

5PT^, 9. 'fjf *i

A.

i.

HiJ^H

341 and $ 348 *),

UlffaTj

B. JpjffiT, Atm. Jf^ifls

iJlP^uif) &c.,

II

Pt.

J^ld't,
ijl^^lPri,

Ger. '^lrn

II

Pass.

Fut. ij^luui or
(not
Tnrfe),

Caus.

Des. PuM^fifT, Int.

^n, Aor. lO'^n,

II.

Parasmaipada Verbs.
grow weak.

158. *wjyd, to

This root takes Samprasarana in the special tenses and before other weakening terminations.
(See No. 157.)

P. P**H

Prt,

I.

^niin^ O. ftnffaffi^
I

I.

Pni g
I

II

Pf.

i.

PITH?,
II

2. P*iPa*<xf

or Hn-rm^,

3. P;I[TMT, 4. f^ffsRT^T,

A.

^TTmttlfl

F.

TMitrMirT,

B.

?i{l<4iii

Pt.

nTJ (i lift &S

participle

would be wrong,

see Pan. vin. 2,

44 ; but
n

it

occurs in the sense

of old (Am. Kosha, ed. Loisel. p. 135), and in the Vedic Sanskrit; see
Beitrage, vol. vi. p. 104),
Int. Wiflqri.

Kuhn,

Ger. yqVll,

sirR

Caus. ^imjfd, Des.

1^9.
This verb substitutes

^TT

jndy to know.
(Pan.
I

^Rjd

in the special tenses.

I.
*T1r('t3

vn.

3, 79.)
tf
fl

P
P.F.
(see

llllPlI, I. Vj^flHillTj
gtifT,

O. ^irl^mfl,

"

P^' 15v?

A.

TBf'^i

F.

u Pt. $rrif! u Pass.^rnWj Aor,^^Tf^, Caus. $iwPri(), B.frnrn^or IRT??^ 462, II. 15)* Aor. ^rPH$m^, Des. HHsilUrt, Int. ^I^I^H1 60.

^V fiandh,
I.

to bind.
ll

P.

^rtrPflj

I. ^ramTTTj
^THirtf, 2.

O.

^nft^rnij
3.

^m^

Pf

i.

^^V,

2.

^^(V^

or ^^^f or
^WTr^?,
n

A.
9.

i.

^MTi^t)

^THiiWln,

4. ^n4ir^*r5 5.

%in-s 9

6. ^H^T^ITj 7.

^wh:,

F. 4wfnr, P. F. -snr, B.

wn^

11

Pt. TO:, Ger.

^T

Pass.

T,

Caus.*4>Rfrf, Aor. ^R^fVfT,

Des.fwwfk,

Int.

III.
161.

Atmanepada Verbs.
^
vri,
I.

to cherish, (f^.)
n

P.

^Tjfft,

I.

^rpjifhT,

O. ^ftw,

^iftui

Pf.

^,

I A. ^Rfts or ^^i!t

or
Pt.

F.

c(^ttTri

or ^PCtaft,

P. F. ^ftjH or

^ftlfT,

B. ^ft^Nf or

^tF

II

^H:

II

Pass. (VnH,

Caus.

<K4|fri (a),

Des. fcmfmrt or
Int.,

f^OMW,
and

Int. ^ifl^rf, ?%fff &c.

Contracted forms of the Des. and

^ffw

^t^jft.

AD

CLASS,

PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

276

Ad

Class (Adddi,

II

Class).

I.

Parasmaipada Verbs.
162.

W^

ad, to eat.
5.

P. i.wfa, 2.wf?R,
1.

3.

wf%,

4.

wy:,

WTO:, 6.ww:,

7.

win,
WTW,
W^PI,

8. 6.

WTO,
WHlf,

9.wi(f7r,
7.

i.Wfi*,

2.WT^. (Pan. vii. 3, 100)*,

3.

8.
7.
2.
i.

wrw,
WITR,

9. 8.

WT?^J O. wirn^,

I.
i.

i.w^rfVf,

2.

WT^, 4. WT*, w%t, 3. wij>

7.

5. 4.

WTO,

5.

ww,
i.

6.

wwf,
II A.

WW,
3.

9.

W^IJ
4.

II

Pf.

WTS,
5.

2.

wrfi^T &c., or substituting

6. insrij:,

^||,
9.

WTOI (a),

^iMf^v,

*IMI,

iPB|c,

n^:,

HOsi

*,

8.

nsr,

f^[:,

WTO,

2.

WTO:,

3. WTOT^, F. vid^fd, P. F. wwr, B. WVTH u Pt. wrrlf, Ger. (Pan. ii. 4, 36) u Pass. wtHT, Caus. tll^ilftv, Aor. wrfi^TT, Des.

163. **\ psd, to eat.

9 .w^rr^or

w^:

($322!), O.^rnrn^, I.WTJ

I A.

F. ^I^PH, P. F. w^rnrfh^,

^mn,

B.

^rnm^

or

^m

Pass, ^ernnr, Caus.

^i^**rir,

Des.

riimi^Prt, Int.

mmm^.
ITT

164.

md, to measure.

P.

nrfir,

1. 3. xiiif^,

F. m^rfw, P. F.
^1*1 1 P*i,

iTTin,

9. WTF^ or wg:, O. imm^i I.wr^ n Pf. iw, I A. vmiul^, B. ^n^ u Pt. ftnr:, Ger. fa^r, JRR n Pass, iftirfr, Aor.
,

Caus. ^m^Tif, Aor. finl^Mri

165.

Des.

ft

fff,

Int.

^RN^,

HPflfTI or

m yd,

to go.

^nrn^, 9. F. in^rfir, P. F. wr, B.

P. irfw,

1. 3.

wn^

imm^
i66.

or wg:, O. H Pf. ^Sr, I A. tiNi^, I. in^ u Pt. inn: n Pass, uro, Caus.

m^O,

Aor.

WT^nT7^

Des. rMMitifn, Int.

*<i*4i*4n.

^n
II

A:%a, to proclaim.
I.

P. ^nfir,

I.

*TPTT^,

O.

wnn^,
^TTTH

^n^

Pf.
II

^^Wh II A. wwi^, F. wr^ifw,

P. F.

OTT7TT,
,

B.

^\m^ or

Pt. ^TTif :

Pass.

WHW,

Aor. WWlfo, Caus.

Aor. iBrfa^niT, Des. Pm&Ml^fd) Int.

167.

KJIJUJIIM.

"^ vas,

to desire.

This foot takes Sampras&rana before the strong terminations of the special tenses, and in the weakening forms generally.

P. i.^fipr,
9. "^rftf, 9.

2. "^rfty (

125, 120),

3. "ffV,
4.

4-'^w>
5.

5-^5
6.

6.

TF:,
7.

7.

T^n,

s.

IT,

I.

i.

^R$t,

2.

^r^,

3.

^nr^,

w?j,
3.

WP,

wrrf,
5-

Wr^f,
-

xil^f^,
*

O.

j^i,

1. 1. N^iifH, 2.

7,

^j

4.

^^n^j

^>

^>

7-

When f^

'W^ inserts ^T before terminations consisting of one consonant. is added immediately to the final consonant of a root,
321, note
I.
is

it is

changed to

(Pan. vi. 4, 101);

||

IF

In the tenses where ^KJ This is formed from

deficient,

"^is used

instead.

WS to eat, a reduplicated form of "^.

N n
2

(Pan. n. 4, 36.)

276
8.

AD
9. -rshj n
II

CLASS,

PAKASMAIPADA VERBS.
A.
Des.
han, to
kill.
,

fv,

Pf. 3

-3^,

9 grg:, I
.

F.
Int.

P. F.

B. tfli

Pass. ^qff, Caus.

413111 ft,

1 68.

frj;

This verb drops

its final

^%

before the strong terminations of the special tenses, and in the

if

weakening forms generally,

or semivowels (Pan. vi. 4, 37).

the terminations begin with any consonants except nasals Before strong terminations beginning with vowels,
3, 54).

^*^ han becomes f^ghn (Pan. vn.

stituted.

In the aorist and benedictive

^{vadh
from

is

sub-

The

desiderative, intensive,
'^^gJiat.
3. ^fff>
4-

and the

aorist passive are derived

TEff^ghan,

the causative from

P.
^si^f,

i.

ffsJT,

2.

tfa?
3.

4-

f^Kj
5-

5-

^?
~-

^o
3.

77-

f*^
4.

8-

^9
8. 5-

9-

Iffy !
9.

2.

^rj;,
I.
i.

^^5
n

'Wf^Tj

^^TJ

^lrfj

^T?
2.

^TT,

0.
7.

f^TTf^,

^flftr,
9. ir$
5.

2.

*ff^ (Pan. vi. 4, 36),

i. "siTrnT

^,

^TFT,

"^UT,
nrpT,

s. ^ir,

Pf.

()? (Pan. vu.

7.

3, 55),

Hvfaq or
I A.

3.

4.

wftR,

wjrg: 9

6. ^rcni:,

rftrT5

8.

nr, 9.

^t,

^Pnuirrf,

P. F.

^m, B. ^uni^
-sr^fv (^

Pt. ^in,

Ger.

^FIT,

^m

^snnrtny u Pass, ^am, (J 449)

F.

Aor. V5nnrf or
^fil^ri

407), Caus. inw^fir, Aor. ^nrhnn^, Des. nHiiiufd, Int.

kills), sHfjT.

or ^fHlnd (Pan. vn. 4, 30, vart., he

169.

yu, to mix.

Verbs of

this class

ending

in

7 u take,

in the special tenses, Vriddhi instead of

3, 89.)

Guna

before

weak terminations beginning with consonants. (Pan. vn.

P.
i.Tfrfor, 2."5^f^,

s.^tfw, 4.3^*? 5-3^*>

6.gm, 7.5^:, s.g^r,

9.g^fir,

I. i.

2.^1^:,
1. 1.

3.^!^,
2.

4,

^3^> 5-^3^5
3.

6.

^TfiTf,
6.

7-^1^9

8.

^fcT,

Hqifi,

8. $w, girf, 7. irem, gw, 9. B. 9^^Nlt^, F. ^temPd, P. F. irf^in, ^n^ u Pt. Aor. ^nnf^, Caus. TU^nrfir, Des. ^fcT or ftRf^fff, Int.

gff

ing,

4.

ITR,

5.

^^
IT:

u n

Pf. 3.

Si!*> J

<

Pass.

170.

"?5

ru, to shout.
z

The verbs

(J

tu,

ru,

stu

may

take

"^

before all terminations of the special tenses

3, 95.)

beginning with consonants. (Pan. vn.

P.

i.

THH
6.

or iXlfa,
TETiTJ

2.

"^fa or

<cflfM, 3.

^f?T or
8.

<tflfd, 4.

^:
9.

or ^Hrt,

5.

or ^t^n,
2.

or

^'4ldt,

7. ^flft

or

^Tc(lHt,

^T

or

^fa,

^^fw,

I. i.
6.

^wt

or

<W>fl'!, 3.

or

iH^ptflff, 7.

or ^ ^'^l"^, 5. ^T^ff or -f^ilw, ^Tul^or 41^11^, 4. ^1^ ^T^R or ^I^1T, 8. ^r^ff or "mgjlti, 9. ^H|v"c|^, O. ^TTf^ or
3.

I. i.

cm

Pill,

2.

^f^ or ^Tlf^,
8.

TU^ or Ijfhj,
9.

4.

T^T^,

5.

^TT or ^Thr,
9-

6.

?r

or

^Thrf,

7. T^T^T,

^7T or

^hf,

^5

Pf. 3.

^TT^5

^1*,

A.

F. tfrofir, P. F. tf^in, B.
^s^rfifj Int. rt^^nr.

^n^

Pt. ^w: n Pass,

^nr,

Caus. -n^fir, Des.

Note

The

extends the use of

and diTT; but see Sarasvati gives 'STn^l^j ^t'Slflfj to to praise. ^

J

332, 4.

It likewise

171. 5
P.
i. itf*,

i,

to go.
8.

2.

ufa,

3. ufir,

.4.^:, 5-^rc> 6.^:, 7.5^:,

^r,

9.

4fw,

I.

i.^wrf,

AD
2.
,

CLASS,

PARA8MAIPADA VERBS.
8.
8.
:>

277

3., 4-> 5'W

WTR,
WTT.*,
5. ^TT,

6.7l,
^?rf,
7.
:
>

7. **T,

*W,

9. n

3. *TJ, 4.

6.
5-

^in*r,
6
-

^?r, 9. *nj
7-

Pf.
9-

^f>

3-

^rnr,
2.

4.

t^>

1^

^HJ
5.

1^

11'

t*

^m tS * ^
i.
:

(a),
i.

2.

^jftro or

wri (Pap. n.
WTTW,
9.

4,45),
($ 368),

F.

*igfiT,

3.^nrn^, 4. ^BTTFT, P. F. *cn, B.

vnw,

6. ^rrrnrt,

7.

wrw,

8.

w*j:

^n^

n Pt. JIT:,

Ger.

^T, ^q

n Pass, $irir,

Aor.

vunfa

(J

404),

Caus.
i,

Jmfr

(Pan. n. 4, 46), Des.

ffnrftrefir

(Pan. n. 4, 47).
if

But

see

463, II.

and

f 471, 4,

with regard to this and cognate verbs

preceded by prepositions.
172. fo[ vid, to

know.
6. fVnrr,

P.
I.
6.

i.

*rfa, 2.

%fw,
or
8.

i.*H 2.^:
^if^nf,
7.

^
2.

3. ^ffc,

4. "fry:, 5. "faro, 2, 75), 3.

(Pan. vin.
9.

wf^^,
i,

^rfw,

fa<^ or ^f^:, O. fwnj,

3.

^
3.

7.

fr?n,

8.
.

($

132^), 4

I. i.^^if*!
6. ftnrf,

(or f^hi

&c., Pan. in.

9
.

41),

f^%,

^,
(

f^

Pf.
u

f^
9.

or f^f^rn:

^T^, 5. f^W, 7. ^T*> 8. 326), I A. ^fh^, F. ^qfir, P. F.

4.
i.

B.

fron^ Another form of the Present

is,

$^,

2.

^W,

^,

4. "fa*, 5.

f^T^:,

6.

7. fr?r, 8.

f^,

f^:

Pt. f^Tft, Ger. faf^HI n Pass. fTOK, Aor. w%ft, Caus.

i.

%^qfif, Aor. ^^lfc<<^, Des. fcfc^Hfri (Pan.

2, 8),

Int.^fWff, ^ftr.

173. P.
2.
2.
i.

W(as,
5.

to be.
7.

saftn, 2.

^srftr,

3.

^ri%,

4.

^:,

^r:, 6. ^r:,
7.

w,
8.

8.

w,
9.

9. *rfk,

1. 1.
i.

^utilt, 3.

'iti^'if^,

4.

ri*!*> 5. ^rrer, 6. ^rrerf,

wsr,

wref,

^iti^, O.

^n: 5

3.

w^,

4.

^TR,

5. 6.

WIT,

6.

^rnrf,

7.

WR,
9.

8. **rnr, 9.
II

^:,

1. 1. ^rarrftr, 2.
2. *llftlV|,
i.

3. ^TCFJ, 4. ^st^lq, 5.
4. 3.

W)
6.

Wj

7. 'Sfttiij
7. ^H
i

8. ^tT,

^
9.

'Pf. i.
;

Wre,

^nf^4,

5. ^sTRT^t,

^rrcnjt,

fan,

8. ^TTO,

^n^:

Atm.
9.

^r^,

2.

^rw,

4.

vnftm^,

5.

xutu^i,

6. ^rr^Tif, 7.

^1^*15,

8.

^rfroi,
(ifSj^.)
it

^nftRt.

174. if^mrij, to cleanse,

This verb takes Vriddhi instead of

Guna

(Pan. vn.

2,

114);

may takeVriddhi

likewise

before terminations that would not require Guna,

if

the terminations begin with a vowel

(Siddh.-Kaum.

vol.

n. p. 122).
3.

P. i.HTftS, 2.mft|,
or
97.
iTTsrfiT,

TrfS

124),
3.

4-^^ 5'W
2.

:>

-^
6.

:>

7-

IT:

8 -^> 98. 6.

I.

i.^Hif, 2.^nrr^,

^HI^, 4.^npf,

5.^?,
3.

^npf, ;.^ipT,
4.

"^pn^ or
HT^i^f, 8.

^Hl^> O. ITIII^, ^, 9. iJafTJ or inifg

or

I. i. H'l^lfH,

^,

TTf ,

ITHTR,

5.

Jp,

Pf i.HHI^,
6.

2.

*i*iifnM or JRHT?, 3. III*T, 4.

or

*i*fifn^, 5. 'T^'f^t
9.

H*TT^^I,

^W^'

r TTT^gt,

or *nrm,

^^t

or

jwrif:,
ij5*TT

I A.
U

wn*ff^ or

^HinfT^,

ijnii or #1*11 Pni, 8. F. mf^rfir or Hrafff, P. F.

7.

or inf T, B.

Pt. ip:, Ger.

mfHHl or

iffT,

or ^ST, Adj. JRTPSrtq:

used at the end of

t The

perfect both in the Parasmaipada

and Atmanepada

is chiefly

the periphrastic perfect.

278

AD

CLASS,

PARASMAIPADA VEEBS.
113)
u

pr: or *rnh (Pan.

Des.
ftii$|Pri

m.

i,

Pass.iprfr, Aor.^srorfS, Caus.

*i*iife.

or frmPmPfl, Int. *iO*jTqn,

175.

^
.

vach, to speak.
5.

P.

i.

^fs*r, 2. ^fsy, 3.
I. I.

^%,
3.

4.

^^:,

^3*r:, 6.

^s,
4.

7.

T^JH,

8.

^*r,

9.

^fir or
8.
7.

^T^,
u

2.

4H'^ 9

Viqe^, 4. 4Hxcf, 5. ?T^N?,

6. VSNchl, 7.
1

iSHVI,

9.
8.

-*H<^*, O.

1. 1. q-qifri, 2. ^TaiTt^,

^fNr,

3.

^R,

^TC
(J

5. ^Ifi, 6.

^f

^, ^3*
9.

Pf.

3-

TWTO

9 ira:, II A.

*N^

366), F. ^rfif, P. F.

B. <fxMi^ u Pt. T3: n Pass, ^nsqw, Aor. ^mfrl, Caus. m^^fri, Aor. Des. fqms|fWj Int. qiq-oin.
176.

rud, to cry,

(^C.)
?[

The verbs ^rwc?, W*{svap, ^^svas, ^^an, *i^jaksh take

of the special tenses beginning with consonants, except

before the terminations

2, 76).

^y

(Pan. vn.

Before
;

weak terminations consisting of 6ne consonant, ^ I according to others, *& a (Pan. vn. 3, 99).
P.
i.

is

inserted (Pan. vii. 3, 98)

or,

Ttf^fa,

2.

dfc(fa, 3. Or^fn, 4. ^P^^:, 9.

4.

^fri,
i

I. i.swO<i,
!

2.^0<1: or
2.

3. sHCi<{tf^
4.

or
5-

^T^I^,
-

-si^r^,
7-

9.

^<$vi> ^- ^rf>
8. ^fi[Tf,

^*ri,
Pf.

^r^r^,

3.

^[TO,

^^^

6 ^Tfri>

^W,

9.

^[

^d^,

I A. ^Ttfefh

or

u Pt. ^rr: u Pass. ^r>, Aor. F. ftf^rfir, P. F. df^in, B. ^r^i^, Caus. Clt^fd, Aor. -*l^^^, Des. fv"^'r^*4fii or ^ttft[^flf, Int.

^m^

177. ?(^jaksh, to eat) to laugh

||.

Seven verbs, ^T^jaksh, '3RT [jdgn, to wake, ^fX'l daridrd, to be poor, 1ftft(chakds, to shine,

$n^ sds,

to rule, <c(Nt didht, to shine, T^ft ve^, to obtain, are called

WTCcf abhyasta

They take ^ifw ati and 'Snj atu in the 3rd pers. plur. present and imperative, and ^l uh instead of ^fi^ an in the 3rd pers. plur. imperfect ( 321 f).
(reduplicated).

P.
.

3. nfifPif, 9. *icjfn, I.

9 *nrw: ($ 321 1)

Pf. snrcy, I

or O. if^ni^j -wn^lf^ ^nf^fr^, A. F. nfqmfri.

I. 3.

or
lifVS/li^

^^HfT^,

178. *R*lJagrii to wake.

P.
9.
8.
i. *ii'i(ij 2.

(Pan. vi.
5.

i,

192, accent.)
6.

miR,
2.

3.

in'ifS, 4.
3.

rnpt,
4.

n*pn,
5.
2.

"srpprtj 7.

iii|fri, 1. 1.

^nrmt,

^rwnr:,

^nrRt?
I. i.

^<MI*,

wn'ji
au^P^,
3.

^iiiMn5

9.

^^I'l^J? O. ni'jMii^j
9

ni'mfiu,

TTT5 9

4.

5. STPTif, 6.

ii'|ni

7.

ni'Ki*i9 8. ni'jflj 9.
I

in.

i, 38), 9.

mrm^:,
U

'IIK^ A. Wfm'O'i^ (see preface, p.

ii'iPi.n!

H Pf. 3.

^IHNIK or
ix),

TiiM<i-q<=tiK

(Pan.

F. ^TMlft.mPH, P. F.

Mii(Vifi9

B.

^iHiMit^

Pt.

Pass, vu'i^kn, Aor. %iiHiiP<. . Caus.

Des.

nriHinnC'iPif.

No

Intensive.

* The 3rd pers. plur. present of ^does not occur (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 120); accord-

ing to others the whole plural

is

wanting ; according to some no 3rd pers. plur.

is

formed

from T^.
||

*TSTto

eat,

from

^;

"STWto laugh, from

^.

AD

CLASS,

iTMANEPADA VERBS.
(Pan. vi.
in

279

179, ^ft^T daridrd, to be poor.

In ^(V.l daridrd the
final ^T?

i,

192, accent.)

i*

replaced by

the special tenses before strong termiBefore strong terminations

nations beginning with a consonant (Pan. vi. 4, 114). beginning with vowels the WT d is lost (Pan. vi. 4, 112).

P.

i.

^ftfclfa,
9.

2.

e^fVgifti,

3.

sfVfcifw,
I-

4.

{OJgq:,
2.

9. ^ft^fif,

I. 3.

6.^ftf^?fT,
5.

w^fi:, O. ^frf^n^

i.^V$ifu>

" r f' ^cfcfl, 7. qgitf, s. ^fcd, 9. 5" vol. n. p. 125), I A. (Siddh.-Kaum. n^fljfl^or j<*(X$itfl^(Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 126), F. qftjftmrd (Pan. vi. 4, 114, vart.), P. F. qfljfrdl (not

^jfl,

6.

^pj

80. jTT^&fo, to

command,
second
4.

(^n^.)

(Pan. vi.

i,

188.)

^H^ yds
P.
3.

ia

changed

to fifl^ sis before

weakening terminations beginning with consonants,

aorist.

and
i. $11 (\W,
(

in the

(Pan. vi. 4, 34.)

I. i. VIJIIJJ, 2.

2.

^llfw,
4-

3.

^llfw,

f^T^t,

9. ^iitifn,
7.

^T|Tn or
9.

Vjm^,

^[\\

132),

*%^5
2.

5- ^ffifTF, 6.

^Huei,

^n%^,
5.

8. ^fifTF,

^n^:, O.
Pt.

f^i'Mif^,

1. 1.

^ntufn)
II

^iifv ($ 132),

3. ^rraj, 4.

^niq,

%?,

6. fifref, 7.
II

8. f^r?, 9. ^iitig

A. ^ff^rm^, F. 511^1^^, B. f^pni^ Pass, f^rir, Caus. ^m^ffl, Des. njf^nftmrH, Int.

Pf. 3I3IIU, II

II.

Atmanepada Verbs.

181. ^T8J chaksh, to speak,

P. i.^$, 2.^T$, 3.^?,
1. 3.

4-^S%5
I.

5.

^icn^,
n Pf.
1

6. qtsjiff,

7. -swti^, 8.

^n?, 9. The other forms

wT8jTf, O. ^nfld,

^?f

^%.
or
or
FJTT,

are supplied from

Pf.

^n

the Red. Perf. optionally,

(Pan. n. 4, 54, 55) or Atm. or ^i|1^,

^ft

a II A.

^^

w, F. *nim(ri or w, B.

^rnm^

^l1.
182.

$^&,

to rule.

The

root

and IT^jan do the same, and likewise insert ^ i before the and pers. pliur. present, [imperfect,] and imperative (Pan. vn. 2 A 78). The commentators, however^
id

t^i

take

^*

before the 2nd pers. sing, present and imperative (Pin. vn. i, 77).

extend the latter rule to

$3&

See notes to Pan. vn.

2, 78.

P/x.^a.^,3.$M.*(^t3.H^
183.

^TT^ ds, to
^rcrt
Pf.

sit.

P. *n^,
2, 83), I

I. ^rrer,

A.

<*rftre,

O. wrfhr, F. ^ftrr>.
!84.

I.

^nrrN^

(part,

^nf^,

Pan. vn.

^^,

to bear,

fa.)
3, 88),
2.

P.
5.

^,

I.
6.

^W,
^nrf,

O.
7.

f^fhr,

I. i.
8.

(Pan. vn.
9.

^,
I

4-

^nrr,

^TR|,

^i4,

^irf

P g^,

A. ^wf^

.^TT,

or

280
(

AD
I- *)

CLASS,

PARASMAIPADA AND ^TMANEPADA VERBS.

*farft,

337>
II

*fo*ft or

B. *farrte or *>trte
^T^nrfcTj

II

Pt.

*pr: (Pan.

vin.

2,

45)

Pass. ^Tff, Aor. ^rarfa,

Caus.

Aor.

<3WJT^,

Des.

^{JM^ (Pan.

vin.

3, 61), Int. ^frTOf.

185.

3ft si, to lie

down, to

sleep, (tfH^.)

The verb

Tffts*

takes

Guna

in the special tenses (Pan.

vn.

4, 21),

and

inserts

^r in

the 3rd

pers. plur.

present, imperfect, and imperative.

5-

P.

i.

$nr,

2.

tre, 3i.

W,

42.

sfat?

snn$,
3.

6.

^iw,
4.
2.

7.

$*!,
5.

s.

$d,

9.

$t^
6.

(Pan.

vii. i, 6),
7.

I.

^njrfa,
9.
8.

^fan,
9.

^%?r,
1.
1.

^r^NfV,

^ruivji,

-ii$Hr^,

8.
<

^r%i4,
5nTTH|,

^ncw, O. yriftTr,
^?4,

SR,

6.

3NMI,

7.

^cTf

II

Pf.

f^^,

%^, 3. ^nrf, 4- snrra^, 5. A. ^ff^, F. ^l^mri, B. ^nftlf

^^!Tft?,

II

Pt. ^rfinr:

Pass, ^i^w (Pan. vn. 4, 22), Aor.

Caus. tymqPri, Des.

f^rftn^rT, Int. ^(i^(<^7T, ^i^ifn.

1 86.

i,

to go,

(^.)

(Pan. vi.

i,

186, accent.)
p. 1 18.)

This verb

is

always used with^SrfVa^i, in the sense of reading. (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n.

I. 3
.

P.

^rifir,
2.

^^w,
t*fl'nfj

6.

"swmri

(Sar. n. 5, 8),
5.

^wnr, O.
7.

^nrtifhf,

I. i.

^svhsf, 3.
II

4.

^rwm^%,

t*n<4i'qi, 6.

^?^hrnrf,
6.

^itq*tit^, 8. ^nftt^j
'

Pf. ^ftnfit (Pan. n. 4, 49),

IA.

3.

^F,

^T^nTTT,

9.

^iffi, or

3. ^fiflift^

(Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 119), 6. ^rapffar?rf, 9. ^UJJ^MH, F. Cond. ^!W5fiT or ^?upfNlT, P. F. ^ WT, B. ^iWte u Pt. ^^TT: Pass.
ll

Aor. ^iqinftl or
or

^nfllftr,

Caus. ^mnmjfir, Aor.

^rtqifqxCf

or ^wrifhrrc, Des.

III.

Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.

187. fsr* dvish, to hate.

P.
9.

i.^rfrT) 2.

s f4f s-iffe?

4.

rf:,

9. rsr^ffl,
I.

I.

i.^r^

2.^5?s7, 3. ^r<r, 4.
2. firfr,

^ifir^ or ^rf?"jt (J 321 j), O. (Vmir^,

6.

i. ir^T'fiir,

5. fin?,

%irf,

7.

ifanr,

8.

fe?9

9.

feMg
u

Pf. f^^r?
n

P. F.

iter,

B.

fe'Hrn^,

Atm. fir^te

Pt. fgr:

3. ^g, 4. A. ^iV^f^j F. Pass, fe m ij, Aor. ^ft, Caus.

1 88.

^
8.

c?w^, to milk.
5.

P.
I.
I.

i.

^tftr,
2.

2.

vrf%
3. 6.

3.

^ffrv,

4.55^9
4. ^fl^SI'j

^
"

6.
,

grv:,
I.
I.

7.5^:,
(fl^lfWj
-^

8. 2.

|?v,

9.
3'

^n(l'5 5
5.

^Wto^,

^ImoFj

O.
9-

d^llri

5^^J

4. "^I'^i^j

3?^)

^VT,

7. <{Tfi*f,

5^5

5^3

"^^'

5^^5

A.*

^nr^Tf &c. (see

F. Vl^frt. ^ 363),
189.
5f|

stu, to praise, (l^T.)

2.

P.

i.

wf*T or
9.

{l(i (see

No.

170)?

^n(V or

^cilPM,

3.

wfw

or ^sNtfrf,
jlTT, 4.

4.

or ^qi^J,
r,

^^nfT,

I. i. ^?^rT^T, 2.
^tPffif ,

^Wr. or

vi'tciqlt, 3.
i.

^"wlii or
2.

^'W

^t^
9.

^J^J or

9.

^ta^^, O.

Atm.

^5^ftw, I.

^KNiPtij

^3f^ or ^ti^r^,

HU
or *nfcj
n

CLASS,

PARASMAIPADA VERBS.
.

281
3),

Pf. 3 .

$m,

iprta, 6. ijynj:, 9 353:, I

A.

TOT*^ (J 338,
(I

Atm.

^reffa, F. ^fttgfw, P. F.

Pt. fcArtf, B. ^Mlfl, Atm. feftMl? Aor. viWTfa, Caus. wi^nfff, Aor. ^rg^, DCS. Ufir, Int.
190.

*jjw:

Pass.

T^^,

to speak,
in the special tenses

This verb takes $

(Pan. vii.

before

weak terminations beginning with consonants

perfect ^TTf dha

3, 93).

The

may be

substituted for five of the persons of the

present (Pan. HI.

is

4, 84).

It is defective in

the general tenses, where

l^vach (No.

175)

used instead.
i.

P.

arH'T,
7.

2.

dcfifM or OTTO, 3. wrtfir or

s.

or wr^Tj:,
5.

^r,
6.

^r,

9.
s.

"^fir

or

*rrj:,

1. 1.

wp,

6.

^af?rf, 7.

^5,

^rc|ir, 9.

^fq^, O.

4. pncre, 5.

qw,

8. I^Tff, 7. pl^TT, l|ir, 9.

7|%
before

191. "gp^ ^rww, to cover,

This verb

may

take Vriddhi instead of

3, 90, 91),

Guna

weak terminations beginning with conIt

sonants (Pan. vii.

except before those that consist of one consonant only.

takes the reduplicated perfect against

i, 8).

325, and reduplicates the last syllable (Pan. vi.

In the general tenses the final

(Pan.
i.

^ u, before
I.

intermediate ^t,

may

or

may not
or
5.

take

Guna
P.
Pf.
6.
i.

2, 3).

3. ^wsfifrf

or iwoffrr,
2.

9.

^ucjfrf,

^nwf^j O. **jj^n^
.

I.

^HUIJ}

<*4}HN
7.

(a),

WHf<m
8.

or

^rjf^v/, 3 ^'Hiq,
9.

41

^f*qq,
^n^rii^
<

"3n^^:,

gi^f^H,

(Pan. vii. 2, 6), F.

^fWw

^^5
Des.

**JJ3#

1 A.

w^Tl ^ or

or

or

gp|f%tRfir,

Aor.

^ftjTbraf

"flT

or

B. -3^511^ u Pass, -g^nf, Caus. TO^rfMHTd or 3orfaqfir, Int.

Hu
192.

Class (Juhotyddi,
I.

III

Class).

Parasmaipada Verbs.
(Pan. vi.
i,

J hu

to sacrifice.
I.

192, accent.)

P. g^fir, I A.

I.

^snpffy O. "gjm^,

^^
u
x

Pf.

^i^r or
n

^^^TT

326),

^^^,

F.

^Wir,

P. F.

-^tiTT,

B. ?TmT

Pt.

fir:

Pass. ?^nr, Caus.

^mfrr,

Aor. ^nj^r^, Des. ^^frr. Int. *fjMfi 9 ^^Tn.

193.
This verb
*ft

bhi, to fear,

(fwt.)

(Pan. vi.

i,

192, accent.)

may shorten

the final

^ i before

in strong terminations beginning with consonants

the special tenses.

(Pan. vi. 4,
9
.

15.)

P. 3

fsnHir,
9. (J

6.

fwhr: or WHW:,

fowrfiT,
I.

I. 3.

*rfw^,
u

6.

^fwiw
or
f

or

^f^:,

O. fvftim^ or f^rqt^,

326), I A.

^^h^,

F. H^fiT, P. F.

HITT,

ft&j n B. >rhn^

K ^^
Pt. tfU:

^T -

Pass.

Aor. *mfr, Caus. HT^flf or HTOH^ or iflvni (see j 463,

",

H.

18),

Des.

Int. ^w^*rff, %^fir.

o o

282
194.
P. 3 fnifr,
.

HU

CLASS,

ATMANEPADA VERBS.
(Pan. vi.
I.
i,

# hri,

to be ashamed.
.

192, accent.)
I.

6.

ftrrhr:, 9

ftf&fn

(I

no),

^fn^, O. ftr^mf,
I A.
u

Pf. 3. ftfFTO, 6. ftrfFfij:, 9. ftffig: or

r^NdiK,
2,

B. ^far^ u Pt. ^Nr: or jft: (Pan. vni. Des. ftrgfafcf, Int. %]ffaiw. Aor. ^(W^ii^,
195.
TJ

56)

^fhffy F. jvfo, P. F. fTTT, Pass, -g^im, Caus. t^^fif,

pri, to

fill,

to guard.
labial,

This verb, and others in which final

^ri
.

is

preceded by a

changes the vowel into

1, 102.)

where the vowel requires "3^ur, except

Guna

or Vriddhi.

(Pan. VIT.
7.

P. i.fanfS,
9.
5.

2.

ftreft, 3. ftnift, 4 ftr$%:, 5.

f^:,

6. ftr$w:,

fn^:,
I. i.

8.

ftr^S,

f^tfrr,

1. 1.
6. 3.
2.

-^rmu, 2.^rfTO (or ^rftro,

7.
1|

Sar.), 3. ^rftR: (or 'srftnro^j 4.

9.

^ftr^w,
,

^rf^wi,
<

^rf^H,

s.

^PM^W,

^rftnr^t,
7.

O.

fM^MFi^,

ft *!,
1

4-

fr rcre,

5-^^

6.fl^WT,

frlRIH, S.ftr^S, 9.f^fC3

II

Pf.

i.

(),
8.

MMfi.%

3.

TTMT, 9.

-q^: or
B.
7),

ijj:

TTW, 4. ^itf<^, 5. 4Hvg: sn^g: or Tni^:, 7. trqfbr, ^fr^:, (Pan. vn. 4, n, 12), I A. ^RTTh{, F. qftwfk (0, P- F.
r
6.

^ftcTT or TtftaT,

^T^ u
Ger.
(?),

Pt. ^w: (Pan. vni. 2, 57),

^:, and

^fbr: are referred

to TJT

442,

fjtr,

f^

Pass,

^ffir,

Caus. ^R<lOr, Aor.

^M)^,

Des,

y^frr or filMf^fri

Int.

M^Sn, ^mfS.
ij,

Several optional forms are derived from another root

with short

^j.
U

Thus, P.
I A.

I. 3. 3. faxrfff, 6. fmjrit, 9. Pnufri,

^fqM:,

6.

^rfrpjlff, 9.^rftnT^t,

O. fuTJ^m^

^mtff^,

B. ftnm^

Pass,

fma

390), Int.

^hm

481).

196. fT hd, to leave,

(^ft^Tcjr.)

Reduplicated verbs ending in ^TTa (except the Jlghu verbs, see 392 *) substitute \i for ^TTa before strong terminations beginning with consonants (Pan. vi. 4, 113). The verb ^T hd,

however,

may

also substitute

^i (Pan.

vi. 4, 116).

P.
(*),

i.

i^iri, 2.

fiTftr, 3. 'STfrfrT, 4.
fffff, 1.
1.

ir^N*
2.

(),

5.

"5?^^: (),

6. "snrfrrf: (?),

7.

*\%\*:

8.

nrfa

(z),

9.

^rr^t,

w*ffn,
2.

3.

O.^ni^
3.
2. *if^xf
,

(Pan. vi. 4, 118),

ST^TW,
5.

I. t.iffTf^,

^f^
'

^nr^n^, 4. ^i^1^ (z), 9. ^nrj:, or ir^rf^ (Pan. vi. 4, 117), (?)

'^^Trf (?), 9. "5T^ U Pf.
7i.

TfTiJ, 4.

W^TT

(?), 6.
4-

'^liii (f),
B<5

7. "ST^TH, 8.

T^I,

or 5fin%

3. "ST^,

*tf&>

^^>

6 5
-

^*>

'T^'T, 8. "5Tf , 9.

Tj:,

I A.

II

F. gimfri, P. F. frwr, B. u Pt. ^hr:, Ger. f^n (Pan. vn. 4, 43), ^ITT^ Pass. ^hTff, Caus. ^nwfrf, Aor. '^"5^^, Des. fiTfmfff, Int.

1.

TO
5.

(or ^ro^),

6.

1. 1.

^rcrftr,

2.

5^,

3 ^r|, 4
.

^^o^,

^,

6.

s^rif,

7.

^^TH,

s.

^f,

Pf.

i.

^TR,

2.

*nfH

I A.

'STK^, 9.

^nt^ (1

3^4), F. ^^rtaifTT, P. F.

^rtr,

B.

II.

Atmanepada
(HH)I^,
5.

Verbs.

198. HT md, to measure, (TTT.)

P.
i.

far,

2.

fwt^r,

3. fa*ftw, 4.

f^TT^,

6. "ftTTTff,

7.

(*<HlH^, 8.

HU
9. f*i*ifl, 1. 1.

CLASS,
1*1 1*1,

PARA8MAIPADA AND ATMANEPADA VERBS.

^rn-nffan;, 3. *s 1*1*1 in, 4.

283
6.

2.

TtmHlqff ,

5. ^ti*f*ii*<i,

y.ufHNlnfig,
5.

S.^lfinftttf, 9.*i(*i*in,

O.

f*i*fliT, I. i.fira, 2. f*fHl*J, 3. fi*i1

i,

(iir^i,

6.

famiii,

8. f*i*i1l4, 9. fa*inf n 7. (i*ii*i9>

Pf.

i.

*TO, a. iffim, 3. *TO,

a.

5. *TOT^, 4.

6. *r*rnr, 5.

7.*rf*7*i^,

8. *rf*ii&,

9.
7.

rfTT, I A. i.^nnftf,

^nrrwr:,

3.

W4l440g,

^HHIWll,
n

6. xi *i i<i ml,

xWlwfjg,
ftrwr,

8.

xWIUf,

9.

WHI4A,
Pan. vi.

F.
4,

P. F. mwr, B. inwtY
Pass. frtw, Aor.

Pt.

fair:,

Ger.

*TTO

(not
Int.

.rhr,

69)

wnfa, Caus. Hm^fd, Des.

"ftn^rifr,

^*T^iri^.

III.

Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.

199.

bhri, to carry, (ypr.)

7.

P.
.

i.

(Vif*i,

2.

"ftwf^, 3. f%rfS, 4. ftnj^t, 5. fw*pn, 6. fw*jirt,

2.

^*prt,

8.

^p?,
fw*jfr

9 f^>ifiT,
3. ^sff*jrT,

Atm. i.fw,
6.

fa*j^, 3.f^T*i7r,

L 3 .^ff*r:,
4-

Atm. 6.^ir*pn, 9.wfir*T^:,

1. 1. fwH^ilVi, 2.

wf^jnrf,
i.

9. -wfW*j?r,

O.

f^^^ifl,

Atm. ^^ftw,
fr*p
tf

fwt

Pf.

WR
vn.

(5),

2.

W^,

3-^n:,

334J P^n. vn.

f*jnrr^,
it

2, 13)

or
n

fir*Kh<*ii ?
Pt. ^jw:
u

I A.

^HT^, Atm. ^ryr,

F. HiX^fy, P. F. *Sr, B.
"yjtrfir,

Atm.

yfa

Pass, ftnnr, Caus. HrCTflf, Des.

or fwft^fir, if

follows the

Bhu

class (Pan.

2, 49), Int. Twhnfr, ^*>f&.

200. ^T da, to give,

(^T^)

The

verbs ( 392*) drop WT d before strong terminations, when other reduplicated ^J^Att verbs (see No. 196) change "VI d to ^f. (Pan. vi. 4, 112, 113.)
1

P.

i.

^rf*r,

2.

<^tfa,

3.

^rfff,

4.

^s *,

56.

^*K

6.

^:,

7.

f?n, 8. ^ro, 9.
9.

^fw, Atm.
I.
i.

i.^,

2.

^W, 3.^,

4-

^Sft,

5-^T^>
6
-

^TF, 7.^W%, 8.^|,

7-

^7T,

a.^^r:,
2.

3.^^,
3.^?^,

4-^sr,
4.

5-^^
5.

^[^t,

*5*r,

8.

^r^,

9.^*^5:,

Atm.

i.

vf^fm;,

^pgrfl^,
1. 1.
9.

<^|Vj|,

6. SH^^Irtl,

7.

VH^r*, S.V^f,
3.

9. 5.

O.
6.

Atm. ^TT, ^rr^,

7.

^Tftf, 2.^ff (Pan. vi. 4, 119),

^TiJ,

4.

^T^,
6-

^rf,

^T*T, S.^tT,
8.

^,
II

Atm.
Pf.
i.

i.

<&

2.

^r^T, 3-^rf,

4-^'^t,

5-^t

7.

^Rt,

^,

^TO, 3. ^, 4. ^f^, 5. ^, Atm. i.^, 2.^f^, 3.^, 4-^%t, S-'tT^* .^, 9.^5:, 9-^C, II A. i. ^f, 9 ^j:, Atm. ^f^(see p. 184), F.
9.

?[^n

2.

^T

or

P. F.
r,

^TTTT,

B.

^T\

Atm. ^nrte
^Ttnrfir,

Pt.

^:

(J

436), Ger.

^T, ^T

Pass.

Aor. ^rftr, Caus.

Aor. \H^!^M, Des. f^wfir, Int.

to place,

201.

VT^M,

It should be remembered, however, that conjugated like ^T. the aspiration of the final v, if lost, must be thrown forward on the initial ^; hence 2nd pers. dual Pres. vw: &c. ( 118, note). The Pt. is f^in, Ger.

This verb

is

O O 2

284

KUDH

CLASS,

PARASMAIPADA AND iTMANEPADA VERBS.

.

"fair nij,

to cleanse,

The verbs fT^wy, f^T

vij,

to separate,

and

f^^vish,

to

embrace, take Guna in their

reduplicative syllable.

(Pan. vn. 4, 75.)

Reduplicated verbs (abhyasta,

32 if) having a short medial vowel do not take

in the special tenses.
I.
i.

Guna

before

weak terminations beginning with vowels

P.
7.
i.

(Pan. vn. 3, 87.)

2.

^frFT,

2.

%%ft|,

3.

%%fo,
F.

9. ^ftnrfcT,

^H(HJT,

^R^T,

3.

^Rfar*,

9. <3Rfa*j:,

O. ?rft5*n^,
wftnr^,

I. i.

^fcnnfil,

2.

^Tf*I,

3.

%^{

II

Pf.

I A.

^r%^

or II A.

%^r,

P. F. TPJT, B. ftrwiTr,
Int.

Atm.

Caus. ifinifiT, Aor. ^cftftnn, Des.

frriiTT^fff,

Rudh
I.

Class (Rudhddi,

VII

Class).

Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.

203.

^^rudh,

to shut out, (^fv^.)

P. ^rfs,
7.

I.

^^^,
I A.
II

O.

%m^,

I.

^|

Pf.

i.

^dv,
Pass,

2.

^df>rzr, 3

^ftm,
^UTT?^,

9.

^^:,

mhtfh^or

II A.

W^>T^, Atm.
r,

^^,
u

F. TtwfiT, P. F.

B.

Atm. ^ft^

Pt. ^gr:, Ger.

ui

w,

Aor.

Caus. dv^rfw, Des. ^^^rfiT, Int.

II.

Parasmaipada Verbs.
f^ftj

204. f^rs &'s^, to distinguish,

P.

i.

f^nrf^j

2.

f^Rfsj,

3.

f^Rfi?j

4-

5.

f$s*5

6. f^r?:,

7.

f^far:, 8.

9. frfr^frr, I. 8.

^rf^F,

9.

i.^rf^Rw, 2.^r%^7, 3.^r%T7, 4. ^if^r^, 5-^ff^? 6. I. i. f^R^rfirr, 2. (or f^fe), ^rf^fa^, O.

f^T^TTi^,

f^ifj

3.

%Tf
Pass.

II

fTO^, II A.

P. F. $FT, B. f^TTr^ Caus. ^N^fif, Des. f^rfjfTW^T? I nt $%^W? $^rf?.

^%^,

F.

^T^TfTf,

II

Pt.

%*

hims, to strike,

P.
6.

ff^%,
7.

1. 1.

^r^ri,
8.

^r^wl,

'srf^Rj

^T%H: or ^rf^r^, ^rf^^r, 9. ^rf^TF^, O.

2.

3.

^rfi^n^(J 132),
1.
1.

4.

^rf^^, 5
2. fi?fa, 3.

Pf. ftrf^r, I

A.

^^,

f^H^ifn, f^^rn^, F. f^ftnqfir, P. F. f^ftnn, B. f^^nr^

ftrf^ftRflf, Int.

P^HI^

Pt. f^ftnr: n

Pass, f^qw, Caus.

f^WrT, Aor. ^rftff^^, Des.

206.

H^ bhanj,
I.
u

to break, (n5ft.)
n

P. wrfti,

I.

^TVROF, o. 45?n^,

*?rf
Pass.

Pf. ^r^nr, I

P. F. H^ir, B.

^5^

Pt. *nr:

HT^,

<3wreffy Aor. <gwftr or Wftr

A.

F.

>

(J

407),

Caus. >RPTfw, Des. f^l^frr, Int. "W^Tff,

207.

^H%.
F. ^iftmflf

P. ^Rf?R,

I. ^TT

?^,

O.

^^ anj, to anoint, (^^.) ^5^? I- ^R^l U Pf. ^TPTW, I A. ^TTWfy

or ^flfif, B. Pt. ^TSRt, Ger. ^rflTi^n or ^RT or ^TW (Pan. vi. 4, 32; ^^n^TH U 0: n Pass. ^5*Tff, Aor. ^rffr, Caus. 4*T*lTif, Aor. ^srffinrf, Des. 5r5?T J 438),

RUDH

CLASS,

ATMANEPADA VERBS.

285

208.
This verb inserts
irr

to kill, Tft trih,

ne instead ofHSna before weak terminations beginning with consonants. (Pan. VH. 3, 92.)

P.
I.

i.

if^a,
1.

2.

yiHVr,

3.

ipbfz,

4.

^3f:,
5.

5.

37:,
6.

6.

^n,

7.

^r:,
8.

8.

^r,

9.

i.WJ?rt,
ij'Ul^,

2.^5^, 3-'l^<
1.

4-^J3^*

^TJ7,

^TT,

7.W?pr,

O.

J51^ifi,

2.

"jfT, 3.
Trtr,

"5^

ii

or ff^frf, P. F.

frftur or

B.

J[m\

Pf. inf%, I A. v?nff?^or v^nn^, Pt. 77: n Pass, -^nr, Aor. ^nrff, Caus.

^Hpf, 9. F.

Aor. Wdrt

or <Wffli, Des.

fflflflMfrt

or fdi^frf, Int.

III. 209.
or
(or

Atmanepada Verbs.
indh, to kindle, (fa^ft.)
I.

^, 1."^ or"Vv, ^, Pan. i. 2, 6),

^um, Caus.

O.^rhr,
Des.

i.^A,

.^T,

.^f

or

Pf.
n

I A. VfV*, F.
nrfff,

^n^T,

P. F. ^ftmr, B.

^nrfr

Pt. ^f: n Pass,

APPENDIX
On
i.

II.

the Accent in Sanskrit.

is

Although in Sanskrit the accent

marked

in

works belonging to the Vedic period

only, yet its importance as giving a clue to

many

generally acknowledged that even an elementary

least the general outlines of the

of grammar is now so grammar would seem imperfect without at

difficult points
I

system of Sanskrit accentuation.

to

determined therefore
it

in this

new

edition of

my grammar

mark

the accent in

all

cases where

seemed to be

but in order not to perplex the beginner with the marks of accent, I have added them in the transliterated words only, so that a student may still learn his grammar
practically useful,

and

his paradigms in Devanagari,

unconcerned about the accents, until the accents themat a glance to see cause

selves attract his notice,

and enable him

and
if

effect in

grammatical

operations which otherwise would remain unintelligible.

Thus

we look

at trdyah, tres,

but tuddmi,

but imdh, we go ; at bddhdmi, I know, but uktdh, spoken, we see at once how the position of the accent, either on the radical syllable or on the termination, influences the strengthening

but

tribhih, tribus,

and

tritiya, tertius

at emi, I go,

I strike

at vdktum, to speak,

or weakening of the base, and

rational
2.

how

this strengthening

and weakening rested

originally

on a

and

intelligible principle.
is

The accent

called in Sanskrit Svara,

i.

e.

tone,
it

of native grammarians there can be no doubt that

actual rising and falling of the voice, produced

was

and according to the description It meant the really musical.

opening of the vocal chords;

corresponded to what we
call

it

by the tension, the relaxation, and the widewas a musical modulation peculiar to each word, and it

the singing or the cantilena of the speaker, which, though in

modern languages most

perceptible in whole sentences,

may

also

be clearly perceived in

the utterance of single words.

Ex. Maria!

Ma
Whatever the accent became

ri

^F=L a

but

Ma
name

ry.
i.

in later times, its very

it

of prosodia, accentits,

e.

by-

song, shows that in Greek and Latin, too,

oxys,

was

originally musical, that tonos

meant

pitch,

ally to the sign of the circumflex,

high pitch, barys, low pitch, and that perispomenos, drawn round, did not refer originbut to the voice being drawn up and down in pronouncing
syllable.

a circumflexed
3.

For grammatical purposes we have to distinguish in Sanskrit two accents only, the uddtta and the svarita. The uddtta is pronounced by raising the voice, the svarita by a

combined raising and

are called anuddtta,
i.

falling of the voice.

e.

All vowels which have neither of these accents

without uddtta, though they might with equal justice be called

asvarita, without the svarita.

vowel,

is

The anuddtta, immediately preceding an uddtta or svarita sometimes called anuddttatara or sannatara*. (Pan. i. 2, 29-31.)
p. LVIII), calls this accent sannatatara, as if

Bopp, following Professor Roth (Nir.

;

from

sannata, depressed

it is,

however, derived from sanna, the participle of sad, to sink.

;.

ON THE ACCENT IN SANSKRIT.

I

287

In transliterated words
circumflex.

mark the

uddtta by the acute, the original svarita by the

Every

syllable without either the

;

mark of

uddtta or svarita has to be considered as

syllable before

grammatically unaccented

and an unaccented
If the unuddtta

an uddtta or original

starita,

as phonetically anuddttatara.

must be marked

in transliterated words, it
t

can be marked by the grams.

anuddtta.
If the

Thus

in tt avardhanta, they grew,

te

has the uddtta, a the

two words coalesce into

'vardhanta, then e takes the svarita, tf 'vardhanta.

Similarly, srucht+\va
4.

become sruch?va; tri+ambakam become trySmbakam.

:

In Sanskrit the accents are indicated in the following way The uddtta is never indicated at all, but only the svarita, (whether original or dependent,) and the anuddttatara (sannatara), i. e. the anuddtta immediately preceding an uddtta
or svarita syllable.

The

sign of the svarita

is

that of the anuddttatara

is

__.

Whenever we

find a syllable
if left

the next syllable,

marked by _, the sign of the anuddttatara, we know that without any mark, is uddtta; if marked by , it is svarita.
R*U
f
is

Hence ^f'it

is

agnfh,

kanyd

A monosyllabic word, if uddtta, has no mark at all. A monosyllabic word, if anuddtta, is marked by A monosyllabic word, if svarita, is marked by
.

Ex. ft ydh,

nu.

Ex. ^t vah, Ex.

T nah.
But
what
is
if

*&

svdh.

5.

As a general

rule every

word has but one

or svarita, the syllable either uddtta

rest of the syllables being anuddtta.

syllable is followed

Any

syllable

may have
is

the accent.
into

an uddtta
called the

by an anuddtta

syllable, its

anuddtta

changed

is

dependent svarita.

Ex. VlOtHl agnind.

is

Here

^^ ag,
is

originally anuddtta,

pronounced

and marked

as anuddttatara; f^T ni

uddtta,

and

therefore without any mark; TT ndf

originally anuddtta,

becomes

svarita,

and

is

marked accordingly.

In transliteration this

dependent svarita need not be marked, nor the anuddttatara.

anuddtta,
i.

Both may be treated as

e.

without grammatical accent, while their exact pronunciation in Sanskrit, to be

is

described hereafter,
6. If

of importance to Vedic scholars only.

a word standing by itself or at the head of a sentence begins with several anuddtta

syllables, they

have

all

to be

marked by the sign of anuddttatara. Ex.

'MI^Mi

dpnuvdnah ;

S<V"i4l hridayydyd.
7.

By

of any word in Sanskrit.

in Sanskrit
1.
:

observing these simple rules, no doubt can remain as to the grammatical accent The following is a list of the principal classes of accented words

word consisting of one

J nu,

syllable

which has the uddtta,

is

called uddtta.

Ex. T

yah,

^ kdm.
has the uddtta on the last syllable,
is

2.

A word which

called antoddtta.

Ex. *tT'^: agnty,

^ifarti janitd.
3.

A word

which has the uddtta on the

first syllable, is called

ddyuddtta.

Ex.

(ndrafi,

^tlft hdtd.
4.

A word which has the

uddtta on the middle syllable,

is

called madhyoddtta.

Ex. *d*nni

agn{nd, ^fir*ffil agnibhih.

5.

A
A

word consisting of one

Ex. 1$ kva,

syllable

which has the original

svarita, is called svarita.

svah.
original

6.

word which has the

Ex. cnq| kanyd.

svarita

on the

last

syllable,

is

called antasvarita.

288
7.

ON THE ACCENT IN SANSKRIT.

which has the original svarita on the middle

8-

A word A

syllable, is called madhyasvarita.

8.

Ex. <J^i<4i hridayyayd. word which has the original svarita on the

first

syllable,

is

called

ddisvarita.

Ex.
9.
10.

T3"*!]R

svarnare.

A word without uddtta or svarita, is called sarvdnuddtta. Ex. ^t vah, Tt nah. A word with two uddtta syllables, is called dviruddtta; i^tHPit: brihaspdtih. Here
first syllable is

the

uddtta,

and

is

therefore not

marked

at

all.

The second

syllable is
is

anuddtta, and according to rule would become svarita.

But
is

as the next syllable

uddtta again, the anuddtta becomes anuddttatara, and

third syllable
is

marked accordingly.

The

uddtta,

and the

last, originally

anuddtta, becomes svarita.

In msfNtjxuT mitrdvdrunau, the

first syllable is

anuddtta, but becomes anuddttatara, because

an uddtta follows.
of

The second

syllable is uddtta, so is the third,

and hence neither

them has any mark.

it

The fourth
The

syllable, being anuddtta, becomes svarita,

because
is left

follows an uddtta.

last syllable is

anuddtta and, as nothing follows,

without a mark.
syllables, is called triruddtta ;

11.

A word with three uddtta

8. If

^^ii^tflin indrdbnhaspdti.

words.
syllable,

words come together in a sentence, the same rules apply to them as to single Thus if a word ending in uddtta is followed by a word beginning with an anuddtta the anuddtta syllable is pronounced as svarita. Thus *K ^, i. e. yah -j- cha, where the mark of the dependent svarita on

become

*P5T ydscha,

+ ^ cha

shows that

*T

ya

has the uddtta.

If a

word ending

in

an anuddtta

is

followed by a word beginning with an uddtta or

.

svarita, the anuddtta becomes anuddttatara.

Ex.

vt*in*i^ djanayat

+F

tarn

become

^I*1l*m djanayat tdm. If a word ending in a

svarita, which replaces an original anuddtta, is followed by another word having the uddtta on the first syllable, the general rule requires the svarita, being originally an anuddtta, to become anuddttatara, so that we have to write *T5T Jft^yds cha tat.

Here we
it it

see that *K yah has the uddtta, because otherwise, at the beginning of a sentence, would have to be marked with anuddttatara. As cha has the anuddttatara, we see that

was

originally anuddtta,

and became anuddttatara, because the next

syllable Jfi^tdt has the

uddtta, which need not be marked.

If instead of FIT tdt,

which has the uddtta, we put ^I hydh, which has the

svarita,

we should
first,

have to write
*?h

*P3T

^h

yds cha hyah, the sign of the svarita on

it

^K hydh showing

that

hyah cannot be uddtta, for in that case

syllable
;

would have no mark, and would require svarita

it

on the next following

and secondly, that

after a final uddtta,

cannot be anuddtta, for in that case

it

could not be preceded by an anuddttatara.

If
is

an original svarita follows

it

retains the sign of the svarita, but

it

then impossible to say whether that sign marks the original or the dependent svarita.
SBHilJI ffi

Ex.

dtmd+kva (Rv.
(see

would remain
If a

I. 164, 4). Only, if an uddtta followed after Hi kva, while the dependent svarita would become anuddttatara. 9),

its

svarita

word such

as

^^Ijf^HJ

arunayugbhih, having the uddtta on yug, stands by

itself, it

must have the anuddttatara

sign, not only

under TO na, which immediately precedes the

uddtta syllable, but likewise under

^a

and

^ ru.

But

if

preceded by

-stfri: agnih,

which
at all,

has uddtta on the

last,
its

the

first syllable

takes the svarita, the second requires no

mark

and the third keeps

anuddttatara

mark ;

'^Tfri^sTOjJ'foT: agnir arunayugbhih.

-$IO.

ON THE ACCENT IN SANSKRIT.

289

If instead of -wflq; agnih

uddtta on the
is

first syllable,

we put 3ft tndram, which has the dependent narita on the last, then we write 45*<*>^f4: indram arunayHgbhih, because there

no necessity for marking the anuddtta after a syllable which has the dependent narita. 9. If an original narita is followed by an uddtta or by another original narita, it would be difficult to mark the accent. Thus if kva, which has the original narita, is followed

by TT&

tdtra,

we could not

write either

9 B !GJ( or B
TJi

TTjfr.

In the former case

we should

lose

the anuddttatara required before every uddtta and independent narita; in the Utter, the
sign of the original svarita being dropt,

kva would be taken for an anuddtta syllable.

To

obviate this, the numeral ^

is

inserted, which takes both the narita and the anuddttatara

marks *, UiS K^", and thus enables us to

td in tdtra
is

indicate

what was wanted,

viz. that

kva

is

narita, and

uddtta.

Ex.

^TO +

T^: become TcRQ^^t:; ^fc

+ ^rt

become Bf*lTtf

(Rv.

i.

105, 3).

If the

and the anuddttatara

^Wn4t
-f-

vowel which has the original svarita is long, the numeral \ is used instead of is marked both beneath the vowel and the numeral. Thus Rv. 1. 105,
Rv.
1.

%
7.

^Kl become ^TTvft^^Tt.

7. Trgj:

157, 6. T5*rf

+ 4J"Jfat = T**n^ vi^fot.

Here kvo and 'ddhfn have the

Rv. x. 116,

+ ^ETfe-f ^5

become "TOt^s^ffj.

svarita, the first is

Rv. x. 144,

4.

marked by T^t^, the second by ^sjff. IK + ^T^h become ^ft^s^n J. This sinking of the
is

voice, as here indicated,

from the highest svarita to the lowest anuddttatara pitch

10. If

called kampa, shaking.

two vowels

at the

end and beginning of words coalesce into a new vowel,

:

their

respective accents are

1.

changed according to the following rules

(Prat. 197).
fc

Uddtta+uddtta
jushdndpa.

= uddtta

Ex.

4-

2.

3.

4.

= uddtta. Ex. ^TT + ^f^ = ^fi /-ftfttss&i. See exception b. Ex. *?V + ^* = HV<Ffr mddhu + udaAnuddtta -f anuddtta = anuddtta (Prat. 198). kdm = mddhudakam. + ^^^ = WK^^^ prdti + adrifran = prdtyadrisra*. Anuddtta+uddtta^uddtta. Ex. ^ + WT = ^T <ndra+d= indri.
Uddtta-}- anuddtta
irfTf

W^ +

^H = ^

JMI4UI

TR= *JMHUlM

jushdni-\-upa-=.

tai

apsu+d= apsvd.

Ex.

^ + ^= H^

*t?a -f ft
i.

6.

Svarita+ anuddtta

^, = svarita. Ex. li + f^ = ^i^T?ft kva+idd'nfm = kvedd'nfm (Rv. 35,

i.

adyutye-\-dvase=.adyuty6'vase (Rv.

112, 24).

*pa+ica

7).

There
a.

are,
i

however, some exceptions

coalesces with anuddtta
t,

If uddtta

the long
If,

takes soarita (Prat. 188, 199).

first

Ex.
t is

^ = ^^t'^ srucM+iva = sruchfva.

contraction takes uddtta.
6. If

however, the

or second

long, the

Ex. ff + f = ^f M+tm=hlm (Rv. x. 45, 4).

an uddtta vowel becomes semivowel before an anuddtta vowel, the anuddtta vowel

becomes svarita
*

(Prat. 188).

Ex. *ffat

+ + 5$ = *ftn f^TJ y#a+nw+iWra =

J

y^'<f

Some MSS.

write

t Professor
is

Bopp (Grammatik,
first syllable

anuddttatara and svarita.

that in rdthyebhih the

In this case we should have to write

has the uddtta.

followed by of 30, 5) gives this as an instance ^svarita rlt TT*zrfa:. But the fact

is

I The statement of Professor Benfey (Grammar, 2nd not marked is against the authority of the MSS.

ed., p.

n)

that the second narita

pp

290
nvmdra.
Also,

ON THE ACCENT IN SANSKRIT;

IIhydsya (Rv.
i.

^+
is

+ ^T^T = JJWT

i3*f evd+hi+asya

= evd

8, 8).

T^

nadt, plur. T?h nadyah, but gen. sing. T?nt nadydh, because in the former
originally anuddtta, in the latter uddtta.

the termination
c.

If

an uddtta
Ex.

e or o coalesces

W + ^raVff = "ffS^Pkhf

with an (elided) anuddtta

a, it

takes svarita (Prat. 188).

te+avardhanta =

te

\ardhanta.

According to Mandukeya all uddtta vowels coalescing with another anuddtta vowel, become svarita. This is also the case in certain Brahmanas ; see Kielhorn, Bhashikasutra,
I. 5.

The

accents produced by the coalescence of vowels have the following technical names,

taken from the

1.

name

of the Sandhi that gave rise to

them

Praslishta, the accent of

two vowels united

into one (samdvesa, ektbhdva).

is

2.

Abhinihita, the accent of

two vowels of which the second

first

the elided

a.

3. 4.

Kshaipra, the accent of two vowels of which the

has been changed into a semivowel.

separated by consonants from the

Tairovyanjana, the svarita, replacing an anuddtta,

if

preceding uddtta.
5.

Ex.

ft

i*jQa agnim

ile.

Vaivritta (or padavritta], the svarita, replacing

an anuddtta,
a/ 2/

if

separated by an hiatus

from the preceding uddtta

6. Jdtya,

(Prat. 204).

Ex.

1^

indra*.

It is always the svarita in the body of a word, also called nitya, inherent. in the history of Sanskrit in which preceded by either y or v, and points to a period

these semivowels retained something of their vowel nature.

as medial kshaipra;

It

may, in

fact,

be treated

and

it is

important that where the peculiar pronunciation of the

different svaritas is described, that of the jdtya

and the kshaipra

is

said to be identical

(Vaj. Prat.
ii.

I.

125).

By

applying these rules

we can with

perfect certainty discover

which

syllable in

each word has the grammatical accent, whether uddtta or svarita. Unfortunately many words lose their accent in a sentence, particularly the verb which, in a direct sentence, is
considered as a mere enclitic of the
conditional sentences, or

noun

to which
sentence,

it

when a verb begins a

belongs. Only in relative and and under some other restrictions

retain its independent accent.

which are

fully described

by native grammarians, does the verb

Vocatives also lose their accent, except at the beginning of a sentence,

accent on the
first syllable f.

when they have

the

With

these exceptions, however, every student, by following

is

the rules here given, will be able to determine what

the real grammatical accent of any

* Besides the tairovyanjana

and the

vaivritta,

which we should
authorities.

call
if

the dependent

svarita, other subdivisions are mentioned by

some

Thus
is

compound words

are divided (in the Padapatha)

by the avagraha, the tairovyanjana

is

called tairovirdma.

svarita preceded

first half ending in a an uddtta, the svarita is by an uddtta, and the second half beginning with called tdthdbhdvya. Here ta is uddtta, nu is svarita, then follows the Ex.

Ex. *ftStim g6 'patau.

If a

word

divided in the Padapatha, the

TTrJ^Scflffi^.

avagraha or pause of division, and after that na, which

is

again uddtta.

Here a kind of

kampa takes
is

place,

and the svarita

first

is

marked accordingly.

Though

the
it is

name tdthdbhdvya
meant
for
is

not mentioned in the

Pratisakhya, the peculiar accent which

fully

In the commentary on the Vaj. Prat. (120) it would perhaps be better to write asamhitdvat instead of svasamhitdvat j Weber, Ind. Stud. vol. iv. p. 137.
described in Sutra 212.

t See Bhashika-sutra,
Sprachforschung, vol.
I.

ed. Kielhorn, II. 1-31;

Whitney, in Beitrage zur vergleichenden

p. 187.

-J

12.

ON THE ACCENT IN SANSKRIT.

in the

291

word occurring
svarita in the

hymns

of the Rig-veda.
is

The system of marking the uddtta and

Satapatha-Brahmana Weber's introductory remarks, and

Bhashika-sutras.

slightly different, as

may be

seen from Professor

particularly

from Dr. Kielhorn's learned notes on the

12. Quite different from the determination of the grammatical accent is the question the accents should be pronounced or intoned in a sentence, and particularly in the hymns and Brahmanas of the principal Vedas. This question concerns the student of the

how

Veda
be

only,

and

different authorities differ

on

this point.

The

following short remarks

must

sufficient.

(in in/tiff a

low ;

According to the Rig-veda-Pratisakhya (187 seq.), the uddtta is high, the of the svarita one portion is higher than uddtta, the rest like uddtta, except

if

an uddtta or svarita follows, in which case the voice sinks

is

down

to the anuddtta pitch.

This sinking down

called kampa, shaking.

All anuddtta syllables, following after svarita

is

(whether original or dependent) are pronounced with uddtta pitch (195), except the last, which followed again by either uddtta or svarita, and takes the low pitch of anuddtta (196). This

is called the Prachaya accent (205). have therefore only three kinds of pitch, (no special anuddttatara pitch being recognized in the Pratis'akhya,) which in their relative position may be represented by

pronunciation of anuddtta syllables with uddtta pitch

We

anuddtta,

uddtta,
*TT

svarita,

prachaya.

Thus

in *II^M*S
is

^*OT mdddyasva
is

svarnare,

md is

anuddtta,

^dais

uddtta,

^ ya

is

svarita,

anuddtta, ^T^svar

svarita, *!TC nare,

both anuddtta, but pronounced

like uddtta.

ma

JJ J*ggj
J
d<

J*3
ya

J*J

sva

svar

nare.

In "f^*<M*irflMUfrft ddabdhapramatir vdsishthah, TO a

is

uddtta,

^W

dab
^T

is
is

svarita,

dhaprama are anuddtta, but pronounced

sish is svarita, 7!

like uddtta, fit

ti is

anuddtta,

ra

uddtta,

^a$

is

anuddtta, but pronounced as uddtta.

P
Other Sfokhas vary
Pratis'akhyas.

O
d
dab

j
tir

dha pra ma

vd

sish

(hah.

in the pronunciation of the accents, as

may be

seen from their respective

confusion has been caused by mixing up these different systems, and, in particular, by trying to reconcile the rules of the Rig-veda-Pratis'akhya with the rules of Panini. According to Panini (i. 2, 29 seq.) the uddtta is high, the anuddtta low, but the
svarita
is half high and half low, and the anuddttas following after svarita (original or dependent) are pronounced monotonously (ekafruti), while the last of them, immediately

Much

Long

after this

was written
vol.

saw Dr. Haug's description of the accents

in the

Zeitschrift der

D. M. G.

xvn.

p. 799.

He

gives the intervals

much
e.

smaller, so that if

the anuddtta
right,
it is

is c,

the uddtta would be d, and the svarita would rise to

This

is

no doubt

and

it

will

be easy to transcribe

my own

notation accordingly.

clearer to the eye.

What

is

very important, as confirming

my

only retain it because view, is Dr. Haug's

difference

remark that in listening to the recitation of the Pandits he could not perceive any between the uddtta and the anuddttas if pronounced with prachaya svara.

P p 2

292

ON THE ACCENT IN SANSKRIT.

12.

preceding a new uddtta or svarita, is lower than anuddtta, and hence called sannatara or, by the commentators, anuddttatara. This system, too, though different from the former, gives

us only three kinds of musical pitch, which

may be

approximately represented by

anuddttara,

anuddtta,

uddtta,

svarita,

ekafruti.

Ekafruti is described as without any definite pitch (traisvarydpavdda), and might therefore be intended for mere monotonous recitative*.

* It

is

commonly used

as

synonymous with prachita;

e.g. uddttamayam pracJiitam

ekasrutiti

parydyah, Vaj. Prat. iv. 138.

INDEX OF NOUNS.
NOTE
The
figures refer to the
,

not to the page.

akkd, mother, 238.

akshi, eye, 234.

dpahj water, 149,

is,

an.

blessing, 172.
face, 214.

^P w^agnimath,
^M fn

fire-kindling, 157.

i,

ijv atichamu, better than an army, 227.

atilakshmt, better than

dsya, face, 214.

n, 203.
*/,

Lakshmi,

227.
'sfrt,
,

such, 174.

better than a

woman, m.f.,

229.

-iyas, 206.

eating, 182.

3<*^\\*{uktha6ds, reciter of hymns, 177.

<j
<;

n, 191.

<*

udaka, water, 214.

(,

anadud, ox, 210.

anaroan, without a foe, 189.
^st

upward, northern, 181.

water, 214.
unnf, leading out, 221.

anehas, time, 168.

TSF^^anvach, following, 181.

^n^o/), water, 211.

updnah, shoe, 174.

y,

nom. prop.,

169.

SwfWni ambikd, mother, 238.

,

ushnih, a metre, 174.

urj, strength, 161.

fire,

149.

aryaman, name

of a deity, 201.

ritvij, priest,

161.
195.

w5i^an?a,
vHf^arflaw,

horse, 189.

^J^J^*^ ribhukshin, Indra,

^T$>T kakubh, region, 157.
lrfw kati,

hurting, foe, 189.

priest, 163.

^HiMi^ avaydj,

how many,
(,

231.

^WM-<I avdch, south, 180.

avt,
f.

nail, 221.

not desiring, 225.

blood, 214.
blood, 161, 214.
UTiT

kavi, poet, 230.

kdnta, beloved, 238.

;,

ifHT kdntd, fern,

t'yaf,

beloved, 238.
?

xt^

asthi,

bone, 234.

How much
f.

190.

vf^

ahan, n. day, 196.

at the

kir, scattering, 164.

Tf^-aAan, day,
197, 198.
vi^'iiijr

end of a compound,

kudhi,

m.

a bad thinker, 221.

girlish, 227.

kumdri, m.
kri,

ahargana, month, 196.

,

m.

f.

buying, 220.
curlew, 159.

soul, self, 191, 192.

i,

294
kroshtu, jackal, 236.

INDEX OF NOUNS.
J

ddrdh, wife, 149.

khanj, lame, .163.

,

didhaksh, desirous of burning, 174.

iv "HpJT dis,
T dis,

heavier, 206.

and

^ dyu, sky, 213.

voice, 164.
,

showing, 174.
country, 174.

guardian, 157.
covering, 174.

duh, milking, 174.

duhitri, daughter, 235.
,

j^rO, OX, 2l8.

iftf^goraksh, cowherd, 174. %\mift grdmani, leader of a village, 221.
"*|flmt(

thunderbolt, 221.

seeing, 174.
,

chakds, splendid, 172.

worshipper, 162.

184. |o|,|Uj^ chakdsat, shining,

,

doshan, arm, 214.

desirous of acting, 172.

arm, 172, 214.

chitralikh, painter, 156.

dyu and fl^div, sky, 213.

WQl^jakshat, eating, 184.

TJ

tftdyo, sky, 219.

at, world, 184. Ii^ jag

^
205.
killed, 205.

druh, hating, 174.

jaganvas, having gone, 205.

jagmivas, having gone, 205.

'gT^ dvdr, door, 164.

dviddmnf, having two ropes, 194.

,

1 *i
f PH

^ jaghanvas, having killed,

*H jaghnivas,

hating, 174.
rich, 203.

having

^fnX dhanin,
VTJ
VT

RT jard,

old age, 166.

dhdtri, n. providence, 235.

m. f. a buyer of water, 221.

,

dhtj

m.f. thinkuig, 220.

f.

cloud, 158.

tf dM,

inteUect, 224.

*(\"Hi{jdgrat, waking, 184.

l|)iO dMvari, wife of a fisherman, 193.

,

'tt^taksh, paring, 174.

falling, 173.
river, 225.

n-tsfn takshan, carpenter, 191.

iffrf tati,

nadi,

f.

so many, 231.
f.

T1| naptri,

grandson, 235.

H^ft tantri,
inft tart,
f.

lute, 225.

T5T nas, destroying, 174.

boat, 225.

T^wa5, nose, 214.

f?r

iryach, tortuous, 181.

turdsdh, Indra, 175.

nah, binding, 174-

1l*it,

ndman, name, 191.

ndsikd, nose, 214.

r?^ tvach,
tvish,
,

skin, 158.

splendour,

74.

ninivas,

having

led, 205.

tooth, 214.
t,

nirjara, ageless, 167.

nri,

giving, 184.

man, 237. m. f. dancer, 222.

dadhi, curds, 234.

rish, bold, 174.

ft nau, ship, 217.

**'*f

<if danta, tooth, 214.

t,

nyacJi, low, 181.

poor, 184.
ti,

m., ^T^pangu, fern, lame, 230.

lord, 233.

ddtri, giver, 235.

,

rope, fern., 179, 193.

m, m. path, 195.

INDEX OF NOUNS.
foot, 214.

295

ironj brahman, creator, 193.

,

trfl papt,

m.

f.

protector, 222.

Your Honour,
,

188.

TTCRfft paramanl, m.f. best leader, 221.

physician, 161.

H (X 4 |l^ parivrdj, mendicant,

,

162.

*ft

/////,

f.

fear, 224.

leaf-shedding, 173.

being, 221.
f.

joint, 191.

earth, 224.

du t m.
-prfrf,

f.

n. pale, 230.

bhtir,

atmosphere, 149.

foot, 207.
foot, 214.
,

^Jl^

bhrijj, roasting, 162.

,

shining, 162.

lump-eater, 170.

bhrdtri, brother, 235.

i, f.

father, 235.
,

brow, 224.
Indra, 200.

desirous of maturing,

74.

*IM<\ maghavan,
f;',

w, wishing to read, 171.

diving, 161.
187.

ifa$ pilu, m.
,

n. a tree

and

its fruit,

230.
194.

fat, fern.

ntaO pioari,

matt, thought, 230.

u, re-born, 221.
,

mathin, churn ing-stick, 195.

man, (pums), 212.

madhulih, bee, 174.

191.

town, 164.
,

Indra, 168.
,

great, 186.

an

offering, 176.

meat, 214.

name
army, 214.

of a deity, 201.

*rNf mdthsa, meat, 214.

t,

mother, 235.

*pTTT pritand, army, 214.

f,

month, 214.

deer, 185.
,

muh, confounding, 174.

,

having cooked, 205.

;,

head, 191.

prajdpati, lord of creatures, 233.

cleaning, 162.
f.

pratidivan, sporting, 192.

,

mridu, m.

n. soft, 230.

western, 181.

an, liver,
ri'f,

214.

HVfl"

pradhi, m.f. thinking eminently, 221.

fern.,

liver,

214.

223.

sacrificing, 162.
sacrificer, 192.

quieting, 178.

Ttt^prdch, eastern, 180.

Ufa ya<,
,

as
f.

many, 231.
road, 222.

W&prdchh,

asking, 160, 174.

worshipping, 159.
badi, dark fortnight, 149.

young, 199.
pea-soup, 214.
kings, 194.
,

having
l

many

pea-soup, 214.
shining, 162.
,

? W *4^H bahusreyast, auspicious, 227.

very strong, 161.

^^T bahurj,
,

king, 191.

knowing, 157.
t,

rajftf,

queen, 193.

great, 185.

light, 158.

296
ruj, disease, 161.

INDEX OF NOUNS.
uddhadhi, a pure thinker, 221.
sufruvas, having heard, 205.
sushki, 222.

^^ ^^ rush,

rurudvas, crying, 204.

anger, 174.

"^ rai, wealth, 217.

lakshmi,
laghu,
f.

^TT

sri, f.

happiness, 224.

goddess of prosperity, 225.

n. light, 230.

dog, 199.

m.

f.

svetavdh and

HJrHt^ svetavas, 209.

fro?
<g

lih,

licking, 174.
f.

year, 149.

lu,

m.

cutting, 220.

^rf^T

sakthi, thigh, 234.

vanij,
t,

merchant, 161.

sakhi, friend, 232.

us, friend, 172.
!

187.
,

f.

wife, 225.

sadhryach, accompanying, 181.

,

191.
J

right, 181.

varshdh, rainy season, 149.

,

j, sovereign, 162.

frog, 221.

sarvasak, omnipotent, 155.

sdnu, ridge, 214.

-vas, part, perfect, 204.

vdch, speech, 158.

tufa sdmi,
J

half, 149.

vdtapramt, antelope, 222.

^T^! vdr, water, 164.

sikatdh, sand, 149.

sukhi,
Tf

wishing for pleasure, 222.

nft

vdri, water, 230.

sugan, ready reckoner, 154.

carrying, 208.
,

suchakshus, having good eyes, 165.

is,

knowing, 205.
a river, 174.
,

well-lighted, 165.

suti,

wishing for a son, 222.

,

drop of water, 174.

well-sounding, 170.

f^RJTT vibhrdj, resplendent, 162.

vaksh, desirous of saying, 174.
iviksh, wishing to enter, 174.
? vis,

sudhi,

m.

f.

having a good mind, 226.

zs,

well- walking, 170.

m.

f.

having good brows, 226.

entering, 174.

sumanas, well-minded, 165.

susri, well-faring, 221.

msvapd, all-preserving, 239.

visvardj, universal

monarch, 162.

susakhi, a

good

friend, 232.

visvasrij, creator, 162.

ish,

suhimsf well-striking, 172.

ordure, 174.
.

*J^ suhrid,
/,

friendly, 157.

vishvach, all-pervading, 181.

vrikshalu, tree-hewer, 222.
risck, cutting, 159.

creating, 162.

somapd,
stri,

Soma
228.

drinker, 239.

woman,

3(h^ sakan,
it,

ordure, 214.

snih, loving, 174.

ordure, 214.

snu, ridge, 214.

sankhadhmd, shell-blower, 239.

,

spueing, 174.
is,

commanding,
f.

184.

touching, 174.

suchi,

m.

n. bright, 230.

;,

a garland, 161.

suddhadhi, thinking pure things, 221.

sras, falling, 173.

INDEX OF NOUNS.

297

sruch, ladle, 158.

sv ay am, self, 149.

killing, 202.

green, 157.
hdhd, 240.
hi
i'l,

^svayambhu,

self-existing, 221.

svar, heaven, 149.

svasri, sister, 235.
,

heart, 214.

hridaya, heart, 214.

having good water,

an.

lirt, f.

shame, 224.

INDEX OF VERBS,
NOTE
The number
refers to the

number of each verb

in the

Appendix.

to pervade, 37.
vf), 23.

ls,

to rule, 182.
to aim, 79.
,

fl/,

to go, to throw, (^ft

th,

to go, to worship, 17.

aftj,

to go,

6.

to anoint, 207.

T<^ ush,

to burn, 40.

ad, to eat, 162.

,

urnu, to cover, 191

ri, ri,

to breathe, 176. to go, 78.

to go, (^j'^arir ri

chhati), 49.

to go, 197.
ij,

ard, to go, to pain, 12.

,

to gain, 72.

to help, 92. to pervade, 147.

to grow, 68.

^,

kat , to rain, to encompass, 25.

as, to be, 173.

^IW

Aram, to love, 77.

,

dnchh, to stretch, 18.

,

to shine, 80.

to obtain, 146.

to cough, 81.
(

to

sit,

183.

it,

to cure, to bend,
,

f^l f*k

fif

chikitsati), 63.

vii^ dha, to speak, 190.

Aiuf,

in.

^t,togo,

171.
;

to strike, 6.

i,

to go

^nft adhi, to read, 186.

*ri, to do, 152.

ind, to govern, 13.

-nV, to cut,
rip, to

no,

107.

indh, to kindle, 209.

be able, 89, 87.

^9 ish,

to wish, 118, 31.

to furrow, 38. ^JT^ krishf

tksh, to see, 69.

^H^

krish, to trace, 106.

Qq

298
kri,

INDEX OF VERBS,
to scatter, 113.
to

grow weak,

158, 36, 105.

rft, to praise, 138.

*$jvar,
1

to suffer, 92.

WT kram,
jft kri, to

to stride, 30, 29.

7TEJ taksh, to

hew, 37.

buy, 153.
tire,

1T^ tan, to stretch, 148.

"HW^klam, to

29, 30, 130.

W^tap,
TfT
tarn,

to burn, 28.

tpff fcsfom, to
T5f*T

kill,

149.

to languish, 130.
(fii

ksham, to bear, 130.

Arsfo',

fcnrft)',

to forbear,
1

fd Hf ft titikshate), 75, 63.

f^T

to wane, to diminish, 24.

to
kill,

*w,

to grow,

70.

fop^fo^m,

150.

]J^ tud, to strike, 104.

l[*{trip,

khad> to eat, 8.
to dig, 95.

to delight, 127, 38.

kill,

^^ khan,

to Jf^ trih,
TT tri,

208.

f^

khid, to vex, 107.

to cross, 61.
i,

^3TT khya, to proclaim, 166.

to be ashamed, 74.
to tremble, 30.

Trf gad, to speak, 9.

',

TFR 0aw, to go, 33, 31.

c|"<?

rM, to cut, 30.

92.

TT

5-0,

to go, 83.
to protect, 26, 63.

r^ tvar, to hurry,
<^

*n^Mp,

<f$T dams, to bite, 62, 73.

to hide, 97, 29. *J| guh>

*t gai, to sing, 44.

dad, to give, 70.

^
^T

dam, to tame, 130.

to take, 157, 105, ?T| #rA,

*"<% #?az,

^fin^T daridrd, to be poor, 179, 177.

to burn, 42. <^T dah,
rfa,

to droop, 43.

200. "5 $^w-class, 46, 47,

TTT ^r^ra, to smell, 54.

to give, 58. to give, 200.

^rafif diddmsati, to straighten, 63.

<^T c?a,

^3FT^

ckakds, to shine, 177.

^TJT chaksh, to speak, 181.

,

Trfw, to play, I2i.

rfl,

to pound, 137.

to decay, 154.

cJiam y to eat, 29

ift

dtdMy to shine, 177.

to milk,
1 88.

ohah, to pound, 137.

^A,

c^, to

collect, 137, 140.

to "^ c?n,
is,

observe, 120.
to see,

it^to think, 2.

(Vj(pa4) 48, 38t

chur, to steal, 136. chyut, to sprinkle, 3.

|
?T

dri, to tear, 156.

de, to protect, 85.

cMo, to
,

cut, 124.

c?, to cleanse, 46.

to eat, 177, 176.

^ c?ai, to
i,
;,

protect, 85.

aw, to spring up, 132.

Jdgri, to

to cut, 124. to shine, 86.

;,

wake, 178, 177.

*{ji, to excel, 36.

*t jri, to
,

to hate, 187.

grow
to

old, 123, 156.

',

to place, 201. to shake, 156.

i,

know, to make known,

137.

\dhu,

./na, to

know, 159.

to

warm,

27.

NDEX OF VERBS.
$ dhe,
to drink, 47.

299

TT md, to measure, 198.

VTT dhmd, to blow, 55.

,

TI^ man, nwfcfl

f*f

mtmdriuate, to search, 63.

to

hum, n.

mi, to throw, 154.

mirf,

t,

to bow, 32. to perish, 129, 117.

fa^

to be wet, 131. to sprinkle, 41.

ina

T*T?T rttiA,

nah, to bind, 135.

5T

*ft mf, to kill, 154.

niksh, to kiss, 15.

^^ much, to loosen,
*^
^
fS^
wiuA, to

107.

ny, to cleanse, 202.

nine?, to

be foolish, 128.

blame, 14.
122.

win, to die, 119.

wiry, to clean, 174.

p^nnV, to dance,
*nff

pan, to traffic, 26.

praise, 76.
fall,

OT mnd,

to study, 57. to go, 19.

mJTpan, to
,

^^mrwcA,

to

64.

1^

yaj, to sacrifice, 99.

to go, 133.
,

TP(yam, to stop, 31, 58.

,

to praise, 26, 76.

,

to feed, 137.

to see, 48.

to go, 165.

^T pd, to drink, 53.

's,

yu, to mix, 169.

)',

to form, 107.

to tinge, 62.

to purify, 156.

rad, to trace, 10.

>rT,

to

fill,

195, 156.

ram, to sport, 91.

;,

UC^prachh, to ask, 115, 105.

TITT

to shine, 94.
kill,
1

psd, to eat, 163.

phal, to burst, 34.
<tflHrUr) bfbhatsate, to loathe, 63.

^j ru, to go, to

84.

1R^

^j rw, to shout,

70.
76.

*V badh,

^j^ rud, to cry,

"^V bandh, to bind, 160.

to perceive, 134. to speak, 190.
j, to

?S^ rudh, to shut out, 203.

i,

to

kill,

39.

lash, to desire, 30.

'ip,

break, 206.

to paint, 109, 107. to break, 107.

bhi, to fear, 193.

,

>,

to be,

i.

"5 M, to cut, 156.

^J

6Ar, to cany, 199.

1

^T vach, to
[/,

speak, 175.

^R ^ bhrajj,

to fry, 105.

to go, 21.

WT bhram,
r
T

to roam, 30, 130.

racf,
>,

to speak, 66. to sow, to weave, 100. to go, 105.

6Ara&, to shine, 30.

6^Z5, to shine, 30.

mo;)',

to sink, 117.

^
^51
5.

val, to h've, 137.

1^ mad,
T^Twap,

to rejoice, 130.

vas, to desire, 167, 105.

*T^ manth, to shake, to churn,

to bind, 92.

^^t?as, to dwell, 65.

vah, to carry, 101, 93.

vichh, to go, 26.

TT ma, to measure, 164.

Q q

300
>y,
r

INDEX OF VERBS.
to separate, 202.
saw, to obtain, 151.
sah, to bear, 93.
sich, to sprinkle, 107.

<

vid, to find, 108, 107.

[^ vid, to

know, 172.

vish, to embrace, 202.

sidh,

to
7.

go,

and "ftW

sidh, to

com-

Tt vi,

see ^HTfl/.
;

mand,
Parasmaipada.

cri, to choose, 142

to serve, 82. r^sw,

*[vri,

to cherish, 161;
to be, 87.

Atmanepada.

to distil, 139. 1J SM,

"^H^vrit,

to bear, to bring/orth, 184.

sri,

^V vridh,
i,

to grow, 87.

to go, 50. to let

off,

to choose, 156.

rij,

116, 38, 48.

ve, to

weave, 102.

so, to finish, 125, 124.

vevi, to obtain, 177.

skand, to approach, 60.

TsfiH

^^

vyach, to surround, 105.

skambh, to support, 155.

^T^T vyath, to fear, to suffer pain, 90.

?,

^j

sku, 155.

to pierce, 126, 105.

^H"

skumbh, to hold, 155.

155.

\j,

to go, 22.
tO CUt, 112, 105.

WH stambh, to support,
to praise, 189. JsJ stu,

sak, to

be able, 144.

f^

stu, to praise, 170.

sad, to wither, 51.

i,

^^stumbh,
^5T stri,
^ff stri,

to stop, 155.

to cease, 130.
sisdmsati, to sharpen, 63.

to cover, 141. to cover, 156.

in, $() tyl 44 fri

?,

to

command,

180, 177.

styai, to

sound, 45.

sish, to distinguish, 204.

WT

s^^, to stand, 56.

is,

$ft s% to

lie

down, 185.

to touch, 114.

Sp^ s'ncZA,
Tfft s'o,

to hurt, 87.

syand, to sprinkle, to drop, 88, 87.

sriv, to go, to dry, 92.

to sharpen, 124.

^K^schut, to flow, 4.
TZnj^schyut,
<

svanj, to embrace, 73, 62.

,

to flow, 4.
tire,

to sleep, 176.
kill,

*5T*T

sram, to

130.
*TT

to

168.

frSf s'n,

to go, to serve, 98.

hd, to leave, 196.

to hear, 145.
?,

"H? hi, to go, to

grow, 143.
205.

to breathe, 176.

to "fi|^ hims,

kill,

fat s'w, to swell, 67.

J
<

hu, to sacrifice, 192.

CT shtyai, to sound, 45.

to spit, 35, 29. fy^shthiv,

*r^!

hurchh, to be crooked, 20.

hri, to take, 96.

hri, to

^^^shvashk,
afJ/,
f,

to go, 71.

"^

be ashamed, 194.

to stick, 62, 73.

3T hvri, to bend, 59.

3

to perish, 52.

hve, to call, 103.

N*.o1

BNDIKC

'

MAY3119B5

University of Toronto

Library

DO NOT REMOVE
THE

CARD

FROM
THIS

POCKET

Acme

Library Card Pocket

LOWE-MARTIN CO. LOOTED